The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About01 Upson Hall Lab 466_Drawings Indexed - inc addenda 01 Upson Hall Lab 466_Drawings Indexed - inc addenda.pdf Drawing List General G-000Cover Sheet G-001Code Compliance Plan & Notes Architectural A-000General Notes & Legends A-101Partial Fourth Floor Plans A-102Partial Plans & Lab Equipment Schedule A-420Interior Elevations A-601Details & Schedules A-602Specifications Plumbing P-100General Notes, Symbols List, Details & Floor Plans -Plumbing Mechancial M-000General Notes and Symbols -HVAC M-100Partial Fourth Floor Plans -HVAC M-200Control Schematics & System Summaries M-201Control Schematics & System Summaries M-300Details & Schedules -HVAC Electrical E-000Symbols List & General Notes -Electrical E-100Partial Fourth Floor Plan -Power & Special Systems E-101Partial Fourth Floor Plan -Lighting E-200Schedules -Electrical E-201Details -Electrical E-202Details II -Electrical These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions SWBR Project # 6/7/2021 1:29:12 PM B IM 360://20625.03 Cornell University Upson Hall Room 466/Upson Hall 466-ARCH-R20.rvt 20625.03 SDF Cover Sheet CRE AD/CRE G-000 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 June 1, 2021 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation 100% Construction Documents 20625.03 124 Hoy Rd Ithaca, NY 14850 Architect & Structural Engineer: SWBR 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604 585 232 8300 rochester@swbr.com Regional MapLocation Map Upson Hall Upson Hall Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing & Fire Protection Engineer: M/E Engineering 300 Trolley Blvd Rochester, NY 14606 585 288 5590 FE E2SE E2SE E2SE E2SE E2SE EXISTING 2HR RATED SHAFTWALL ASSEMBLY EXISTING EMERGENCY EYEWASH EXISTING ACCESSIBLE SINK (FRONT APPROACH) ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT WORKSTATIONS COLLAPSIBLE WATER DAM POWER-OPERATED SLIDING DOOR DASHED LINES DENOTES EMERGENCY SWING OPERATION IN EVENT OF POWER FAILURE ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT WORKSTATIONS 223 SF MAKER SPACE 466A 552 SF LAB 466 CLASSIFICATIONS OF BUILDING, AS SPECIFIED IN THE 2020 EDITION OF THE BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE ARE AS FOLLOWS: BUILDING DATA AND CODE COMPLIANCE BUILDING DATA: CONSTRUCTION CLASSIFICATION: BUILDING OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION: FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM: RENOVATION AREA: CONTROL AREA: EXISTING FLOOR ASSEMBLY: 1B (ASSUMED) B -BUSINESS, A-3 -ASSEMBLY FULLY SPRINKLERED 810 SF SOUTH WING (FOURTH FLOOR) EXISTING 2-HR FIRE BARRIER SEPARATION 2-HR FIRE-RATED ALTERATION CLASSIFICATIONS OF WORK, AS SPECIFIED IN THE 2020 EDITION OF THE BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE ARE AS FOLLOWS: ALTERATION -LEVEL 2: LEVEL 2 ALTERATIONS INCLUDE THE RECONFIGURATION OF SPACE, THE ADDITION OR ELIMINATION OF DOORS AND WINDOWS, THE RECONFIGURATION OR THE EXTENSION OF ANY SYSTEM, OR THE INSTALLATION OF ANY ADDITIONAL SYSTEM. LEVEL 2 ALTERATIONS SHALL ALSO COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF A LEVEL 1 ALTERATION. LEVEL 1 ALTERATIONS INCLUDE THE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OR THE COVERING OF EXISTING MATERIALS, ELEMENTS, EQUIPMENT, OR FIXTURES USING NEW MATERIALS, ELEMENTS, EQUIPMENT OR FIXTURES THAT SERVE THE SAME PURPOSE. CODE COMPLIANCE PLAN GENERAL NOTES 1. 2 3. CODE COMPLIANCE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO ASSIST IN THE PERMIT PROCESS AND TO PROVIDE GENERAL INFORMATION TO THE CONTRACTORS WITH RESPECT TO LIFE-SAFETY PROVISIONS OF THE PROJECT. THESE DRAWINGS SHOULD NOT BE USED TO DETERMINE THE SCOPE OF OTHER WORK SPECIFICALLY INDICATED ELSEWHERE IN THE DOCUMENTS. THESE DRAWINGS SHALL BE USED FOR THE LOCATIONS OF FIRE-RESISTANT RATED WALL CONSTRUCTION. THE FOLLOWING BUILDING AND ACCESSIBILITY CODES AND STANDARDS ARE APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT: A. 2020 BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE B. 2020 FIRE CODE OF NEW YORK STATE C. 2020 PLUMBING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE D. 2020 MECHANICAL CODE OF NEW YORK STATE E. 2020 FUEL GAS CODE OF NEW YORK STATE F. 2020 ENERGY CONSERVATION CONSTRUCTION CODE OF NEW YORK STATE G. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, NFPA 70, -2017 EDITION AS REFERENCED BY THE NYS CODES ABOVE. H. ICC A117.1, ACCESSIBLE AND USABLE BUILDINGS AND FACILITIES -2009 EDITION AS REFERENCED BY THE NYS CODES ABOVE. I. U.S. DEPARTMENT OF JUSTICE, 2010 AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT (ADA) STANDARDS FOR ACCESSIBLE DESIGN. REFERENCE FCNYS CHAPTER 33 FOR FIRE SAFETY PROVISIONS DURING CONSTRUCTION, DEMOLITION. CODE COMPLIANCE PLAN LEGEND INDICATES FIRE-RESISTANT WALL CONSTRUCTION OF VARIOUS TYPES AND HOURLY RATINGS. SEE FIRE-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION LEGEND. CPET = X'-X" COMMON PATH OF EGRESS TRAVEL (NOT TO EXCEED 100 FEET) EATD = X'-X" EGRESS ACCESS TRAVEL DISTANCE (NOT TO EXCEED 300 FEET) EXIT. MAINTAIN OPERATIONAL AT ALL TIMES DURING CONSTRUCTION FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FIRE EXTINGUISHER (BRACKET MOUNTED) ACCESSIBLE ELEMENT PER ANSI A117.1-2009 XX LAB XXX ROOM NAME FLOOR AREA (SF) E FEC FE FIRE RESISTANCE RATING SCHEDULE FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS CONSTRUCTION CLASSIFICATION TYPE 1B. DESCRIPTIONTEST REFERENCECOMMENTS FIRE RESISTANCE RATING STRUCTURAL FRAME INCLUDING COLUMNS, GIRDERS AND TRUSSES 2 (EXISTING)-EXISTING ASSEMBLY, PROTECTED STRUCTURAL STEEL INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR BEARING WALLS 2-FLOOR CONSTRUCTION INCLUDING SUPPORTING BEAMS AND JOISTS 2 (EXISTING)-EXISTING ASSEMBLY, POURED CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB ROOF CONSTRUCTION INCLUDING SUPPORTING BEAMS AND JOISTS 1 (EXISTING)-EXISTING ASSEMBLY LEVEL 2 ALTERATION WORK AREA E2 E2 E2 E2E2E2E2E2 E2E2 E2 E2E2 E2SEE2SE E2SE E2SE E2SEE2SE E2SE E 2SE E2SE E2SE E2SE E2SE E2SE CONTROL AREA (2 OF 2) CONTROL AREA (1 OF 2) CPET = 65'-4" EATD = 119'-2" G-001 2 E E E EXISTING CONTROL AREA SEPARATION FE FEC FE 223 SF MAKER SPACE 466A 552 SF LAB 466 FIRE-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION LEGEND DESCRIPTIONPLAN DESIGNATION FIRE WALL2FW 3FW FIRE BARRIER (HORIZONTAL EXIT, INCIDENTAL USE/HAZARD, OCCUPANCY SEPARATION) 1FB 2FB SHAFT ENCLOSURE (FIRE BARRIER AT ELEVATOR, STAIR OR MECHANICAL SHAFT) 1SE 2SE FIRE PARTITION (ELEV LOBBY & CORRIDOR WALL) 1FP PRESUMED EXISTING FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLIESPREFIX E. SEE NOTE 1 WHEN THE PREFIX "E" IS INDICATED ON THE CODE COMPLIANCE FLOOR PLAN, IT DENOTES EXISTING WALL CONSTRUCTION WITH A PRESUMED FIRE-RESISTANCE RATING OF THE TYPE INDICATED AS INDICATED ON RECORD DRAWINGS PROVIDED BY THE OWNER. THE ACTUAL CONDITIONS IN THE FIELD HAVE NOT BEEN VERIFIED TO CONFIRM COMPLIANCE. NEW PENETRATIONS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL LISTED THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRE STOP SYSTEMS FOR THE RATING INDICATED. NEW OPENINGS TO BE PROTECTED WITH OPENING PROTECTIVES FOR RATING INDICATED. PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE BUILT IN ACCORDANCE WITH U.L. LISTED AND FM APPROVED THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS. SEE CODE COMPLIANCE PLAN FOR FIRE-RATED PARTITIONS LOCATIONS. 2FW 3FW 1FB 2FB 1SE 2SE 1FP NOTES: 1. EE 2. These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:29:18 PM B IM 360://20625.03 Cornell University Upson Hall Room 466/Upson Hall 466-ARCH-R20.rvt 20625.03 SDF Code Compliance Plan & Notes CRE CRE G-001 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 Partial Fourth Floor Code Compliance Plan 1/16" = 1'-0" 1 Fourth Floor Code Compliance Plan SCREW FASTENER TO STUDS ONLY 2" x 20 GA. MIN DEEP LEG DEFLECTION TRACK CONT. LATERAL BRACE WITHIN 12" OF TOP TRACK 1 1/2 C.R. CHANNEL W/ 16 GA. CLIP ANGLE OR CONT. STRAPPING ON EA. SIDE STEEL STUD CUT STUDS 1" SHORT OF DECK OR BEAM GYPSUM BOARD -EXTEND TO TOP OF STUD ELEVATION UPPER PART OF FLUTED DECK UNDERSIDE OF FLUTED DECK OR BEAM AT FIRE -RATED PARTITIONS: CONSTRUCT DETAIL IN ACCORDANCE WITH U.L. LISTED FIRE-RESISTANT JOINT SYSTEMS (HW-D). PROVIDE DEFLECTION TRACK ASSEMBLIES, FORMING/ FILL MATERIALS AND GYPSUM LINED SHEET METAL RESTRAINING ANGLES AS REQUIRED BY APPROVED JOINT SYSTEM AT NON-RATED PARTITIONS & SMOKE PARTITIONS: FOR PARTITIONS CONTAINING SOUND BATT INSULATION FILL FLUTES OF DECK WITH BATT INSULATION AND SEAL BOTH SIDES WITH SEALANT 4" GYPSUM BOARD / METAL STUD SERIES PARTITIONS LEGEND INDICATES PARTITION TYPE INDICATES PARTITION HEIGHT ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR: "X" AFCPARTITION TO X" ABOVE FINISHED CEILING UFCPARTITION TO UNDERSIDE OF FINISHED CEILING X'-X"WHERE HEIGHT IS NOTED, CONSTRUCT WALL TO THAT HEIGHT INCLUDING TOP OF WALL CAP 7 1/4"6" CFMF AT 16" O.C. (1) LAYER 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD EACH SIDE. 1 HOUR FIRE RESISTANT RATED WHEN INDICATED (WITH OR WITHOUT INSULATION) PER UL U419 A6 XX * * A3 INDICATES PARTITION TYPE INDICATES ADDITIONAL SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS FOR ACOUSTICAL PURPOSES (REFER TO GENERAL PARTITION NOTES) A PARTITIONS WITH SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS: GYPSUM BOARD TO BE "TYPE X" UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ALL PARTITIONS ARE TO BE TO THE UNDERSIDE OF DECK UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED DIMENSIONS SHOWN FOR EACH PARTITION DESCRIPTION INDICATE FACE-TO-FACE THICKNESS OF MATERIALS LISTED FOR THAT PARTITION PROVIDE LISTED U.L. FIRE-RESISTANT JOINT ASSEMBLIES @ TOP OF ALL WALLS INDICATED TO BE FIRE-RESISTANT RATED THE TOP OF ALL PARTITIONS FRAMED AGAINST THE UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURES SHALL HAVE PROVISIONS FOR DEFLECTION & RESTRAINT, REFER TO DETAIL 1/A-000 REFER TO CODE COMPLIANCE PLANS FOR PARTITION FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS. GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT IN CONCEALED SPACES SHALL BE FIRE TAPED. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED IN A SPECIFIC UL DESIGN, JOINTS SHALL BE FIRE TAPED, AND JOINTS AND FASTENER HEADS COVERED WITH (1) COAT OF JOINT COMPOUND. BASE LAYERS IN MULTI-LAYER SYSTEMS ARE NOT REQUIRED TO HAVE JOINTS OR FASTENER HEADS TAPED OR COVERED WITH JOINT COMPOUND. GENERAL PARTITION NOTES: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. GENERAL NOTES: ALL GENERAL NOTES PERTAIN TO ALL ARCHITECTURAL (A-SERIES) DRAWINGS IN THIS SET PROVIDE CONCEALED STEEL STUD BLOCKING OR 4" x 18 GA CONTINUOUS STEEL STRAPPING ATTACHED TO FACE OF STUDS BEHIND ALL WALL MOUNTED ITEMS SUCH AS: WALL CABINETS, SHELVING, COAT RODS, GRAB BARS, HANDRAILS, TOILET ACCESSORIES, ETC. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & FURNITURE PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND SCOPE DIMENSIONS LOCATING INTERIOR PARTITIONS ARE TO THE FACE OF WALL (EXCLUDING FINISH MATERIALS SUCH AS -BUT NOT LIMITED TO: CERAMIC TILE, AND WOOD PANELING) UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. SEE PARTITION SCHEDULE FOR WALL THICKNESS ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS ARE APPROXIMATE AND FOR CONTRACTORS VERIFICATIONS. IF DISCREPANCIES ARISE, NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT (AND/OR CONSTRUCTION MANAGER) PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK THAT MAY BE EFFECTED BY THE DIMENSION CHANGE EVERY ATTEMPT HAS BEEN MADE TO INDICATE PERTINENT EXISTING UTILITIES AND CONDITIONS AS ACCURATELY AS POSSIBLE FROM EXISTING SURVEYS, DRAWINGS AND OTHER DATA. PRIOR TO THE BID OPENING, CONTRACTORS SHALL WALK THE JOB SITE AND SATISFY THEMSELVES TO EXISTING CONDITIONS. THE ARCHITECT SHALL BE CONSULTED WHEN ANY QUESTION ARISES RELATIVE TO MATERIALS NOT SPECIFICALLY SHOWN OR SPECIFIED ALL EXISTING WORK (CEILINGS, FLOORS, WALLS, PARTITIONS, FINISHES, ETC.) DISTURBED BY NEW CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL, SHALL BE PATCHED AND REPAIRED TO RESTORE SURFACES TO THE ORIGINAL CONDITION AFTER INSTALLATION OF OTHER WORK PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE BUILT IN ACCORDANCE WITH U.L. LISTED AND FM APPROVED THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS. SEE CODE COMPLIANCE PLAN FOR PARTITION LOCATIONS. PENETRATIONS THROUGH NON FIRE-RESISTANT RATED HORIZONTAL ASSEMBLIES, NOT PROTECTED BY A SHAFT ENCLOSURE, SHALL HAVE ITS ANNULAR SPACE FILLED WITH NON-COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL TO PREVENT THE PASSAGE OF FLAME, SMOKE FUMES, AND HOT GASES. NON-COMBUSTIBLE PENETRATING ITEMS SHALL NOT PENETRATE MORE THAN 3 FLOOR ASSEMBLIES. COMBUSTIBLE PENETRATING ITEMS SHALL NOT PENETRATE MORE THAN 1 FLOOR ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. PROVIDE SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS IN ALL CAVITY SPACES IN WALL FULL HEIGHT THICKNESS OF BLANKETS IN STUD WALLS SHALL BE EQUAL TO THICKNESS OF CAVITY TO NEAREST 1/2", UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE PARTITIONS TO BE SEALED @ THE PERIMETER, BEHIND CONTROL JOINTS, AROUND OPENINGS AND AT ALL PENETRATIONS WITH EACH LAYER OF BOARD TO RECEIVE A BEAD OF NON-HARDENING SEALANT SEE WALL TYPE DESCRIPTIONS FOR CONDITIONS REQUIRING MINERAL FIBER SAFING INSULATION BATTS 1. 2. 3. 4. REFER TO CODE COMPLIANCE PLAN(S) FOR PARTITIONS REQUIRED TO BE FIRE-RESISTANT-RATED CONSTRUCTION. These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:29:05 PM B IM 360://20625.03 Cornell University Upson Hall Room 466/Upson Hall 466-ARCH-R20.rvt 20625.03 SDF General Notes & Legends CRE AD/CRE A-000 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 AB Anchor bolt A/C Air condition(ing) (ed) ACC Accessible ACCU Air cooled condensing unit ACI American Concrete Institute ACT Acoustical ceiling tile ACM Asbestos containing material ACOUS PNL Acoustical panel ACS PNL Access panel ADDL Additional ADJ Adjustable, adjacent ADH Adhesive AFF Above finished floor AGGR Aggregate AHU Air handling unit AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute ALT Alternate ALUM Aluminum ANOD Anodized APPROX Approximate ARCH Architect(ural) ARD Auxillary roof drain ASD Allowable stress design ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWP Acoustical wall panel AWS American Welding Society BAT Batten B/B Back to back B BD Base board BCNYS Building Code of New York State BITUM Bituminous BD Board BLDG Building BLKG Blocking BM Beam, Benchmark BOT Bottom BR Bedroom BRG Bearing BRZ Bronze BSMT Basement BTWN Between BUR Built up roofing BW Both ways CCTV Closed circuit television CAB Cabinet CB Catch basin, Corner bead CH BD Chalkboard CEM Cement CF Contractor furnished CFMF Cold-formed metal framing CF/CI Contractor furnished/ Contractor installed CF/OI Contractor furnished/ Owner installed CG Corner guard CH Coat hook CI Cast iron CIP Cast in place, Cast iron pipe CJ Control joint CL Centerline CLG Ceiling CLO Closet CLR Clear, Color CMT Ceramic mosaic tile CMU Concrete masonry unit CNTR Counter CO Cleanout, Cased opening, Company COL Column CONC Concrete CONF Conference CONN Connect(ion) CONSTR Construction CONT Continue(ous) CONTR Contract(or) COORD Coordinate CPT Carpet C.R. Cold-Rolled CSJ Construction joint CSK Counter sunk CT Ceramic tile, Count, Current transformer CTR Center CW Cold water piping, Casement window CU Cubic CUH Cabinet unit heater CU YD Cubic yard D Deep, Depth D Penny (nail) db Bar diameter DBL Double DEFS Direct-applied exterior finish system DEG Degree DEMO Demolition DEPT Department DET Detail DF Drinking fountain DIA OR ø Diameter DIAG Diagonal, Diagram DIM Dimension DIFF Diffuser DIR Direction DISP Dispenser DIV Division DMPF Damp proofing DL Dead load DN Down DO Ditto DR Door, Drive DS Downspout DW Dishwasher DWVDrainage waste & vent DWGDrawing DWLDowel EEast EAEach EBCNYSExisting Building Code of New York State ECElectrical contractor EFEach face EIFSExterior insulation and finish system EJExpansion joint ELASElastomeric ELElevation ELECElectric(al) ELEVElevator EMEntry mat, Expanded metal EMEREmergency ENCLEnclosure ENGREngineer EOSEdge of slab EPElectric panel EQEqual EQUIPEquipment ESEmergency shower ETCEt cetera ETRExisting to remain EWEach way EWCElectric water cooler EXISTExisting EXCExcavation, Excavate EXPExpand, Expansion EXTExterior, External, Extinguisher F/FFace to face FAAPFire alarm annunciator panel FACPFire alarm control panel FDFloor drain FDTNFoundation FEFire extinguisher FECFire extinguisher cabinet FHCFire hose cabinet FINFinish(ed) FIXTFixture FLASHFlashing FLEXFlexible FLOURFluorescent FLGFlooring, flange FOFinished opening FPFire protection, Fireproof FRTWFire retardant treated wood FTFoot, Feet FTGFooting FTRFinned tube radiation FURNFurnace, Furniture, Furnish FUTFuture FWCFabric wall covering GAGage GALGallon GALVGalvanized GBGrab bar GCGeneral contract(or) GFRCGlass fiber reinforced concrete GFRGGlass fiber reinforced gypsum GLGlass, Ground level GL BLKGlass block GLU LAMGlued laminated beam GRGrade, Gross GWTGlazed wall tile GYPGypsum GYP BDGypsum board GYP PLASGypsum plaster HBHose bibb HCHollow core, Hose cabinet HCPHandicapped HDWHardware HDWDHardwood HMHollow metal HOHold open HORIZHorizontal HPHigh point, Horsepower HRHour HSSHollow structural section HTHeight HTGHeating HTRHeater HVACHeating, ventilating and air conditioning HWHot water HYDHydrant IDInside diameter INInches INCLIncluded INCANDIncandescent INFOInformation INSULInsulation INTERMIntermediate INTInterior JANJanitor JSTJoist JTJoint KIP1000 Pounds KITKitchen KOKnockout KPLKick plate LLiter, Angle LAMLaminate(d) LAULaundry LAVLavatory LBPound LBLLabel LDLoad LFLinear feet (foot) LHLeft hand, Latent heat LINLinear LKRLocker LLLive load LLHLong leg horizontal LLVLong leg vertical LOCLocation LRFDLoad & resistance factor design LTLight LTGLighting LWCLight-weight concrete MACHMachine MAINTMaintenance MASMasonry MATLMaterial MAXMaximum MCMechanical contractor MCBMetal corner bead MDOMedium density overlay MDFMedium density fiberboard MECHMechanical MEPMechanical, electrical, plumbing and fire protection MEZZMezzanine MFRManufacturer MHManhole MMMillimeter MIFRCMastic/intumescent fire-resistive coating MINMinimum MISCMiscellaneous MLWKMillwork MOMasonry opening MRK BDMarker board MTDMounted MTLMetal MULLMullion NNorth NATNatural NCOMBLNoncombustible NICNot in contract NO OR #Number NOMNominal NORMNormal NRCNoise reduction coefficient NTSNot to scale NWCNormal weight concrete O/OOut to out OAOverall, Outside air OCOn center ODOutside diameter OF/CIOwner furnished, Contactor installed OF/OIOwner furnished, Owner installed OFDOverflow drain OFFOffice OHOpposite hand OH DROverhead (coiling) door OPNGOpening OPPOpposite OPTOptional, Optimum OZOunce PAPublic address PBDParticleboard PCPlumbing contractor, Portland cement PCCPrecast concrete PCTPorcelain ceramic tile PEDPedestal PENDPendant PERPeriod PERFPerforated PGBDPeg board PLPlate, Property line PLFPonds per linear foot PLAMPlastic laminate PLASPlaster PLBPlumbing PLYWDPlywood PNLPanel POLPolished PORCPorcelain POSPositive, Position PPTPressure-preservative treated PRPair PREFABPrefabricate PREFINPrefinish PREPPreparation PROJProject PROJ SCRN Projection screen PSFPounds per square foot PSIPounds per square inch PTPaint, Post tension PTNPartition PVCPolyvinyl chloride (plastic) PVGPaving QTQuarry tile QTRQuarter QTYQuantity RRiser, Radius, Thermal resistance RBRubber base, Resilient base RCPReinforced concrete pipe, Reflected ceiling plan RDRoof drain, Road RECRecessed REFRefrigerator REFLReflect REGRegister, Regulation REINFReinforced REQDRequired RESILResilient REVRevision RFResilient flooring RFGRoofing RHRight hand, Roof hatch RMRoom RORough opening ROWRight of way RTURoof top unit RVRoof vent RWBRubber wall base SSouth SABSound attenuation batts SANSanitary SCSolid core, Shading coefficient SCHEDSchedule SEALSealer on floor (finish) SECTSection SFSquare foot, Safety factor SFRMSprayed fire-resistive Material SGTStructural glazed tile SHTSheet SHRShower SIMSimilar SOGSlab on grade SPStandpipe, Sump pit SPASpaces SPKRSpeaker SPECSpecification SQSquare SRDSecondary roof drain SSService sink SSMSolid surface material SSPStainless steel pipe SSTStainless steel STStain STAStation STCSound transmission class STDStandard STIFFStiffener STLSteel STORStorage STRStraight, Stringers STRUCTStructural SUSPSuspended SVSheet vinyl SYSquare yard TTread T/Top of T&BTop and bottom T&GTongue and groove TELTelephone THRESThreshold TEMPTemporary TERTerrazzo THKThick(ness) TK BDTack board TMPDTempered TOCTop of concrete TOMTop of masonry TOPOTopography, Topographic TOSTop of steel TOWTop of wall TPDToilet paper dispenser TSTATThermostat TVTelevision TYPTypical UHeat transfer coefficient UCUndercut UCLUnder cabinet lighting UGNDUnderground UHUnit heater ULUnderwriter's laboratories UNEXUnexcavated UNFINUnfinished UONUnless otherwise noted UTILUtility UVUnit ventilator VARNVarnish(ed) VBVinyl base VCTVinyl composition tile VENTVentilation VERTVertical VESTVestibule VIFVerify in field VINVinyl VOLVolume VRVapor retarder VTVinyl tile V SHTVinyl sheet VWCVinyl wall covering WWest W/With WCWater closet, Wall covering W/OWithout WDWood WDWWindow WFWide flange WD GDWood guard WHWater heater WIWrought iron WMWire mesh WPWaterproofing, Working point WRWater repellent, weather resistant W RECPTWaste receptacle WSCTWainscot WTWeight, Watertight, Water table WWFWelded wire fabric XBy YDYard C12 A C12 A-XXX 1 4 3 2 XSCALE: X"=1'-0" Title 1 1 2 B A 1 8'-0" AFF 1 Batt insulation Rigid insulation Wood blocking (intermittent) S tone Gravel or crushed stone Wood framing (continuous) Finish wood Steel -large scale Steel -small scale Plywood Concrete Concrete masonry unit Brick (Other metals as noted) View title Building / wall section cut Detail -blow up Exterior elevation Interior elevations 101 1 Partition type Room number Door numbers Window type Revision OR OR Undisturbed earth 001 100 A 001 Structural grid Viewing direction Detail no. Drawing no. Detail no. Drawing no. Drawing no. Elevation no. Plan key note Demolition key note Ceiling type and height Drawing symbols (Other metals as noted) A-XXX X A-XXX X Gypsum, sand, mortar A-XXX X Drawing no. Elevation no. Detail no. Detail section cut Detail no. DRAWING NO. A-XXX X Viewing direction Accessibility Accessible unit V/HAU Visual / hearing accommodation unit Material symbols Architectural / Structural abbreviations 3" = 1'-0" 1 TYP Deflection Head Detail FE FE FE 86.15 6 G F B D C A A-420 5 A-420 1 3 42 6 7 17' - 11" (+/- 4' - 6" ) (+/- 35' - 2" ) (+/- 32' - 4" ) A A6 A A6 1 22 8' - 3"2' - 3" E F G H LAB 466 MAKER SPACE 466A 466A 3 6 5 4 ALIGN (+/- 13' - 10" ) 2 7 8' - 7" "DRYING AREA" J WORKBENCH, OF/OI WORKBENCHES, OF/OI "COLLABORATION/ BUILD AREA" 1 A-601 1 A-601 SIM 8' - 3" 3 ' - 9" FUTURE LOCATION OF LOW EXHAUST DUCT DROP FUTURE LOCATION OF LOW EXHAUST DUCT DROP 8 8 EQEQ L K K N M O O O I 10 ETR 11' -1 1/4" ETR 9' -5 3/8" ETR 11' -1 1/4" ETR 9' -5 3/8" ETR 11' -1 1/4" ETR 9' -5 3/8" ETR LIGHT FIXTURE LIGHT FIXTURE MATCHED TO EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES, REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS ETR GYP BD CEILING AND SOFFITS, TYP. ETR 11' -1 1/4" ETR 11' -1 1/4" ETR 11' -1 1/4" GENERAL NOTES: 1. PAINT ALL NEW AND EXISTING EXPOSED DUCTWORK PER ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE. 1 A-601 ETR 9' -5 3/8" 1 9' -5 3/8" MODIFIED SOFFIT EQ EQEQ EQEQ 1' - 1"14' - 0" V I F + / 2 ' 0 " EQ8' - 0" V I F + / 2 ' 0 " A-102 2 9 9 CD CD CD 86.15 6 G F 122 2 3 1 LAB 466 4 N OTE:EXISTING FLOORING AND BASE TO REMAIN, UON. PROVIDE TEMPORARY PROTECTION DURING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION TO PROTECT ETR FINISHES & SURFACES EXISTING CASEWORK AND PLUMBING TO REMAIN. PROVIDE TEMPORARY PROTECTION DURING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION. 5 VIF +/- 3' - 0" VIF +/- 3' - 0" VIF +/- 3' - 0" EXISTING TO REMAIN WALL SHELVING UNITS 66 14' - 0" 8 ' - 0" VIF +/- 25' - 0" 7 7 3 A-601 EXTENT OF PARTIAL SOFFIT REMOVAL ABOVE, REFER TO DETAIL +/- 18' - 6" RCP LEGEND LINEAR LIGHT FIXTURE, SUSPENDED EXHAUST AIR GRILLE, REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS ETREXISTING TO REMAIN GYP BD CEILING TYPESCD CORD DROP, REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS EVERY ATTEMPT HAS BEEN MADE TO DOCUMENT PERTINENT EXISTING CONDITIONS FROM EXISTING SURVEYS, DRAWINGS AND LIMITED FIELD INSPECTION. PRIOR TO THE SUBMISSION OF BIDS, CONTRACTORS SHALL WALK THE SITE AND SATISFY THEMSELVES TO EXISTING VISUAL CONDITIONS. THE ARCHITECT SHALL BE CONSULTED WHEN ANY QUESTION ARISES RELATIVE TO MATERIALS AND CONDITIONS NOT SPECIFICALLY SHOWN OR SPECIFIED. ALL EXISTING WORK (CEILING, FLOORS, WALLS, FINISHES, ETC.) DISTURBED BY NEW CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE PATCHED AND REFINISHED. PATCHING AND FINISH WORK IS THE REPAIR WORK REQUIRED TO RESTORE SURFACES TO THE ORIGINAL CONDITION AND/ OR MATCHING THE ADJACENT SURFACES. MISCELLANEOUS FINISH REQUIREMENTS TO WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING IN AREAS AFFECTED BY DEMOLITION HAVE NOT BEEN TOTALLY INCORPORATED INTO THE ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE. REFER TO THE DEMOLITION , FLOOR AND REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL CUTTING , PATCHING AND REFINISHING WORK SCOPE. THE EXISTING FIRE-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION MUST BE MAINTAINED OR MADE TO COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS AS ESTABLISHED BY THIS CONTRACT. SEE THE CODE COMPLIANCE PLANS FOR THE FIRE RESISTANT RATINGS OF EXISTING AND NEW CONSTRUCTION. CARE SHALL BE TAKEN TO LIMIT IMPACT OF CONSTRUCTION ON THE SURROUNDING OCCUPANTS AND OPERATIONS DURING THE PROJECT. SAFE LEGAL PASSAGES SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR ALL BUILDING OCCUPANTS DURING ALL THE PHASES OF THIS PROJECT. WHEN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION WHICH IS TO REMAIN IS DAMAGED DURING THE COURSE OF CONSTRUCTION AS A RESULT OF CONTRACTOR'S WORK, IT SHALL BE REPAIRED AND/OR REPLACED WITH SIMILAR OR LIKE MATERIALS, SUBJECT TO ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL AND WITHOUT COMPENSATION. 'REMOVE' IS DEFINED AS DETACH FROM EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AND LEGALLY DISPOSE OF OFF-SITE UNLESS INDICATED TO BE SALVAGED OR REINSTALLED 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES: GENERAL NOTES: ALL FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND OTHER SURFACES THAT ARE TO REMAIN ARE TO BE PROTECTED, PATCHED, REPAIRED, AND REFINISHED PRIOR TO FINISH INSTALLATION. ALL SURFACES ARE TO BE RESTORED TO THEIR ORIGINAL CONDITION AND/OR MATCH THE ADJACENT SURFACES. FIRESTOP ALL FLOOR PENETRATIONS (USED/UNUSED/ABANDONED) WITH 2 HR UL LISTED AND FM APPROVED PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING. PAINT ENTIRE CEILING, BEAMS, AND SOFFITS WITHIN LAB 466 PT-2. SEE RFS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT OF EQUIPMENT WITH OPERATING WEIGHTS EXCEEDING 40 PSF OR A CONCENTRATED LOAD EXCEEDING 500 LBS. " " INDICATES LAB EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS, REFER TO A-102 FOR 'LAB EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS SCHEDULE' 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.# 86.15 6 G F A A6 LAB 466 MAKER SPACE 466A "DRYING AREA" A A6 R PQ S T U Y X VW R PQ R PQ R PQ RR S T T T W W X These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:29:07 PM B IM 360://20625.03 Cornell University Upson Hall Room 466/Upson Hall 466-ARCH-R20.rvt 20625.03 SDF Partial Fourth Floor Plans CRE AD/CRE A-101 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 1 /4" = 1'-0" 2 Partial Fourth Floor Plan 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 Partial Fourth Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan NORTH PLAN KEYNOTES NO.DESCRIPTION 1REINSTALL SALVAGED MARKERBOARD 2REINSTALL SALVAGED WALL MOUNTED SHELVING AND STANDARDS. PATCH AND REPAIR GYPSUM BOARD WHERE BLOCKING INSTALLATION IS REQUIRED. 3PROVIDE 24" H x 36" W MARKERBOARD WITH MARKER TRAY, BOD: CLARIDGE FPM14-0203-Z, COLOR:WHITE 4REINSTALL FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND WALL BRACKET. 5PROVIDE 2"H COLLAPSIBLE RUBBER WATER DAM INSTALLED AT PERIMETER OF "DRYING AREA" (BOD: DUZZY COLLAPSIBLE WATER DAM D1). USE MAXIMUM LENGTH PRODUCT AVAILABLE TO MINIMIZE JOINTS. ALL JOINTS AND TERMINATIONS TO RECEIVE COLOR MATCHING SILICONE SEAL. 6PROVIDE FRP WALL FINISH. PANEL TO MEET CLASS A FIRE RATING AND FM APPROVAL. BOD: CRANE FIRE-X GLASBORD. ALL PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE SURFACES TO BE COMPLETED PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION GUIDELINES. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 7PROVIDE WALL MOUNTED SST HOOKS. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. 8PROVIDE (1) LAYER OF GYPSUM BOARD AT OPENING IN PARTITION. PREP AND FINISH TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISHES. 9REINSTALL SALVAGED AND MODIFIED OVERHEAD UNISTRUT CARRIER, COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION WITH UTILIITES. PAINT TO MATCH EXISTING COLOR. CUT, PATCH AND REPAIR GYPSUM BOARD CEILING AS REQUIRED TO ANCHOR OVERHEAD CARRIER TO EXISTING CONCRETE AND METAL DECK ABOVE. PREP GYPSUM BOARD TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 10SAFTEY GLASSES STORAGE (BOD: FISHERBRAND ACRYLIC SAFETY GLASSES HOLDER, 12-UNIT, 03-391-578). SEE INTERIOR ELEVATION. 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 Partial Fourth Floor Demolition Plan INDICATES PLAN KEYNOTE # DEMOLITION KEYNOTES NO.DESCRIPTION 1REMOVE AND SALVAGE WALL MOUNTED SHELVING UNITS ON WALL STANDARDS & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS.TURN OVER TO OWNER. PATCH, REPAIR AND PREP GYP BD TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACES AND TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 2REMOVE AND SALVAGE WALL MOUNTED SHELVING UNITS ON WALL STANDARDS FOR REINSTALLATION. PATCH, REPAIR AND PREP EXISTING GYP BD TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACES AND TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 3REMOVE AND SALVAGE FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND WALL BRACKET FOR REINSTALLATION. PREP, PATCH AND REPAIR GYP BD PARTITION TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACE AND TO RECEIVE SCHEDULE FINISH. 4REMOVE AND SALVAGE MARKER BOARD FOR REINSTALLATION. PATCH, REPAIR AND PREP EXISTING GYP BD TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACES AND TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 5REMOVE AND SALVAGE PORTION OF OVERHEAD CARRIER (UNISTRUT). TURN OVER TO OWNER. PATCH, REPAIR AND PREP GYP BD CEILING TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACES. 6REMOVE, SALVAGE AND MODIFY OVERHEAD UNISTRUT CARRIER TO LENGTHS INDICATED ON THE PLAN. PATCH, REPAIR AND PREP GYP BD CEILING TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACES. 7REMOVE (1) LAYER OF GYPSUM BOARD TO ACCOMMODATE PLUMBING WORK. REFER TO PLUMBING PLANS. INDICATES DEMOLITION KEYNOTE # 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 Partial Furniture Fourth Floor Plan -For Reference Only (NIC) REMOVE LAYER OF GYPSUM BOARD TO ACCOMMODATE PLUMBING WORK. PROVIDE (1) LAYER OF GYPSUM BOARD UPON COMPLETION OF PLUMBING WORK. PATCH, REPAIR AND FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING WALL SURFACE. REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS. REMOVE LAYER OF GYPSUM BOARD TO ACCOMMODATE PLUMBING WORK. PROVIDE (1) LAYER OF GYPSUM BOARD UPON COMPLETION OF PLUMBING WORK. PATCH, REPAIR AND FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING WALL SURFACE. REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS. LAB 366 NOTE: LAB DOES NOT HAVE A DROPPED CEILING, CONCRETE DECK IS EXPOSED ABOVE ETR 8' -0" ETR 8' -0" ETR 8' -2" ETR 24" X 60" SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING ETR GYP BD SOFFIT ETR 24" X 24" SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING NOTE: REMOVE AND REINSTALL ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILES AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK. ANY DAMAGED TILES SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE OWNER'S ATTENTION PRIOR TO REMOVALS AND/OR DOCUMENTED THROUGH PRE-CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS. IF CONTRACTOR DOES NOT DOCUMENT OR NOTIFY THE OWNER OF THE DAMAGE PRIOR TO REMOVALS, DAMAGED COMPONENTS SHALL BE REPLACED WITH NEW MATERIAL AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. ETR GYP BD CEILING AND SOFFITS ETR 9' -4" ETR 11' -2" ETR 11' -2" ETR 11' -2" ETR 9' -4" ETR 9' -4" ETR 8' -0" ETR 8' -0" LAB 466 MAKER SPACE 466A 468 465 467 PATCH AND REPAIR GYPSUM BOARD AT PENETRATIONS. PAINT TO MATCH EXISTING. REMOVE AND REINSTALL ACT AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE MEP WORK, REFER TO MEP DRAWINGS. REMOVE AND REINSTALL ACT AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE MEP WORK, REFER TO MEP DRAWINGS. REMOVE AND REINSTALL ACT AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE MEP WORK, REFER TO MEP DRAWINGS. ETR 24" X 24" SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING A-101 3 These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:29:07 PM B IM 360://20625.03 Cornell University Upson Hall Room 466/Upson Hall 466-ARCH-R20.rvt 20625.03 SDF Partial Plans & Lab Equipment Schedule CRE CRE A-102 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 Partial Third Floor Plan 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 Partial Fourth Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan NORTH LAB EQUIPMENT & FURNISHINGS SCHEDULE LETTERQTYEQUIPMENT NAMEMANUFACTURERMODEL NO.LOCATION DIMENSIONSELECTRICALHOUSE LABORATORY PLUMBING SYSTEMS CYLINDER GASES OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HEAT GENERATION (BTUH) EXHAUST (CFM) OWNER FURNISHED OWNER INSTALLED CONTRACTOR FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLEDCOMMENTS HEIGHT (IN) WIDTH (IN) DEPTH (IN) WEIGHT (LBS) NORMAL VOLTAGE (VAC)PHASEHz POWER DRAW EMERGENCY POWER PLUG TYPE (SEE NOTE 1)DCWDHWPCW LAB DRAIN LAB VENTRODI GAS PROPANEVAC CA 85 PSI CA LPTEMP (*F)HUMIDITY % VIBRATION SENSITIVE A MPSHPWATTS A(1)MILL DRILLLITTLEMACHINESHOPHITORQUE MINI MILL BENCH36.323.219.71241201608.67--------------XX B(1)3D PRINTERMARKFORGEDMARK TWO (GEN 2) BENCH142313351201602150--------------XX C(1)3D PRINTERPRUSAI3 MK3S+BENCH18.92120.524.360120--------- -----XX D(1)DRILL PRESSJET716250FLOOR63.251727172120160.75--------------XX E(1)BANDSAWJET414504CFLOOR73.525.522.382802303603.61---------------XXXCONTRACTOR TO CONNECT MOTOR TO POWER SOURCE. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. F(1)LASER CUTTEREPILOGTBDFILTRATION BOX 39.836.532180120160--------------350-400XXXCONTRACTOR TO INTERLOCK WITH FILTRATION BASE AND COMMISSION. LASER CUTTER MODEL IS TBD BETWEEN EPILOG ZING 24 60-WATT AND EPILOG FUSION EDGE 24 80-WATT. G(1)WATERJETOMAXPROTOMAXFLOOR56.541.539.5750230-240160305-L14-30X---------50-90<95-XX H(1)DC POWER SUPPLYKEYSIGHT TECHNOLOGIESN8926ABENCH5.317.730.159208360-----------32-11380-XX I(1)THUMB LEVER AIR GUNCA HOSE-------------------------XXREFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS J(1)FILTRATION BOXBOFAAD BASE 2 ORACLE FLOOR21.6541.7431.89207120160121100--------------XXXCONTRACTOR TO INTERLOCK WITH LASER CUTTER AND COMMISSION. K(2)METAL TOOL STORAGE PEGBOARDWALL MOUNTED 4242------------------------XX COLOR: WHITE L(1)TALL STORAGE CABINETMOTT6535760FLOOR844822-----------------------XXWOOD VENEER DOORS AND PAINTED STEEL CABINET BODY TO MATCH EXISTING CASEWORK M(1)TALL STORAGE CABINETMOTTSIM TO 6530030-80 FLOOR844822-----------------------XXWOOD VENEER DOORS AND PAINTED STEEL CABINET BODY TO MATCH EXISTING CASEWORK. GLASS FRAMED DOORS. N(1)COAT RACKWALL MOUNTED 5.5345/4----------------- ------XXWOOD SPECIES AND FINISH MATCHED TO EXISTING CASEWORK O(3)UNDERSHELF LIGHT FIXTUREMOTTTLW0024SHELF-24-----------------XX P(4)MOBILE BASE CABINET, NICFLOOR-----------------------XX Q(4)WORK TABLE, NICFLOORADJ.6030-----------------------XXADJUSTABLE HEIGHT R(6)LAB CHAIR, NICFLOOR-----------------------XX S(2)MOBILE, POWERED LAPTOP WORKSTATION, NIC FLOORADJ.6030----------------X X T(4)LOUNGE CHAIR, NICFLOOR-----------------------XX U(1)COFFEE TABLE, NICFLOOR-----------------------XX V(1)MAPLE WORKSURFACE, NICBENCH-30-----------------------XX W(3)STEEL CABINET, NICFLOOR303027.75-----------------------XX X(2)LAB STOOL, NICFLOOR-----------------------XX Y(1)MOBILE WORKTABLE, NICFLOOR364824-----------------------XXSTORAGE SHELF BELOW INDICATES EQUIPMENT KEYNOTE # LAB EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE NOTES: 1. ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM PLUG TYPE WITH OWNER. REMOVE LAYER OF GYPSUM BOARD TO ACCOMMODATE PLUMBING WORK. PROVIDE (1) LAYER OF GYPSUM BOARD UPON COMPLETION OF PLUMBING WORK. PATCH, REPAIR AND FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING WALL SURFACE. REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS. REMOVE LAYER OF GYPSUM BOARD TO ACCOMMODATE PLUMBING WORK. PROVIDE (1) LAYER OF GYPSUM BOARD UPON COMPLETION OF PLUMBING WORK. PATCH, REPAIR AND FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING WALL SURFACE. REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS. LAB 366 NOTE: LAB DOES NOT HAVE A DROPPED CEILING, CONCRETE DECK IS EXPOSED ABOVE ETR 8' -0" ETR 8' -0" ETR 8' -2" ETR 24" X 60" SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING ETR GYP BD SOFFIT ETR 24" X 24" SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING NOTE: REMOVE AND REINSTALL ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILES AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK. ANY DAMAGED TILES SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE OWNER'S ATTENTION PRIOR TO REMOVALS AND/OR DOCUMENTED THROUGH PRE-CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS. IF CONTRACTOR DOES NOT DOCUMENT OR NOTIFY THE OWNER OF THE DAMAGE PRIOR TO REMOVALS, DAMAGED COMPONENTS SHALL BE REPLACED WITH NEW MATERIAL AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. ETR GYP BD CEILING AND SOFFITS ETR 9' -4" ETR 11' -2" ETR 11' -2" ETR 11' -2" ETR 9' -4" ETR 9' -4" ETR 8' -0" ETR 8' -0" LAB 466 MAKER SPACE 466A 468 465 467 REMOVE AND REINSTALL ACT AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE MEP WORK, REFER TO MEP DRAWINGS. REMOVE AND REINSTALL ACT AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE MEP WORK, REFER TO MEP DRAWINGS. ETR 24" X 24" SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING A-101 3 These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/29/2021 6:04:08 PM B IM 360://20625.03 Cornell University Upson Hall Room 466/Upson Hall 466-ARCH-R20.rvt 20625.03 SDF Partial Plans & Lab Equipment Schedule CRE CRE A-102R 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 107/01/21ADDENDUM #1 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 Partial Third Floor Plan 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 Partial Fourth Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan NORTH LAB EQUIPMENT & FURNISHINGS SCHEDULE LETTERQTYEQUIPMENT NAMEMANUFACTURERMODEL NO.LOCATION DIMENSIONSELECTRICALHOUSE LABORATORY PLUMBING SYSTEMS CYLINDER GASES OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HEAT GENERATION (BTUH) EXHAUST (CFM) OWNER FURNISHED OWNER INSTALLED CONTRACTOR FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLEDCOMMENTS HEIGHT (IN) WIDTH (IN) DEPTH (IN) WEIGHT (LBS) NORMAL VOLTAGE (VAC)PHASEHz POWER DRAW EMERGENCY POWER PLUG TYPE (SEE NOTE 1)DCWDHWPCW LAB DRAIN LAB VENTRODI GAS PROPANEVAC CA 85 PSI CA LPTEMP (*F)HUMIDITY % VIBRATION SENSITIVE A MPSHPWATTS A(1)MILL DRILLLITTLEMACHINESHOPHITORQUE MINI MILL BENCH36.323.219.71241201608.67--------------XX B(1)3D PRINTERMARKFORGEDMARK TWO (GEN 2) BENCH142313351201602150--------------XX C(1)3D PRINTERPRUSAI3 MK3S+BENCH18.92120.524.360120--------------XX D(1)DRILL PRESSJET716250FLOOR63.251727172120160.75--------------XX E(1)BANDSAWJET414504CFLOOR73.525.522.382802303603.61---------------XXXCONTRACTOR TO CONNECT MOTOR TO POWER SOURCE. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. F(1)LASER CUTTEREPILOGFUSION EDGE 24 80-WATT FILTRATION BOX 38.0441.5232.81225120160--------------350-400XXXCONTRACTOR TO INTERLOCK WITH FILTRATION BASE AND COMMISSION. G(1)WATERJETOMAXPROTOMAXFLOOR56.541.539.5750230-240160305-L14-30X--------- 50-90<95-XX H(1)DC POWER SUPPLYKEYSIGHT TECHNOLOGIESN8926ABENCH5.317.730.159208360-----------32-11380-XX I(1)THUMB LEVER AIR GUNCA HOSE-------------------------XXREFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS J(1)FILTRATION BOXBOFAAD BASE 2 ORACLE FLOOR21.6541.7431.89207120160121100--------------XXXCONTRACTOR TO INTERLOCK WITH LASER CUTTER AND COMMISSION. K(2)METAL TOOL STORAGE PEGBOARDWALL MOUNTED 4242------------------------XXCOLOR: WHITE L(1)TALL STORAGE CABINETMOTT6535760FLOOR844822-----------------------XXWOOD VENEER DOORS AND PAINTED STEEL CABINET BODY TO MATCH EXISTING CASEWORK M(1)TALL STORAGE CABINETMOTTSIM TO 6530030-80 FLOOR844822-----------------------XXWOOD VENEER DOORS AND PAINTED STEEL CABINET BODY TO MATCH EXISTING CASEWORK. GLASS FRAMED DOORS. N(1)COAT RACKWALL MOUNTED 5.5345/4-----------------------XXWOOD SPECIES AND FINISH MATCHED TO EXISTING CASEWORK O(3)UNDERSHELF LIGHT FIXTUREMOTTTLW0024SHELF-24-----------------XX P(4)MOBILE BASE CABINET, NICFLOOR-----------------------XX Q(4)WORK TABLE, NICFLOORADJ.6030-----------------------XXADJUSTABLE HEIGHT R(6)LAB CHAIR, NICFLOOR-----------------------XX S(2)MOBILE, POWERED LAPTOP WORKSTATION, NIC FLOORADJ.6030----------------XX T(4)LOUNGE CHAIR, NICFLOOR-----------------------XX U(1)COFFEE TABLE, NICFLOOR-----------------------XX V(1)MAPLE WORKSURFACE, NICBENCH-30-----------------------XX W(3)STEEL CABINET, NICFLOOR303027.75-----------------------XX X(2)LAB STOOL, NICFLOOR-----------------------XX Y(1)MOBILE WORKTABLE, NICFLOOR364824-----------------------XXSTORAGE SHELF BELOW INDICATES EQUIPMENT KEYNOTE # LAB EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE NOTES: 1. ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM PLUG TYPE WITH OWNER. 1 1 1 1 STEEL CABINET W/ DRAWERS, BOD: VIDMAR PRECONFIGURED CABINETS, OF/OI SCHEDULED BASE MAPLE WORKSURFACE, OF/OI ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM RACEWAY, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 466A 3 ' 5 " W1 1 A-601 S ALVAGED AND MODIFIED UNISTRUT CARRIER 4 ' 0 " 6" PUSH PLATE ACTIVATION SWITCH LIGHT SWITCH, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS PUSH BUTTON KILL SWITCH, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS EXISTING BASE REINSTALLED WALL SHELVING 3' - 6" 3 ' 6 " METAL PEGBOARD, COLOR: WHITE, OF/CI REINSTALLED WALL SHELVING 3' - 6" 3"VIF +/- 3' - 0" 3" 7 ' 0 " METAL PEGBOARD, COLOR: WHITE, OF/CI SALVAGED AND MODIFIED UNISTRUT CARRIER VIF +/- 3' - 0" VIF +/- 3' - 0" EXISTING COUNTERTOP +/- 9' - 2" EXISTING CASEWORK +/- 9' - 0" EXISTING BASE WARDROBE CABINET W/O CLOTHES ROD, OF/CI REINSTALLED SHELVING V I F + / 3 ' 0 " 7 ' 0 " 4' - 0" 7 ' 0 " RACEWAY, SEE ELETRICAL DRAWINGS 3 ' 5 " SCHEDULED BASE STOREFRONT SYSTEM 1 A-601 SIM W1 3 ' 5 " RACEWAY, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 3 ' 6 " OVERHEAD CHORD REEL, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS ( 3 ' 0 " ) EXISTING BASE BEYOND COLLAPSIBLE WATER DAM 7 ' 0 " ( 3' - 0" ) EXISTING TO REMAIN WALL SHELVING ( 18' - 0" ) WORK TABLES, OF/OI FRP WALL PANELS 8 ' 0 " 8' - 0" (5) STAINLESS STEEL BOBRICK B-6827 HOOKS 4 ' 0 " 4 ' 8 " STORAGE CABINET W/ FRAMED GLASS DOORS AND (5) SHELVES, OF/CI EXISTING RACEWAY, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 4' - 0"COLLAPSIBLE WATER DAM S CHEDULED BASE 3 ' 6 " 4 ' 0 " FRP WALL PANEL (5) STAINLESS STEEL BOBRICK B-6827 HOOKS 4' - 0" 8 ' 4 " 4 ' 0 " 4 ' 8 " STOREFRONT SYSTEM EXISTING BASE BEYOND COLLAPSIBLE WATER DAM 8' - 3"3' - 9" W1 1 A-601 SIM S ALVAGED AND MODIFIED UNISTRUT CARRIER EXISTING BASE 3 ' 6 " 4 ' 0 " STOREFRONT TO ALIGN WITH DOOR FRAME SCHEDULED BASE 466A 5 ' 2 " COAT RACK, OF/CI 24" H x 36" W MARKERBOARD WITH MARKER TRAY, BOD: CLARIDGE FPM14-0203-Z, COLOR: WHITE STOREFRONT SYSTEM V I F + / 1 0 ' 9 " VIF +/- 8' - 0" 3 ' 0 " V I F + / 4 ' 0 " RELOCATED MARKERBOARD 1 ' - 9"2' - 8" SAFETY GLASSES STORAGE ROOM SIGNAGE, "A1" EXISTING LIGHT SWITCHES 8' - 3" RELOCATED TELEPHONE JACK 5 ' 0 " W1 1 A-601 9" 5 ' 4 " PUSH PLATE ACTIVATION SWITCH BREAK GLASS MANUAL SHUTOFF, SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS 6" 4 ' 3 " 4 ' 0 " These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:29:10 PM B IM 360://20625.03 Cornell University Upson Hall Room 466/Upson Hall 466-ARCH-R20.rvt 20625.03 SDF Interior Elevations CRE AD/CRE A-420 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 Interior Elevation -Maker Space North 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 Interior Elevation -Maker Space East 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 Interior Elevation -Dirty Work Area South 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 Interior Elevation -Dirty Work Area West 1/4" = 1'-0" 5 Interior Elevation -Rm 466 North 1/4" = 1'-0" 6 Interior Elevation Rm 466 East 1/4" = 1'-0" 7 Interior Elevation -Rm 466 South MISCELLANEOUS FINISH REQUIREMENTS TO WALLS, FLOORS & CEILINGS IN AREAS AFFECTED BY DEMO HAVE NOT BEEN TOTALLY INCORPORATED INTO THE ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE. REFER TO DEMOLITION, FLOOR & REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR EXTENT OF "CUTTING & PATCHING". PATCHING SHALL BE THE REPAIR WORK REQUIRED TO RESTORE SURFACES TO THE ORIGINAL CONDITION AND/OR MATCHING THE ADJACENT SURFACES. FLOORING TO RUN BENEATH ANY OPEN SPACES IN ROOMS, INCLUDING ADA CABINETS & APPLIANCES IN THE ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE -"ETR" INDICATES EXISTING TO REMAIN PAINT ALL EXPOSED HVAC, PLUMBING & ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION TO MATCH ADJACENT OR BACKGROUND SURFACES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO STEEL GRILLES, DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND LOUVERS. DO NOT PAINT OPERATIONAL COMPONENTS OF SYSTEMS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPRINKLER HEADS, FIRE, SMOKE, OR HEAT DETECTORS. REFER TO NOTES IN INTERIOR FINISHES & MATERIALS LIST FOR SOFFIT PAINT COLORS PAINT HOLLOW METAL FRAMES & DOORS PT-3 UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. ALL GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS TO BE FLAT FINISH UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ALL PAINTED VERTICAL SURFACES (WALLS, SOFFITS, COLUMNS, ETC ) TO BE AN EGGSHELL FINISH UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. GENERAL FINISH NOTES A. B. C. D. F. H. I. J. K. FINISH LEGEND SECTION 06 64 00 -PLASTIC PANELING FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) CRANE COMPOSITES, FIRE-X GLASBORD -EMBOSSED TEXTURE -SURFASEAL FINISH, THICKNESS: 0.09", PANEL DIMENSION: 4'X8', COLOR: WHITE 85, ALL COORDINATING TRIM TO BE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD MOLDING, FM APPROVED. SECTION 09 91 23 -INTERIOR PAINTING PAINT (PT) -ALL DOORS, FRAMES AND TRIM –SEMI-GLOSS -CEILINGS –FLAT -ALL PAINTED VERTICAL SURFACES (WALLS, SOFFITS, COLUMNS, ETC) TO BE AN EGGSHELL FINISH. -AT EXPOSED CEILING USE DRYFALL PAINT. PT-1BENJAMIN MOORE -LOW VOC, COLOR: SNOW WHITE (WHITE), FINISH: EGGSHELL (WALLS) PT-2BENJAMIN MOORE -LOW VOC, COLOR: SNOW WHITE (WHITE), FINISH: FLAT (CEILINGS AND SOFFITS) PT-3BENJAMIN MOORE -LOW VOC, COLOR: WINTER SOLSTICE 1605 (MED GRAY), FINISH: SEMI-GLOSS (TRIM, HM DOORS & FRAMES) 1. PAINT EXISTING DOOR & FRAME PT-3 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE REMARKS SECTION 09 65 13 -RESILIENT BASE RUBBER BASE RB-1ALLSTATE RUBBER, COVE RUBBER BASE, 4" HIGH, COLOR: #D49 SECTION 12 35 51 -LABORATORY CASEWORK (OF/CI) WOOD & METAL CASEWORK (OF/CI) MOTT MANUFACTURING, SCIENCE LABORATORY FURNITURE, COLOR & WOOD SPECIES TO MATCH EXISTING CASEWORK IN 466. DOOR FRONTS TO HAVE WOOD VENEER. INSTALL SHALL BE COORDINATED BY CONTRACTOR. FINISH FLOOR S E E D O O R S C H E D U L E 2" SLIDING W/ DOUBLE LITE FG2 6 " 4 " SCHEDULE SEE DOOR 2" 2 " 3 ' 7 1 / 2 " M A N U F A C T U R E R P A C K A G E H E I G H T P E R EMERGENCY BREAKOUT SLIDING DOOR ONLY, REFER TO FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATION 3 ' 0 " PUSH PLATE ACTIVATION SWITCH MOUNTED ON FRAME J1 ACCESS COVER 4 1/2" 6" S E E D O O R S C H E D U L E 4 1 / 2 " + / 1 3 / 4 " TERMINATE WITH L-BEAD AND SEALANT, TYP P A R T I T I O N S C H E D HEADER ABOVE SHIM SPACE TERMINATE WITH L-BEAD AND SEALANT, TYP DOUBLE STUD, JAMB STUDS TO BE HEAVY DUTY STUDS 6x3 16ga SHIM SPACE LAB MAKER SPACE FINISHED FLOOR PARTITION SCHEDULED 1/4" HEAVY DUTY STUD HEADER, REFER TO DETAIL 2/A-601 LAB MAKER SPACE EXISTING PARTITON KEY SWITCH TO BE LOCATED ON MAKER SPACE SIDE OF FRAME 10" 6 " 0000 BRAILLE, MATCH EXISTING COLOR COLOR: MATCH EXISTING RAISED LETTERING, FONT TO MATCH EXISTING (WHITE) A1 3 / 8 " 1 / 2 " 1 " 7 / 8 " SQUARE END CAPS, MATCH EXISTING 1/4" RULE PAINTED, MATCH EXISTING SIGNBAND WITH INSERT SLOT, MATCH EXISTING 1" 1' - 6" 1 ' 6 " CLEAR FLOOR AREA CENTERED ON RAISED CHARACTERS EQEQEQ 8' - 3" 4 ' 0 " 2 " 2 " 2"2" W1 S-1S-1S-1 GLAZING TYPES: S-11/4" SAFETY GLASS MAKER SPACE 466A LAB 466 C O N S T R U C T I O N E X I S T I N G 3 ' 5 3 / 4 " R . O . 4 ' 0 1 / 2 " SCHEDULED BASE FINISHED FLOOR 6" CFMF PARTITION 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD, EACH SIDE SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS 1" 2 1/2" WOOD BLOCKING 5/4 X HARDWOOD STOOL, FINISH TO MATCH WOOD VENEER OF EXISTING CASEWORK ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM WOOD BLOCKING WRAP GYPSUM BOARD TO FRAME, TERMINATE WITH L-BEAD AND SEALANT BACKER ROD & SEALANT SHIM WITH SEALANT EACH SIDE A-601 2 A-601 2 RECONSTRUCT PORTION OF GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT, 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD ON 1 5/8" METAL STUD, VERIFY EXISTING CONSTRUCTION IN FIELD L-BEAD L-BEAD MODIFY, REPAIR AND PATCH EXISTING GYPSUM BOARD CEILING TO ACCOMMODATE PARTITION PATCH AND REPAIR FIREPROOFING WHERE DISTRUBED BY NEW CONSTRUCTION LINE OF STRUCTURE, EXISTING 2HOUR FIRE-RATED CONCRETE SLAB AND METAL DECK FLOOR (WITH SPRAY-ON-FIREPROOFING) SALVAGED OVERHEAD CARRIER, 1 5/8" UNISTRUT COMPONENTS + / 7 ' 6 " V I F + / 4 ' 2 " A-601 4 TYP EXIST SLAB ON DECK (2) HEAVY DUTY STUD 6x3 16ga HEADER W/ HEAVY DUTY STUD CLIP CONNECTOR @ JAMBS. JAMB STUDS TO BE (1) HEAVY DUTY STUD 6x3 16ga, TYP AT ALL CFMF WALL OPENINGS (BOD: CLARK-DIETRICH) 6" CFMF DEFLECTION TRACK W/ HILTI X-C PAF FASTENERS AT 12" OC MAX TO LOW DECK FLUTE W/ 1" MIN EMBEDMENT, TYP SPRAY-ON-FIREPROOFING FOLLOWING INSTALLATION OF METAL FRAMING REMOVE INDICATED PORTION GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT AND METAL FRAMING REMOVE PORTION OF GYPSUM BOARD CEILING TO ACCOMMODATE PARTITION V IF +/- 8" +/- 1' - 4" REMOVE AND SALVAGE OVERHEAD UNISTRUT CARRIER, REFER TO DEMOLITION PLAN FIREPROOFING LINE OF STRUCTURE, EXISTING 2-HOUR FIRE-RATED CONCRETE SLAB AND METAL DECK FLOOR. REMOVE PORTION OF GYPSUM BOARD CEILING AS REQUIRED TO REMOVE AND SALVAGE OVERHEAD UNISTRUT CARRIER EXIST SLAB ON DECK SALVAGED OVERHEAD CARRIER, 1 5/8" UNISTRUT COMPONENTS (MAX ALLOWABLE LOAD = 50 PLF EA TRACK, TYP OF (2)) L5X4X5/16 CLIP ANGLE LLV SPANNING BETWEEN (2) RIBS OF EXIST METAL DECK W/ (2) 1/2" DIA HILTI KWIK TZ EXPANSION ANCHORS W/ 2" EMBEDMENT (NOT TO EXCEED 3-1/2"). FASTEN UNISTRUT CARRIER W/ (2) 1/2" DIA BOLTS USING SPRING NUTS AS NECESSARY These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:29:11 PM B IM 360://20625.03 Cornell University Upson Hall Room 466/Upson Hall 466-ARCH-R20.rvt 20625.03 SDF Details & Schedules CRE CRE A-601 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ROOM NUMBERROOM NAME FLOORBASEWALL CEILING FINISHREMARKS ROOM NUMBER M ATERIAL/ FINISHMATERIAL/ FINISH NORTHSOUTHEASTWEST MATERIALFINISHMATERIALFINISHMATERIALFINISHMATERIALFINISH LEVEL 4 466LABEX-CONC./ETR RES ETR-RB/RB-1ETR GWBPT-1ETR GWB/ GWBPT-1ETR GWB/ GWBPT-1ETR GWBPT-1ETR-GWB/PT-21466 466AMAKER SPACEEX-CONC./ETR RES ETR-RB/RB-1ETR GWB/ GWBPT-1ETR GWBPT-1ETR GWBPT-1ETR GWB/ GWBPT-1ETR-GWB/PT-2466A DOOR SCHEDULE DOOR # DOORFRAME HARDWARELABELTHRESHOLDREMARKSDOOR # L EAFS SIZE TYPEMATERIALFINISHGLASSELEVATIONTYPEMATERIALFINISH W IDTHHEIGHTTHICK LEVEL 4 466A7' - 0"7' - 5 3/4"1 3/4"FG2ALUMCLEAR ANODIZED S-1PER MFRJ1ALUMCLEAR ANODIZED SEE SPEC ON A-602 --466A DOOR TYPES H EAD AND JAMB DETAILS SIGN TYPE S IGN LOCATION AT DOOR S TOREFRONT SCHEDULE 3/4" = 1'-0" 1 Typical Wall Section Not To Scale 2 TOP OF CFMF WALL DETAIL 3/4" = 1'-0" 3 Demolition Detail -Maker Space Soffit 7' -0" 3/4" = 1'-0" 4 UNISTRUT FRAME ANCHORAGE DETAIL SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 1. PRODUCT: MILDEW RESISTANT SILICONE SEALANT A. MANUFACTURER: DOW CORNING B. PRODUCT: 786 MILDEW RESISTANT C. COLOR: TO BE SELECTED FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL RANGE SPECIFICATIONS: SECTION 02 70 00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 1.SUMMARY A. DEMOLISH AND REMOVE SELECTED PORTIONS OF BUILDING. B. DISCONNECT AND CAP OR SEAL UTILITIES PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. C. MAINTAIN AND PROTECT ALL EXISTING UTILITY SERVICES. 2. DEMOLITION A. INSTALL TEMPORARY DUSTPROOF PARTITIONS AND ENCLOSURES. B. PATCH AND REPAIR DAMAGED SURFACES CAUSED BY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OPERATIONS. C. DEMOLISHED MATERIALS BECOME CONTRACTOR'S PROPERTY, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 3. DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS: A. BURNING: NOT PERMITTED. B. DISPOSAL: OFF OWNER'S PROPERTY. 4. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE A. COORDINATE WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE FOR UTILITY SHUTDOWNS 5. OCCUPANCY A. AREAS ADJACENT TO THE AREAS OF DEMOLITION MAY BE OCCUPIED. WORK IS TO BE CONDUCTED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO MINIMIZE THE DISRUPTION OF NORMAL OPERATIONS. 6. CONDITIONS OF STRUCTURES A. THE OWNER ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACTUAL CONDITIONS OF ITEMS OR STRUCTURES TO BE DEMOLISHED. CONDITIONS EXISTING AT THE TIME OF COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT WILL BE MAINTAINED BY THE OWNER INSOFAR AS IS PRACTICAL. HOWEVER, VARIATIONS WITHIN THE STRUCTURE MAY OCCUR BY THE OWNER'S REMOVAL AND SALVAGE OPERATIONS PRIOR TO START OF SELECTIVE DEMOLITION WORK. 7. DAMAGES A. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO PROMPTLY REPAIR ALL DAMAGES CAUSED TO ADJACENT FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT BY DEMOLITION WORK AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO OWNER. SECTION 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING (CONTINUED) 6. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. AT END OF EACH WORKDAY, REMOVE RUBBISH, EMPTY CANS, RAGS AND OTHER DISCARDED MATERIALS FROM PROJECT SITE. B. AFTER COMPLETING PAINTING APPLICATION, CLEAN SPATTERED SURFACES. REMOVE SPATTER PAINTS BY WASHING, SCRAPING OR OTHER METHODS. DO NOT SCRATCH OR DAMAGE ADJACENT FINISHED SURFACES. C. PROTECT WORK OF OTHER TRADES AGAINST DAMAGE FROM PAINT APPLICATION. CORRECT DAMAGE TO WORK OF OTHER TRADES BY CLEANING, REPAIRING, REPLACING AND REFINISHING, AS APPROVED BY ARCHITECT, AND LEAVE IN AN UNDAMAGED CONDITION. D. AT COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES OR OTHER TRADES, TOUCH UP AND RESTORE DAMAGED OR DEFACED PAINTED SURFACES. 7. INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE • GYPSUM BOARD: PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING FINISH SYSTEMS OVER INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD SURFACES: a. SEMIGLOSS ACRYLIC ENAMEL FINISH: TWO FINISH COATS OVER A PRIMER • PRIMER: INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD PRIMER • FINISH COATS: WATERBORNE ACRYLIC EPOXY. • FERROUS METAL: PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING FINISH SYSTEMS OVER FERROUS METAL: a. SEMIGLOSS ACRYLIC-ENAMEL FINISH: TWO FINISH COATS OVER A PRIMER • PRIMER: INTERIOR FERROUS-METAL PRIMER • FINISH COATS: INTERIOR SEMIGLOSS ACRYLIC ENAMEL SECTION 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 1. PRODUCT: NAILERS, BLOCKING & BACKING PANELS A. LUMBER STANDARDS AND GRADE STAMPS: PS 20, AMERICAN SOFTWOOD LUMBER STANDARD AND INSPECTION AGENCY GRADE STAMPS. B. FIRE-RETARDENT TREATMENT: AWPA C20 FOR LUMBER AND AWPA C27 FOR PLYWOOD; NONCORROSIVE TYPE C. DIMENSION LUMBER: HEM-FIR, SELECT STRUCTURAL NO. 2 SECTION 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1. PRODUCTS:AS INDICATED IN FINISH SCHEDULE. 2. ADHESIVES: WATER-RESISTANT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY RESILIENTPRODUCT MANUFACTURER FOR RESILIENT PRODUCTS AND SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS INDICATED. 3. RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLING RESILIENT BASE. B. APPLY RESILIENT BASE TO WALLS, COLUMNS, PILASTERS, CASEWORK AND CABINETS IN TOE SPACES, AND OTHER PERMANENT FIXTURES IN ROOMS AND AREAS WHERE BASE IS REQUIRED. C. INSTALL RESILIENT BASE IN LENGTHS AS LONG AS PRACTICAL WITHOUT GAPS AT SEAMS AND WITH TOPS OF ADJACENT PIECES ALIGNED. D. TIGHTLY ADHERE RESILIENT BASE TO SUBSTRATE THROUGHOUT LENGTH OF EACH PIECE, WITH BASE IN CONTINUOUS CONTACT WITH HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL SUBSTRATES. E. JOB-FORMED CORNERS:USE STRAIGHT PIECES OF MAXIMUM LENGTHS POSSIBLE AND FORM WITH RETURNS NOT LESS THAN 3 INCHES IN LENGTH.MITER OR COPE CORNERS TO MINIMIZE OPEN JOINTS. 4. RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLING RESILIENT ACCESSORIES. B. RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORIES: BUTT TO ADJACENT MATERIALS AND TIGHTLY ADHERE TO SUBSTRATES THROUGHOUT LENGTH OF EACH PIECE. INSTALL REDUCER STRIPS AT EDGES OF FLOOR COVERING THAT WOULD OTHERWISE BE EXPOSED. 5. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR CLEANING AND PROTECTING RESILIENT PRODUCTS. B. REMOVE ADHESIVE AND OTHER BLEMISHES FROM SURFACES OPERATIONS IMMEDIATELY AFTER COMPLETING RESILIENT-PRODUCT INSTALLATION. C. PROTECT RESILIENT PRODUCTS FROM MARS, MARKS, INDENTATIONS, AND OTHER DAMAGE FROM CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS AND PLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES DURING REMAINDER OF CONSTRUCTION PERIOD. D. COVER RESILIENT PRODUCTS SUBJECT TO WEAR AND FOOT TRAFFIC UNTIL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. SECTION 12 35 51 LABORATORY CASEWORK (OF/CI) SECTION 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING 1. PRODUCTS: A. GENERAL: a. MATERIALS FOR USE WITHIN EACH PAINT SYSTEM SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH ONE ANOTHER AND SUBSTRATES INDICATED, UNDER CONDITIONS OF SERVICE AND APPLICATION AS DEMONSTRATED BY MANUFACTURER, BASED ON TESTING AND FIELD EXPERIENCE b. FOR EACH COAT IN A PAINT SYSTEM, PRODUCTS SHALL BE RECOMMENDED IN WRITING BY TOPCOAT MANUFACTURERS FOR USE IN PAINT SYSTEM AND ON SUBSTRATE INDICATED. B. INTERIOR PRIMERS: a. INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD PRIMER: FACTORY-FORMULATED LATEX-BASED PRIMER FOR INTERIOR APPLICATION • BENJAMIN MOORE; MOORCRAFT SUPER SPEC LATEX ENAMEL UNDERCOATER & PRIMER SEALER 253; APPLIED AT A DRY FILM THICKNESS OF NOT LESS THAN 1.2 MILS. b. INTERIOR FERROUS-METAL PRIMER: FACTORY-FORMULATED QUICK-DRYING RUST-INHIBITIVE ALKYD-BASED METAL PRIMER • BENJAMIN MOORE; MOORCRAFT SUPER SPEC ALKYD ENAMEL UNDERBODY AND PRIMER SEALER C245; APPLIED AT A DRY FILM THICKNESS OF NOT LESS THAN 1.5 MILS. C. INTERIOR FINISH COATS: a. INTERIOR FLAT ACRYLIC PAINT: FACTORY-FORMULATED FLAT LATEX PAINT FOR INTERIOR APPLICATION • BENJAMIN MOORE: MOORCRAFT SUPER SPEC LATEX FLAT 275: APPLIED AT A DRY FILM THICKNESS OF NOT LESS THAN 1.2 MILS. b. INTERIOR SEMIGLOSS ACRYLIC ENAMEL: FACTORY-FORMULATED SEMIGLOSS LATEX ENAMEL FOR INTERIOR APPLICATION: • BENJAMIN MOORE: MOORCRAFT SUPER SPEC LATEX SEMI-GLOSS ENAMEL 276: APPLIED AT A DRY FILM THICKNESS OF NOT LESS THAN 1.2 MILS. 2. SUBMITTALS A. PRODUCT DATA: FOR EACH TYPE OF PRODUCT INCLUDE PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS. 3. EXAMINATION: A. EXAMINE SUBSTRATES AND CONDITIONS, WITH APPLICATOR PRESENT, FOR COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS FOR MAXIMUM MOISTURE CONTENT AND OTHER CONDITIONS AFFECTING PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK. B. GYPSUM BOARD SUBSTRATES: VERIFY THAT FINISHING COMPOUND IS SANDED SMOOTH C. VERIFY SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES, INCLUDING SURFACE CONDITIONS AND COMPATIBILITY, WITH EXISTING FINISHES AND PRIMERS. D. PROCEED WITH COATING APPLICATION ONLY AFTER UNSATISFACTORY CONDITIONS HAVE BEEN CORRECTED a. APPLICATION OF COATING INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACES AND CONDITIONS 4. PREPARATION: A. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN "MPI ARCHITECTURAL PAINTING SPECIFICATION MANUAL" APPLICABLE TO SUBSTRATES AND PAINT SYSTEMS INDICATED. B. REMOVE HARDWARE, COVERS, PLATES, AND SIMILAR ITEMS ALREADY IN PLACE THAT ARE REMOVABLE AND RE NOT TO BE PAINTED. IF REMOVAL IS IMPRACTICAL OR IMPOSSIBLE BECAUSE OF SIZE OR WEIGHT OF ITEM, PROVIDE SURFACEAPPLIED PROTECTION BEFORE SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING. a. AFTER COMPLETING PAINTING OPERATIONS, USE WORKERS SKILLED IN THE TRADES INVOLVED TO REINSTALL ITEMS THAT WERE REMOVED. REMOVE SURFACE-APPLIED PROTECTION IF ANY. C. CLEAN SUBSTRATES OF SUBSTANCES THAT COULD IMPAIR BOND OF PAINTS, INCLUDING DUST, DIRT, OIL, GREASE AND INCOMPATIBLE PAINTS AND ENCAPSULANTS. a. REMOVE INCOMPATIBLE PRIMERS AND REPRIME SUBSTRATE WITH COMPATIBLE PRIMERS OR APPLY TIE COAT AS REQUIRED TO PRODUCE PAINT SYSTEMS INDICATED. D. CONCRETE SUBSTRATES: REMOVE RELEASE AGENTS, CURING COMPOUNDS, EFFLORESCENCE AND CHALK. DO NOT PAINT SURFACES IF MOISTURE CONTENT OR ALKALINITY OF SURFACES TO BE PAINTED EXCEEDS THAT PERMITTED IN MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. 5. APPLICATION: A. APPLY PAINTS ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS AND TO RECOMMENDATIONS IN "MPI MANUAL" a. USE APPLICATORS AND TECHNIQUES SUITED FOR PAINT AND SUBSTRATE INDICATED. b. PAINT SURFACES BEHIND MOVABLE EQUIPMENT AND FURNITURE SAME AS EXPOSED SURFACES c. PAINT FRONT AND BACKSIDES OF ACCESS PANELS, REMOVABLE OR HINGED COVERS, AND SIMILAR HINGED ITEMS TO MATCH EXPOSED SURFACES d. DO NOT PAINT OVER LABELS OF INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCIES OR EQUIPMENT NAME, IDENTIFICATION, PERFORMANCE RATING OR NOMENCLATURE PLATES. B. TINT EACH UNDERCOAT A LIGHTER SHADE TO FACILITATE IDENTIFICATION OF EACH COAT IF MULTIPLE COATS OF SAME MATERIAL ARE TO BE APPLIED. TINT UNDERCOATS TO MATCH COLOR OF TOPCOAT, BUT PROVIDE SUFFICIENT DIFFERENCE IN SHADE OF UNDERCOATS TO DISTINGUISH EACH SEPARATE COAT. C. IF UNDERCOATS OR OTHER CONDITIONS SHOW THROUGH TOPCOAT, APPLY ADDITIONAL COATS UNTIL CURED FILM HAS A UNIFORM PAINT FINISH, COLOR AND APPEARANCE. D. APPLY PAINTS TO PRODUCE SURFACE FILMS WITHOUT CLOUDINESS, SPOTTING, HOLIDAYS, LAPS, BRUSH MARKS, ROLLER TRACKING, RUNS, SAGS, ROPINESS OR OTHER SURFACE IMPERFECTIONS. CUT IN SHARP LINES AND COLOR BREAKS. E. PAINTING FIRE SUPPRESSION, PLUMBING, HVAC, ELECTRICAL, COMMUNICATION AND ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY WORK: a. PAINT THE FOLLOWING WORK WHERE EXPOSED IN OCCUPIED SPACES: • EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING PANELBOARDS • UNINSULATED METAL PIPING • UNINSULATED PLASTIC PIPING • PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS • METAL CONDUIT • PLASTIC CONDUIT • DUCT, EQUIPMENT AND PIPE INSULATION HAVING COTTON OR CANVAS INSULATION COVERING OR OTHER PAINTABLE JACKET MATERIAL • OTHER ITEMS AS DIRECTED BY ARCHITECT b. PAINT PORTIONS OF INTERNAL SURFACES OF METAL DUCTS, WITHOUT LINER, BEHIND AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS THAT ARE VISIBLE FROM OCCUPIED SPACES. SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 1. STUDS AND RUNNERS: ASTM C 645 A. MIN BASE-METAL THICKNESS: 0.027" a. EQUIVALENT COATINGS AND METAL THICKNESS (DIMPLED STEEL) STUDS WILL NOT BE ALLOWED. B. DEPTH: AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS C. PROTECTIVE COATING: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, HOT-DIP GALVANIZED SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 1. MANUFACTURERS A. EFCO CORPORATION B. KAWNEER NORTH AMERICA; AN ALCOA COMPANY C. OLDCASTLE BUILDING ENVELOPE 2. FRAMING MEMBERS: MANUFACTURER'S EXTRUDED-OR FORMEDALUMINUM FRAMING MEMBERS OF THICKNESS REQUIRED AND REINFORCED AS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT IMPOSED LOADS. A. MEMBER SIZE: 2" x 4-1/2" B. CONSTRUCTION: NON-THERMAL C. GLAZING SYSTEM: RETAINED MECHANICALLY WITH GASKETS ON FOUR SIDES D. GLAZING PANE: CENTER E. FINISH: CLEAR ANODIZED F. FABRICATION METHOD: FIELD-FABRICATED STICK SYSTEM 3. BACKER PANELS: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD, CONTINUOUS BACKER PLATES FOR FRAMING MEMBERS, IF NOT INTEGRAL, WHERE FRAMING ABUTS ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION. 4. BRACKET AND REINFORCEMENTS: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD HIGH-STRENGTH ALUMINUM WITH NON-STAINING, NONFERROUS SHIMS FOR ALIGNING SYSTEM COMPONENTS. 5. MATERIALS: A. ALUMINUM: ALLOY AND TEMPER RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER FOR TYPE OF USE AND FINISH INDICATED. a. SHEET AND PLATE: ASTM B 209 b. EXTRUDED BARS, RODS, PROFILES, AND TUBES: ASTM B 221 c. EXTRUDED STRUCTURAL PIPE AND TUBES: ASTM B 429/B 429M d. STRUCTURAL PROFILES: ASTM B 308/B 308M B. STEEL REINFORCEMENT: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD ZINCRICH, CORROSION-RESISTANT PRIMER COMPLYING WITH SSPC-PS GUIDE NO 12.00; APPLIED IMMEDIATELY AFTER SURFACE PREPARATION AND PRE-TREATMENT. SELECT SURFACE PREPARATION METHODS ACCORDING TO RECOMMENDATION IN SSPC-SP COM, AND PREPARE SURFACES ACCORDING TO APPLICABLE SSPC STANDARD. a. STRUCTURAL SHAPES, PLATES, AND BARS: ASTM A 26/A 26M b. COLD-ROLLED SHEET AND STRIP: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M c. HOT-ROLLED SHEET AND STRIP: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M 6. GLAZING: COMPLY WITH SECTION 08 80 00 "GLAZING." A. GLAZING GASKETS: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD SEALEDCORNER PRESSURE-GLAZING SYSTEM OF BLACK, RESILIENT ELASTOMERIC GLAZING GASKETS, SETTING BLOCKS, AND SHIMS OR SPACERS. SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 1. GLASS PRODUCTS A. FULLY TEMPERED FLOAT GLASS: ASTM C 1048, KIND FT (FULLY TEMPERED), CONDITION A (UNCOATED) UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, TYPE 1, CLASS 1 (CLEAR), QUALITY Q3. 2. GLASS SCHEDULE: A. MONOLITHIC-GLASS (TYPE S-1) a. CLEAR FULLY TEMPERED FLOAT GLASS b. THICKNESS: 6.0 MM (0.25 INCH) c. PROVIDE SAFETY LABELING, 16 CFR 1201, CATEGORY II SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 1. GYPSUM BOARD, TYPE X: ASTM C1396/C1396M. 1. LONG EDGES: TAPERED. 2. SOUND-ATTENUATION BLANKETS: ASTM C665, TYPE I (BLANKETS WITHOUT MEMBRANE FACING) PRODUCED BY COMBINING THERMOSETTING RESINS WITH MINERAL FIBERS MANUFACTURED FROM GLASS, SLAG WOOL, OR ROCK WOOL. 1. FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED ASSEMBLIES: COMPLY WITH MINERAL-FIBER REQUIREMENTS OF ASSEMBLY. 2. SURFACE-BURNING CHARACTERISTICS: COMPLY WITH ASTM E84; TESTING BY A QUALIFIED TESTING AGENCY. A. FLAME-SPREAD INDEX: 25 OR LESS. B. SMOKE-DEVELOPED INDEX: 50 OR LESS. 3. ACOUSTICAL SEALANT: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD NONSAG, PAINTABLE, NONSTAINING LATEX SEALANT COMPLYING WITH ASTM C834. PRODUCT EFFECTIVELY REDUCES AIRBORNE SOUND TRANSMISSION THROUGH PERIMETER JOINTS AND OPENINGS IN BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AS DEMONSTRATED BY TESTING REPRESENTATIVE ASSEMBLIES ACCORDING TO ASTM E90. 4. GYPSUM BOARD FINISH LEVELS: FINISH PANELS TO LEVELS INDICATED BELOW AND ACCORDING TO ASTM C840: 1. LEVEL 1: CEILING PLENUM AREAS, CONCEALED AREAS, AND WHERE INDICATED. 2. LEVEL 4: AT PANEL SURFACES THAT WILL BE EXPOSED TO VIEW UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNS 1. SUBMITTALS A. PRODUCT DATA: FOR EACH TYPE OF PRODUCT. B. SHOP DRAWINGS: FOR PANEL SIGNS. C. SAMPLES FOR INITIAL SELECTION: FOR EACH TYPE OF SIGN ASSEMBLY, EXPOSED COMPONENT, AND EXPOSED FINISH. a. INCLUDE REPRESENTATIVE SAMPLES OF AVAILABLE TYPESTYLES AND GRAPHIC SYMBOLS. D. SAMPLES FOR VERIFICATION: FULL-SIZE SAMPLE SHOWING ALL COMPONENTS AND WITH THE REQUIRED FINISH(ES) 2. PANEL SIGNS A. PANEL SIGN: SIGN WITH SMOOTH, UNIFORM SURFACES; WITH MESSAGE AND CHARACTERS HAVING UNIFORM FACES, SHARP CORNERS, AND PRECISELY FORMED LINES AND PROFILES; AND AS FOLLOWS: B. SOLID-SHEET SIGN:ACRYLIC SHEET WITH FINISH SPECIFIED IN "SURFACE FINISH AND APPLIED GRAPHICS" SUBPARAGRAPH AND AS FOLLOWS: a. THICKNESS:MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD FOR SIZE OF SIGN. b. SURFACE-APPLIED, RAISED GRAPHICS: APPLIED POLYMER CHARACTERS AND BRAILLE. c. SIGN-PANEL PERIMETER: FINISH EDGES SMOOTH. d. CORNER CONDITION IN ELEVATION:SQUARE. e. MOUNTING:SURFACE MOUNTED TO WALL WITH ADHESIVE AND TWOFACE TAPE. f. SURFACE FINISH AND APPLIED GRAPHICS: • INTEGRAL ACRYLIC SHEET COLOR:AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT FROM FULL RANGE OF INDUSTRY COLORS. • TEXT AND TYPEFACE:ACCESSIBLE RAISED CHARACTERS AND BRAILLE AND VARIABLE CONTENT AS SCHEDULED.FINISH RAISED CHARACTERS TO CONTRAST WITH BACKGROUND COLOR, AND FINISH BRAILLE TO MATCH BACKGROUND COLOR. AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT FROM FULL RANGE OF INDUSTRY COLORS. C. MATERIALS a. ACRYLIC SHEET: ASTM D 4802, CATEGORY AS STANDARD WITH MANUFACTURER FOR EACH SIGN, TYPE UVF (UV FILTERING). b. TWO-FACE TAPE: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD HIGH-BOND, FOAM-CORE TAPE, 0.045 INCH THICK, WITH ADHESIVE ON BOTH SIDES. D. INSTALLATION a. INSTALL SIGNS LEVEL, PLUMB, TRUE TO LINE, AND AT LOCATIONS AND HEIGHTS INDICATED, WITH SIGN SURFACES FREE OF DISTORTION AND OTHER DEFECTS IN APPEARANCE. E. SCHEDULE a. PROVIDE (1) SIGN FOR EACH DOOR NUMBERINDICATED ON PLANS. SECTION 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. FOR PENETRATIONS IN FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED WALLS: PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS WITH RATINGS DETERMINED PER ASTM E814 OR UL 1479, BASED ON TESTING AT A POSITIVE PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL OF 0.01-INCH WG. 1. F-RATING: NOT LESS THAN THE FIRE-RESISTANCE RATING OF CONSTRUCTIONS PENETRATED. 2. FM APPROVED B. ACCESSORIES: PROVIDE COMPONENTS FOR EACH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM THAT ARE NEEDED TO INSTALL FILL MATERIALS AND TO MAINTAIN RATINGS REQUIRED. USE ONLY THOSE COMPONENTS SPECIFIED BY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM MANUFACTURER AND APPROVED BY QUALIFIED TESTING AND INSPECTING AGENCY FOR CONDITIONS INDICATED. 1. PERMANENT FORMING/DAMMING/BACKING MATERIALS. 2. SUBSTRATE PRIMERS. 3. COLLARS. 4. STEEL SLEEVES. C. INSTALL PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS TO COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AND PUBLISHED DRAWINGS FOR PRODUCTS AND APPLICATIONS. 1. INSTALLATION SHALL BE BY AN FM APPROVED CONTRACTOR. D. INSTALL FILL MATERIALS BY PROVEN TECHNIQUES TO PRODUCE THE FOLLOWING RESULTS: 1. FILL VOIDS AND CAVITIES FORMED BY OPENINGS, FORMING MATERIALS, ACCESSORIES AND PENETRATING ITEMS TO ACHIEVE REQUIRED FIRERESISTANCE RATINGS. 2. APPLY MATERIALS SO THEY CONTACT AND ADHERE TO SUBSTRATES FORMED BY OPENINGS AND PENETRATING ITEMS. 3. FOR FILL MATERIALS THAT WILL REMAIN EXPOSED AFTER COMPLETING THE WORK, FINISH TO PRODUCE SMOOTH, UNIFORM SURFACES THAT ARE FLUSH WITH ADJOINING FINISHES. 1. PRODUCT: CABINETS A. MANUFACTURER: MOTT MANUFACTURING B. PRODUCT: ARCHITECTURAL OVERLAY CABINETS WITH WOOD VENEER FRONTS C. CABINETS: a. CABINET SIDES: 18 GA b. TOP RAILS: 14 GA c. DOOR FRONTS: 18GA d. RUBBER BUMPERS/SILENCERS e. ADJUSTABLE SHELVES: 20GA f. PULLS: 4" STAINLESS STEEL WIRE PULL g. HINGES: STAINLESS STEEL OVERLAY HINGES h. WOOD VENEER: AWI PREMIUM BIRCH, ROTARY SLICED, BOOK MATCH, NATURAL (CLEAR) FINISH i. STEEL FINISH: POWDER COATED D. BASE CABINET a. REMOVABLE BACK: 20 GA b. REAR RAIL: 16 GA c. DRAWER RUNNER SUPPORT: 14 GA GALVANIZED d. DRAWER LINER: 20 GA e. ROLLER CATCHES f. 3/8" THREADED LEVELER PLATE: 11 GA g. DRAWER WITH INTEGRAL SIDES & BACK: 18 GA OR 20 GA h. ENCLOSED TOE SPACE: 18 GA SECTION 08 42 29.23 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 1. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. OPENING FORCE: a. POWER-OPERATED DOORS: NOT MORE THAN 50LBF REQUIRED TO MANUALLY SET DOOR IN MOTION IF POWER FAILS, AND NOT MORE THAN 15LBF REQUIRED TO OPEN DOOR TO MINIMUM REQUIRED WIDTH. b. BREAKAWAY DEVICE FOR POWER-OPERATED DOORS: NOT MORE THAN 50LBF REQUIRED FOR A BREAKAWAY DOOR OR PANEL TO OPEN. c. ENTRAPMENT-PREVENTION FORCE: • POWER-OPERATED SLIDING DOORS: NOT MORE THAN 30LBF REQUIRED TO PREVENT STOPPED DOOR FROM CLOSING. 2. GENERAL: A. PROVIDEMANUFACTURER'S STANDARD AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES, INCLUDING DOORS, SIDELITES, FRAMING, HEADERS, CARRIER ASSEMBLIES, ROLLER TRACKS, DOOR OPERATORS, CONTROLS, AND ACCESSORIES REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 3. SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE: A. SINGLE-SLIDING UNITS: a. BASIS OF DESIGN: ASSA ABLOY BESAM SL500, OVERHEAD CONCEALED FIXED SIDELITE NARROW STILE SINGLE SLIDE DOOR SYSTEM. b. MANUFACTURERS:SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS, PROVIDE PRODUCTS BY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING: • BESAM ENTRANCE SOLUTIONS; AN ASSA ABLOY GROUP COMPANY. • HORTON AUTOMATICS; A DIVISION OF OVERHEAD DOOR CORPORATION. • STANLEY ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES. B. CONFIGURATION, SINGLE-SLIDING: SINGLE-SLIDING DOOR WITH ONE SLIDING LEAF AND SIDELITE. a. TRAFFIC PATTERN: TWO WAY. b. EMERGENCY BREAKAWAY CAPABILITY: SLIDING LEAF ONLY. c. MOUNTING: BETWEEN JAMBS. C. OPERATOR FEATURES: a. POWER OPENING AND CLOSING. b. DRIVE SYSTEM: BELT. c. ADJUSTABLE OPENING AND CLOSING SPEEDS. d. ADJUSTABLE HOLD-OPEN TIME BETWEEN ZERO AND 30 SECONDS. e. OBSTRUCTION RECYCLE. f. ON-OFF/HOLD-OPEN SWITCH TO CONTROL ELECTRIC POWER TO OPERATOR. D. SLIDING-DOOR CARRIER ASSEMBLIES AND OVERHEAD ROLLER TRACKS: CARRIER ASSEMBLY THAT ALLOWS VERTICAL ADJUSTMENT; CONSISTING OF NYLON-OR DELRIN-COVERED, BALL-BEARING-CENTE R STEEL WHEELS OPERATING ON A CONTINUOUS ROLLER TRACK, OR BALL-BEARING-CENTER STEEL WHEELS OPERATING ON A NYLON-OR DELRIN-COVERED, CONTINUOUS ROLLER TRACK. SUPPORT DOORS FROM CARRIER ASSEMBLY BY CANTILEVER AND PIVOT ASSEMBLY. a. ROLLERS: MINIMUM OF TWO BALL-BEARING ROLLER WHEELS AND TWO ANTIRISE ROLLERS FOR EACH ACTIVE LEAF. E. SLIDING-DOOR THRESHOLD: THRESHOLD MEMBERS AND BOTTOMGUIDE-TRACK SYSTEM WITH STAINLESS STEEL, BALL-BEARINGCENTER ROLLER WHEELS. a. CONFIGURATION, NO THRESHOLD: NO THRESHOLD ACROSS DOOR OPENING AND SURFACE-MOUNTED GUIDE-TRACK SYSTEM AT SIDELITES. F. CONTROLS: ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES ACCORDING TO BHMA STANDARDS. G. FINISH: FINISH FRAMING, DOOR(S), AND HEADER WITH CLASSI, CLEAR ANODIC FINISH. 4. ENTRANCE COMPONENTS: A. FRAMING MEMBERS: EXTRUDED ALUMINUM, MINIMUM 0.125INCH THICK AND REINFORCED AS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT IMPOSED LOADS. a. NOMINAL SIZE: 1-3/4 BY 4-1/2INCHES. b. EXTRUDED GLAZING STOPS AND APPLIED TRIM: MINIMUM 0.062-INCH WALL THICKNESS. B. STILE AND RAIL DOORS: 1-3/4-INCH-THICK, GLAZED DOORS WITH MINIMUM 0.125-INCH-THICK, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM TUBULAR STILE AND RAIL MEMBERS. MECHANICALLY FASTEN CORNERS WITH REINFORCING BRACKETS THAT ARE WELDED, OR INCORPORATE CONCEALED TIE-RODS THAT SPAN FULL LENGTH OF TOP AND BOTTOM RAILS. a. GLAZING STOPS AND GASKETS: BEVELED, SNAP-ON, EXTRUDEDALUMINUM STOPS AND PREFORMED GASKETS. b. STILE DESIGN: AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. c. RAIL DESIGN: AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. C. SIDELITE(S): 1-3/4-INCH-DEEP SIDELITE(S) WITH MINIMUM 0.125-INCHTHICK, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM TUBULAR STILE AND RAIL MEMBERS MATCHING DOOR DESIGN. a. GLAZING STOPS AND GASKETS: SAME MATERIALS AND DESIGN AS FOR STILE AND RAIL DOOR. D. HEADERS: FABRICATED FROM MINIMUM 0.125-INCH-THICK EXTRUDED ALUMINUM AND EXTENDING FULL WIDTH OF AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE UNITS TO CONCEAL DOOR OPERATORS AND CONTROLS. PROVIDE HINGED OR REMOVABLE ACCESS PANELS FOR SERVICE AND ADJUSTMENT OF DOOR OPERATORS AND CONTROLS. SECURE PANELS TO PREVENT UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS. a. MOUNTING: CONCEALED, WITH ONE SIDE OF HEADER FLUSH WITH FRAMING. b. CAPACITY: CAPABLE OF SUPPORTING DOORS OF UP TO 175LB PER LEAF OVER SPANS OF UP TO 14FEET WITHOUT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS • PROVIDE SAG RODS FOR SPANS EXCEEDING 14FEET. E. BRACKETS AND REINFORCEMENTS: HIGH-STRENGTH ALUMINUM WITH NONSTAINING, NONFERROUS SHIMS FOR ALIGNING SYSTEM COMPONENTS. F. SIGNAGE: AS REQUIRED BY CITED BHMA STANDARD. a. APPLICATION PROCESS: DOOR MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD PROCESS. SECTION 08 42 29.23 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES (CONTINUED) 5. DOOR OPERATORS AND CONTROLS A. GENERAL: PROVIDE OPERATORS AND CONTROLS, WHICH INCLUDE ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES ACCORDING TO BHMA STANDARDS, FOR CONDITION OF EXPOSURE, AND FOR LONG-TERM, MAINTENANCEFREE OPERATION UNDER NORMAL TRAFFIC LOAD TYPE FOR OCCUPANCY INDICATED. B. DOOR OPERATORS: PROVIDE DOOR OPERATORS OF SIZE RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER FOR DOOR SIZE, WEIGHT AND MOVEMENT. a. DOOR OPERATOR PERFORMANCE: DOOR OPERATORS SHALL OPEN AND CLOSE DOORS AND MAINTAIN THEM IN FULLY CLOSED POSITION WHEN SUBJECTED TO PROJECT'S DESIGN LOADS. b. ELECTROMECHANICAL OPERATORS: CONCEALED, SELF-CONTAINED, OVERHEAD UNITS POWERED BY FRACTIONAL-HORSEPOWER, PERMANENT-MAGNET DC MOTOR; WITH CLOSING SPEED CONTROLLED MECHANICALLY BY GEAR TRAIN AND DYNAMICALLY BY BRAKING ACTION OF ELECTRIC MOTOR; WITH SOLID-STATE MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLER; COMPLYING WITH UL 325; AND WITH MANUAL OPERATION WITH POWER OFF. C. PHOTOELECTRIC BEAMS: PULSED INFRARED, SENDER-RECEIVER ASSEMBLY FOR RECESSED MOUNTING. BEAMS SHALL NOT BE ACTIVE WHEN DOORS ARE FULLY CLOSED. a. INSTALL PHOTOELECTRIC BEAMS IN VERTICAL JAMBS OF SIDELITES WITH DIMENSION ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AS FOLLOWS: • TOP BEAM: 48 INCHES • BOTTOM BEAM: 24 INCHES D. ACTIVATION SWITCH: PUSH PLATE ACTIVATION DOOR-CONTROL SWITCH; FACEPLATE WITH CONTRASTING-COLORED, ENGRAVED MESSAGE: a. FACEPLATE MATERIAL: STAINLESS STEEL b. MOUNTING: DOOR FRAME JAMB c. SIZE: 1-1/2" WIDE X 4-3/4" HIGH d. MESSAGE: PUSH TO OPEN e. SYMBOL: BLUE HANDICAP SYMBOL E. MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL BOX: a. MODE SELECTOR CONTROL: • MULTI-POSITION, KEYED CYLINDER SWITCH MODE SELECTOR SWITCH TO BE INTERIOR JAMB MOUNTED AND SHALL ALLOW SELECTION OF THE INDICATED FUNCTIONS TO BE ENGAGED WHEN SWITCH IS TURNED TO THE APPROPRIATE SETTING. b. MODE SELECTOR CONTROL TO ALLOW THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS: • "OFF" • "EXIT ONLY" ONE WAY TRAFFIC WITH AUTOMATIC OPERATION FROM THE INTERIOR • "TWO WAY TRAFFIC" ALLOWING AUTOMATIC OPERATION FROM EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR • "PARTIAL OPENING" ENERGY SAVING DOOR POSITION ALLOWS DOOR TO AUTOMATICALLY ADJUST OPENING WIDTH BASED ON AMOUNT OF USAGE; FULL OPEN DURING HIGH USE AND PARTIAL OPEN DURING LOW USE. THE CONTROL FOR THIS SETTING IS PROGRAMMABLE ALLOWING ADJUSTMENT TO BOTH THE USAGE SETTING AND THE OPENING WIDTH • "HOLD OPEN" DOORS ACTIVATED AND HELD IN THE FULL OPEN POSITION. 6. HARDWARE A. GENERAL: PROVIDE UNITS IN SIZES AND TYPES RECOMMENDED BY AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE AND HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS FOR ENTRANCES AND USES INDICATED. FINISH EXPOSED PARTS TO MATCH DOOR FINISHUNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. B. BREAKAWAY DEVICE FOR POWER-OPERATED DOORS: DEVICE THAT ALLOWS DOOR TO SWING OUT IN DIRECTION OF EGRESS TO FULL 90 DEGREES FROM ANY OPERATING POSITION. MAXIMUM FORCE TO OPEN DOOR SHALL BE AS STIPULATED IN "PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS" ARTICLE. INTERRUPT POWERED OPERATION OF DOOR OPERATOR WHILE IN BREAKAWAY MODE. a. INCLUDE ONE ADJUSTABLE DETENT DEVICE MOUNTED AT THE TOP OF EACH BREAKAWAY PANEL TO CONTROL BREAKAWAY FORCE. • LIMIT ARMS: LIMIT SWING TO 90 DEGREES, SPRING LOADED WITH ADJUSTABLE FRICTION DAMPING. C. WEATHER STRIPPING: REPLACEABLE COMPONENTS. a. SLIDING TYPE: AAMA701/702, MADE OF WOOL, POLYPROPYLENE, OR NYLON WOVEN PILE WITH NYLON-FABRIC OR ALUMINUM-STRIP BACKING. 7. DEMONSTRATION A. ENGAGE A FACTORY-AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE TO TRAIN OWNER'S MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL TO ADJUST, OPERATE, AND MAINTAIN SAFE OPREATION OF THE DOOR. SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 1. COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING STANDARDS: COMPLY WITH AISI S100, AISI S200, AISI S211 (WALL STUDS), AISI S212 (HEADERS) AND AISI S213 (LATERAL DESIGN) 2. COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING MATERIALS: A. PROTECTIVE COATING: ASTM A 1003/A 1003/M, STRUCTURAL GRADE, TYPE H, METALLIC COATED, ST33H,G60 OR A60 B. WALL STUDS: AISI S211 a. MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD C-SHAPED STEEL STUDS, OF WEB DEPTHS INDICATED, UNPUNCHED, WITH UNSTIFFENED FLANGES. • MIN BASE-METAL THICKNESS: 0.0538" 1. EQUIVALENT COATINGS AND METAL THICKNESS (DIMPLED STEEL) STUDS WILL NOT BE ALLOWED. • FLANGE WIDTH: 1-3/8" • DEPTH: AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS C. STEEL TRACK: a. MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD U-SHAPED STEEL TRACK, OF WEB DEPTHS INDICATED, UNPUNCHED, WITH UNSTIFFENED FLANGES, AND AS FOLLOWS: • MIN BASE-METAL THICKNESS: MATCHING STEEL STUDS. • FLANGE WIDTH: 1-1/4" D. SINGLE DEFLECTION TRACK: a. MANUFACTURER'S SINGLE, DEEP-LEG, U-SHAPED STEEL TRACK; UNPUNCHED, WITH UNSTIFFENED FLANGES, OF WEB DEPTH TO CONTAIN STUDS WHILE ALLOWING FREE VERTICAL MOVEMENT, WITH FLANGES DESIGNED TO SUPPORT HORIZONTAL LOADS AND TRANSFER THEM TO THE PRIMARY STRUCTURE, AND AS FOLLOWS: • MIN BASE-METAL THICKNESS: 0.0538" • FLANGE WIDTH: 1" PLUS THE DESIGN GAP FOR ONE-STORY STRUCTURES. E. HEADERS: AISI S212 a. MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD C-SHAPERS USED TO FORM HEADER BEAMS OF WEB DEPTHS INDICATED, UNPUNCHED, WITH STIFFENED FLANGES. • MIN BASE-METAL THICKNESS: 0.0538" • EQUIVALENT COATINGS AND METAL THICKNESS (DIMPLED STEEL) STUDS WILL NOT BE ALLOWED. • FLANGE WIDTH: 1-3/8" • DEPTH: AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS F. FRAMING ACCESSORIES a. FABRICATE STEEL-FRAMING ACCESSORIES FROM ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, STRUCTURAL GRADE, TYPE H, METALLIC COATED STEEL HEET, OF SAME GRADE AND COATING DESIGNATION USED FOR FRAMING MEMBERS. b. PROVIDE ACCESSORIES OF MANUFACTURER'S TANDARD THICKNESS AND CONFIGURATION, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:29:12 PM B IM 360://20625.03 Cornell University Upson Hall Room 466/Upson Hall 466-ARCH-R20.rvt 20625.03 SDF Specifications CRE CRE A-602 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 WALL HYDRANT (WH) / HOSE BIBB (HB) VENT PIPING UNION CHECK VALVE BALANCING VALVE SHUT OFF VALVE INDIRECT WASTE PIPING (IW)IW FLOOR DRAIN (FD) / FLOOR SINK (FS) CLEANOUT (CO) WALL PLATE CLEANOUT (WPCO) DECK PLATE CLEANOUT (DPCO) CAP OR PLUG PIPE CONTINUATION "P" TRAP TOP TEE CONNECTION BOTTOM/TEE CONNECTION ELBOW UP 45°OFFSET ELBOW DOWN DESCRIPTION PLUMBING SYMBOL LIST SYMBOL COMPRESSED AIR PIPING (CA)CA NATURAL GAS PIPING (G)G ST STORM WATER SEWER PIPING (ST) STRAINER SANITARY SEWER PIPINGSAN TEMPERED HOT WATER RETURN PIPING (TWR)TWR TEMPERED HOT WATER PIPING (TW)TW HOT WATER RECIRCULATING PIPING (HWR) HOT WATER PIPING (HW) COLD WATER PIPING (CW) NEW PIPING LOCATED BELOW FLOOR/SLAB NEW PIPING LOCATED ABOVE FLOOR/SLAB (E) EXISTING PIPING EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PC PLUMBING CONTRACTOR MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR VTR VENT THRU ROOF BFF BELOW FINISHED FLOOR AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR (ETR) EXISTING TO REMAIN (E) EXISTING NTS NOT TO SCALE POINT OF DISCONNECTION POINT OF CONNECTION EXISTING WORK TO BE REMOVED ST(S) SECONDARY STORM WATER SEWER PIPING (ST(S) 8 6.1 5 6 G F 1 1/2" V PIPING UP 2" PIPING UP TO FD 2" SAN CONNECT TO (E)2" SAN (E)2 1/2" V UP & DN COORDINATE WITH FACILITY COORDINATOR AT LEAST THREE WEEKS IN ADVANCE FOR THIS WORK. LAB 366 8 6.1 5 6 G F (E)CA (E)3/4" ● ●● (E)2" SAN, (E)1/2" HW & (E)1/2" CW TO (E)SINK. (E)2" V UP. (E)2" (E)2" ● 1/2" (E)EYEWASH IW 3/4" HOSE BIBB. FINAL CONNECTION TO WATER JET BY CU. FD-A 1 1/2" V DN (E)1 1/2" V (E)2 1/2" V UP & DN (E)V 1 1/2" CUT & PATCH WALL TO CONNECT 3/4" IW TO 2" SAN. PROVIDE ACCESS PANEL. REFER TO DETAIL 1/P-100. 1/2" CA DN TO CA OUTLET. (E)1/2" PROVIDE CONDENSATE CONNECTION TO HVAC EQUIPMENT. ●● 1/2" PROVIDE WALL MOUNTED SPRING RETURN HOSE REEL WITH 8 FOOT OF 1/4" AIR HOSE, QUICK DISCONNECT AND THUMB LEVER AIR GUN TO MATCH WITH QUICK CONNECT, DESIGN BASIS, SPEEDAIRE RETURN HOSE REEL MODEL #2CUD6. REMOVE OR ADJUST SPRINKLER HEAD IN CEILING GRID TO ALLOW WORK TO BE PREFORMED. THEN REINSTALL OR RESET AS REQUIRED WITH CEILING INSTALLMENT. 1/2" TW DN TMV SET TO 50deg. DESIGN BASIS, WATTS LFLM490. (E)2" (E)2" (E)3/4" (E)3/4" (E)3/4" (E)3/4" (E)FP (E)3" (E)FP LAB 466 MAKER SPACE 466A 8 6.1 5 6 G F (E)CA (E)3/4" ● ●● (E)2" SAN, (E)1/2" HW & (E)1/2" CW TO (E)SINK. (E)2" LV UP. (E)2" (E)2" (E)EYEWASH REMOVE CA OUTLET (E)1/2" REMOVE 1/2 CA DN TO OUTLET (E)2 1/2" V UP & DN (E)V (E)1 1/2" REMOVE PIPING AND PREP FOR NEW CONNECTION. (E)3/4" (E)3/4" (E)3/4" (E)3/4" (E)FP (E)FP (E)3" LAB 466 GENERAL NOTES: THESE NOTES ARE APPLICABLE TO THE FULL SET OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE TAKEN FROM FIELD OBSERVATIONS AND PRIOR CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WHEN AVAILABLE. THE LOCATIONS SHOWN MUST BE CONSIDERED APPROXIMATE. OTHER SUCH WORK MAY EXIST, HOWEVER, LOCATION AND SIZE ARE NOT PRESENTLY KNOWN. IT IS STRONGLY ENCOURAGED TO VISIT SITE PRIOR TO BID TO REVIEW EXISTING CONDITIONS AND CONFIRM SCOPE OF WORK. WHEN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION IS DAMAGED DURING WORK BY THIS CONTRACTOR, REPAIR AND/OR REPLACE WITH SIMILAR MATERIALS AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE, SUBJECT TO ARCHITECTS APPROVAL. DISPOSE OF ALL DEMOLITION AND/OR OTHER WASTE MATERIALS CAUSED BY WORK OF THIS CONTRACTOR. LEGALLY DISPOSE ALL MATERIALS TO A LOCATION OFF SITE. COORDINATE AND SCHEDULE WORK AND SHUTDOWNS WITH THE OWNER AND OTHER TRADES PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. ALL EXISTING PIPING TO REMAIN SHALL BE RECONNECTED TO ACTIVE SERVICE PIPING. ALL PIPING TO BE REMOVED, SHALL BE REMOVED BACK TO ACTIVE PIPING AND CAPPED. VALVE AND CAP ALL WATER PIPING. REMOVE ALL INACTIVE PIPING UNLESS NOTED. ALL PIPING TO BE REMOVED AND LOCATED WITHIN A WALL TO REMAIN MAY BE ABANDONED IN PLACE UNLESS NOTED. REMOVE PIPING BACK TO BEHIND THE FINISHED WALL SURFACE AND CAP. PATCH HOLES IN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION LEFT BY THE REMOVAL OF PIPING OR EQUIPMENT WITH MATERIALS TO MATCH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION. MAINTAIN FIRE/SMOKE RATING. DEMOLITION SHALL INCLUDE, BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO: PIPING, VALVES, FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT, HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND INSULATION EXCEPT ASBESTOS. REMOVE EXISTING CONSTRUCTION IN THE WAY OF NEW WORK. PROTECT BUILDING AND FURNISHINGS FROM DAMAGE. WHERE NEW WORK IS TO BE INSTALLED ABOVE AN EXISTING CEILING, PROVIDE FOR THE REMOVAL OF THE CEILING. UPON COMPLETION OF WORK, REPAIR ALL DAMAGED CEILING SURFACES, REPLACE ALL DAMAGED TILES. SLEEVE AND SEAL ALL WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS. PROVIDE FIRESTOPPING FOR ALL PENETRATIONS. MAINTAIN SERVICE CLEARANCES OF ALL EQUIPMENT. ADVISE OTHER TRADES OF THE REQUIRED SERVICE CLEARANCES. PROVIDE FOR THE DRAINING AND REFILLING OF PIPING SYSTEMS, INCLUDING AIR REMOVAL, RESETTING OF FLUSH VALVES, FLUSHING SYSTEMS OF DIRT AND SCALE CAUSED BY SHUTDOWNS AND STARTUPS. PROVIDE CLEANOUTS AT THE BASE OF ALL STORM, SANITARY AND WASTE STACKS. PITCH 4" AND LARGER LAB WASTE PIPING AT 1/8" PER FOOT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. FOR LAB WASTE PIPING 3" AND SMALLER PITCH AT 1/4" PER FOOT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. 2D MINIMUM AIR GAP FUNNEL TRAP GAURD TRAP CLEANOUT 2" IW 2" LV CONDENSATE DRAIN CASKETED ACCESS PANEL CONNECT TO LW FROM SINK CONNECT TO LV FROM SINK DETAIL NOTES: DOMESTIC COLD WATER FLOW DIRECTION LABEL. PROVIDE 360 DEGREE WRAP OVERLAPPING BOTH ENDS OF THE PIPE FUNCTION LABEL AND MATCHING THE FLOW DIRECTION OF THE PIPE CONTENTS. PIPE FUNCTION LABEL A. B. C. D. E. F. PROVIDE A PIPE LABEL FOR EACH PIPE FUNCTION. PROVIDE AT LEAST ONE LABEL ON EACH PIPE FOR EVERY ROOM THE PIPE PASSES THROUGH. PROVIDE LABELS IN LARGE SPACES ON MAXIMUM 20' CENTERS FOR EVERY PIPE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. LABELS TO BE LOCATED IN AN EASILY VISIBLE LOCATION AS THEY WOULD NORMALLY BE SEEN. IE. ON THE BOTTOM HALF OF PIPES IN THE AIR AND ON THE TOP HALF OR SIDES OF PIPES MOUNTED LOW. LABELS SHALL BE, COLOR CODED, PRE-PRINTED, SELF ADHESIVE VINYL. SEE SPECIFICATION FOR OTHER REQUIREMENTS AND LIST OF PIPE FUNCTIONS. NORTH These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:55:12 PM C:\Users\sjgottlieb\Documents\210018_Upson Hall_Plu mbing_Central_R20_sjgottlieb.rvt 20625.03 THK General Notes, Symbols List, Details & Floor Plans - Pumbing GDD CMD P-100 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 1/4" = 1'-0"3 Partial Third Floor Plan - Plumbing 1/4" = 1'-0"5 Partial Fourth Floor Plan - Plumbing 1/4" = 1'-0"4 Partial Fourth Floor Plan - Plumbing Demolition NOT TO SCALE1 INDIRECT WASTE DETAIL NOT TO SCALE2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION LABEL DETAIL DSD MBH THOUSAND BTU/HOUR (E) EXISTING DOUBLE LINE RECTANGULAR DUCT CONTINUED FPM FEET PER MINUTE AIR FLOW AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR PIPE ANCHOR G.C. GENERAL CONTRACTOR PIPE GUIDE E.C. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EXPANSION COMPENSATOR WITH GUIDES N.C. NORMALLY CLOSED PRE-FAB EXPANSION LOOP TEMPERATURE SENSOR STRAINER PRESSURE GAUGE THERMOMETER UNION 24x12DN UP AIR VENTV 24x12 14x8 6" BOOT TAP TT THERMOSTATIC TRAP 14" 18" LATERAL FT FLOAT & THERMOSTATIC TRAP SUPPLY DIFFUSER, REGISTER OR GRILLE TD THERMODYNAMIC TRAP FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK BT BUCKET TRAP COMPRESSED AIRA DIRECTION OF FLOW BBD BOILER BLOW DOWN CONDENSER WATER SUPPLYCS CR CONDENSER WATER RETURN CWS CHILLED WATER SUPPLY CWR CHILLED WATER RETURN D DRAIN FUEL OIL FILLFOF FUEL OIL GAUGEFOG FOS FUEL OIL SUPPLY FOR FUEL OIL RETURN FOV FUEL OIL TANK VENT G GAS GLYCOL SUPPLYGS GLYCOL RETURNGR HPWS HEAT PUMP WATER SUPPLY HPWR HEAT PUMP WATER RETURN HWS HOT WATER SUPPLY HWR HOT WATER RETURN HG HOT GAS LPS LOW PRESSURE STEAM LPC LOW PRESSURE CONDENSATE MPS MEDIUM PRESSURE STEAM MPC MEDIUM PRESSURE CONDENSATE HPS HIGH PRESSURE STEAM HPC HIGH PRESSURE CONDENSATE PC PUMPED CONDENSATE RD REFRIGERANT DISCHARGE RL REFRIGERANT LIQUID RS REFRIGERANT SUCTION VAC VACUUM CW DOMESTIC COLD WATER EXISTING WORK TO BE REMOVED DOUBLE LINE PIPE OR ROUND DUCT CONTINUED E PNEUMATIC THERMOSTAT NTS NOT TO SCALE (DBL) DOUBLE WALL LINED DUCT CFM CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE AD ACCESS DOOR P.C. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR N.O. NORMALLY OPEN DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR HUMIDISTAT ROUND DUCT - IN INCHES12" 24x12 DN UP 14" CONICAL TEE 18" VOLUME DAMPER CAP OR PLUG ELBOW DOWN ELBOW UP AAD AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPER FD FIRE DAMPER SD SMOKE DAMPER BDD BACK DRAFT DAMPER M MOTORIZED DAMPER BALL VALVE GATE VALVE CHECK VALVE BALANCING VALVE BUTTERFLY VALVE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVEPRV CONTROL VALVE PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PLUG (L) (2L) ACOUSTIC THERMAL LINING - 2" THICK M.C. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR W/W WALL TO WALL G THERMOSTAT/SENSOR WITH GUARD G DUCT SECTION - SUPPLY DUCT SECTION - RETURN WIDTH A x DEPTH B A B R D 24x12 14" 6" BOOT TAP BG BLAST GATE FIN TUBE RADIATION VALANCE A B C REGISTER, GRILLE OR DIFFUSER TAG A = TYPE B = NECK SIZE C = CFM B C D FIN TUBE RADIATION TAG FT-A = TYPE B = FIN TUBE LENGTH C = ENCLOSURE LENGTH D = GPM FT-A A B C D VALANCE TAG A = TYPE B = COIL SIZE C = COOLING GPM D = HEATING GPM POINT OF CONNECTION POINT OF DISCONNECTION BOTTOM TAP TRIPLE DUTY VALVETD GLOBE VALVE THREE WAY CONTROL VALVE SUCTION DIFFUSERSD DRAIN VALVE WITH HOSE CONNECTION, CAP AND CHAIN FC FLEX CONNECTOR - DUCTWORK FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR - PIPING AIR TERMINAL UNIT AND TAG (OPTION 1) A B C AIR TERMINAL UNIT TAG (OPTION 2) A = UNIT NO. B = MAXIMUM CFM C = MINIMUM CFM AxB FO DUCT SECTION - FLAT OVAL (FO) V VENT REDUCER S H S ACOUSTIC THERMAL LINING - 1-1/2" THICK EXHAUST GRILLE RETURN REGISTER SINGLE LINE PIPE CONTINUED TRANSITION SQUARE TO ROUND RISE IN DUCT - IN DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW DROP IN DUCT - IN DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW SUPPLY DUCT TURNING UP OR DOWN RETURN DUCT TURNING UP OR DOWN SUPPLY/RETURN RECTANGULAR MAIN RECTANGULAR BRANCH SUPPLY/RETURN RECTANGULAR MAIN ROUND BRANCH SUPPLY/RETURN ROUND MAIN ROUND BRANCH SUPPLY/RETURN ROUND MAIN ROUND BRANCH MITERED ELBOW WITH TURNING VANES DESCRIPTIONSYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL T RELIEF VALVE T HVAC SYMBOL LIST X X DRAWING KEYNOTE DEMOLITION KEYNOTE A B C RADIANT CEILING PANEL TAG A = TYPE B = LENGTH C = GPM CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR C CARBON MONOXIDE SENSORCO GAS SENSORG SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION AVERAGING SENSOR S S START/STOP O C OPEN/CLOSE E D ENABLE/DISABLE T TEMPERATURE SENSOR (DUCT OR PIPE MOUNTED) H HUMIDITY SENSOR (DUCT MOUNTED) I P ELECTRICAL INTERFACE AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPER (PARALLEL BLADE) AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPER (OPPOSED BLADE) E ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE (3-WAY) E ES END SWITCH EA EXHAUST AIR MOISTURE SENSOR OCCUPANCY SENSOR FLOW METER SUPPLY FANSF BTU ENERGY METERBTU P DIFFERENTIAL STATIC PRESSURE SWITCH ALARM STATUS PROBE SENSOR RELAY FREEZE-STATFZ E ELECTRIC ACTUATOR CURRENT TRANSDUCER FLOW SENSOR AIR FLOW MEASURING STATION HARD WIRE INTERFACE S SOLENOID VALVE S M MANUAL SWITCH THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR (DUCT MOUNTED) CO 2 BINARY POINT ANALOG POINT THERMOWELL P DIFFERENTIAL STATIC PRESSURE TRANSMITTER ASD ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE R134a REFRIGERANT R134a SENSOR (WALL MOUNTED) C C COOLING COIL BASE MOUNTED PUMP FILTER BANK RETURN AIR FANRF EF EXHAUST AIR FAN H C HEATING COIL SMOKE CONTROL FANSC HUMIDIFIER DISPERSION GRID E P ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC SWITCH OR RELAY P E PNEUMATIC/ELECTRIC SWITCH OR RELAY F FLOW TRANSMITTER P PRESSURE TRANSMITTER ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER I E ELECTRONIC/ELECTRIC TRANSDUCER PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE (3-WAY) PNEUMATIC CONTROL VALVE (2-WAY) ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE (2-WAY) PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR MAIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL AIR SOURCE A IN LINE PUMP HR C HEAT RECOVERY COIL AIR TERMINAL UNIT WITH FACTORY ATTENUATOR (OPTION 1) VAV-X-XX VAV-X-XX LAB AIR VALVE RADIANT CEILING PANEL FLOW SWITCH VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE G B GAS BURNER P PRESSURE SWITCH HUMIDIFIERH A R S OS M FS F BUTTERFLY CONTROL DAMPER VFD OA OUTSIDE AIR RA RETURN AIR SA SUPPLY AIR CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR (DUCT MOUNTED) CO F.L. FAIL LAST DEWPOINT SENSOR (DUCT MOUNTED) DP C CONDENSATE SENSOR STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR (DUCT MOUNTED) SP CT BI BINARY INPUT BO BINARY OUTPUT AI ANALOG INPUT AO ANALOG OUTPUT BV BINARY VALUE AV ANALOG VALUE HIGH LEVEL SWITCHHI LOW LOW LEVEL SWITCH VENTURI AIRFLOW CONTROL VALVE TRANSFORMER MOTOR STARTERMS ROTATION DETECTORRD SMOKE DETECTORSD MOD MODULATING ELECTRIC TO PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER E P SPEED COMMANDSC AOM ADDRESSABLE OUTPUT MODULE (FIRE ALARM INTERFACE) COM NETWORK COMMUNICATION INTERFACE POINT SIGNAL OUT CURRENT SENSORCS SIGNAL OUT A SIGNAL IN AIR IN A SIGNAL IN ELECTRIC TO PNEUMATIC SWITCH LINE VOLTAGE THERMOSTAT T NITROGEN DIOXIDE SENSORN MOTOR S SPACE SENSOR WITH SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT SA S SPACE SENSOR WITH OCCUPANCY OVERRIDE S SPACE SENSOR WITH VISUAL DISPLAY S SPACE SENSOR WITH FAN ON/OFF SWITCH T ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT T T T ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH OCCUPANCY OVERRIDE ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH VISUAL DISPLAY ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH FAN ON/OFF SWITCH BINARY INPUT (GENERAL) BI BO BINARY OUTPUT (GENERAL) ANALOG INPUT (GENERAL) ANALOG OUTPUT (GENERAL) AI AO LIQUID IMMERSION TEMPERATURE SENSOR T SINGLE POINT SENSOR M M OV D F SA OV D F F.O. FAIL OPEN RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR RH LOW LIMIT TEMPERATURE SWITCH FZ CONTROLS SCHEMATIC SYMBOL LIST GENERAL NOTES: A. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO DISPOSE OF ALL DEMOLITION DEBRIS AND MATERIALS OFF SITE IN A PROPER LEGAL MANNER. B. ALL NEW PENETRATIONS THROUGH WALLS, FLOORS AND ROOFS SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, PIPING, ETC. ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH RATED WALLS AND FLOORS SHALL BE FIRE/SMOKE STOPPED. ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH NON RATED WALLS SHALL BE SEALED WITH A NON-HARDENING SEALANT ON BOTH SIDES OF WALL PENETRATION TO REDUCE NOISE TRANSMISSION. C. THE DUCTWORK SIZES AND TYPES (ROUND, RECTANGULAR AND FLAT OVAL)WERE SELECTED FOR SPACE LIMITATION WITHIN THE RENOVATED AREA. IN ADDITION, THE DUCTWORK SIZES AND TYPES WERE CHOSEN TO ALLOW SPACE ABOVE THE CEILINGS FOR FUTURE DUCTWORK, PIPING AND/OR CONDUIT. IT IS NOT ACCEPTABLE FOR THE CONTRACTOR TO CHANGE THE SIZE OR TYPE OF DUCTWORK FOR BIDDING OR INSTALLATION UNLESS SPECIFICALLY APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. D. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE ALL SHUTDOWNS OF AIR HANDLING, CHILLED WATER, HOT WATER, STEAM, ETC. SYSTEMS WITH CORNELL UNIVERSITY FACILITY PERSONNEL FOR TIE-IN CONNECTIONS. ALL SHUT DOWNS WILL OCCUR DURING NIGHTS OR WEEKENDS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ASSIST THE UNIVERSITY PERSONNEL IN SHUTTING DOWN, DRAINING, VENTING, ETC. OF SYSTEM TO FACILITATE THE INTENDED WORK. E. A MINIMUM OF 1'-6" SHALL BE PROVIDED IN FRONT OF CONTROL ACCESS ENCLOSURES AT ALL TERMINAL UNITS. NO PIPING OR CONDUIT SHALL BE DIRECTLY INSTALLED BELOW AIR TERMINAL UNIT ACCESS ENCLOSURES THAT WILL PROHIBIT ACCESS UP TO THE CONTROL ENCLOSURE. COORDINATE THESE REQUIREMENTS WITH ALL OTHER TRADES ON THE PROJECT. IF PROPER SERVICE ACCESS IS NOT MAINTAINED BECAUSE OF POOR COORDINATION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL RELOCATE OBSTRUCTIONS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. F. PROVIDE A VOLUME DAMPER AT EACH DIFFUSER AND GRILLE FOR PROPER BALANCING REGARDLESS IF SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. ALL VOLUME DAMPERS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 6'-0" FROM DIFFUSER OR GRILLE CONNECTION. IF FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK IS UTILIZED FOR FINAL CONNECTION AT GRILLES, THE CROSS SECTIONAL AREA OF THE FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN THE CROSS SECTIONAL AREA OF THE GRILLE NECK. G. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE THE LOCATIONS OF ALL ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSORS WITH THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SCHEDULE A WALK THROUGH WITH THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER TO LOCATE SENSOR LOCATIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. THE TEMPERATURE SENSORS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ALIGNMENT WITH ELECTRICAL, FIRE, AND OTHER DEVICES WHEN LOCATED ON COMMON WALLS. H. DAMAGE TO EXISTING SYSTEMS (EQUIPMENT, PIPING, DUCTWORK, CONTROLS AND ACCESSORIES) SHOWN TO REMAIN AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTORS WORK IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO REPAIR AND/OR REPLACE WITH SIMILAR OR LIKE MATERIALS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. I. COORDINATE ALL SHUT DOWNS WITH OWNER PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. J. THE DEMOLITION DRAWINGS SHOW IN GENERAL MAJOR EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND DUCTWORK REMOVALS. THE INTENT IS NOT TO IDENTIFY ALL MISCELLANEOUS PIPING, PIPING ACCESSORIES, DUCTWORK, DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES, SUPPORTS, CONTROLS, CONTROL ACCESSORIES, CONTROL WIRING, CONDUIT, AND CONTROL PNEUMATIC TUBING AND ACCESSORIES TO BE DISCONNECTED AND REMOVED BUT IS THE REQUIREMENTS UNDER THIS CONTRACT. NO EQUIPMENT, PIPING OR DUCTWORK SHALL BE ABANDONED IN PLACE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. K. THE MOUNTING HEIGHT FOR ALL ROOM THERMOSTATS OR SENSORS SHALL BE 48 IN. TO TOP OF THE COVER. L. UNLESS SHOWN ON THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS, IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THIS CONTRACT TO PATCH WITH LIKE MATERIAL AND FINISH ALL EXISTING DUCTWORK OR PIPE PENETRATIONS THROUGH FLOORS AND WALLS AFTER DEMOLITION. M. EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE TAKEN FROM FIELD OBSERVATIONS AND PRIOR CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND ARE NOT GUARANTEED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID. NO ALLOWANCE WILL BE MADE FOR ADDITIONAL COSTS DUE TO CONTRACTORS FAILURE TO VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DIMENSIONS. N. THE OWNER OCCUPIED AREAS INCLUDE SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT AND RESEARCH WHICH MUST NOT BE INTERRUPTED OR OTHERWISE DISTRUPTED WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE AND APPROPRIATE PLANNING. These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:44:40 PM C:\Users\sjgottlieb\Documents\210018_Upson Hall_HVA C_Central_R20_sjgottlieb.rvt 20625.03 GDD General Notes and Symbols - HVAC GDD SJG M-000 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 8 6.1 5 6 G F (E)10x6 (E)12x8 (E)10x6 (E)14x6 (E)24x8 (E)24x8 (E)36x8 (E)22x8 (E)2" (E)54x20 SA UP (E)44x20 EA UP(E)1 1/2" CWS/R (E)2" HWS/R (E)12x8 30x8 (E)14x8(E)12x8 1 1 (E)EAV (E)FAN COIL UNIT (E)FAN COIL UNIT (E)PROCESS CWR (E)PROCESS CWS (E)FUME HOOD (E)1 1/2" CWS/R (E)2" HWS/R (E)1 1/2" CWS/R (E)2" HWS/R (E)FAN COIL UNIT (E)2 1/2"PROCESS CWS/R UP/DN (E)ZONE REGISTER TERMINAL 2 2 (E)12"(E)12" S (E)VAV (E)VAV D (E)3/4" (E)3/4" (E)HWR (E)HWS (E)CWR (E)CWS (E)FAN COIL UNIT (E)10x8 (E)6" 1 1 (E)CWR (E)CWS LAB 466 OFFICE STUDENTS 468 SOUTH CORRIDOR 40042 OFFICE LECTURER 469 SM. CONFERENCE 465 (E)2" (E)18x18 RA UP (E)3/4" 8 6.1 5 6 G F 10" 18x8 18x8 5" (E)24x8 (E)24x8 (E)36x8 (E)22x8 (E)2" (E)2 1/2" PROCESS CWS/R UP/DN (E)54x20 SA UP (E)18x18 RA UP (E)44x20 EA UP 30x8 (E)14x8 10" 10" 10" 12" (E)HWR (E)HWS 7" (E)EAV S x12 8 A 220 x22 10 A 550 (E)FAN COIL UNIT (E)PROCESS CWR (E)PROCESS CWS (E)FUME HOOD (E)1 1/2" CWS/R (E)2" HWS/R (E)FAN COIL UNIT (E)1 1/2" CWS/R (E)2" HWS/R (E)1 1/2" CWS/R (E)2" HWS/R (E)FAN COIL UNIT 3/4" CWS CWR (E)ZONE REGISTER TERMINAL (E)12" 3/4" x 225 18 1 6 x 225 18 1 6 x 220 18 1 6 (E)12" (E)FAN COIL UNIT (E)3/4" (E)CWS (E)CWR (E)CWS (E)2" D 18x8 D (E)3/4" S (E)3/4" (E)CWR 1 1 2 FCU-1 2 12" 7" R 6" SAV-2 GEV-2 GEV-1 SAV-1 18x812" MAKER SPACE 466A LAB 466 OFFICE STUDENTS 468 SOUTH CORRIDOR 40042 OFFICE LECTURER 469 SM. CONFERENCE 465 S S 3 3 4 4 10x6 8" 8" 5 6 6 7 7 NORTH These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:44:43 PM C:\Users\sjgottlieb\Documents\210018_Upson Hall_HVA C_Central_R20_sjgottlieb.rvt 20625.03 GDD Partial Fourth Floor Plans - HVAC GDD SJG M-100 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 DEMOLITION NOTES 1 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES. 2 DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING AIR TERMINAL AND ASSOCIATED CONTROLS. 1/4" = 1'-0"1 Partial Fourth Floor Demolition Plan - HVAC 1/4" = 1'-0"2 Partial Fourth Floor Plan - HVAC DRAWING NOTES 1 TIE DUCTWORK INTO EXISTING. TRANSITION AS REQUIRED TO MAKE THE CONNECTION. 2 TIE PIPING INTO EXISTING. PROVIDE ALL PIPING MODIFICATIONS AS REQUIRED TO MAKE THE CONNECTION. 3 PROVIDE BREAK GLASS MANUAL SHUTOFF AT LOCATION SHOWN. SWITCH SHALL CONTROL/CLOSE THE AIR TERMINAL UNITS ASSOCIATED WITH THE SPACE. PROVIDE LABEL AT SWITCH WHICH READS "VENTILATION SYSTEM EMERGENCY SHUTOFF". 4 TAP FOR FUTURE LOW EXHAUST AS REQUIRED DUE TO THE FUTURE ADDITION OF OXYGEN DEPLETING GASSES IN THE LAB. 5 FAN COIL SHALL BE MOUNTED 9'-5" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. 6 CLEAN AND DEGREASE DUCTWORK WITHIN THE SPACE IN PREPARATION FOR PAINTING. 7 RECOMMISSION EXISTING FAN COIL UNIT. REFER TO CONTROL SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM SUMMARY FOR FURTHER REQUIREMENTS. COOLING COIL AV SETPOINT N.C. SA C C H C H C FAN FAN HEATING COIL RA E E AO AO AI F.L. REFER TO PLANS OS BI SA D T AI S AI BACnet / ARCNET OR BACnet / MSTP: - AV: FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) - AV: POSITION FEEDBACK (%) - AV: FLOW SETPOINT (CFM) COM ASD MOD AO SA BACnet / ARCNET OR BACnet / MSTP: - AV: FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) - AV: POSITION FEEDBACK (%) - AV: FLOW SETPOINT (CFM) COM ASD MOD AO EA F CS M BI S S BO MS ZONE S MANUAL BREAK GLASS VENTILATION SHUTDOWN SWITCH. REFER TO PLANS. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 4 PIPE FAN COIL UNIT GENERAL EXHAUST VAV (GEV) SUPPLY AIR VAV (SAV) GENERAL SYSTEM SHALL BE CONTROLLED THROUGH THE BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM (BACS). ALL SETPOINTS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RETAINING ITS PROGRAMMING AND TIME SETTING DURING A LOSS OF POWER FOR AT LEAST TEN HOURS. LABORATORY AIR CHANGE RATES ARE BASED ON TOTAL EXHAUST AIR FLOW FROM THE SPACE. THE SPACE SHALL BE CONTROLLED TO AN AIR CHANGE RATE, THE BACS SHALL CALCULATE THE REQUIRED CFM USING THE GROSS VOLUME (AREA X CEILING HEIGHT). IF THE ZONE BECOMES OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD, THE SPACE SHALL INDEX TO OCCUPIED MODE FOR THE DURATION OF OCCUPANCY. WHEN THE SPACE BECOMES OCCUPIED AGAIN DURING THE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD, THE SPACE SHALL INDEX BACK TO UNOCCUPIED MODE. SETPOINTS SPACE COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: OCCUPIED: 750F UNOCCUPIED SETBACK: 780F UNOCCUPIED: 810F SPACE HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: OCCUPIED: 700F UNOCCUPIED SETBACK: 670F UNOCCUPIED: 640F TOTAL EXHAUST AIR CHANGE RATE (ACPH): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULES ACPH = TOTAL EXHAUST CFM X 60 / ROOM VOLUME TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE SUPPLY AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE TYPICALLY = TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE + OFFSET GENERAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE SPACE AIR DIFFERENTIAL OFFSET (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE MINIMUM LABORATORY OCCUPANCY INDEX TIME: 30 MINUTES ZONE OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE: COORDINATE WITH OWNER LABORATORY AIRFLOW CONTROL AIR VAV POSITIONS SHALL BE BASED ON MODE. UNDER NORMAL CONTROL, ROOM OCCUPANCY SHALL BE DETERMINED VIA ROOM OCCUPANCY SENSORS. WHEN THE ROOM IS OCCUPIED, THE GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VAV SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE OCCUPIED AIR CHANGE RATE. THE SUPPLY AIR VAV SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE SPECIFIED AIRFLOW DIFFERENTIAL. WHEN THE ROOM IS UNOCCUPIED, THE GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VAV SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE UNOCCUPIED AIR CHANGE RATE. THE SUPPLY AIR VAV SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE SPECIFIED AIRFLOW DIFFERENTIAL. REGARDLESS OF OCCUPANCY MODE, THE SUPPLY AND EXHAUST AIR VAVS SHALL COMMAND CLOSED UPON ACTIVATION OF THE MANUAL VENTILATION SHUT DOWN SWITCH. ZONE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SETPOINTS SHALL BE DETERMINED BASED ON A COMBINATION OF PROGRAMMED SCHEDULE AND SPACE OCCUPANCY SENSORS. OCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW THE OCCUPIED HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE FAN COIL UNIT SHALL START AND THE HEATING COIL CONTROL VALVE SHALL MODULATE TO MAINTAIN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. WHEN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE IS AT SETPOINT, THE FAN COIL UNIT SHALL SHUT OFF AND THE HEATING COIL CONTROL VALVE SHALL CLOSE. OCCUPIED COOLING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THE OCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE FAN COIL UNIT SHALL START, AND THE COOLING COIL CONTROL VALVE SHALL MODULATE TO MAINTAIN SETPOINT. WHEN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE IS AT SETPOINT, THE FAN COIL UNIT SHALL SHUT OFF AND THE COOLING COIL CONTROL VALVE SHALL CLOSE. OCCUPIED SETBACK: IF THE SPACE BECOMES UNOCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED PERIOD, THE ABOVE OCCUPIED HEATING/COOLING SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT THE OCCUPIED SETBACK TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. UNOCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW THE UNOCCUPIED HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE ABOVE OCCUPIED HEATING SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT THE UNOCCUPIED SETBACK TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. UNOCCUPIED COOLING: IF THE SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE ABOVE OCCUPIED SETBACK SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. THE COOLING COIL CONTROL VALVE SHALL BE CLOSED WHENEVER THE HEATING COIL CONTROL VALVE IS OPEN TO PREVENT SIMULTANEOUS HEATING AND COOLING. THE COOLING COIL CONTROL VALVE SHALL BE CLOSED WHEN THE FAN COIL UNIT IS OFF. These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:44:43 PM C:\Users\sjgottlieb\Documents\210018_Upson Hall_HVA C_Central_R20_sjgottlieb.rvt 20625.03 GDD Control Schematics & System Summaries GDD SJG M-200 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 NOT TO SCALE1 LAB 466A WITH GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VAV, SUPPLY AIR VAV AND FAN COIL UNIT CONTROL SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM SUMMARY 2. THE MAX / MIN POSITIONS ON THE VALVE WILL BE SET AT THE FACTORY TO THE FULL FANGE WITH ACTUAL AIRFLOW SET IN SOFTWARE. 1. THIS REPRESENTS A LABORATORY WHERE THE EXHAUST AIRFLOW IS BASED ON THE MINIMUM REQUIRED AIR CHANGE RATES ESTABLISHED FOR THE LABORATORY. NOTES 466A AC/HR LAB 220 10.0 58 1.6 220 6.0 GEV-2 6" 500 0 220 6.0 110 3.0 SAV-2 6" 500 0 110 0 -110 (SF) (FT) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) MAX MIN MAX MIN AIRFLOW AIRFLOW (NOTE 4) (NOTE 2) OUTDOOR EXHAUST POINT SIZE RANGE POINT SIZE RANGE MODES (NOTE 1) AREA HEIGHT NYS NYS EXHAUST VAV VAV OCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED SUPPLY VAV VAV OCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED ALL ROOM NUMBER DESCRIPTION ROOM DIMENSIONS CODE MINIMUM VENTILATION EXHAUST AIR SUPPLY AIR XFER LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE SPACE OCCUPANCY, MINIMUM OCCUPANCY SETPOINT X X X X REFER TO PLANS SPACE OCCUPANCY X X X X REFER TO PLANS SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT X X REFER TO PLANS SPACE TEMPERATURE X X SPACE TEMPERATURE +/- 4 DEG F FROM SETPOINT X REFER TO PLANS SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, COOLING X X X SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, HEATING X X X SUPPLY VAV POSITION FEEDBACK (%) X X X COMMAND DOES NOT EQUAL FEEDBACK X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT SUPPLY VAV AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT SUPPLY VAV AIRFLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) X X X 10% FLOW DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT SUPPLY VAV DAMPER POSITION COMMAND X X X GENERAL EXHAUST VAV POSITION FEEDBACK (%) X X X COMMAND DOES NOT EQUAL FEEDBACK X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT GENERAL EXHAUST VAV AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT GENERAL EXHAUST VAV AIRFLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) X X X 10% FLOW DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT GENERAL EXHAUST VAV DAMPER POSITION COMMAND X X X FCU LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE X X X LOW LIMIT X SINGLE POINT SENSOR FCU HEATING COIL CONTROL VALVE POSITION COMMAND X X X NORMALLY CLOSED FCU COOLING COIL CONTROL VALVE POSITION COMMAND X X X NORMALLY CLOSED FCU FAN STATUS X X X FAILURE X VIA CURRENT SENSOR FCU FAN MOTOR START/STOP X X X FLOW OFFSET ACTUAL (CFM) X X FLOW OFFSET SETPOINT (CFM) X X CEILING HEIGHT (SQ FT) X X ROOM AREA (SQ FT) X X LAB AIR CHANGE RATE (ACPH) X X X TOTAL EXHAUST SETPOINT (CFM) X X X TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW (CFM) X X X CHILLED WATER LOAD SHED X (4) BINARY NETWORK INPUTS FROM EMCS STEAM LOAD SHED X (6) BINARY NETWORK INPUTS FROM EMCS BACS EMCS DESCRIPTION BI BO AI AO AV BV SCH TREND EQUIPMENT HARDWARE POINTS SOFTWARE POINTS SHOWN ON GRAPHIC NOTES POINT SCHEDULE COOLING COIL AV SETPOINT HEATING COIL REFER TO PLANS OS BI SA D T AI S AI BACnet / ARCNET OR BACnet / MSTP: - AV: FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) - AV: POSITION FEEDBACK (%) - AV: FLOW SETPOINT (CFM) COM ASD MOD AO SA BACnet / ARCNET OR BACnet / MSTP: - AV: FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) - AV: POSITION FEEDBACK (%) - AV: FLOW SETPOINT (CFM) COM ASD MOD AO EA F C C H C H C FANFAN E AO AO F.L. CS M BI S S AI T E AO AO F.L. SA FAN MOTOR WITH INTEGRAL ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL MS BO COOLING COIL HEATING COIL C C H C H C FANFAN E AO AO F.L. CS M BI S S AI T E AO AO F.L. SA FAN MOTOR WITH INTEGRAL ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL MS BO INDICATES EXISTING ZONE S MANUAL BREAK GLASS VENTILATION SHUTDOWN SWITCH. REFER TO PLANS. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EXISTING 4 PIPE FAN COIL UNITS GENERAL EXHAUST VAV (GEV) SUPPLY AIR VAV (SAV) GENERAL SYSTEM SHALL BE CONTROLLED THROUGH THE BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM (BACS). ALL SETPOINTS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RETAINING ITS PROGRAMMING AND TIME SETTING DURING A LOSS OF POWER FOR AT LEAST TEN HOURS. LABORATORY AIR CHANGE RATES ARE BASED ON TOTAL EXHAUST AIR FLOW FROM THE SPACE. THE SPACE SHALL BE CONTROLLED TO AN AIR CHANGE RATE, THE BACS SHALL CALCULATE THE REQUIRED CFM USING THE GROSS VOLUME (AREA X CEILING HEIGHT). IF THE ZONE BECOMES OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD, THE SPACE SHALL INDEX TO OCCUPIED MODE FOR THE DURATION OF OCCUPANCY. WHEN THE SPACE BECOMES OCCUPIED AGAIN DURING THE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD, THE SPACE SHALL INDEX BACK TO UNOCCUPIED MODE. SETPOINTS SPACE COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: OCCUPIED: 750F UNOCCUPIED SETBACK: 780F UNOCCUPIED: 810F SPACE HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: OCCUPIED: 700F UNOCCUPIED SETBACK: 670F UNOCCUPIED: 640F TOTAL EXHAUST AIR CHANGE RATE (ACPH): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULES ACPH = TOTAL EXHAUST CFM X 60 / ROOM VOLUME TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE SUPPLY AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE TYPICALLY = TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE + OFFSET GENERAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE SPACE AIR DIFFERENTIAL OFFSET (CFM): REFER TO LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE MINIMUM LABORATORY OCCUPANCY INDEX TIME: 30 MINUTES ZONE OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE: COORDINATE WITH OWNER LABORATORY AIRFLOW CONTROL AIR VAV POSITIONS SHALL BE BASED ON MODE. UNDER NORMAL CONTROL, ROOM OCCUPANCY SHALL BE DETERMINED VIA ROOM OCCUPANCY SENSORS. WHEN THE ROOM IS OCCUPIED, THE GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VAV SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE OCCUPIED AIR CHANGE RATE. THE SUPPLY AIR VAV SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE SPECIFIED AIRFLOW DIFFERENTIAL. WHEN THE ROOM IS UNOCCUPIED, THE GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VAV SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE UNOCCUPIED AIR CHANGE RATE. THE SUPPLY AIR VAV SHALL MODULATE AS NEEDED TO MAINTAIN THE SPECIFIED AIRFLOW DIFFERENTIAL. REGARDLESS OF OCCUPANCY MODE, THE SUPPLY AND EXHAUST AIR VAVS SHALL COMMAND CLOSED UPON ACTIVATION OF THE MANUAL VENTILATION SHUT DOWN SWITCH. ZONE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SETPOINTS SHALL BE DETERMINED BASED ON A COMBINATION OF PROGRAMMED SCHEDULE AND SPACE OCCUPANCY SENSORS. OCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW THE OCCUPIED HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE FAN COIL UNIT SHALL START AND THE HEATING COIL CONTROL VALVE SHALL MODULATE TO MAINTAIN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. WHEN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE IS AT SETPOINT, THE FAN COIL UNIT SHALL SHUT OFF AND THE HEATING COIL CONTROL VALVE SHALL CLOSE. OCCUPIED COOLING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THE OCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE FAN COIL UNIT SHALL START, AND THE COOLING COIL CONTROL VALVE SHALL MODULATE TO MAINTAIN SETPOINT. WHEN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE IS AT SETPOINT, THE FAN COIL UNIT SHALL SHUT OFF AND THE COOLING COIL CONTROL VALVE SHALL CLOSE. OCCUPIED SETBACK: IF THE SPACE BECOMES UNOCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED PERIOD, THE ABOVE OCCUPIED HEATING/COOLING SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT THE OCCUPIED SETBACK TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. UNOCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW THE UNOCCUPIED HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE ABOVE OCCUPIED HEATING SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT THE UNOCCUPIED SETBACK TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. UNOCCUPIED COOLING: IF THE SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE ABOVE OCCUPIED SETBACK SEQUENCE SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. THE COOLING COIL CONTROL VALVE SHALL BE CLOSED WHENEVER THE HEATING COIL CONTROL VALVE IS OPEN TO PREVENT SIMULTANEOUS HEATING AND COOLING. THE COOLING COIL CONTROL VALVE SHALL BE CLOSED WHEN THE FAN COIL UNIT IS OFF. These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:44:44 PM C:\Users\sjgottlieb\Documents\210018_Upson Hall_HVA C_Central_R20_sjgottlieb.rvt 20625.03 GDD Control Schematics & System Summaries GDD SJG M-201 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 NOT TO SCALE1 LAB 466 WITH GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VAV, SUPPLY AIR VAV AND FAN COIL UNITS CONTROL SCHEMATIC AND SYSTEM SUMMARY 2. THE MAX / MIN POSITIONS ON THE VALVE WILL BE SET AT THE FACTORY TO THE FULL FANGE WITH ACTUAL AIRFLOW SET IN SOFTWARE. 1. THIS REPRESENTS A LABORATORY WHERE THE EXHAUST AIRFLOW IS BASED ON THE MINIMUM REQUIRED AIR CHANGE RATES ESTABLISHED FOR THE LABORATORY. NOTES 466 AC/HR LAB 550 10.0 219 2.4 550 6.0 GEV-1 7" 650 0 550 6.0 275 3.0 SAV-1 7" 650 0 475 200 -75 (SF) (FT) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (ACH) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) (CFM) MAX MIN MAX MIN AIRFLOW AIRFLOW (NOTE 2) (NOTE 2) OUTDOOR EXHAUST POINT SIZE RANGE POINT SIZE RANGE MODES (NOTE 1) AREA HEIGHT NYS NYS EXHAUST VAV VAV OCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED SUPPLY VAV VAV OCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED ALL ROOM NUMBER DESCRIPTION ROOM DIMENSIONS CODE MINIMUM VENTILATION EXHAUST AIR SUPPLY AIR XFER LAB AIRFLOW SCHEDULE SPACE OCCUPANCY, MINIMUM OCCUPANCY SETPOINT X X X X REFER TO PLANS SPACE OCCUPANCY X X X X REFER TO PLANS SUPPLY VAV POSITION FEEDBACK (%) X X X COMMAND DOES NOT EQUAL FEEDBACK X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT SUPPLY VAV AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT SUPPLY VAV AIRFLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) X X X 10% FLOW DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT SUPPLY VAV DAMPER POSITION COMMAND X X X GENERAL EXHAUST VAV POSITION FEEDBACK (%) X X X COMMAND DOES NOT EQUAL FEEDBACK X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT GENERAL EXHAUST VAV AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) X X X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT GENERAL EXHAUST VAV AIRFLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) X X X 10% FLOW DEVIATION FROM SETPOINT X BACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT GENERAL EXHAUST VAV DAMPER POSITION COMMAND X X X FLOW OFFSET ACTUAL (CFM) X X FLOW OFFSET SETPOINT (CFM) X X CEILING HEIGHT (SQ FT) X X ROOM AREA (SQ FT) X X LAB AIR CHANGE RATE (ACPH) X X X TOTAL EXHAUST SETPOINT (CFM) X X X TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW (CFM) X X X CHILLED WATER LOAD SHED X (4) BINARY NETWORK INPUTS FROM EMCS STEAM LOAD SHED X (6) BINARY NETWORK INPUTS FROM EMCS BACS EMCS DESCRIPTION BI BO AI AO AV BV SCH TREND EQUIPMENT HARDWARE POINTS SOFTWARE POINTS SHOWN ON GRAPHIC NOTES POINT SCHEDULE CWS CWR HWS HWR D P-TRAP DRAIN TO SANITARY ARRANGE FILTERS FOR REMOVAL TEST PLUG (TYP.) FAN COIL UNIT DETAIL NOTES: A. HANG UNIT FROM STRUCTURE AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE WITH STEEL ROD AND VIBRATION ISOLATORS. B. UNIT SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE FROM BELOW. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK SHALL NOT BE LOCATED BELOW UNIT. ARRANGEMENT SHALL PERMIT REMOVAL OF FAN COIL UNIT FOR MAJOR SERVICING. C. CONTROL PANEL SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE FOR SERVICING. D. DRAIN PIPING BY PLUMBING CONTRACTOR. STAINLESS STEEL BRAIDED HOSE (TYP.) These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:44:44 PM C:\Users\sjgottlieb\Documents\210018_Upson Hall_HVA C_Central_R20_sjgottlieb.rvt 20625.03 GDD Details & Schedules HVAC GDD SJG M-300 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 NOT TO SCALE1 CEILING MOUNTED FAN COIL UNIT DETAIL - 4 PIPE A RETURN/EXHAUST ALUMINUM WHITE TITUS MODEL S8F 1 SUPPLY ALUMINUM WHITE TITUS MODEL S300FL TYPE APPLICATION MATERIAL FINISH MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO. REMARKS REGISTER GRILLE AND DIFFUSER SCHEDULE 2. PROVIDE WITH TIGHT SHUT-OFF. 1. INTEGRAL SOUND ATTENUATOR. REMARKS: GEV-2 466A 220 110 1 6 15 23 TITUS DESV 1,2 GEV-1 466 550 275 1 7 24 27 TITUS DESV 1,2 SAV-2 466A 110 0 1 5 - 22 TITUS DESV 1,2 SAV-1 466 475 200 1 7 22 25 TITUS DESV 1,2 (CFM) (CFM) (In. WC) FLOW FLOW MAX CFM (In.) AIR AIR PRESS AT SIZE AT 1" S.P. AT 1" S.P. UNIT NO. SERVICE MAX MIN MIN INLET INLET RAD N.C. DISCH N.C. MANUFACTURER & MODEL NO. REMARKS VAV - SINGLE DUCT - AIR TERMINAL UNIT SCHEDULE 1. SPECIFIED COOLING AND HEATING AND AIR FLOW CHARACTERISTICS ARE BASED UPON MEDIUM FAN SPEED. REMARKS: FCU-1 466A HORIZONTAL CABINET 230 - 4.73 0.72 5.45 75 63 56.2 54.9 0.80 8.75 47 62 4 10 9.93 65 103.8 1 0.69 130 109.9 1050 43 115 1 JOHNSON CONTROLS FHX-D03 1 (CFM) (In. WC) (MBH) (MBH) (MBH) (GPM) (Ft. HD) (DEG. F) (DEG. F) (DEG. F) (DEG. F) (GPM) (Ft. HD) (DEG. F) (DEG. F) FLOW STATIC SENSIBLE LATENT TOTAL DB WB DB WB FLOW P.D. TEMP. TEMP. (MBH) TEMP. TEMP. FLOW P.D. TEMP. TEMP. AIR EXT. CAPACITY EAT (DEG. F) LAT (DEG. F) WATER WATER ENT. WATER LVG. WATER ROWS FPI CAPACITY ENT. AIR LVG. AIR WATER WATER ENT. WATER LVG. WATER RPM WATTS VOLTS PHASE UNIT NO. LOCATION TYPE AIR SIDE COOLING COIL HEATING COIL FAN MOTOR MANUFACTURER & MODEL No. REMARKS FAN COIL UNIT SCHEDULE - CHILLED WATER/HOT WATER BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3 HEAVY SOLID IS NEW, EXISTING ELECTRICAL WIRING, EQUIPMENT OR DEVICE, SOLID LIGHT IS EXISTING TO REMAIN , EXISTING ELECTRICAL WIRING, EQUIPMENT OR DEVICE, DASED LIGHT IS EXISTING TO BE REMOVED OR RELOCATED , REFERENCE TO DRAWING NOTE OS J TOGGLE SWITCH, VOLTAGE AS INDICATED ON FIXTURE SCHEDULE, SUBSCRIPTS INDICATE TYPE: 2 - TWO POLE SWITCH 3 - THREE WAY SWITCH 4 - FOUR WAY SWITCH M - MONENTARY CONTACT K - KEY OPERATED a,b,c - SWITCHING DESIGNATIONS NUMBER OF LETTERS EQUALS NO. OF GANGED SWITCHES V - VACANCY SENSOR VD - VACANCY SENSOR, DIMMER SWITCH VDS - VACANCY SENSOR, DUAL SWITCHED WP - WEATHERPROOF QUAD RECEPTACLE 20 AMP, 125 VOLT DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, 20 AMP, 125 VOLT SUBSCRIPTS INDICATE TYPE: G - GROUND FAULT INTERUPT OC - OVER COUNTER UC - UNDER THE COUNTER WP - WEATHER PROOF TP - TAMPER PROOF P - CEILING PROJECTOR, MOUNT IN PROJECTOR MOUNTING PLATE USB - INTEGRAL USB CHARGER H - MOUNT IN HORIZONTAL DIRECTION SPECIAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLE. PROVIDE PROPER VOLTAGE, CLASS, CURRENT RATING AND NEMA CONFIGURATION AS REQUIRED BY BRANCH CIRCUIT AND/OR MATCH CAP ON EQUIPMENT BEING FURNISHED BY OTHERS. PROVIDE CORD AND CAP. SUBSCRIPTS INDICATE TYPE: J CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR JUNCTION BOX 3 a,b,c 3 REFERENCE TO DEMOLITION NOTE EXISTING TO REMAIN - INDICATES EXISTING ITEM SHALL REMAIN. MAINTAIN EXISTING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. (E) EXISTING TO BE RELOCATED - INDICATES EXISTING ITEM SHALL BE RELOCATED. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE, REINSTALL AT NEW LOCATION AND RECONNECT ITEM AS REQUIRED. (ER) PUSH BUTTON COMMUNICATIONS EXISTING COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET TEL/DATA DROP: 4"x4"x2.50" BOX WITH A 1-GANG MUD RING & FACEPLATE WITH DUPLEX DESIGN. 1" CONDUIT EXTENDED TO NEAREST CABLE TRAY IN CORRIDOR ( UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) FOR DATA/VOICE. TERMINATE CONDUIT AT CABLE TRAY IN CORRIDOR WITH CONDUIT BUSHING. PULL (2) CAT 6 CABLE, TERMINATE AT PATCH PANEL IN BDF. W - SINGLE GANG BACK BOX WITH MUD RING AND 1" CONDUIT EXTENDED TO NEAREST CABLE TRAY IN CORRIDOR (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) FOR DATA/VOICE. WALL MOUNT AT 46"AFF. PROVIDE (1) CAT 6 CABLE TO BDF. DDC - SINGLE GANG BOX WITH BLANK COVER PLATE. PROVIDE 3/4"C STUBBED TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE ABOVE. DDC ALARM WIRING BY DIV 23. C - CAMERA, COORDINATE MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. TV - COORDINATE MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. DSR DSS FSD FS TS FAAP FACP WAP H F F F SD S FIRE ALARM SMOKE DAMPER CONNECTION DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR, RETURN SIDE DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR, SUPPLY SIDE FIRE ALARM SHUT DOWN RELAY FLOW SWITCH CONNECTION TAMPER SWITCH CONNECTION FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATION PANEL FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL REMOTE DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR TEST INDICATOR RATE-OF-RISE HEAT DETECTOR ALARM SIGNAL, STROBE, SHALL BE WHITE DEVICE ALARM SIGNAL, SPEAKER AND STROBE, SHALL BE WHITE DEVICE MANUAL PULL STATION SMOKE DETECTOR M D CB T CONTACTOR ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKER COMBINATION FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH AND MAGNETIC STARTER 208Y/120 VOLT PANELBOARD. TRANSFORMER COMPLETE ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT A d A d CEILING MOUNTED EXIT LUMINAIRE WALL MOUNTED EXIT LUMINAIRE STRIP LUMINAIRE CEILING MOUNTED AREA-OF-RESCUE LUMINAIRE WALL MOUNTED AREA-OF-RESCUE LUMINAIRE CEILING MOUNTED LUMINARIE. UPPERCASE LETTERS INDICATE FIXTURE TYPE ON LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE, LOWER CASE LETTER INDICATE LIGHTING ZONE WALL MOUNTED LUMINARIE. UPPERCASE LETTERS INDICATE FIXTURE TYPE ON LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE, LOWER CASE LETTER INDICATE LIGHTING ZONE LUMINAIRE CONNECTED TO LIFE SAFETY EMERGENCY POWER WALL MOUNTED EMERGENCY LUMINAIRE WITH BATTERY PACK MOTOR CONNECTION. REFER TO ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL SCHEDULE FOR SIZE POWER DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL 480Y/277 VOLT PANELBOARD. DISCONNECT SWITCH FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD. MOTORIZED DAMPER CONNECTION LUMINAIRES TRACK LIGHTING DOUBLE HEAD POLE MOUNTED LUMINAIRE SINGLE HEAD POLE MOUNTED LUMINAIRE CEILING RECEPTACLE 4'-0" EXIT LIGHT SWITCH 2. MOUNTING HEIGHTS TO CENTER OF OUTLETS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. IN MASONRY CONSTRUCTION THE ABOVE MOUNTING HEIGHTS SHALL BE USED FOR REFERENCE TO NEAREST BLOCK OR BRICK COURSING. THE ABOVE MOUNTING HEIGHTS SHALL BE ADHERED TO UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OR DETAILED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. 1. DETAIL NOTES: 1'-6" DIVIDED SURFACE RACEWA Y HORN/LIGHT LENS ON TOP FINISHED FLOOR PULLSTATION COORDINATE EXACT MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH ARCHITECT. ENTIRE LENS SHALL BE MINIMUM 80" AFF AND NOT GREATER THAN 96" AFF. WHERE NOT PERMITTED BY CEILING HEIGHT DEVICE SHALL BE MOUNTED WITHIN 6" OF THE CEILING. 4'-0" EXIT SIGNS CENTERED ABOVE DOOR PR CARD READER, REFER TO DETAIL DOOR CONTACT COMBINATION POWER/COMMUNICATION SURFACE RACEWAY WITH DEVICES AS INDICATED. WIREMOLD G4000. RACEWAY SHALL BE MOUNTED "OVER COUNTER" UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. VS CEILING MOUNTED VACANCY SENSOR. WAP - WIRELESS ACCESS POINT WALL MOUNT AT 90"AFF 4"x4"x2.25" BOX WITH DOUBLE GANG PLASTER RING. 1" EMT CONDUIT EXTENDED TO NEAREST CABLE TRAY IN CORRIDOR (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED). PROVIDE TWO (2) CAT 6A CABLES. TERMINATE IN BDF AND 6-8" PIGTAIL WITHOUT FACEPLATE. All WAP ARE WALL MOUNTED. REFER TO ARROWS ON DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION. EM TYPICAL EMERGENCY PHONE OUTLET LOCATION. PROVIDE 4"x4" BACKBOX WITH A SINGLE GANG MUD RING AND (1) 3/4" CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE. PROVIDE (1) CAT 6 CABLE TO BDF. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION WITH THE OWNER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. RTS ENCLOSED CABLE TRAY SIZE PER QUANTITY OF CABLES AND 50% FUTURE CAPACITY AT A MINIMUM. CORD REEL: MAKE AND MODEL INFORMATION TBD LP-10,# HOME RUN TO PANELBOARD. LETTERS/ NUMBERS INDICATE PANEL. NUMBERS INDICATE CIRCUITS. NUMBER OF ARROWS EQUALS NUMBER OF CIRCUITS. CIRCUIT SHALL BE 2-#12, 1#12EG FROM 20A-1P CIRCUIT BREAKER, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING SIZE AND NUMBER TO MATCH HOMERUN. REFER TO SPEC'S FOR RACEWAY TYPE. SOLID HALF ARROW(S) INDICATES 120 VOLT CIRCUIT TO SINGLE POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER(S), UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. SOLID FULL ARROW(S) INDICATES 208 VOLT CIRCUIT TO MULTI-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER(S), UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. GFCI DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, 20 AMP, 125 VOLT G. H. I. WHEN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION, WHICH IS TO REMAIN, IS DAMAGED DURING THE COURSE OF DEMOLITION AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S WORK, IT SHALL BE REPAIRED AND/OR REPLACED WITH SIMILAR OR LIKE MATERIALS, AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE, SUBJECT TO THE OWNERS APPROVAL. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION IN THE WAY OF NEW WORK. PROTECT BUILDING AND FURNISHINGS FROM DAMAGE. COORDINATE PHASING OF WORK WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. COORDINATE ALL SHUTDOWNS WITH UNIVERSITY PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. ALL FIRE ALARM SHUTDOWNS SHALL BE SCHEDULED THROUGH CUSTOMER SERVICE WITH AT LEAST 24 HOURS NOTICE BEFORE WORK IS TO BE STARTED. EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE TAKEN FROM FIELD OBSERVATIONS AND PRIOR CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WHEN AVAILABLE AND ARE NOT GARAUNTEED. PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID, VISIT SITE AND IDENTIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DIFFICULTIES THAT WILL AFFECT THE DEMOLITION WORK. NO COMPENSATION WILL BE GRANTED FOR ADDITIONAL WORK CAUSED BY UNFAMILIARITY WITH SITE CONDITIONS THAT ARE VISIBLE OR READILY CONSTRUED BY EXPERIENCED OBSERVERS. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL PARTICIPATE IN SURVEY OF THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DISCONNECT AND CAP ALL SERVICE LINES TO BE DISCONNECTED FOR THOSE SERVICES WHICH NORMALLY ARE INCLUDED IN HIS FIELD OF WORK. PARTICULAR CARE SHALL BE TAKEN TO AVOID CREATING HAZARD OR CAUSING DISRUPTION IN ADJOINING AREAS. NOT ALL DEVICES TERMINATIONS, JUNCTION BOXES AND WIRING HAVE BEEN SHOWN. REFER TO PLUMBING CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR EXACT QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS OF ALL PLUMBING EQUIPMENT BEING ABANDONED OR REMOVED, WHICH WILL REQUIRE DE-ENERGIZATION, REMOVAL AND BLANK-OFF BY THE CONTRACTOR. EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SHALL BE KEPT OPERATIONAL DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD THE BUILDING UNDER RENOVATION MAY BE DISCONNECTED FROM SERVICE DURING THE HOURS THE CONTRACTOR IS WORKING, AT THE DISCRETION OF THE FIRE DEPARTMENT AND THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE, BUT MUST BE OKACED BACK ON LINE DURING OTHER PERIODS. APPROVAL TO BE IN WRITING. THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES WITHIN DEMOLITION AREA SHALL BE DEMOLISHED ALONG WITH ALL FEEDERS AND CONDUITS BACK TO POINT OF SOURCE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ALL ITEMS SHOWN ON THE DEMOLITION DRAWINGS SHALL BE DISCONNECTED AND REMOVED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. WALLBOXES, BACKBOXES AND CONDUIT SHALL BE REUSED AS DETERMINED BY CONTRACTOR. ALL UNUSED CONDUITS SHALL BE REMOVED. DISCONNECT AND MAKE SAFE ANY EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED BY OTHERS. COORDINATE REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT WITH OTHER TRADES PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. MAINTAIN AND RESTORE, IF INTERRUPTED BY REMOVALS OR IN PATH OF NEW CONSTRUCTION, ALL CIRCUITS, CONDUITS AND FEEDERS PASSING THROUGH AND SERVING UNDISTURBED AREAS (SHOWN OR NOT SHOWN). ALL EXISTING CONDUITS STUBBED THROUGH FLOOR SERVING ITEMS TO BE REMOVED AND NOT SHOWN OR REQUIRED TO BE REUSED, SHALL BE CUT OFF FLUSH WITH SLAB LEVEL WITH CONCRETE. IN ANY AREA REQUIRING THE PERFORMANCE OF ANY TRADE'S WORK WORK, THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY REMOVE AND STORE ANY OR ALL ELECTRICAL ITEMS IN PATH OF WORK, REINSTALLING AND RECONNECTING SAME AS REQUIRED, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PLANS AND/OR AS DIRECTED AFTER COMPLETION OF OTHER TRADE'S WORK IN THAT AREA. DISCONNECT, MAKE SAFE AND REMOVE ALL TEMPORARY AND ABANDONED WIRE WITHIN THE SPACE. BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING TO DEVICES IN AREAS OF DEMOLITION SHALL BE DISCONNECTED, MADE SAFE AND REMOVED COMPLETELY BACK TO THE PANELBOARD. THE CONTRATOR SHALL NOT ABANDON BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING TO ANY AREAS WICH ARE TO REMAIN BUT ARE AFFECTED BY THE DEMOLITION OR NEW CONSTRUCTION. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE PANEL, FEEDERS AND BRANCH CIRCUITS BACK TO POINT OF SOURCE PRIOR TO THE START OF DEMOLITION, CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS AND MAINTAIN THOSE CIRCUITS THAT EXTEND OUTSIDE OF THE SCOPE OF WORK. AFTER RENOVATING EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSURE THAT ALL REMAINING AND NEW EQUIPMENT WILL OPERATE PROPERLY. PROVIDE TEMPORARY HEAT DETECTORS IN AREAS WHERE SPRINKLERS ARE REMOVED FROM SERVICE DURING CONSTRUCTION. COORDINATE WITH FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR. REFER TO MACHANICAL CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR EXACT QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS OF ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT BEING ABANDONED OR REMOVED, WHICH WILL REQUIRE DE-ENERGIZATION, REMOVAL AND BLANK-OFF BY THE CONTRACTOR. GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES:(APPLY TO ALL DRAWINGS): A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. SLEEVE AND SEAL ALL WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS. PROVIDE FIRESTOPPING FOR ALL FIRE-RATED PENETRATIONS. UTILIZE REMOVABLE FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL AT CABLE TRAY PENETRATIONS. PROVIDE ACOUSTICAL SEALANT FOR ALL NON RATED PENETRATIONS. ALL FIRE RATINGS SHALL BE MAINTAINED. MAINTAIN SERVICE CLEARANCES OF ALL EQUIPMENT. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF ALL CONDUIT ROUTES, EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. MINIMUM CONDUIT SIZE SHALL BE 3/4" FOR POWER CIRCUITS UOI. PROVIDE NYLON PULLSTRING IN ALL EMPTY CONDUITS. FIRE ALARM SIGNALING APPLIANCES SHALL BE MOUNTED SUCH THAT THE ENTIRE LENS IS NOT LESS THAN 80 INCHES AND NOT GREATER THAN 96 INCHES ABOVE THE FINISHED FLOOR. CIRCUITING TO DEVICES/EQUIPMENT SHALL BE 2-#12AWG & 1-#12EG (MULTIPLE HOME RUNS IN SAME CONDUIT MAY SHARE SAME EQUIPMENT GROUND) FOR EACH 20 AMPERE CIRCUIT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ALL CIRCUITS SHALL HAVE SEPARATE NEUTRALS (CIRCUITS SHALL NOT SHARE NEUTRALS). PROVIDE CONDUIT/WIRING (CIRCUITING) AND REQUIRED EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS TO ALL DEVICES/EQUIPMENT. CONNECT TO CIRCUIT(S) AS INDICATED. ALL WORK AND MATERIALS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REFERENCE STANDARD EDITION OF NFPA CODES, AS CITED BY THE FIRE CODE OF NEW YORK STATE, BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE AND CORNELL UNIVERSITY DESIGN STANDARDS. ALL CONDUITS AND SUPPORTS SHALL BE AS TIGHT TO DECK AS POSSIBLE. PROVIDE PULLBOX FOR EVERY 180 DEGREE OF BENDS FOR TEL/DATA AND 360 DEGREES OF BENDS FOR POWER CONDUITS. ALL ELECTRICAL DEVICES (RECEPTACLES, SWITCHES, FIRE ALARM, ETC.) SHALL BE ALIGNED HORIZONTALLY AND VERTICALLY. CONTRACTOR TO SCHEDULE AND COORDINATE PROJJECT WALKTHROUGH WITH ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF ANY DEVICE ROUGH-IN FOR FINALIZATION OF ALIGNMENTS. REFER TO EAV SERIES DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL WORK. ALL EXISTING DEVICES CIRCUITED TO PANELS BEING RENAMED SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH UPDATED LABELS. PROVIDE ALL PATHWAYS AND BACK BOXES AS CALLED FOR ON AV DRAWINGS PROVIDED BY ANOTHER CONSULTANT. COORDINATE IT SERVICE CHANGES OR DISRUPTIONS IN SERVICE WITH CIT OPERATIONS AT 255-5500. ALL RECEPTACLES WITHIN 6' OF SINK EDGE SHALL BE GFCI TYPE. GENERAL NOTES: (APPLY TO ALL DRAWINGS): A. B. C. D. E. F. J. K. L. M. N. J. K. L. M. N. FCU FAN COIL UNIT FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL FIRE ALARM TERMINAL CABINET CONT. CONTACTOR F.A.T.C. F.A.C.P. ELECTRIC WATER COOLER DISTRIBUTION PANEL GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER GENERAL CONTRACTOR ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING F.A. FIRE ALARM H.V.A.C. G.C. E.C. BSMT. BASEMENT CLG. EA. CONTR. GEN. CEILING EACH GENERATOR A. AMPERE DN. EXIST. AUTO. DOWN EXISTING AUTOMATIC DP EMERG. ELEC. G.F.C.I. ELECTRIC EMERGENCY HORSEPOWER GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL GND. GROUND GRS. ABBREV. ABBREVIATIONS C BKR. HP. CAMERA BREAKER DESCRIPTION FZ (3) FIRE ZONE (3) ABOVE FINISHED FLOORA.F.F. EM. EMERGENCY CONTRACTOR A.F.G. ABOVE FINISHED GRADE EWC MOUNTED UNDER COUNTER HEIGHT TV TELEVISION WEATHERPROOF REFRIGERATOR SPECIFICATION MOUNTED OVER COUNTER HEIGHT PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE BACKBOARD TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINET T.B.B. MICRO T.T.C. MICROWAVE P.C. REFRIG. TYP. TYPICAL SPEC. P. SP. SPACE POLE NL NIGHT LIGHT V. VOLT SW. SWITCH MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER MAIN LUG ONLY P = POLE A = AMPERE UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORY LTG. U.L. 4 W. KW. LIGHTING KILOWATT WIRE M.L.O. 3P.15A. PH. M.C.B. PHASE PNL. PANEL PV POWER VENTILATOR WP OC UC UV WG VP EF EHP CUH UNIT VENTILATOR WIRE GUARD FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER EXHAUST FAN CABINET UNIT HEATER VANDAL PROOF POLYCARBONATE GUARD ABBREVIATIONS ABBREV. DESCRIPTION WAP WIRELESS ACCESS POINT O. UH UNIT HEATER P. O. P. Q. AAD AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPER Q. CR DC These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:42:51 PM C:\Users\crspall\Documents\210018_Upson Hall_Electr ical_Central_R20_crspall.rvt 20625.03 WRS Symbols List & General Notes - Electrical GDD CRS E-000 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 F WAP S F S WAP S M F CR CR CR M DC J 8 6.1 5 6 G F (E) LPP-4-9(E) LPP-4-10(E)(E) (ER) (E) (E) (E) (ER) (E) (E) (E) LAB 466 (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) 2 8 6.1 5 6 G F (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) FCU-1 LPP-4-9(E) LPP-4-10(E) 1 (E) (ER) 2 (ER) (E) (E) DOOR OPERATOR 13 1721 21 21 19 23 25,27,29 31 31 31 33 2 35,37 39,41 GFI 4,6,8 3 12 14 4 4 20 1616161616 18 18 1818 5 6 LAB 466 MAKER SPACE 466A 26 VAV 20 28 28 28 (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) 7 DEMOLITION NOTES: 1. ALL TO BE DEMOLISHED DEVICES SHALL BE DEMOLISHED AND REMOVED BACK TO SOURCE PANEL. ALL EXISTING BREAKERS SHALL BE MADE SPARE IF NO LONGER IN USE. 2. REMOVE SECTION OF EXISTING RACEWAY. REFER TO ARCHITECT PLANS FOR EXACT LENGTH OF REMOVAL. GENERAL NOTES: A. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL CONNECT THE NEW FIRE ALARM DEVICES INTO THE EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. B. ALL TEL/DATA CABLING SHALL ROUTE BACK TO IT ROOM 428 VIA CABLE TRAY IN CORRIDOR 40042. ROOM IS ADJACENT TO ELECTRIC ROOM 40062 AND IS APPROXIMATELY 120' NORTH OF RENOVATION AREA. C. ALL RACEWAY SHALL BE MOUNTED AT 39" ON CENTER AFF. D. ALL EXISTING CEILING DEVICES IN THE CORRIDOR SHALL BE FIELD COORDINATED FOR TEMPORARY REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION AS REQUIRED FOR MECHANICAL WORK. E. ALL ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE CIRCUITED TO PANEL LPP-4-10, CIRCUIT NUMBER AS INDICATED ON PLANS. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. DRAWNG NOTES: 1. PUSH BUTTON KILL SWITCH SHALL SHUT DOWN MILL/DRILL, BANDSAW, LASER CUTTER AND DRILL PRESS. SHALL BE A 30A (8) POLE BRANCH CIRCUIT CONTACTOR. 2. PANELS ARE LOCATED ON NORTH WALL APPROXIMATELY 20 FEET FROM LAB DOUBLE DOOR ENTRANCE. 3. DC POWER SUPPLY SHALL HAVE 100A DISCONNECT SUPPLIED WITH IT. BREAKER AND WIRE SHALL BE SIZED FOR 70A - SHALL BE (1) SET OF #4AWG & (1)#8EGC IN 1" CONDUIT. 4. TIE RECEPTACLES INTO EXISTING CIRCUIT #9 FROM PANEL LPP-4-10. 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A PLUG FOR EQUIPMENT AND INSTALL IT TO CORD PROVIDED WITH EQUIPMENT FOR USER PLUG-IN. 6. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL AN INTERLOCK SAFETY SWITCH BETWEEN FILTRATION BOX AND LASER CUTTER FOR PROPER OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT. SEE DRAWING E-202 DETAIL #3 FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. 7. SPECIAL RECEPTACLE SHALL BE LOCATED OVER COUNTER, NOT IN EXISTING RACEWAY. REFER TO ARCHITECT PLANS FOR FINAL LOCATION. NORTH These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:42:53 PM C:\Users\crspall\Documents\2 10018_Upson Hall_Electr ical_Central_R20_crspall.rvt 20625.03 WRS Partial Fourth Floor Plan - Power & Special Systems GDD CRS E-100 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 1/4" = 1'-0"1 Partial Fourth Floor Demolition Plan - Power & Special Systems 1/4" = 1'-0"2 Partial Fourth Floor Plan - Power & Special Systems OS OS a,b D DS OS OS D D DS OS 8 6.1 5 6 G F 2 (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) LAB 466 8 6.1 5 6 G F (E) X1 (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) L1L1 L1 L1 L1 1 EM L1 L1 L1 LAB 466 MAKER SPACE 466A 2 DEMOLITION NOTES: 1. NOT USED. 2. ALL EXISTING LIGHTS THAT ARE TO BE REMOVED SHALL BE TURNED OVER TO OWNER. GENERAL NOTES: A. SALVAGED LIGHTING CIRCUIT SHALL BE REWORKED AND EXTENDED AS REQUIRED FOR CONNECTION TO NEW LIGHT FIXTURES. B. NEW EXIT SIGN SHALL BE TIED INTO EXISTING EMERGENCY EXIT SIGN CIRCUIT. C. ALL EM LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL HAVE UL924 RELAY INSTALLED TO CONTROLTHE LIFE SAFETY LIGHTING. D. ALL LIGHT FIXTURE AIRCRAFT CABLE WIRING SHALL BE FIELD COORDINATED TO CORRECT LENGTH. ELECTRICAL COORDINATOR SHALL FIELD COORDINATE WITH ALL OTHER CONTRACTORS FOR COORDINATION OF LIGHT MOUNTING. E. ALL EXISTING CEILING DEVICES IN THE CORRIDOR SHALL BE FIELD COORDINATED FOR TEMPORARY REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION AS REQUIRED FOR MECHANICAL WORK. F. ALL OCCUPANCY SENSORS SHALL INCLUDE AUXILLARY CONTACTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT. DRAWNG NOTES: 1. TIE (4) 4' FIXTURES INSIDE DETAIL OUTLINE TO NEW DAYLIGHT SENSOR. 2. OWNER FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED UNDERSHELF TASK LIGHTING. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL FIXTURE TO UNDERSHELF PER ARCHITECT DRAWINGS. FIXTURES SHALL PLUG INTO RACEWAY AND BE OPERATED VIA TOGGLE SWITCH BUILT INTO FIXTURE. NORTH These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:42:54 PM C:\Users\crspall\Documents\210018_Upson Hall_Electr ical_Central_R20_crspall.rvt 20625.03 WRS Partial Fourth Floor Plan - Lighting GDD CRS E-101 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 1/4" = 1'-0"1 Partial Fourth Floor Demolition Plan - Lighting 1/4" = 1'-0"2 Partial Fourth Floor Plan - Lighting GENERAL NOTES: 1. FIXTURE FINISH COLOR SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH ARCHITECT AND OWNER. REFERENCE NOTES: 1. REFER TO ARCHITECT LAB EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE FOR ALL PLUG TYPES. 2. PROVIDE EM SHUTDOWN SYSTEM FOR ALL TECH EQUIPMENT AND OUTLETS. 3. PROVIDE USB CONNECTION BETWEEN WORKSTATION AND CNC MACHINE. These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:42:55 PM C:\Users\crspall\Documents\210018_Upson Hall_Electr ical_Central_R20_crspall.rvt 20625.03 WRS Schedules - Electrical GDD CRS E-200 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 FCU-1 FAN COIL UNIT 466 LAB 0.2 1 120 1.7 LPP-4-10 20/1 2#12 1#12 3/4"C 2#12 1#12 3/4"C X AU 30A NF AU FCU-1 PHASE GROUND CONDUIT PHASE GROUND CONDUIT SWITCH AMPS FUSE SIZE LOC. WEATHER PROOF REF. NOTES ITEM ID NAME ROOM LOCATION HP KW PHASE SYSTEM VOLTS MCA or SYSTEM AMPS PANEL or CONTROL CENTER CIRCUIT BREAKER or "FU" FOR FUSE POWER WIRING FROM PANEL TO CONTROL UNIT POWER WIRING FROM CONTROL UNIT TO EQUIPMENT NEMA SIZE STARTER NEMA TYPE MANUAL MOTOR STARTER MANUAL MOTOR STARTER WITH RELAY MAGNETIC STARTER COMBINATION MAGNETIC STARTER COMBINATION REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTER COMBINATION STARTER MP/FUSE (F) SIZE ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE WITH BYPASS ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE WITH REDUNDANT ASD PACKAGED CONTROL UNIT FURNISHED BY OTHERS DUPLEX PUMP CONTROLLER BY OTHERS FIRE ALARM FAN SHUTDOWN REQUIRED SUPPLY DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR W/ REMOTE TEST STATION RETURN DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR W/ REMOTE TEST STATION EXHAUST DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR W/ REMOTE TEST STATION THERMOSTAT CONNECTION AQUASTAT CONNECTION MOTORIZED DAMPER CONNECTION START/STOP PUSHBUTTONS HAND/OFF/AUTO SELECTOR SWITCH CONTROL DEVICE LOCATION SAFETY SWITCH ITEM ID EQUIPMENT POWER SOURCE, PROTECTION & WIRING CONTROL DEVICES AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS BY ITEM DESIGNATION G. "IU" INDICATES INTEGRAL WITH UNIT. F. "NF" INDICATES NON-FUSED. E. "AU" INDICATES CONTROL DEVICES IS LOCATED AT THE UNIT. D. PROVIDE OVERLOADS, SIZE AS REQUIRED, BY THE DIVISION 22/23 CONTRACTOR. C. ALL DEVICES SHALL BE SURFACE MOUNTED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. B. ITEM NUMBER INDICATES EQUIPMENT NUMBER A. ALL DEVICES PROVIDED BY THE DIVISION 26 CONTRACTOR. ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES: Notes: Total Est. Demand: 16 A Total Conn.: 16 A Total Est. Demand: 5940 VA Receptacle 5440 VA 100.00% 5440 VA Total Conn. Load: 5940 VA Power 500 VA 100.00% 500 VA Load Classification Connected Load Demand Factor Estimated Demand Panel Totals Legend: Total Amps: 17 A 20 A 14 A Total Load: 1940 VA 2340 VA 1660 VA 41 -- -- -- 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare 42 39 WATER JET 30 A 2 180 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare 40 37 -- -- -- 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare 38 35 LASER CUTTER 20 A 2 400 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare 36 33 CORD REEL 20 A 1 180 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare 34 31 Receptacle 20 A 1 540 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare 32 29 -- -- -- 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A Spare 30 27 -- -- -- 0 VA 540 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 28 25 BANDSAW 20 A 3 0 VA 500 VA 1 20 A Power 26 23 DRILL PRESS 30 A 1 180 VA 0 VA 1 20 A EXISTING 24 21 Receptacle 20 A 1 540 VA 0 VA 1 20 A EXISTNG 22 19 3D PRINTER 20 A 1 180 VA 360 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 20 17 3D PRINTER 20 A 1 180 VA 720 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 18 15 EXISTING 20 A 1 0 VA 900 VA 1 20 A Receptacle 16 13 MILL DRILL 20 A 1 180 VA 180 VA 1 20 A CORD REEL 14 11 EXISTING 20 A 1 0 VA 180 VA 1 20 A CORD REEL 12 9 EXISTING 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A EXISTING 10 7 EXISTING 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA -- -- -- 8 5 EXISTING 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA -- -- -- 6 3 EXISTING 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 3 70 A DC POWER SUPPLY 4 1 EXISTING 20 A 1 0 VA 0 VA 1 20 A DOOR OPERATOR 2 CKT Circuit Description Trip Poles A B C A B C Poles Trip Circuit Description CKT Notes: Enclosure: Type 1 MCB Rating: 100 A Mounting: Surface Wires: 4 Mains Rating: 100 A Supply From: Phases: 3 Mains Type: Location: Volts: 120/208 Wye A.I.C. Rating: Branch Panel: LPP-4-10(E) X1 LED EXIT SIGN REFER TO PLANS FOR MOUNTING BARRON: NXFR SERIES LED 120/277V CEILING - 1 L1 1x4 SUSPENDED FIXTURE FLUXWERX: VU1-B-XX LED 120/277V SUSPENDED 25 1 TYPE DESCRIPTION MFR. & CATALOG No. LAMP VOLTAGE/BALLAST MOUNTING UNIT WATTS REFERENCE NOTES LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE J FILTRATION BOX 1 1.1 12 120 1 LPP-4-10 20/1 2#12 #12 3/4" 1,2 H 10 kW DC BENCH POWER SUPPLY 1 48 208 3 LPP-4-10 70/3 3#4 #8 1" 1 G2 CNC WATER JET WORKSTATION... 1 2 120 1 LPP-4-10 20/1 2#12 #12 3/4" 1 G1 CNC WATER JET ABRASION CUTTER... 1 22 240 1 LPP-4-10 30/2 3#10 #10 3/4" 1,2,3 F LASER CUTTER (EPILOG HELIX LASER) TBD 1 208 1 LPP-4-10 20/2 2#12 #12 3/4" 1,2 E BAND SAW 1 1 5 230 3 LPP-4-10 20/3 2#12 #12 3/4" 1,2 D DRILL PRESS 1 .75 13 120 1 LPP-4-10 30/1 2#10 #12 3/4" 1,2 C 3D PRINTER (SMALL PRUSA) - TBD 1 .120 1 120 1 LPP-4-10 20/1 2#12 #12 3/4" 1 B 3D PRINTER (LARGE, MARKFORGE MARK 2)... 1 2 120 1 LPP-4-10 20/1 2#12 #12 3/4" 1 A MILL DRILL 1 8 120 1 LPP-4-10 20/1 2#12 #12 3/4" 1,2 PHASE GND CONDUIT HP KW AMPS TECHNOLOGY EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION QTY. (5) LOAD VOLTAGE PHASE PANEL CIRCUIT BREAKER BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING NOTES TECHNOLOGY EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION... BRANCH BREAKER NUMBER TYPICAL BLNL5-17 GENERAL DETAIL NOTES: PANEL NAME HL-T106-17 HL-T106-17 RECEPTACLE (EMERGENCY CIRCUIT RECEPTACLE SHALL BE "RED") B. PROVIDE GREEN GROUND WIRE IN ALL RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS. CONNECT TO GROUND BUS IN PANEL. DO NOT INSTALL RECEPTACLES, COMPUTER OR TELEPHONE OUTLETS BACK TO BACK. INSTALL IN ADJACENT STUD CAVITIES, TO REDUCE SOUND TRANSMISSION. A. 1/2" CONDUIT TO ABOVE LAY-IN CEILING WITH BUSHED END GROUNDING PIN ON TOP OR TO LEFT OF OUTLET ON HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED RECEPTACLES 1/2" CONDUIT TO ABOVE LAYIN CEILING WITH BUSHED END TAPE LABEL, VERIFY COLOR WITH OWNER, ADHERE TO COVERPLATE. (ACTUAL CIRCUIT INFORMATION SHALL BE AS INSTALLED AND NOT NECESSARILY THE SAME CIRCUIT NUMBER AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS.) RED BLU. BLK. RED (LINE) WHT. BLK. RED BLK. BLU. LOAD CEILING OCCUPANCY SENSOR 120/277V GRY. LOW VOLTAGE MOMENTARY ON/OFF SWITCH RED ADDITIONAL SWITCHES AS INDICATED ON THE PLAN VIEWS DETAIL NOTES: 0-10VDC CONTROL WIRING PROVDIE JUMPER WIRE TO ACCOMMODATE ROCKER SWITCH STYLE MOMENTARY ON/OFF SWITCH. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL OCCUPANCY SENSORS AS INDICATED ON THE PLANS VIEWS. ADDITIONAL POWER/RELAY PACKS SHALL BE PROVIDED TO ACCOMMODATE THE SENSOR QUANTITIES AS REQUIRED BY THE MANUFACTURER. 0-10VDC DIMMER SUITABLE FOR USE WITH THE INDIATED LUMINIARE TYPE POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE WHERE INDICATED ON THE PLANS TO PROVIDE DIMMING CAPABILITIES. RED (LOAD) CONTROL OUTPUT COMMON +24 VDC WHITE / NEUTRAL POWER/RELAY PACK NEUTRAL LINE D 3 1 1 2 2 1 3 EQUIPMENT: "INSERT DESIGNATION" POWER SOURCE: "INSERT SOURCE" TYPE SUPPLY: INSERT-NORMAL, OR CRITICAL OPERATION POWER, OR OPTIONAL STANDBY, OR LEGALLY REQUIRED, OR LIFE SAFETY EMERGENCY AS APPLICABLE" VOLTAGE: "INSERT APPLICABLE VOLTAGE-208/120V OR 480/277V, ETC." CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING: PHASE A - "BLACK OR BROWN" PHASE B - "RED OR ORANGE" PHASE C - "BLUE OR YELLOW" NEUTRAL - "WHITE OR GRAY" GROUND - GREEN AVAILABLE SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT: "INSERT AMPS RMS" PROVIDE CUSTOM NAMEPLATE AS INDICATED FOR ALL PANELBOARDS, MCC'S, SWITCHBOARDS, SWITCHGEAR, TRANSFER SWITCHES, GENERATORS ETC. NAMEPLATE SHALL BE ENGRAVED (WHITE LETTERING, BLACK BACKGROUND) AND ATTACHED TO THE EQUIPMENT WITH SCREWS. LETTERING SHALL BE 1/4" HIGH WITH SPACE BETWEEN LINES 1/8" MINIMUM. MINIMUM SHALL BE 8"H x 8"W. PROVIDE SAMPLE NAMEPLATE FOR REVIEW. THE AVAILABLE SHORT CIRCUIT SHOULD BE PROVIDED AT THE SERVICE ENTRANCE. 2. 1. DETAIL NOTES: 3. 4. LINE NEUTRAL BLK LOAD WHITE / NEUTRAL RED (LINE) POWER/RELAY PACKWHT. BLK. OFF SWITCH RED (LOAD) BLU BLK RED CONTROL OUTPUTBLU COMMON +24VDCRED BLU CONTROL OUTPUT COMMONBLK +24VDC CEILING SENSOR CEILING SENSOR RED PROVIDE A COMPLETE DIGITAL LIGHTING ROOM CONTROLLER WITH FEATURES INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS AND IN THE SPECIFICATIONS WITHIN THE INDICATED SPACES. PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED COMPONENTS FOR A COMPLETE SYSTEM. ALL SYSTEM WIRING SHALL BE AS REQUIRED BY THE SYSTEM MANUFACTURER. THE WIRING DIAGRAM IS GENERIC. ALL NECESSARY COMPONENTS MAY NOT BE SHOWN. REFER TO SPECIFIC ROOM PLANS AND ZONING INDICATED FOR ALL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS AND COMPONENTS. REFER TO SPECFICATIONS FOR FURTHER REQUIREMENTS. GENERAL NOTES: A. B. C. REFER TO PLANS FOR QUANTITY. SOME SPACES SHALL HAVE THE PHOTOCELL INTEGRAL TO THE FIXTURE. REFER TO THE FLOOR PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR MORE INFORMATION. DETAIL NOTES: 1 1 1 WHT. BLK. 120/277V BLUE BLUE GRAY VIOLET GREEN 0-10V DIMMING LED DRIVER IN FIXTURE 0-10V DIMMING LED DRIVER IN FIXTURE CAT. 5e UTP CAT. 5e UTP CAT. 5e UTP CAT. 5e UTP CEILING OCCUPANCY/ VACANCY SENSOR CEILING OCCUPANCY/ VACANCY SENSOR DIMMING CONTROLLER CEILING PHOTO SENSOR NEUTRAL LIGHTING ROOM 1 DIGITAL WALL SWITCH AND/OR DIMMER AR AUXILARY RELAY FOR HVAC CONTACT TO EMS 2 2 1 20/1 NEUTRAL E E E C TECH EQUIPMENT ELECTRICALLY HELD CONTACTOR WITH 2 WIRE CONTROL MODULE MOUNTED IN SOUNDPROOF NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE. PANEL 30/1 30/1 30/1 30/1 WIRING INDICATED ON THE RISER DIAGRAM IS DIAGRAMMATIC ONLY AND IS NOT INTENDED TO INDICATE ROUTING OR QUANTITIES OF WIRES REQUIRED. PROVIDE WIRING FOR A COMPLETE SYSTEM AS REQUIRED BY SYSTEM MANUFACTURER. ALL DEVICES MAY NOT BE INDICATED ON RISER DIAGRAM: REFER TO FLOOR PLANS FOR QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS OF DEVICES. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. GENERAL RISER NOTES: A. B. M M M M These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:42:56 PM C:\Users\crspall\Documents\210018_Upson Hall_Electr ical_Central_R20_crspall.rvt 20625.03 WRS Details - Electrical GDD CRS E-201 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 1/8" = 1'-0"1 TYPICAL RECEPTACLE IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS NTS2 CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR (DIMMING) NTS3 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DETAIL NTS4 CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR (MULTIPLE SENSORS) 1/8" = 1'-0"5 TYPICAL LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM NOT TO SCALE6 EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN DETAIL ACCESS CONTROLLER TO ACCESS CONTROLLER ELECTRIC STRIKE POWER SUPPLY WITH BATTERY BACKUP ACCESS CONTROLLER POWER SUPPLY EM 120V. MOTION SENSOR POWER TRANSFER HINDGE MAGNETIC DOOR CONTACTS (CONCEALED) CRASH BAR DOOR ELECTRIC STRIKE PUSH BUTTON (OPPOSITE SIDE OF DOOR) BELDEN NO. 9873 CABLE TO SECURITY PANEL LOCAL ACCESS CONTROL ALARM TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (RELEASE ON ANY FIRE ALARM) ACCESS CONTROLLER AC-5000 TO ACCESS CONTROLLER OR BUILDING CONTROLLER 4-PAIR, 24 AWG CAT. 5 CABLE TO PANEL ___ DS DS ACPDPS CORD REEL #12/3 CORD WIRE MESH CORD GRIP, HUBBELL 074010 TYPE UTILITY BOX AND COVER WITH TWISTLOCK L5-20 RECEPTACLE TWISTLOCK PLUG TO MATCH RECEPTACLE PROVIDE CHANNEL OR ANGLE SUPPORT STEEL MOUNTED TO BUILDING STRUCTURE BOX WITH 20A DUPLEX RECEPTACLE LOCATED 6'-6" FROM FLOOR HARD MOUNTED. REFER TO OWNER/ARCH FOR FINAL REEL LOCATION. 3/4" CONDUIT NEMA 208V RECEPTACLE SHALL MATCH USER EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS INCOMING LASER POWER CURRENT SENSOR CT IN J-BOX LASER CUTTER LASER CUTTER POWER CORD DRY CONTACT INPUT TIME DELAY RELAY DOM RIBD01BDC INCOMING RIB RELAY CONTROL POWER BOFA AD BASE 2 ORACLE LASER FILTER LASER FILTER POWER CORD INCOMING FILTER POWER R CT LASER CUTTER REFERENCE NOTES: A. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WITH SUPPORT FROM LAB STAFF, SHALL MEASURE TYPICAL LASER CUTTER AMP DRAW: a. EXPECTED "STANDBY" STATE OF LASER CUTTER BETWEEN 0.01AMP TO 0.5AMP. THIS SHALL BE THE "LASER OFF" LOW LIMIT OF ADJUSTABLE CT CURRENT SENSOR. b. EXPECTED "OPERATING" STATE OF LASER BETWEEN 0.5AMP TO 5AMP. THIS SHALL BE THE "LASER ON" HIGH LIMIT OF ADJUSTABLE CT CURRENT SENSOR. B. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL WIRE THE ADJUSTABLE CT CURRENT SENSOR OUTPUT DRYCONTACT CLOSURE TO THE BOFA FILTER UNIT "START STOP" OPTIONAL ON/OFF INPUT "RED AND WHITE" WIRES. C. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR, WITH SUPPORT FROM LAB STAFF, SHALL CHECK ALL MODES OF LASER CUTTER OPERATION TO ENSURE BOFA UNIT FUNCTIONS CONTINUALLY AS THE LASER CUTTER IS IN OPERATION MODE. D. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL A "DELAY ON MAKE" CONTROL RELAY UNIT TO PREVENT THE BOFA FILTER FROM CYCLING ON/OFF DURING NORMAL LASER CUTTER OPERATION. PROVIDE 10-MINUTE "DELAY ON MAKE" (DOM) RIBD01BDC DELAY RELAY WHEN A SIGNAL IS SENT TO START THE BOFA FILTER FROM THE ADJUSTABLE CURRENT SENSOR. THIS WILL ALSO ENSURE THE BOFA FILTER RUNS FOR AN EXTRA TEN MINUTES AFTER THE LASER CUTTER FINISHED WORKING. TIME DELAY TO BE COORDINATED WITH OWNER. E. ALL COMPONENTS ARE MOUNTED TO THE BACK OF THE BOFA FILTER. These documents and all the ideas, arrangements, designs and plans indicated thereon or presented thereby are owned by and remain the property of SWBR and no part thereof shall be utilized by any person, firm, or corporation for any purpose whatsoever except with the specific written permission of SWBR. All rights reserved. © 387 East Main Street Rochester NY 14604 585 232 8300 | rochester@swbr.com FILE PATH: SWBR Project Number Checked By: Project Manager: Drawn By: Revisions 6/7/2021 1:42:56 PM C:\Users\crspall\Documents\210018_Upson Hall_Electr ical_Central_R20_crspall.rvt 20625.03 WRS DETAILS II ELECTRICAL GDD CRS E-202 100% Construction Documents Cornell University Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Ithaca, NY June 1, 2021 NTS 1 TYPICAL DOOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM NTS 2 CORD REEL DETAIL 1/8" = 1'-0" 3 LASER CUTTER/BOFA DIAGRAM PROJECT: Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Date: June 30, 2021 RFI Form RFI/ Page/ Response Dwg./Spec./Rep. Section/ Design Team Index Number Paragraph/Topic RFI Response 1 23 82 19 Part 2, Article 2.2 Specification Section 23 82 19 Fan Coil Units indicates that the basis of design is Trane. The Fan Coil Unit Schedule on plan sheet M-300 indicates Johnson Control FHX-DO3. Please clarify which is correct. See Addendum No. 1, Item 2. Johnson Controls is basis of design. 2 23 09 23 Part 2 Drawing Note 3 on plan sheet M-100 notes provide a break glass manual shutoff. Please provide brand/manuf. and model #. See Addendum No. 1, Item 1. 3 Bid Proposal Certification Form, Page BF-3 Page BF-3 of the Bid Proposal Certification From indicates that Bidder Project Qualifications are to be submitted with our bid on e-Builder. No criteria is stated. Is there a specific format to be used? No project qualifications are required. 4 26 05 01 Please provide a spec/part number for the new cord reels (detail 2, Sheet E202). See Addendum No. 1, Item 3. Cord reel shall be equal to Hubbell HBL45123R20. 02 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Specifications - inc addenda.pdf UPSON HALL 466 LAB RENOVATION Project Manual & Specifications June 1, 2021 Owner Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, D.P.C 387 East Main Street Rochester, New York 14604 UPSON HALL 466 TABLE OF CONTENTS LAB RENOVATION Page 1 Instructions to Bidders Bid Proposal Submission Form General Conditions and Exhibits Supplementary Conditions DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 Summary of the Work Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions Section 01 21 00 Allowances Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings Section 01 31 50 Electronic Project Management Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules Section 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 35 29 General Health & Safety Section 01 35 43 General Environmental Requirements Section 01 35 44 Spill Control Section 01 35 45 Refrigerant Compliance Section 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements Section 01 42 00 References Section 01 45 00 Quality Control Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities Section 01 51 23 Heat During Construction Section 01 66 00 Storage and Protection Section 01 73 29 Cutting, Patching and Repairing Section 01 77 00 Project Close Out Section 01 78 22 Fixed Equipment Inventory Section 01 78 23 Operating and Maintenance Data Section 01 78 36 Warranties and Bonds Section 01 78 39 Record Documents UPSON HALL 466 TABLE OF CONTENTS LAB RENOVATION Page 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING Section 22 05 00 - BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS Section 22 05 23 - VALVES Section 22 05 53 - PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION Section 22 07 00 - INSULATION Section 22 10 10 - PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES Section 22 30 10 - EQUIPMENT DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 23 05 00 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS Section 23 05 04 - ELECTRIC WIRING Section 23 05 19 - GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS Section 23 05 23 - VALVES Section 23 05 48 - VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS Section 23 05 53 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION Section 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING Section 23 07 10 - INSULATION Section 23 09 23 - BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM Section 23 20 10 - PIPING SYSTEMS Section 23 21 10 - WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES Section 23 31 00 - SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION Section 23 36 00 - VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS Section 23 37 13 - REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS Section 23 82 19 - FAN COIL UNITS DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 00 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Section 26 05 01 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Section 26 05 26 - GROUNDING Section 26 20 00 - ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION Section 26 29 13 - MOTOR CONTROLLERS Section 26 50 00 - LIGHTING DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS Section 27 21 00 - LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Section 28 31 02 - ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS UPSON HALL 466 TABLE OF CONTENTS LAB RENOVATION Page 3 DRAWINGS General G-000 Cover Sheet G-001 Code Compliance Plan & Notes Architectural A-000 General Notes & Legends A-101 Partial Fourth Floor Plans A-102 Partial Plans & Lab Equipment Schedule A-420 Interior Elevations A-601 Details & Schedules A-602 Specifications Plumbing P-100 General Notes, Symbols List, Details & Floor Plans – Plumbing Mechanical M-000 General Notes and Symbols – HVAC M-100 Partial Fourth Floor Plans – HVAC M-200 Control Schematics & System Summaries M-201 Control Schematics & System Summaries M-300 Details & Schedules – HVAC Electrical E-000 Symbols List & General Notes – Electrical E-100 Partial Fourth Floor Plan – Power & Special Systems E-101 Partial Fourth Floor Plan – Lighting E-200 Schedules – Electrical E-201 Details – Electrical E-202 Details II – Electrical END OF DOCUMENT Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Project: Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Owner: Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect: SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape, D.P.C. 387 East Main Street Rochester, New York 14604 1. BID DOCUMENTS The Bid Documents provided electronically by the Owner will consist of the following: (1) Instructions to Bidders. (2) Bid Proposal Certification Form. (3) General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - "General Requirements", and Supplemental Conditions. (4) Drawings and Specifications. (5) Addenda and/or bulletins issued prior to date of opening of Proposals. • Pre-Bid Conference video and other materials will be available via Drop Box at: https://cornell.box.com/s/7fihlhykiknp9igc4x8anprxl1kjbzbo Bid Documents are available electronically in the eBuilder Bid Portal under the Bid Package Invitation – Invitation Documents Tab. Dataflow, Inc. maintains the current set of Documents and all addenda and is the contracted supplier for printed plans and specifications for this project. Contact Dataflow at CUProjects@goDataflow.com. Bid Documents Terms of Use / Disclaimer - By accessing and/or using the Cornell University Document Files, You accept without limitation or qualifications, the following Terms of Use: a. Cornell University grants You the permission to use and view the Document Files subject to these Terms of Use. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-2 b. Except in connection with preparing your bid, You may not modify, copy, transmit, display, reproduce, publish, license, create derivative works from, transfer, or sell any information, materials, drawings, content, products or services from the Document Files (together "Content") in any form without Cornell University's prior written permission. You may print out a copy or download Content solely for Your internal use. In doing so, you may not remove or alter, or cause to be removed or altered, any copyright, trademark, trade name, service mark, or any other proprietary notice or legend appearing on any of the Content. c. You may not provide parts of or full sets of Document Files to any planhouse or online document repositories. d. The trademarks, logos, and service marks (collectively the "Trademarks") displayed on the Document Files are registered and unregistered Trademarks of Cornell University and others. Nothing contained on the Document Files should be construed as granting, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license or right to use any Trademark displayed on the Document Files without the written permission of Cornell University or such party that may own the Trademark. Your use of the Trademarks displayed on the Document Files, or any other content, except as provided in these Terms of Use, are strictly prohibited. 2. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a. Each Bidder shall acquaint themselves with location conditions as they exist, as well as the character of the necessary work to be carried out under the proposed Contract. A PreBid Zoom meeting will be scheduled and include: a review of project related information, an opportunity to ask and receive responses to Bidder questions, and make such inquiries as are necessary to fully understand the subject facilities, physical conditions and/or restrictions attendant to the work under the Contract. b. Boring information, water levels, indications of sub-surface conditions and similar information given on the Drawings or in the Specifications are furnished only for the convenience of the Bidders. The Owner, Architect and Consulting Engineer make no representation regarding the character and extent of the soil data or other sub-surface conditions to be encountered during the work and no guarantee as to the accuracy or validity of interpretation of such data or conditions is made or intended. c. Each Bidder shall also thoroughly examine and become familiar with the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents. d. By submitting a Bid, the Bidder covenants and affirms that the Bidder has carefully examined all of the Bid Documents including Drawings, Specifications, and the Addenda and Bulletins, if any, as well as posed any questions associated with the Site, and that Bidder is satisfied as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, and all matters which may in any way affect the work or its performance. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-3 3. DISCREPANCIES a. Should a Bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents, or be in doubt as to their meaning, Bidder shall at once enter the item in the Q&A Board of the eBuilder Bid Portal and an Addenda with written instructions will be sent to all bidders. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for oral instructions. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing and entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Q&A Board. Inquiries received in advance of the deadline established at the Pre-Bid conference will be given consideration. 4. PRE-BID CONFERENCE a. A virtual pre-bid conference has been scheduled for 10:30AM, June 22, 2021, via Zoom at: https://cornell.zoom.us/j/99778598725?pwd=WlVMTnBJS2NSQnA1M 0xEKzZqOUhjZ z09&from=addon The Zoom meeting will be to review project related information and respond to Bidder questions. The Pre-Bid Conference is designed to assist Bidders in understanding the Contract Documents, the opportunity to pose clarifying questions or make inquiries regarding Contract Documents. Results will be published in an Addendum. 5. BID SUBMISSION Bid Submissions must include the following: a. Base Bid entered into the eBuilder Portal broken down per the Bid Scope Tab Schedule of Values (Step 1: Bid Form of the Response Form tab). b. Additional Required Information: 1. Bid Proposal Certification Form 2. Bid Bond 3. Bond Surety Company 4. Bonding Rate for Change Orders 5. Proposed Project Team and Resumes 6. Proposed Project Schedule 7. Substitutions c. Bid Proposal Certification Form: The Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be signed by the Principal(s) or Officer(s) legally authorized to bind the Bidder, and to execute such documents on behalf of their respective firms or organizations, and the Certificates included in the Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be completed accordingly. Bidder's legal name should be fully and accurately stated. Completed form shall be without interlineation, alterations, or erasures unless initialed and dated by the signer; Owner expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive irregularities or informalities in its sole and reasonable discretion. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-4 d. Bid Bond: Each Bidder will be required to furnish a Bid Bond electronically via the eBuilder Bid Portal in the amount of 10% of the Bid Amount. Such Bid Bond shall guarantee that the Bidder will execute the Contract if it is awarded to him in conformity with his Proposal. Such Proposal Guarantee Bond shall include a statement that the Insurer shall, at the option of the Bidder, be willing to provide to the Bidder the Contract Bonds as described in 13 below. 6. SALES AND USE TAX EXEMPTION a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Sales and Use Taxes. 7. FEDERAL EXCISE TAX a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Federal Excise Taxes. 8. TAX EXEMPT STATUS a. Bidders shall inform all prospective subcontractors and suppliers from whom they expect to obtain proposals or quotations of the tax-exempt status of the Owner as set forth above and request that they reflect anticipated tax credits in their proposals or quotations. 9. EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES a. At the Contractor's request, following the award of a Contract, Contractor exempt purchase certificates will be furnished by the Owner to the Contractor with respect to such tax-exempt articles or transactions as may be applicable under the Contract. 10. TRADE SUBCONTRACTORS, MATERIAL SUPPLIERS a. Each portion of the work shall be performed by an organization equipped and experienced to do work in that particular field, and no portion of the work shall be reserved by the Bidder to himself unless he is so equipped and experienced. Subcontracts shall be awarded only to parties satisfactory to the Owner and the Architect. Each subcontractor and materials supplier shall be approved individually. b. In the spaces provided in the eBuilder Bid Portal Bid Scope form, the Bidder shall list all portions of the work he proposes to perform directly with his own forces. c. A list of names from which the Bidder proposes to select subcontractors, materials suppliers, and/or manufacturers for the principal trades or subdivisions of the work is required as part of the Proposal. d. In the Bid Scope Tab in the eBuilder Bid Portal, a list of the principal trades or subdivisions of the work for which such a listing is required, together with the provisions which govern the listing, selection and approval of principal subcontractors. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-5 11. UNIT PRICES The Bidder agrees, if awarded the Contract, to perform work "In addition to" or "deducted from" the scope of the Contract Documents as directed by the Owner and/or Architect, computed in accordance with the unit prices, which prices include all overhead, profit and other expense items in connection therewith, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents. a. Certain Unit Prices may be requested. If requested, a form will be attached to these instructions and will need to be completed and uploaded to the eBuilder Bidding Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. All Bidders are required to bid on all Unit Prices without exception. b. All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete for each item, together with all work in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental work. c. Unit prices shall be the total compensation for the item and includes all overhead, profit and any other charges of the Contractor and/or subcontractor in connection therewith. d. Adjustments will be computed on net variation of total quantities of like items. e. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the unit prices listed below prior to the execution of the Contract. 12. SUBSTITUTIONS a. Proposals shall conform to the requirements of the Bid Documents. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item of material or equipment, element of work, or method of construction set forth in the Bid Documents, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1, are to be entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields by listing each proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted on the form supplied with these instructions. However, the Bidder is cautioned to make his base proposal on the materials and items specified by name or other particular reference. 13. ALTERNATE PROPOSALS a. Certain Alternate Proposals may be requested by the Owner and are included in the General Requirements. They will be listed in the Bid Scope Tab in the eBuilder Bid Portal. All Bidders are required to bid on all Alternates without exception. b. Alternate Proposals shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection therewith. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-6 14. METHOD OF SUBMISSION a. Base Bid shall be prepared and electronically submitted via the eBuilder Bid Portal. All required fields and attachments in the eBuilder Bid Portal must be completed. b. Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be prepared electronically submitted as an attachment via the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. c. Completed and responsive Bid Proposals shall be submitted through the eBuilder Bid Portal no later than 3:00PM on July 8, 2021. d. Bid Proposals shall not contain any recapitulation of the work to be done. No oral, written, electronic or telephonic proposals, or modifications will be considered. 15. BID OPENING a. Completed and responsive Bid Proposals will be opened electronically via eBuilder Bid Portal. Responsive Bid results will be posted to the Facilities Contracts website at: https://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/pob/projects.cfm The Owner reserves the right to postpone the date and time of opening of proposals at any time prior to the date and time announced in this Instruction to Bidders or amendments thereto. 16. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. It is the intent of the Owner to enter into a Contract with one General Contractor for the entire project. All labor and services and materials and supplies, etc. are to be provided in accordance with the Contract. b. Award of the Contract shall be made to the bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible base bid who, in the opinion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the work. The competence and responsibility of the Bidders' proposed principal subcontractors will be considered in making the Award. c. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals, and to waive any informalities in Bidding. Contract award shall be subject to approval of Cornell University’s Contractors Qualification Statement. d. Bidder expressly warrants and commits that its Proposal shall remain unchanged and in full force and effect at the Owner’s option for a period of not less than ninety (90) calendar days following the bid opening date. e. Bidders may submit, recall, modify, resubmit or withdraw their Bids through the eBuilder Bid Portal up until the Bid Due Date and Time. f. The Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate Proposals listed within thirty (30) calendar days following the award of a construction contract or such other time as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-7 17. SCHEDULE OF VALUES a. The successful Bidder shall submit a complete "Schedule of Values" showing the amounts allocated to the various trades, suppliers, subcontractors, installers and General Contractor's work, aggregating the total sum of the Contract. If requested by the Owner or Architect, the complete "Schedule of Values" shall be submitted prior to award of Contract. 18. PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BONDS Prior to commencement of on-site construction activities, the successful Bidder shall furnish the Owner with "Performance" and “Labor and Material Payment Bonds", each in the amount of 100% of the Contract Price. Each of these Bonds are to be in a form with such sureties as the Owner may approve. The cost of such bonds shall be included in the Bidders Proposal. 19. START OF WORK a. Work at the site shall be started within seven (7) calendar days from the date of issuance of written authorization to proceed and shall achieve substantial completion of the project no later than October 29, 2021. 1. NOTE: Prior to commencement of any on-site construction activities, the successful Bidder shall: i. Furnish the Owner with fully executed and satisfactory Payment and Performance bonds. No on-site construction activities may commence until executed and satisfactory bonds are in place for the subject project. ii. Furnish the Owner with safety plan related to COVID-19 pandemic. b. The construction schedule and completion are critical. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur. 20. ADDENDA AND BULLETINS a. Bidders must acknowledge in Step 3 of the Bid Response in the eBuilder Bid Portal each Addendum and/or Bulletin issued during the bidding period. 21. REQUIRED POST-AWARD SUBMISSIONS BY THE APPARENT LOW BIDDER a. Within fourteen days after bid opening: (1) Six-Month Workforce Projection b. Upon Execution of Contract: (1) Insurance Certificate (2) Performance Bond (3) Labor and Material Payment Bond (4) Schedule of Work (bar chart) (5) Federal Tax Identification Number END OF SECTION BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-1 UPSON HALL 466 LAB RENOVATION Cornell University, Ithaca, New York BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM Vendor Name: Type of Firm, State of Incorporation if Applicable Street Address, City, State, Zip Having carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, the "Conditions of the Contract" (General, Division 1 - "General Requirements"), Supplemental Conditions, the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents dated June 1, 2021 prepared by SWBR Architecture, Engineering & Landscape Architecture, D.P.C, 387 East Main Street, Rochester, New York 14604, as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all material, equipment, labor, plant, machinery, tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes and specified insurance necessary to perform the entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance with the said documents. 1. Receipt of the Addenda to the Terms and Conditions, Drawings or Specifications has been acknowledged in the eBuilder Bid Portal. 2. Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises (M/WBEs) Facilities and Campus Services supports Cornell University’s ongoing commitment to encourage business opportunities and diversity among its vendor community by promoting minority owned and controlled business’ development as a shared responsibility. The University’s intention is to create and expand opportunities for minority, women, veteran, LGBTQ, small and locally owned businesses through construction labor opportunities and the procurement of goods and services. Positive good faith efforts to advance the University’s objectives shall be made by all Contractors, engaging, and maximizing these diverse enterprise goals, and to positively drive Cornell's economic impact. Cornell University Diversity Council Statement: "Cultivate partnerships with the widest spectrum of Off-Campus entities and include a fully diverse range of Off-Campus participants in Cornell's events, contracts, services, and initiatives." 3. Milestone Dates a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to commence work at the site within seven (7) calendar days after date of issuance of written notice to proceed and to achieve substantial completion of the project no later than October 29, 2021, with final completion no later than December 7, 2021. BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-2 b. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur. Contractor shall attach a Project Duration Schedule to this form that meets the duration established. c. Following are additional Milestone Dates: a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to furnish a "Construction Progress Schedule" consistent with the agreed upon Construction Duration showing the starting and completion dates for all principal trades and subdivisions of the Work, together with such additional information related thereto as may reasonably be required. Such schedule shall be in conformance with General Requirements, Section 01 32 16, 1.3, A. 4. Proposed Principal Subcontractors a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to employ subcontractors from the list submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields subject to the following provisions: i. The Owner and Architect reserve the right to review the list of "Proposed Principal Subcontractors" prior to the award of the Contract, and to delete from it the name or names of any to whom they may have a reasonable objection. The Contractor may make the final selection of principal subcontractors at his option from the resulting list after the award of the Contract. 5. Contractor Team: a. The Owner reserves the right to reject the names of any Project Manager or Superintendent provide in the eBuilder Bid Portal submission to whom they have a reasonable objection. 6. Bonds a. Bid Bond. A Bid Bond in the amount of a minimum of 10% of Bid Amount is attached to the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. b. Performance and Payment Bonds. Prior to commencement of any on-site construction activities, the undersigned expressly agrees if awarded the Contract, to deliver to Owner executed "Performance" and "Labor and Material Payment Bonds" in such forms as are acceptable to the Owner and in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. c. Such bonds will be furnished by the Surety entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields d. Bonding Rate for Change Orders has been entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-3 7. Bid Scope - Schedule of Values a. The undersigned agrees, prior to the award of a construction contract and upon the request of the Architect or Owner, to submit a complete, itemized and detailed "Schedule of Values" including Alternates elected, if any, showing the amount allocated to the various trades and subdivisions of the work, aggregating to the total Contract Sum submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal. 8. Substitutions a. The Base Bid is predicated on compliance with the Drawings and Specifications without substitutions. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item noted in the Specifications, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1. c. Any Substitutions are to be entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields by listing each proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted. d. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitution. e. The sum stated includes any modifications of work or additional work that may be required by reason of acceptance of substitution. Substitute materials must be approved and accepted by the Owner in writing before same may be used in lieu of those named in the Specifications. 9. Unit Price Schedule a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to perform work "In addition to" or "deducted from" the scope of the Contract Documents as directed by the Owner and/or Architect, computed in accordance with the unit prices form uploaded in the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields, which prices include all overhead, profit and other expense items in connection therewith, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents. b. All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete for each item, together with all work in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental work. c. Adjustments will be computed on net variation of total quantities of like items. d. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the unit prices entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields prior to the execution of the Contract. BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-4 10. Acceptance a. The undersigned agrees that the amount submitted for the Base Bid and any Alternates and Unit Pricing along with the required attachments in the Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal have been reviewed and are accurate. b. It is understood and agreed that the Owner expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive irregularities or informalities in its sole and reasonable discretion. c. Upon acceptance of Bidder’s Proposal, Bidder expressly agrees and affirms to hold its unchanged Bid Proposal for ninety (90) calendar days. The undersigned will execute an Agreement between Contractor and Owner, amended and/or supplemented, if required, in accordance with the Proposal as accepted. Nothing contained herein shall preclude Bidder and Owner from mutually agreeing upon a Contract based upon the unchanged Bid Proposal if the time elapsed from Award is in excess of ninety (90) calendar days. d. The undersigned acknowledges the following Addendum(s) (if applicable): e. It is understood and agreed that award of the Contract shall be made to the bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible bid who, in the opinion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the work. f. The undersigned agrees to furnish Owner satisfactory and executed Performance and Payment Bonds prior to the commencement of any Work on-site. g. The undersigned acknowledges as Contractor to be and remain exclusively in control of the Project site and Work, as well as the Project’s Health & Safety Plan, measures, and/or protocols, for the duration of construction activities. i. The undersigned acknowledges receipt of Supplemental Conditions to the Contract surrounding Contractor Response and Health & Safety Protocols for COVID-19, or other viral, bacterial, or microbial presence (as applicable). ii. The undersigned acknowledges that no one will be permitted on the job site until the Health & Safety Plan has been submitted. h. Alternates: 1. The undersigned, if awarded the Contract, proposes to perform work in addition to or in place of the scope of the work shown and specified herein associated with the Base Bid in accordance with the Alternate Proposals, which amounts are to be added or deducted to the amount of the Base Bid as indicated for the Alternates specified in Division 1 of the Specifications. Addendum No. __ dated ____. BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-5 2. It is understood that the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any of the Alternate Proposals provided in the eBuilder Bid Portal within thirty (30) calendar days following the award of a construction contract or such other time as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor. The following documentation is required to be submitted electronically in the eBuilder Bidding Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields This Form with Proposed Milestone Schedule – signed and executed Bid Bond Proposed Project Team Resumes Bidder Project Qualifications (Bidder) By: Title: Business Address: Dated: BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-6 CERTIFICATE OF NON-COLLUSION By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder certifies, and in the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of its knowledge and belief: a. The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor. b. Unless required by law, the prices that have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed, directly or indirectly, by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder to any other bidder or any competitor prior to opening. c. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other persons, partnership, or corporation to submit or not submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition. (Bidder) By: Title: Dated: BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-7 CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE BIDDER I, ___________________________________ __________________, certify that I am the _____________________________ of the Corporation named as Bidder within this Bid Form for General Contractors; that __________________________________, who signed said Bid Form on behalf of the bidder was then _______________________________ of said Corporation; that I know his signature; that his signature thereto is genuine and that said Bid Form and attachments thereto were duly signed and executed for and on behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. (Secretary-Clerk) Dated: Rev 4-2021 G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S FOR UPSON HALL 466 LAB RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK i Rev 4-2021 GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 Owner 1 Section 1.02 Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings 1 Section 1.03 Order of Precedence 1 ARTICLE 2 CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 Contractor's Obligations 2 Section 2.02 Contractor's Title to Materials 2 Section 2.03 "Or Equal" Clause 2 Section 2.04 Quality, Quantity and Labeling 3 Section 2.05 Superintendence by Contractor 3 Section 2.06 Subsurface or Site Conditions 4 Section 2.07 Representations of Contractor 4 Section 2.08 Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions 4 Section 2.09 Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors 5 Section 2.10 Meetings 5 Section 2.11 Related Work 5 Section 2.12 Surveys and Layout 5 Section 2.13 Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies 5 Section 2.14 Project Labor Rates 6 Section 2.15 Daily Reports 6 ARTICLE 3 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 Access to the Work 6 Section 3.02 Notice for Testing 6 Section 3.03 Inspection of Work 7 Section 3.04 Inspection and Testing 7 Section 3.05 Defective or Damaged Work 7 Section 3.06 Acceptance 7 ARTICLE 4 CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 Changes 8 Section 4.02 Claims for Extra Work 11 Section 4.03 Form of Change Orders 12 ARTICLE 5 TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 Time of Completion 12 ii Rev 4-2021 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION Section 6.01 Termination for Cause 13 Section 6.02 Termination for Convenience of Owner 13 Section 6.03 Owner's Right to do Work 13 ARTICLE 7 DISPUTES Section 7.01 Disputes Procedure 14 ARTICLE 8 SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 Subcontracting 15 ARTICLE 9 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 Cooperation with Other Contractors 15 ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 Accidents and Accident Prevention 16 Section 10.02 Adjoining Property 17 Section 10.03 Emergencies 17 Section 10.04 Bonds 17 Section 10.05 Risks Assumed by the Contractor 18 Section 10.06 Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance 18 Section 10.07 Liability Insurance of the Owner 20 Section 10.08 Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards 20 Section 10.09 Effect of Procurement of Insurance 21 Section 10.10 No Third Party Rights 21 ARTICLE 11 USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 Substantial Completion 21 Section 11.02 Occupancy Prior to Acceptance 21 ARTICLE 12 PAYMENT Section 12.01 Provision of Payment 22 Section 12.02 Stored Materials & Equipment 23 Section 12.03 Retention 24 Section 12.04 Withholding Payments 24 Section 12.05 Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment 25 Section 12.06 Final Payment and Release 26 iii Rev 4-2021 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 13 TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 Tax Exemption 26 ARTICLE 14 GUARANTEE Section 14.01 Guarantee 27 ARTICLE 15 STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted 27 Section 15.02 Laws Governing the Contract 27 Section 15.03 Assignments 27 Section 15.04 No Third Party Rights 28 Section 15.05 Waiver of Rights of Owner 28 Section 15.06 Limitation on Actions 28 Section 15.07 Owner's Representative 28 ARTICLE 16 MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Section 16.01 Definitions 28 Section 16.02 Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises 28 Section 16.03 MWBE Utilization Plan 29 Section 16.04 Reports and Records 29 ARTICLE 17 ACCOUNTING, INSPECTION AND AUDIT 30 ARTICLE 18 CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 30 ARTICLE 19 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 30 ARTICLE 20 CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 Release of Information 31 Section 20.02 Confidential Information 31 Section 20.03 Use of Owner's Name 31 ARTICLE 21 CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT 32 iv Rev 4-2021 EXHIBITS A Change Order Documentation Instructions Construction Contract Change Order Request Construction Contract Change Order Summary B Final Release C Guarantee D Form I MWBE Utilization Plan Form II Contractor’s Affirmative Action Plan Form III Affirmative Action Workforce Report E Labor Rate Breakdown F Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation G Contractor Performance Evaluation 1 Rev 4-2021 ARTICLE 1 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 - Owner A. The Owner is Cornell University as identified in the Agreement and referred to throughout the Contract Documents as the "Owner" or "Cornell University". B. Ownership of Documents: All drawings, specifications, computations, sketches, test data, survey results, photographs, renderings and other material relating to the Work, whether furnished to or prepared by the Contractor, are the property of Cornell University. The Contractor shall use such materials or information therefrom only in connection with the Work of this Contract. When requested, the Contractor shall deliver such materials to Cornell University. C. The Owner shall give all orders and directions contemplated under the Contract relative to the execution of the Work. The Owner shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability, and fitness of the Work and shall decide all questions which may arise in relation to said Work. The Owner's estimates and decisions shall be final except as otherwise expressly provided. D. Any differences or conflicts concerning performance which may arise between the Contractor and other Contractors performing Work for the Owner shall be adjusted and determined by the Owner. E. The table of contents, titles, captions, headings, running headlines, and marginal notes contained herein and in said documents is intended to facilitate reference to various provisions of the Contract Documents and in no way affect the interpretation of the provisions to which they refer. Section 1.02 - Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings The meaning and intent of all specifications, plans and drawings shall be determined in a manner approved by the Owner. Section 1.03 - Order of Precedence A. Should a conflict occur in or between or among any parts of the Contract Documents that are entitled to equal preference, the more expensive way of doing the Work, the sounder technique or workmanship, or better quality or greater quantity of material shall govern, unless the Owner directs otherwise so directs in writing. B. Drawings and specifications are reciprocal. Anything shown on the plans and not mentioned in the specifications, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the plans, shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned in both. C. Requirements of reference standards form a part of these specifications to the extent indicated by the reference thereto. When provisions of reference standards conflict with provisions in these specifications, the specifications shall govern. 2 Rev 4-2021 ARTICLE 2 -- CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 - Contractor's Obligations A. The Contractor shall, in good workmanlike manner, perform all the Work required by the Contract within the time specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall comply with all terms of the Contract, and shall do, carry on, and complete the entire Work to the satisfaction of the Owner. 1. All labor for this project which is normally under the jurisdiction of one of the local unions as covered in the contract between the Tompkins-Cortland Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division and Cornell University shall be performed by Union labor. B. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain, and remove such construction plant and such temporary Work as may be required. C. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, material, tools, equipment, machinery, as well as utility connections, transportation, and all other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, except as otherwise specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Whenever a provision of the Specifications conflicts with agreements or regulations in force among members of trade associations, unions, or councils which regulate or distinguish what work shall or shall not be included in the work of a particular trade, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile such conflict without delay, damage, or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. In case progress of the Work is affected by undue delay in furnishing or installing items of material or equipment required under the Contract because of a conflict involving such agreement or regulations, the Owner or the Architect may require that other material or equipment of equal kind and quality be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Section 2.02 - Contractor's Title to Materials A. The Contractor warrants that the Contractor has full, good and clear title to all materials and supplies used by the Contractor in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. B. All materials, equipment and articles which become the property of the Owner shall be new unless specifically stated otherwise. Section 2.03 - "Or Equal" Clause A. Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment or method is identified on the plans or in the specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade name, catalogue number, or make, no others or alternatives may be substituted. Any and all other "Or Equal" considerations will be handled under this Section in accordance with General Requirements, Section 01 25 00. 3 Rev 4-2021 B. Where the Architect approves a product proposed by the Contractor and said proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the Work covered by this Contract, or the Work covered by other contracts, all said revision(s) or redesign(s), and all new drawings and details required thereto shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be approved by the Architect. All time spent by the Architect or its agents to evaluate the proposed substitution and or necessary engineering cost to accommodate the requested change shall be reimbursed to the Owner by the Contractor via the Change Order procedure. Section 2.04 - Quality, Quantity and Labeling A. The Contractor shall furnish materials and equipment of the quality and quantity specified in the Contract. Unless otherwise provided, all materials and articles incorporated into the Work shall be new and of the most suitable grade of their respective kinds for the purpose. When required by the Contract Documents or when directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall supply the Owner's Representative, for their acceptance, full information concerning any material which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the Work. Materials and articles installed or used without such acceptance shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection. B. When materials are specified to conform to any standard, the Owner may require that the materials delivered to the Site shall bear manufacturer's labels stating that the materials meet said standards. C. The above requirements shall not restrict or affect the Owner's right to test materials as provided in the Contract. D. Whenever several alternative materials or items are specified by name or other particular reference for one use, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to submit in writing a list of the particular materials or items the Contractor intends to use before the Contract is executed. Section 2.05 - Superintendence by Contractor A. The Contractor shall employ a full-time effective, responsive and competent construction superintendent and necessary staff; the construction superintendent shall devote full time to the Work and shall have full authority to act for the Contractor at all times. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with the names and authority of such personnel in writing. B. If at any time the superintendent is not satisfactory to the Owner, the Contractor shall, if requested by the Owner, replace said superintendent with another superintendent satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval. C. The Contractor shall remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. 4 Rev 4-2021 Section 2.06 - Subsurface or Site Conditions A. The Contractor acknowledges that it has assumed the risk and that the Contract consideration includes such provision as the Contractor deems appropriate and adequate to account for all subsurface conditions as the Contractor could reasonably anticipate encountering from the provisions of the Contract Documents, borings, rock cores, topographical maps and such other information as the Owner made available to the Contractor or from their own inspection and examination of the site prior to the Owner's receipt of Contractor bids. B. In the event that the Contractor encounters subsurface physical conditions at the site differing substantially from those shown on or described or indicated in the Contract Documents and which could not have been reasonably anticipated from the aforesaid information made available by the Owner or from the Contractor's inspection and examination of the site, the Contractor shall give immediate notice to the Owner of such conditions before they are disturbed. Such notice shall include probable cost and/or any impact to the Project Schedule. The Owner will thereupon promptly investigate the conditions and if Owner finds that they do substantially differ from that which should have been reasonably anticipated by the Contractor, the Owner shall make such changes in the drawings and specifications as may be necessary and a change order shall be issued. Section 2.07 - Representations of Contractor The Contractor represents and warrants: A. That the Contractor is financially solvent, sufficiently stable to secure the required payment and performance bonds, and is sufficiently experienced in and competent to perform the subject Work or retain qualified subcontractors to perform elements of the Work pursuant to the Project’s plans and specifications; B. That the Contractor is familiar with all Federal, State, or other laws, ordinances, orders, building codes, rules and regulations, which may in any way affect the Work; C. That any temporary and permanent Work required by the Contract can be safely and satisfactorily constructed. D. That the Contractor has carefully examined the Contract and the Site of the Work and that, from the Contractor's own investigations is satisfied as to the nature and location of the Work, the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials likely to be encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the Work, accounted for weather days, the general and local conditions, and all other materials or items which may affect the Work. The Contractor has correlated those observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents and has made all other investigations essential to a full understanding of the Work and the difficulties which may be encountered in performing the Work. 5 Rev 4-2021 Section 2.08 - Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions A. The Contractor shall take all measurements at the Site and shall verify all dimensions and site conditions at the Site before proceeding with the Work. If said dimensions or conditions are found to be in conflict with the Contract, the Contractor immediately shall refer said conflict to the Owner. B. During the progress of Work, the Contractor shall verify all field measurements prior to fabrication of building components and equipment, and proceed with the fabrication to meet field conditions. C. The Contractor shall consult all Contract Documents to determine exact location of all Work and verify spatial relationships of all Work. Any question concerning said location or spatial relationships shall be submitted in a manner approved by the Owner. D. Specific locations for equipment, pipelines, ductwork and other such items of Work, where not dimensioned on plans, shall be determined in consultation with the Owner and other affected Contractors and Subcontractors. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of the Work in place. F. Should Contractor’s failure to perform services under this section result in additional costs to the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for such additional costs. Section 2.09 - Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors A. The Contractor will have access to view and download the Bid Documents in eBuilder. B. All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof furnished by the Owner are the property of the Owner. They are not to be used on other work with the exception of the signed Contract Set, are to be returned to the Owner along with the As-Builts at the completion of the Work. Section 2.10 - Meetings The Contractor and all subcontractors as requested shall attend all meetings as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. Section 2.11 - Related Work The Contractor shall examine the Contract for related work to ascertain the relationship of said work to the Work under the Contract. Section 2.12 - Surveys and Layout Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract, the Owner shall furnish the Contractor all surveys of the property necessary for the Work, but the Contractor shall lay out the Work. 6 Rev 4-2021 Section 2.13 - Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies The Contractor shall examine the Contract thoroughly before commencing the Work and report in writing any errors or discrepancies to the Owner or the Owner's Representative. Section 2.14 - Project Labor Rates The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for review and approval, within thirty (30) days after Contract is awarded all trade labor rates inclusive of fringe benefits, taxes, insurance for the duration of the individual craft agreement in accordance with Exhibit. Revised rates shall be provided within thirty (30) days of signing any new agreements with the individual crafts during this project. Section 2.15 – Daily Reports The Contractor's Construction Superintendent shall submit a Daily Report to the Cornell University Project Manager or the Resident Field Engineer at the job site. Such reports shall, at a minimum, contain the following information: Name of Project Project Number Date of Report Weather Conditions Equipment on the site Contractors on site including name and number of employees on site for each contractor Work/area and activity for each contractor Overtime worked and planned work progress Environmental problems and corrections Other information, such as special events, occurrences, materials delivered, accidents or injuries, recommendations, suggestions, visitors, inspections, equipment start-up and check out, occupancy, etc. ARTICLE 3 -- INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 - Access to the Work The Owner and Architect, or their duly authorized representatives, assistants, or inspectors shall at all times and for any purpose have access to the Work and the premises used by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities therefor. In addition, the Contractor shall, whenever so requested, give the Owner and Architect or their duly authorized representatives access to the proper invoices, bills of lading, specifications, etc., which may be required in determining the adequacy and/or quantity of materials used in completion of the Work. Section 3.02 - Notice for Testing If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any Work to be inspected, tested, accepted, or approved, the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness and of the date arranged so the Owner may observe such inspection, testing, or approval. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspection, tests, and approvals unless otherwise provided. 7 Rev 4-2021 Section 3.03 - Inspection of Work A. The Contractor will cooperate in all ways to facilitate the inspection and examination of the Work. The inspections and examinations will be carried out in such a manner that the Work will not be delayed. B. All Work, all materials whether or not incorporated in the Work, all processes of manufacturer, and all methods of construction shall be, at all times and places, subject to the inspection of the Owner and the Owner shall be the final judge of the quality and suitability of the Work. Any Work not approved by the Owner shall immediately be reconstructed, made good, replaced or corrected by the Contractor including all Work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by said removal or replacement. C. Required certificates of inspection, testing, acceptance, or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner. Section 3.04 - Inspection and Testing All materials and equipment used in the Work shall be subject to inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards to establish conformance with specifications and suitability for uses intended, unless otherwise specified in the Contract. If any Work shall be covered or concealed without the approval or consent of the Owner, said Work shall, if required by the Owner, be uncovered for examination. If any test results are below specified minimums, the Owner may order additional testing. The cost of said additional testing, any additional professional services required, and any other expenses incurred by the Owner as a result of said additional testing shall be paid by the Contractor. Reexamination of any part of the Work may be ordered by the Owner, and if so ordered the Work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If said Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract, the Owner shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. If said Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. Section 3.05 - Defective or Damaged Work If, in the opinion of the Owner, it is undesirable to replace any defective or damaged materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the Work injured or not performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor shall be reduced by an amount which, in the judgment of the Owner, shall be deemed to be equitable. Section 3.06 - Acceptance No previous inspection shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. No payment, either partial or full, by the Owner to the Contractor shall excuse any failure by the Contractor to comply fully with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall remedy all defects, paying the cost of any damage to other Work resulting therefrom. 8 Rev 4-2021 ARTICLE 4 -- CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 - Changes A. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order and approve changes within the general scope of the Contract and the Contractor shall promptly comply with such change orders. B. A change order is a written direction to the Contractor signed by the Owner, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work, extra work, or an adjustment in the Contract price or time of performance. C. No claims for changes, extra work or additional time to complete the Contract or an adjustment in the Contract price shall be allowed unless such change is ordered in writing by the Owner. D. The Owner shall determine the amount by which the Contract consideration is to be increased or decreased by a change order by one (1) or more of the following methods: 1. By agreement with the Contractor. 2. By applying the applicable price or prices previously bid and approved. (i) To the extent that Unit Prices are applicable, as determined by the Owner, work shall be priced and paid for or credited in accordance with such Unit Prices; except that a Unit Price shall not apply to any portion of work which is either reduced or increased by more than 25%. Said Unit Prices shall be valid for the duration of the project as applicable, unless stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. (ii) For Unit Price items, additions and deletion of like items shall be algebraically summed and then multiplied by the applicable Unit Prices. For Direct Labor and Material items, all additions and deletions shall be algebraically summed for each subcontractor and then multiplied by the applicable markup. (iii) Unit Prices are for work complete, measured in place and cover profit and all other costs and expenses. Unit Prices include, without limit, all conditions of the contract and all general requirements such as layout, reproduction of Drawings and Specifications, testing and inspection, shop drawing and sample coordination, supervision (field and home office), small tools and expendable items, insurance, taxes, temporary facilities and services, including access and safety, "asbuilt" drawings, and general and administrative overhead and profit. 9 Rev 4-2021 3. By estimating the fair and reasonable cost of: (i) Labor, including all wages, required wage supplements and insurance required by law paid to employees below the rank of superintendent directly employed at the Site. (ii) Materials (iii) Equipment, excluding hand tools, which in the judgment of the Owner, would have been or will be employed exclusively and directly on the Work. When submitting change orders, equipment which is common to the project scope at hand is expected to be previously paid for as overhead / general conditions to the project. Special rental equipment or tools not common to the project that are required to perform the change order will be accepted as additional costs. 4. By determining the actual cost of the extra work in the same manner as in Subsection 3 except the actual costs of the Contractor shall be used in lieu of estimated costs. E. Mark-up Percentages 1. Work performed by the Contractor: Where the Work is performed directly by the Contractor by adding to the total of such estimated costs a sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) thereof. 2. Work performed by a Subcontractor: Where the change order work is performed by a Subcontractor under contract with the Contractor, by adding a sum equal to fifteen (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Subcontractor, and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to ten percent (10%) of said costs. 3. Work performed by a Sub-Subcontractor: Where work is performed by a Sub-Subcontractor, by adding the sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Sub-Subcontractor, by adding for the benefit of the Subcontractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost. The maximum aggregate of all mark-up percentages may not exceed twenty five percent (25%). 4. No Markup on Bonds and Insurance Costs: Change Order cost adjustments due to increases or decreases in bond or insurance costs (if applicable) shall not be subject to any Markup Percentage. 5. Overtime Pay: No mark-up shall be paid on the premium portion of overtime pay. 10 Rev 4-2021 6. Direct and Indirect Costs Covered by Markup Percentages: As a further clarification, the agreed upon Markup Percentage is intended to cover the Contractor's profit and all indirect costs and expenses associated with the change order work. Items intended to be covered by the Markup Percentage include, without limit: home office expenses, branch office and field office overhead expense of any kind; project management; superintendents, general foremen; estimating, engineering; coordinating; expediting; purchasing; detailing; legal, accounting, data processing or other administrative expenses; reproduction of drawings and specifications; shop drawings and sample coordination; “as-built” drawings; permits; auto insurance and umbrella insurance; pick-up truck costs; parking permits; cellular phones; testing and inspection; temporary facilities; access and safety provisions; and warranty expense costs. The cost for the use of small tools and/or tools already in use on site are also to be considered covered by the Markup Percentage. Small tools shall be defined as tools and equipment (power or non-power) with an individual purchase cost of less than $750 7. Deduct Change Orders and Net Deduct Changes: The application of the markup percentage will apply to both additive and deductive change orders. In the case of a deductive change order, the credit will be computed by applying the percentage so that a deductive change order would be computed in the same manner as an additive change order. In those instances where a change involves both additive and deductive work, the additions and deductions will be netted and the markup percentage adjustments will be applied to the net amount F. Regardless of the method used by the Owner in determining the value of a change order, the Contractor, within thirty (30) calendar days after a request for the estimate of value shall submit to the Owner a detailed breakdown of the Contractor's estimate, including all subcontractors details, of the value of the Change Order Work, in the format detailed in Exhibit A. Each submission shall include an electronic .pdf format of all documentation. G. Unless otherwise specifically provided for in a change order, the compensation specified therein includes and shall constitute a full payment for both the Work covered or arising from the order and for any damage or expense incurred by the Contractor by any delays, including any and all impacts, known or unknown, or delays to other Work to be done under the Contract resulting from said change order. The Contractor expressly waives all rights to any other compensation for said damage or expense. H. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory bills, payrolls and vouchers covering all items of cost and when requested by the Owner shall give the Owner access to accounts and records relating thereto. 11 Rev 4-2021 Section 4.02 – Claims for Extra Work If the Contractor claims (i) that any work it has been ordered to do is extra work or (ii) that it has performed or is going to perform extra work or (iii) that any action or omission of the Owner or the Architect is contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall: A. Promptly comply with such order; B. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement, Article 4 of these General Condition and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within fourteen (14) calendar days after being ordered to perform the work claimed by it to be extra work or within fourteen (14) calendar days after commencing performance of the extra work, whichever date shall be the earlier, or within fourteen (14) calendar days after the said action or omission on the part of the Owner or the Architect occurred, a written notice of the basis of its claim and request a determination thereof; C. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within thirty (30) calendar days after said alleged extra work was required to be performed or said alleged extra work was commenced, whichever date shall be the earlier, or said alleged action or omission by the Owner or the Architect occurred, a verified detailed statement, with documentary evidence, of the items and basis of its claim; D. Produce for the Owner’s examination, upon notice from the Owner, all its books of account, bills, invoices, payrolls, subcontracts, time books, progress records, daily reports, bank deposit books, bank statements, checkbooks and cancelled checks, showing all of its actions and transactions in connection with or relating to or arising by reason of its claim, and submit persons in its employment and in its subcontractors' employment for examination under oath by any person designated by the Owner to investigate any claims made against the Owner under the Contract, such examination to be made at the offices of the Contractor; and E. Proceed diligently, pending and subsequent to the determination of the Owner with respect to any such disputed matter, with the performance of the Contract and in accordance with all instructions of the Owner and the Architect. F. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Section 4.02 shall be deemed to be: (i) a conclusive and binding determination on its part that said order, work, action or omission does not involve extra work and is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; and (ii) a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission. The provisions of Section 4.02 is to promptly afford the Owner opportunity to cancel or revise any order, change its plans, mitigate or remedy the effects or circumstances giving rise to a claim or take such other action as may seem desirable and to verify any claimed expenses or circumstances as they occur. Compliance with such provisions is essential whether or not the Owner is aware of the circumstances of any order or other circumstances which might constitute a basis for a claim and whether or not the Owner has indicated it will consider a claim in connection therewith. G. No person has power to waive or modify any of the foregoing provisions and, in any action against the Owner to recover any sum in excess of the sum certified by the Owner to be due under or by reason of the Contract, the Contractor must allege in its complaint and prove compliance with the provisions of this Section. 12 Rev 4-2021 Section 4.03 - Form of Change Orders All change orders shall be processed, executed and approved via the Owner's E-Builder Change Order Process. No payment for change order Work shall be due the Contractor unless a change order has been issued and approved as noted above and processed via E-Builder. ARTICLE 5 -- TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 - Time of Completion A. The Work shall be commenced at the time stated in the written order of the Owner and shall be completed no later than the dates of completion specified in the Contract. All required overtime to maintain progress schedule is included in the Base Bid. B. The date of beginning and the times for completion of the Work, as specified in the Contract, are essential conditions of the Contract. C. The Work shall be prosecuted diligently at such rate of progress as shall insure substantial and full completion within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, that the times for the completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual business and labor conditions prevailing in the locality of the Site. D. Time is of the essence on each and every portion of the Work. In any instance in which additional time is allowed for the completion of any Work, the new time of completion established by said extension shall be of the essence. If in the Architect’s or Owner's judgment, it becomes necessary at any time during construction to accelerate and/or complete certain areas of the project, the Contractor shall concentrate efforts and manpower on designated areas. E. Where Work occurs within occupied areas, perform same only on the approved schedule, so as not to interfere with normal operation of occupied areas. F. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost if the Owner determines that the Contractor is without fault and the Contractor's reasons for the time extension are acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost for delay in completion of the work if the Owner determines that the delay is due to: 1. any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government of the United States or the State of New York; 2. unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, and approved by the Owner, including, but not limited to, acts of God or of public enemy, acts of the Owner, fires, epidemics, quarantine, restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and unusually severe weather. 13 Rev 4-2021 G. The time for completion can only be extended by change order and may be extended for: 1. all of the Work, or 2. only that portion of the Work altered by the change order. H. Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Owner not more than ten (10) days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. ARTICLE 6 -- TERMINATION Section 6.01 - Termination for Cause In the event that any provision of this Contract is violated by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor of the Contractor, the Owner may serve written notice upon the Contractor, and upon the Contractor's surety, if any, of the Owner's intention to terminate the Contract. The notice shall briefly state the reasons for the termination and shall specify a termination date. If arrangements satisfactory to the Owner are not made to remove and remedy the violation, the Contract shall terminate upon the date specified by the Owner in the notice. In the event of termination, the Owner may take over and complete the Work at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor and Contractor's surety shall be liable to the Owner for all costs thereby incurred by the Owner. In the event of such termination the Owner may take possession of and may utilize such materials, appliances, and plant as may be located on the Site and which may be necessary or useful in completing the Work. Section 6.02 - Termination for Convenience of Owner The Owner, at any time, may terminate the Contract in whole or in part. Any said termination shall be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of termination specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the Contract is terminated and the date upon which said termination becomes effective. Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall act promptly to minimize the expenses resulting from said termination. The Owner shall pay the Contractor for costs actually incurred by the Contractor up to the effective date of said termination, but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to compensation in excess of the total consideration of the Contract. In the event of said termination the Owner may take over the Work and prosecute same to completion. Section 6.03 - Owner's Right to do Work The Owner may, after notice to the Contractor, without terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, perform or have performed by others all of the Work or any part thereof and may deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or to become due the Contractor. 14 Rev 4-2021 ARTICLE 7 -- DISPUTES Section 7.01 - Disputes Procedure A. If the Contractor claims that any Work which the Contractor has been ordered to perform will be Work which should have been authorized or directed by change order, or that any action or omission of the Owner is contrary to the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall: 1. File a notice with the Owner which sets forth the basis of the Contractor's claim and requests a resolution of the dispute. Such notice shall be filed within fifteen (15) working days after being ordered to perform the disputed work or within fifteen (15) working days after commencing performance of the disputed work, whichever is earlier, or within fifteen (15) working days after the act or omission of the Owner which the Contractor claims is contrary to the terms of the Contract. 2. Proceed diligently with the performance of the work in accordance with the instructions of the Owner pending the resolution of the dispute by the Owner. 3. Promptly comply with the order of the Owner regarding the disputed matter. 4. Any such decision, or any other decision of the Owner in respect to a dispute, shall be final unless the Contractor, within ten (10) working days after such decision, shall deliver to the Owner a verified written statement which sets forth the Contractor's contention that the decision is contrary to a provision of the contract. Pending the decision of the Owner, the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the original decision. The Owner shall determine the validity of the Contractor's claim and such determination shall be final. The Contractor may file a notice with the Owner reserving its rights in connection with the dispute but shall comply with the Owner's decision and complete the work as directed. B. No claim for additional costs regarding changed or extra work shall be allowed unless the work was done pursuant to a written order of the Owner. C. The value of claims for extra work, if allowed, shall be determined by the methods described in the Contract. Refer to Article 4 of these General Conditions. D. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Article 7 shall be deemed to be: 1. a conclusive and binding determination on the part of the Contractor that the order, work, action or omission is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; 2. a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation, known or unknown, including time extensions, or damages as a result of said order, work, action, or omission. 15 Rev 4-2021 ARTICLE 8 -- SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 - Subcontracting A. The Contractor may utilize the services of Subcontractors. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, in writing, the name of each proposed Subcontractor and Sub-Subcontractor, as required by the Contract. The Contractor shall not award any Work to any Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor without the prior written approval of the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Work, acts and omissions of Subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors. D. The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the Work to bind Subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract insofar as applicable to the Work of Subcontractors, indemnification and to give the Contractor the same power to terminate any subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the Contractor. E. The Contractor's use of Subcontractors shall not diminish the Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall control and coordinate the Work of Subcontractors. F. Nothing contained in the Contract shall create any contractual relationship between Subcontractors and the Owner. ARTICLE 9 -- COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 - Cooperation with Other Contractors A. Normally, the Work will be performed by a single Contractor. However, the Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Work with its own forces or award separate contracts. In that event, the Contractor shall coordinate its operations with the Owner's forces or separate Contractors. B. The Owner cannot guarantee the responsibility, efficiency, unimpeded operations or performance of any contractor. The Contractor acknowledges these conditions and shall bear the risk of all delays including, but not limited to, delays caused by the presence or operations of other contractors. C. The Contractor shall keep informed of the progress and workmanship of other contractors and shall notify the Owner immediately of lack of progress or defective workmanship on the part of other contractors where said delay or defective workmanship may interfere with the Contractor's operations. D. Failure of a Contractor to keep so informed and failure to give notice of lack of progress or defective workmanship by others shall be construed as acceptance by the Contractor of said progress and workmanship as being satisfactory for proper coordination with the Work. 16 Rev 4-2021 E. If the Contractor notifies the Owner, in writing, that another contractor on the Site is failing to coordinate the work of said contractor with the Work, the Owner shall investigate the charge. If the Owner finds it to be true, the Owner shall promptly issue such directions to the other contractor with respect thereto as the situation may require. The Owner shall not be liable for any damages suffered by the Contractor by reason of the other contractor's failure to promptly comply with the directions so issued by the Owner, or by reason of another contractor's default in performance. F. If the Owner shall determine that the Contractor is failing to coordinate the Work with the work of other contractors as the Owner has directed: 1. the Owner shall have the right to withhold any payments due under the Contract until the Owner's directions are complied with by the Contractor; and 2. the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from any and all claims or judgments for damages and from any costs or damages to which the Owner may be subjected or which the Owner may suffer or incur by reason of the Contractor's failure promptly to comply with the Owner's directions. G. Should the Contractor sustain any damage through any act or omission of any other contractor having a contract with the Owner or through any act or omission of any Subcontractor of said other contractor, the Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner for said damage. H. Should any other contractor having a Contract with the Owner sustain damage through any act or omission of the Contractor or its Subcontractor, the Contractor shall reimburse said other contractor for all said damages and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from all said claims. ARTICLE 10 -- PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 - Accidents and Accident Prevention A. The Contractor shall at all times take reasonable precautions for the safety of persons engaged in the performance of the Work. The Contractor shall comply fully with all applicable provisions of federal, state, and local law. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency and adequacy of the Contractor's Work, plant, appliances and methods, and for any damage which may result from the failure or the improper construction, maintenance, or operation of said Work, plant, appliances and methods. B. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational disease, public health statistics or information, and injury requiring medical attention, pursuat to government authority, or causing loss of time from work, arising out of or in the course of employment on Work under the Contract, and shall immediately notify the Owner in writing of any injury which results in hospitalization or death, or significant near miss incidents that had the potential to result in serious injury or death. The Contractor shall upload all completed Contractor and Subcontractor incident investigation forms and reports within five (5) working days of the incident. The report shall include the extent of damage or injury, the persons involved and their employers, the number of days persons are hospitalized, and any other pertinent information required by Cornell University. Such reporting shall be submitted on the e-Builder Accident Form. 17 Rev 4-2021 C. The Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager, Material Safety Data Sheets (OSHA Form 20 or the equivalent) for all chemicals to be used on site. All chemicals requiring any precautionary measures (e.g., special storage or disposal requirements, personal protective equipment, or additional ventilation), shall be brought to the attention of Cornell University for review and approval, prior to their use on site. 1. All chemicals brought on site by the Contractor shall be clearly labeled. The label shall state the identity of the chemical, any associated hazards, and the Contractor's name. 2. All Contractor employees who are using chemicals shall be made aware of the hazards associated with their use. Safe chemical handling procedures in accordance with OSHA or other governmental agencies, and manufacturer's recommendations shall be used at all times. 3. The Contractor shall dispose of all chemicals in accordance with EPA and Cornell University requirements, regardless of the size of the container or the quantity of waste, and must receive prior approval of Cornell University. 4. A Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan form is required (with or without waste) to be submitted with submission of the first payment. The form can be found at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/sites/default/files/resourcefiles/FRM_CWMDPContractorWasteMaterialDisposalPlan.pdf D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initiation, maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. E. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard the Owner's property from injury or loss in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard and protect the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall replace or make good any said loss or injury unless said loss or injury is caused directly by the Owner. F. The Contractor shall have full responsibility to install, protect and maintain all materials and supplies in proper condition and forthwith repair, replace and make good any damage thereto until Final Acceptance. Section 10.02 - Adjoining Property A. The Contractor shall be required to protect all the adjoining property and to repair or replace any such properties damaged or destroyed by the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors thereof, by reason of, or as a result of activities under, for or related to the Contract. Section 10.03 - Emergencies A. In case of an emergency which threatens loss or injury to persons or property, the Contractor will be allowed to act, without previous instructions from the Owner, in a diligent manner, to the extent required to avoid or limit such loss or injury, and the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately thereafter of the action taken. 18 Rev 4-2021 Section 10.04 - Bonds A. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner any required Bonds. The failure of the Contractor to supply the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the Contract signing shall constitute a default on the part of the Contractor. Section 10.05 - Risks Assumed by the Contractor A. Indemnification. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its trustees, officers, agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses, fines, and expenses, including reasonable attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work including, but not limited to, bodily or personal injury, sickness, disease, death, or injury or damage to tangible property, to the extent they arise out of or result from: 1. any negligent act or omission, or intentional or willful misconduct, violation of law, or breach of this Contract by the Contractor, or any of its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, or 2. any injury to an employee of the Contractor, its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them. The indemnification obligation under this section shall not be limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor under workers’ compensation, disability benefit or other employee benefit laws. B. In the event that Contractor is requested but refuses to fully comply with and honor its indemnification obligations hereunder, then the Contractor shall, in addition to all other obligations, pay the cost, including reasonable attorneys' fees, of bringing an action to enforce such indemnification obligations. C. Neither the Owner's final acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor the making of any payment shall release the Contractor from its obligations under this Section. The enumeration elsewhere in the Contract of particular risks assumed by the Contractor or of particular claims for which the Contractor is responsible shall not be deemed to limit the effect of the provisions of this Section or to imply that the Contractor assumes or is only responsible for risk or claims of the type enumerated. Section 10.06 - Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance A. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at its own cost and expense, until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by this Contract, the following kinds of insurance: 1. Worker's Compensation Insurance. A policy complying with the requirements of the laws of the State of New York and any other laws that may be applicable thereto, including Coverage B - Employer's Liability with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 19 Rev 4-2021 2. Contractor's Comprehensive General Liability Insurance. A standard comprehensive general liability insurance policy, with contractual, completed operations, explosion, collapse and underground property damage coverage’s issued to and covering the liability of the Contractor for all work and operations under this Contract, all obligations assumed by the Contractor under this Contract and all damage to work performed by subcontractors on your behalf. The Contractor shall provide Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, and the Owner shall be an additional insured in the policy. The policy shall include cross liability coverage and shall be endorsed to indicate that it is primary coverage. The completed operations coverage’s shall be maintained for not less than two years after acceptance of the work. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage as follows, or such limits carried by the Contractor, whichever is greater: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY (BROAD FORM) $ 5,000,000 Each Occurrence $ 5,000,000 Aggregate 3. Automobile Liability Insurance. A policy covering the use in connection with the Work covered by the Contract Documents of all owned, non-owned and hired vehicles bearing, or, under the circumstances under which they are being used, required by the Motor Vehicle Laws of the State of New York to bear license plates. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage of: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY $ 1,000,000 Each Person $ 1,000,000 Each Accident B. In addition to maintaining all of the above insurances, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against liability, including additional premium due because of the Contractor's failure to maintain coverage limits as required under this section. C. Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by or on behalf of all subcontractors to cover their own operations performed under this Contract. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modifications in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. 20 Rev 4-2021 D. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a current certificate or certificates, in duplicate, of the insurance required under the foregoing provisions including copies of subcontractor’s certificates. Such certificates shall be on a form prescribed by the Owner, shall list the various coverage’s and shall contain, in addition to any provisions hereinbefore required, a provision that the policy shall not be changed or cancelled and that it will be automatically renewed upon expiration and continued in force until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by the Contract, unless the Owner is given thirty (30) days written notice to the contrary. Upon renewal of each of the Contractor's insurance coverage’s, the Owner shall be provided with a new certificate of insurance showing such renewal. Certificates and written notices shall be directed to the Office of Facilities Contracts. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a certified copy of each policy including any and all exclusions to such policy. E. If at any time any of the above required insurance policies should be cancelled, terminated or modified so that insurance is not in effect as above required, then, if the Owner shall so direct, the Contractor shall suspend performance of the work covered in the Contract. If the said work is so suspended, no extension of time shall be due on account thereof. The Owner may, at its option, obtain insurance affording coverage equal to that above required, at the Contractor's expense. Section 10.07 - Liability Insurance of the Owner A. The Owner, at its own cost and expense, shall procure and maintain such liability insurance as will, in its opinion, protect the Owner from its contingent liability to others for damages because of bodily injury, including death, and property damage which may arise from operations under this Contract. Section 10.08 - Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards A. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain in force a builders risk insurance policy on the entire work. Such insurance shall be written on a completed value form and in an amount equal to the initial contract sum and modified by any subsequent modifications to the contract sum. The insurance shall name Cornell University and the State of New York, all subcontractors and sub- subcontractors. The insurance policy shall contain a provision that the insurance will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until the Contractor has given at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to Cornell University. The insurance shall cover the entire work at the site, including reasonable compensation for Architect’s services and expenses made necessary by an insured loss. Insured property shall include portions of the work located away from the site and in transit to the site. The policy shall cover the cost of removing debris and demolition as may be legally necessary. The policy shall cover any boiler or machinery loss which may be suffered during installation and until final acceptance. The insurance required shall be written to cover “all risk” of physical loss including a loss due to collapse. Any deductible shall be the responsibility of the Contractor but in no case shall the deductible be more than $10,000 unless Cornell University has agreed to a higher deductible. The Contractor shall provide to Cornell University a certificate of insurance and a summary of coverage’s including all endorsements and exclusions prior to commencement of the work. Once the policy is received, the Contractor shall provide a copy of such policy to Cornell University. There shall be a mutual waiver of recovery between Cornell University, the Contractor and all other parties to the extent such losses are covered by the builders risk policy. If Cornell University wishes to occupy the building prior to final acceptance and if the policy contains a provision which limits coverage for such partial occupancy, the parties agree work 21 Rev 4-2021 together to obtain consent of the insurance company for such partial occupancy or use under mutually acceptable terms. B. Losses, if any, under such insurance shall be payable to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all loss of materials connected with the construction due to unexplainable disappearance, theft or misappropriation of any kind or nature. D. The foregoing provisions shall not operate to relieve the Contractor and subcontractors of responsibility for any loss or damage to their own or rented property or property of their employees, of whatever kind or nature, or on account of labor performed under the Contract incidental to the repair, replacement, salvage, or restoration of such items, including but not limited to tools, equipment, forms, scaffolding, and temporary structures, including their contents, regardless of ownership of such contents, except for such contents as are to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Owner shall in no event be liable for any loss or damage to any of the aforementioned items, or any other property of the Contractor, subcontractors and the Architect, or employees, agents, or servants of same, which is not to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Contractor and subcontractors severally waive any rights of recovery they may have against the Owner and the Architect for damage or destruction of their own or rented property, or property of their employees of whatever kind or nature. Section 10.09 - Effect of Procurement of Insurance A. Neither the procurement nor the maintenance of any type of insurance by the Owner or the Contractor shall in any way be construed or be deemed to limit, discharge, waive or release the Contractor from any of the obligations and risks imposed upon the Contractor by the Contract or to be a limitation on the nature or extent of such obligations and risks. Section 10.10 - No Third Party Rights A. Nothing in the Contract shall create or give to third parties; any claim or right of action against the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner beyond such as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. ARTICLE 11 -- USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 – Substantial Completion A. The term "substantial completion" means the completion of the Work to the extent that Cornell University may have uninterrupted occupancy or use of the facility or specified portion thereof for the purpose for which intended. The Contractor shall obtain all certificates of occupancy required prior to occupancy, and any electrical, mechanical and plumbing certificates, or other certificates or required approvals and acceptances by City, County, and State governments or other authority having jurisdiction. 22 Rev 4-2021 Section 11.02 - Occupancy Prior to Acceptance A. If, before Final Acceptance, the Owner desires Beneficial Occupancy of the Work, or any part thereof, which is completed or partly completed, or to place or install therein equipment and furnishings, the Owner shall have the right to do so, and the Contractor shall in no way interfere with or object to said Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner. B. Said Beneficial Occupancy (1) shall not constitute acceptance of space, systems, materials or elements of the Work, nor shall said Beneficial Occupancy affect the start of any guarantee period, and (2) shall not affect the obligations of the Contractor for Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract or other obligations of the Contractor under the Contract. C. The Contractor shall continue the performance of the Work in a manner which shall not unreasonably interfere with said use, occupancy and operation by the Owner. ARTICLE 12 -- PAYMENT Section 12.01 - Provision for Payment A. The Owner agrees to pay the Contract Price to the Contractor for the performance of this Contract and the fulfillment of all the Contractor's obligations. The Contract Price means all costs reimbursable under the Contract Documents. B. The final certificate of the Architect shall certify that the Contract has been completed within the stipulated time, and shall not be issued until all drawings and specifications have been returned to the Owner. The issuance of said certificates, however, or any payments made thereon shall not lessen the total responsibility of the Contractor to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Owner in accordance with the Contract. C. Payments on the Contract Price shall be made each month as the work progresses in accord with the following procedure: 1. The Contractor's schedule of values, including quantities, aggregating the total Contract Price, divided so as to facilitate payments to subcontractors as specified herein, shall be the basis for monthly progress payments. This schedule, as shown in the E-Builder Schedule of Values Process, when approved by the Owner shall be used as a basis for progress payments. In applying for payments, the Contractor shall submit a statement based upon this approved schedule. 2. (a) On a date agreed upon by the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, a meeting shall be held by the Owner to review the work completed and materials on hand. This meeting shall review each item to be submitted by the Contractor in the requisition for payment. 23 Rev 4-2021 (b) On the first day of each month, or as soon thereafter as practicable, the Contractor shall submit via the E-Builder Payment Application Process, a statement and all applicable documentation setting forth in detail the cost of the work done and materials delivered to the job site up to and including the last day of the previous month and shall make application for payment of ninety percent (90%) of the amount of said statement, less the aggregate of all previous payments made by the Owner against the Contract Price. (c) Each statement and application shall be accompanied by an affidavit, executed by the Contractor, certifying that the statement is true and correct, and that all bills for labor, and materials incorporated in or delivered to the job, due and payable at the time of the preceding progress payment, have been paid. The Contractor shall attach a single .pdf file of certified payrolls for all employees on the project as indicated in the EBuilder Payment Application Process. Before final payment is made, the Contractor shall submit evidence that all payrolls, material bills and other indebtedness incurred in connection with the Contract have been paid, including final waivers of any liens. 3. Each such application for payment shall be subject to the review and approval of the Architect. If the Architect finds that the affidavit and application for payment are acceptable and that all the above requirements in connection therewith have been complied with, the Architect shall, within seven (7) calendar days after receiving such application for payment, certify to the Owner that the payment applied for is due and payable to the Contractor. 4. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment constitutes a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the date of the Application for Payment, that the work has progressed to the point indicated, that, to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The Owner shall make payment in the manner provided in the Agreement within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt of the approved Certificate in E-Builder. Approval of the Payment Application by the Architect shall not be deemed to represent that the Architect has made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work or that the Architect has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or proceedings or that the Architect has made any examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used the monies previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 24 Rev 4-2021 Section 12.02 – Stored Materials & Equipment A. The Contractor may submit, no more than thirty (30) calendar days after contract approval and prior to the first application for payment, a written request to Cornell University for permission to invoice for critical materials and equipment ready, but not yet incorporated into the work. For the purpose of this paragraph, "critical materials and equipment" eligible for payment are defined as those items affecting project schedule or budget as determined by Cornell University's evaluation of the project schedule. This includes finished goods normally shipped to the job site in a condition ready for incorporation into the work that require significant time for delivery. Raw materials or work-in-process at a manufacturer's plant location shall not be eligible for such consideration unless the Contractor can demonstrate that Cornell University can save money by purchasing material in bulk quantities at the beginning of the project. B. Cornell University will be under no obligation to accept such requests. C. Payment authorized by Cornell University for such "long-lead" critical materials and equipment not yet incorporated in the work will be made provided the Contractor submits Exhibit H and complies with the following: 1. Items shall be listed in the “Total Materials Presently Stored” column on the Application for Payment. 2. Transfer of Title shall be executed and included in the Application for Payment. 3. The method used to store off-site items shall be described in the Contractor's request to invoice for such materials and equipment. Cornell University shall give prior approval of the location of off-site storage. Items requiring special environmental conditions to protect their integrity (temperature, humidity, etc.) shall be continuously stored in such an environment. 4. Items in storage shall be identified as property of Cornell University, and a description of the identification method used shall be submitted in the Application for Payment. Contractor shall maintain all necessary insurance on items in storage. 5. A written and photographic inventory of items and method used to verify such inventory, including Contractor's certification that all quantities have been received in good condition at the job site or other location acceptable to Cornell University shall be submitted with the Application for Payment. 6. A copy of the vendor's invoice is included with the Contractor's invoice. Packing lists will not be accepted. D. Cornell University retains the right to verify storage by physical inspection prior to payment approval and at any time thereafter. Such payment shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for protecting, safeguarding, and properly installing the equipment or materials. The Warranty and Guarantee period shall not commence until installation and final acceptance of the completed work by Cornell University. The Contractor shall bear the cost of transporting materials stored off-site to the site 25 Rev 4-2021 E. Each subsequent invoice will restate the prior months' materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work and current month additions and deletions for materials and equipment incorporated into the Work. F. Upon the making of partial payment by Cornell University, all work, materials, and equipment covered thereby shall become the sole property of Cornell University. Partial payments, however, shall not constitute acceptance of the Contractor's work by Cornell University, nor be construed as a waiver of any right or claim by Cornell University. Section 12.03 – Retention A. Retention in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the value of the Work done and materials furnished and installed under this Agreement shall be retained by the Owner as part security for the faithful performance of the Contractor’s work within the time specified, and shall be paid as indicated in Section 12.06. B. Cornell University in its sole discretion may, upon the Contractor's application thereof, release retention applicable to a subcontractor, provided that there are no outstanding claims associated with the subcontractor's work and the subcontractor and Contractor submit an acceptable partial or final release when submitting the payment application process. If the project is bonded, a Consent of Surety to the reduction must be attached as well. Section 12.04 - Withholding Payments A. The Owner may, on account of contemporaneous or subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or a part of any Certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account of: 1. Defective work not remedied. 2. To assure payment of just claims of any persons supplying labor or materials for the work and to discharge any lien filed against the Owner's property. 3. A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance of the Contract Price then unpaid. 4. Damage to another Contractor. 5. Unsatisfactory prosecution of the work by the Contractor. 6. Failure to provide and maintain an acceptable Critical Path Method Network Schedule. Section 12.05 – Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment A. As-Built Documentation 26 Rev 4-2021 1. Prior to acceptance by the Owner of all work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner through the Architect one (1) set of current reproducible full-size Contract Drawings on which the Contractor has recorded in a neat and workmanlike manner all instances where actual field construction differs from work as indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Final Documentation: 1. Prior to final payment, and before the issuance of a final certificate for payment in accordance with the provisions of these General Conditions, file the following documents with the Owner. a. Warranties, Bonds, Service & Maintenance Contracts and any other extended guarantees stated in the technical sections of the Specifications. b. Release or Waiver of Lien for the Contractor and Sub-Contractors in accordance with Exhibit C, attached hereto. c. Project Record Documents as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 39. d. Notification that Final Punch List work has been completed. e. Manufacturers Instruction and Maintenance Manuals as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 23. f. Fixed Equipment Inventory as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 22. 2. The Contractor shall also provide a CD containing scanned .pdf format and/or Word Documents of all documentation. Section 12.06 - Final Payment and Release A. When the Contractor determines that the work or a designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Owner a list of items to be completed or corrected. This list, prepared by the Contractor, shall constitute a complete detailed list of defects and deficiencies which, when remedied, will complete all Contract requirements. The submittal shall be accompanied by a statement to that effect. B. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect, on the basis of an inspection, determines that the work is substantially complete, the Architect will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion. 27 Rev 4-2021 C. Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the work acceptable under the provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contract fully performed, and if bonds have been required, the written Consent of the Surety to the payment of the balance due, and a satisfactory Release of Lien, attached hereto as Exhibit "C" and made a part of the Contract Documents, has been submitted by the Contractor, each subcontractor and subsubcontractor, the Contractor will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment, stating that to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, and on the basis of their observations and inspections the work has been completed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, and that the entire balance is due and payable. D. All prior certificates upon which progress payments may have been made, being estimates, shall be subject to correction to the final certificate. E. The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment aforesaid shall constitute a general release of the Owner and its agents or representatives from all claims and liability to the Contractor. ARTICLE 13 -- TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 - Tax Exemption A. The Owner is exempt from payment of Federal, State and local taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes on all materials and supplies incorporated into the completed Work. These taxes are not to be included in bids. This exemption does not apply to tools, machinery, equipment or other property leased by or to the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or to supplies and materials which, even though they are consumed, are not incorporated into the completed Work, and the Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for and pay any and all applicable taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes, on said leased tools, machinery, equipment or other property and upon all said unincorporated supplies and materials. B. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall obtain any and all necessary certificates or other documentation from the appropriate governmental agency or agencies, and use said certificates or other documentation as required by law, rule or regulation. ARTICLE 14 -- GUARANTEE Section 14.01 - Guarantee A. The Contractor, at the convenience of the Owner, shall remove, replace and/or repair at their own costs and expense any defects in workmanship, materials, ratings, capacities or characteristics occurring in or to the work covered by Contract for the period of one (1) year or within such longer period as may otherwise be provided in the Contract, the period of such guarantee to commence with the Owner's final acceptance of all work covered under the Contract, and the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay for all damage to all other work resulting from such defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace and/or repair such work which may be damaged in removing, replacing or repairing the said defects. Acceptance means final acceptance of the entire work, early partial occupancy notwithstanding 28 Rev 4-2021 B. In some instances the nature of the work may require the Owner to accept various components, equipment, spaces or phase of the project. In such cases the Contractor shall submit a separate guarantee for the Owner's acceptance on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a guarantee for the project on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". ARTICLE 15 -- STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 - Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted Each and every provision of law or clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract and made a part hereof, shall be deemed to be inserted herein and, in the event any such provision is not inserted or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, this Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction. Section 15.02 - Laws Governing the Contract The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York, without reference to conflict of law principles. Any and all proceedings relating to the subject matter hereof shall be maintained in New York State Supreme Court, Tompkins County or the federal district court for the Northern District of New York, which courts shall have exclusive jurisdiction for such purposes. Section 15.03 - Assignments The Contractor shall not assign the Contract in whole or in part without prior written consent of the Owner. Section 15.04 - No Third Party Rights Nothing in the Contract shall create or shall give to third parties any claim or right of action against the Owner, beyond such rights as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. Section 15.05 - Waiver of Rights of Owner A. None of the provisions of the Contract will be considered waived by the Owner except when such waiver is given in writing. Section 15.06 - Limitation on Actions No action or proceeding shall be filed or shall be maintained by the Contractor against the Owner unless said action shall be commenced within six (6) months after receipt by the Owner of the Contractor's final requisition or, if the Contract is terminated by the Owner, unless said action is commenced within six (6) months after the date of said termination. 29 Rev 4-2021 Section 15.07 - Owner's Representative The Owner shall designate a representative authorized to act in its behalf with respect to the Project. The Owner or its representative shall examine documents and shall render approvals and decisions pertaining thereto promptly, to avoid unreasonable delay in the progress of the Contractor's work. Only directives from Cornell University’s designated representative (Michael Swartwout) shall be recognized by the Contractor. ARTICLE 16 – MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Section 16.01 – Definitions The terms "Minority-owned business enterprise" ("MBE") or “Women-owned business enterprise” (“WBE”) or “minority group member” shall have the same meaning as under Section 310 of the New York State Executive Law, as the same may be from time to time amended. Section 16.02 – Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises A. The Contractor shall, in addition to any other nondiscrimination provision of the Contract and at no additional cost to Owner, fully comply and cooperate with the Owner in the implementation of MBE and WBE programs. These requirements include equal employment opportunities for minority group members and women (“EEO”) and contracting opportunities for certified minority and women-owned business enterprises (“MWBEs”). The Contractor’s demonstration of “good faith efforts” shall be a part of these requirements. These provisions shall be deemed supplementary to, and not in lieu of, the nondiscrimination provisions required by New York State or other applicable federal, state or local laws. B. The Contractor shall include the provisions of this Article in each and every Agreement and/or Contract in such a manner that the provisions of this Article will be binding upon each subcontractor and supplier as to work in connection with and related to this Agreement. C. For purposes of this procurement: Facilities and Campus Services supports Cornell University’s ongoing commitment to encourage business opportunities and diversity among its vendor community by promoting minority owned and controlled business’ development as a shared responsibility. The University’s intention is to create and expand opportunities for minority, women, veteran, LGBTQ, small and locally owned businesses through construction labor opportunities and the procurement of goods and services. Positive good faith efforts to advance the University’s objectives shall be made by all Contractors, engaging, and maximizing these diverse enterprise goals, and to positively drive Cornell's economic impact. Cornell University Diversity Council Statement: "Cultivate partnerships with the widest spectrum of Off-Campus entities and include a fully diverse range of Off-Campus participants in Cornell's events, contracts, services, and initiatives." 30 Rev 4-2021 Section 16.03 – Reports and Records A. The following forms, attached hereto as Exhibit "D" and made a part of the Contract Documents, are to be used in submitting MBE/WBE Utilization Reports when requested by the Owner. 1. MWBE Utilization Report 2. Affirmative Action Workforce Report B. The Contractor shall submit an Affirmative Action Workforce Report on a monthly basis, or as requested by Owner. The Contractor shall provide a single monthly report, or as requested by the Owner, inclusive of all subcontractor information for the project labor and such report must document the use of MWBE businesses in the Contract. ARTICLE 17 -- ACCOUNTINGS, INSPECTION AND AUDIT The Contractor agrees to keep books and records showing the actual costs incurred for the Work. Such books and records (including, without limitation, any electronic data processing files used by the Contractor in analyzing and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection and audit by the Owner and its authorized representatives at reasonable hours at the Contractor's local office or at the Owner's office, if necessary, and shall be retained by the Contractor for a period of seven years after the Work has been completed, except that if any litigation, claim or audit is started before the expiration date of the seven year period, the records shall be retained until all litigation, claims or audit findings involving the records have been resolved.. Each Sub-Contractor shall be similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection and audit by the Owner, books and records respecting the Work. If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish copies of any and all subcontracts, purchase orders and/or requisitions of any nature associated with the project. ARTICLE 18 – CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION At project completion the Owner shall schedule a meeting to review with the Contractor their performance for the project unless performance warrants additional reviews. The Owner may schedule a meeting at fifty percent (50% completion) based on project complexity and/or duration. The Owner shall present its review based on the attached “Contractor Performance Evaluation”, Exhibit I. The Contractor shall be given the opportunity to provide input as to the findings of the evaluation after completion by the Owner. ARTICLE 19 -- ROYALTIES AND PATENTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patents, and shall save Cornell University harmless from loss on account thereof; except that Cornell University shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or product is specified by Cornell University unless the Contractor shall have reason to believe that the particular process or product infringes a patent, in which event it shall be responsible for loss on account thereof unless it promptly provides such information to Cornell University. 31 Rev 4-2021 ARTICLE 20 -- CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 - Release of Information The Contractor shall not divulge information concerning the Work (including news releases, social media, internal house organizations, applications for permits, etc.) to anyone without Cornell University's prior written approval, except to subcontractors and suppliers to the extent that they need such information to perform their work. The Contractor shall require a similar agreement from each such subcontractor and supplier, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. Cornell University reserves the right to release all information, as well as to time its release and specify its form and content. The Contractor may obtain Cornell University's approval to release information by submitting such request to the Cornell University Project Manager. Section 20.02 - Confidential Information The term "Confidential Information" means all unpublished information obtained or received from Cornell University during the term of this Contract which relates to Cornell University's research, development, manufacturing and business affairs. The Contractor shall not disclose confidential information to any person, except to its employees and subcontractors to the extent that they require it in the performance of their Work, during the term of this Contract and until authorized by Cornell University in writing. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall hold all confidential information in trust and confidence for Cornell University, and shall use confidential information only for the purpose of this Contract. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall require all of their employees to whom confidential information is revealed to comply with these provisions. The Contractor shall have an agreement with each subcontractor, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to defend in case of litigation related to its services rendered, permission shall be sought from Cornell University, who shall not unreasonably withhold such permission, before any disclosures are made. This Section does not apply to information which (1) is or becomes known in public domain or (2) is learned by the Contractor from third parties. Section 20.03 - Use of Owner's Name on Non-Work Related Content The Contractor shall not use or permit on the job site, in its external, advertising, marketing program, social media, or other promotional efforts, any date, pictures, or other content unrelated to the Contracted Work, or any representation of the Owner except on the specific written authorization in advance of the Owner's Representative. 32 Rev 4-2021 ARTICLE 21 -- CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT Cornell University expects all executive officers, trustees, faculty, staff, student employees, and others, when acting on behalf of the university, to maintain the highest standard of ethical conduct as per Cornell University's Policy 4.6 - Standards of Ethical Conduct, a copy of which is available at https://fcs.cornell.edu/project-contractors-and-consultants This includes treating equally all persons and firms currently doing business with or seeking to do business with or for Cornell University, whether as contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers. Such persons and firms are respectfully reminded that Cornell University employees and their families may not personally benefit from Cornell University's business relationships by the acceptance of gifts or gratuities, defined as a gift in excess of $75.00 given to a Cornell employee for personal use. Items not considered gifts/gratuities include occasional business meals, items of an advertising nature, and items that are generally distributed to all potential customers. In addition, it is expected that the Contractor's officers and employees shall conduct all business related to this Contract within the highest ethical standards, observing applicable policies, practices, regulations, law, and professional standards. All parties are expected to report violations of this policy to appropriate university personnel. You may file a report to on the web https://secure.ethicspoint.com/domain/en/report_custom.asp?clientid=6357 or contact Cornell University through EthicsPoint by dialing toll-free 1-866-293-3077. EXHIBIT "A" CORNELL UNIVERSITY Construction Contract Change Order Forms Instructions to Change Order Documentation Cornell University has several standard forms related to Changes in the Work. These forms have been prepared to comply with contract requirements related to Changes in the Work. The standard Construction Contract Change Order Request and Change Order Summary Forms shall be used to facilitate preparation of change order requests in conformity with construction contract requirements. These forms shall be used by the Contractor and by all Subcontractors in preparing their respective cost estimates for services associated with the Changed Work for the Owner’s consideration and shall include all associated back-up documentation supporting the request. Direct Cost of the Work: 1. Direct Labor – Include the “wages paid” hourly direct labor and/or foreman necessary to perform the required change. “Wages paid” is the burdened labor rate documented in accordance with Section 2.14 – Project Labor Rates of the General Conditions. “Assigned Personnel or Work Crews” should be stated by trade or type of work performed not by name of person or company title. For example carpenter, mason, backhoe operator, etc. Supervisory personnel in district or home office shall not be included. Supervisory personnel on the job-site, but with broad supervisory responsibility and paid as salaried personnel, shall not be included as Direct Labor 2. Direct Material – Include the acquisition cost of all materials directly required to perform the required change. Examples of “Unit of Measure” include square feet, cubic yards, linear feet, days, gallons, etc. 3. Equipment – Include the rental cost of equipment items necessary to perform the change. For company-owned equipment items, include documentation of internal rental rates. Charges for small tools, and craft specific tools are not allowed. Bond Premiums The Contractor’s actual documented bond premium rate as entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields at time of bid shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change. Overhead & Profit The Contractor’s overhead & profit rate shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change in accordance with the Contract. EXHIBIT "A" EXHIBIT "A" CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY DATE: PCO # PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR: DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1 DIRECT COST OF WORK: NAME OF CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTORS TOTAL PERFORMING WORK COST TOTAL COST OF PROPOSED CHANGE ORDER ITEM $0 TOTAL CONTRACT DAYS ADDED/DELETED FROM PROJECT SCHEDULE THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FINAL RELEASE EXHIBIT "B" FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS AND RELEASE OF RIGHTS Sworn to before me this Corporation or Business Name Day of 20 By: Title: Date Contract Date Project Contract Price Address Net Extras and Deductions City Adjusted Contract Price County Amount Previously Paid State Balance Due - Final Payment The undersigned hereby acknowledges that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all labor, materials, etc., furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the above Project in accordance with the Contract. In consideration of the amounts and sums previously received, and the payment of $ being the full and Final Payment amount due, the below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release the Owner from any and all claims and liens and rights of liens upon the premises described above, and upon improvements now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the Owner or from any other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights of liens being on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier to the Project. The premises as to which said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows: . The undersigned further represents and warrants that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which he/she is signing; that it has properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified quality per plans and specifications and in a good and workmanlike manner, fully and completely; that it has paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and services that it has used or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices, retentions, holdbacks, expenses employed in the prosecution of work, chargebacks or unbilled work or materials against the Owner as of the date of the aforementioned last and final payment application; and that any materials which have been supplied or incorporated into the above premises were either taken from its fully-paid or open stock or were fully paid for and supplied on the last and final payment application or invoice. The undersigned further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for any losses or expenses (including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by the below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers, material persons or subcontractors. In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received, the below named Contractor or Supplier hereby waives, releases and relinquishes any and all claims, rights or causes of action in equity or law whatsoever arising out of through or under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant thereto. The below named Contractor or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished and installed are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract with respect to this guarantee will remain in effect for the period specified in said Contract. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "C" GUARANTEE Date: In accordance with plans and specifications and the terms and conditions of our contract with Cornell University dated , we hereby guarantee the as found in the specifications for , Ithaca, New York to be free (Project Title) from defects in materials and workmanship for the period of year(s) from , the date of acceptance by the Owner. (Date) (COMPANY) By: Title: THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I 1 MWBE Utilization Report PART I – PROJECT INFORMATION e-Builder Project No. Project Name: Contract Value: Contractor Name and Address: Primary Contact Name, Phone Number, Email: Bid Date: Contractor’s MWBE Contact Name, Phone Number, Email: PART II – MWBE LIST (Update as MWBE firms come under contract, sign and date, resubmit) Subcontractor Name, Address, Contact, Email, MBE or WBE (List your firm if also MBE or WBE) Federal ID Number Dollar Value of Contract or Purchase Order Description of Work or Supplies Subcontractor or Supplier Start and End Dates (Update totals as MWBE firms are added/subtracted to above list) Print Name of Principal or Officer: Title: Signature: Date: EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I 2 MWBE Utilization Report PART III – Quarterly Utilization Report (Subcontractors & Sub-subcontractors fill this out and submit to General Contractor to compile into a single form.) Double click on table to edit. Month/Year: General Contractor, Subcontractor, SubSubcontractor, or Vendor Trade Dollar Value of SubContract or Purchase Order MBE, WBE, or N/A % of Total Contract TOTALS 0 0 EXHIBIT "D" - FORM II SUMMARY OF BID ACTIVITY WITH MBE AND WBE SUBCONTRACTORS AND VENDORS Please print or type all information, except where a signature is required. PROJECT: Name of Prime Contract Bidder: Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code): Contact Person (Name, Title and Telephone Number): MBE and WBE Subcontractor/Vendor Item/ Bid Submitted: Award Status Date of (Indicate which) Trade Date Amount Date Amount Elimination EXPLANATION OF ELIMINATION: Include meetings held for negotiation, etc. (Use additional sheet if necessary) OFFICER OF FIRM: Name and Title: Date: Signature: EXHIBIT "D" - FORM III EXHIBIT "E" LABOR RATE BREAKDOWN PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR: TRADE: EFFECTIVE DATE: EXPIRATION DATE: Base Hourly Rate: $ Payroll Taxes and Insurance % per Hour F.I.C.A. Federal Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work) State Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work) * Worker's Compensation * Bodity Injury & Property Damage Disability TOTAL % Payroll Taxes and Insurance Rates: Base Rate (x) Total % = $ * Supplemental Benefits $ per Hour Vacation Health & Welfare Pension Annuity Education / Training Industry Total Hourly Fringe Benefits $ Hourly Labor Rate: Base Rate, Taxes/Insurance and Fringe Benefits $ Adjustment for a composite rate which includes apprentices: $ CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION Signature of Authorized Representative: Print Name: Print Title: I certify that the labor rates, insurance enumerations, labor fringe enumerations and expenses are correct and in accordance with actual and true cost incurred. Rates are net Contractor cost after premium discounts and experience modifications have been applied against manual rate. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "F” STORED MATERIALS INVOICING DOCUMENTATION PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR: SUBCONTRACTOR: REASON FOR REQUEST: APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO. __________ DATE: 1 Material Identification Description: Quantity: Provide Specific Location of Materials Stored: 2 Material Value Attach an Invoice or Quantified Statement of Value. $ 3 Certificate of Insurance Attach a Certificate of Insurance for the above specified materials. Certificate shall name "Cornell University" as a loss payee with respect to the specified materials. 4 Transfer of Title The Contractor hereby agrees to transfer complete ownership of all listed materials to Cornell University at the time payment is made to Contractor for the above referenced Application for Payment. The Contractor remains responsible for all contractual requirements for the above listed materials including complete installation and providing of all warranties. Signed: Date: THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "G" Contractor Performance Evaluation Project Information Project Name:____________________________________________ Date Of Evaluation___________________ Project Number__________________ _________ Evaluators; Project Team_____________________________ Campus_________________________________ Project Start Date_________________________ Substantial Completion________________ Contractor______________________________________________ Prequalification Status_________________ Original Contract Amount__________________________________ Total Change Order Amount_____________ Contractor Project Manager___________________________________________ Initial Evaluation_____ Contractor Superintendent____________________________________________ Final Evaluation_____ Type Of Contract Prime Contractor___ Subcontractor___ Construction Manager___ Project Comments/Description Performance Evaluation Please give one rating for each category. Add comments as required to justify your rating. Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation 1 2 3 4 5 1 Quality of Workmanship Rate this contractor's performance in regards to quality of work a. Compliance with project drawings and specifications b. Workmanship quality and accuracy c. Tools- quality and sufficient quantity d. Equipment - sufficient quantity and operating condition e. Quality of jobsite craft personnel Comments: 2 Scheduling/Productivity Rate this contractor's performance with regard to producing and meeting contract schedules and milestones a. Project schedule quality and completeness b. Controlling of project schedule c. Manpower allocation for maintaining schedule d. Material deliveries to support project schedule e. Ability to meet substantial completion date and project milestones f. Productivity of work force g. Ability to deal with added work and unforeseen issues. Comments: 3 Subcontractor Management Rate this contractor's ability, effort and success in managing and coordinating subcontractors(if no subcontractors rate overall management performance) Comments: 3A Major subcontractor performance(score not added in final Contractor Evaluation For contractor information only a. Plumbing Contractor overall Performance Comments: b. HVAC Contractor overall Performance Comments: c. Electrical Contractor overall Performance Comments: Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation 1 2 3 4 5 4 MBE/WBE Participation Rate this contractor's MBE/WBE solicitation effort and participation for this project for, Project Team, Subcontractors, Material Vendors Comments: 5 Safety Rate this contractor's performance in regards to project safety a. Timely submission of site specific safety program b. Knowledge of OSHA standards c. Implementation of safety rules and regulations d. Promotion and creation of safety awareness e. Daily overall housekeeping f. Safety record g. Response to safety concerns h. Awareness of public safety Comments: 6 Contract Administration Rate this contractor's performance in regards to contract administration as per criteria below a. Timely submission of complet and correct documentation required for insurance and bond b. Change order processing c. Timely submission of RFI's, Shop Drawings, and change orders d. Subcontractor payments made promptly e. Timely submission of complete and correct payment applications f. Quality of paperwork Comments: 7 Working Relationships Rate this contractor's working relationships with other parties (Cornell, Design Team, subcontractors,ect.) Comments: Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation 1 2 3 4 5 8 Supervisory Personnel Rating Rate the overall performance of this contractor's on site supervisory personnel and project management staff Comments: 9 Contract Close-Out Rate this contractor's overall ability to efficiently close out the project a. Timely completion of all punchlist items b. Timely resolution of all outstanding change orders c. Timely submission of all close out documents(O&M's, As-Builts, warranties, final releases and consent of surety) d. Quality of close out documentation and timely completion of any outstanding audit questions Comments: Summary Sheet Project:___________________________________________ Contractor:________________________________________ Rating Per Weight Performance Categories Category % Scoring 1 Quality of Workmanship 0 15.00% 0 2 Scheduling 0 10.00% 0 3 Subcontractor Management 0 10.00% 0 4 MBE/WBE Participation 0 10.00% 0 5 Safety 0 10.00% 0 6 Contract Administration 0 10.00% 0 7 Working Relationships 0 10.00% 0 8 On Site Supervisory Personnel Rating 0 18.00% 0 9 Contract Close Out 0 7.00% 0 Over All Rating 0 Rating Reference Fails to achieve expectation 1 Needs improvement 2 Fully achieves expectation 3 Frequently exceeds expectation 4 Consistently exceeds expectatio 5 OWNER COMMENTS: OWNER COMMENTS on 3A Ratings: CONTRACTOR COMMENTS: (To be completed by Contractor prior to Owner/Contractor discussion meeting) THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT PATHOGENS CONTAGIONS COVID-19 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS PROTOCOLS AND SAFETY REQUISITES TO CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY APPLICABLE TO PATHOGENS, CONTAGIONS AND/OR COVID-19 VIRUS In response to the public health emergency for the COVID-19, requirements, recommendations and guidelines from civil authorities including, but not limited to, New York State Executive Orders, CDC, OSHA and New York State Department of Health (herein after referred to as “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”) surrounding health and safety measures designed to eliminate or reduce the transmission of the COVID-19 virus, these Supplemental Conditions are provided for guidance for construction related work. Contractors and businesses are further required to comple with applicable “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” mandatory directives and health and safety practices issued. 1.0 These Supplemental Conditions apply to the current COVID-19 pandemic, but may also apply to any existing or future pathogen or contagion impacting construction activity and necessitating protective health and safety measures for worker safety, the general public, and any personnel connected to the advancement of Work on this, or any applicable project. 1.1 The purpose of this document is to set forth recommended elements and practices to safeguard the public and all persons connected to each project for Cornell University. 1.2 The direction from “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” are applicable to businesses, entities, and services, and they must comply with the most recent direction. Contractor obligations include modification of all their existing protocols and practices as necessary to adhere to the most current modifications to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”. 2.0 Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract with Owner as provided in the General Conditions and General Requirements are unchanged. Nothing contained herein shall alter or modify the Contractor’s exclusive control over the job site, subcontractors, project labor, Health & Safety Plans, Protocols, Measures, or the Contractor’s exclusive control over the methods and means associated with any and all of the foregoing elements. 2.1 Cornell University possesses neither control nor any right of control over the job site, project labor, health & safety practices or programs, or methods and means of advancing the Contracted Work. 2.2 These Supplemental Conditions are provided to the Contractor for the attainment of Contractor’s fully compliant health and safety measures and practices communicated by applicable civil authorities as requirements, recommendations, and/or guidance necessary to engage in qualifying construction activities. 2.3 Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract with Owner as provided in the General Conditions and General Requirements shall remain and include, but not limited to: 2.3.1 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are required at all times to guard the safety and health of all persons on and in the vicinity of the work site 2 2.3.2 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are required to comply with all applicable rules, regulations, codes, and bulletins of the New York State Department of Labor and the standards imposed under the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, as amended (“OSHA”) and New York State Executive Orders 2.3.3 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are also required to comply with all applicable job site safety requirements 2.3.4 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers must comply with all County, City or State of New York safety requirements for projects within the City or State of New York constructed in accordance with the applicable Building Code, and contractors are required to provide written Safety Plans for the site demonstrating how all applicable safety requirements are to be implemented for all elements of the Work for the duration of the contract. 3.0 Contractors, their subcontractors and suppliers, and workers are required to adhere to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” to prevent or limit the possible exposure or spread of COVID-19, pathogens, or contagions (as applicable). 3.1 To that end, Contractor shall develop a written Health & Safety Plan related to the protective measures and protocols Contractor shall employ on the Project in response to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” necessary to manage and mitigate the exposure or transmission of COVID-19, pathogens, or contagions (as applicable). 3.2 This Plan shall be submitted to the Owner prior to start of Construction Activity on the Campus. Owner’s receipt of the subject Plan is to document that measures and practices are in place, not for substantive review or approval. 3.3 Health and safety practices constitute a continuing compliance obligation, Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers must remain current with, and immediately implement updated health and safety protocols and practices as they are published. The Campus may request updated elements of the Contractor’s written safety plan to address evolving best practices for measures and/or practices of the “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”. 3.4 The Contractor must notify Cornell immediately upon discovery of any employees of their firm, or subcontractors, or suppliers that are, or have been working on the Cornell Campus that have been confirmed to have COVID-19 contagion. 4.0 Guidance & General Recommendations for Inclusion in the Plan: 4.1 Information for local health departments can be found at www.health.ny.gov 4.2 OSHA Guidance on Preparing Workplaces for COVID-19 can be found at www.osha.gov/Publications/OSHA3990.pdf 4.3 Comply with all OSHA requirements in accordance with the Hazard Communication (Global Harmonization) Standard at https://coronavirus.health.ny.gov/home 4.4 Centers for Disease Control -- https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/index.html 3 5.0 Project Closure: 5.1 Where work is suspended on a project, contractors are directed to follow any additional project shut-down protocols as provided by the Owner. Including, but not limited to, photographs, securing the work site and project status narrative. 6.0 Contractor expressly agrees to fully comply and remain exclusively responsible for the implementation of applicable Contractor Health and Safety Protocols and Measures as set forth in applicable and then current Guidance for Construction Activities. Express Contractor agreement to the foregoing and Contractor submission of the Plan are conditions precedent to engage in any onsite construction activity. JUNE 1, 2021 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR UPSON HALL 466 LAB RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK .....................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ........................................... .........................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS .........................................................1 1.3 SCHEDULE OF OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS ............................................2 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................2 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ....................................................................... ................2 SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS ..................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL .................................................................. ..................................................1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...............................................................................1 1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES ..............................................................1 1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES ..............................................................................2 1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION ..........................................................................2 1.5 PARKING .................................................................................................. ........2 1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES ................................3 1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION ............................4 1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS........... ........................................................4 1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC. ........................5 1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC. .................... ...............5 1.11 STAND DOWN DATES ...................................................................................6 1.12 WORKING HOURS ........................................................ ..................................7 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................7 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ....................... ................................................................7 SECTION 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES ..................................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .................................................. .............................1 1.2 SUMMARY .......................................................................................................1 1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE ........................ ..............................................1 1.4 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................2 1.5 COORDINATION ................... ..........................................................................2 1.6 LUMP SUM AND UNIT PRICE ALLOWANCES ..........................................2 1.7 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES ...............................................................3 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................3 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................3 3.1 EXAMINATION ........................................................... ....................................3 3.2 PREPARATION ................................................................................................3 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES .................... ................................................4 JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS .............................1 1.0 GENERAL ..................................... ...............................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................1 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ........................................................... .......................2 1.4 PRODUCTS LIST .............................................................................................2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ....................................... ..........................................2 1.6 PROCEDURES..................................................................................................3 1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL ........................................................3 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS ............................................................................4 1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS .............................................................................................6 1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS ..........................................................................7 1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION ..........................................................8 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES ................................................................................. ..8 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................8 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ....................................................... ................................8 SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS ......................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ............................................... .....................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING .................................................................1 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS ................................................................................ ..3 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S) ......................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED ................................................................................ .........4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT ........................... ......1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 SUMMARY ................................................. ......................................................1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .....................................................................................1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ................... ................................................................................1 1.4 PROCEDURES..................................................................................................1 1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW ....................................................................................2 1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ................................................................ ......4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ................................................... ....................................4 JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE .......................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ................................... .................................................................................1 1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................................1 1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES ..................................................................................1 1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES ................................................................... ........1 1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS .................................................................................2 1.5 SUBMISSIONS ................................................................... ..............................3 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ..........................................................................................3 3.0 EXECUTION ..................................... ..........................................................................3 3.1 DISTRIBUTION................................................................................................3 SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ........................................1 1.0 GENERAL .................................................................................................... ................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ................................................... ...............................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................1 3.0 EXECUTION ..................... ..........................................................................................1 3.1 EXISTING CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS ....................................................1 3.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS .........................................................................2 3.3 FINAL COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS .......................................................2 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ..........................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................ ............................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE................... ..............................1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS ...........................................................................................3 1.4 PRODUCT DATA ....................................... ......................................................3 1.5 SAMPLES..........................................................................................................4 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS.......5 1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS ......................................................................6 1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES ................... .........................................9 1.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ........................................................................10 1.10 RECORD SUBMITTALS ................................. ..............................................12 1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................12 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES ................................ .................................................12 1.13 DISTRIBUTION..............................................................................................13 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .......................................................................................13 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .............................................................................. .......13 JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY ....................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ................................................................ ....................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN ....................................1 1.3 ASBESTOS........................................................................................................2 1.4 LEAD .................................................................................................................3 1.5 MERCURY COLLECTION ................................................... ...........................3 1.6 SITE VISITS ......................................................................................................3 1.7 CONFINED SPACE ............................... ...........................................................3 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................3 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................3 SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ....................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................. .................................1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS .....................................................................................1 1.3 SUBMITTALS ......................................... .........................................................1 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION .......................................................................1 1.5 NOISE AND VIBRATION ...............................................................................2 1.6 DUST CONTROL .............................................................................................2 1.7 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT .....................................................2 1.8 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK ....................3 1.9 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS .......................................................4 1.10 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE ........................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED ....................... ..................................................................5 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................5 SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL ..............................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................... .........................................1 1.1 SPILL PREVENTION .......................................................................................1 1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES ..................................................................1 1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION ............................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED ...................... ...................................................................5 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................5 JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 35 45 REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE.....................................................1 1.0 GENERAL .......................................................................... ..........................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ......................... .........................................................................1 1.3 RECORD DOCUMENTS .................................................................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................2 3.0 EXECUTION ......................................................................... ......................................2 3.1 LEAK TESTING ...............................................................................................2 3.2 DEMOLITION PROCEDURE FOR EQUIPMENT REMOVED BY CONTRACTOR ................................................................................................3 SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ........................... .....................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES ..................... ........................................................1 1.2 INSPECTIONS ..................................................................................................1 1.3 COMPLIANCE........... .......................................................................................1 1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS .........................................................................2 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................2 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................... .............................2 SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES ....................................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL .......................................... ..........................................................................1 1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.......................................................1 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...............................................................................2 1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................2 1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS .................................................................................4 1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS ....................................................................... .......4 1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS ..........................................................5 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ........................................................................... .............17 3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED ......................................................................................17 SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL .................................... ...................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION................. .................................................................................1 1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION ..................................................1 1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS.......................................................2 1.4 TESTING ........................................................................................................... 3 1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ......................................................................3 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .......................................................................... ...............3 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................3 JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ...........................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION........... .......................................................................................1 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ......................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS.................. ................................................................................................1 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL .............................................................................. ..1 2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES.........................................................1 2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION ...............................................................1 2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS ..................................................................................3 2.5 SUPPORTS ............................................................................... .........................3 2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES ........................................................................4 2.7 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION ..........................5 2.8 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS ...................................................5 2.9 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS ...................................................5 2.10 SECURITY ........................................................................................................5 2.11 FIELD OFFICES ................................................................ ...............................5 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................5 3.1 PREPARATION ....................... .........................................................................5 3.2 GENERAL .........................................................................................................6 3.3 REMOVAL ........................................................................................................6 SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES ........................................... ....................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION................................ ..................................................................1 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ......................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS....................................... ...........................................................................1 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................1 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER ..........................1 2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR ..............................................................2 2.4 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION ..................................................3 2.5 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE .............................4 2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES .......................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................4 3.1 REMOVAL ........................................................................................................4 SECTION 01 51 23 HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION ...................................... ...........1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION......................................... .........................................................1 1.2 RESPONSIBILITY............................................................................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................1 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ....................................................................... ................1 JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION ......................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ......................................................... ...........................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING ........................................................1 1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE.........................................................................................1 1.4 CAMPUS SITE / PALM ROAD STORAGE ....................................................2 1.5 PROTECTION ............................................................................................. ......3 1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .......................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED ............................................................................ .............4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING ..................... ..............1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION...................................... ............................................................1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................2 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................2 1.4 WARRANTIES .......................................................................................... .......4 2.0 PRODUCTS..................................................................................................................4 2.1 MATERIALS ................................................ .....................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION ...............................................................................................................4 3.1 INSPECTION ....................................................................................................4 3.2 PREPARATION ................................................................. ...............................5 3.3 PERFORMANCE ..............................................................................................5 3.4 CLEANING ......................................... ..............................................................7 SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT .....................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL .................. ..................................................................................................1 1.1 INSPECTIONS ................................................................................... ...............1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................2 1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP ................................................ ...........................................3 1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK ................................................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .......................... ...............................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 SECTION 01 78 22 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY ...............................................1 1.0 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... ..............1 1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY ...............................................................1 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED ................................................................ .........................3 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................3 JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA .................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ............................................................ ....................1 1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL ................................................................................2 1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES ................................... ..........3 1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS ............................................4 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................6 1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL ..............................................6 1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................................7 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................7 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................... .............................7 SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS ...........................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ......................................................... ...........................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1 1.2 SUMMARY .......................................................................................................1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ............................................................................. ......................1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................2 1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS............................................. ........................2 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS .....................................................................3 1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED ................................................... ..........................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .........................................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION .......................................... .....................................................................4 3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ................................................................................4 3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS .................................................................................5 SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS...................................................................1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................1 1.1 DESCRIPTION..................................................... .............................................1 1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES..................................1 1.3 RECORDING .............................................................. ......................................1 1.4 SUBMITTAL .....................................................................................................4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED .................. .......................................................................4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................4 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work to be Done 1. Construction for lab renovation that will include a new room for "dirty" shop work and hook up of a water jet machine. Infrastructure utilities will require changes to support the new room and owner provided lab equipment. B. The Scope of the Work 1. The scope of the WORK in all SECTIONS of this Specification shall consist of the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and appliances and the performance of the Work required by the Contract Documents and/or by the conditions at the site, joining all parts of this Work with itself and the Work of others to form a complete, functioning entity. 2. Items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the drawings, but which are inherently necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be included. 3. It is the intent and purpose of the Contract Documents to cover and include under each item all materials, machinery, apparatus, and labor necessary to properly install materials and equipment, adjust and put into perfect operation the respective portions of the installation specified and to so interconnect the various items or sections of the work as to form a complete and operating whole. Any equipment, apparatus, machinery, material and small items not mentioned in detail, and labor not hereinafter specifically mentioned, which may be found necessary to complete or perfect any portion of the installation in a substantial manner, and in compliance with the requirements stated, implied, or intended in the Contract Documents, shall be furnished without extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the greatest quantity, highest quality, highest degree of safety, and most stringent material, equipment or Work. Should the Drawings or the Specifications disagree in themselves or with each other, the Contractor shall provide the better quality or greater quantity of work and/or materials unless otherwise directed by written addendum to the Contract. 1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The Contractor shall cooperate with other contracts performing related work, including providing labor, materials and other costs necessary to satisfactorily coordinate the Contract work with work performed under others contracts. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 1.3 SCHEDULE OF OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS A. The Contractor shall receive, unload, store and install Owner furnished equipment as shown on the plans and called for in the Specifications. B. Storage 1. Upon written acknowledgment by Contractor of receipt in proper condition, the Contractor shall maintain responsibility for proper storage and protection of the equipment. Provide insurance for the Owner-furnished products up to the time of Final Acceptance by the Owner. C. Receiving and Unloading 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for logging in, checking and verifying receipt of items and shall be responsible for confirming that the quantities and condition of the materials are appropriate for installation and the completion of the Work of the project. 2. The Contractor shall note any damage and/or short count on the Bill of Loading for any Owner Furnished Equipment received at the storage facility, such listing of damages or short count being required to establish the Owner's potential claim against the carrier. The Contractor shall also notify the Owner directly on any such damage and/or short count. 3. Unload Owner Furnished Equipment at the job site using necessary care and equipment as required to handle the equipment in a safe manner. 4. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers necessary to handle, receive and install Owner Furnished Equipment. 5. Install Owner Furnished Equipment as called for in the Drawings or in these Specifications. D. Installation 1. Install products in conformance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. 2. Provide interconnecting structures, equipment, piping, electrical and instrumentation work, finish painting, and appurtenances to achieve a complete and functional system. E. Use of Materials 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the use of Owner provide materials in an efficient manner in accordance with industry standards and best practices to reduce waste materials. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 11 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS UPSON HALL 466 LAB WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. All traffic and pedestrian control measures shall be compliant with the National Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD) and 17 NYCRR Chapter V (New York Supplement), (https://www.dot.ny.gov/mutcd) and all other local laws and regulations. B. The Contractor shall carry on the Work in the manner which will cause the least interruption to pedestrian and vehicular traffic and permit access of emergency vehicles at all times. C. The Work shall be scheduled and performed in such a manner that at least one lane of traffic will be maintained on all public streets. Two flag persons, equipped with radio communication devices, must be provided for any activity blocking a traffic lane. One lane of traffic must be maintained at all times. Where traffic must cross open trenches, the Contractor shall provide suitable bridges and railings; including pedestrian bridges. D. The Contractor shall maintain 20’ minimum fire lane access to all facilities in the area. E. The Contractor shall post and maintain flag persons and suitable signs indicating that construction operations are under way and other warning signs as may be required. F. The Contractor shall safeguard the use by the public and Owner of all adjacent highways, roadways and footpaths, outside the Contract Limit Lines (work area), and shall conform to all laws and regulations concerning the use thereof, especially limitations on traffic and the movement of heavy equipment. Access to the site for delivery of construction materials and/or equipment shall be made only at the locations shown in the Contract Documents or approved by the Owner’s Representative. G. The Contractor shall make every effort to keep dirt and debris from making its way to roadways. The Contractor shall immediately remove dirt and debris which may collect on permanent roadways due to the Work. H. The Contractor shall limit the extent of its activities to that area of the site defined on the Contract Drawings as being within the Contract Limit Lines. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS UPSON HALL 466 LAB WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 I. For that portion of the Work required under this Contract which must be performed in other than the defined areas both on-site and off, including operations involving delivery and removal of materials, the Contractor shall schedule and coordinate its activities through the Owner's Representative, to meet the approval of the Owner and minimize disruption of the normal scheduled activities of the occupants of adjacent spaces. J. It is the Owner’s expectation that the Contractor will take protective measures to minimize damage caused by construction activities including, but not limited to, the use of personnel lifts, material handling equipment, on-site material storage, etc. All portions of the site, including the staging area and those areas affected by the work, shall be returned to their original condition after completion of Work. Such repair work shall include lawn restoration and reseeding, if required, and shall be included in the Contractor's Guarantee of Work. K. Routes to and from the location of the Work shall be as indicated in the Contract or as directed by the Owner's Representative. Temporary roadways shall be closed only with prior approval of the Owner's Representative. L. Parking may be made available for staging at Palm Road or other pre-determined area for the duration of the project. The Contractor will be responsible for fencing, securing and maintaining the designated area. All vehicles at Palm Road must be registered with Transportation Services. Due to ongoing work at the Palm Road lot, parking may be limited. 1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES A. In the event of University closure, the Contractor should use their judgement, follow their internal guidance on continuity of operations, and the direction of law enforcement, as to whether or not they will maintain operations on construction sites on campus. They should make this decision with the awareness that Cornell response to any project needs (shutdowns, emergencies) will not possible and the maintenance of roads and walks will not be to normal operating standards. B. With your safety as a top priority, the Cornell University Police allows you the ability to take advantage of our Emergency Mass Notification System that enables your cellphone to become a personal safety device for you. Contractor’s wishing to participate may text the following: CornellAlert to 67283 and you will be set up to receive alert messages. Be advised that you may stop receiving messages at any time by sending “stop” to CornellAlert. There will also be a system generated “stop” every year on August 1st at which point you will need to send the text CornellAlert to re-enlist. 1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION A. The Contractor shall adhere to any University issued Water Use Restrictions in place at the time of construction. 1.5 PARKING A. The Owner may designate an area for parking of essential Contractor vehicles on the project site. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS UPSON HALL 466 LAB WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 B. The Contractor shall make all arrangements, and bear the cost, for transportation of all trade persons from the designated parking area to the construction site as necessary. C. It should be noted that there is a fee for all parking on the Cornell University campus. The Contractor is responsible for the payment for all parking costs imposed by the Owner. The Contractor should contact the Project Manager (Michael Swartwout) for additional information. The Contractor will be required to complete a “New Construction Employee Form” for each permit requested. This form may be found at http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/forms/contractors.cfm. D. Contractor shall cooperate with Transportation Services and/or other authorities having jurisdiction, as follows: 1. Ensure parking by all employees of the Contractor, subcontractors, material suppliers, and others connected with this project only within construction fence or the designated parking area. 2. Prohibit employees from parking in any other areas, roads, streets, grounds, etc. 3. Discharge any employee refusing to comply with these requirements. 4. Ensure proper transportation of personnel between the designated parking area and the construction site. E. The Contractor shall remove from the parking area and staging area all temporary trailers, rubbish, unused materials, and other materials belonging to the Contractor or used under the Contractor’s direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be liable therefore. 1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES A. Make all changeovers, tie-ins and removals, etc., of any part of the Work that would affect the continuity of operation of the adjacent services at approved times that will not interfere with the Owner's operations. Secure approval of Owner before proceeding. B. Make all necessary temporary connections required to permit operation of the building services and/or equipment. Remove the connections after need has ceased. C. The Contractor may be permitted to make changeovers during normal working hours at the Owner’s discretion. Should the Contractor perform this Work outside of normal working hours, no extra payment will be made for resulting overtime expenses. D. When connecting new facilities do not shut off any existing Mechanical/Electrical facilities or services without prior written approval of Owner's Representative. E. The Contractor shall not, except in an emergency condition, shutdown any utility without the express permission of the Owner's Representative. Major, affecting life safety or outside contract limit lines, shutdowns of utilities will be performed by Cornell University to enable Contractor to perform required work. Major shutdowns shall be defined as those affecting life safety or which are outside the project site limits. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS UPSON HALL 466 LAB WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-4 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 F. Maintain domestic water and firewater in service at all times. No service may be out for more than twenty-four (24) hours. Maintain firewater flow capability (hose, if necessary) to all buildings and coordinate with Cornell Utilities, Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), and City of Ithaca Fire Department. G. All shutdowns to be scheduled a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance and requests shall be submitted via ePM system to the Owner’s Representative. H. IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY WHERE THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE IS NOT AVAILABLE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIAL 911 IMMEDIATELY. 1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION A. General 1. Plans show general design arrangement. Install work substantially as indicated and verify exact location and elevations; DO NOT SCALE PLANS. 2. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevations, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in the Work, equipment locations, etc., after notification to the Owner's Representative and Architect. Obtain approval from same, as part of Contract, to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered. 3. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. If requested, submit drawings, detailing all such deviations or changes. 4. Exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes or other building equipment are essential parts of the artistic effect of the building design and shall be installed in locations as shown on the drawings. Conformance to given dimensions and alignments with the structural system, walls, openings, indicated centerlines are a requirement of the Contract and the Contractor shall familiarize himself with the critical nature of proper placement of these items. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of conflicts which would cause such equipment to be installed in locations other than as indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall not proceed with the installation of exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes, etc. until all conflicts have been identified by the Contractor and resolutions to conflicts approved by the Architect. B. Interference 1. Install work so that all items are operable and serviceable and avoid interfering with removal of rails, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors, etc. Provide easy and safe access to valves, controllers, motor starters and other equipment requiring frequent attention. 1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS A. Since all equipment of equal capacity is not necessarily of same arrangement, size of construction, these Plans are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "basis-of-design equipment", even though other manufacturers' names are mentioned. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS UPSON HALL 466 LAB WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-5 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 B. If Contractor elects to use specified equipment other than "design equipment" which differs in arrangement, size, etc., the Contractor does so subject to following conditions: 1. Submit detailed drawings indicating proposed installations of equipment and showing maintenance and service space required. 2. If revised arrangement meets approval, make all required changes in the work of all trades, including but not limited to louvers, panels, structural supports, pads, etc. at no increase in Contract. Provide larger motors and any additional control devices, valves, fittings and other miscellaneous equipment required for proper operation of revised layout, and assumes responsibility for proper location of roughing in and connections by other trades. 3. If revised arrangement does not meet approval because of increase in pressure loss, possibility of increase in noise, lack of space or headroom, insufficient clearance for removal of parts, or for any other reason, provide equipment which conforms to Contract Drawings and Specifications. 1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC. A. Where existing equipment, piping, fittings, etc. are to be removed, Contractor shall submit complete list to Owner. All items that Owner wishes to retain shall be carefully removed and salvaged and delivered to building storage where directed by Owner. Items that Owner does not wish to retain shall be removed from the site and legally disposed. 1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC. A. Before Submitting Proposal 1. Examine all Drawings and Specifications relating to Work of all trades to determine scope and relation to other work. 2. Examine all existing conditions affecting compliance with Plans and Specifications, by visiting site and/or building. 3. Ascertain access to site, available storage and delivery facilities. B. Before Commencing Work on Any Phase or in any Area 1. Verify all governing dimensions at site and/or building. 2. Inspect all adjacent work. C. Tender of Proposal Confirms Agreement 1. All items and conditions referred to herein and/or indicated on accompanying Drawings. 2. No consideration, additional monies or time extensions will be granted for alleged misunderstanding. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS UPSON HALL 466 LAB WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-6 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 D. Existing or Archived Drawings 1. Existing or Archived drawings of impacted buildings are appended in electronic format only for reference and informational purposes. These historic drawings are not to be considered contract drawings and are provided “FOR INFORMATION ONLY”. The Owner makes no representation as to the accuracy of the drawings as representing current conditions. 1.11 STAND DOWN DATES A. Strict and effective enforcement by Contractor’s management and supervision of the following dates and hours is required. 1. Stand-Down Dates (No construction work and no deliveries on site): a. Commencement Weekend b. Virtual Reunion Weekend  Thursday, June 10, 2021  Friday, June 11, 2021  Saturday, June 12, 2021  Sunday, June 13, 2021 2. Restricted Work Dates (delivery & demolition restrictions but otherwise work as usual): Friday, May 28, 2021 Commencement weekend- deliveries and work outside fence stop at noon Friday, May 28, 2021 Commencement weekend- deliveries and work outside fence stop at noon 3. Courses Study Time & Final Exams:. While future dates are unknown at this point, the Contractor shall assume these general timeframes for the duration of the project. * Contractor shall assume that the “Study Time and Final Exam” periods are accurate for the University, but that the Owner has specific exam times falling within these periods. Contractor should assume 10 hours wherein a no noise restriction applies to be used at the discretion of the Owner, but falling within the “Study Time and Final Exam” Periods noted above. Specifically, this means that absolutely no construction noise may be transmitted by virtue of this project to the lecture halls, tutorial rooms, classrooms, library, etc. during the to-be-determined 10-hour period. The Owner will provide information relative to the specific times and locations no less than two weeks in advance of scheduled exams at the Contractor’s request. The 10 hours are to be included with no right to claim for additional cost or time or delays to construction schedule. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS UPSON HALL 466 LAB WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-7 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 1.12 WORKING HOURS A. Normal work hours are 7AM-dusk Monday-Saturday except during above noted restrictions. This means that Contractor shall not permit any noise generating activities that could disturb campus occupants or residents to take place outside of these hours. Should any conditions necessitate work to extend beyond these hours – Contractor may submit a detailed request with reasonable advance notice to Cornell. Cornell (at its sole discretion) may issue a written relaxation of the above but Contractor is advised never to assume that it will be granted. B. During Construction periods, no work shall take place prior to 9AM in a Residence Hall, Fraternity, Co-Op, Sorority, or any type of Housing Unit. Residence Halls require 72 hours notification to the Student & Academic Services representative prior to entering a Residence Hall or Student Room. This does not apply to Fraternity, Co-Op or Sorority House which require 24 hours notification to the Facilities Manager. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 14 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 21 00 Ithaca, New York ALLOWANCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB ALLOWANCES 01 21 00-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. This Section describes Allowances to be carried in the Base Bid by the Contractor. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. The Specification Section containing the pertinent requirements of materials and methods to achieve the Work described herein. Selected materials and equipment are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Definition: An allowance is an amount determined by the Owner or calculated by the Contractor based on given quantities and stated on the Bid Proposal Submission Form. B. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to the Contractor. Items covered by these allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons as the Owner may direct. All uses of the allowances will require the prior written approval of the Owner via a Field Change Authorization. C. Types of Allowances may include: 1. Lump Sum Allowance 2. Unit Price Allowance 1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise the Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. The Contractor shall provide the Owner fourteen (14) calendar days minimum notification of date. B. At the Owner’s request, the Contractor shall obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. The Contractor shall include recommendations that are relevant to performing the work. C. The Contractor shall purchase products and systems selected by the Architect and Owner from the designated supplier. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 21 00 Ithaca, New York ALLOWANCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB ALLOWANCES 01 21 00-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. C. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor hours and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance. D. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in the same manner as for other portions of the work. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted allowance is complete and fully integrated into the Project. B. The Contractor shall include the dollar value of each scheduled allowance number as a separate line item in the Schedule of Values and identify each allowance with Section number 01 21 00. C. The Owner shall provide the Contractor with a Field Change Authorization prior to proceeding with the Work of an allowance. 1.6 LUMP SUM AND UNIT PRICE ALLOWANCES A. Allowances shall include cost to the Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by the Owner or selected by the Architect under allowance and shall include applicable taxes, freight, and delivery to the Project site. B. Included as part of each allowance are miscellaneous devices, accessory objects or similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the allowance. C. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor’s cost for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by the Owner or selected by the Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. D. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to the manufacturer or supplier for credit to the Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1. If requested by the Owner, retain and prepare unused materials for storage by the Owner. Deliver unused material to Owner’s storage space as directed. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 21 00 Ithaca, New York ALLOWANCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB ALLOWANCES 01 21 00-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 1.7 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts and scope of work, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. Prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. 3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Order related to unit-cost allowance. 4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor’s handling, labor, installation, or overhead and profit. Submit claims in accordance with General Conditions – Changes in Work within twenty-one (21) days of receipt of Field Change Authorization authorizing work to proceed. The Owner will reject claims submitted later than twenty-one (21) days after such authorization. 1. Do not include Contractor’s or subcontractor’s indirect expenses in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor’s indirect expenses is permitted for selection of higher or lower priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 21 00 Ithaca, New York ALLOWANCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB ALLOWANCES 01 21 00-4 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance No. 01: Allowance: Include the sum of $1,250 for firestopping not shown on drawings and specifications. B. Allowance No. 02: Allowance: Include the sum of $1,250 for fire protection scope that may be required based on utility coordination. C. Allowance No. 03: Allowance: Include the sum of $5,000 for final connections of utilities to equipment not shown on drawings and specifications. ***END OF SECTION 01 21 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the products specified, under the options and conditions for substitutions stated in this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions that are beyond the Contractor’s control, such as unavailability of product, or regulatory changes. a. Products that are not available from Contractor’s preferred suppliers does not constitute unavailability of product. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. B. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Items salvaged from other projects are not considered new products. Items that are manufactured or fabricated to include recycled content materials are considered new products, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit indicated number of copies of each Substitution Request Form, attached hereto, for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. In addition to submission of Substitution Request Form, substitutions shall be listed on the Bid Proposal Submission Form with description, specification references, and corresponding change in base bid 1.4 PRODUCTS LIST A. Within thirty (30) days after the award of Contract, submit to the Architect five copies of a complete list of products which are proposed for installation. B. Tabulate the products by listing under each specification section title and number. C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product: 1. Name and address of the manufacturer. 2. Trade name. 3. Model or catalog designation. 4. Manufacturer's data: a. Reference standards. b. Performance test data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. B. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with other products and construction methods. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 2. If a dispute or compatibility issue arises over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of accepted substitutions and approved comparable products. 1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL A. Equivalents or Approvals - General 1. The words “similar and equal to”, or “or equal”, “equivalent” and such other words of similar content and meaning shall for the purposes of this Contract be deemed to mean similar or equivalent to one of the named products. For the purposes of Paragraph A and B of this Section 1.4 and for the purposes of Bidding Documents, the word “products” shall be deemed to include the words “articles”, “materials”, “items”, “equipment” and “methods”. Whenever in the Contract documents one or more products are specified, the words “similar and equal to” shall be deemed inserted. 2. Whenever any product is specified in the Contract documents by a reference to the name, trade name, make or catalog number of any manufacturer or supplier, the intent is not to limit competition, but to establish a standard of quality which the Architect has determined is necessary for the Project. The Contractor may at its option use any product other than that specified in the Contract Documents provided the same is approved by the Architect in accordance with the procedures set forth in Paragraph B of this Section 1.4. In all cases the Architect shall be the sole judge as to whether a proposed product is to be approved and the Contractor shall have the burden of proving, at its own cost and expense, to the satisfaction of the Architect, that the proposed product is similar and equal to the named product. In making such determination the Architect may establish such objective and appearance criteria as it may deem proper that the proposed product must meet in order for it to be approved. 3. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed as representing, expressly or implied, that the named product is available or that there is or there is not a product similar and equal to any of the named products and the Contractor shall have and make no claim by reason of the availability or lack of availability of the named product or of a product similar and equal to any named product. 4. The Contractor shall have and make no claim for an extension of time or for damages by reason of the time taken by the Architect or by reason of the failure of the Architect to approve a product proposed by the Contractor. 5. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be received by the Architect only from the Contractor. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-4 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 B. Equivalents or Approvals After Bidding 1. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be considered by the Architect after bidding only in the following cases: (a) the named product cannot be obtained by the Contractor because of strikes, lockouts, bankruptcies or discontinuance of manufacturer and the Contractor makes a written request to the Architect for consideration of the proposed equivalent within ten (10) calendar days of the date it ascertains it cannot obtain the named product; or (b) the proposed equivalent is superior, in the opinion of the Architect, to the named product; or (c) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and its use is to the advantage of the Owner, e.g., the Owner receives an equitable credit, acceptable to it, as a result of the estimated cost savings to the Contractor from the use of the proposed equivalent or the Owner determines that the Contractor has not failed to act diligently in placing the necessary purchase orders and a savings in the time required for the completion of the construction of the Project should result from the use of the proposed equivalent; or (d) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and less than ninety (90) calendar days have elapsed since the Notice of Award of the Contract. 2. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section 1.4 approves a product proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the work covered by this Contract, all such revision and redesign and all new Drawings and details required therefore shall be subject to approval of the Architect and shall be provided by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 3. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section approves a product proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a different quantity and/or arrangement of duct work, piping, wiring, conduit or any other part of the work from that specified, detailed or indicated in the Contract Documents, the contractor shall provide the same at its own cost and expense. 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS A. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of products and manufacturers named. 1. Products: a. Restricted List (Products): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Products” or that include the phrase “provide one of the following”, and include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. - Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-5 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 b. Non-restricted List (Available Products): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Products” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 2. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List (Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Manufacturers” or that include the phrase “provide products by one of the following”, and include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. - Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List (Available Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Manufacturers” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. a. Restricted List (List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and include a list of other manufacturers' names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers that complies with requirements. - Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. - Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List (No List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and do not include a list of other manufacturers’ names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-6 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or equal", the Contractor shall submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. Such substitution shall have been listed on Bid Proposal Submission Form as required in Instructions to Bidders. If not so listed, no substitution will be allowed. D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, no option and no substitution will be considered unless listed on the Bid Proposal Submission Form as provided in the Instructions to Bidders. Base Bid must include the specified product or manufacturer. Substitutions will be at the sole discretion of the Owner. 1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 21 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Submit requests for substitution within thirty (30) days of contract award. C. Submit a separate request for each substitution. Support each request with: 1. Completed "Request for Substitution" form in eBuilder. A request for substitution of a product, material, or process for that specified in the Contract Documents must be formally submitted as such accompanied by evidence that the proposed substitution ﴾1﴿ is equal in quality and serviceability to the specified item; ﴾2﴿ will not entail changes in detail and construction of Other Work; ﴾3﴿ will be acceptable to the Architect and Owner's Design Consultant's in achieving design and artistic intent; and ﴾4﴿ will not result in a cost and/or schedule disadvantage. 2. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature; identify: - Product description. - Reference standards. - Performance and test data. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and the date of each installation. 3. An itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the product specified listing any variations. 4. Data relating to any changes in the construction schedule. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-7 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 5. The effect of the substitution on each separate contract of the Project. 6. List any changes required in other work or projects. 7. Designate any required license fees or royalties. 8. Designate availability of maintenance services, and source of replacement materials. D. Substitutions shall not result in additions to the Contract Sum. E. Substitutions will not be considered as having been accepted when: 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a formal request from the Contractor. 2. They are requested by a subcontractor or supplier. 3. The acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. F. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of the Owner. G. The Owner and the Architect shall be the sole judges of the acceptability of a proposed substitution. 1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Contractor's request for approval of comparable product will be considered when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may reject or return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product or manufacturer: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the product specified. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-8 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION A. In making a formal request for a substitution the Contractor represents that: 1. By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all dimensions, quantities, field dimensions, relations to existing work, coordination with work to be installed later, coordination with information on previous Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples and compliance with all the requirements of the Contract Documents. The accuracy of all such information is the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. The Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 3. The Contractor will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified. 4. The Contractor will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 5. The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which may subsequently become apparent. 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. B. Transmit evaluations and recommendations to the Owner, so that the Owner can notify the Contractor of the decision for acceptance or rejection of the request for substitution. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 25 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS UPSON HALL 466 LAB PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Owner will schedule and administer pre-construction meeting, periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work. 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 4. Preside at meetings. 5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions. 6. Duplicate and distribute copies of minutes after each meeting. a. To all participants in the meeting. b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting. c. To the Architect. B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. 1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule at least fifteen (15) days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties. C. Attendance: 1. Owner's Representative(s) 2. Contractor(s) 3. Architect and its professional consultants 4. Major Subcontractors 5. Major suppliers 6. Safety Representatives for the Owner and Contractor CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS UPSON HALL 466 LAB PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 D. Minimum Agendum: 1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers b. Projected Construction Schedules 2. Critical work sequencing a. Identification of major shut downs and approximate schedule 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities 4. Project Coordination a. Designation of responsible personnel 5. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions b. Proposal requests c. Submittals d. Change Orders e. Applications for Payment f. Requests for Information g. Daily Reports 6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents 7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents 8. Use of premises: a. Office, work and storage areas b. Owner's requirements c. Job site personnel conduct d. Building access and security 9. Temporary facilities, controls and construction aids 10. Temporary utilities 11. Safety and first-aid procedures CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS UPSON HALL 466 LAB PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 a. Contractor’s Project Site Specific Plan 12. Security procedures 13. Housekeeping procedures 14. Affirmative Action Plan and Reporting requirements 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule regular periodic meetings on the site, not less than once every two weeks throughout the Construction period. B. Attendance: 1. Architect 2. Architect's professional consultants when, in the opinion of the Owner, needed 3. General Contractor, including Site Superintendent 4. Owner's Representatives 5. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda 6. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda 7. Safety Representative C. Minimum Agenda: 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting 2. Review percentage of work to be in place by next meeting by individual trades 3. Review of work progress since previous meeting 4. Field observations, problems, and conflicts 5. Problems which impede Construction Schedule 6. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules 7. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule 8. Revisions to Construction Schedule 9. Planned progress and schedule, during succeeding work period 10. Coordination of schedules 11. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required 12. Maintenance of quality standards CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS UPSON HALL 466 LAB PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-4 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 13. Review status of all issued proposal requests and change orders 14. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date b. Effect on other contracts of the Project 15. Other business D. All decisions, instructions, and interpretations given by the Architect/Engineer or its representative at these meetings shall be binding and conclusive on the Contractor. 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S) A. The Contractor to hold pre-installation conferences where required by individual specification sections or others at the discretion of the Owner. Minimum attendees would be Architect and/or their specific sub-consultant, Owner, Contractor, Subcontractor, key Suppliers, testing & inspection firm, Facilities Engineering subject matter expert, etc. Minimum agenda would include review of key submittals, RFI’s, safety, logistics, material procurement, quality control, etc. Contractor to assemble and distribute the Agenda minimum 48 hours prior to meeting as well as distribute meeting minutes a minimum of seven (7) calendar days after the meeting. B. Submit a list of pre-installation meetings with preliminary dates within fifteen (15) days of issuance of the Notice to Proceed. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ****END OF SECTION 01 31 19*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT UPSON HALL 466 LAB ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-1 RENOVATION (ePM) SYSTEM JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Owner Provided System: The Contractor will utilize the Owner’s electronic Project Management (e-PM) system eBuilder on this project. 1. The Owner shall manage the day to day use of the Owner provided ePM system and organize the training, support and maintenance of the ePM Website System for the entire project team for the period of its use on the Project. B. There are no fees to utilize this system. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions Article 9 – Coordination and Cooperation. B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ePM: defined as an internet-based information and project communication system that allows the entire project team to collaborate in a centralized and secured repository. All project-specific correspondence, workflow processes, and documentation will be stored and routed within the ePM system. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Users will be provided a username and password. The Contractor shall log into the e-PM system to enter the Project Documentation listed in section 2.0. All correspondence should be communicated through the e-PM system. B. Training 1. The Owner will hold training sessions to familiarize team members with the system, and all Contractor staff are expected to attend one of these sessions or otherwise receive proper training on the system’s use. All cost for personnel time and travel to attend the training as needed shall be included in the Contractor’s proposal. C. The Contractor shall provide on-site personnel with personal computer(s) and personal computer equipment that will allow the Contractor’s personnel to access and use the ePM Website System in a timely and efficient manner. At a minimum the Contractor is to provide the following equipment and software: CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT UPSON HALL 466 LAB ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-2 RENOVATION (ePM) SYSTEM JUNE 1, 2021 D. 1. Web Browser: with high-speed connection, up/downloading capability. 2. Color printer and plotter capable of full-size document production. 3. Scanner: capable of scanning a high volume of project documents clearly and quickly. 4. Digital Camera: (1) single lens reflex (SLR) type camera. 5. Portable Document Format (PDF) Reader/writer software. E. Contractor shall log on to the ePM Website System on a daily basis, and as necessary to be kept fully appraised of the project developments, correspondence, assigned tasks and other matters that occur on the site. These may include but are not limited to RFI’s, action items, meeting minutes, discussion threads, schedule updates, submittals, submittal log, punch list items, daily reports, site photos and/or videos and preconstruction surveys. 1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW A. The Contractor is required to timely and accurately post, review, respond, and collaborate with other team members using the following features and/or workflow processes within the ePM system. B. Project Team Directory – Contractor shall provide an updated directory of contact information for all companies, subcontractors and project team members who are engaged on this project. C. Request for Information (RFI): All project RFI’s will be submitted using the ePM Website System. The submission of a Request for Information (RFI) is the Contractor’s exclusive means of requesting information from the Owner and/or Architect. Attachments to RFI’s (which may include sketches, photographs, documentation, and the like, will be uploaded to the ePM Website System and attached to the RFI electronically. D. Meeting Minutes: Contractor shall enter meeting agendas, records and minutes in the system for all applicable meetings as designated by the Owner. E. General Communications, memorandums and Letters (Project Correspondence): Shall be created in or posted to the ePM Website System in PDF format electronically linked to action items. These action items shall include names of party (ies) required to respond, time frame within which action is to be taken and any solutions the Contractor recommends. F. Drawings and Specifications: The Contract Documents will be posted to the ePM Website System as directed by the Owner. The Owner shall retain the right to assign download rights to active CAD or model files. CAD or model files, in any format, posted to the ePM Website System are for viewing and printing only and cannot be edited. G. Submittals: All submittals shall be fully electronic. Reference Section 01 33 00. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT UPSON HALL 466 LAB ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-3 RENOVATION (ePM) SYSTEM JUNE 1, 2021 H. Submittal Schedule and Log: Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis. I. Field Reporting: The Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis all reports required by other specification sections. These reports include, but are not limited to, daily construction reports, material location reports, unusual event reports, safety and accident reports. J. Project Photographs: Contractor shall upload project photographs to the ePM system, field by date and type including but not limited to: 1. General Progress Photographs 2. RFI Issues 3. Non-Conforming Work 4. Special Events 5. As required by individual Specification Sections K. Project Schedule: The contractor shall post, distribute, review, and/or respond to the project schedule, monthly updates, and any other schedule submittals onto the ePM in both native and PDF formats. L. Permits & Approvals: Contractor shall upload and maintain current copies of all permits and agency approvals that relate to the project. M. Issue Tracking: Contractor to log and respond to issues that are related and affect other stakeholders within the project team. N. Quality Assurance: The Owner and/or Architect will issue reports on conforming items in the ePM system. The Contractor is required to review and respond with corrective actions in the system. O. Change Management – Cost Events and Change Orders will be managed by the e-PM system and the Contractor shall be responsible for reporting potential changes and logging Requests for Change Orders in the system. The Contractor shall also upload and manage all documentation supporting Requested Change Orders. P. Pay Applications Requests (Invoices) – The Contractor shall create and submit invoices for review by the Owner. Once the invoices are agreed to by the Owner then the invoices should be submitted electronically per the instructions for the ePM system. Q. Budget and Cost Management – Contractor to provide estimates and work breakdown structure (WBS) to provide Owner with accurate budget/cost analysis. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT UPSON HALL 466 LAB ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT 01 31 50-4 RENOVATION (ePM) SYSTEM JUNE 1, 2021 1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A. The Owner may change the standards for distribution and process prescribed above as required to suit the project. B. The Owner shall retain ownership of all data entered into either system and shall administrate and distribute all information contained therein. C. The Contractor shall make certain that all subcontractors performing significant work on the project shall actively participate in the e-PM system. Requirements for participation in the e-PM system shall be made part of each bid document and final contract. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ****END OF SECTION 01 31 50*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE UPSON HALL 466 LAB CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall, within fourteen (14) calendar days of Notice to Proceed, prepare and submit to the Owner estimated construction progress schedules for the entire Work, with sub-schedules of related activities which are essential to the progress of the Work. B. Conferences will be held with the Architect, Owner and Contractor at the start of the project to agree mutually on a progress schedule which must be diligently followed. C. Submit revised progress schedules periodically and when requested to do so by Owner. D. Submit to Owner and Architect a cash flow projection in accordance with Schedule of Values. E. Submit electronic versions of all schedules, including updates, as well as all back-up to the submitted schedules. 1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES A. Prepare Network Analysis system, or prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar chart. 1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation. 2. Horizontal time scale: Identify the first work day of each week. 3. Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations and future revisions. B. Format of listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work. C. Identification of listings: By specification section numbers. 1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES A. Construction Progress Schedule: 1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity. 2. Show the dates for the beginning, and completion of, each major element of construction. Specifically list: a. Site clearing b. Site utilities CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE UPSON HALL 466 LAB CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 c. Foundation work d. Structural framing e. Subcontractor work f. Equipment installations g. Finishes h. Pre-Installation meetings 3. Show projected percentages of completion for each item, as of the first day of each month. 4. Show estimated dates for the beginning and completion of work which must be completed by or coordinated with the Owner such as hazardous materials abatement, moving, training and other such items as they are identified. B. Submittals Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Confer with the Architect and agree on all elements of the Submittals Schedule. The schedule will be based on the understanding that minimum turn-around time in the Architect's office is ten (10) working days. Some submittals or groups of submittals may take longer to review. Submittals which do not conform to the agreed schedule may be subject to delays in processing. Show: 1. The dates for Contractor's submittals. 2. The dates reviewed submittals will be required from the Architect. 3. Confirmed lead time for manufacturing, production, fabrication and shipment to the project site of all materials which have an impact on the critical path of the Project's construction schedule. 1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission. B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule: 1. Major changes in scope 2. Activities modified since previous submission 3. Revised projections of progress and completion 4. Other identifiable changes C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define: 1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule. 2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE UPSON HALL 466 LAB CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors. 1.5 SUBMISSIONS A. Submit initial Construction Progress Schedules within fifteen (15) calendar days after award of Contract. 1. Owner will review schedules and return review copy within ten (10) days after receipt. 2. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days after return of review copy. B. Submit progress revision schedules to accompany each application for payment. C. Submit Submittals Schedule within thirty (30) calendar days after date of commencement of work. D. Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to: 1. Owner Job Site personnel 2. Subcontractors 3. Other concerned parties B. Instruct recipients to report to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the projections of the schedule. ***END OF SECTION 01 32 16*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 33 Ithaca, New York PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION UPSON HALL 466 LAB PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall provide existing condition photographs taken before commencement of Work, progress photographs taken periodically during progress of the Work, and final photographs upon completion and full occupancy of the building. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Progress Submittals 1. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project area and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. 2. Submit digital photograph electronic files, organizationally filed by week, to E-Builder within five (5) days of taking photographs. 3. Each photograph shall be identified with project title, date, and a description of the view. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Before commencement of selective demolition, take photographs of Project area and surrounding areas, including existing items to remain during construction. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 33 Ithaca, New York PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION UPSON HALL 466 LAB PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 3.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographs shall be taken weekly in a manner which completely documents the work. B. The photographs shall be submitted to the Owner at the end of the first week for review. C. Provide photographs of any wall, ceiling or floor assembly containing MEP, A/V or any infrastructure that will thereafter become concealed-prior to closure. Note location on Key Plan. 3.3 FINAL COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographs shall be taken in a manner which completely documents the completed work, for submission as project record documents. ***END OF SECTION 01 32 33*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals, including the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. LEED Submittals 3. Product Data 4. Samples 5. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals 6. Coordination Drawings 7. Certification of Asbestos free products 8. Owner audio/visual 9. Owner furnishings and fixed equipment B. Designate in the construction schedule, and/or in a separate Submittals Schedule, the dates for submission and the dates reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples will be needed. C. With the exception of physical samples and color charts, or as otherwise approved by the Owner, all submittals shall be electronic images in PDF format created electronically (saved with commenting allowed) which shall be submitted for review and approval via the electronic project management web site. PDFs shall be created directly from the native file format electronically. Scanning of paper to PDF shall be used minimally. Any nonelectronic submittals shall be approved on a case by case basis and logged into the electronic management system as directed by a Cornell representative. 1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE A. The Architect shall provide a draft submittal registry in the template needed for eBuilder importation. It will be part of the contract documents and turned over to the Contractor in native format for their use. The Contractor shall be responsible for review and completion of the registry including addition of dates identified below and other information as deemed necessary by the Owner. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 B. The submittal registry and schedule shall list all submittals required by the specifications, listed in order by the specification section in which they are required. Coordinate the Submittal Schedule with the Contractor's Critical Path Method Construction Schedule and other related documents. C. The Submittal Registry shall include the following information: 1. Title (by Architect for Contractor review) 2. Related specification section and paragraph numbers (by Architect for Contractor review) 3. Subsection (by Architect for Contractor review) 4. Category of Submittal (Certification, Mock-Up, Operations/Maintenance Manual, Product Data, Sample, Shop Drawing, Test Report, As Built, etc.) (by Architect for Contractor review) 5. Submittal Description including description of the part of the Work covered by the submittal (by Architect for Contractor review) 6. Name of Subcontractor, if applicable (Contractor provided, optional) 7. Date due from Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional) 8. Date due to be submitted for review (Contractor provided, required) 9. Date due for submittal review to be completed (Contractor provided, required) 10. Date for transmittal to Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional) 11. Date for material or product delivery to project (Contractor provided, required) 12. Priority. Low, normal or high (Contractor provided, required) D. Schedule a resubmittal for each major submittal. Except where specified otherwise in the contract documents, provide review times for submittals in accordance with Submittal Procedures and Architect’s Duties below. E. Distribution: Initially submit the Submittal Schedule to the Owner for review via the electronic Project Management system. A submittal schedule compliant with the requirements of this section showing all submittals for the preliminary schedule submission duration shall be submitted with the Contractor’s preliminary schedule submittal described in Section 01 32 16. The schedule shall also enumerate all submittals to be processed after the initial preliminary schedule submission duration period, although the date for these submittals does not have to be indicated. A final baseline submittal schedule showing all submittals for the entire project shall be included in the baseline schedule submittal described in Section 01 32 16. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 F. Updating: The Submittal Schedule shall be kept up-to-date by the Contractor until all submittals are approved. Failure to provide the requested information, or delay in submitting required submittals may result in the payment request being returned to the Contractor until the required schedule or submittals are received. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Drawings shall be newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale by skilled draftsperson and presented in a clear and thorough manner. 1. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from Contract Documents. 2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop Drawings. 3. Standard information prepared without specific reference to Project is not Shop Drawing. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurements. 6. Submittal: a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. b. Maintain returned document as a “Record Document”. 1.4 PRODUCT DATA A. Product Data includes brochures, diagrams, standard schedules, performance charts, and instructions that illustrate physical size, appearance and other characteristics of materials and equipment. All submittals shall identify all products as being asbestos free, see Section 01 35 29. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-4 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. 1. Clearly mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Failure to do so will result in rejection of the submission. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3. Show dimensions and clearances required. 4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. 5. Where Product Data includes information on products that are not required, eliminate or mark through information that does not apply. 6. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. 7. Preliminary Submittal: Submit single copy of Product Data where selection of options by Architect is required. 8. Submittals: a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. b. Maintain one (1) copy as a “Record Document”. 1.5 SAMPLES A. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. B. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2. Full range of color, texture and pattern. C. Field samples and mock-ups: 1. Contractor shall erect, at the Project site, at a location acceptable to the Architect. 2. Size or area: that specified in the respective specification section. 3. Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished. 4. Remove mock-ups when directed by the Architect. 5. Perform necessary work to bring any area disturbed by mock-ups to the areas original condition. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-5 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 D. Submit fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with material or product proposed. 1. Mount or display Samples in manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. 2. Identify Samples with generic description, product name, and name of manufacturer. 3. Submit Samples for review and verification of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. 4. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is inherent in material or product represented, submit at least three (3) multiple units that show approximate limits of variations. 5. Preliminary Submittals: Submit one (1) full set of choices where Samples are submitted for Architect’s selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices. 6. Submittals: a. Submit four (4) sets for Architect’s review. Architect will return at least one (1) set marked with action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout course of construction. Additionally, for electronic transmittal, photograph sample and its label and attached to the submittal item electronically via the electronic project management. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS A. Quality assurance and quality control submittals include design data, test reports, certifications, manufacturer’s instructions, and manufacturer’s field reports. B. Professional design services or certifications: Where Contract Documents require professional design services or certifications by a design professional, Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a qualified design professional, whose registration seal shall appear on drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Architect shall be entitled to rely upon adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design professionals. C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies as specified in the Contract Documents. D. Manufacturer’s instruction: Preprinted instructions concerning proper application or installation of system or product. E. Manufacturer’s field reports: Reports documenting testing and verification by manufacturer’s field representative to verify compliance with manufacturer’s standards or instructions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-6 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 F. Submittals: 1. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. 2. Maintain one (1) additional copy as “Record Document”. 1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall coordinate and manage the preparation and submittal of coordinated layouts of the mechanical, electrical and fire protection systems and equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 1/4" per foot showing on both plan and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide electronic record of each coordination drawing submitted in TIFF and PDF formats to the Owner. Provide coordination drawings for all corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and all congested areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated installation of work within the space available. B. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required thirty (30) days prior to commencement of fabrication and/or installation of any work item. C. Prepare and submit coordinated layouts of the mechanical and electrical systems and equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 3/8 inch =1 foot (1:32) showing on both plan and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide copies of each coordination drawing submitted. Provide coordination drawings for all spaces, including but not limited to, corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and other areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated installation of work within the space available. 1. Show architectural, structural and other adjacent work requiring coordination with services. Show items, including but not limited to, access doors, ceiling grids, ceiling construction, structural decks and framing, fixtures, devices, and other adjacent work coordinated with services and architectural layouts shown on Drawings. 2. Prepare plans, sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 3. Include room names and numbers of each space. 4. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple entities in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-7 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 5. Contract drawings are diagrammatic. Exact location of receptacles, light fixtures, exit signs, fire alarm devices, and other devices shall be coordinated with the Architectural Drawings and shall not be scaled from locations indicated on the Mechanical and Electrical Drawings. Coordinate modifications in layout as necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the design intent. 6. Coordinate modifications in layout and components necessary to ensure maintenance accessibility and prevent conflict between each portion of the Work. 7. Maintain maximum headroom at all locations. Unless indicated otherwise, all mechanical and electrical systems and associated components are to be installed as tight to underside of structure as possible. 8. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, electrical systems, communications systems, security systems, and other portions of the Work. Drawings shall indicate dimensions, to avoid interference with existing conditions, structural frame, ceilings, partitions, services, and other portions of the Work. Where conflicts occur with placement of materials of various portions of the Work, Contractor shall be responsible to resolve conflicts and coordinate the available space to accommodate each portion of the Work. Adjustments resulting from coordination shall be initialed and dated by the entity(s) affected by the adjustments. 9. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. 10. Show location and size of access doors and access panels required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. 11. Indicate required installation sequences. 12. Indicate dimensions, elevations, and alignments shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions, elevations, and alignments that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements and notify Architect. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 13. Indicate suspended ceiling heights and show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. 14. Indicate locations of fire-rated partitions, smoke partitions, and other required barriers. 15. Plenum Space: Indicate sub-framing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, toilet partitions, overhead-mounted equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components and notify Architect. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-8 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 16. Exposed Ceiling Construction: In addition to other indicated information, show fullydimensioned locations of all items exposed at ceiling space. Indicate alignment requirements and centerline locations of light fixtures, ducts, piping, conduit, and other services. Show dashed outline locations of laboratory casework, shelving, and other items that extend 7 feet or more above the floor. 17. Mechanical and Electrical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical and electrical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fireprotection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. Indicate paths of egress from rooms. Indicate paths for equipment removal from rooms. Indicate clear areas required for access and maintenance. 18. Structural Penetrations: Indicate scheduled and requested penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. Request un-scheduled penetrations and openings where Contractor has reviewed, analyzed, and coordinated all possible routing options and structural penetrations are only feasible option to accommodate indicated ceiling heights. Refer to the drawings for general guidelines and request confirmation by Architect for structural penetrations. 19. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show dimensioned locations, sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, accessories, and support systems. Show locations of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. 20. Electrical Work: Show electrical distribution, systems, equipment, and runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger. Show light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, fire alarm, and other device locations. Show panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, bus way, generator, and motor control center locations. Show location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. Show lighting control systems. Show cable tray layouts including vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions, clearances for access above and to side of cable trays, and vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure. 21. Fire Suppression System: Show locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads. 22. Refer to individual Sections for additional Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections. 23. Contractor Sign-Off: Contractor and each entity performing portions of the Work shall sign and date coordination drawings. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-9 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 24. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. Review of coordination drawings shall not reduce Contractor’s responsibility for final coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of systems and equipment with existing conditions and each portion of the Work. D. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required before work can start in any given area of the building. 1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents and approve submittals prior to transmitting to the Architect. B. Specifically record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitation. Comply with requirements of Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options. C. Contractor’s approval of submittals shall indicate that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria, and has checked and coordinated information within each submittal with requirement of the Work and Contact Documents. Field conflicts which arise from the contractor’s failure to fully review and approve submittals before ordering equipment, will result in the contractor being burdened with all costs to remediate the situation. D. Contractor shall be responsible for: 1. Compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. Confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions. 3. Selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction. 4. Coordination of the work represented by each submittal with other trades. 5. Performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. 6. Compliance with the approved Construction Schedule. 7. All other provisions of the agreements. E. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittals is not to be construed as an authorization for additional work or additional cost. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-10 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 F. If any notations represent a change to the Contract Sum, submit a cost proposal for the change in accordance with procedures specified before proceeding with the work. G. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittal is not to be construed as approval of colors. Make all color-related submittals at one time. H. Notify the Architect by letter of any notations made by the Architect which the Contractor finds unacceptable. Resolve such issues prior to proceeding with the Work. I. Begin no fabrication of work until all specified submittal procedures have been fulfilled. J. Do not submit shop drawings, product data or samples representing work for which such submittals are not specified. The Architect shall not be responsible for consequences of inadvertent review of unspecified submittals. K. The review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for proper construction and the furnishing of materials and labor required even though the same may not be indicated on the review shop drawings. L. Certify that only asbestos free material is used in the execution of all work. Reference Section 01 35 39. 1.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination 1. Coordinate submittals with performance of construction activities in accordance with the Submittal Schedule approved by the Architect and Owner. 2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 3. Prepare and transmit each submittal in accordance with the Submittals Schedule, agreed to by all entities involved. 4. Prepare, review, approve and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 5. Architect's Review: Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's initial processing of each submittal requiring the Architect’s review and response, except for longer periods required as noted below, and where processing must be delayed for coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor promptly when it is determined that a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's reprocessing of each submittal. Notify the Architect when processing time for a submittal is critical to the progress of the work, and the work would be expedited if its processing time could be shortened. An additional five (5) working days will be required for items specified in Divisions 2, 3, 5, 23 and 26, and for Architectural Woodwork, Hollow Metal Work and Hardware Schedules. 6. Allow time for delivery in addition to review. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-11 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 7. Allow time for reprocessing each submittal. 8. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to prepare submittals sufficiently in advance of Work to permit processing. 9. Submittals made which do not conform to the schedule are subject to delays in processing by the Architect. 10. Refer to Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules for requirements of the Submittals Schedule. 11. Failure of the Contractor to obtain approval of Shop Drawings shall render all work thereafter performed to be at Contractor’s sole risk, cost and expense. B. Submittal Preparation 1. Place permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 2. Indicate name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 3. Provide space on label or beside title block on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, action taken, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents. 4. Complete all fields on submittal item details in ePM system including meaningful description. 5. Include the following information on submittal documentation: a. Drawing, detail or specification references, including section number, as appropriate to clearly identify intended use of product. b. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. c. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials. d. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers. e. Provide a blank space for the Architect’s stamps f. On transmittal, record relevant information including deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. 6. Identification of revisions on re-submittals, other than those noted by the Architect on previous submittals. 7. Shop drawings with the comment "by others" are not acceptable. All such work must specifically identify the related responsible subcontractor. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-12 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 C. Submittal Transmittal: 1. Transmit submittals via the electronic project management system to Architect unless otherwise noted or directed. 2. Prepare and generate transmittal in ePM system for submission of samples. Package sample and other each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. 1.10 RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Provide a record copy of the submittal (electronic format) for the O&M Manual. 1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make any corrections or changes noted on previous submittals. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal. 2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those noted by the Architect. C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness as identified in 1.8, paragraph 5 of this Section. B. Notations on the Submittal Review Stamp or eBuilder file mean the following: 1. "Approved (APP)" indicates that no deviations from the design concept have been found and Work may proceed. 2. "Approved as Noted (AAN)" indicates that deviations from the design concept which have been found are noted, and the Contractor may proceed accordingly. 3. "Revise and Resubmit (RAR)" indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. 4. “Rejected (REJ)” indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. 5. “On Hold (ONH)” is used in a very limited capacity and means that the Contractor should not take action until the reason for hold has been cleared and may be required to revise and resubmit. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES UPSON HALL 466 LAB SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-13 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 6. “Not Reviewed (NRV)” is used for submittals that were submitted in error, duplicate, or other reason that does not require review by the Architect but need to be closed by the Contractor upon return to them. 7. “For Record Only (FRO)”: Submittals for information or record purposes, including Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), will not require responsive action by the Architect. a. Architect will forward informational submittals without action. b. Architect will reject and return informational submittals not in compliance with Contract Documents. C. Incomplete Submittals: Architect will return incomplete submittals without action. D. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect will return unsolicited submittals to sender without action. E. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or for resubmission. 1.13 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute reviewed Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data when possible via the electronic project management system to: 1. Job site file 2. Record Documents file 3. Subcontractors 4. Installers 5. Suppliers 6. Manufacturers 7. Fabricators 8. Architect 9. Owner B. Do not permit use of unmarked copies or rejected copies of submittals in connection with construction at Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 33 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY UPSON HALL 466 LAB GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section provides requirements for general health and safety during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project. B. In addition to the requirements of this Section, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements. 1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN A. Contractors are required to submit a Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP) for review by Cornell University representatives before commencement of work on the site. The PSSP should address site specific information, controls and or requirements as it relates to the entire scope of work for the project. All contractors shall use the Project Site Specific Plan Template below to develop their Project’s PSSP. The template may be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/campus-health-safety/occupational-safety/contractor-safety 1. Within the PSSP Template are example(s) to use as reference. The provided examples demonstrate Cornell University’s expectations for providing detailed site specific information, controls and requirements. 2. Project Site Specific Plan’s that inadequately address site specific operations will be returned with comments for resubmission. Failure to submit a PSSP may result in delay of project and/or denial of the payment. 3. All projects must have the PSSP submitted via e-Builder for review and comment. B. PSSP submittal should be submitted a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the commencement of work on site. The Contractor may opt to submit their PSSP in phases. The Contractor must submit a phase submission plan using the PSSP Submission table included in the PSSP template for approval by Owner’s Representative with initial submission. Submit remaining phases no later than ten (10) days prior to the start of a new, predetermined project phase or milestone. 1. Projects having less than a ten (10) day turn-around shall coordinate their submittal with the Owner’s Representative, who should coordinate with Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP), the University Fire Marshall’s Office and Contract College’s Codes Enforcement Official, if applicable. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY UPSON HALL 466 LAB GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 C. The Contractor is responsible for its employees and its subcontractors. Subcontractors are required to submit their PSSP to the General Contractor. The General Contractor is responsible to ensure all subcontractor(s) PSSP’s are adequate per their scope of work. D. The General Contractor is required to ensure their project’s PSSP is accurately maintained throughout the duration of the contract. Resubmission is required for any new scope elements not previously addressed by the Contractor’s original PSSP. E. Definitions: 1. Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP): A structured document that details the scope of the contract work and related site specific controls, requirements and information for University and Contractor personnel. This document is not intended to be all inclusive of all applicable local, state and federal laws and regulations for which the General Contractor and its Subcontractor(s) are expected to comply. 2. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): • The organization, office or individual responsible for approving equipment, an installation or a procedure (NYS Fire Code). • The local government, county government or state agency responsible for the administration and enforcement of an applicable regulation or law (NYS Building Code-§202.2). 3. Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP): A division of Cornell University’s Environmental Safety and Health Department. The OHSIP division can be contacted at (607)-255-8200 or by email at askEHS@cornell.edu 4. SME: The University’s subject matter expert. 1.3 ASBESTOS A. All products provided for use in construction at Cornell University are to be free of asbestos. At Substantial Completion, prior to beneficial service, the Contractor shall provide a signed certification form “Exhibit AC” stating that all Contractor supplied & installed products are 100% asbestos free. The Contractor has to attach applicable Safety Data Sheets/ Material Safety Data Sheets for each product documenting a 100% asbestos free status. The University may provide random testing of products for asbestos content. Any Contractor installed product found to contain asbestos shall be classified as defective work. Defective work shall be corrected by the Contractor as specified in the General Conditions. B. Attached for the Contractor’s information are asbestos reports which represent samples taken within the building. C. Based on the above, disposal of asbestos containing material is not anticipated. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY UPSON HALL 466 LAB GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 1.4 LEAD A. Building may contain lead based paint. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. The Contractor selects the means and/or methods to address the presence of lead based paint, and must concurrently protect its workers based on the Contractor’s means and/or methods. The Contractor is required to submit a lead plan that is site specific, indicating that the protective measures the Contractor proposes meet the OSHA standard 1926.62 “Lead in Construction Standards”. This site specific plan should address the particular methods the Contractor intends to protect its workers, the building occupants and the building structure based on its selection of addressing the presence of lead based paint. 1.5 MERCURY COLLECTION A. Building may contain mercury. Mercury is a metal that is liquid at room temperature and is toxic to humans and the environment. Mercury can accumulate under laboratory benches and especially in the pipes in old laboratories. Dismantling old fixtures with care can prevent unnecessary spills. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. Mercury is regulated by OSHA and the EPA. If encountered, mercury shall be collected safely utilizing proper measures to prevent exposure and must be turned over to Cornell Environmental Health & Safety for disposal. In the event of a spill, leave and secure the area, call Cornell Dispatch 255-1111 and request the campus Spill Response Team. 1.6 SITE VISITS A. The undertaking of periodic Site Visits by Architects, Engineers or the Owner shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, or make them responsible for the safety of any persons; or make them responsible for means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction selected by the Contractor or its Subcontractors; or make them responsible for safety programs and precautions incident to the Work, or for the safe access, visit, use, Work, travel or occupancy of any person. 1.7 CONFINED SPACE A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the identification of confined space in accordance with OSHA requirements. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 29*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” March 29, 2021 Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Facilities Coordinator Projects II Cornell University IPP – Facilities Management FM Administration 116 Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, New York 14853-3701 Re: Upson Hall (2045) Room 466 Lab Renovations Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection Letter Cornell Task Authorization No. TA-445, Work Order No. 13291802 Delta Project No.: 2019.003.424 Dear Mr. Houseknecht: The following information is associated with the upcoming Upson Hall Room 466 Lab Renovations. Based on a review of the project scope with Cornell Representative Tara Woodard, a visual inspection of the Room by Delta Inspector Tom Ferro, and a review of the asbestos building material information for Upson Hall from Delta’s December 2018 PostConstruction Full Building Asbestos Survey, No Asbestos Containing Materials are anticipated to be impacted by the Upson Hall Room 466 Renovation Project. All wall, floor and ceiling system materials and ductwork joint caulk/putty within the renovation area were reported as being non-asbestos. All accessible pipe insulation was observed to be nonsuspect fiberglass or foam. It should be noted that known asbestos containing pipe and pipe fitting insulation is still present in various “inaccessible” building wet-walls, interstitial wall spaces and hard ceiling plenum spaces that were not “opened” as a part of the recent Upson Hall Full Building Renovation Project. As such, if any non-fiberglass / non-foam in-line pipe insulation and/or fitting insulation is encountered as a part of the Room 466 Lab Renovation Project, it should be assumed asbestos containing. The December 2018 Upson Hall Post-Construction Full building Asbestos Survey Report and February 13, 2019 Asbestos Building Summary Letter are on file at Cornell and can be provided by Delta upon request. If you have any questions, or require any other information, please feel free to contact me at your convenience. Respectfully, DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Stephen Prislupsky Director of Environmental Services CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS UPSON HALL 466 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-1 LAB RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section and the listed Related Sections provides minimum requirements for the protection of the environment during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project. B. In addition to the requirements of this Section and the listed Related Sections, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements. C. Prior to bidding, review the entire Bidding Documents and report in writing to the Owner’s Representative any error, inconsistency, or omission that may have environmental impacts. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control B. Section 01 35 45 – Refrigerant Compliance 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals: 1. Analytical laboratory sample results and material Certifications for all imported soil and granular materials (“borrow”). 2. Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan. 3. Weight tickets from the Borrow Material Supplier. 4. Proposed methods for dewatering and construction water management. 5. Analytical laboratory sample results for all waste materials. 6. Copies of manifests for all waste materials disposed of off-site. 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION A. In accordance with Article 2 of the General Conditions, provide a competent supervisory representative with full authority to act for the Contractor at the site. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS UPSON HALL 466 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-2 LAB RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 B. If at any time operations under the representative’s supervision do not comply with this Section, or the representative is otherwise unsatisfactory to the Owner, replace, if requested by the Owner, said representative with another representative satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval. C. Remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. The Owner may request the removal of any employee who does not comply with these specifications. 1.5 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Limit and control the nature and extent of activities at all times to minimize the effects of noise and vibrations. Take adequate measures for keeping noise levels, as produced by construction related equipment, to safe and tolerable limits as set forth by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the New York State Industrial Code Guidelines and Ordinances and all City, Town and Local ordinances. Equip all construction equipment presenting a potential noise nuisance with noise-muffling devices adequate to meet these requirements 1.6 DUST CONTROL A. Take adequate measures for controlling dust produced by drilling, excavation, backfilling, loading, saw cutting or other means. The use of calcium chloride or petroleum-based materials for dust control is prohibited. Dust control measures are required throughout the duration of construction. B. If, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor is not adequately controlling dust, the Owner will first notify the Contractor. If the Contractor does not take adequate actions necessary, the Owner may, at the Contractor’s expense, employ alternative means to control dust. C. Erect, maintain, and remove when appropriate barriers or other devices, including mechanical ventilation systems, as required by the conditions of the work for the protection of users of the project area, the protection of the work being done, or the containment of dust and debris. All such barriers or devices shall be provided in conformance with all applicable codes, laws, and regulations including OSHA. 1.7 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT A. Construction procedures observed by the Contractor, its subcontractors and other employees shall include protection of the environment, in accordance with all pertinent Cornell standards, policies, local laws, executive orders, ordinances, and federal and state regulations. Construction procedures that are prohibited in the undertaking of work associated with this Contract include, but are not limited to: 1. Dumping of spoil material or any liquid or solid pollutant into any storm or sanitary sewer, drainage way, stream sewer, any wetlands (as defined by federal and state regulations), any surface waters, or at unspecified locations. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS UPSON HALL 466 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-3 LAB RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 2. Indiscriminate, arbitrary, or capricious operation of equipment in any stream corridors, any wetlands, or any surface waters. 3. Pumping of any silt-laden water from trenches or other excavations into any storm sewers, sanitary sewers, drainage ways, wetlands, or surface waters. 4. Damaging vegetation beyond the extent necessary for construction of the facilities. 5. Disposal of trees, brush, and other debris in any location on University property, unless such areas are specifically identified on the drawing or in the specifications or specifically approved by the Owner’s site representative. 6. Permanent or unspecified alteration of the flow line of a stream. 7. Burning trash, project debris, or waste materials. B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent silt or waste of any kind from entering any drainage or waterways or downstream properties as a result of the Work. C. Runoff of potable water used for concrete curing or concrete truck or chute cleaning operations shall not be allowed to reach the storm water system or open water due to the levels of residual chlorine (New York State water quality standards, 6 NYCRR Part 703.5) and other potential contaminants. If necessary, obtain permission from the local sewer authority and collect and pump the runoff to the sanitary sewer. D. Limit the nature and extent of any activities that could result in the release or discharge of pollutants. Report any such release or discharge immediately to the Owner’s Representative and clean up spills immediately, as detailed in Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control Procedures. 1.8 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK A. Obtain approval from the Owner’s Representative prior to any temporary re-routing of piping and exhaust ductwork necessary for the completion of the Work. Submit re-routing plans to the Owner’s Representative in writing. The following shall require approval of the Owner: 1. Temporary storm, sanitary or water line connections. 2. Temporary exhaust ductwork connections where such connections may impact air emissions. B. Instruct all personnel to observe extreme caution when working in the vicinity of mechanical equipment and piping. Personnel shall not operate or tamper with any existing valves, switches, or other devices or equipment without prior approval by the Owner’s Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS UPSON HALL 466 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-4 LAB RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 1.9 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS A. Inform officers, employees, agents, contractors, subcontractors at every tier, and any other party which may come into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of its performance hereunder of the nature of such materials, and any health and safety or environmental risks associated therewith. B. Do not use hazardous or toxic materials in a manner that will violate Cornell University Policies or any state, federal, or municipal environmental health and safety regulations. In situations where the risks are unclear consult with Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) for guidance. C. Provide complete care and treatment for any injury sustained by any parties coming into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of Contractor’s performance or failure to perform hereunder. D. At the completion of project Contractor shall remove all unused chemical products and hazardous materials from campus. Transportation of these materials shall be in accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations. Request and receive written approval from EH&S prior to disposal of any on-site disposal. 1.10 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE A. Prior to start of work and first payment, Contractor shall prepare and submit “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” to the Owner’s Representative. The plan shall identify the waste transportation and treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) companies which will manage all waste material and any site(s) for disposal of the waste material. Contractor must use this form to document waste disposal methods and locations. B. The “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” form, together with definitions associated with the form waste descriptions. Forms may be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/sites/default/files/resourcefiles/FRM_CWMDP ContractorWasteMaterialDisposalPlan.pdf C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper cleanup, containment, storage and disposal of any hazardous material/chemical spill occurring during its work. For Cornell University owned hazardous waste EH&S will oversee, approve or effect the proper disposal. Title, risk of loss, and all other incidents of ownership to the Waste Material, shall vest in Contractor at the time Contractor or any transporter acting on its behalf takes physical possession of Waste Material. Complete and maintain full records of the chain of custody and control, including certificates of disposal or destruction, of all Waste Materials loaded, transported and/or disposed of. Deliver all such records to the Owner in accordance with applicable laws and regulations and any instructions from the Owner in a timely manner and in any event prior to final payment(s) under this Contract. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS UPSON HALL 466 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-5 LAB RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 43*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL UPSON HALL 466 LAB SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SPILL PREVENTION A. In order to minimize the potential for discharge to the environment of oil, petroleum, or hazardous substances on site, the following requirements shall apply to all projects: 1. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored or relocated temporarily on site during the construction process shall be stored in such a manner as to provide protection from vehicular damage and to provide containment of leaks or spills. Horizontal diked oil storage tanks, temporary berms or barriers, or similar methods shall be employed as appropriate at each site. 2. Any on-site filling or dispensing activities shall occur within an area in which a temporary berm, boom, or similar containment barrier has been placed to prevent the inadvertent discharge to the environment of harmful quantities of any products. 3. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored on site shall be located in such a manner as to minimize the potential of damage from construction operations or vehicles, away from drainage ways and environmentally sensitive areas, and in accordance with all fire and safety codes. B. Remove immediately from the site any storage, dispensing, or operating equipment that is leaking oil or hazardous substances or is in anyway unsuitable for the safe storage of such materials. 1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES All Contractor personnel working at the project site shall be knowledgeable of the potential health and safety concerns associated with petroleum and other hazardous substances that could potentially be released at the project site. Following are a list of activities that should be conducted by the Contractor in the event of an oil/petroleum spill or the release of any other hazardous substance. In the event of a large quantity spill that would require cleanup procedures that are beyond the means of the Contractor, an emergency spill cleanup contractor shall be hired by the Contractor. In the event the Contractor has the personnel necessary to clean up the spill, the following procedures shall be followed: A. Personnel discovering/responding to a spill shall: 1. Identify and locate the source of the spill. If unsafe conditions exist, leave the area, inform nearby personnel, notify the site supervisor, and initiate spill reporting (Section 1. 3). CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL UPSON HALL 466 LAB SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 2. Limit the discharge of product, if safely possible, by: (1) diverting discharge to a containment area; (2) creating temporary dikes with soils or other available materials; and (3) utilizing sorbent materials. If secondary containment is present, verify that valves and drains are closed prior to diverting the product to this area. 3. The individual discovering a spill shall initiate containment procedures to prevent material from reaching a potential migratory route, through implementation of the following actions, or any other methods necessary. Methods employed shall not compromise worker safety. a. Stop the spill at once (if possible). b. Extinguish sources of ignition (e.g., flames, sparks, hot surfaces, cigarettes, etc.). c. Clear personnel from the spill location and rope off the area. d. Utilize available spill control equipment in an effort to ensure that fires, explosions, and releases do not occur, recur, or spread. e. Use sorbent materials to control the spill at the source. f. Construct a temporary containment dike of sorbent materials, cinder blocks, bricks, or other suitable materials to help contain the spill. g. Attempt to identify the character, exact source, amount, and area of the released materials. Identification of the spilled material should be made as soon as possible so that the appropriate cleanup procedure can be identified. h. Assess possible hazards to human health or the environment as a result of the release, fire, or explosion. i. If spill response measures involve the temporary cessation of any operations, the Contractor shall monitor the affected equipment for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure buildup; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in valves, pipes, or other equipment. B. Spill Cleanup: 1. Following containment of the spill, the following spill cleanup procedures shall be initiated. a. Use proper waste containers. b. Remove bulk liquid by using vacuum, pump, sorbents, or shovel and place material in properly labeled waste container. Be sure not to collect incompatible or reactive substances in the same container. c. Cleanup materials not reclaimed on-site shall be disposed of in accordance with all applicable state and federal regulations. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL UPSON HALL 466 LAB SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 d. Apply sorbent materials to pick up remaining liquid after bulk liquid has been removed. The Contractor shall not walk over spilled material. Absorbed material shall be picked up with a shovel and placed in a separate waste container, and shall not be mixed with bulk liquid. e. Clean spill control equipment and containers. Replace equipment in its proper location. Restock or reorder any sorbents used to clean up the spill. f. Carefully wash spilled product from skin and clothing using soap. Change clothes, if necessary, to avoid further contact with product. g. Disposal of all spilled product shall be made off-site, and shall be arranged through the Contractor. h. A Spill Report shall be completed, including a description of the event. A sample Spill Documentation Form is provided in Appendix B. C. Fire or Explosion: 1. In the event of a fire or explosion at the site, the Contractor shall: a. Verify that the local fire department and the appropriate response personnel (e.g., ambulance, police) have been notified. b. Report to the scene, if safe to do so, and evaluate the situation (e.g., spill character, source, etc.). Coordinate, as necessary, with other appropriate site and emergency personnel. c. Ensure that people are cleared from the area. d. Ensure that fires are safely extinguished (if possible), valves closed, and other immediate actions necessary to mitigate the emergency, if safe to do so. e. Initiate responsible measures necessary to prevent subsequent fires, explosions, or releases from occurring or spreading to other areas of the site. These measures include stopping processes or operations, collecting and containing released oil, or removing and isolating containers. f. Take appropriate action to monitor for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure build-ups; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in pipes, valves, or other equipment. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL UPSON HALL 466 LAB SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-4 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION In the event of a spill CALL CORNELL POLICE AT 255-1111 who will notify the appropriate departments within the university and coordinate with the contractor for external reporting, if required. The contractor shall be responsible for the initiation of spill reporting and documentation procedures. All petroleum spills must be reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline at 1-800- 457-7362, less than two hours following discovery. Notification must be made to Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), 607.255.8200, within 24 hours of reporting the release. The Contractor will be expected to provide EH&S with the DEC issued spill number. Any petroleum spill must be reported to NYSDEC unless ALL of the following criteria apply: TABLE 1 CRITERIA TO EXEMPT SPILL REPORTING CRITERIA DESCRIPTION Quantity The spill must be known to be less than 5 gallons. Containment The spill must be contained on an impervious surface or within an impervious structure, such that it cannot enter the environment. Control The spill must be under control and not reach a drain or leave the impervious surface. Cleanup The spill must be cleaned-up within two hours of occurrence. Environment The spill must not have already entered into the soil or groundwater or onto surface water. A release of a “reportable quantity”1 or unknown amount of a hazardous substance must also be immediately reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline. Spills of reportable quantities of chemicals or “harmful quantities”2 of oil to navigable waters must be reported to the federal National Response Center, 1-800-424-8802. Spill Reporting Information: When making a telephone report, the caller should be prepared to provide the following information, if possible: 1. The date and time of the spill or release. 2. The identity or chemical name of the material released or spilled, including an indication of whether the material is defined as an extremely hazardous substance. 3. An estimate of the quantity of material released or spilled into the environment and the approximate duration of the event. 4. The exact location of the spill, including the name(s) of the waters involved or threatened, and/or other medium or media affected by the release or spill. 5. The source of the release or spill. 6. The name, address, and telephone number of the party in charge of, or responsible for, the facility or activity associated with the release or spill. 7. The extent of the actual and potential water pollution. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL UPSON HALL 466 LAB SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-5 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 8. The name and telephone number of the person in charge of operations at the spill site. 9. The steps being taken or proposed to contain and cleanup the released or spilled material and any precautions taken to minimize impacts, including evacuation. 10. The extent of injuries, if any. 11. Any known or anticipated acute or chronic health risks associated with the emergency, and information regarding necessary medical attention for exposed individuals. 12. Assistance required, if any. If the release of a hazardous substance or oil occurs in an amount which exceeds a reportable quantity (RQ) as defined in 40 CFR Part 110, 40 CFR Part 117, 40 CFR Part 302, or 6 NYCRR Part 597, then the Contractor shall do the following: 1. Call to the National Response Center shall be made by the person in charge of the site. The applicable phone numbers are 1-800-424-8802 or 1-202-426-2675. 2. Within 14 days of the release, submit a written description of the release. The description should include: (1) a description of the release, (2) the type of material released, (3) estimated amount of the spill; (4) the date of the release, (5) an explanation of why the release occurred; and (6) a description of the measures to be implemented to prevent and control future releases. (1)Reportable Quantity: A Reportable Quantity is the quantity of a hazardous substance or oil that triggers reporting requirements under the Comprehensive Emergency Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) (USEPA, September 1992). While the Contractor is legally responsible for knowing the risks of materials that are part of construction, members of the owner’s spill response team have access to information that may help identify these quantities with you. (2)Harmful Quantity: A Harmful Quantity of oil includes discharges that violate applicable water quality standards; cause a film, sheen, or discoloration on a water surface or adjoining shoreline; or cause a sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the water surface or shoreline (40 CFR 110.3). 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 44*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 45 Ithaca, New York REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE 01 35 45-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 35 45 REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall be responsible and accountable for compliance with the EPA Clean Air Act (CAA) Section 608, 40 CFR Part 82 and any state or local codes for all refrigerant-related work. In general, an EPA-certified technician shall perform any activity involving refrigerant-containing equipment that includes: (1) attaching and detaching hoses and gauges to and from refrigerant containing equipment to measure pressure; (2) adding refrigerant to, or removing refrigerant from equipment; or (3) any other activity that violates the integrity of a refrigerant containing circuit (for example any activity where a refrigerant containing circuit is ‘opened’ in any manner). B. Refrigerant and oil shall be recovered from any equipment that does not meet the definition of a small appliance in 40CFR Part 82 Subpart F before removal and subsequent disposal. Small appliances (as defined in 40CFR Part 82 Subpart F) may be removed from the site with the charge (refrigerant) intact, provided it is properly labeled and handled in such a manner so as to prevent damage to coils. Small Appliances are defined in 40CFR Part 82 Subpart F as: Any appliance that is fully manufactured, charged, and hermetically sealed in a factory with five (5) pounds or less of a Class I or Class II substance used as a refrigerant, including, but not limited to, refrigerators and freezers (designed for home, commercial, or consumer use), medical or industrial research refrigeration equipment, room air conditioners (including window air conditioners and packaged terminal air heat pumps), dehumidifiers, under-thecounter ice makers, vending machines, and drinking water coolers. C. All new equipment installed shall utilize non-CFC refrigerants. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to starting construction, demolition, or service work Contractor shall provide to Owner a list of all service technicians with EPA certification numbers and level of certification. (Copies of EPA certification cards are acceptable for those who will be working on the site.) 1.3 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Contractor shall provide to the Owners Representative all Service Invoices (or equivalent service documentation acceptable to owner) for all work performed by EPA- certified Technicians. Service Invoices (or equivalent documentation) shall include the following information at a minimum for each piece of refrigerant containing equipment serviced: • Date of Service • Name of EPA-Certified Technician • Technicians Certification Level • Type of Equipment Serviced • Equipment Manufacture CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 45 Ithaca, New York REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE 01 35 45-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 • Equipment Model and Serial Number • Description of Service Performed • Date Leak Discovered (if applicable) • Date Leak Repaired (if applicable) • Date Follow-Up Leak Test Performed (if applicable) • Type of Refrigerant • Normal System Full Charge (in pounds) • Amount of Initial Refrigerant Charge Recovered During Service • Amount of Recovered Refrigerant Returned to System • Type of Additional Refrigerant Added to System • Amount of Additional Refrigerant Charged to System • System Charge at End of Service B. Contractor shall provide to Cornell’s Environmental Health and Safety Office and IPP Facilities Management Administration Preventative Maintenance Group, via the Owner’s Representative, complete equipment documentation including: make, model number, serial number, refrigerant type and full refrigerant charge (quantity), equipment ID tag number and location (room number) for all equipment installed that does not meet the definition of a small appliance (40CFR Part 82). C. Contractor shall provide Owners Representative a copy of complete manifests, invoices, or other documentation showing any refrigerant removed from the project by the contractor was disposed of appropriately or reclaimed by an EPA-certified reclaimer. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 LEAK TESTING A. All new equipment not meeting the definition of a small appliance, including packaged equipment, factory charged, field charged, split systems or field-constructed systems with field-installed refrigerant piping shall be leak tested prior to or during startup. Leak testing shall utilize appropriate electronic leak-testing equipment. B. Leak testing shall be conducted by an EPA-certified technician. The contractor shall provide written verification of the leak testing and results. C. If a leak is detected, the following procedure shall be followed: 1. Notify the Owner’s Site Representative (who will notify the Refrigerant Compliance Coordinator). 2. Document the leak. 3. Repair the leak. 4. Document the procedures followed. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 45 Ithaca, New York REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFRIGERANT COMPLIANCE 01 35 45-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 5. Leak test to verify the leak was repaired. 6. Schedule and provide a 30-day follow-up verification leak test witnessed by a designated HVAC technician. 7. Document follow-up leak testing. 8. Repeat the above process if follow-up leak is detected. 3.2 DEMOLITION PROCEDURE FOR EQUIPMENT REMOVED BY CONTRACTOR A. The Contractor, in contractor-provided refrigerant recovery cylinders, shall take ownership of the recovered refrigerant and transport off site to a proper disposal company or certified reclaimer. B. Service Invoices, as described in RECORD DOCUMENTS, shall be provided. C. The Contractor technician shall tag the unit that the refrigerant was removed. D. Once an EPA-certified technician has removed the refrigerant and tagged the unit, a noncertified person may perform the remainder of the demolition. ***END OF SECTION 01 35 45*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS UPSON HALL 466 LAB REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES A. The Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the execution of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. Such permits shall include but are not limited to building, electrical, plumbing, backflow prevention, dig safe, fill, street use and building demolition. 1. City of Ithaca building permit applications shall be presented for review at the regularly scheduled Owner’s meeting with the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). B. For any projects which include demolition of a structure or load-bearing elements of a structure, the Contractor is required to complete a “Notification of Demolition and Renovation” and provide this notification to the United State Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in advance of the work as specified in 40 CFR 61.145. The Contractor shall also provide a copy of this notification to the Owner’s Representative prior to any demolition. C. All Construction / Building / Hot Work and Occupancy permits shall be issued and maintained through the City of Ithaca. D. Ithaca Fire Department Permitting: 1. A permit is required from the Ithaca Fire Department to install or substantially repair a fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system as such as defined under the Uniform Code of New York State. 2. If the scope of work is classified under the Existing Building Code of NYS as Alteration –Level 1; Alteration – Level 2; Alteration – Level 3; or Addition; a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department is required for all work affecting the fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system for that building. A building permit is also required for this type of work. 3. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code of NYS does not require a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department. 1.2 INSPECTIONS A. Apply for and obtain all required inspections, pay all fees and charges for same, include all service charges, pavement cuts and repairs. 1.3 COMPLIANCE A. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS UPSON HALL 466 LAB REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors shall comply with all regulations governing conduct, access to the premises, operation of equipment and systems, and conduct while in or near the premises and shall perform the Work in such a manner as not to unreasonably interrupt or interfere with the conduct of business of the Owner. B. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor agrees to provide the Owner with a summary of municipal permit fees paid. This shall include the name of the permits secured, the permit fees paid by the Contractor and a copy of the permit. If no permit fees were required, the Contractor shall so state, in writing, upon completion of the project. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 41 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFERENCES 01 42 00-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Notes or instructions shown on any one Drawing, apply where applicable, to all other Drawings. B. All references to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Specification Sections and on the Drawings shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition, amendment and/or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these Contract Documents. C. Install All Work in Compliance with: 1. NYS Uniform Code a. International Building Code b. International Residential Code c. International Existing Building Code d. International Fire Code e. International Plumbing Code f. International Mechanical Code g. International Fuel Gas Code h. International Property Maintenance Code i. Uniform Code Supplement 2. NYS Energy Code a. International Energy Conservation Code b. ASHRAE 90.1 c. Energy Code Supplement 3. National Electric Code CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFERENCES 01 42 00-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 5. Life Safety Code NFPA 101. 6. All local ordinances 7. Plans and Specifications in excess of code requirements and not contrary to same. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. “General”: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. “Contract Documents”: The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor, General Conditions, General Requirements, Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued before execution of the Agreement, other documents listed in the Agreement, and modifications issued after execution of the Agreement. C. “The Contract”: The Contract Documents form the Contract for construction and represent the entire integrated Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. D. “The Work”: The work comprises the completed construction required by the Contract Documents and includes all labor necessary to produce such construction and all materials and equipment incorporated in such construction. E. “Owner”: Cornell University a New York corporation. F. “Architect/Engineer”: The Architect or Engineer is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture and/or engineering in the state of New York, identified as such in the Owner Contractor Agreement, and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The terms Architect and/or Engineer mean the Architect and/or his authorized representative. G. “Contractor”: The Contractor, person, firm, or corporation with whom the Construction Agreement contract is made by Owner. H. “Subcontractor”: A person, firm, or corporation, supplying labor and/or materials for work at site of the project for and under separate contract or agreement with Contractor. I. “As Approved” or “Approved”: Architect’s or Owner’s approval. J. “As Directed”: Owner’s direction or instruction. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." K. “Indicated”: Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as “indicated.” CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFERENCES 01 42 00-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 L. “Regulations”: Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. M. “Furnish”: Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. N. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. O. “Reinstall”. To place back into a former position. P. “Replace”. Provide a substitute for. Q. “Provide”: Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. R. “Concealed’: Work installed in pipe shafts, chases or recesses, behind furred walls, above ceilings, either permanent or removable. S. “Exposed”: All capital Work not identified as concealed. T. “Project Site”: Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. U. “As-Built Documents”: Drawings and other records that are maintained by the Contractor to record all conditions which exist when the building construction is completed. This includes both the elements of the project itself and existing elements that are encountered during the course of project construction. V. “Record Drawings”: Shows construction changes in the project and the final location of all services, lines, outlets, and connections including underground and concealed items. The “record” drawings shall be compiled by the Architect based on the working as-built drawings and revised in accordance with the marked up drawings submitted by the Contractor. W. “Shop Drawings”: Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, charts, brochures, and other data that are prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor, for some portion of the work. X. “Samples”: Physical examples furnished to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which the work will be judged. Y. “General Conditions”: The standardized contractual provisions describing the responsibilities, rights and relationships of the Owner and Contractor under the construction contract. Z. “Contract Limit Lines”: A limit line or perimeter line established on the drawings or elsewhere in the contract documents defining the boundaries of the site available to the contractor for construction purposes. AA. "to do", "provide", "furnish", "install", etc., in these Specifications or on Drawings are directions given to the Contractor; CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFERENCES 01 42 00-4 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS A. Cornell University and the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division have entered into an agreement. The local unions which are members of the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division are as follows: Local #241 - International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers Local #267 - United Association of Plumbers and Steamfitters Local #281 - United Brotherhood of Carpenters Local #3NY - International Union of Bricklayers and Allied Craftworkers Local #178 - International Union of Painters and Allied Trades Local #112 - International Brotherhood of Sheetmetal Workers Local #785 - Laborers International Union of North America The definition of craft maintenance as applied to this agreement shall be as follows: All work associated with the demolition, repair, replacement, improvement to or construction of equipment, buildings, structures, utilities, and/or system or components thereof. Craft maintenance for trades assistants shall be limited to work assigned to individuals employed as building trade laborers and which directly assists the craft work performed by other employees covered by this agreement; the Employer is free to assign such work; provided, however, such assignment does not fall within the craft performed by other employees covered by this agreement. 1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the organizations responsible for the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFERENCES 01 42 00-5 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 www.nibs.org UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov 1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials www.transportation.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFERENCES 01 42 00-6 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888 www.airbarrier.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700 (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFERENCES 01 42 00-7 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (505) 522-1437 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 Air-Conditioning Engineers (404) 636-8400 www.ashrae.org ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFERENCES 01 42 00-8 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSI Cast Stone Institute (770) 972-3011 www.caststone.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFERENCES 01 42 00-9 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 www.ejdc.org EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 www.esda.org FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 www.fmglobal.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-inst itute.org HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFERENCES 01 42 00-10 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IBR Institute of Boiler & Radiation Manufacturers ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561 www.iest.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851 www.intertek.com (713) 407-3500 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFERENCES 01 42 00-11 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org (804) 314-8955 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFERENCES 01 42 00-12 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA International Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 www.nofma.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFERENCES 01 42 00-13 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters (212) 227-3700 www.nybfu.org PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522 www.landcarenetwork.org PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 www.post-tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580 www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662 SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 SBI Steel Boiler Institute SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFERENCES 01 42 00-14 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 www.siaonline.org SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 www.smacentral.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFERENCES 01 42 00-15 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700 Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (847) 649-5555 www.turfgrasssod.org TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 www.tileroofing.org UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization (800) 962-7962 www.ufpo.org (800) 962-7811 UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422 www.usgbc.org WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 www.wdma.com WI Woodwork Institute (916) 372-9943 www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFERENCES 01 42 00-16 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 www.iapmo.org ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-4533 ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543 NEC National Electric Code C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES UPSON HALL 466 LAB REFERENCES 01 42 00-17 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 www.nas.edu/trb USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 42 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL UPSON HALL 466 LAB QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective Contractor Quality Control (CQC) program and perform sufficient inspections and tests of all items of work, including those of Subcontractors, to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Include surveillance and tests specified in the technical sections of the Specifications. Furnish appropriate facilities, instruments, and testing devices required for performance of the quality control function. Controls must be adequate to cover construction operations and be keyed to the construction sequence. Construction shall not begin until the Owner has approved the CQC program. 1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION A. Include a control system for the following phases of inspection: 1. Pre-Installation Meeting. For all sections where pre-installations are defined, the Contractor shall arrange for a pre-installation meeting. When practical, pre-installation meetings shall be scheduled to take place on the same day as regularly schedule progress meetings. The Contractor shall make available, during this meeting, all approved submittals and products. a. Agenda to include the following: i. Appointment ii. Appointment of official representatives of participants in the Project. iii. Review of existing conditions and affected work, and testing thereof as required. iv. Review of installation procedures and requirements. v. Review of environmental and site condition requirements. vi. Schedule of the applicable portions of the Work. vii. Schedule of submission of samples, color chips, and items for Owners consideration. viii. Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences, Section 01500. ix. Requirements for notification for reviews. Allow a minimum of 48 hour notice to Architect for review of the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL UPSON HALL 466 LAB QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 x. Requirements for inspections and tests, as applicable. Schedule and undertake inspections and tests in accordance with Section 01410. xi. Delivery schedule of specified equipment. xii. Special safety requirements and procedures. b. The following minimum personnel shall be at the meeting: i. Project Manager. ii. Project Field Supervisor iii. Subcontractor iv. Architect’s Representative v. Owner’s Representative vi. Commissioning Agent, when applicable vii. Testing Agency, when applicable 2. Preparatory Inspection. Perform this inspection prior to beginning work on any definable feature of work. Include a review of contract requirements with the supervisors directly responsible for the performance of the work; check to assure that materials, products, and equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved; check to assure that provisions have been made for required control testing; examine the work area to ascertain that preliminary work has been completed; physically examine materials and equipment to assure that they conform to shop drawings and data and that the materials and equipment are on hand. 3. Initial Inspection. Perform this inspection as soon as work commences on a representative portion of a particular feature of workmanship review control testing for compliance with contract requirements. 4. Follow-up Inspections. Perform these inspections on a regular basis to assure continuing compliance with contract requirements until completion of that particular work. 1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS A. Perform factory quality control inspections for items fabricated or assembled off-site as opposed to "off-the-shelf" items. The CQC Representative at the fabricating plant shall be responsible for release of the fabricated items for shipment to the job site. The CQC Representative at the job site shall receive the item and note any damage incurred during shipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining the item in good condition throughout the period of on-site and during erection or installation. Although any item found to be faulty may be rejected before its use, final acceptance of an item by the Owner is based on its satisfactory incorporation into the work and acceptance of the completed project. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL UPSON HALL 466 LAB QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 1.4 TESTING A. The Owner may engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to confirm that an installed item or element of work conforms to the Specification and workmanship requirements. 1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The Owner shall designate a Representative to monitor the progress and execution of the work. The Representative shall have the authority to call for test samples, to approve or to reject work performed and to stop work in progress, if, in its opinion, the work is not in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Representative shall not be authorized to make changes or interpretations of the Contract Documents. 1. The Contractor shall maintain a project Deficiency/Issues Log in e-Builder to track nonconforming materials or sub-standard workmanship identified by Owner’s Representative. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 45 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS UPSON HALL 466 LAB TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain all temporary facilities and services of every kind, as required by the Contractor and by its subcontractors for their performance of the Work and compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall remove such facilities and complete such services upon the completion of all other work, or as Cornell University may direct. B. The Contractor shall obtain all required permits and approvals for and shall provide, construct, or install, as well as operate, maintain, service and remove temporary facilities and services. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Choice of materials, as suitable for the accomplishment of the intended purpose, is the Contractor’s option. B. Materials may be new or used, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes, standards and specifications. 2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES A. Provide first aid equipment and supplies, with qualified personnel continuously available to render first aid at the site. B. Provide a sign, posted at the telephone, listing the telephone numbers for emergency medical services: Physicians, ambulance services and hospitals. 2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Provide a fire protection and prevention program for employees and personnel at the site. Any fire watches as a result of construction operations are the responsibility of the Contractor. Comply with NFPA 241. Develop, manage, and supervise an overall fire-prevention and protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS UPSON HALL 466 LAB TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 1. Impairments “Fire Code of NYS Section 901.7”. Impairment; “the removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage in a building.” There are two different levels of impairments a. Partial Impairment. The removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage via control valve in the immediate area of where work is to be performed. - Basic Impairment Notification will be sent to Local Authority Having Jurisdiction and FM Global. - No fire watch will be required in most cases. b. Full System Impairment. The complete removal of a fire alarm “system” or sprinkler “system”. Impairment of both the fire alarm system and sprinkler system at the same time is not allowed. - Full System Impairment Notification will be sent to local Authority Having Jurisdiction, FM Global, Ithaca Fire Department Officers, Building Manager, Maintenance Manager, and Customer Service. - Fire Watch will be required and will need the Fire Watch Person’s name and contact information. Cornell EH&S does not perform the fire watch, it is the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Equipment: 1. Provide and maintain fire extinguishing equipment ready for instant use at all areas of the Project and at specific areas of critical fire hazard. 2. Hand extinguishers of the types and sizes recommended by the National Board of Fire Underwriters to control fires from particular hazards. 3. Construction period use of permanent fire protection system. 4. Water hoses connected to an adequate water pressure and supply system to reach each area or level of construction upon building enclosure or heating of the building. 5. Maintain existing standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Provide additional temporary hoses where required to comply with requirements. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. Provide hoses of sufficient length to protect construction areas. 6. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, siamese connections, standpipes, temporary fire-protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. 7. Where existing or temporary fire protection services are being replaced with new fire protection services, do not remove or impair existing or temporary services until new services are placed into operation and use. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS UPSON HALL 466 LAB TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 8. At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fireprotection facility and systems, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. Protect and maintain permanent fire protection system. Repair or replace any components damaged during construction. C. Enforce fire-safety discipline: 1. Store combustible and volatile materials in an isolated, protected location. 2. Avoid accumulations of flammable debris and waste in or about the Project. 3. Prohibit smoking in the vicinity of hazardous conditions. 4. There is NO SMOKING allowed on construction sites located in any occupied building. Smoking is prohibited in all Cornell University buildings. 5. Closely supervise welding and torch-cutting operations in the vicinity of combustible materials and volatile conditions. 6. Supervise locations and operations of portable heating units and fuel. D. Maintain fire extinguishing equipment in working condition, with current inspection certificate attached to each extinguisher. E. Welding or burning operations shall be conducted under a Hot Work Permit issued in accordance with Section 01 41 00. Where such work is permitted, the Contractor shall provide an approved fire extinguisher in good operating condition within easy reach of the operating personnel. In each instance, obtain prior approval of Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety. F. Advise Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety of any items affecting Life Safety, e.g., road blockages, exit closing, etc. 2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide construction aids and equipment required to assure safety for personnel and to facilitate the execution of the Work; Scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes, fall protection, harness, tie-off points, and other such equipment. B. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings, for use by construction personnel. C. Maintain all equipment in a safe condition. 2.5 SUPPORTS A. The Contractor shall include cost of all materials and labor necessary to provide all supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, etc. to properly support the Contract Work. All supports, etc. shall meet the approval of the Architect. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS UPSON HALL 466 LAB TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-4 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 B. Any and all supports that are of “custom” fabrication or installation shall be designed by the Contractor’s NYS licensed PE with stamped & signed shop drawings and calculations provided for same. 2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure for building exterior, maintain in-place until installation of permanent enclosures. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure of exterior walls as work progresses for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities, and as necessary to provide acceptable working conditions, provide weather protection for interior materials, provide weather protection for occupied areas, allow for effective temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. 1. Provide temporary exterior doors with self-closing hardware and padlocks or locksets. 2. Other enclosures shall be removable as necessary for work and for handling of materials. 3. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. 4. Coordinate enclosure with ventilation requirements, material drying or curing requirements, and specified environmental limitations to avoid dangerous or detrimental conditions and effects. B. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from areas of the existing building occupied by Owner; to prevent penetration of dust or moisture into occupied areas, to prevent damage to existing equipment, and to protect Owner's employees and operations from construction work. 1. Temporary partition and ceiling enclosures: Framing and sheet materials which comply with structural and fire rating requirements of applicable codes and standards. a. Close joints between sheet materials, and seal edges and intersections with existing surfaces, to prevent penetration of dust or moisture. b. In locations where fire protection is required, paint both sides of partitions and ceilings with fire-retardant paint as required by local fire regulations. 2. Do not remove existing exterior enclosure systems until new exterior enclosure systems are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing exterior enclosure systems as soon as possible. Immediately after completing removal, install new exterior enclosure systems and complete installation as soon as possible. 3. Do not remove existing HVAC systems connected to louvers at existing exterior enclosure systems until new HVAC systems and louvers at exterior enclosure systems are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing HVAC systems and louvers as soon as possible. Immediately after completing removal, install new HVAC systems and new louvers and complete installation as soon as possible. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS UPSON HALL 466 LAB TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-5 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 2.7 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION A. Provide guardrails, barricades, fences, footways, tunnels and other devices necessary to protect all personnel, employees, and the public, against hazards on, adjacent to or accessing the construction site. 1. Provide signs, warning lights, signals, flags and illumination as necessary to alert persons to hazards and to provide safe, adequate visibility in areas of hazards. 2. Closed sidewalks need to be indicated with OSHA-approved signs, as well as, proper barricades. 3. Provide flag personnel as necessary to guide vehicles, protect personnel, public and employees. 2.8 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS A. Provide adequate temporary roads and walks to achieve all-weather access into the site from public thoroughfares, and within and adjacent to the site as necessary to provide uninterrupted access to field offices, work and storage areas. B. Grade and provide drainage facilities to assure runoff of rainwater and to avoid blockage of flow from adjacent areas. C. During dry weather wet down temporary unpaved areas when necessary to prevent blowing dust. 2.9 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. No Contractor signs to be displayed at the project site, unless authorized by the Owner. 2.10 SECURITY A. The Contractor shall provide security services as required to protect the interests of the Owner. 2.11 FIELD OFFICES A. The Owner shall designate a space within the facility to serve as a field office for the use of the Contractor and Owner. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Consult with Owner, review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and temporary facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be affected by execution of the work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS UPSON HALL 466 LAB TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-6 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 1. Designate the locations and extent of temporary construction, storage, and other temporary facilities and controls required for the expeditious accomplishment of the Work. 2. Allow space for use of the site by Owner and by other contractors, as required by Contract Documents. 3.2 GENERAL A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in sections of Division 02 through 40. B. Make work structurally, mechanically and electrically sound throughout. C. Install work in a neat and orderly manner. D. Maintain, clean, service and repair facilities to provide continuous usage, and to the quality specified for the original installation. E. Relocate facilities as required by progress of construction, by storage or work requirements, and to accommodate requirements of Owner and other contractors employed at the site. F. Keep the site, at all times during the progress of the Work, free from accumulation of waste matter or rubbish and shall confine its apparatus, materials and operations of its workers to the limits prescribed except as the latter may be extended with the approval of the Owner’s Representative. Cleaning of the structure or structures must be performed daily and removal of waste matter or rubbish must be performed at least once a week. G. Contractor shall at all times keep access road and public roads clean of mud and construction debris and maintain dust control to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3.3 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary structures, materials, equipment and services: 1. When construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction. 2. At completion of the Project. B. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Clean after removal. C. Restore existing or permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified, or to original condition. 1. Remove foundations and underground installations for temporary construction and utilities. 2. Grade the areas of the site affected by temporary installations to required elevations and slopes, and clean the area. ***END OF SECTION 01 50 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES UPSON HALL 466 LAB TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required by all trades for construction. Remove on completion of Work. B. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for temporary connections and distribution. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with National Electric Code, current edition. B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations and with utility company requirements. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER A. The Contractor shall have access to the Owner's water and electric power for constructing the Work. Temporary utility connections shall be made by the Contractor as close to its operations as possible as long as such connections do not over-load the capacity of the Owner's utilities or interfere with its customary utilization thereof. Utility access points shall be determined in cooperation with and acceptable to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the economic use of the Owner's Water and Power. The Owner will pay for the water and power consumed in the construction of the Work as long as economical usage of these utilities is maintained. The Owner reserves the right to meter and charge for the power and water consumed if in the opinion of the Owner the usage of these utilities is not economically conducted by the Contractor. In such an event, the Owner shall give three (3) days written notice to the Contractor of its intentions to meter and charge for temporary utilities used by the Contractor. C. All temporary power systems including wiring shall be removed by the Contractor when no longer required. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES UPSON HALL 466 LAB TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 D. The minimum temporary lighting to be provided is at the rate of fifty foot candles, is to be maintained in each room and changed as required when interior walls are being erected. The required temporary lighting must be maintained for twenty-four (24) hours a day and seven (7) days a week at all stair levels and in all corridors below ground; in any and all egress; in all other spaces temporary lighting is to be maintained only during working hours. All temporary wiring and equipment shall be in conformity with the National Electric Code. E. The minimum temporary outdoor security lighting to be provided is as follows: 1. Along the perimeter of the site fence, consisting of vandal-resistant light fixtures with HID lamps, located 150 foot center, mounted on the inside of the construction fence. 2. Lighting for temporary pedestrian paths and roadways, to provide a minimum of 0.1 foot-candle on the path of travel. F. Three-phase temporary power circuits shall be installed as required to operate construction equipment of the various trades and to install and test equipment such as pumps and elevators. The Contractor shall install and maintain temporary or permanent service for the permanently installed building equipment such as sump pumps, boilers, boiler controls, fans, pumps, so that such equipment may be operated when required and so ordered by the Owner's Representative for drainage or for temporary heat. G. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner or the Owner's Representative for approval a proposed schedule of all utility shutdowns and cutovers of all types which may be required in connection with the Work. Such schedule shall provide a minimum of four (4) weeks advance notice to the Owner prior to the time of the proposed shutdown and cutover. The Contractor shall be responsible for all charges relating to shutdowns. H. Discontinuance, Changes and Removal The Contractor shall: 1. Discontinue all temporary services required by the Contract when so directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. The discontinuance of any such temporary service prior to the completion of the Work shall not render the Owner liable for any additional cost entailed thereby. 2. Remove and relocate such temporary facilities as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, and shall restore the Site and the Work to a condition satisfactory to the Owner. 2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR A. Use of Existing Elevator 1. If the Contractor elects to use the existing elevator equipment, the Contractor shall: a. Provide adequate protection for such equipment and shall operate such equipment within a capacity not to exceed that allowed by law, rule or regulation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES UPSON HALL 466 LAB TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 b. Provide for the maintenance and cleaning of the elevator equipment as approved by the Owner's Representative. c. Prior to start of construction, accurately record the condition of the existing elevator. Promptly repair or replace items that are damaged as a result of Contractor’s use. Service calls that arise as a result of Contractor misuse will be charged to the Contractor. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use. d. Use only elevators designated by Owner’s Representative at dates and times designated by Owner’s Representative. Dates and times available for Contractor’s use shall be scheduled with, and at the convenience of, the Owner, and may vary during the course of the Project. e. Owner will not provide elevator operators or other monitoring of elevator use. f. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. g. Provide code compliant protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator maintenance contractor to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. h. Procure and coordinate the elevator maintenance contractor to gain access to the elevator shaft as required to complete the work 2.4 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION A. The Contractor shall furnish temporary heat as may be necessary for constructing the Work. B. The Contractor will be permitted to use the building's permanent heating system for temporary heat. Permission to use the building's permanent heating system shall in no way constitute the Owner's acceptance of that portion of the Work. C. When using the permanent building systems for space conditioning, provide a written maintenance plan for acceptance by the Owner’s Representative, prior to utilizing the equipment. Plan to address temporary filtering of air and water, sealing of open ducts, lubrication, operation outside of normal ranges, and controls/safeties. Return all equipment to its newly installed condition prior to acceptance testing. 1. If the Contractor elects to use the building’s permanent heating system for temporary heat, the Contractor shall provide filters with a minimum MERV of 8 at each returnair grille in system, maintain to keep them free of dust and debris, replace if necessary and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout. D. Any temporary system shall be removed when no longer required. E. During heating cycles the enclosures separating the interior building areas from outside shall be maintained closed to conserve heat energy. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES UPSON HALL 466 LAB TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-4 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 F. The Contractor shall provide for ventilation of all structures until Physical Completion of the Work and shall control such ventilation to avoid excessive moisture levels and rates of drying of construction materials, including but not limited to concrete and to plaster, and to prevent condensation on sensitive surfaces. The Contractor shall be responsible for any moisture intrusion that is detrimental to the Project. 2.5 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Site Superintendent or their Representative shall carry a cellular telephone at all times. B. Provide phone number to Cornell project representatives for communication during Work. 2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. The Owner shall designate sanitary facilities to be utilized by the Contractor during construction. B. Existing plumbing facilities must be maintained during the project’s duration and thoroughly cleaned at the project’s completion. The Contractor will be responsible for any damage the facilities incur during the project’s duration. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities. C. Restore existing and permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified, or to original, condition. ***END OF SECTION 01 51 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 23 Ithaca, New York HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION UPSON HALL 466 LAB HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION 01 51 23-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 51 23 HEAT DURING CONSTRUCTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall maintain existing or temporary building heating systems to accomplish the following: 1. Protect the existing facility and facility plumbing systems against damage due to cold temperatures. 2. Provide sufficient heat so that the Work can be accomplished in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Maintain construction schedules as required by the Contract. B. Include in the bid price an amount necessary to provide Construction Heat as required. C. Existing central steam systems may be used to the extent that they do not interfere with the safe and effective completion of Work. However, any modifications to existing systems shall be corrected prior to the conclusion of work. D. No natural gas is available to the facility for temporary heat. E. At the conclusion of the project the facility heating systems shall be returned to functional order as necessary to protect the building and facility plumbing systems. 1.2 RESPONSIBILITY A. The Contractor shall include in the bid the cost of the temporary heat. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairs to the facility necessitated by the failure to provide heat during any portion of the Work. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 51 23*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION UPSON HALL 466 LAB STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Receive, pile, store and handle all materials, equipment and other items incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work, including items furnished by the Owner in a careful and prudent manner and shall protect them against loss or damage from every source. B. Obscure from public view, in a manner acceptable to the Owner, staging and storage areas. 1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction space. C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. D. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installation. E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct and products are undamaged. F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage. 1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE A. Materials stored on the Site shall be neatly piled and protected, and shall be stored in a neat and orderly manner in locations that shall not interfere with the progress of the Work or with the daily functioning of the Institution. B. Materials subject to weather damage shall be protected against the weather by floored weatherproof temporary storage sheds. C. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION UPSON HALL 466 LAB STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 D. Storage piles and sheds shall be located within the area designated as the Staging Area. The Contractor shall work to insure that the condition of the staging area has no negative impact on the Campus, visually or otherwise; and that outside of that area. The Contractor has no impact at all on the Campus. E. Materials stored within the building shall be distributed in such a manner as to avoid overloading of the structural frame, and never shall be concentrated in such a manner as to exceed the equivalent of 50 pounds per square foot uniformly distributed loading. Stored materials shall be moved if they interfere with the progress of the work. F. Should it become necessary during the course of the Work to move stored materials or equipment, the Contractor, at the direction of the Owner or the Owner's Representative, shall move such materials or equipment. 1.4 CAMPUS SITE / PALM ROAD STORAGE A. All property including construction materials and equipment stored at the Palm Road or other Campus site, shall be stored at the Contractor’s sole risk. The Contractor is solely responsible for repair or replacement of property due to any cause of loss. Due to work at the Palm Road lot, staging space is limited and not guaranteed to be provided. If staging space is needed, a request should be submitted to the Project Manager. B. The Contractor agrees to hold Cornell harmless from any accident or injury occurring at Palm Road storage or other assigned Campus site associated with the Contractor’s storage. C. The Contractor understands that Cornell makes “no” warranty regarding any security at the Palm Road or other assigned Campus site. D. The Contractor agrees that it is solely responsible for any cleanup of any site contamination caused by the Contractor’s storage or storage operations and the Contractor agrees to pay for cleanup of any contamination and restore the site back to the same condition it was found. E. It shall be assumed that the Contractor is responsible for site contamination unless the Contractor has reported condition prior to moving storage materials and equipment onto the site. Each Contractor shall be responsible for their own general area whether defined formally or not but in cases where pollutants have traveled or are found in the public areas used by all contractors, the Contractor agrees as follows: 1. If it cannot be determined who is responsible for site contamination after an investigation, all contractors who could be responsible based upon location of the incident agree to share the expense of cleanup equally. F. No storage of hazardous materials or environmental contaminants is permitted at the Palm Road or any Campus site. All barrels must have labels affixed identifying contents. G. The Contractor will be responsible for securing and maintaining any Campus site area designated to them. All contractor trailers or storage containers located on Cornell Campus Property will need to file for a building permit with the Town of Ithaca. If the trailer/container is there longer than 180 days, the trailer/container will need to meet the Building Code requirements of a permanent structure. The trailer/container will need a means of egress that can be operated from the inside and a fire extinguisher. The contractor will also need to file for a demolition permit when the trailer/container is removed CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION UPSON HALL 466 LAB STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 H. Unoccupied storage containers not within the project fence shall be labeled in the Cornell standard. Signs customized for the project shall be ordered from Ithaca Plastics, Inc., 305 West Green Street, Ithaca, New York 14850, Phone - 607.272.8232, Fax - 607.277.2579, Email – db@ithacaplastics.com. 1.5 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide security personnel and adopt other security measures as may be necessary to adequately protect materials and equipment stored at the site. The Contractor shall be obligated to replace or pay for all materials and equipment including items furnished by the Owner which have been damaged or stolen prior to completion of the Work. B. Protection of Utilities 1. If during the course of the Project, it is necessary to work adjacent to existing utilities, pipelines, structures and equipment, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect existing facilities from damage. 2. Locations of utilities as shown on the Contract Documents are approximate only. The Contractor shall excavate or otherwise locate to verify existing utilities in advance of its operation. C. Protective Covering 1. All finished surfaces shall be protected by the Contractor as follows: a. Door and window sills and the jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways or through which material is handled, shall be cased and protected adequately against possible damage resulting from the conduct of the work of all trades. b. All surfaces shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of the building to the Owner. The Contractor shall, without extra compensation, replace all blocks, gypsum board, plaster, paint, tile, and all other surfaces, whether or not protected, which are damaged, and shall refinish (including painting as specified) to satisfaction of Owner. c. Tight wood sheathing shall be laid under any materials that are stored on finished concrete surfaces and planking must be laid before moving any materials over these finished areas. Wheelbarrows used over such areas shall have rubber tires on wheels. d. Contractor has the responsibility for protection of carpeting and all finish flooring during all phases of the work including after installation. e. All floors exposed to view as a floor finish shall be protected by overlaying with plywood in all areas subject to construction traffic within and without the building, special care shall be taken to protect all stair finish surfaces including but not limited to flooring, wood in-fill stairs, cabinetry, counters, equipment, etc. 2. HVAC ductwork shall be protected by the Contractor as follows to prevent introduction of contaminants: CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION UPSON HALL 466 LAB STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-4 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 a. Ductwork with interior lining shall be wrapped at the factory using plastic wrap to exclude moisture and contaminants. The wrapping shall not be removed until immediately prior to installation. b. Ductwork shall not be exposed to moisture or contaminants at any point in the manufacturing, shipping, storage or installation process. c. Ductwork shall not be staged or stored outside or otherwise exposed to the weather. d. Ductwork shall be transported only inside of covered vehicles. e. Once installed, ductwork shall be protected from contamination during the construction process. 1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION A. Protect installed products, including Owner-provided products, and control traffic in immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent operations. B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, corners, and jambs, sills, and soffits of openings in and adjacent to traffic areas. C. Cover walls and floors of elevator cabins, and jambs of cab doors, when elevators are used by construction personnel. D. Protect finish floors and stairs from dirt, wear, and damage: 1. Secure heavy sheet goods or similar protective materials in place, in areas subject to foot traffic. 2. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas subject to movement of heavy objects. 3. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas where storage of products will occur. E. Protect waterproofed and roofed surfaces: 1. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products. 2. When an activity is mandatory, obtain recommendations for protection of surfaces from manufacturer. Install protection and remove on completion of activity. Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas. F. Restrict traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscape areas. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 66 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING UPSON HALL 466 LAB CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, including excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work or to: 1. Make its several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 6. Repair or restore existing or new surfaces and finishes to match adjacent existing or new surfaces and finishes. B. Upon written instructions of the Owner’s Representative: 1. Uncover designated portions of Work for Architect's observation of covered work. 2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing beyond that specified. 3. Remove work to provide for the alteration of previously incorrectly installed work. 4. Patch work uncovered or removed. C. Do not damage or endanger any work by cutting or altering the Work or any part thereof. D. Do not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner except with the written consent of the Owner’s Representative. E. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure. F. Openings and Chases 1. Build openings, including but not limited to channels, chases and flues as required to complete the Work as set forth in the Contract. 2. After installation and completion of any work for which openings have been provided, build in, over, and around and finish all such openings as required to complete the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING UPSON HALL 466 LAB CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 3. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports required for the execution of the Work. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a written request to the Architect prior to executing any cutting, alteration or excavation which affects the work of the Owner, or which may affect the structural safety of any portion of the Project. Include: 1. Identification of the Project. 2. Description of the affected work. 3. The necessity for doing the cutting, alteration or excavation. 4. The effect on the work of the Owner’s property, or on the structural integrity of the Project. 5. Description of the proposed work: a. The scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. b. Contractor and trades who will execute the work. c. Products proposed to be used. d. The extent of refinishing to be done. 6. Alternatives to cutting, patching or excavation. 7. Designation of the responsibility for the cost of cutting and patching. 8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected. B. Should conditions of the work or the schedule indicate a change of products from the original installation, submit a request for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00 - Substitutions and Product Options. C. Submit a written notice to the Architect and the Owner designating the date and the time the work will be uncovered. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity for load-deflection ratio. 1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching structural elements, including but not limited to the following: a. Foundation construction b. Bearing and retaining walls CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING UPSON HALL 466 LAB CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 c. Structural concrete d. Structural steel and lintels e. Structural decking f. Miscellaneous structural metals g. Exterior wall back-up supports and anchoring systems h. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment supports i. Equipment supports B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operation life or safety. 1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems: a. Primary operational systems and equipment b. Air or smoke barriers c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers d. Membranes and flashings e. Fire protection systems f. Control systems g. Communication systems h. Electrical wiring systems i. Operating systems of special construction in MEP work C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Owner’s opinion, reduce the building’s aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction which was cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner at no expense to the Owner. D. Waterproofing and Water Tightness: Do not cut or alter waterproofed walls or floors or any structural members without written permission of the Owner. 1. Waterproofing and Roofing Membranes a. Employ qualified contractors to accomplish all required cutting, patching, or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING UPSON HALL 466 LAB CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-4 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 b. Before beginning cutting, patching or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes, obtain approval of all materials, methods and contractor to be used from the Owner and agency, or agencies, holding bond or guarantee/warranty in force for membrane. 2. Water Tightness a. The Contractor shall be responsible for water tightness of product, materials, and workmanship, including work specified to be watertight and inferred by general practice to be watertight. b. All floors (slabs), walls, roof, glazing, windows, doors, sleeves through foundation walls, flashings, and similar items shall be watertight. c. If details or materials shown or specified are felt not satisfactory to produce water tightness, the Contractor shall inform the Owner’s Representative before installation and submit proposed substitution or alternative method for review and approval. The Contractor shall execute approved change and make watertight at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 WARRANTIES A. Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with the Contract Documents for each product involved. B. Use materials identical to in-place or existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of in-place or existing materials, and will match visual appearance of inplace or existing materials. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during: 1. Cutting and patching. 2. Excavation and backfilling. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING UPSON HALL 466 LAB CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-5 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 B. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or performance of the work. C. Report unsatisfactory or dubious conditions to the Architect in writing; do not proceed with the work until the Architect has provided further instructions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide shoring, bracing and other support as necessary to assure the structural safety of that portion of the Work. B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage. C. Provide for vertical and lateral support required to protect adjacent buildings and properties. D. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work, including but not limited to pumping to maintain excavations free from water. E. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. F. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods which will assure safety, will be least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction, and will provide proper surfaces to receive new work. 1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a carbon saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Comply with the requirements of applicable MEP work where cutting and patching of services is required. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING UPSON HALL 466 LAB CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-6 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 3. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. b. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit. 4. When patching existing plaster finished walls and partitions, the Contractor shall utilize plaster trim, lath and other metal components to match the integrity of the existing system. All plaster finishes shall match existing finishes so as to provide a uniform visual appearance. 5. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 6. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an evenplane surface of uniform appearance. 7. Concrete Masonry Units: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new CMU units matching in-place units for type and size. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place CMU walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials. 8. Brick and Masonry: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new brick and masonry matching in-place brick and masonry units. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place brick and masonry walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING UPSON HALL 466 LAB CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-7 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 9. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather-tight condition. a. Existing Roofing: Comply with requirements of existing roofing manufacturer for cutting and patching existing roofing system. Provide flashing and trim, base sheets, base flashing, adhesives, insulation, blocking, substrate boards, accessories, and other required items to patch roofing at penetrations and roof-top mounted items. D. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. 1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will assure safety, will prevent settlement or damage to other work. F. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes. G. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. H. The Contractor shall replace, repair and patch all surfaces of the ground and of any structure disturbed by its operations and its Work which surfaces and structures are intended to remain even if such operations and work are outside the property lines. Such replacement, repair and patching shall be with like material and shall restore surfaces as they existed. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean area and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. ***END OF SECTION 01 73 29*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT UPSON HALL 466 LAB PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 INSPECTIONS A. Substantial Completion: 1. Within a minimum of five (5) days prior to substantial completion, when the Work has reached such a point of completion that the building or buildings, equipment and apparatus can be occupied and used for the purpose intended, the Contractor shall conduct a detailed inspection of the Work to ensure that all requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is complete and is acceptable. Contractor shall prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. 2. After receipt of the Contractor’s initial punch list, the Architect will make an inspection of the Work to determine that the Work is substantially complete and that requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is sufficiently complete and is acceptable for use. The Architect will submit a marked-up list of items to be completed and/or corrected, inclusive of the Contractor’s punch list. The Architect shall prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion, on the basis of an inspection, when the Architect has determined that the work is substantially complete. 3. A copy of the report of the inspection will be furnished to the Contractor as the inspection progresses so that the Contractor may proceed without delay with any part of the Work found to be incomplete or defective. 4. All work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation/Alteration Operating Permit shall be inspected by the Ithaca Fire Department, or if so delegated by the Ithaca Building Department. a. A member of the Ithaca Fire Department shall witness all acceptance or reacceptance testing of work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation Operating Permit. All testing and inspections shall be in compliance with the applicable NFPA codes as referenced by Section 906.1 of the Fire Code of NYS. b. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code does not require the Ithaca Fire Department to witness the testing of the affected systems. Systems that have been repaired must still be tested as required by the Fire Code of NYS and NFPA. c. The Ithaca Fire Department Shall Witness the Acceptance or Reacceptance Testing for the Following Conditions: - Testing of any new installation of a fire alarm, fire suppression, or fire detection system as required by the Fire Code of New York State. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT UPSON HALL 466 LAB PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 - Hydrostatic testing of sprinkler system where the modification affects more than twenty (20) sprinkler heads and the modified area can be isolated from the rest of the system - Installation or replacement of a fire pump or drive elements of the fire pump. - A Fire Alarm System with added or deleted components. - A Fire Alarm System where the wiring or control circuits have been modified. - A Fire Alarm System where the control unit (Fire Alarm Panel) has been replaced or the control unit software has been replaced. - A smoke control system where the master control unit, individual fan control unit, or fan drive unit has been replaced or modified - An alternative fire suppression system that has been replaced or the actuation elements have been modified. Except: fusible link replacement. - A modification or extension of the piping for a fire standpipe system where a hydrostatic test is required by NFPA 14. B. Final Acceptance: 1. When the items appearing on the report of inspection have been completed or corrected, the Contractor shall so advise the Architect. After receipt of this notification and Contractor’s certified list of completed items, the Owner's Representative will inform the Contractor of the date and time of final inspection. A copy of the report of the final inspection containing all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work will be furnished to the Contractor. 2. After receipt of notification of completion and all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work from the Contractor, the Architect will make an inspection to verify completion of the exception items appearing on the report of final inspection. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial punch list submittal at Substantial Completion. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor, listing by room or space number. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for individual exterior face elevations, ceilings, individual walls, floors, doors, roof levels, casework, equipment, and building systems. B. Contractor's Certified List of Completed Items: Final signed punch list submittal at Final Completion. C. Certificates of Release: Occupancy permits from authorities having jurisdiction. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT UPSON HALL 466 LAB PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP A. Upon completion of the work covered by the Contract the Contractor shall leave the completed Project ready for use and occupancy without the need of further cleaning of any kind and with all Work in new condition and in perfect order. In addition, upon completion of all Work the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the Work all plant, buildings, rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms and other materials belonging to him or used under its direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor and/or its surety shall be liable therefore. Final clean-up shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. All finished surfaces shall be swept, dusted, washed and polished. This includes cleaning of the Work of all finishing trades where needed, whether or not cleaning by such trades is included in their respective sections of the specifications. 2. Roofs, utility tunnels, manholes and pipe trenches and spaces between the new and existing Work shall be left thoroughly cleaned. 3. Finished flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Where the finish of floors has been marred or damaged in any space or area, the entire floor of that space or area shall be refinished as recommended by the manufacturers of the flooring. 5. All equipment shall be in an undamaged, bright, clean, polished and new appearing condition. 6. All new glass shall be washed and polished, both sides. The Contractor shall be responsible for all breakage of glass in the area of the Work from the commencement of its activities until the building is turned over to Owner. The Contractor shall replace all broken glass and deliver the entire building with all glazing intact and clean. 7. Provide new filters for all fan convectors after final cleaning. 8. Refer to exterior clean up. Remove paint and glazing compound from surfaces. B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by construction operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before construction operations began. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT UPSON HALL 466 LAB PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-4 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK A. Turn over to Owner's Representative the maintenance stock specified. Contractor shall obtain signed receipt from Owner's Representative for all maintenance stock. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 77 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY UPSON HALL 466 LAB FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 78 22 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY A. The Owner shall provide the Contractor with a list of Equipment Types to be inventoried and an Excel template. B. The Contractor shall populate the template (see Example Equipment List to be inventoried in Section 1.2). Once populated, the Contractor shall electronically return to the list to the Owner’s Representative. The initial data to be captured on each piece of equipment shall include: 1. Name of Product 2. Equipment Classification 3. Manufacturer 4. Model Number 5. Serial Number 6. Cost 7. Location (including Building and Room Number) 8. Acquisition Date (Date of Installation) C. The Owner shall from the Contractor provided data create a follow-up equipment Excel template that contains the MAXIMO ID for the equipment with all the name plate and specification fields for each type of equipment. This template shall then be returned to the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initial labeling of the equipment and its’ disconnects with the MAXIMO ID using an electronic label maker. ID labels shall be in close proximity to Equipment Identification information, visually locatable from the access point to the equipment and on the face of disconnects. E. The Contractor shall then populate the MAXIMO Equipment Specification Template with the equipment nameplate, specification information, and warranty information. The Contractor shall electronically submit the equipment data and any related documentation (i.e. - O&M manuals) to the Owner’s Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY UPSON HALL 466 LAB FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 F. EXAMPLE EQUIPMENT LIST • Building Equipment • AC Drive/VSD • Air Dryer • Backflow Preventor • Air Compressor • Building • Sprinkler • Control • Vacuum • Pump • Condensate • Glycol • CWC • HWC • Potable • Sanitary Sewer • Storm Sewer • Sump • Quality Water • Fuel • Fan • Exhaust • Supply • Return • Fume Hood • Furnace • Generator • Hot Water Heater • Heat Exchangers • Boiler • Tank • Unit Heater • Fan Coil • VAV Box • Transfer Switch • Motor • Pump • Fan • Lift/Levelers • Water Softener • Reverse Osmosis CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY UPSON HALL 466 LAB FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 22*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA UPSON HALL 466 LAB OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract. 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section, as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications and as necessary to operate the completed work. 2. Operations and maintenance data, in final format, shall be available to the Owner prior to substantial completion. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of equipment and systems. 1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. B. Submit a CD with electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system of complete manual in final form. 1. Format: a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11”. b. Text: Manufacturer's, scanned .pdf and/or neatly typewritten Word file. c. Drawings in electronic format - Drawings are required in PDF format. Drawings shall be in AutoCAD v14 or higher format. d. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, and major component parts of equipment. - Provide type description of product, and major component parts of equipment. - Provide indexed PDF bookmarks. - Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various documents. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA UPSON HALL 466 LAB OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 e. Cover: Identify each volume with title "OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". List: - Title of Project - Identity of separate structure as applicable. - Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. 1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. Table of contents, typewritten, for each volume, arranged in a systematic order. 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the volume. 3. List, with each product, the name, address and telephone number of: a. Subcontract or installer. b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. c. Identify the area of responsibility of each. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. B. Product Data: 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation. c. Delete reference to inapplicable information. C. Submittal Data: 1. Include a record copy of the final, approved product submittal. Record copy shall be a clean copy (free of notes from the design professional) which has been updated to reflect the “as-installed” system. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA UPSON HALL 466 LAB OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 D. Drawings: 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams. 2. Coordinate drawings with information on Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. 3. Do not use Record Documents as maintenance drawings. E. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. F. Original copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give: a. Proper procedures in the event of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds. 1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system. B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products: a. Catalog number, size, and composition. b. Color and texture designations. c. Information required for reordering special-manufactured products. d. Certification as to asbestos free 2. Instructions for care and maintenance: a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to the product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA UPSON HALL 466 LAB OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-4 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 C. Content, for moisture-protection and weather-exposed products: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Applicable standards b. Chemical composition c. Details of installation 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The respective sections of Specifications. 1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system. B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts. 2. Operating procedures: a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions. 3. Maintenance Procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble-shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Alignment, adjusting and checking. 4. Servicing and lubrication required: a. List of lubricants required. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA UPSON HALL 466 LAB OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-5 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 9. Each contractor's coordination drawings. a. As-installed color coded piping diagrams. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve. 11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate: 1. Description of system and component parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Circuit directories of panel boards: a. Electrical service. b. Controls. c. Communications. 3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams. 4. Operating procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA UPSON HALL 466 LAB OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-6 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 5. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble-shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Adjustment and checking. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. D. Additional requirements for operations and maintenance data: See the respective sections of Specifications and General Conditions. 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Submit through ePM system preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents thirty (30) calendar days after approved submittals. B. Submit completed data in final form twenty (20) calendar days prior the Acceptance Phase of the Project. C. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form prior to final acceptance. 1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspections or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment and systems: 1. Instruction time shall be sufficient to fully instruct all shifts of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. B. Operations and maintenance shall constitute the basis of instruction: 1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA UPSON HALL 466 LAB OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-7 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 C. Submit typewritten statement, signed by each of Owner's Representatives who have been instructed, describing: 1. Method of Instruction. 2. Equipment and Systems Operated. 3. Length of Instruction Period. D. Contractor is fully responsible until final acceptance, even though operated by Owner's personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing. 1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. List under clear plastic (1/8" thick) all operating, maintenance and starting precautions and procedures to be followed by Owner for operating all systems and equipment. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 23*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS UPSON HALL 466 LAB WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION The Contractor shall: A. Compile specified warranties and bonds. B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts. C. Co-execute submittals when so specified. D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. E. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of workmanship and materials. 2. General closeout requirements are included in Section 01 77 00 - "Project Closeout." 3. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 40. 4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Product Warranties are pre-printed written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS UPSON HALL 466 LAB WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate care and diligence to review Contract Documents to identify detailed requirements relating to warranties and bonds. B. Verify that each item required for this submittal conforms with specified requirements. 1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. In addition to standard and special warranties described in Divisions 2 through 40, Contractor shall warrant Work included in this project, for a minimum period of one (1) year following acceptance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion by Owner, to cover performance, materials, workmanship and compliance with Contract Documents. B. Corrective Work: Provide service within thirty (30) calendar days when requested by Owner. Perform services during normal working hours, unless specifically directed otherwise by Owner. Coordinate with Owner’s representative to schedule performance of corrective work. Where designated service providers cannot perform corrective work within the Owner’s required time frame, engage another qualified service provider. Submit a written statement to Owner upon completion of corrective work; document work performed and list outstanding items, if any. 1. When a completed breakdown of a piece of equipment occurs of the malfunction of a system affects the environment or program involving 50 or more persons at a time (employees and students combined), or creates a safety or security risk to the Owner, an EMERGENCY may be declared by the Owner. The Owner may declare an emergency as defined above at which time the service response must be within 4 hours and may require action during non-normal working hours. 2. When an emergency condition occurs, the Owner may take immediate corrective action to relieve the problem by making, a minimum as possible, temporary adjustments and/or repairs when necessary to decrease the problem until the designated Contractor’s representative can respond. These temporary adjustments and repairs will in no way jeopardize the existing warranty. 3. The Owner’s service staff will advise the Contractor’s Representative of all temporary adjustments and repairs done in relation to the malfunctioning equipment or facility. 4. If the Contractor fails to respond with actual service within four (4) hours, and/or the necessary repairs or adjustments are not satisfactorily complete twenty-four (24) hours, the Owner will have the authority to make the necessary repairs or adjustments and charge the Contractor for parts and labor. 5. If all adjustments and repairs done by the Owner in relation to the above conditions are done by authorized district personnel, there will be no negative effect of future warranty claims. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS UPSON HALL 466 LAB WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 C. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted Work, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. D. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. E. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. F. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. G. Contractor's Procurement Obligations: Do not purchase, subcontract for, or allow others to purchase or subcontract for materials or units of Work for Project where a special project guaranty, specified product warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required until it has been determined that entities required to sign or countersign such commitments are willing to do so. H. Specific Warranty. Where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect’s Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect or Owner. 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect and Owner within fifteen (15) days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS UPSON HALL 466 LAB WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-4 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for acceptance prior to final execution. 1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED A. Submit warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts as specified in the respective sections of Specifications. Submit a schedule listing all required warranties. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. The Warranties and Bonds shall be in electronic pdf format. Each submission shall include the title of the Project and the name of the Contractor. B. Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various documents and or references. C. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors. D. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item. 1. Product or work item. 2. Item description. 3. Notation of what the equipment serves (e.g. – Provides perimeter heat) 4. Warranty Provider. Is the warranty provided by a manufacturer or installer? 5. Firm, with name of principal and responsible party, address and telephone number. 6. Scope. 7. Duration. a. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract b. End date of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS UPSON HALL 466 LAB WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-5 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 8. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedure in case of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. 9. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS A. Make final submittals within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment. B. For items of work when acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the start of the warranty period. ***END OF SECTION 01 78 36*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS UPSON HALL 466 LAB RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-1 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site, during construction, one record copy of: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract 5. Architect's Field Orders or written instructions. 6. Final Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 7. Field Test records 8. Construction photographs 1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 2. Provide cabinet or storage space for storage of samples. B. File documents and samples in accordance with Data Filing Format of the Uniform Construction Index. C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. D. Make documents and samples available at all times for review by the Owner’s Representative and the Architect. 1.3 RECORDING A. Label each document "AS BUILT" in neat large printed letters. B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS UPSON HALL 466 LAB RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-2 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 C. Drawings As built drawings shall consist of making any changes neatly and clearly on the Contract Drawings using colored ink or pencil, shall be kept current by the contractor on a day-to-day basis in concert with the progress of the work. Where applicable, the change marked on a drawing is to carry the notation “per Change Order No. X”, or similar reference which cites the reason for the change. As an alternative approach the Contractor can submit a plan for producing the “As-Built” drawings via electronic mark-up in Bluebeam, Adobe Professional, or other similar program as an alternative to colored pencil or ink mark-ups. Such plan shall be subject to approval of the Owner. The day-to-day construction as built drawings shall be made available to the Architect or Owner’s Representative for review upon request. The "As built" drawings shall show all changes to the following areas of construction: 1. Architectural: a. Modifications to components dictated by the building code b. Wall, door, window locations c. Built in casework locations d. New rated door and wall schedules/ locations e. Material and products where submittals are requested 2. Civil and Structural a. Dimensions for load carrying elements, both horizontal and vertical b. Materials and products where submittals are requested c. Load carrying elements and foundation systems d. Site related elements including: - Building outlines, entranceways, areaways, roof overhangs, downspouts, significant architectural projections and other pertinent data. e. All significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete reinforcing, lintels, concealed anchorages and "knock-out" panels made during construction. f. Building envelope systems including roofing systems and building shell systems g. Geotechnical subsurface information h. Items that will require future maintenance i. Life safety critical items 3. Mechanical (HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection) CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS UPSON HALL 466 LAB RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-3 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 a. Products where submittals are requested b. Final locations of all equipment. c. Final sizes and materials of piping and ductwork. d. Final locations of inaccessible piping and ductwork. e. Final locations of all controls equipment, including all sensors and actuators. f. Final locations of all valves and dampers, including all shutoff valves, balance dampers and fire dampers. g. Location of access doors for all equipment in concealed locations. h. Final location and arrangement of all mechanical equipment and concealed gas, sprinkler, domestic, sanitary and drainage systems piping and other plumbing, including, but not limited to, supply and circulating mains, principal valves, meters, clean-outs, drains, pumps and controls, vent stacks, sanitary and storm water drainage. 4. Electrical a. Products where submittals were requested. b. Circuit (wire and raceway) size, number, and type. c. Main circuit pathways for Fire Alarm, Emergency Power, and Access Control/Security systems. d. Final locations of equipment and devices, interior and exterior luminaires, and power supplies. e. Final location of electric signal system panels, final arrangement of all circuits and any significant changes made in electrical signal system design as a result of Change Order or job conditions. 5. Environmental a. Utility related elements and supporting infrastructure D. Specifications and Addenda Legibly mark each section to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS UPSON HALL 466 LAB RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-4 RENOVATION JUNE 1, 2021 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. At Contract close-out, deliver copies of all record documents to the Owner’s Representative. B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. Title and number of each record document 5. Certification that each document is complete and accurate 6. Signature of Contractor or its authorized representative. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 39*** TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR UPSON HALL 466 LAB RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 00 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projec ts\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-220500-BasicPlumbingRequirements.docx 6/7/2021 SECTION 22 05 00 - BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ROUGHING A. The Contract Drawings have been prepared in order to convey design intent and are diagrammatic only. Drawings shall not be interpreted to be fully coordinated for construction. B. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to avoid obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. C. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work. D. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings. Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers, air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans. E. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other Divisions, obtain from Owner and other Divisions, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows: 1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation in new location. 2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time, obtain an acknowledgement in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 00 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design \Specs\PLBG\210018-220500-BasicPlumbingRequirements.docx 6/7/2021 1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Potable water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards. 4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label. 5. All electrical equipment and systems, as a whole, shall be tested and listed by an OSHA approved Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the intended use in accordance with the applicable standards and have a physical label indicating such. 1.3 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after their review. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 1.4 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of General Construction Trade. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 00 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-220500-BasicPlumbingRequirements.docx 6/7/2021 5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves. 6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction trade. B. In Existing Buildings: 1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings. 2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening. 3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors. 4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings. 1.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 00 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-220500-BasicPlumbin gRequirements.docx 6/7/2021 5. Plastic pipe/conduit materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars. 6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations. 7. Fire-stopping products shall not be used for sealing of penetrations of non-rated walls or floors. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants. 2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts. 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. 5. 3-M Fire Products. 6. Hilti Corporation. 1.6 ACCESS PANELS A. Provide access panels for required access to respective trade's work. Location and size shall be the responsibility of each trade. Access panels provided for equipment shall provide an opening not smaller than 22 in. by 22 in. Panels shall be capable of opening a minimum of 90 degrees. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper information or failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide General Construction trade with a set of architectural plans with size and locations of access panels. 1.7 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Provide anchor bolts in equipment bases for all equipment provided for the project, whether mounted on new concrete bases or existing concrete bases. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 00 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-220500-BasicPlumbingRequirements.docx 6/7/2021 1.8 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide final connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains. C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required. D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. 1.9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide roughing and final connections to all equipment. Provide loose key stops, sanitary "P" traps, tailpiece, adapters, gas or air cocks, and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point to equipment. Provide installation of sinks, faucets, traps, tailpiece furnished by others. Provide cold water line with gate valve and backflow prevention device at locations called for. Provide continuation of piping and connection to equipment that is furnished by others. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves. C. Provide valved water outlet adjacent to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment. D. Install controls and devices furnished by others. E. Refer to Contract Documents for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required. F. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, as required. G. Refer to Manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 00 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-220500-BasicPlumbingRequirements.docx 6/7/2021 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment. Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC. B. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required. C. Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. END OF SECTION 22 05 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 23 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VALVES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-220523-Valves.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 22 05 23 - VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Document. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data in accordance with Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements. Obtain approval prior to ordering material. B. Provide submittals for all items specified under Part 2 of this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES - GENERAL A. Valves shall have following requirements: 1. Working pressure stamped or cast on bodies. 2. Stem packing serviceable without removing valve from line. 3. All items here-in used to convey water for potable use shall be lead free in accordance with NSF Standard, Standard 61, Section 9 - Standard for Drinking Water and Lavatory Faucets and NSF Standard 372 - Maximum Lead Requirements. Compliance shall be via third party testing and certification. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Balance Valves: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Red White, Taco, Tour and Anderson. 2. Ball Valves: Apollo, Hammond, Milwaukee, Nibco, Red White, Watts. 3. Check Valves: Hammond, Milwaukee, Nibco, Red White, Stockham, Watts. 4. To establish a standard of quality and identify features, certain manufacturer's numbers are given in the following paragraphs. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 23 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VALVES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-220523-Valves.doc 6/7/2021 2.2 DOMESTIC WATER VALVES A. Check Valves: 1. 2 in. and Smaller: Lead-free swing check with silicone bronze body, bonnet and trim, PTFE disc seat and stainless steel seat disc washer, 200 psi working pressure, Nibco T-413-Y-LF (threaded) or Nibco's S-413-Y-LF (solder). B. Ball Valves 1. For all water services, ball valves shall be: a. Body Bronze b. Body Style Standard Port, 2 piece c. Trim 316 Stainless Steel Ball and Stem, with stem extension to raise handle out of insulation d. Seat Reinforced Teflon (RTFE), 15% glass filled double seal e. Seat Working P/T Rating 300 psig @ 250°F Minimum f. Body Working P/T Rating 300 psig @ 300°F Minimum g. WOG Rating 300 psig Minimum h. Lead free i. Design Basis Apollo 70LF-240 or approved equal, Nibco T-580-66LF, S-580-66-LF, Watts LFB6000-SS, LFB6001-SS. C. Valves For Gauges And Instruments: 1. 1/2 in. size: Use a ball valve as listed above. a. Provide at all new pressure gauges. D. Balance Valves: 1. 2 in. and Smaller: Lead-free, brass body, chrome plated brass ball, glass and carbon filled PTFE seat rings, Viton packing, threaded or solder ends, differential readout ports, calibrated nameplate and memory stop indicator rated for 125 psi; and pre-formed insulation to permit access for balancing and readout; Watt Series LFCSM-61-S. a. Balance valve sizes shall be based upon gpm range rather than pipe size. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 23 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VALVES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-220523-Valves.doc 6/7/2021 Balance Valve Size GPM Range 1/2 in. Up to 2.5 3/4 in. 2.5 - 4.5 1 in. 4.5 - 10 1-1/4 in. 10 - 15 1-1/2 in. 15 - 30 2 in. 30 - 60 E. Hose Thread Drain Valves: 1. Ball valve, bronze body, hardened chrome ball with hose thread end, cap and chain; Watts #B6001CC (sweat connection), Watts #B6000CC (threaded connection). 2.3 GAS VALVES A. Ball Valves: 1. 2 in. and Smaller: Ball type, two-piece, full port, brass body with chrome plated brass ball, teflon seats, threaded ends, 600 psi WOG, UL listed for natural gas, Watts FBV-3C-UL. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide all shutoff, check, balancing and other type valves as indicated, as required by Code and as required for proper system maintenance, isolation and safety. Provide at major building and systems sections. Provide shutoff valves on all branch lines serving two fixtures or more, at all equipment, fixtures, before and after automatic control valves, and at future connections. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. Install valves with stems at or above the horizontal position. Install swing check valves in horizontal position with hinge pin level. C. Provide drain valves with hose thread connections on all equipment. Provide hose thread drain valves at all low points to enable complete drainage of all piping systems including, water mains, branches, at base of vertical risers and at strainers. D. Inspect valves for proper operation before installation. Install underground valve boxes vertically over each valve. Adjust top of box to proper grade. Immediately backfill with crushed stone and carefully tamp into place. Unless otherwise noted, leave in the open position. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 23 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VALVES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-220523-Val ves.doc 6/7/2021 3.2 NATURAL GAS SYSTEM A. Ball valves shall be UL listed for use in natural gas systems, or certified by another acceptable third-party testing agency. END OF SECTION 22 05 23 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 53 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\ Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-220553-PlumbingIdentification.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 22 05 53 - PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS A. All identification devices shall comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each identification material and device. Submit valve schedule for each piping system typewritten on an 8-1/2 in. x 11 in. paper (minimum), indicating valve number, location and valve function. Submit schedule of pipe, equipment and name identification for review before stenciling or labeling. 1.4 MAKES A. Allen Systems, Inc., Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div., Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc., Seton Name Plate Corp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. In cases where there is more than one type specified for an application, selection is installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category. B. All adhesives used for labels in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits as called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2. C. For work within an existing building, the mechanical identification shall meet the intent of this section, but match the Owner's existing identification symbology. 2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. Identification Types: 1. Pressure Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color coded, pressure sensitive vinyl pipe markers complying with ANSI A13.1. Provide a 360° wrap of flow arrow tape at each end of pipe label. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 53 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-220553-PlumbingIdentification.doc 6/7/2021 2. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi rigid snap-on, color coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI-A13.1. B. Lettering: 1. Piping labeling shall conform to the following list: PIPE FUNCTION IDENTIFICATION Cold Water DOMESTIC COLD WATER Hot Water DOMESTIC HOT WATER Hot Water Recirculating DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATING Sanitary Waste SANITARY WASTE Indirect Waste INDIRECT WASTE Storm STORM Vent VENT Compressed Air COMPRESSED AIR Lab Vent LAB VENT Lab Waste LAB WASTE 2.3 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Valve Tags: 1. Standard brass valve tags, 2 in. diameter with 1/2 in. high black-filled numerals. Attach to valve with brass jack chain and "S" hook. Identify between heating and plumbing services with 1/4 in. letters above the valve number. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Seton Style No. M4507, or approved equal. B. Valve Chart: 1. Provide valve chart for all valves provided as a part of this project. Frame and place under clear glass. Mount in Mechanical Room. 2.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. General: 1. Provide engraved vinyl nameplates for each major piece of mechanical equipment provided, 2-1/2 in. x 3/4 in. size. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Seton Style No. M4562, or approved equal. 2.5 ABOVE CEILING EQUIPMENT LOCATOR A. 3/4 in. diameter adhesive stickers placed on ceiling grid and color-coded. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 05 53 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Spe cs\PLBG\210018-220553-PlumbingIdentification.doc 6/7/2021 B. The color for all plumbing valves shall be BLUE. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide valve tags for all valves provided on project. B. Provide equipment tags for all equipment provided on project. C. Provide piping identification with directional flow arrows for all piping on project, maximum intervals of 20'-0". For piping installed through rooms, provide at least one (1) pipe label in each room, for each pipe function. END OF SECTION 22 05 23 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 07 00 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Spec s\PLBG\210018-220700-Insulation.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 22 07 00 - INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTAL A. Shall include product description, manufacturer's installation instructions, types and recommended thicknesses for each application, and location of materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Insulation, jackets, adhesive, and coatings shall comply with the following: 1. Treatment of jackets or facing for flame and smoke safety must be permanent. Water-soluble treatments not permitted. 2. Insulation, including finishes and adhesives on the exterior surfaces of pipes and equipment, shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less. 3. Asbestos or asbestos bearing materials are prohibited. 4. Comply with 2015 International Energy Conservation Code as amended by Part 1 of the 2016 Supplement to the New York State Energy Conservation Code. 5. All adhesives and sealants used for insulation in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits as called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ E4.1 and EQ E4.2. 6. Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least two (2) years prior to bid opening. Provide insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA or NAIMA Insulation Standards. 7. Insulation shall be clearly marked with manufacturer's name, identification of installed thermal resistance (R) value, out-of-package R value, flame spread and smoke developed indexes in accordance with Energy Code requirements. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 07 00 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-220700-Insulation.doc 6/7/2021 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fiberglass: Knauf, Johns Manville, Owen-Corning, Certainteed B. Adhesives: Childers Products, Foster. 2.3 PIPE INSULATION (RIGID FIBERGLASS TYPE) A. Product meeting ASTM C 547, ASTM C 585, and ASTM C 795; rigid, molded, noncombustible. B. 'K' Value: ASTM C 335, 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature. Maximum Service Temperature: 1000°F. C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ/SSL conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, secured with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. D. Field-Applied PVC Fitting Covers with Flexible Fiberglass Insulation: Proto Corporation 25/50 or Indoor/Outdoor, UV-resistant fittings, jacketing and accessories, white or colored. Fitting cover system shall consist of pre-molded, high-impact PVC materials with blanket type fiberglass wrap inserts. Blanket fiberglass wrap inserts shall have a thermal conductivity ('K') of 0.26 at 75°F mean temperature. Closures shall be stainless steel tacks, matching PVC tape, or PVC adhesive per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in pre-forming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges. 2.4 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Piping: 1. PVC Pipe Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. PVC Jacket Color: White. 2.5 COATINGS, MASTICS, ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS A. Lagging Adhesives: Used in conjunction with canvas or glass lagging cloth to protect equipment/piping indoors. Foster 30-36 Sealfas; Childers CP-50AMV1 Chil Seal, or approved equal. B. Fiberglass Adhesive: Used bond low density fibrous insulation to metal surfaces. Shall meet ASTM C916 Type II. Foster 85-60; Childers CP-127, or approved equal. C. Insulation Joint Sealant: Used as a vapor sealant on below ambient piping with polyisocyanurate and cellular glass insulation. Foster 95-50; Childers CP-76, or approved equal. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 07 00 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-220700-Insulation.doc 6/7/2021 2.6 PIPE SUPPORT INSULATION INSERTS A. 20 lbs./cu. ft. molded fiberglass, for -120°F to +450°F service temperature, noncombustible, 0.30 thermal conductivity (k), same thickness as pipe insulation. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hamfab "H" Block, or approved equal. 2.7 MATERIALS AND SCHEDULES A. See Exhibits at the end of this section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All materials shall be installed by skilled labor regularly engaged in this type of work. All materials shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, building codes, and industry standards. B. Locate insulation and cover seams in the least visible location. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, ends and surfaces of insulation. No glass fibers shall be exposed to the air. C. All pipe insulation shall be continuous through hangers, sleeves, walls, ceiling, floor, or roof openings, unless not allowed by fire stop system. Refer to Sections 220500, "Basic Plumbing Requirements" and 221010, "Piping Systems and Accessories" for firestop systems. D. Provide thermal insulation on clean, dry surfaces and after piping and equipment (as applicable) have been tested. Do not cover pipe joints with insulation until required tests are completed. E. All cold surfaces that may "sweat" must be insulated. Vapor barrier must be maintained; insulation shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken moisture and vapor seal. All hangers, supports, anchors, or other projections that are secured to cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Extra care must be taken on piping appurtenances to insure a tight fit to the piping system. For piping systems with fluid temperatures below ambient, all vapor retarder jacket (ASJ) seams must be coated with vapor barrier coating. All associated elbows, fittings, valves, etc. must be coated with vapor barrier coating and reinforcing mesh to prevent moisture ingress. Valve extension stems require Elastomeric insulation that is tight fitting to the adjoining fiberglass system insulation. Pumps, strainers, drain valves, etc. must be totally encapsulated with Elastomeric insulation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 07 00 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-220700-Insulation.doc 6/7/2021 F. Items such as manholes, handholds, clean-outs, plugged connections, pet cocks, air vents, ASME stamp, and manufacturers' nameplates, may be left un-insulated unless omitting insulation would cause a condensation problem. When such is the case, appropriate tagging shall be provided to identify the presence of these items. Provide neatly beveled edges at interruptions of insulation. G. Provide protective insulation as required to prevent personal injury. H. All pipes shall be individually insulated. I. If any insulation material becomes wet because of transit or job site exposure to moisture or water, the contractor shall not install such material, and shall remove it from the job site. J. All exposed surfaces shall be white, unless noted otherwise. 3.2 PIPE INSULATION A. Insulate piping systems including fittings, valves, flanges, unions, strainers, and other attachments installed in piping system, whether exposed or concealed. B. Insulation installed on piping operating below ambient temperatures must have a continuous vapor retarder. All joints, seams and fittings must be sealed. Insulation shall be continuous through hangers on all water piping and storm water piping. C. Hanger Shields: Refer to Section 221010 "Piping Systems and Accessories". D. Hanger shields shall be installed between hangers or supports and the piping insulation. Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed as required between the pipe and the insulation shields. Inserts shall be of equal thickness to the adjacent insulation and shall be vapor sealed as required. 1. Pre-Insulated Type: Butt insulation to hanger shields and apply a wet coat of vapor barrier cement to the joints and seal with 3 in. wide vapor barrier tape. 2. Field Insulated Type: Provide Hamfab Co. "H" blocks per manufacturers recommended spacing between pipe and shield. 3. Tape shields to insulation. E. Joints in section pipe covering made as follows: 1. All ends must be firmly butted and secured with appropriate butt-strip material. On high-temperature piping, double layering with staggered joints may be appropriate. When double layering, the inner layer should not be jacketed. 2. Standard: Longitudinal laps and butt joint sealing strips cemented with white vapor barrier coating, or factory supplied pressure sensitive adhesive lap seal. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 07 00 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-220700-Insulation.doc 6/7/2021 3. Vapor Barrier: For cold services, Longitudinal laps and 4 in. vapor barrier strip at butt joints shall be sealed with white vapor barrier coating. Seal ends of pipe insulation at valves, flanges, and fittings with white vapor barrier coating. F. Fittings, Valves and Flanges: 1. Domestic Hot and Cold Water: Premolded fitting insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjacent pipe insulation. 2. White PVC jacketing, with continuous solvent weld of all seams. Tape all fittings. G. Flexible Pipe Insulation: 1. Split longitudinal joint and seal with adhesive. 2. Fittings made from miter-cut pieces properly sealed with adhesive, or elbows may be continuous. H. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 1 in. overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturers recommended adhesive. I. Apply PVC jacketing to exposed insulated pipe, valves, fittings, and specialties, at an elevation of 8 feet or less above finished floor in mechanical/electric al rooms, penthouses, and services aisles/pipe chases. Fittings of aluminum-jacketed piping may be either aluminum or standard PVC fitting covers. Jacketing for piping in existing areas shall match existing jacketing. J. Piping in exterior walls, spaces, overhangs, attics, or where subject to freezing: Insulate pipe with double the thickness called for. Piping in wall chases: In addition to the above, pack chase with loose glass fiber insulation. K. Provide insulation on exposed hot and cold plumbing piping to within 18 in. of fixture or equipment connection. L. Insulate exposed domestic water and waste piping for plumbing fixtures designated for use by the handicapped. 3.3 EXISTING INSULATION A. Patch existing insulation damaged during the course of the work. B. Insulate existing piping and equipment as called for. C. Jacketing for piping in existing areas shall match existing jacketing. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 07 00 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-220700-Insulation .doc 6/7/2021 EXHIBIT "I" - PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL THICKNESS REMARKS Domestic cold water Glass fiber 1-1/2 in. and larger: 1 in. 1-1/4 in. and smaller: 1/2 in. Domestic hot, tempered and circulation water (105°F - 140°F) Glass fiber 1-1/2 in. and larger: 1-1/2 in. 1-1/4 in. and smaller: 1 in. AC unit drains, overflows and indirect waste piping associated with any HVAC equipment Glass fiber All sizes: 1/2 in. END OF SECTION 22 07 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-221010-PipingSystemsAndAccessories.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 22 10 10 - PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide a schedule of pipe materials, fittings and connections. B. Provide a detailed matrix listing the specific UL approved firestop system assembly to be used for each type of piping provided and each type of construction to be penetrated along with all associated UL assembly details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Pipe and fittings shall be new, marked with manufacturer's name and comply with applicable ASTM and ANSI Standards. B. All items here-in used to convey water for potable use shall be lead free in accordance with NSF, Standard 61, Section 9 - Standard for Drinking Water and Lavatory Faucets and NSF Standard 372 - Maximum Lead Requirements. Compliance shall be via third party testing and certification. 2.2 STEEL PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A53, or ASTM A106 seamless, Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 weight; black or galvanized finish as called for; ends chamfered for welding or grooved for grooved mechanical connections. B. Fittings: Same material and pressure class as adjoining pipe. 1. Welded fittings: Factory forged, seamless construction, butt weld type chamfered ends. Where branch connections are two or more sizes smaller than main size, use of "Weldolets", "Thredolets" or "Sockolets" acceptable. Mitered elbows, "shaped" nipples, and job fabricated reductions not acceptable unless specifically called for. Socket weld type, 2000 psi wp, where called for. 2. Threaded fittings: Cast or malleable iron, black or galvanized, as called for; drainage type where called for; UL listed and FM approved for fire protection systems. Street type 45° and 90° elbows are not acceptable. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-221010-PipingSystemsAndAccessories.doc 6/7/2021 C. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings: 1. Threaded Connections: a. Flanges: Cast iron companion type; for sizes 2-1/2 in. and larger. b. Unions: Malleable iron, bronze to iron seat, 300 lb. wwp; for sizes 2 in. and smaller. c. Couplings: Malleable iron. Steel thread protectors are not acceptable as couplings. 2. Welded Connections: a. Flanges: Welding neck type. Slip-on type not allowed unless noted and shall not be installed in conjunction with butterfly valves. D. Gauge and Instrument Connections: Nipples and plugs for adapting gauges and instruments to piping system shall be IPS brass. 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM B88; Type K or L, hard temper. Soft temper only as called for. Plans show copper tube sizes. B. Fittings: Wrought copper and copper alloy, ASME B16.22 or cast copper alloy, ASME B16.18; solder end connections. C. Unions and Flanges: 2 in. and smaller use unions, solder type, cast bronze, ground joint, 150 lb. swp: 2-1/2 in. and over use flanges, cast bronze, companion type, ASME drilled, solder connection, 150 lb. swp. D. Flux Materials: Flux shall comply with ASTM B813 and the provisions of the New York State Plumbing Code. E. Solder Materials: No-lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. Harris, Inc., "Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Engelhard "Silvabright 100", Canfield "Watersafe" or approved equal. F. Brazing Materials: Class BcuP-5 for brazing copper to brass, bronze to copper. Harris, Inc. "Stay-Silv 15" or approved equal. 2.4 COPPER DRAINAGE TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM B306, Type DWV, hard temper. 1. Copper not allowed for urinal waste. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-221010-PipingSystemsAndAccesso ries.doc 6/7/2021 B. Fittings: Wrought copper, ANSI B16.29 or cast bronze, ANSI B16.23; solder end connections. C. Flux Materials: Flux shall comply with ASTM B813 and the provisions of the New York State Plumbing Code. D. Solder Materials: No lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Harris, Inc., "Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Engelhard "Silvabright 100", Canfield "Watersafe", or approved equal. 2.5 HIGH PURITY POLYPROPYLENE PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Piping: Schedule 40 or 80 polypropylene produced without additives or pigments. Piping shall be sterilized and capped by manufacturer. B. Fittings: Same material as pipe, sterilized and packed in individual bags by manufacturer, socket fusion weld joints. C. Valves: Material shall be identical to pipe, socket fusion weld joints. D. Design Equipment: Orion "Whiteline". E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Enfield, Orion Fitting, Inc., R&G Sloane. 2.6 NO-HUB CAST IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A888, CISPI Standard 301, no-hub cast iron, bitumen coated. 1. For above grade only. B. Fittings: Cast iron, no-hub drainage pattern, bitumen coated. C. Couplings: 1. 1-1/2 in. to 2 in.: CISPI standard 310 with 300 series stainless steel corrugated shield and clamp assembly with ASTM C564 neoprene sealing sleeve (or) same as specified for 3 in. and larger. 2. 3 in. and Larger: 24 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel housing clamp assembly with ASTM C564 neoprene sealing sleeve, 60 in. lbs. minimum torque rating, shall meet requirements of pipe manufacturer and shall be compatible with specified pipe. Acceptable Manufacturers: Clamp-All Coupling System, Tyler "Wide Body", Husky "Series 2000", Mission "Heavy Weight" or approved equal. D. All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and be listed by NSF International. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-221010-PipingSystemsAndAccessories.doc 6/7/2021 2.7 ACID RESISTANT WASTE PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Polypropylene: 1. Pipe and Fittings: Schedule 40 flame retardant polypropylene, ASTM D4101. 2. Fittings shall be same material as pipe with thermal welded joints. a. For accessible 1-1/2 in. and 2 in. piping below counters, sinks and equipment, provide mechanical joint or thermal welded unions at traps to permit disassembly. b. Piping through wall or floor at roughing point for sinks and equipment shall be provided with male IPS threaded adapter. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: IPEX "Enfield", Orion Fitting, Inc., R&G Sloane. 2.8 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS (FOR SPECIALTY LIQUIDS AND GASES) A. Tubing: 316L, stainless steel tubing, meets ASTM A269 requirements for stainless steel tubing, bright annealed in a dry hydrogen atmosphere, 0.065 in. wall thickness, 25 Ra interior surface roughness, purged with UHP nitrogen, ends capped and tubes bagged at factory. B. Fittings: Shall be same material as piping. Passivated and cleaned to match pipe. C. Design Equipment: Swagelok Medium Pressure. 2.9 SPECIAL FITTINGS A. Cast Iron to Lead Pipe: Red brass ferrules and wiped joints. Caulk ferrule into cast iron hub. B. Copper to Cast Iron: Cast bronze, cast iron to sweat adapter. C. Copper to Steel Piping: 1. Cast bronze copper to iron male or female adapter with shoulder for drainage piping only. 2. Dielectric pipefittings. D. Steel to Cast Iron: Cast iron soil pipe connector with spigot and IPS male thread end (Manhoff fittings). E. No-Hub, Cast Iron, Glass, Polypropylene or High Silicon Cast Iron: Proper adapter to piping being connected. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-221010-PipingSystemsAndAccessories.doc 6/7/2021 F. Cast Iron and PVC Sovent: Aerators and deaerators as manufactured by Conine Manufacturing Co., Inc. 2.10 DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS A. Description: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. B. Unions: Factory fabricated, for 250 psi minimum working pressure at 180°F, threaded or solder ends, insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure and temperature. C. Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig minimum pressure to suit system fluid pressures and temperatures with flange insulation kits and bolt sleeves. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: EPCO, Capitol Manufacturing, Watts or approved equal. 2.11 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers, Inserts, Clamps: B-Line, Grinnell, Michigan Hanger, PHD Manufacturing. B. Hangers: 1. Adjustable, wrought malleable iron or steel with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. PVC coated where in contact with copper piping. 2. Adjustable ring type where piping is installed directly on hanger for piping 3 in. and smaller. 3. Adjustable steel clevis type for piping 4 in. and larger. 4. Nuts, washers and rods with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. 5. Provide hot dipped galvanized finish for hangers and accessories installed in exterior locations and interior areas with moist environment conditions such as pools, pool filter rooms, areaways, garages and similar areas. C. Spacing Schedule: Pipe Size Steel Copper Plastic Cast Iron Rod Size 3/4 in. to 1 in. 8 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft. Each 3/8 in. 1-1/4 in. to 2 in. 10 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft. Horizontal 3/8 in. 2-1/2 in. to 4 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. Joint 5 ft. 1/2 in. 5 in. and over 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. Maximum 5/8 in. 8 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. O.C. 3/4 in. Over 8 in. To suit loading conditions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Spec s\PLBG\210018-221010-PipingSystemsAndAccessories.doc 6/7/2021 D. Cast Iron No-Hub Supports: 1. In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Vertical piping supported at each stack base, at each floor and 15 ft. on center, maximum. Freestanding vertical pipe should be adequately staked or braced during construction to maintain alignment. Bases of stacks shall be supported on concrete, brick laid in cement mortar, metal brackets attached to the building construction or by other methods approved by the Owner's Representative. 3. Horizontal piping supported within 24 in. each side of the coupling joint at 10 ft. intervals for 10 ft. pipe lengths and at 5 ft. intervals for 5 ft. pipe lengths. Supports or hangers placed to maintain alignment and grade with provision made to prevent shear. Greater than 3 in. diameter pipe braced at changes of direction to prevent horizontal movement. E. Beam Attachments: 1. C-Clamp style, locknut, restraining strap, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved for pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller. 2. Center loaded style with clamp attachments that engage both edges of beam, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved, for pipe sizes larger than 2 in., refer to "Supports" for additional requirements. F. Inserts: Carbon steel body and square insert nut, galvanized finish, maximum loading 1300 lbs., for 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. rod sizes, reinforcing rods on both sides, MSS-SP-69 Type 19 or approved equal. G. Supports: 1. Provide intermediate structural steel members where required for hanger attachment. Members shall span across the bar joists at panel points of joists. Secure member to structure. Select size of members based on a minimum factor of safety of four. 2. For Weights Under 1000 lbs.: "Drill-In" inserts, "U" shaped Channel, beam clamps or other structurally reviewed support. The factor of safety shall be at least four. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. 3. For Metal Decks: Drill hole through for hanger rods and imbed a welded plate in concrete or use devices designed for this application, with a safety factor of four. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hilti, ITW Ramset, Phillips "Red Head" or approved equal. H. Trapeze Hangers: 1. For plumbing systems only. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 7 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Pr ojects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-221010-PipingSystemsAndAccessories.doc 6/7/2021 2. Hangers shall be supported with rod sized with a safety factor of four. 3. May be manufactured type "U" shaped channel, or suitable angle iron or channel. Round off all sharp edges. 4. Securely fasten piping to trapeze with "U" bolt or pipe clamps, dissimilar metals shall not touch, use isolation gaskets. Fasten piping to trapeze at every third support. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: B-Line, Kindorf, Unistrut or approved equal. I. Cabinet Pipe Space Supports: 1. Piping below casework countertops within space behind cabinet shall be supported using continuous slot metal channels with pipe clamps. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: B-Line, Kindorf, Unistrut or approved equal. J. Hanger Insulation Shields: 1. Hanger insulation shields shall be provided for all water and storm water piping. Hangers shall attach directly to pipe for all remaining services. 2. Piping 2 in. and Smaller: Pipe insulated with glass fiber insulation shall be protected at point of support by a sheet metal shield. Shield shall be #18 gauge, galvanized steel, minimum 120 degree arc, formed to fit insulation thickness and 12 in. long. Tape shields to pipe insulation. 3. Piping 3 in. and Larger: Pipe insulated with glass fiber insulation shall be protected at point of support by a sheet metal shield and pipe support insulation insert(s) between pipe and hanger. Shield shall be #18 gauge, galvanized steel, minimum 120 degree arc, formed to fit insulation thickness and 12 in. long. Tape shields to pipe insulation. Provide temporary blocking to maintain proper spacing for insulation. K. Provide continuous support for unpigmented polypropylene piping. L. Piping systems with material not listed above shall be supported and protected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.12 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Escutcheon Plates: Steel or cast brass, split hinge type with setscrew, high plates where required for extended sleeves. Chrome plated in finished areas and at plumbing fixtures. B. All cleanout plugs, bushings and nipples, required for instruments and gauges shall be brass. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 8 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Spec s\PLBG\210018-221010-PipingSystemsAndAccessories.doc 6/7/2021 2.13 SLEEVES A. Standard Type: 1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves for structural surfaces, two pipe sizes larger than the pipe, and as recommended by the sealing element manufacturer. Provide full circle water stop collar for sleeves located within below grade walls, wet wells and waterproofed surfaces. The collar shall be fabricated from steel plate and welded to the sleeve around its entire circumference. 2.14 FIRESTOP SYSTEM FOR OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALL AND FLOOR ASSEMBLIES A. Materials for firestopping seals shall be listed by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems". The system shall meet the standard fire test for Through-Penetration Firestop Systems designated ASTM E814. Firestop system seals shall be provided at locations where piping pass through fire rated wall, floor/ceiling, or ceiling/roof assembly. Minimum required fire resistant ratings of the assembly shall be maintained by the Firestop System. Installation shall conform with the manufacturer's recommendations and other requirements necessary to meet the testing laboratory's listing for the specific installation. 2.15 STACK SLEEVE A. Cast iron body with caulking recess, flashing clamp and under deck clamp. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Jay R. Smith Series 1720, Zurn, Wade. 2.16 PIPING MATERIALS AND SCHEDULE A. See Exhibit "A", "Schedule of Piping Materials" at end of this Section for (Plumbing) piping. B. See Exhibit "B", "Testing" at end of this Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Install equipment and systems in accordance with provisions of each applicable Section of these Specifications, and Local/State Codes/Regulations having jurisdiction. Accurately establish grade and elevation of piping before setting sleeves. Install piping without springing or forcing, except where specifically called for, making proper allowance for expansion and anchoring. Changes in sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. Reducing couplings are not acceptable. Arrange piping at equipment with necessary offsets, unions, flanges, and valves, to allow for easy part removal and maintenance. Offset piping and change elevation as required to coordinate with other work. Avoid contact with other mechanical or electrical systems. Provide adequate means of draining and venting units, risers, circuits and systems. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 9 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-221010-PipingSystemsAndAccessories.doc 6/7/2021 Conceal piping unless otherwise called for. Copper tubing shall be cut with a wheeled tubing cutter or other approved copper tubing cutter tool. The tubing must be cut square to permit proper joining with the fittings. Ream pipes after cutting and clean before installing. Cap or plug equipment and pipe openings during construction. Install piping parallel with lines of building, properly spaced to provide clearance for insulation. Make changes in direction and branch connections with fittings. Do not install valves, unions and flanges in inaccessible locations. Materials within a system and between systems shall be consistent. If this is not possible, install dielectric fittings. 3.2 PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall route piping to avoid installation directly over electric equipment, including, but not limited to panels, transformers, disconnects, starters, motor control center, adjustable speed drives and fused switches. B. Piping shall not be installed in the dedicated electric and working space as defined by NEC 110. Dedicated electrical space is generally equal to the depth and width of electrical equipment, and extends 6 ft. above the electrical equipment, or to a structural ceiling. Dedicated working space is a minimum of 30 in. wide or the width of equipment (whichever is larger) a minimum of 6 ft.-6 in. tall, with a depth of 3ft. to 9 ft. depending on the voltage. 3.3 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Piping shall not be supported by wires, band iron, chains, from other piping, or by vertical expansion bolts. Support piping with individual hangers from concrete inserts, wood construction, welded supports, or beams clamps of proper configuration and loading design requirements for each location; replace if not suitable. Follow manufacturer's safe loading recommendations. Suspend with rods of sufficient length for swing and of size called for, using four (4) nuts per rod. Provide additional structural steel members, having one coat rustproof paint, where required for proper support. Provide oversized hangers where insulation/supports must pass between pipe and hanger. Provide continuous support or extra supports for plastic piping per manufacturer's requirements. Hangers, when attached to joists, shall only be placed at the top or bottom chord panel point. Only concentric type hangers are permissible on piping larger that 21/2 in.; "C" types are permitted for piping 2 in. and smaller on joists. Provide riser clamps for each riser at each floor. Use trapeze hangers where a group of piping can be installed. B. Provide a pipe hanger within 12 inches of pipe unions and piping connections to equipment, in order to facilitate disconnections of piping without pipe sagging. 3.4 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. No-Lead Solder Connections: Nonacid flux and clean off excess flux and solder. B. Brazed Connections: Make joints with silver brazing alloy in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove working parts of valves before applying heat. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 10 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-221010-PipingSystemsAndAccessories.doc 6/7/2021 C. Threaded Connections: Clean out tapering threads, made up with pipe dope; screwed until tight connection. Pipe dope must be specifically selected for each application. D. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type and thickness for service applications. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. E. Dielectric Pipe Fittings: Provide dielectric unions at ALL equipment connections where dissimilar metals meet. In addition, provide dielectric unions in all open type piping systems (condensing water, domestic water, etc.) where dissimilar metals are to be joined. 3.5 SLEEVES A. Provide for pipes passing through floors, walls or ceilings. Not required for floors that are core-drilled, except where floor is waterproofed. B. Extend 1/8 in. above finished floor in finished areas. In above grade Mechanical Rooms and other areas with floor drains, use steel pipe sleeves 2 in. above floor. C. Use steel pipe sleeves in bearing wall, structural slabs, beams and other structural surfaces, and where called for. D. Sleeves shall be as small as practical, consistent with insulation, so as to preserve fire rating. E. Fill abandoned sleeves with concrete. F. Provide rubber grommet seals for pipes passing through ducts or air chambers or built-up housings. 3.6 SLEEVE PACKING A. Seal void space at sleeves as follows: 1. Interior Locations: Firmly pack with fiberglass and caulk. 2. Cored Holes: Use sealing element. 3. Fire Rated, Partitions and Floor Slabs: Use fire rated sealing elements, materials and methods. Provide per manufacturer's instructions to maintain firestop. 4. Waterproofed Walls/Floors: Use waterproof sealing element, device or compound. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 11 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0 000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-221010-PipingSystemsAndAccessories.doc 6/7/2021 3.7 ESCUTCHEON PLATES A. Provide polished chrome setscrew type escutcheon plates for all exposed piping passing through floors, walls or ceilings, in all rooms except in Boiler, Fan and Mechanical Rooms. 3.8 TESTS A. Refer to Exhibit "B" at the end of this section for testing of Plumbing Systems. B. Provide all necessary items to complete proper testing of work. Perform all testing in accordance with governing Codes, local utilities and other agencies having jurisdiction and as specified. Pay all costs to perform tests. Perform all testing in a safe manner. Isolate existing systems. C. Domestic Water: 1. Do not cover joints with insulation until required tests are completed and the Owner's Representative accepts the system. 2. Make leaks tight; no caulking permitted. Replace defective fittings, pipe or connections. Piping shall be tight and show no loss of pressure. 3. Air test not acceptable as final test. 4. Confirm in writing that tests and flushing have been conducted and successfully completed. Submit copy of the test report to Owner's Representative. D. Sanitary, Lab Waste, and Storm: 1. There shall be no loss of water when testing interior piping. 2. Air test not acceptable as final test. 3. Should any leaks, defective joints or defective construction be detected in sewers and/or floors or walls of appurtenant structures, they shall be permanently stopped. Should any defective pipes, fitting or accessories be discovered they shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 4. Confirm in writing that tests have been conducted and successfully completed. Submit copy of the test report to Owner's Representative. 3.9 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING CLEANING AND DISINFECTION A. Cleaning and disinfecting shall be in accordance with requirements of New York State Department of Health and authority having jurisdiction. Prior to disinfecting, flush piping to remove any sediment and debris. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 12 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210 018-221010-PipingSystemsAndAccessories.doc 6/7/2021 B. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping systems and parts of existing potable water systems that have been altered, extended or repaired. C. After disinfection procedures, submit water samples in sterile bottles to an approved Department of Health Laboratory. Samples shall be proven equal to the water quality served to the public from the existing water supply system and acceptable to the Department of Health. Flush and disinfect all sections of pipe that fail the laboratory tests. Submit test results indicating water is potable. 3.10 PIPE LINE SIZING A. Pipe sizes called for are to be maintained. Pipe size changes made only as reviewed by Owner's Representative. Where discrepancy in size occurs, the larger size shall be provided. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 13 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-221010-PipingSystemsAndAccessories.doc 6/7/2021 EXHIBIT "A" - PIPING MATERIALS (PLUMBING) SERVICE PIPE MATERIALS FITTINGS CONNECTIONS Domestic water interior/hot, cold and circulating 3 in. and smaller Type L copper Wrought or cast copper No-lead solder Sanitary, sanitary vent and grease waste Service weight cast iron soil pipe No hub No hub neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp assembly Type DWV copper Wrought copper No-lead solder Storm Service weight cast iron soil pipe Cast iron hub and spigot Neoprene compression type gasket Service weight cast iron soil pipe No hub No hub neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp assembly Type DWV copper Wrought copper No-lead solder Indirect waste Type DWV copper Wrought copper No-lead solder Lab waste and vent Polypropylene Polypropylene Thermal fused (joint) including concealed locations, mechanical joint below counters, sink and equipment only RODI supply and return water Schedule 80, unpigmented polypropylene Same as pipe Thermal fused Compressed air- Type L copper Wrought copper Brazed P5, N2, H2 Stainless steel tube Same as pipe Natural Gas Schedule 40 black steel Malleable Iron Threaded CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 10 10 - 14 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-221010-P ipingSystemsAndAccessories.doc 6/7/2021 EXHIBIT "B" - TESTING SERVICE TEST REQUIREMENTS Domestic water Test hydrostatically at 150 PSI for two (2) hours or at 1.5 times the working pressure when working pressure exceeds 100 PSI Sanitary, sanitary vent, storm Maintain 10 ft. head of water for two (2) hours. Indirect waste Maintain 10 ft. head of water for two (2) hours. Lab waste and vent Maintain 10 ft. head of water for two (2) hours. Reverse osmosis, Test with inert gas (nitrogen) at a pressure of 125 PSI for two (2) hours. Compressed air, vacuum, CO2 Test with clean air or nitrogen at a pressure of 175 PSI for 24 hours. Natural Gas Refer to Section 227010 - Natural Gas Systems END OF SECTION 22 10 10 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 30 10 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation EQUIPMENT M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-223010Equipment.do cx 6/7/2021 SECTION 22 30 10 - EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Document. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals for all items specified under Part 2 of this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLOOR DRAINS A. Drain Description: All Floor Drains Type A unless otherwise noted. 1. Type A: Cast iron body, flashing collar with weepholes, 8 in. diameter cast iron grate medium duty, removable sediment bucket; Jay R. Smith Figure #2110. B. Where floor drains are not installed in slabs on grade, provide flashing collar and flash with 24 in. square four (4) pound lead flashing or equal. C. Make: Josam, Jay R. Smith, Wade, Watts or Zurn. 2.2 CLEANOUTS A. Floors: Cast iron body, nickel-bronze top with adjustable feature, bronze plug and flashing clamp where required, carpet marker and tile cover where applicable; Jay R. Smith Series #4028. B. Walls: Cast iron ferrule, with bronze plug and stainless steel smooth access cover. 1. Horizontal: Jay R. Smith Figure #4402. 2. Vertical: Jay R. Smith Figure #4531. C. Yard Cleanout: 1. Cast iron body, adjustable round heavy duty top, with tractor cover, vandal proof screws and bronze plug; Jay R. Smith Figure #4246. D. Make: Josam, Jay R. Smith, Wade, Watts or Zurn. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 22 30 10 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation EQUIPMENT M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\PLBG\210018-223010Equipment.docx 6/7/2021 2.3 HOSE BIBBS (INTERIOR) A. Inside sill faucet, vacuum breaker, lead-free, solder connection, 3/4 in. hose thread outlet, lock shield cap, loose key control, flanged female inlet, polished chrome plate finish for finished rooms, rough chromium for unfinished rooms. B. Make: Woodford Model 84, Prier, Chicago Faucets or Acorn in finished room; Chicago Faucets #998 in Mechanical Rooms, Boiler Room, Penthouse, or other unfinished rooms. 2.4 TRAP GUARDS A. Elastomeric, normally closed seal to prevent evaporation of P-traps. Inserts into throat of floor drain. Provide for each new floor drain. B. Make: ProVent Systems, Inc. "ProSet Trap Guard". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Plumbing Contractor shall: 1. Provide all roughing and final water, waste, vent, gas, air, vacuum, diesel and/or oxygen connections to all equipment requiring same as called for on Contract Documents. 2. Refer to Contract Documents for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required. 3.2 CLEANOUTS A. Install cleanouts out of traffic patterns and flush to floor. Provide offset from sanitary line served. Do not locate under doors or under lockers. Maintain distance between cleanouts on piping 4 in. and smaller, 50 ft.; over 4 in., 100 ft. At changes in direction greater than 45°. Install at base of soil, waste, vent, stacks and roof conductors and where called for. B. Cleanouts: Same nominal size as pipe, but not larger than 4 in. 3.3 HOSE BIBBS A. Install at low points of piping system. END OF SECTION 22 30 10 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 00 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230500-BasicMechanicalRequirements.docx 6/7/2021 SECTION 23 05 00 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ROUGHING A. The Contract Drawings have been prepared in order to convey design intent and are diagrammatic only. Drawings shall not be interpreted to be fully coordinated for construction. B. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to avoid obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. C. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work. D. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings. Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers, air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans. E. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other Divisions, obtain from Owner and other Divisions, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows: 1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation in new location. 2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time, obtain an acknowledgement in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 00 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230500-BasicMechanicalRequirements.docx 6/7/2021 1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Potable water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards. 4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label. 5. All electrical equipment and systems, as a whole, shall be tested and listed by an OSHA approved Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the intended use in accordance with the applicable standards and have a physical label indicating such. 1.3 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after their review. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 1.4 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of General Construction Trade. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 00 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230500-BasicMechanicalRequirements.docx 6/7/2021 5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves. 6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction trade. B. In Existing Buildings: 1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings. 2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening. 3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors. 4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings. 1.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 00 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Project s\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230500-BasicMechanicalRequirements.docx 6/7/2021 5. Plastic pipe/conduit materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars. 6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations. 7. Fire-stopping products shall not be used for sealing of penetrations of non-rated walls or floors. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants. 2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts. 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. 5. 3-M Fire Products. 6. Hilti Corporation. 1.6 ACCESS PANELS A. Provide access panels for required access to respective trade's work. Location and size shall be the responsibility of each trade. Access panels provided for equipment shall provide an opening not smaller than 22 in. by 22 in. Panels shall be capable of opening a minimum of 90 degrees. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper information or failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide General Construction trade with a set of architectural plans with size and locations of access panels. 1.7 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Provide anchor bolts in equipment bases for all equipment provided for the project, whether mounted on new concrete bases or existing concrete bases. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 00 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230500-BasicMechanicalRequirements.docx 6/7/2021 1.8 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide final connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains. C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required. D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. 1.9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide roughing and final connections to all equipment. Provide loose key stops, sanitary "P" traps, tailpiece, adapters, gas or air cocks, and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point to equipment. Provide installation of sinks, faucets, traps, tailpiece furnished by others. Provide cold water line with gate valve and backflow prevention device at locations called for. Provide continuation of piping and connection to equipment that is furnished by others. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves. C. Provide valved water outlet adjacent to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment. D. Install controls and devices furnished by others. E. Refer to Contract Documents for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required. F. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, as required. G. Refer to Manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 00 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs \HVAC\210018-230500-BasicMechanicalRequirements.docx 6/7/2021 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment. Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC. B. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required. C. Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. END OF SECTION 23 05 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 04 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ELECTRIC WIRING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230504-ElectricWiring.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 23 05 04 - ELECTRIC WIRING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services for the complete installation of motor control wiring and temperature control wiring as required in Contract Documents. Provide wiring and conduit, required to connect devices furnished as part of or adjunctive to the automatic temperature control system and for motor control regardless of the source of supply. Control wiring includes 120 volt and lower voltage wiring for control signals directing equipment operation. Control circuits shall be 120 volt maximum. Provide wiring in accordance with requirements specified in Division 26 "Electrical" and the National Electrical Code. Provide devices required for proper system operation, including special electrical switches, transformers, disconnect switches, relays, and circuit breaker protection. B. Coordinate all work with Division 26 "Electrical". 1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Power wiring for motors, motor starters and associated starting and control equipment, as well as the motor starters (except in the case of equipment specified to have packaged control/starters), are included in Division 26 "Electrical", unless otherwise called for. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Wiring shall be installed in compliance with all requirements of Division 26 "Electrical". 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide complete wiring diagrams for equipment systems. Deliver wiring diagrams to proper trades in time for roughing of conduit, equipment connections, and avoid delay in construction schedule. Wiring diagrams and roughing information to be wired as part of the Work of Division 26, "Electrical", shall be clearly indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Refer to Division 26 specifications for required wiring materials. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 04 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ELECTRIC WIRING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230504-ElectricWiring.doc 6/7/2021 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Check electrical wiring pertaining to equipment for completeness and correctness of connections. Correct any misapplied motor and/or motor starter, improper thermal overload device, or device which fails to function and resultant damage, whether due to incorrect connections or improper information on wiring diagrams. 3.2 WIRING FOR CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Provide motor control and temperature control wiring for equipment. All wiring shall be in conduit, unless otherwise noted. Refer to Section 260501 for type of conduit to be used in specific applications. Provide 18 in. length flexible conduit at motors and devices subject to vibration. Conduit supported on 5 ft. centers. Do not attach directly to hot surfaces, piping, or ductwork. Control wiring shall be in separate conduit from all other wiring. Provide green grounding wire circuited from starter, and run ground wire through conduit to each remote auxiliary relay, pushbutton station, remote panel heating device, thermostat, or device with potentials in excess of 50 volts. Size ground wire as required by NEC. B. All temperature control wiring shall be plenum rated type, meeting the requirements of NEC Article 300. C. Provide pushbutton stations, pilot lights, selector switches, auxiliary starter contacts, and other devices required to provide specified functions. D. Where allowable by Code and contract documents, temperature control wiring may be installed without conduit. Installation and wire insulation types shall be as described by NEC, Article 725. All low voltage wiring circuits 50 volt and under shall: 1. Be adequately supported using bridle rings spaced a maximum of 3 ft. on centers or other approved method when installed horizontally above accessible ceilings or run exposed in unfinished areas. 2. Be installed in conduit when run in wall cavity or surface metal raceway where no access is available to wall cavity, in finished areas. 3. Be installed in conduit when installed vertically in Mechanical/Utility Rooms from panels and devices up to above ceiling, or 10 ft. above finished floor if not ceiling. 4. Be installed in conduit in all cases not specifically covered by the above cases, or where subject to physical damage. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 04 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ELECTRIC WIRING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230504-ElectricWiring.doc 6/7/2021 3.3 EQUIPMENT WIRING A. Provide power and control wiring between sections of electrical radiation units, between shipping splits, and between remote panels, thermostats, disconnect switches, and their respective units. Provide control wiring from the package control system, to each respective electric heat coil, reheat coil or motor. Properly mount control package. Power wiring to and including disconnect switch shall be by Division 26, "Electrical". 3.4 FIELD WIRING IN STARTERS, CONTROLLERS AND PANELS A. Wiring within starters, controllers, and temperature control panels, shall be routed neatly in gutter space, away from moving and/or heat producing parts. Provide suitably rated terminal blocks. Do not place more than two wire connections on pilot device or relay terminal. Where more than two circuit connections are required, use terminal blocks. Provide nylon insulated, ring spade terminal for all control wires. Cables and wires shall be neatly bundled and lashed with nylon cable straps. END OF SECTION 23 05 04 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 19 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230519-GaugesAndThermometers.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 23 05 19 - GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTAL A. Submit product data for gauges, thermometers and thermowells. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER PRESSURE GAUGES A. On devices such as pumps, strainers, coils, etc., where the differential pressure is the desired information, install only one pressure gauge with valved connections to the upstream and downstream taps. Include P/T test port in addition to the pressure gauge. Provide a second set of isolating valves at the gauge if gauge location is not within reach of tap points. B. Pressure gauges shall be stainless steel case, non-repairable, silicone filled with minimum 3 1/2" diameter case. Gauges shall have 3% accuracy over the appropriate range of 0-30 psi, 0-60 psi, or 0-160 psi. Gauges shall be suitable for operation at 160°F and include a shut-off ball valve (gauge cocks not permitted). Include a pigtail cooling loop on all steam gauges. Scale shall be selected to provide a reading point at mid-scale during normal operation. No Snubbers. C. Make: Trerice, Weiss, Weksler. 2.2 PIPING SYSTEM THERMOMETERS: A. Thermowells: All thermowells for steam service shall be stainless steel and for water service shall be brass. Thermowell length shall be in accordance with ISA Standards and shall include the appropriate extension to allow for pipe installation. Extension neck shall be included when required to match thermowell and insulation thickness. B. Thermometers: Provide one of the following: 1. Industrial stick type, mercury free, 9" case, with locking adjustable angle body and a case of aluminum or non-metallic material. Thermometer shall be secured to well by tapered bushing and not by set screws. Provide the following characteristics: a. Scale Graduations: 2 ˚F. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 19 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230519-GaugesAndThermometers.doc 6/7/2021 b. Range: Select to provide a mid-scale reading at normal operating temperature. c. Accuracy: 1%. 2. Industrial light-powered digital thermometer with adjustable-angle stem and a case of aluminum or high impact ABS plastic. Thermometer shall be secured to thermowell by tapered bushing and not by set screws. Installation shall insure that thermometer is accessible and has been adjusted to be readable from a 5-foot level as viewed from the floor. Display shall be LCD with digits a minimum of 0.5-inch high with the following characteristics: a. Resolution: 0.1 ˚F. b. Range: -40 to 300 ˚F. c. Sensor: Glass passivated thermistor. d. Accuracy: 1%. 3. Acceptable Manufacturer’s: a. Trerice b. Weiss Instruments c. Weksler 2.3 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS A. 1/4 in. NPT plug shall be capable of reading either a pressure or temperature. 1/8 in. o.d. dual seal core of Nordel 275°F with zero leakage from vacuum to 500 psig. B. Use extended body style to allow for insulation thickness. Seals shall be appropriate for operating water temperature and pressure as follows: 1. Hot water, Glycol - Nordel (EPDM) seat. 2. Chilled water, Cold water - Neoprene seat. C. Makes: Peterson Equipment Company, Sisco P/T plugs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide where called for in the drawings and as noted below. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 19 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230519-GaugesAndThermometers.doc 6/7/2021 B. All gauges and thermometers shall be provided with pressure and temperature ranges appropriate for the system in which they are installed. Select to operate in the middle third of the range under normal operating conditions. Gauges and thermometers shall be suitable for the environment of their installed location, and if installed outdoors shall be acceptable for operation down to an ambient temperature of -20 degrees F. 3.2 WATER PRESSURE GAUGES A. Heating water and chilled water coils: 0 to 60 psi range. B. Provide 1/4 in. ball valve in each pump inlet and outlet tapping, or in piping adjacent to same. Range 30 in. vacuum to 100 psi. 3.3 THERMOMETERS A. Provide thermowells mounted in oversize tee, or elbow if necessary, to provide as little restriction as possible to fluid flow. Provide thermometer stems and thermowell depths of proper length to allow accurate reading. Locate adjacent to control sensing equipment. Install and adjust angles so as to be easily read from floor. B. Cooling Coil: Inlet and Outlet; Range 20° to 120°F. C. Heating Coil: Inlet and Outlets; Range 0° to 220° F. 3.4 TEST PLUG A. Provide test plugs at locations as called for. END OF SECTION 23 05 19 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 23 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VALVES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230523-Valves.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 23 05 23 - VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation and related Work designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTAL A. Valves and accessories. 1.3 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise noted, all valves for shut-off and bypass service shall be ball valves, 2" and below, and butterfly valves 2-1/2" and above. Ball valves are acceptable in 2-1/2" and 3" copper only. B. Valves for balancing operations shall not be ball or butterfly. C. All end connections shall be the same as is used for fittings for 2" and below. Two and one half inches (2-1/2") and above, valves shall be flanged. Solder joints are also acceptable in 2-1/2" and 3" copper piping systems. D. Provide valve tags as called for in Specification Section 230553. E. A manufacturer's valve tag shall be on all valves identifying the valve type and major component materials. F. Install valves after welding adjacent to valve is complete to protect seat and disk. G. Insulated valves shall have extended handle stems. H. All valves for all services shall be fully bi-directional and suitable for dead end service. I. On all valves the packing compression is to be independent of the stem, ball or handle systems. All valve stems are to be blowout proof. Packing shall be accessible without disturbing the insulation. J. Plug or gate valves shall not be used on any services without approval by Facilities Engineering. K. All valves used for vent or drain service on water systems shall be ball valves and have a brass hose connection with cap and chain. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 23 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VALVES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230523-Valves.doc 6/7/2021 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BALL VALVES A. For all water services, low pressure steam, low pressure condensate and all other normal non-corrosive services, ball valves shall be: 1. Body Bronze 2. Body Style Standard Port, two piece 3. Trim 316 Stainless Steel Ball and Stem, with stem extension to raise handle out of insulation 4. Seat Reinforced Teflon (RTFE), 15% glass filled double seal 5. Seat Working P/T Rating 300 psig @ 250°F Minimum 6. Body Working P/T Rating 300 psig @ 300°F Minimum 7. WOG Rating 300 psig Minimum 8. Saturated Steam Rating 150 psig Minimum 9. Actuator Lever handle 10. Acceptable makes: Apollo 70-140; Apollo 70-240; Nibco T-580-70-66, Nibco S-580-70-66; Watts B6000-SS, Watt B6001-SS. 2.2 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. General: 1. All lugged butterfly valves shall be fully bi-directional and bi-directionally deadendable to the full pressure rating of the seat. This is defined to mean that the seat rating is not reduced when pressure is applied in either direction and the valve is capable of serving as a blank flange, when bolted to the end of a line from either side of the valve body and no mating flange is attached. The means of attaching the body to the pipe flange, and of attaching the seat ring to the body shall meet the ANSI class rating of the valve without mechanical failure. This requirement normally results in partially lugged butterfly valves not being acceptable. 2. Packing shall be able to be tightened without removing the insulation. 3. External disc position indicators shall be provided. 4. Valves must be fully factory assembled, set and tested. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 23 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VALVES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230523-Valves.doc 6/7/2021 5. Gear operators on steam valves shall be spaced 4" (four inches) above packing assembly. 6. Install all steam valves with the stem at least 30° off vertical to protect the bottom bearing from debris. 7. On all butterfly valve actuators located greater than 5' (five feet) above the floor, install chainwheels to 5' (five feet) above the floor when the design engineer determines valve service is critical. 8. Handwheel gear operators shall be provided on all butterfly valves for low and high pressure steam and condensate service. This is to allow for slow opening, which minimizes the hydraulic, thermal, flow shock and differential shock stresses on the system due to water hammer. The handwheel gear operator is slow acting. Proper warm-up procedures shall be followed to prevent water hammer. B. Standard Butterfly Valves: For all water services and all other normal non-corrosive services, butterfly valves shall be single offset and have the following requirements: 1. Body Ductile Iron or Cast Iron 2. Body Style Fully lugged 3. Trim 316 or 17-4 pH Stainless Steel 4. Disc Stainless Steel 5. Seat Resilient Seat, fully bi-directional dead-endable, EPDM 6. Seat Working P/T Rating 150 psig @ 250°F Minimum 7. Body Working P/T Rating ANSI 150 8. Actuator: 4" and above………..Handwheel Gear Operator Under 4"………………..Locking Lever Handle 9. Acceptable makes Valve type V-4: Keystone Series 60; Nibco LD-3022; Watts BF-03. 2.3 GAUGE VALVES A. Provide ball valves for shut-off on all pressure gauges at the gauge and separate 1/2" (one half inch) ball valves for the various taps to the gauge on a manifold gauge. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 23 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VALVES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230523-Valves.doc 6/7/2021 2.4 CHECK VALVES A. Two inches (2") and under: 45" swing check, screwed end. B. Two and one half inches (2-1/2") and over: Non-slam type globe style lift check, nonslam type tilting disc or wafer body non-slam type lift check. Double disc or bi-folding disc type valves are not acceptable. 2.5 AIR VENT VALVES A. On chilled water and glycol service use manual vents only. Do not use automatic vent valves. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Provide valves of type called for and where required to service equipment. 2. Provide at major building and systems sections. 3. Provide chain wheels, guides, and chain loops for valves, where called for or in Mechanical Rooms where valves are mounted higher than 8’-0” AFF. 4. Isolating valves for individual fan convectors, room units, terminal units, or other similar apparatus may be inside cabinet or at connection to branch mains where accessible. 5. Locate valves with handles at horizontal position when 5 feet or more above the floor, for greater visibility. Otherwise, locate valves with handles at or above horizontal position. Swing check valves in upright position only. 6. Butterfly valves may be used for water service over 2 in. unless otherwise noted. 7. Ball valves may be used for water service through 3 in., unless otherwise noted. 8. Provide hose threaded valves at low points, strainers, equipment, and as called for. END OF SECTION 23 05 23 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230548-VibrationIsolationOfMechanicalSyste ms.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 23 05 48 - VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish and install vibration control devices, materials, and related items. Perform all work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein to provide complete vibration isolation systems in proper working order. 1.2 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. All vibration isolation mounts shall be supplied by one of the following approved manufacturers: 1. Mason Industries Inc. (Hauppauge, NY) M.I. 2. Kinetics Noise Control Inc. (Dublin, OH) K.N.C. 3. Vibration Mountings & Controls Group. (Butler, NJ) VMC Group 4. Vibration Eliminator Co. (Long Island City, NY) V.E.C. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordinate the size, location and special requirements of vibration isolation equipment and systems with other trades. Coordinate plan dimensions with size of housekeeping pads. B. Provide vibration isolators of the appropriate sizes, with the proper loading to meet the specified deflection requirements. C. Supply and install any incidental materials such as mounting brackets, attachments and other accessories as may be needed to meet the requirements stated herein even if not expressly specified or shown on the Drawings, without claim for additional payment. D. Verify correctness of equipment model numbers and conformance of each component with manufacturer's specification. E. Should any rotating equipment cause excessive noise or vibration when properly installed on the specified isolators, the Contractor shall be responsible for re-balancing, realignment, or other remedial work required to reduce noise and vibration levels. Excessive is defined as exceeding the manufacturer's specifications for the unit in question. F. Upon completion of work, the Architect or the Architect's Representative shall inspect the installation and shall inform the installing contractor of any further work that must be completed. Make all adjustments as directed by the Architect that result from the final inspection. This work shall be done before vibration isolation systems are accepted. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230548-VibrationIsolationOfMechanicalSystems.doc 6/7/2021 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to related sections elsewhere for procedural instruction for submittals. B. Before ordering any products, submit shop drawings of the items listed below. The shop drawings must be completed when submitted and must be presented in a clear, easily understood form. Incomplete or unclear presentation of shop drawings may be reason for rejection of the submittal. C. A complete description of products to be supplied, including product data, dimensions, specifications, and installation instructions. D. Detailed selection data for each vibration isolator supporting equipment, including: 1. The equipment identification mark. 2. The isolator type. 3. The actual load. 4. The static deflection expected under the actual load. 5. The specified minimum static deflection. 6. Steel rails, steel base frames, and concrete inertia bases showing all steel work, reinforcing, vibration isolator mounting attachment method, and location of equipment attachment bolts. 7. Special details necessary to convey complete understanding of the work to be performed. E. Submission of samples may be requested for each type of vibration isolation device. After approval, samples will be returned for installation at the job if requested. All costs associated with submission of samples shall be borne by the Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATOR TYPES A. General: 1. All springs installed out-of-doors shall be zinc electroplated or powder-coated after fabrication. Hardware and other metal parts shall be cadmium-plated or galvanized. Galvanizing shall meet ASTM Salt Spray Test Standards and Federal Test Standard No. 14. 2. All isolators installed out-of-doors shall have base plates with bolt holes for fastening the isolators to the support members. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230548-VibrationIsolationOfMechanicalSystems.doc 6/7/2021 3. Isolator types are scheduled to establish minimum standards. At the Contractor's option, labor-saving accessories can be an integral part of isolators supplied to provide initial lift of equipment to operating height, hold piping at fixed elevations during installation and initial system filling operations, and similar installation advantages. Accessories and seismic restraint features must not degrade the isolation performance of the isolators. 4. Static deflection of isolators shall be as provided in the EXECUTION section and as shown on the Drawings. All static deflections stated are the minimum acceptable deflection for the mounts under actual load. Isolators selected solely on the basis of rated deflections are not acceptable and will be disapproved. B. Type FSN (Floor Spring and Neoprene): 1. Spring isolators shall be freestanding and laterally stable without any housing. Spring diameter shall be not less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at the rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel-to-solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Springs shall be so designed that the ratio of horizontal stiffness to vertical stiffness is approximately 1 (one). All mounts shall have leveling bolts. The spring element in the isolator shall be set in a neoprene cup and have a steel washer or a flat surface in contact with the neoprene to distribute the load evenly over the bearing surface of the neoprene. Alternatively, each isolator shall be mounted on a Type NP isolator. If the NP isolator is used, a rectangular bearing plate of appropriate size shall be provided to load the pad uniformly within the manufacturer's recommended range. If the isolator is to be fastened to the building and the NP isolator is used, grommets shall be provided for each bolt hole in the base plate. If the basic spring isolator has a neoprene friction pad on its base and a NP isolator is to be added to the base, a galvanized steel, stainless steel or aluminum bearing plate shall be used between the friction pad and the NO isolator. If the isolator is outdoors, bearing plates shall not be made of galvanized steel. The NP isolator, beating plate and friction pad shall be permanently adhered to one another and to the bottom of the isolator base plate. 2. Type FSN isolators shall be one of the following products with the appropriate neoprene pad (if used) selected from Type NP or approved equal: a. Type SLF M.I. b. Type FDS K.N.C. c. Series A VMC Group CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230548-Vibratio nIsolationOfMechanicalSystems.doc 6/7/2021 C. Type FSNTL (Floor Spring and Neoprene Travel Limited): 1. Spring isolators shall be freestanding and laterally stable. Spring diameter shall not be less than 0.8 of the compression height of the spring at the rated load. Spring shall have a minimum additional travel-to-solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Springs shall be so designed that the ration of horizontal stiffness to vertical stiffness is approximately one (1). All mounts shall have leveling bolts. All mounts shall have vertical travel limit stops to control extension when weight is removed. The travel limit stops shall be capable of serving as blocking during erection of the equipment. A minimum clearance of 1/4 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the limit stops and the spring to avoid interference with the spring action. 2. The spring element in the isolator shall be set in a neoprene cup and have a steel washer or a flat surface in contact with the neoprene to distribute the load evenly over the bearing surface of the neoprene. Alternatively, each isolator shall be mounted on a Type NP isolator. If the NP isolator is used, a rectangular bearing plate of appropriate size shall be provided to load the pad uniformly within the manufacturer's recommended range. If the isolator is to be fastened to the building and the NP isolator is use, grommets shall be provided for each bolt hole in the base plate. 3. If the basic spring isolator has a neoprene friction pad on its base and a NP isolator is to be added to the base, a galvanized steel, stainless steel or aluminum bearing plate shall be used between the friction pad and the NP isolator. If the isolator is outdoors, bearing plates shall not be made of galvanized steel. The NP isolator, bearing plate and friction pad shall be permanently adhered to one another and to the bottom of the isolator base plate. 4. Type FSNTL isolators shall be one of the following products, with the appropriate neoprene pad (if used) selected from Type NP or approved equal: a. Type SLR M.I. b. Type FLS K.N.C. c. Series AWR VMC Group D. Type FN (Floor Neoprene): 1. Neoprene isolators shall be neoprene-in-shear type with steel reinforced top and base. All metal surfaces shall be covered with neoprene. The top and bottom surfaces shall be ribbed. Bolt holes shall be provided in the base and the top shall have a threaded fastener. The mounts shall include leveling bolts that may be rigidly connected to the equipment. 2. Type FN isolators shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type ND M.I. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230548-VibrationIsolationOfMechanicalSystems.doc 6/7/2021 b. Type RD K.N.C. c. Series RD VMC Group E. Type HSN (Hanger Spring and Neoprene): 1. Vibration isolator hangers shall consist of a free standing and laterally stable steel spring and a neoprene element in series, contained within a steel housing. Spring diameters and hanger housing lower hole size shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc before contacting the housing. Alternatively, other provisions shall be made to allow for a 30° arc of movement of the bottom hanger rod without contacting the isolator housing. Spring diameter shall not be less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at the rated load. Spring elements shall have a minimum additional travel-to-solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. The neoprene element shall be designed to have a 0.3 in. minimum static deflection. The deflection of both the spring element and the neoprene element shall be included in determining the overall deflection of Type HSN isolators. 2. Type HSN isolators shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type 30N M.I. b. Type SRH or SFH K.N.C. c. Type RSH or RFH VMC Group F. Type HN (Hanger Neoprene): 1. Vibration isolator hangers shall consist of a neoprene-in-shear element contained within a steel housing. A neoprene neck brushing shall be provided where the hanger rod passes through the hanger housing to prevent the rod from contacting the hanger housing. The diameter of the hole in the housing shall be sufficient to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc before contacting the hanger housing. 2. Type HN isolators shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type HD M.I. b. Type RH or FH K.N.C. c. Type RHD or RFD VMC Group CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230548-VibrationIsolationOfMechanicalSystems.doc 6/7/2021 2.2 EQUIPMENT BASES A. Type BSF (Base-Steel Frame): 1. Steel base frames shall consist of structural steel section sized, spaced, and connected to form a rigid base which will not twist, rack, deform, or deflect in any manner which will negatively affect the operation of the supported equipment or the vibration isolation mounts. Frames shall be adequately sized to support basic equipment units and motors plus any associated pipe elbow supports, duct elbow supports, electrical control elements, or other components closely related and requiring resilient support in order to prevent vibration transfer to the building structure. The depth of steel frame shall be at least 1/10 the longest dimension of the base and not less than 6 in. The base footprint shall be large enough to provide stability for supported equipment. 2. Frame bases shall include side mounting brackets for attachment to vibration isolators. Mounting brackets shall be located on the sides of the base that are parallel to the axis of rotation of the supported equipment. 3. Type BSF bases shall be supplied by the isolator manufacturer and shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type WFSL M.I. b. Type SFB or SRB K.N.C. c. Series WFB VMC Group B. Type BIB (Base-Inertia Base): 1. Concrete inertia bases shall be formed of stone-aggregate concrete (150 lb./cu. ft.) and appropriate steel reinforcing cast between welded or bolted perimeter structural steel channels. Inertia bases shall be built to form a rigid base that will not twist, rack, deform, deflect, or crack in any manner that would negatively affect the operation of the supported equipment or the vibration isolation mounts. Inertia bases shall be adequately sized to support basic equipment units and motors plus any associated pipe elbow supports, duct elbow supports, electrical control elements, or other components closely related and requiring resilient support in order to prevent vibration transfer to the building structure. Inertia base depth shall be at least 1/12 the longest dimension of the inertia base and not less than 6 in. The base footprint shall be large enough to provide stability for supported equipment. Inertia bases shall include side mounting brackets for attachment to vibration isolators. Mounting brackets shall be located on the sides of the base that are parallel to the axis of rotation of the supported equipment. 2. The steel frame and reinforcement shall be supplied by the vibration isolator manufacturer. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 7 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230548-VibrationIsolationOfMechanicalSyste ms.doc 6/7/2021 3. Frame and reinforcement for Type BIB bases shall be one of the following products or approved equal: a. Type KSL M.I. b. Type CIB-L or CIB-H K.N.C. c. Series WPF VMC Group 2.3 RESILIENT PENETRATION SLEEVE/SEAL A. Resilient penetration sleeve/seals shall be field-fabricated from a pipe or sheet metal section that is 1/2 in. to 3/4 in. larger than the penetrating element in all directions around the element, and shall be used to provide a sleeve through the construction penetrated. The sleeve shall extend 1 in. beyond the penetrated construction on each side. The space between the sleeve and the penetrating element shall be packed with glass fiber or mineral wool to within 1/4 in. of the ends of the sleeve. The remaining 1/4 in. space on each end shall be filled with acoustical sealant to form an airtight seal. The penetrating element shall be able to pass through the sleeve without contacting the sleeve. Refer to details on Drawings. 2.4 RESILIENT LATERAL SUPPORTS A. These units shall either be a standard product of the vibration isolation mounting manufacturer, or be custom fabricated from standard components. These units shall incorporate neoprene isolation elements similar to Type FN that are specifically designed to provide resilient lateral bracing of ducts or pipe. B. Resilient lateral supports shall be one of the following products or approved equal: 1. Type ADA M.I. 2. Type RGN K.N.C. 3. Type MDPA VMC Group 2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Flexible duct connections shall be heavy glass fabric, double neoprene coated, approximately 30 oz. per sq. yd. The clear space between connected parts shall be a minimum of 3 in. and the connection shall have a minimum of 1.5 in. of slack material. Materials for flex connection shall be fire retardant, water and milder resistant, and comply with UL standard 214. B. Flexible duct connections shall be one of the following products or approved equal: 1. Ventfabrics, Inc. "Ventglass". CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 8 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230548 -VibrationIsolationOfMechanicalSystems.doc 6/7/2021 2.6 FLEXIBLE PIPE AND PUMP CONNECTIONS (BRAIDED STAINLESS STEEL) A. Braided stainless steel pump and pipe connector(s) shall be constructed of annular corrugated stainless steel close-pitch hose with stainless steel overbraid. The corrugated metal hose, braid(s) and a stainless steel ring-ferrule/band (material gauge not less than .048 in.) shall be integrally seal-welded using a 100% circumferential, full-penetration TIG weld. Fittings shall be attached using a 100% circumferential TIG weld. B. Braided stainless steel pump and pipe connector(s) must be suitable for operating temperatures up to 850°F. The rated working pressure of the braided metal hose must have a minimum 4:1 safety factor. C. Each braided stainless steel connector shall be individually leak tested by the manufacturer using air-under-water or hydrostatic pressure. D. Braided stainless steel connectors shall carry a three (3) year warranty when installed in accordance with all specifications and installation instructions as described by the manufacturer. E. End fittings shall be flat-faceplate steel flanges with 150# ANSI drilling, and outside diameter, carbon steel MPT ends, flanged by Schedule 40 grooved ends or increasing ends. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Flexhose Pumpsaver or equivalent Keflex, Metraflex, Mason-Mercer. 2.7 THRUST RESTRAINTS A. Thrust restraints shall consist of a spring element in series with a neoprene pad. The unit shall be designed to have the same deflection due to thrust-generated loads as specified for the isolators supporting the equipment. The spring element shall be contained within a steel frame and be designed so it can be pre-compressed at the factory to allow for a maximum of 1/4 in. movement during starting or stopping of the equipment. Allowable movement shall be field-adjustable. The assembly shall be furnished complete with rods and angle brackets for attachment to both equipment and the adjacent fixed structural anchor. The thrust restraints shall be installed on the discharge of the fan so that the restraint rods are in tension. Assemblies that place the rods in compression are not acceptable. The holes in the spring restraint brackets through which the restraint rods pass must be oversized to prevent contact between the brackets and rods. B. Thrust restraints shall be one of the following products or an approved equal: 1. Type WB M.I. 2. Type HSR K.N.C. 3. Type HTR VMC Group CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 9 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230548-VibrationIsolationOfMechanicalSystems.doc 6/7/2021 2.8 GROMMETS A. Grommets shall be specially formed to prevent bolts from directly contacting the isolator base plate, and shall be sized so that they will be loaded within the manufacturer's recommended load range. B. Grommets shall either be custom made by combining a neoprene washer and sleeve, or be one of the following products or an approved equal: 1. Type Isogrommets MBIS, Inc. (Bedford Heights, OH) 2. Type WB Barry Controls (Brighton, MA) 3. Type HG Mason Industries Inc., (Hauppauge, NY) 2.9 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Sealants for acoustical purposes as described in this specification shall be silicone or one of the non-setting sealants indicated below: 1. Acoustical sealant D.A.P. 2. BR-96 Pecora 3. Acoustical sealant Tremco 4. Acoustical sealant U.S.G. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Refer to the PRODUCTS section of this specification for vibration isolation devices identified on the Drawings or specified herein. 2. The static deflection of all isolators specified herein are the minimum acceptable deflections for the mounts under actual load. Isolators selected solely on the basis of rated deflection are not acceptable and will be disapproved. B. Major Equipment: 1. Unless otherwise shown or specified on Drawings, all floor-mounted major equipment shall be set on concrete housekeeping pads. 2. Types and minimum static deflections of vibration isolation devices for major equipment items shall be as specified hereunder. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 10 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018- 230548-VibrationIsolationOfMechanicalSystems.doc 6/7/2021 3. Flexible duct connections shall be installed at all fan unit intakes, fan unit discharges, and wherever else shown on the Drawings. 4. Electrical connections to vibration-isolated equipment shall be flexible, as called for in the electrical portion of the specification. 5. Thrust restraints shall be installed on all suspended fans and on all floor-mounted fans developing 4 in. or more of static pressure, unless the horizontal component of the thrust force can be demonstrated to be less than 10% of the equipment weight. C. Equipment Vibration Isolation Schedule: TYPE VIBRATION ISOLATOR TYPE MINIMUM STATIC DEFLECTION (In.) EQUIPMENT BASE Horizontal Fan Coil Units HN .30 ---- NOTE 1: Equipment base and vibration isolators can be deleted where pumps are provided on slabs on grade and if pumps are placed on concrete inertia slab isolated from surrounding floor slab. D. Miscellaneous Mechanical Equipment: 1. Miscellaneous pieces of mechanical equipment such as converters, pressure reducing stations, dryers, strainers, storage tanks, condensate receiver tanks and expansion tanks which are connected to isolated piping systems shall be vibration-isolated from the building structure by Type NP or Type HN isolators (selected for .01 in. static deflection) unless their position in the piping system requires a higher degree of isolation as called for under "Pipe Isolation". E. Pipes: 1. All chilled water, condenser water, hot water, steam main and engine exhaust piping shall be isolated from the building structure within the following limits: a. Within mechanical rooms. b. Within 50 ft. total pipe length of connected vibration-isolated equipment (chillers, pumps, air handling units, pressure reducing stations, etc.). c. Everywhere for piping that is 5 in. or larger. d. Piping shall be isolated from the building structure by means of vibration isolators, resilient lateral supports, and resilient penetration sleeve/seals. e. Isolators for the first three support points adjacent to connected equipment shall achieve one half the specified static deflection of the isolators supporting the connected equipment. When the required static deflection of these isolators is greater than 1/2 in., Type FSN or Type HSN isolators shall be used. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 11 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230548-VibrationIsolationOfMec hanicalSystems.doc 6/7/2021 When the required static deflection is less than or equal to 1/2 in., Type FN or Type HN isolators shall be used. All other pipe support isolators within the specified limits shall be either Type FN or Type HN achieving at least 1/4 in. static deflection. f. Where lateral support of pipes is required within the specified limits, this shall be accomplished by use of resilient lateral supports. g. Pipes penetrating the building construction shall be isolated from the building structure by use of resilient penetration sleeve/seals. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT A. General: 1. Locations of all vibration isolation devices shall be selected for ease of inspection and adjustment as well as for proper operation. 2. Installation of vibration isolation equipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Isolators: 1. All vibration isolators shall be aligned squarely above or below mounting points of the supported equipment. 2. Isolators for equipment with bases shall be located on the sides of the bases which are parallel to the equipment shaft unless this is not possible because of physical constraints. 3. Locate isolators to provide stable support for equipment, without excess rocking. Consideration shall be given to the location of the center of gravity of the system and the location and spacing of the isolators. If necessary, a base with suitable footprint shall be provided to maintain stability of supported equipment, whether or not such a base is specifically called for herein. 4. If a housekeeping pad is provided, the isolators shall bear on the housekeeping pad and the isolator base plates shall rest entirely on the pad. 5. Hanger rods for vibration-isolated support shall be connected to structural beams or joists, not the floor slab between beams and joists. Provide suitable intermediate support members as necessary. 6. Vibration isolation hanger elements shall be positioned as high as possible in the hanger rod assembly, but not in contact with the building structure, and so that the hanger housing may rotate a full 360° about the rod axis without contacting any object. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 12 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\21 0018-230548-VibrationIsolationOfMechanicalSystems.doc 6/7/2021 7. Parallel running pipes may be hung together on a trapeze, that is isolated from the building. Isolator deflections must be the greatest required by the provisions for pipe isolation for any single pipe on the trapeze. Do not mix isolated and unisolated pipes on the same trapeze. 8. Pipes, ducts and equipment shall not be supported from other pipes, ducts and equipment. 9. Resiliently isolated pipes, ducts and equipment shall not come in rigid contact with the building construction or rigidly supported equipment. 10. The installed and operating heights of equipment vibration-isolated with Type FSNTL isolators shall be identical. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Adjust isolators to provide 1/4 in. clearance between the limit stop brackets and the isolator top plate, and between the travel limit nuts and travel limit brackets. 11. Adjust all leveling bolts and hanger rod bolts so that the isolated equipment is level and in proper alignment with connecting ducts or pipes. C. Bases: 1. No equipment unit shall bear directly on vibration isolators unless its own frame is suitable rigid to span between isolators and such direct support is approved by the equipment manufacturer. This provision shall apply whether or not a base frame is called for on the schedule. In the case that a base frame is required for the unit because of the equipment manufacturer's requirements, and is not specifically called for on the equipment schedule, a base frame recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be provided at no additional expense. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, there is to be a minimum operating clearance of 1 in. between steel rails, steel frame base or inertia bases and the floor beneath the equipment. The isolator mounting brackets shall be positioned and the isolators adjusted so that the required clearance is maintained. The clearance space shall be checked by the Contractor to ensure that no construction debris has been left to short circuit or restrict the proper operation of the vibration isolation system. D. Flexible Duct Connections: 1. Sheet metal ducts and plenum openings shall be squarely aligned with the fan discharge, fan intake, or adjacent duct section prior to installation of the flexible connection, so that the clear length is approximately equal all the way around the perimeter. Flexible duct connections shall not be installed until this provision is met. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between connected sections, and the fabric shall not be stretched taut. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 48 - 13 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VIBRATION ISOLATION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230548-VibrationIsolationOfMechanicalSystems.doc 6/7/2021 E. Flexible Pipe Connections: 1. Install flexible pipe connections in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. F. Thrust Restraints: 1. Thrust restraints shall be attached on each side of the fan at the vertical centerline of thrust. The two rods of the thrust restraints shall be parallel to the thrust force. This may require custom brackets or standoffs. The body of the thrust restraint shall not come in contact with the connected elements. Thrust restraints shall be adjusted to constrain equipment movement to the specified limit. G. Grommets: 1. Where grommets are required at hold down bolts of isolators, bolt holes shall be properly sized to allow for grommets. The hold down bolt assembly shall include washers to distribute load evenly over the grommets. Bolts and washers shall be galvanized. H. Resilient Penetration Sleeve/Seals: 1. Maintain an airtight seal around the penetrating element and prevent rigid contact between the penetrating element and the building structure. Fit the sleeve tightly to the building construction and seal airtight on both sides of the construction penetrated with acoustical sealant. END OF SECTION 23 05 48 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 53 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230553-MechanicalIdentification.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 23 05 53 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALIFICATION A. All identification devices shall comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors and viewing angles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each identification material and device. Submit valve schedule for each piping system typewritten on an 8-1/2 in. x 11in. (Minimum) indicating valve number, location, and valve function. Submit schedule of pipe, equipment and name identification for review before stenciling or labeling. 1.4 MAKES A. Allen Systems, Inc.; Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div.; Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.; Seton Name Plate Corp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. In cases where this is more than one type specified for an application, selection is installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category. B. All adhesives used for labels in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits as called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2. C. For work within an existing building, the mechanical identification shall meet the intent of this section, but match the Owner's existing identification symbology. 2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. Identification Types: 1. Pressure Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color coded, pressure sensitive vinyl pipe markers complying with ANSI A13.1. Provide a 360° wrap of flow arrow tape at each end of pipe label. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 53 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\S pecs\HVAC\210018-230553-MechanicalIdentification.doc 6/7/2021 B. Lettering: 1. Piping labeling shall conform to the following list: Pipe Function Identification Low Pressure Steam LPS Low Pressure Condensate LPC Heating Water Supply HWS Heating Water Return HWR Chilled Water Supply CWS Chilled Water Return CWR Glycol Supply GS Glycol Return GR High Pressure Steam HPS High Pressure Condensate HPC Pumped Condensate PC 2.3 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Valve Tags: 1. Standard brass valve tags, 2 in. diameter with 1/2 in. high numerals. Identify between heating and plumbing services with 1/4 in. letters above the valve number. Lettering to be stamped and in-filled black. Seton, or equal. a. Valve-tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook. B. Valve Chart: 1. Provide valve chart for all valves tagged as a part of this project. Frame and place under clear glass. Hang in Mechanical Room. 2. Valve chart to include as a minimum, valve #, valve size, valve type, valve service description, valve location. 2.4 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025 in. minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 in. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 53 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Pr ojects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230553-MechanicalIdentification.doc 6/7/2021 3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 in. for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 in., 1/2 in. for viewing distances up to 72 in. and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, phenolic (micarta) labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 in. thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 in. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 in. for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 in., 1/2 in. for viewing distances up to 72 in., and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number. D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-in. bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. E. Provide for the following equipment: 1. Air handling units 2. Pumps CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 53 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230553-MechanicalIdentification.doc 6/7/2021 3. Exhaust fans PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide valve tags for all valves provided on project, except for service valves at terminal equipment. B. Provide equipment tags for all equipment listed above. C. Provide piping identification with directional flow arrows for all piping on project, at maximum intervals of 20 feet. For piping installed through rooms, provide at least one pipe label in each room, for each pipe function. END OF SECTION 23 05 53 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingAdjustingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for complete adjusting and balancing Work as required in Contract Documents. B. This Section specifies the requirements and procedures of, mechanical systems testing, adjusting, and balancing. Requirements include measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results. C. Test, adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems: 1. Supply air systems, all pressure ranges; including constant volume and variable volume systems. 2. Return air systems. 3. Exhaust air systems. 4. Hydronic systems; including constant flow and variable flow systems. D. This Section does not include: 1. Testing boilers and pressure vessels for compliance with safety codes; 2. Specifications for materials for patching mechanical systems; 3. Specifications for materials and installation of adjusting and balancing devices. If devices must be added to achieve proper adjusting and balancing, refer to the respective system sections for materials and installation requirements. 4. Requirements and procedures for piping and ductwork systems leakage tests. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide information in report form listing items required by specifications. Results shall be guaranteed. Contractor shall be subject to recall to site to verify report information before acceptance of the report by the Owner's Representative. B. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within thirty (30) days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit testing and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Section 3.1.B, "Preparation", and consistent with those listed in Part 3 of this specification. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingAdjustingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 C. System Readiness Checklists: Within thirty (30) days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, AABC agency shall provide system readiness checklists as specified in Section 3.1.C, "Preparation", to be used and filled out by the installing contractors verifying that systems are ready for Testing and Balancing. D. Examination Report: Provide a summary report of the examination review required in Section 3.1.D to the Engineer, documenting issues that may preclude the proper testing and balancing of the systems. E. Certified report format shall consist of the following: 1. Title sheet with job name, contractor, engineer, date, balance contractor's name, address, telephone number and contact person's name and the balancing technician's name. 2. Individual test sheets for air handlers, terminal units, air distribution, exhaust fans, duct traverses, pumps, air handling coils, reheat coils, radiation, convectors, cabinet unit heaters and unit ventilators. 3. Manufacturer's pump and fan curves for equipment installed with design and actual operating conditions indicated. 4. One complete set of reproducible record contract drawings marked up with terminal unit numbers, room numbers, testports locations, register, grille and diffuser numbers to correlate test sheet. Data shall be provided with reports. 5. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems." or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System testing, adjusting and balancing is the process of checking and adjusting all the building environmental systems to produce the design objectives. It includes: 1. The balance of air and water distribution; 2. Adjustment of total system to provide design quantities; 3. Electrical measurement; 4. Verification of performance of all equipment and automatic controls. B. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment. C. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment (e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling). CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21- 0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingAdjustingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 D. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (submains, branches, and terminals) according to specified design quantities. E. Procedure: Standardized approach and execution of sequence of work operations to yield reproducible results. F. Report Forms: Test data sheets arranged for collecting test data in logical order for submission and review. This data should also form the permanent record to be used as the basis for required future testing, adjusting, and balancing. G. Terminal: The point where the controlled fluid enters or leaves the distribution system. There are supply inlets on water terminals, supply outlets on air terminals, return outlets on water terminals, and exhaust or return supply or outside air inlets or outlets on terminals such as registers, grilles, diffusers, and louvers. H. Main: Duct or pipe containing the system's major or entire fluid flow. I. Submain: Duct or pipe containing part of the systems' capacity and serving two or more branch mains. J. Branch Main: Duct or pipe serving two or more terminals. K. Branch: Duct or pipe serving a single terminal. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Follow procedures and methods published by one or more of the following: 1. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). 2. Individual manufacturer requirements and recommendations. B. Maintain qualified personnel at project for system operation and trouble shooting. TAB contractor shall change sheaves and perform mechanical adjustments in conjunction with balancing procedure. C. Balancing contractor shall be current member of AABC or NEBB. D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in the AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. 1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Before concealment of systems visit the job site to verify and advise on type and location of balancing devices and test points. Make changes as required to balance facilities. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Project s\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingAdjustingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 B. Place systems in satisfactory operating condition. 1. Adjusting and balancing shall be accomplished as soon as the systems are complete and before Owner takes possession. 2. Prior to balancing, adjust balancing devices for full flow; fill, vent and clean hydronic systems, replace temporary filters and strainers. 3. Initial adjustment and balancing to quantities as called for or as directed by the engineer, to satisfy job conditions. 4. All outdoor conditions (Db, Wb, and a description of the weather conditions) at the time of testing shall be documented in the report. 5. Provide sheaves and belts as required to meet system performance requirements for all belt-driven fan motors 10 HP and greater. Adjust and align sheaves to obtain proper settings and operation. Verify motors are not overloading. 6. Installing contractor shall replace balancing cocks, flow balancers and dampers in new systems that cannot be manipulated to satisfy balancing requirements. 7. Identify flow balancers, balancing cocks and dampers in existing systems that cannot be manipulated to satisfy balancing requirements. 8. Traverse main ducts to determine total system air quantities after all outlets have been set prior to final adjustment if the system does not meet design requirements. A sum of room CFM's is not acceptable. 9. If duct construction and/or installation prohibits proper traverse readings, provide coil measurements at main coils and/or fresh air intake traverse with units operating in 100% outside air mode (where applicable). 1.6 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Testing and Balancing agency one complete set of contract documents, change orders, and approved submittals in digital and hard copy formats. B. Controls contractor shall provide required BAS hardware, software, personnel and assistance to Testing and Balancing agency as required to balance the systems. Controls Contractor shall also provide trending report to demonstrate that systems are complete. C. Coordinate meetings and assistance from suppliers and contractors as required by Testing and Balancing agency. D. Provide additional valves, dampers, sheaves and belts as required by Testing and Balancing agency. E. Flag all manual volume dampers with fluorescent or other high-visibility tape. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingAdjust ingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 F. Provide access to all dampers, valves, test ports, nameplates and other appurtenances as required by Testing and Balancing agency. G. Installing contractor shall replace or repair insulation as required by Testing and Balancing agency. H. Have the HVAC systems at complete operational readiness for Testing and Balancing to begin. As a minimum verify the following: 1. Airside: a. All ductwork is complete with all terminals installed. b. All volume, smoke and fire dampers are open and functional. c. Clean filters are installed. d. All fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. e. VFD start-up is complete and all safeties are verified. f. System readiness checklists are completed and returned to Testing and Balancing agency. 2. Hydronics: a. Piping is complete with all terminals installed. b. Water treatment is complete. c. Systems are flushed, filled and air purged. d. Strainers are pulled and cleaned. e. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation. f. All shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100% open. g. Pumps are started, and proper rotation is verified. h. Pump gauge connections are installed directly at the pump inlet and outlet flange or in discharge and suction pipe prior to any valves or strainers. i. VFD start-up is complete and all safeties have been verified. j. System readiness checklists are completed and returned to Testing and Balancing agency. I. Promptly correct deficiencies identified during Testing and Balancing. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingAdjustingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 J. Maintain a construction schedule that allows the Testing and Balancing agency to complete work prior to occupancy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide tools, ladders, recording meters, gauges, thermometers, velometers, anemometers, Pitot tubes, inclined gauge manometers, mangnehelic gauges, amprobes, veltmeters, psychrometers and tachometers required. B. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six (6) months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer. 1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine Bid Documents and submittals and notify Owner's Representative and Engineer of any questions regarding balancing. 1. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper Testing and Balancing of systems and equipment. 2. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. 3. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. B. Prepare a Testing and Balancing Strategies and Procedures Plan that includes: 1. Equipment and systems to be tested. 2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems. 3. Instrumentation to be used. 4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment. C. Prepare system-readiness checklists, as described in the AABC National Standards for Total System Balance, for use by contractors in verifying system readiness for Testing and Balancing. These shall include, at a minimum: 1. Airside: a. All ductwork is complete with all terminals installed. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 7 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingAdjustingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 b. All volume, smoke and fire dampers are open and functional. c. Clean filters are installed. d. All fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. e. Permanent electrical power wiring and VFD start-up is complete and all safeties are verified. f. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. g. Ceilings are installed. h. Windows and doors are installed. i. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided. j. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 2. Hydronics: a. Piping is complete with all terminals installed. b. Water treatment is complete. c. Systems are flushed, filled and air purged. d. Strainers are pulled and cleaned. e. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation. f. All shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100% open. g. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified. h. Pump gauge connections are installed directly at the pump inlet and outlet flange or in discharge and suction pipe prior to any valves or strainers. i. Permanent electrical power wiring and VFD start-up is complete and all safeties are verified. j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided. D. Examine construction and notify Owner's Representative and Engineer of outstanding issues related to balancing, as part of "Examination Report" submittal. 1. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 8 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\2 10018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingAdjustingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 2. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, clean permanent filters are installed, and controls are ready for operation. 3. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected, configured by the controls contractor and functioning. 4. Examine strainers to verify that Mechanical Contractor has replaced startup screens with permanent screens and that all strainers have been cleaned. 5. Examine two-way valves for proper installation and function. 6. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. 7. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. 8. Examine air vents to verify that mechanical contractor has removed all air from all hydronic systems. 9. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, weld-olets, and manual volume dampers prior to pressure testing. Note the locations of devices that are not accessible for testing and balancing. 3.2 TESTING OF EXISTING AIR/WATER SYSTEMS A. Water Systems: Prior to performing any demolition work, Testing and Balancing Contractor shall provide balance report for the existing chilled water system, pumps P-1 and P-2, as specified on the drawings. Report to include pump operating data, water flow and differential pressure readings. No demolition work shall be performed prior to written Engineer review of existing pump conditions. 3.3 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused. 1. Measure and record the operating speed, water flow, and TDH of each pump. 2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. 3. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 9 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingAdjustingAndBa lancing.doc 6/7/2021 B. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work. 1. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated airflow and water flow rates. If 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project. C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fanspeed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 10 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\S pecs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingAdjustingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and function. K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components. L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and treating equipment. 3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system affect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. 5. Obtain approval from Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to sheaves sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes. 6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 11 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingAdjustingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum setpoint airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return-and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load. 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of terminalunit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 12 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingAdjustingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems. 5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the conditions but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 6. Re-measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems. 7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the staticpressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that the adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. 8. Record the final fan performance data. 3.8 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for pumps, coils and heat exchangers. Obtain approved submittals and any manufacturer-recommended testing procedures. Cross check the summation of required coil and heat exchanger gpms with pump design flow rate. B. Verify that hydronic systems are ready for testing and balancing: 1. Check liquid level in expansion tank and verify that tank is set to specified pressure for system fill and expansion. 2. Check that makeup water has adequate pressure to highest vent. 3. Check that control valves are in their proper positions. 4. Check that air has been purged from the system. 5. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. 6. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 13 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593 -TestingAdjustingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm. 1. Measure total water flow. a. Position valves for full flow through coils. b. Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed. c. If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump total dynamic head (TDH) or exchanger pressure drop. 2. Measure pump TDH as follows: a. Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in discharge pipe prior to any valves or fittings. b. Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction pipe prior to any valves or strainers. c. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gauge heights. d. On single stage centrifugal pumps, verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge valve closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. e. With all valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved. 3. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in an overloaded condition. B. Adjust flow measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows. 1. Measure flow in main and branch pipes. 2. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow. 3. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted. C. Adjust flow measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water flows. 1. Measure flow at all terminals. 2. Adjust each terminal to design flow. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 14 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingAdjustingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 3. Re-measure each terminal after all have been adjusted. 4. Position control valves to bypass the coil and adjust the bypass valve to maintain design flow. 5. Perform temperature tests after all flows have been balanced. D. For systems with pressure-independent valves at the terminals: 1. Measure differential pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified range. 2. Perform temperature tests after all flows have been verified. E. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow measuring devices at the terminals: 1. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method. 2. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after all flows have been verified. F. Verify final system conditions as follows: 1. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design. 2. Re-measure all final pump operating data, TDH, volts, amps, static profile. 3. Mark all final settings. G. Verify that all memory stops have been set. 3.10 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Adjust the variable-flow hydronic system as follows: 1. Verify that the differential pressure (DP) sensor is located per the Contract Documents. 2. Determine if there is diversity in the system. B. For systems with no diversity: 1. Follow procedures outlined for constant-flow hydronic systems. 2. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine the system DP setpoint. 3. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with VFD at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100% and allow VFD to control system DP setpoint. Record pump data under both conditions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 15 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingA djustingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 4. Mark all final settings and verify that all memory stops have been set. C. For systems with diversity: 1. Determine diversity factor. 2. Simulate system diversity by closing required number of control valves, as approved by the design Engineer. 3. Follow procedures outlined for constant flow hydronic systems. 4. Open control valves that were shut. Close a sufficient number of control valves that were previously open to maintain diversity, and balance the terminals that were just opened. 5. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine the system DP setpoint. 6. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with VFD at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100% and allow VFD to control system DP setpoint. Record pump data under both conditions. 7. Mark all final settings and verify that all memory stops have been set. D. For systems with pressure-independent valves at the terminals: 1. Measure differential pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified range. 2. Perform temperature tests after all flows have been verified. 3.11 PROCEDURES FOR LABORATORY FUME HOODS A. Before performing laboratory fume hood testing, measure, adjust and record the supply airflow and airflow patterns of each supply air outlet that is located in the same room as the hood. Adjust the air outlet flow pattern to minimize turbulence and to achieve the desired airflow patterns at the face and inside the hood. Verify that adequate make-up air is available to achieve the indicated flow of the hood. B. Measure, adjust and record the airflow of each laboratory fume hood by duct Pitot-tube traverse with the laboratory fume hood sash in the design open position. 1. For laboratory fume hoods installed in variable exhaust systems, measure adjust, and record the hood exhaust airflow at maximum and at minimum airflow conditions. 2. For laboratory fume hoods designed with integral make-up air, measure, adjust, and record the exhaust and make-up airflow. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 16 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-000 0\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingAdjustingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 C. For laboratory fume hoods that are connected to centralized exhaust systems using automatic dampers, adjust the damper controller to obtain the indicated exhaust airflow. D. After balancing is complete, do the following: 1. Measure and record the static pressure at the hood duct connection with the hood operating at indicated airflow. 2. Measure and record the face velocity across the open sash face area. Measure the face velocity at each point in a grid pattern. Perform measurements at a maximum of 12 in. between points and between any point and the perimeter of the opening. a. For laboratory fume hoods designed to maintain a constant face velocity at varying sash positions, also measure and record the face velocity at 50 and 25 percent of the design open sash position. b. Calculate and report the average face velocity by averaging all velocity measurements. c. Calculate and report the exhaust airflow by multiplying the calculated average face velocity by the sash open area. Compare this quantity with the exhaust airflow measured by duct Pitot-tube traverse. Report differences. d. If the average face velocity is less than the indicated face velocity, retest the average face velocity and adjust hood baffles, fan drives, and other parts of the system to provide the indicated average face velocity. 3. Check each laboratory fume hood for the capture and containment of smoke by using a hand-held emitting device. Observe the capture and containment of smoke flow pattern across the open face and inside the hood. Make adjustments necessary to achieve the desired results. E. With the room and laboratory fume hoods operating at indicated conditions all fume hoods installed shall be tested to current ASHRAE 110 Standard. Field test reports must be performed and prepared by an independent third party organization having no affiliation with the manufacturer. Results must indicate tracer gas performance ratings of 4.0 AI 0.05 or better for all tests. Manufacturer must have a representative on-site for all tests and must assist in trouble-shooting and correcting all non-conforming hoods. F. Mannequin-as-Person Test: This test is intended to simulate real-world laboratory conditions in which a real person manipulates real objects in the hood. This test is performed with the investigator standing in front of the ejector while repeatedly moving five (5) objects from one side of the ejector to the other, then rotating the body away from the hood with the elbows next to the body and the arms horizontal in front. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 17 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingAdjustingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 This series of movements is repeated for the duration of the tracer gas test. The air sampling is performed with a sampling probe at the same height as the breathing zone of the mannequin. Results must indicate tracer gas performance ratings of 4.0 AI 0.10 or better for all tests. G. Testing Contractor to provide a complete report of the results of the testing program including an executive summary, an outline of the test procedures and equipment used, a table of the results of each test conducted on each hood and a conclusion and recommendation section discussing the results and (if necessary) recommendations to improve fume hood performance. 3.12 ROOM DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TESTING A. Upon completion of airflow balancing of all supply, return and exhaust registers (within specified tolerances), test and record differential pressures between spaces identified in Construction Documents. B. Adjust volume dampers and/or control set points as required to achieve specified pressure differential. Immediately notify engineer if airflow settings are adjusted beyond tolerances specified in this section to ensure that air change rates or other less apparent considerations have been taken into account. C. Test and record final differential pressure values and adjusted airflows. Clearly indicate positive or negative pressure differential in relation to which adjacent space as there may be multiple adjacent spaces measurements are required for. 3.13 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Zero to plus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Minimum Outside Air: Zero to plus 10 percent. 4. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above. 5. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 6. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 18 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingAdjustingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 3.14 FINAL TEST & BALANCE REPORT A. The report shall be a complete record of the HVAC system performance, including conditions of operation, items outstanding, and any deviations found during the Testing and Balancing process. The final report also provides a reference of actual operating conditions for the owner and/or operations personnel. All measurements and test results that appear in the reports must be made on site and dated by the technicians or Test and Balance Engineers. B. The report must be organized by systems and shall include the following information as a minimum: 1. Title Page: a. AABC or NEBB Certified Company Name. b. Company Address. c. Company Telephone Number. d. Project Identification Number. e. Location. f. Project Architect. g. Project Engineer. h. Project Contractor. i. Project Number. j. Date of Report. k. Certification Statement. l. Name, Signature, and Certification Number. 2. Table of Contents. 3. National Performance Guaranty. 4. Report Summary: a. The summary shall include a list of items that do not meet design tolerances, with information that may be considered in resolving deficiencies. 5. Instrument List: a. Type b. Manufacturer c. Model d. Serial Number e. Calibration Date CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 19 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingAdjustingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 C. Required air side data - Test, adjust and record the following: 1. Motors: a. RPM b. BHP c. Full load amps d. Sheave sizes, number and size of belts e. Shaft diameter f. Complete nameplate data 2. Fans: a. Cfm b. RPM c. Suction static pressure d. Discharge static pressure e. Sheave sizes, number and size of belts, key sizes, shaft, diameter f. Complete nameplate data g. Sketch of system's inlet and outlet connections h. Location of test port 3. Duct: Traverse Zones a. Cfm b. Static Pressure 4. AHU: Air Handling Units, Blower Coil Units, Fan Coil Units a. Minimum outdoor air Cfm b. Total discharge and return Cfm c. Static profile thru unit d. Complete nameplate data 5. Coil: a. Entering air temperature (DB/WB) b. Leaving air temperature (DB/WB) c. Static differential d. Face velocity and area e. Cfm f. Complete nameplate data 6. VAV Boxes and Lab Air Valves: a. Minimum Cfm b. Maximum Cfm CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 05 93 - 20 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230593-TestingAdjustingAndBalancing.doc 6/7/2021 7. Registers/Grilles/Diffusers: a. Cfm b. Set, adjust and record air flow pattern 8. Filter Banks: a. Nameplate data b. Static pressure drop D. Required Fluid Data: Test, adjust and record the following: 1. Heat Transfer Devices: Including, but not limited to air handlers, convectors, fin tube radiation sections, unit ventilators, fan coils, cabinet heaters, unit heaters, heat pumps, heat exchangers. a. GPM (coil and bypass) b. Entering water temperature c. Leaving water temperature d. Water pressure drop e. Complete nameplate data 2. Pumps: a. Check rotation b. GPM c. Pump off pressures (suction and discharge) d. Running suction pressure e. Running discharge pressure f. Running load amps g. RPM - motor h. Complete nameplate motor and pump i. Marked up pump curve illustrating final operating conditions E. One (1) copy of the final test and balance report shall be sent directly to the Engineer of Record. Provide five (5) additional copies to the Contractor. END OF SECTION 23 05 93 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230710-Insulation.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 23 07 10 - INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTAL A. Submit product data, product description, manufacturer's installation instructions, types and recommended thicknesses for each application, and location of materials. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 232010 - Piping Systems and Accessories. B. Section 233100 - Sheet Metal and Ductwork Accessories Construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Insulation, jackets, adhesive, and coatings shall comply with the following: 1. Treatment of jackets or facing for flame and smoke safety must be permanent. Water-soluble treatments not permitted. 2. Insulation, including finishes and adhesives on the exterior surfaces of ducts, pipes, and equipment, shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Asbestos or asbestos bearing materials are prohibited. 4. Comply with 2020 Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State. 5. All adhesives, coatings and sealants used for insulation in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits as called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2. 6. Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Provide insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA or NAIMA Insulation Standards. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230710-Insulation.doc 6/7/2021 7. Insulation shall be clearly marked with manufacturer's name, identification of installed thermal resistance (R) value, out-of-package R value, flame spread and smoke developed indexes in accordance with Energy Code requirements. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fiberglass: Knauf, Manville, Owen-Corning, Certainteed. (Board, Blanket and Liner) B. Flexible Elastomeric: Armacell, K-Flex. C. Adhesives, Coatings, Mastics, Sealants: Childers, Foster. 2.3 PIPE INSULATION (RIGID FIBERGLASS TYPE) A. Product Insulation meeting ASTM C 547, ASTM C 585, and ASTM C 795; rigid, molded, noncombustible. B. 'K' Value: ASTM C 335, 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature installed value. Maximum Service Temperature: 1000°F. C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ/SSL conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, secured with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. D. Field-Applied PVC Fitting Covers with Flexible Fiberglass Insulation: Proto Corporation 25/50 or Indoor/Outdoor, UV-resistant fittings, jacketing and accessories, white or colored. Fitting cover system consists of pre-molded, high-impact PVC materials with blanket type fiberglass wrap inserts. Blanket fiberglass wrap inserts shall have a thermal conductivity ('K') of 0.26 at 75°F mean temperature. Closures to be stainless steel tacks, matching PVC tape, or PVC adhesive per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in pre-forming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges. 2.4 FLEXIBLE TYPE INSULATION A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, foam material. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. Maximum thermal conductivity (k) shall be 0.25 BTU-in/ft2 hr. °F at 75°F mean temperature. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. B. Insulation shall have a flame-spread index of less than 25 and a smoke-developed index of less than 50 as tested by ASTM E 84 and CAN/ULC S-102, "Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". 2.5 DUCT INSULATION A. Duct insulation shall have a thermal resistance (R) value identification mark by the manufacturer applied no less than every 10 feet, as per Energy Code requirements. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230710-Insulation .doc 6/7/2021 B. Flexible Fiber Glass Blanket: 1. Knauf Duct Wrap meeting ASTM C 553 Types I, II and III, and ASTM C 1290; Greenguard compliant. 2. 'K' Value of 0.27 at 75°F mean temperature. Maximum Service Temperature (Faced): 250°F. 3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: FSK conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type II. 4. Installation: Maximum allowable compression is 25%. Securement: Secured in place using outward cinching staples in combination with appropriate pressuresensitive aluminum foil tape. 5. Density: Minimum 1.0 PCF. C. Rigid Fiber Glass Board 1. Knauf Insulation Board meeting ASTM C 612 Type IA and IB. 2. 'K' Value of 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature. Maximum Service Temperature: 450º F. 3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, or FSK or PSK conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type II. 4. Securement: Secured in place using adhesive and mechanical fasteners spaced a minimum of 12 in. on center with a minimum of 2 rows per side of duct. Insulation shall be secured with speed washers and all joints, breaks and punctures sealed with appropriate pressure-sensitive foil tape. a. Concealed Areas: Minimum 3 lb./ft.3. b. Exposed Areas: 6 lb./ft.3 minimum density for duct less than 8 ft. - 0 in. above finished floor. 2.6 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Rigid Fiber Glass Board: 1. Knauf Insulation Board meeting ASTM C 612 Type IA and IB; rigid. 2. Concealed Areas: a. Density: Minimum 3 PCF. b. 'K' Value: ASTM C 177, 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature. Maximum Service Temperature: 450°F. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21 -0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230710-Insulation.doc 6/7/2021 c. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, or FSK conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type II. 3. Exposed Areas: a. Density: Minimum 6 PCF b. 'K' Value: ASTM C 177, 0.22 at 75°F mean temperature. B. Foam Board. Polyisocyanurate core. Foil faced on one side and opposite side faced with white acrylic coated embossed aluminum, 4-mil. equal to "Dow Chemical Therma Heavy Duty". 2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Piping: 1. PVC Pipe Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. PVC Jacket Color: White. 2.8 COATINGS, MASTICS, ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS A. Vapor Barrier Coatings: Used in conjunction with reinforcing mesh to coat insulation on below ambient services temperatures. Permeance shall be no greater than 0.08 perms at 45 mils dry as tested by ASTM F1249. Foster 30-65 Vapor Fas; Childers CP-24, or approved equal. B. Lagging Adhesives: Used in conjunction with canvas or glass lagging cloth to protect equipment/piping indoors. Foster 30-36 Sealfas; Childers CP-50AMV1 Chil Seal, or approved equal. C. Weather Barrier Mastic: Used outdoors to protect above ambient insulation from weather. Foster 46-50 Weatherite; Childers CP-10 Vi Cryl, or approved equal. D. Fiberglass Adhesive: Used bond low density fibrous insulation to metal surfaces. Shall meet ASTM C916 Type II. Foster 85-60; Childers CP-127, or approved equal. E. Elastomeric Insulation Adhesive: Used to bond elastomeric insulation. Foster 85-75; Childers CP-82, or approved equal. F. Elastomeric Insulation Coating: Water based coating used to protect outside of elastomeric insulation. Foster 30-65, or approved equal. G. Insulation Joint Sealant: Used as a vapor sealant on below ambient piping with polyisocyanurate and cellular glass insulation. Foster 95-50; Childers CP-76, or approved equal. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230710-Insulation .doc 6/7/2021 H. Metal Jacketing Sealant: Used as a sealant on metal jacketing seams to prevent water entry. Foster 95-44; Childers CP-76, or approved equal. I. Reinforcing Mesh: Used in conjunction with coatings/mastics to reinforce. Foster Mast A Fab; Childers Chil Glass #10, or approved equal. 2.9 MATERIALS AND SCHEDULES A. See Exhibits at the end of this section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All materials shall be installed by skilled labor regularly engaged in this type of work. All materials shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, building codes, and industry standards. B. Locate insulation and cover seams in the least visible location. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, ends and surfaces of insulation. No glass fibers shall be exposed to the air. C. All pipe or duct insulation shall be continuous through hangers, sleeves, walls, ceiling or floor openings, or sleeves unless not allowed by fire stop system. Refer to Section 230500 "Basic Requirements" for firestop systems. D. Provide thermal insulation on clean, dry surfaces and after piping, ductwork and equipment (as applicable) have been tested. Do not cover pipe joints with insulation until required tests are completed. E. All cold surfaces that may "sweat" must be insulated. Vapor barrier must be maintained; insulation shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken moisture and vapor seal. All hangers, supports, anchors, or other projections that are secured to cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Extra care must be taken on piping appurtenances to insure a tight fit to the piping system. For piping systems with fluid temperatures below ambient, all vapor retarder jacket (ASJ) seams must be coated with vapor barrier coating. All associated elbows, fittings, valves, etc. must be coated with vapor barrier coating and reinforcing mesh to prevent moisture ingress. Valve extension stems require Elastomeric insulation that is tight fitting to the adjoining fiberglass system insulation. Pumps, strainers, air separators, drain valves, etc. must be totally encapsulated with Elastomeric insulation. F. Items such as boiler manholes, handholds, clean-outs, ASME stamp, and manufacturers' nameplates, may be left un-insulated unless omitting insulation would cause a condensation problem. When such is the case, appropriate tagging shall be provided to identify the presence of these items. Provide neatly beveled edges at interruptions of insulation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230710-Insulation.doc 6/7/2021 G. Provide protective insulation as required to prevent personnel injury: Piping from zero to seven feet above all floors and access platforms including hot (above 140°F) piping and any other related hot surface. H. All pipes shall be individually insulated. I. If any insulation material has become wet because of transit or job site exposure to moisture or water, the contractor shall not install such material, and shall remove it from the job site. 3.2 PIPE INSULATION A. Insulate piping systems including fittings, valves, flanges, unions, strainers, and other attachments installed in piping system, whether exposed or concealed Use cork insulation tape equal to Rubatex #Q-201 for piping inside unit ventilators or fan coil valve compartment. B. Insulation installed on piping operating below ambient temperatures must have a continuous vapor retarder. All joints, seams and fittings must be sealed. C. Hanger Shields: Refer to Section "Piping Systems and Accessories". D. Metal shields shall be installed between hangers or supports and the piping insulation. Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed as required between the pipe and the insulation shields. Inserts shall be of equal thickness to the adjacent insulation and shall be vapor sealed as required. 1. Pre-Insulated Type: Butt insulation to hanger shields and apply a wet coat of vapor barrier cement to the joints and seal with 3 in. wide vapor barrier tape. 2. Field Insulated Type: Provide Hamfab Co. "H" blocks per manufacturers recommended spacing between pipe and shield. 3. Tape shields to insulation. E. Joints in section pipe covering made as follows: 1. All ends must be firmly butted and secured with appropriate butt-strip material. On high-temperature piping, double layering with staggered joints may be appropriate. When double layering, the inner layer should not be jacketed. 2. Standard: Longitudinal laps and butt joint sealing strips cemented with white vapor barrier coating, or factory supplied pressure sensitive adhesive lap seal. 3. Vapor Barrier: For cold services, Longitudinal laps and 4 in. vapor barrier strip at butt joints shall be sealed with white vapor barrier coating. Seal ends of pipe insulation at valves, flanges, and fittings with white vapor barrier coating. When using polyisocyanurate or cellular glass on below ambient piping/duct, seal all insulation joints with insulation joint sealant. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 7 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\21001 8-230710-Insulation.doc 6/7/2021 F. Fittings, Valves and Flanges: 1. Chilled Water: Premolded fitting insulation of the same material and thickness 2. Hot Services and Domestic Cold Water: Premolded fitting insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjacent pipe insulation. 3. White PVC jacketing, with continuous solvent weld of all seams. Tape all fittings. G. Flexible Pipe Insulation: 1. Split longitudinal joint and seal with adhesive. 2. Fittings made from miter-cut pieces properly sealed with adhesive, or ells may be continuous. 3. Insulation shall be adhered to 100% of the pipe. 4. Where exposed outdoors, provide with UV resistant PVC jacketing. H. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 1 in. overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturers recommended adhesive. I. Apply PVC jacketing to exposed, insulated pipe, valves, fittings, and specialties, at an elevation of 8 feet or less above finished floor in mechanical/electrical rooms, penthouses, and services aisles/pipe chases. Fittings of aluminum-jacketed piping may be either aluminum or standard PVC fitting covers. 3.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Provide external thermal insulation for duct. Not required where ducts have internal acoustical insulation. Make special provisions at dampers, damper motors, thermometers, instruments, and access doors. Apply as follows: 1. Rigid Board Type: Impale board over mechanical fasteners, welded pins or adhered clips, 12 in. to 18 in. centers; minimum of two rows per side. Secure insulation with washer clips. Self-adhesive clips are not acceptable. Staple all joints. Seal breaks and joints in vapor barrier with 4 in. wide matching tape and 4 in. glass-fab applied with specified vapor barrier coating. Apply tape over corner beading where exposed. 2. Flexible Blanket Type: Install Duct Wrap to obtain specified R-value using a maximum compression of 25%. Installed R-value shall be per ECC of NYS. Firmly butt all joints. The longitudinal seam of the vapor retarder must be overlapped a minimum of 2 in. Where vapor retarder performance is required, all penetrations and damage to the facing shall be repaired using pressuresensitive foil tape, and coated with vapor barrier coating prior to system startup. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 8 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230710-Insulation.doc 6/7/2021 Pressure-sensitive foil tapes shall be a minimum 3 in. wide and shall be applied with moving pressure using a squeegee or other appropriate sealing tool. Closure shall have a 25/50 Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Rating per UL 723. Duct wrap shall be additionally secured to the bottom of rectangular ductwork over 18 in. wide using mechanical fasteners on 18 in. centers. Self-adhesive clips are not acceptable. Care should be exercised to avoid over-compression of the insulation during installation. 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Apply insulation with joints firmly butted as close as possible to the equipment surface. Insulation shall be secured as required with adhesive, mechanical fasteners or banding material. Fasteners shall be located a maximum of 3 in. from each edge and spaced no greater than 12 in. on center. B. Vapor retarders shall overlap a minimum of 2 in. at all seams and be sealed with appropriate pressure-sensitive tape and vapor barrier coating. All penetrations, facing damage, and mechanical fasteners shall be covered with a minimum 2 in. overlap of tape and vapor barrier coating. C. Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: Secure fiberglass with pins, studs, or clips. Field apply 8 oz. knit fiberglass cloth, cemented and applied over standard jacket. Properly cut at fittings to avoid wrinkles and coat with white lagging adhesive/coating. Leave ready for painting. D. For equipment insulation exposed in mechanical rooms or subject to mechanical abuse, finish with minimum 0.020 in. thick PVC Jacketing or metal. All other insulation shall be finished as appropriate for the location and service or as specified on the drawings. 3.5 EXISTING INSULATION A. Patch existing insulation damaged during the course of the work. B. Insulate existing piping, ductwork, and equipment as called for. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 9 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230710-Insulation.doc 6/7/2021 EXHIBIT "I" - PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL THICKNESS REMARKS Hot water and glycol/hot water (200°F and lower) Glass fiber 1-1/2 in. and Larger: 2 in. 1-1/4 in. and Smaller: 1-1/2 in. Chilled water, glycol/chilled water Glass fiber 1-1/2 in. and Larger: 1 in. 1-1/4 in. and Smaller: 1/2 in. Concealed AC unit condensate drains Glass fiber or flexible elastomeric All Sizes: 1 in. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 07 10 - 10 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation INSULATION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-23071 0-Insulation.doc 6/7/2021 EXHIBIT "II" - DUCT INSULATION MATERIALS SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL THICKNESS REMARKS HVAC Supply Within mechanical rooms or exposed at 8 feet or less above finished floor: Rigid fiberglass Concealed: Flexible fiberglass ……………..……..1-1/2 in. ……………..………….2 in Min. installed R value of 6 Min. installed R value of 6 Supply ducts, exposed within the conditioned space served ………………. …NOT INSULATED… Does not include the associated supply ductwork within the Mechanical Room or supply duct to the conditioned space. Return-air ducts within heated building envelope ………………. …NOT INSULATED… …………… END OF SECTION 23 07 10 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 23 09 23 - BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 INTRODUCTION A. The Building Automation Control System (BACS) is configured as a network with control functions at multiple levels, and with multiple points of operator control and supervision. The BACS includes centralized head-end computers, the Energy Management and Controls System (EMCS) workstations, data transmission systems, field panels and controllers, necessary interfacing controls, sensors and actuators. The controllers contain microprocessors and other supporting electronics that perform local control functions and execute application programs without requiring communications with the centralized head-end computers or workstations. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Drawings. Provide a complete Direct Digital Control System, to perform the functions described in this Section. Provide wiring and conduit required to connect devices furnished as a part of, or accessory to, this automatic control system. Control wiring is defined as wiring up to and including 120 volts. Install wiring in accordance with requirements of "Electrical Wiring" in Section 15A019, and the National Electrical Code. Provide all required devices for proper system operation, including special electrical switches, transformers, relays, pushbutton stations, etc. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The complete automatic temperature control system shall be comprised of electronic control devices with a microprocessor based Direct Digital Control System. All work shall be installed only by skilled mechanics. B. The Temperature Control Trade/Supplier shall have a minimum of five years experience in systems of similar size, type and complexity installed within a 100 mile radius. C. The Temperature Control Trade/Supplier shall have a local service department (within a 50 mile radius) and have available a minimum of three factory trained technicians within a 24 hour period. D. All components shall be fully tested and documented to operate as a complete system. E. Supplier must guarantee that all replacement parts will be carried in stock for a period of 10 years minimum from the data that the system is commissioned. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, a brochure containing the following: 1. Detailed piping and wiring control diagrams and systems description for each system under control. 2. Detailed layout and nameplate list for component control panels and DDC panels. 3. Submit a valve and damper scheduled showing size, pressure drop configuration, capacity, and locations. Provide apparatus Bulletins and data sheets for all control system components. 4. A complete listing of input and output points, control loops and/or routines, including time of day functions, and facilities management system functions for each controlled system. This listing shall include point logical names, identifiers, and alarmable ranges. 5. Provide as part of a separate submittal a hard copy of all graphics showing system components, sensor locations, setpoints and fixed/variable data. Engineer shall review and approve graphic format prior to final acceptance of system. 1.5 WORK INCIDENTAL TO TEMPERATURE CONTROL TRADE A. Furnish the following materials: 1. For piping work: a. Control valves in piping. b. Immersion sensing wells in piping systems. c. Valved pressure taps. 2. For sheet metal work: a. All automatic dampers, assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting linkages and extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper and motors. b. Provide access doors to other means of access through ducts or ceilings and walls for service and adjustment of controllers, valves, and dampers. B. Furnish written details, instructions and supervision for the above trades to Ensure proper installation size, and location of any equipment furnished for installation by others. C. Electrical trade to provide 120 volt dedicated emergency power with surge protection to all DDC panels and operator workstations. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\ 210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 D. Provide 120 volt dedicated emergency power and control transformers at all microprocessor based VAV terminal unit controllers and laboratory air valve controllers. As an option, provide control transformers sized to serve multiple VAV terminal unit controllers and laboratory air valve controllers. Provide a junction box or boxes to obtain power, on a per floor basis. See electrical plans for locations. 1.6 CONTROL SYSTEM GUARANTEES A. Guarantee the new control system to be free from defects in material and workmanship, for a period of one year after final acceptance. Guarantee System to: 1. Maintain temperatures within 1°F above and below setting. 2. Humidity devices shall maintain relative humidity conditions within 3% of span 0-100% RH. B. Provide one year maintenance service of control components, to start concurrently with the guarantee specified above. Such service shall include software updates and 24-hour, 7-day emergency and seasonal inspection and adjustment of operating controls and replacement of parts or instruments found deficient and defective during this period. C. The Contractor will provide monitoring of the DDC system as soon as the system is operating and then for a minimum of one (1) year (24 hours/day, 7 days/week) after the acceptance date. A monthly report will be sent to the Owner with a description of general system status and any alarms or off-normal conditions. D. The Contractor will guarantee future availability of continuous, 24-hour, 7-day a week service for the systems through available maintenance contracts. 1.7 SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION A. When the Work has been completed, completely adjust and calibrate the control system. Review the operation of each system input and output, control loops and/or software routings, timing functions, operator entered constants and facilities management functions and observe that they perform their intended functions. Provide a complete values and points log, printed every hour, for one week to demonstrate control functions and programming. Provide one point log for summer operation and one winter. Points to be trended shall be selected by the engineer. When above procedure has been completed and the control system is operating satisfactorily, submit a letter with one copy of completed values and points log to the Owner's Representative advising them that the control system is 100% complete and operates in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. After review and approval of points log by the Engineer, the control system trade shall schedule a technician on site for field review of system components, operation and graphics as part of final system appearance. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\ 210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 1.8 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. The following standards shall govern the design and selection of equipment supplied to fulfill the requirements of this section: 1. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2012: BACnet®. - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks, as amended, and hereinafter referred to as "BACnet". American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 2012. 2. ATA/ANSI 878.1 (1992), ARCNET Local Area Network. 3. ISO/IEC 8802-3 (1993), Information processing systems - Local area networks - Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications. . 1.9 PROCEDURES A. For connection of devices and reconfiguration of existing devices on the Cornell University Building Automation and Control System Network: 1. Contractor making changes to existing devices or installing new devices on the Cornell University Building Automation and Control System Network shall contact the Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) Operation at 607255-5777 at least one (1) business day in advance of the anticipated work to initiate a service request with the Cornell Control Shop. The requestor shall provide the following information: a. Desired time to ,start work and the expected duration b. The IP address of the device to be installed or configured c. The physical location of the device including facility and room number. d. Cell phone contact information for the installer. 2. Work will be permitted from 7:00 AM — 1:00 PM on business days Monday through Thursday. The one (1) day notice requirement and hours restrictions will be waived if the work is deemed an emergency. Personnel shall notify EMCS when the work is complete. Personnel are expected to be able to respond on site if contacted by EMCS to correct any anomalies related to the work for a period of up to four (4) hours after work is complete or if released by the FMCS, whichever is sooner. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Project s\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 1.10 BACNET/IP CHECKOUT A. Prior to connection to the campus backbone network, it must be demonstrated to Cornell personnel that these criteria have been met: 1. The LP address, subnet mask and IP gateway address of the device to be connected must be shown to be correct for the network connection about to made. 2. The device's Device Instance Number (DIN) must be shown to conform to Cornell standards. 3. In the case of devices that route to subordinate BACnet MS/TP or ARCNET networks, the network numbering must be shown to conform to Cornell numbering standards. 4. The BACnet alarm Recipient List must contain the DIN (or BACnet Address, i.e., (BACnet Network Number, MAC Address)) of both the appropriate vendor server (ALC) and the EMCS alarm server (currently Jarlsberg, DIN 510). 5. For each device containing network variables, a list of network variables must be provided showing that each references a valid network-accessible point. 6. For each device containing points that are to issue Unconfirmed COV Notifications, a list of the points and their respective Change of Value (COY) increments must be provided to prove that the device will not generate COV storms. 7. BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD) capability must be shown to be disabled unless explicitly authorized by Cornell, i.e., the device's Broadcast Distribution Table (BDT) must be shown to be empty or non-existent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. This section defines requirements for the sensors, controllers, computers, and generally the components that make up the system and the means and methods by which they are installed. B. Software and Hardware Updates - At the end of the first six months, and during the second six months, the Contractor shall update the equipment and any controllers, servers, workstations and HMI Web servers with the latest modifications and improvements in software, firmware, and hardware that the manufacturer may have incorporated in the furnished equipment. C. Devices (i.e., sensors, meters, instruments, etc.) that are resettable must be installed in a readily accessible location (e.g., the device must be accessible at floor level without the use of a ladder). No device shall require shutting down a building system for calibration. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-23092 3-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 D. Devices that are installed in an exposed location (i.e., not mounted within a cabinet) must be suitable for such installations (e.g., do not install a device that is intended to be installed in a cabinet in an exposed location). 2.2 CONTROLLERS A. Overview 1. The control system shall consist of an inter-network of controllers. B. Controller Installation Requirements 1. Building- and system-level controllers shall be capable of operating independently, in stand-alone fashion, with no communication to other devices on the network while performing their monitoring and control routines using programs and operating parameters stored in the controllers’ memory. 2. All points and functions that make up a functional system (typically that shown on one control schematic) shall be included in one controller to qualify for this stand-alone functionality. Where control sequences depend on global variables such as OAT, the controller shall have the capability of either using the last value or a default value. Design professional shall specifically indicate point groupings for stand-alone capability. Examples of required functional point groupings are: a. All points and functions required to control an air handler with all directly associated supply, return, and exhaust fans. This excludes the terminals that may be associated with that air handler. Values that may be received across the network include: 1) Humidity; 2) Emergency power source indication; 3) Terminal based reset parameters; 4) Smoke modes. b. All points associated with the supply side of a hydronic system: pumps, flow meters, temperature and pressure sensors, proof indications, valves etc. This excludes the terminals on that hydronic system. Values that may be received across the network include: 1) OAT and humidity; 2) Emergency power source indication; 3) Terminal based reset parameters. c. All points and functions required to control one terminal system including dampers, valves, flow meters, temperature and humidity sensors, etc. This does not include the scheduling period or any OA that may be necessary for control. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 7 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-23092 3-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 3. Controller software must be capable of detecting hardware and software failures and forcing all outputs to a predetermined state, consistent with the failure mode requirements defined on the drawings. In this state it shall issue an alarm. 4. Controllers must include sufficient memory for all required operation and all required trending, when trending is buffered in the controller. Where control system operation is hindered by the shortage of memory, contractor shall, at no cost to the Owner, either upgrade the memory or provide multiple controllers. The mix of points for multiple controllers shall not violate the stand-alone requirements. Volatile memory is required to be backed up in the event of power loss. Software stored in non-volatile memory will not have to be downloaded from the central server after an interruption of power occurs. 5. Controllers used for time-scheduled operations must be equipped with a battery backed internal real-time clock function to provide a time base for implementing time-dependent programs. Provision shall be made for the routine updating of the controllers’ clocks via a time master. 6. Resumption of power after an outage shall cause the controllers to automatically restart and establish communications as needed by their applications. Controller shutdown based on a self-diagnosed failure in the power supply, hardware, or software must set each piece of controlled equipment to a predetermined failure mode. 7. Controllers shall be powered from the most reliable source that powers any of the systems it serves. In the situation where a controller will be required to continuously collect data to be transmitted to a workstation, or where it monitors critical recovery information such as the presence of emergency power, it may be necessary to provide a UPS for the controller as well as any critical sensors. Where panels are provided with a different power source as the equipment (such as when the panel is on a UPS), the panel shall be provided with a means of monitoring the power source to the controlled equipment. This can be a dedicated power monitor or a value coming from transfer switch contacts. 2.3 SENSORS A. General 1. The following indicates basic requirements for the I/O devices. 2. All sensors and transmitters shall be located in accessible locations that do not require system shutdown for calibration. Locate all remote transmitters in control panels 5' above finished floor. B. Temperature Sensors 1. Sensor Resolution - When matched with A/D converter of the controller, sensor range shall provide a resolution of no less than 0.4°F (unless noted otherwise). CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 8 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomat ionControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 2. Room Temperature Sensor - These shall be an element contained within a ventilated cover, suitable for wall mounting. Provide an insulated base. a. Sensing element – RTD or thermistor +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibration point; b. Provide set-point adjustment and appropriate cabling where indicated for zones. Public spaces shall not have setpoint adjustment. The setpoint adjustment shall be a warmer/cooler indication that shall be scalable via the BACS system; c. Provide an occupancy override button on the room sensor enclosure and appropriate cabling where indicated (this shall include all office spaces). This shall be a momentary contact closure; d. Provide the sensor with an alphanumeric display; e. Provide sensor with communications jack and appropriate cabling for connection to the BACS. f. Temperature sensor shall be mounted at 46" A.F.F. to center line of device. Coordinate mounting height with all devices on a common wall. All devices shall be installed in alignment. 3. Single Point Duct Temperature Sensor - These shall consist of a sensing element, junction box for wiring connections, and a gasket to prevent air leakage or vibration noise. The temperature range as required for resolution is indicated above. The sensor probe shall be stainless steel. a. Sensing element - RTD or thermistor +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibration point. 4. Averaging Duct Temperature Sensor - These shall consist of an averaging element, junction box for wiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage. Provide sensor lengths and quantities to result in one foot of sensing element for each, two square feet of coil/duct face area. Temperature range shall be as required for resolution as indicated above. a. Sensing element - RTD or thermistor +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibration point. 5. Liquid Immersion Temperature Sensor a. These shall include brass or stainless steel thermowell, sensor and connection head for wiring connections; b. Sensing element - RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.4°F accuracy at calibration point. The temperature range shall be as required for resolution of 0.3°F; CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 9 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomat ionControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 c. Refer to Cornell’s metering specification for temperature sensors that are used for metering. 6. OA Sensors a. These shall consist of a sensor, sun shield, utility box, and watertight gasket to prevent water seepage. The temperature range shall be as required for the resolution indicated above; b. Sensing element - RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.4°F accuracy at calibration point; c. On major/critical systems, one shall be provided for each; d. Sensors shall be located on a north wall of the building and installed with stand-offs. On 100% OA systems and lab buildings, locate sensor in outside air plenum. e. Provide one sensor per mechanical room or building-level controller. C. Pressure Sensors - The pressure transducers will be either diaphragm or strain gauge types: 1. Air Differential Pressure Transmitters: a. Applications: Duct static pressure, air flow VP, filter DP, Fan DP, etc.; b. Provide the smallest range feasible for the application. Provide zero and span adjustments; c. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1% of full scale for static and 0.25% for air velocity; d. Acceptable Manufacturers (Airflow): Air Monitor, Paragon; e. Acceptable Manufacturers (Filter DP): Dwyer; f. Acceptable Manufacturers (General and Static Pressure): Mamac, Setra. 2. Liquid Differential Pressure Transmitters: a. Pressure transmitters shall gauge pressure in the form of a linear 4 to 20 mA or 0-10 VDC signal. Sensor shall be installed with a valve manifold and pressure/temperature test ports in lieu of pressure gauges. DP transmitter shall be rated for 150 PSIG static pressure; b. Span shall be no greater than 2 times the working differential pressure of the system to allow the highest possible resolution; CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 10 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSyste m.doc 6/7/2021 c. Pressure transmitters shall meet the following performance criteria: 1) External span and zero adjustments; 2) 1% accuracy over the entire span; 3) Wetted parts: Stainless steel with a silicone fluid-filled diaphragm; 4) Repeatability: Plus or minus 0.5% at maximum span. d. Install all transmitters with a three-valve manifold for venting, draining, and calibration; e. Acceptable Manufacturers (Gauge and Differential Pressure): Mamac, Setra. D. Flow Sensors 1. General - Flow sensors shall be carefully placed to ensure flow profiles that are required for accurate flow sensing. Designs shall specifically indicate the location of the sensors and indicate the length of unobstructed duct or pipe upstream and downstream from the sensor. 2. Water: a. Water flow sensors shall meet the requirements necessary for use for test and balance duty as defined in the DCS specifications; b. Water flow sensors for monitoring only shall follow CHW standards defined in the DCS specifications. 3. Air Flow (For Laboratory VAV and AHU/Duct Flow Stations): a. Use a pitot-tube averaging grid of a material compatible with the environment. Fan inlet grids shall be used where possible to measure fan flow; b. Accuracy: +/- 0.25%; c. Stability: +/- 0.5% of full scale per year or less; d. Auto-zero capability by venting ports to atmosphere; e. All fan inlet style flow elements shall be provided by the fan vendor and shall not block or affect fan efficiency; f. Acceptable Manufacturers: Air Monitor, Paragon; CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 11 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 g. Field calibrate to +/- 5% of field-measured airflow. 4. Air Flow (For Duct Airflow Monitoring): a. Use a pitot-tube averaging grid of a material compatible with the environment; b. Accuracy: +/- 0.25%; c. Stability: +/- 0.5% of full scale per year or less; d. Field calibrate to +/- 5.0% of field-measured airflow. E. Current Switches (CS) 1. For Constant Speed Motors: a. CS shall be provided for status indication of constant speed motors; b. Switch shall indicate loss of status when current falls below an adjustable trip point; c. CS shall include LED indication of status; d. Acceptable Manufacturer: Veris Industries (H708/ H908 series). 2. For Variable Speed Motors: a. Typically, status indication that indicates VSD or bypass operation shall be derived from contacts on the VSD. The VSD must be specified to include this option; b. Otherwise, a current switch shall be provided for status indication. The switch shall be microprocessor based and suitable for use on a VSD; c. Self-adjusting trip setpoint; d. Factory programmed to detect belt loss undercurrent conditions; e. CS shall include LED indication of status; f. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hawkeye. F. Combination Temperature/CO2 Sensors/Humidity: 1. Wall mount: Combination transmitter shall be mounted at 46 in. A.F.F. to center line of device. Coordinate mounting height with all devices on a common wall. All devices shall be installed in alignment. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 12 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923- BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 2. Power requirements: 12 VDC @ 15 mA to 190 mA. 3. Temperature sensing element: +/- 0.5 deg. F accuracy at calibration point. 4. CO2 sensing equipment: +/- 30 PPM or +/- 3% accuracy at 400 to 1,250 PPM. 5. Humidity sensing elements humidity from 10% to 90% with +/- 1.8% accuracy. Element shall have less than 1% drift per year. 6. Acceptable Manufacturer: Automated Logic ZSP-HC-ALC or design equal. G. Combination Temperature/Humidity: 1. Wall mount: Combination transmitter shall be mounted at 46 in. A.F.F. to center line of device. Coordinate mounting height with all devices on a common wall. All devices shall be installed in alignment. 2. Power requirements: 12 VDC @ 15 mA to 190 mA. 3. Temperature sensing element: +/- 0.5 deg. F accuracy at calibration point. 4. Humidity sensing elements humidity from 10% to 90% with +/- 1.8% accuracy. Element shall have less than 1% drift per year. 5. Acceptable Manufacturer: Automated Logic ZSP-H-ALC or design equal. H. Dewpoint Sensors 1. Units shall be suitable for duct, wall (room) or outdoor mounting. Units shall be two-wire transmitters utilizing bulk polymer resistance change or thin film capacitance change humidity sensors. Units shall produce linear continuous output of 4-20 mA for dewpoint temperature (°F). Sensors shall have the following minimum performance and application criteria: a. Accuracy: +/- 1.8°F; b. Sensor Operating Range: As required by the application; c. Long Term Stability: Less than 1% drift per year; d. Digital display. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Vaisala only. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 13 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923- BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 2.4 CONTROL VALVES A. General 1. All valves shall be provided and sized by the control trade. 2. Valves shall be applicable for the rated pressure and temperature service. Close off pressures must be determined in concert with the actuators and valves shall be provided to close off against extreme anticipated conditions. 3. Modulating valves shall be carefully selected to control in a smooth and stable fashion across the range of anticipated conditions. “Split ranging” of heating and cooling valves controlled by the BACS is not acceptable. A separate output from the BACS shall be provided for all control valves. General guidelines are indicated below. When the selection criteria indicated below are not met, flow characteristic analyses shall be submitted to demonstrate reasonable correlation between stroke and flow. Valves with a CV greater than 30 may be pneumatically actuated, but should only be used if a cost benefit analysis shows they are preferred. Actuator positioning requirements are as follows for each type, if used: a. Electric Input: 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC; b. Electrically piloted valves shall have a pneumatic actuator with positioner; c. Pilot positioners shall be required as necessary to keep the valve closed under the maximum differential pressure. 4. The BACS output to modulating valves shall be analog. In addition: a. Terminal reheat valves shall be proportional; b. Fan coils and similar terminal device valves shall be proportional; c. Radiation valves shall be two-position or proportional; d. Unit heaters shall be two-position or proportional. B. Water 1. General - Modulating water valves will generally be ball valves with an equal percentage characteristic. Modulating water valves shall typically be sized for 50-100% of the typical controlled circuit pressure drop at 70% wide open CV. The minimum design CV shall be no less than 1.9. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 14 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 2. Chilled Water Building Mixing Valve (two-way) a. Rotary-segmented ball ported industrial control valve; b. Body: Flanged carbon steel; c. Seat: Composition or stainless/Teflon; d. ANSI leakage class: IV; e. Trim: 316 Stainless; f. Actuator: Electric g. Typically CV shall be selected to give a 2 PSIG drop @ maximum building flow with the valve at the 90% open CV. Verify the necessary pressure drop with the Department of Utilities and Energy Management (Utilities). For buildings located at extremities, check with Utilities since requirements may not be typical; h. Valve shall seat against 40 PSI differential pressure (typical values; check with Cornell Utilities for location-specific values); i. Flow Characteristic Equal percentage or modified equal. j. Valve shall be normally open. k. Acceptable Make: Fisher, Neles, Valve Solutions. 3. Coil Valves a. Water and glycol control valves shall be rated to remain closed (zero leakage) against 120% of the full shutoff head of the pumps, when the control signal is set to "fully closed"; b. Type: Valves shall all be two-way, V-port valve with characterizing disc, 1/4 turn; c. Packing: EPDM O-rings, lubricated; d. Stem: Stainless steel; e. Seat: Fiberglass reinforced Teflon; f. Actuator: Electric, one motor only; g. Flow characteristics: Equal percentage; h. Ball and Stem shall be stainless steel; CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 15 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 i. Fail positions shall generally be as follows, contact Cornell for special circumstances requiring deviation from these requirements: 1) Terminal hot water radiation: fail last 2) Duct mounted re-heat coils serving animal rooms: normally closed spring return. 3) Duct mounted re-heat coils serving laboratories: fail last 4) Duct mounted re-heat coils serving offices: fail last 5) Fan Coil Unit cooling coils: normally closed spring return 6) Pre-heat coils in Air Handling Units: normally open spring return 7) Chilled water coils in Air Handling Units: normally closed spring return 8) Chilled Beam terminal cooling: normally closed spring return j. Acceptable Manufacturers: Belimo, Valve Solutions. C. Steam 1. Steam control valves shall be rated for the highest system pressure and temperature and shall not lift when subjected to that pressure with the control system set to “fully closed.” 2. All steam control valves shall be pneumatically or electrically actuated and have a flanged or screw body with a rating of 400°F or higher, as appropriate. Trim shall be rated for 400°F. 3. Use high performance segmented V-ball control valves for all steam control applications. Since Cornell does not require 1/3-2/3 sizing, these valves are extremely cost-effective; the energy savings associated with the reduced passthrough leakage often pays for the higher cost premium. In addition, these valves require less packing maintenance and use much less vertical space than comparable valves. Steam valves shall have the following characteristics: a. Leakage Class: ANSI Class IV, minimum b. Flow Characteristic: Equal Percentage c. Rangeability: 300:1 turndown 4. On steam control valves with a normal differential pressure of 15 PSIG or greater, stainless steel noise reducing trim shall be used. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 16 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\21001 8\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Fisher b. Neles c. Valve Solutions, Inc. 6. Fail positions shall generally be as follows: a. Heat Exchangers/Converters: Normally closed spring return (to protect for high temperature). 2.5 CONTROL DAMPERS A. Dampers shall be applicable for the rated pressure and velocity service. Damper structural rating shall exceed extreme anticipated conditions like fan deadhead. B. Modulating dampers shall be carefully selected to control in a smooth and stable fashion across the range of anticipated conditions. Except where size dictates a single blade, dampers shall always be opposed blade. When a large section of damper is to be connected to a single jackshaft, size limitations shall be followed. This will prevent excessive damper area or, more importantly, length from being connected to a single jackshaft. Typically, the manufacturer’s recommendation shall be sufficient for specifying a limit to the size of a damper bank that may have field fabricated jackshaft connections. C. Whenever possible, dampers shall have external crankshafts to allow the connection of the damper actuator outside of the air stream. This will allow for easier access to the actuators for maintenance. D. OA control dampers shall be low leakage dampers with damper seals. E. Output to modulating control dampers shall be analog. F. Design make: Ruskin. G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Greenheck, Ruskin, and Nailor. 2.6 DAMPER ACTUATORS A. General: Size actuators and linkages to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve torque or force to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action and adequate close off rating as required. B. For AHU/ duct mounted dampers: 1. Actuators shall be electronic. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 17 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design \Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 2. Standard Electronic Actuators: Shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full cycles at full torque and be UL 873 listed. Provide stroke indicator. Actuators shall have a positive positioning circuit and selectable inputs. Full stroke shall be within 90 seconds. Where fail positions are required, provide spring return on the actuator with adequate close off force. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Belimo. C. For terminal unit dampers: 1. Standard Electronic Actuators: Shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full cycles at full torque. Provide stroke indicator. Output to modulating damper actuators may be analog or floating. 2. Fast Acting Electronic Actuators: Provide fast acting electronic actuators for VAV terminals on fume hood and associated tracking zone dampers. These actuators shall move full stroke in less than one second. Output to modulating damper actuators shall be analog. 3. Venturi Style Air Valves: Provide a factory mounted and calibrated electronic positioner and fast acting (less than one second full stroke) electric actuator with position feedback. 2.7 CONTROL PANELS A. Enclosures 1. All BACS panels shall be metal enclosures containing the controller, I/O modules, power supplies, termination strips, battery (if not integral to the controller or I/O module) and a spare AC outlet. 2. All penetrations of the BACS or outboard gear panels in mechanical rooms shall be from the bottom of the enclosure with wireway and conduit stubs from the wireway up to the panel. 3. All transformers and power supplies shall be mounted outside of the central panel. 4. Enclosures located in mechanical rooms shall be NEMA 4. 5. Enclosures located in labs and other relatively dust free and dry spaces may be NEMA 1. 6. Enclosures shall be mounted on walls or free-standing supports. 7. Provide enclosures with key lockable doors. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 18 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSyste m.doc 6/7/2021 B. Power Supplies 1. The Contractor shall provide a regulated, protected power supply as required with the ability to produce at least 33% more current than required by the transmitters and controls being installed. Output regulation shall be less than 0.5mV. There shall be no overshoot on turn on or off. Operating temperature shall be -20 to +70ºC 2. The BACS Trade shall certify in writing at the time of shop drawing submittal that the DDC equipment provided will not cause, as a result of its operation, either directly or indirectly, electrical interference to be induced into the building’s electrical power systems. 3. Class II transformers shall be used. C. Panel Fabrication 1. The Contractor shall size the panel such that no more than 80% of the surface of the enclosure back plate is used. 2. Plastic wire way (e.g., Panduit) shall be used to organize all wiring in the panel. 3. Sufficient wire way shall be provided in the panel such that it is filled no more than 80% capacity. 4. Panel layout and construction shall be neat and professional. 5. All controllers, wiring, and components in the panels shall be labeled. All labeling shall match the reference numbers on the cabinet drawings that shall be provided for each panel. 6. Label the power source and circuit number for each panel. 2.8 CONTROL WIRING A. General: 1. All control wiring in mechanical equipment rooms or other spaces in which it is readily accessible shall be installed in electrical metal tubing (EMT) with compression or set screw couplings. 2. All control wiring run in interstitial spaces shall either be run in EMT or a cable tray or raceway. 3. All control wiring installed outdoors or any area subject to moisture shall be installed per code. 4. All control wiring installed in vertical chases shall be installed in EMT. CORNELL UNIVERSITY UPSON HALL 466 LAB RENOVATION FACILITIES CONTRACTS 121 HUMPHREYS SERVICE BUILDING ITHACA, NEW YORK 14853-3701 ADDENDUM NO. 1 June 30, 2021 This Addendum contains changes to the requirements of the Contract Documents and Specifications. Such changes are to be incorporated into the Construction Documents and shall apply to the work with the same meaning and force as if they had been included in the original document. Wherever this Addendum modifies a portion of a paragraph of the specifications or a portion of any Drawing, the remainder of the Paragraph or Drawing shall remain in force. NOTE: Provisions of all Contract Documents apply. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Item 1. Section 23 09 23, Part 2 ADD Article 2.9 as follows: 2.9 BREAK GLASS VENTILATION SHUTDOWN SWITCH A. Complete break-lens emergency operator station with spare lens. B. NEMA 1 flush mount box. C. Red "Break Lens - Push Button" maintained operator. D. Operator station shall read "EMERGENCY - VENTILATION STOP" E. Normally Closed stackable contact block with 2 contacts. F. Design make: Pilla ST120-FN1 G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Pilla or Equal. Item 2. Section 23 82 19, Part 2, Article 2.2 DELETE G and H in its entirety. REPLACE with the following: G. Design Equipment: Johnson Controls. H. Make: Johnson Controls, Carrier, Daikin Applied, Trane. Item 3. Section 26 05 01 DELETE in its entirety. REPLACE with 26 05 01 Basic Materials And Methods Rev-1, attached. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 19 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 5. All control wiring above non-accessible ceilings shall be installed in EMT. 6. All control wiring installed above accessible ceiling spaces which are not laboratories or AHU’s shall be plenum type, not installed in conduit, but neatly run with generous use of rings or ties. 7. Wire shall be un-spliced from the controller to the sensor or device. 8. Control wiring shall not be routed in the same raceway as power wiring. 9. Unless specifically required otherwise by the BACS equipment manufacturer, all I/O wiring shall be twisted shielded pair cable. For sensors, the shield shall be grounded at the panel and taped back at the sensor. For communications, the above control wiring requirements and the BACS equipment manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations shall apply. 10. Control wiring shall be color coded and labeled at all points of termination. 11. Remove and properly dispose of all abandoned control wiring, conduit, tubing, boxes, enclosures, components, and other controls-related work. B. Responsibilities - The BACS Trade wiring responsibilities shall include the following: 1. All wiring from mechanical and electrical alarms and functions (as scheduled on the drawings) as required to report these alarms and functions to the BACS headend. 2. All line and low voltage wiring for the control of all HVAC motors (whether individual or as part of packaged equipment), automatic control valves, and dampers, including: wiring for EPs, PEs, relays, controllers, thermostats, actuating devices, unit heater controls, and cabinet heater controls, except as noted below. 3. The electrical trade shall provide "lock-out stop" control wiring. 4. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of motors which are to be automatically and/or manually controlled by the fire protective alarm system will be run to the motor starters or BACS enclosures by the electrical trade. 5. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of dampers that are to be automatically and/or manually controlled directly by the fire protective alarm system (i.e., not in response to motor operation), will be run by the electrical trades except for the power supply wiring to electric damper motors that is specifically excluded from the electrical trade work. 6. ATC Trade shall provide all power supply wiring for all ATC supplied components. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 20 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSyste m.doc 6/7/2021 PART 3 - DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS 3.1 GENERAL A. This section of the guideline defines the requirements for the documentation of the installed systems. The BACS vendor shall generally provide the documentation covered herein. 3.2 BACS CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT A. Vendors providing controls for Cornell University shall maintain site-wide configuration documentation. Whenever the BACS is extended, the documentation required in this section shall be provided/updated per configuration management requirements to reflect the entire installation on the campus. Device naming and addressing must conform to Cornell’s specific conventions as detailed in Cornell Design & Construction Standard 15956. No device will be connected to a Cornell network until these conventions have been understood and met. 3.3 DOCUMENTATION FORMAT A. Hard Copy (General): Paper copies of the indicated deliverables shall be provided as directed by the project manager. Quantities shall be enumerated in the contract documents. At a minimum, three sets of hard copies shall be maintained; one at the facility, one in the HVACR shop, and one in the project maintenance manual. B. Hard Copy (Control Panels): Each control panel on the project shall include an as-built hard copy of all drawings and documentation associated with that panel and its field devices. This documentation shall be provided in a plastic protective pocket mounted inside the panel door. In addition, see Operation and Maintenance Materials. C. Electronic Copy: All submittal and as-built documents shall be provided electronically, to the HVACR shop. Different documents may be in different formats, however each shall be provided in one of the first two formats as well as in the format in which the document was originally created, if it is different. 1. Microsoft Office format (Word, Excel, etc.) 2. Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF). 3.4 SUBMISSIONS A. Submittals: BACS documentation indicated herein shall be submitted for approval of the design professional and the project manager who shall get review and feedback information from the HVACR Shop. B. As-Built Drawings: As-built documentation as indicated herein shall be maintained and submitted to reflect the final installed condition of the BACS. The as-built documents shall be kept up to date throughout the warranty period and submitted as final at the end of the warranty period. One set of documents and files shall be provided to be stored locally at the new facility and two sets shall be provided to be stored centrally. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 21 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\2100 18\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 3.5 DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED A. Control Schematics: Control schematics shall be utilized to graphically indicate the systems, show the schematic configuration of the systems and location of control devices, define the point names and addresses (as applicable), and define the setpoints for control elements. Control schematics are required both as part of the contract documents (generated by the design professional), shop drawing submittals, and as-built document submittals. The following shall be included in the controls schematics at a minimum: 1. Point names. 2. Point addresses (not applicable to the contract documents). 3. Point type. 4. Normal position of output devices. 5. Device ranges. 6. Initial design intent setpoints modified as refined during construction/ commissioning for as-built submittals. 7. Bill of materials listing all devices and manufacturer numbers (not applicable to the contract documents). 8. Legend of device symbols. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each control device, panel, controller, and accessory furnished indicating dimensions, capacities, performance and electrical characteristics, and material finishes. Also include installation, start-up, calibration, and maintenance instructions as well as all cable and tubing requirements. Provide these as a part of the shop drawings and as-built submittal. C. Valve Schedules: Either with the control schematic or separately in shop drawing submittal and as-built submittal provide a valve schedule listing the following: 1. Size. 2. CV. 3. Design maximum flow. 4. Pressure drop at design maximum flow. 5. Position of valve at design condition. 6. Manufacturer. 7. Model/product number. 8. Close off rating. 9. Normal positions. 10. Valve characteristic. 11. Valve turndown. 12. Actuator information. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 22 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 13. Design controlled circuit pressure differential range (coordinated with the submittals). D. Valves shall be selected such that they are not, as a practice, “oversized.” Valve sizes shall be picked as close as possible to meet the design pressure drop. The minimum CV shall be no less than 1.9 on all valves (See Section III, 3.04 “Control Valves” for additional information). E. Control System Architecture Diagram: Provide a system architecture one-line diagram indicating schematic location of all controllers, workstations, LAN interface devices, gateways, etc. Indicate address and type for each control unit. Indicate physical media, protocol, communication speed, and type of each LAN (See also DCS 15956). F. Control Sequence of Operations: 1. All projects shall include detailed sequence of operations. Sequences may be on the control schematics or in the specifications in the contract documents, but shall be included with the control schematics for the shop drawing and as-built submittal. Control sequences shall be highly detailed in the design phase and shall maintain this detail throughout the as-built submittal phase. The following shall be included as a minimum: a. Sequences in all modes of operation (i.e., on, off, occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, summer, winter, economizer, etc.); b. Detailed steps during mode switches; c. Details of operation during and after a power outage. Loss of status associated with power outages must not be indicated as failures with a subsequent alarm or lock out; d. Specific direction on failure scenarios for loss of proof and all safety device trips; e. Setpoints, trip points, and ranges. Initially these shall be the designer’s intent, and eventually be the actual setting at time of as-built submittal; f. Smoke control systems; g. Fire alarm panel interlocks and special operating modes. 2. All related equipment should be grouped together by areas served. Also, group all sequences into functional sections (i.e., start/stop, static pressure control, economizer, etc.). CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 23 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 G. Points List: A detailed point list shall be provided in tabular form either with the control schematics or separately. Indicate all physical and virtual points and organize by system/sub-system. Include names, descriptors, addresses (when known) and point types with applicable range as a minimum. These shall be provided electronically in either a database format or in a spreadsheet format. H. Alarms and Alarms List: Either as part of the points list or as a separate list, an alarms list shall be provided. The list shall include the alarm point name, point type, and alarm parameters. All analog control loops shall include an adjustable setpoint deviation alarm based upon error and time. The alarm parameters shall be the state the point is in to cause a particular alarm. An example of a point in this list is as follows: 1. Supply air temp (AI) +/-5°F from setpoint. I. Floor Plans: Provide a set of floor plans with all controllers/control panels, sensors, operator workstations, interface devices, UPS’s, etc., located and identified. All network components (repeaters, routers, etc.) shall also be identified on the floor plan drawings. All BACS network wiring shall be shown and identified on the floor plan drawings. J. Detailed Wiring Diagrams: Shop drawings and as-built submittals shall include detailed wiring diagrams. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Wiring diagrams shall include both ladder logic type diagrams for motor starter, control, and safety circuits and detailed digital interface panel point termination diagrams with all wire numbers and terminal block numbers identified. Provide panel termination drawings on separate drawings. Ladder diagrams shall appear on the system schematic. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. These shall be submitted with shop drawing and as-built submittals. All wiring of related components that make up a system shall be grouped together in one diagram (e.g., all wiring diagrams for the components and devices on a particular AHU shall be shown on one drawing. The supply fan components and devices should not be shown separate from return fan components and devices, etc.). K. Sample Graphics and Trends: If the project includes web-based graphics and trends for the use of interfacing to the BACS, the vendor shall submit for approval draft samples of the actual graphics to be used for the project. Design professional and project manager, after consultation with the HVACR Shop, shall approve the graphics. L. Operation and Maintenance Materials: Provide Operation and Maintenance (O&M) materials generally in concert with training. O&M materials shall include the following: 1. Maintenance instructions and spare parts list for each type of control device, control unit, and accessory. 2. BACS User’s Guides (Operating Manuals) for each controller type and for all workstation hardware and software and workstation peripheral. 3. BACS Programming Manuals for each controller type and for all workstation software. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 24 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSyste m.doc 6/7/2021 4. All submittals with as-built information (product data, shop drawings, control logic documentation, hardware manuals, software manuals, installation guides or manuals, maintenance instructions, and spare parts lists). As-built panel drawings shall also be included as part of the O&M manual process. The drawings that are located in each panel shall incorporate all the systems controlled from that particular panel. The drawings shall include the system schematic and detailed panel wiring diagram (as detailed above). Also included (typically noted on the system schematic diagrams) should be the specific locations of any remote devices such as remote static pressure sensors, differential pressure sensors, etc.). PART 4 - BACS INFRASTRUCTURE 4.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Automated Logic Corporation. 4.2 CONFIGURATION OF SYSTEMS A. The control panels/enclosures housing the controllers will be located on each floor, to the extent possible, to share vertical and horizontal wire-ways to facilitate and minimize the cost of home-runs to terminal equipment. B. Control panels shall be located in the equipment rooms, where practicable, and in locations such that the ambient conditions are between 50 and 90°F and 10 to 85% relative humidity. Control panels located in areas where conditions are outside of these ranges shall have enclosures outfitted with heating or cooling devices to provide the proper environmental conditions. Hoffman style enclosures with removable back plates and keyed, hinged covers shall be used. Enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4 when located in mechanical spaces and NEMA 1 when located in occupied spaces. C. The HVACR Shop must have quick, direct access to all control panels to maintain building integrity similar to that provided for fire emergencies without going through user spaces. Field panels will be located outside of user areas where practical. If field panels must be located in user areas, they shall be in areas with easy access. Protection and separation for user activities will be provided. 4.3 CONTROLLERS A. The controllers provided pursuant to this guideline shall meet the performance requirements for throughput, response time, point capacity, trend log capacity, etc., as stated in this section. The controllers shall also be configured and programmed to carry out the sequences of operation contained in the project documents. While this specification contains several constraints on the controller system architecture, it is recognized that a variety of configurations may be equally acceptable. For example, it may be possible to meet the project requirements with a single large controller or several smaller ones. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 25 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomat ionControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 Therefore, this guideline does not generally prescribe controllers' system architecture or controllers' detailed characteristics, such as processor speed, amount of memory, amount of I/O, power supply details, etc. B. Since these guidelines with respect to controllers are performance oriented, rather than prescriptive, they will generally refer simply to “controllers” meaning computers capable of direct digital control. In those cases where distinguishing between controllers with differing capabilities is needed, the following nomenclature will be used: 1. Building-level controller. These are controllers that are connected to the campus backbone network and communicate over Ethernet using BACnet/IP. They will typically be used to control and monitor one or more large systems or be applied to other building-wide functions. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Building Controller (B-BC). 2. System-level controller. These controllers may, or may not, be directly connected to the campus backbone network. They will typically be dedicated to the control of a single large piece of equipment such as an air handler or chiller and a lab environment with fume hoods. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC). 3. Field-level controller. These controllers will be on a lower performance BACnet LAN such as MS/TP or ARCNET. They will typically be used for control of "unitary" devices such as VAV boxes, fan coil units, etc. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC). 4.4 UPDATING DATABASES AND GRAPHICS A. Controllers: Controllers shall be provided with a real-time operating system resident in ROM. It shall support all specified functions. It shall provide a command prioritization scheme to allow functional override of control functions. At a minimum, the following shall be provided: 1. Real-time operating system software. 2. Real-time clock/calendar and network time synchronization (except field-level controllers). 3. Controller diagnostic software. 4. DDC software. 5. Alarm processing and buffering software. 6. Energy management software. 7. Data trending, reporting, and buffering software. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 26 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 8. I/O (physical and virtual) database. Inputs and outputs shall have the capability to be overridden for emergency modes and testing. If the design documentation does not specifically indicate for which points this is required, control vendor shall request in writing a list of such points. If this has not been requested, the vendor shall reprogram or reconfigure the systems as required during testing. B. Programming: The programming shall be logically segmented, documented, and titled, and expand on the specified sequence of operations. Each segment shall contain control logic for a specific controlled component of a system. This is to improve the ability of the end user to understand and interpret the logic easily. All software shall be submitted to the engineer and commissioning agent for review. C. Trending: To support commissioning and building data mining, the BACS shall be capable of trending and archiving all points on building- and system-level controllers at a minimum of 15 minute intervals. The BACS shall also have the capability of trending at least five points on each field-level controller at an interval of 15 minutes. The trend data shall be uploaded to a central database as needed to prevent buffer overflow in the controller. Controller memory capability, network architecture, and communications bandwidth shall be designed to account for this trending. The controls vendor shall provide control trends during start up and prior to functional performance testing of the systems. Reports shall be scheduled to output the data to a common format such as comma separated text, Microsoft formats such as Excel and Access, and portable database format. Trended data may also be archived in an Owner-accessible SQL database. D. Trend Graphs: Web-based software shall provide for displaying graphic plots of the trended values. The software shall support multiple scales, points and point types simultaneously. Control vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical manner for each system. Consult with the commissioning team members and project manager for required configuration. Provide a trend for every analog control loop that includes the setpoint, process variable, and control output. E. Real-time Plotting: Software shall be provided for real time plotting/graphing of multiple values in user-defined time intervals. These graphs will typically be used in commissioning to observe loop responses and system reactions. Control vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical manner for each system. Consult with the Commissioning Team Members and Project Manager for required configuration. F. Web-based Graphic: In the event that a Web server is to be supplied to supply access to graphic displays, these screens shall be provided: 1. Floor Plan Screens. a. Provide floor plan screens for each floor and/or section of the building. Indicate the location of all equipment that is not located on the equipment room screens. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 27 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 Indicate the location of temperature sensors and the device associated with each temperature-controlled zone (i.e., reheat coils, VAV terminals, fan-coils, single-zone AHU’s etc.) on the floor plan screens. Display the space temperature point adjacent to each temperature sensor symbol. Indicate room numbers as provided by Cornell University. Provide a graphic link from each zone and/or equipment symbol shown on the graphic floor plan screens to each corresponding equipment schematic graphic screen; b. Provide floor plan screens for each mechanical equipment room and, if mechanical equipment is situated there, the roof. Indicate the location of each item of mechanical equipment. Provide a link from each equipment symbol shown on the plan view screen to each corresponding mechanical system schematic graphic; c. If multiple floor plans are necessary to show all areas, provide a graphic building key plan. Use elevation views and/or plan views as necessary to graphically indicate the location of all of the larger scale floor plans. Link the graphic building key plan to larger scale partial floor plans. Provide links from each larger scale floor plan graphic to the building key plan and to each of the other graphic floor plan screens; d. Provide a graphic site plan with links to and from each building graphic. 2. System Schematic Screens. a. Provide graphics for each air handling system. Indicate OA temperature and enthalpy, and mode of operation as applicable (i.e., occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, etc.). Link screens for air handlers to the heating system and cooling system graphics Link screens for supply and exhaust systems, if they are not available in a single graphic; b. Provide a system schematic graphic for each HVAC subsystem controlled. Each I/O point in the project shall appear in at least one graphic. System graphics shall include flow diagrams with status, setpoints, current analog input and output values, operator commands, etc., as applicable. General layout of the system shall be schematically correct. I/O devices shall be shown in their schematically correct locations. Include appropriate engineering units for each displayed point value. Verbose names (English language descriptors) shall be included for each point on all graphics; this may be accomplished by the use of a pop-up window accessed by selecting the displayed point with the cursor. Indicate all adjustable setpoints on the applicable system schematic graphic or, if space does not allow, on a supplemental linked setpoint screen. All outputs shall be represented in terms of percent open and include a pop-up link to the control logic; c. Provide a graphic for each hydronic system. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 28 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 d. Provide a graphic for each terminal unit. In addition to points associated with the unit, indicate mode of operation as applicable (i.e., normal occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, maximum heating, maximum cooling, etc.). Provide links between the applicable floor plan screen and this screen. Also provide links to the graphics representing the parent systems. e. Link screens for heating and cooling system graphics to utility history reports showing current and monthly energy usage, demands, peak values, etc. f. Link screens to all schedules and setpoints. PART 5 - MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM OPERATION 5.1 SMOKE DETECTION DEVICES AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Installed Smoke Detection Devices and Smoke Dampers 1. Smoke dampers are installed at each duct/smoke barrier penetration. 2. Every smoke damper has a local duct smoke detector. 3. Every smoke damper has a local remote test station. 4. Every duct smoke detector is addressable and is connected to the building fire alarm system. 5. The building project area is provided with addressable area smoke detectors. B. Fire Alarm Activation of Smoke Dampers 1. Duct Smoke Detectors: a. Upon activation of any duct smoke detector, an addressable signal is sent to the building fire alarm system and the smoke damper associated with duct smoke detector is closed. b. Upon receipt of the addressable duct smoke detector signal, the building fire alarm system shuts down both the supply and return fans or the exhaust fan, associated with the duct system that experienced the detector activation. c. Upon receipt of the associated fan system drives being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 29 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 C. Non-Fire Alarm System Activation of Smoke Dampers (These activations do not cause for a building fire condition to be annunciated) 1. Safety Device Activation a. Upon activation of either the low-limit switch (freeze-stat) or the supply duct high static pressure switch, both the supply and return fans are deenergized via hardwiring of the low limit switch in the fan starter circuits. b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive of the supply and return fans then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. c. Upon receipt of the associated fan system drives being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. 2. BMS (Building Management System) Component Fault a. Upon activation of any of the following BMS component faults, the supply and return fans, or exhaust fan are de-energized via BMS. 1) Supply fan VFD fault 2) Return fan VFD fault 3) Exhaust fan VFD fault 4) Exhaust fan current sensor fault 5) Outside air damper end switch fault 6) Return air damper end switch fault 7) Exhaust air damper end switch fault b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. c. Upon receipt of the associated fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 30 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 3. EMCS Operator Activation: a. When the EMCS system operator overrides the operational status of the air handling system and shuts down the supply, return, or exhaust fans. b. The shutdown of the supply, return or exhaust fans shall be interlocked through DDC programming. If the supply fan is shutdown, the return fan shall also be shut down automatically. If the return fan is shutdown, the supply fan shall be shut down automatically. c. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. 4. Maintenance Operator Activation: a. When a building maintenance staff member manually shuts off the supply, return or exhaust fan at the starter disconnect switch, the supply, return or exhaust fans are shutdown. b. The shutdown of the supply, return or exhaust fans shall be interlocked through DDC programming. If the supply fan is shutdown, the return fan shall also be shut down automatically. If the return fan is shutdown, the supply fan shall be shut down automatically. c. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 31 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210 018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 D. Smoke Damper Testing - M/E Engineering offers the following suggestions for a smoke damper testing protocol. The actual final protocol needs to be authored and approved by all Cornell parties and agencies of interest. 1. Duct Smoke Detector (Fire Alarm Condition): a. Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager and Cornell Fire and Safety, apply smoke to any duct smoke detector in the ductwork of any air handling systems which serve the project area. b. Upon receipt of the addressable duct smoke detector signal, the building fire alarm system shuts down both the supply and return, or exhaust fans associated with the duct system that experienced the detector activation. c. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. e. Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door. 2. Safety Device Activation (Non-Fire Alarm Condition) a. Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager, manually trip the low limit switch (freeze-stat) associated with any air handling system in the project area. b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. c. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. d. Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 32 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 3. BMS Component Interlock or Fault: a. Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager, manually cause for a fault condition to occur in any of the following BMS components: 1) Supply fan VFD fault 2) Return fan VFD fault 3) Exhaust fan VFD fault 4) Exhaust fan current sensor fault 5) Outside air damper end switch fault 6) Return air damper end switch fault 7) Exhaust air damper end switch fault b. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. c. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. d. Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door 4. EMCS Operator Activation (Non-Fire Alarm Condition): a. Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager, manually override the operational status of any air handling system via laptop, PC or remote access to EMCS Webcontrol and shutdown the associated air handing system. b. The shutdown of the supply, return or exhaust fans shall be interlocked through DDC programming. If the supply fan is shutdown, the return fan shall also be shut down automatically. If return fan is shutdown, the supply fan shall be shut down automatically. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 33 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 c. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. e. Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door. 5. Maintenance Operator Activation (Non-Fire Alarm Condition): a. Under controlled conditions and with proper notification to the Building Manager, manually shut off any air handling system within the project area. b. The shutdown of the supply, return or exhaust fans shall be interlocked through DDC programming. If the supply fan is shutdown, the return fan shall also be shut down automatically. If the return fan is shutdown, the supply fan shall be shut down automatically. c. The building fire alarm system point addressable module that is installed at the variable frequency drive, or motor starter current sensor, of both the supply and return fans or exhaust fan, then sends an addressable signal to the building fire alarm system indicating that the air handling system has been shut down. d. Upon receipt of the associated supply, return or exhaust fan system drive/starter being shut down, the building fire alarm system shall close all smoke dampers associated with that duct system on a 30 second delay. 6. Confirm damper closure at the local smoke damper access door PART 6 - COMMISSIONING, TRAINING AND WARRANTY 6.1 COMMISSIONING A. The BACS shall be fully commissioned. All acceptance testing, documentation, and training shall be required. B. The BACS Trade’s responsibilities for commissioning and check-out include: 1. Provide all logic, graphics, and trends for review prior to the start of field commissioning activities. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 34 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\2100 18\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-BuildingAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 2. Provide a complete calibration and operational check for each individual point and function contained within the BACS. 3. Conduct the checkout with the use of point/function log sheets to be prepared by the contractor. The Owner shall approve the log sheet format. 4. Submit log sheets to the Owner prior to the commencement of any final acceptance testing. 5. Certify, in writing, to the Owner prior to the commencement of final acceptance testing that all components of the BACS system are functioning as per the requirements of the contract documents. 6. Provide to the Owner as-built drawings and documentation at least four (4) weeks prior to the commencement of any final BACS acceptance testing. 7. The BACS Trade shall issue a report upon project completion stating that the system is complete, has been adjusted, and has had all hardware and software functions verified, that all analog control loops are tuned, and is operating in accordance with the specifications. Any deviations from specified settings or operations necessitated during system adjustment shall be specifically noted. 8. The Contractor shall check out the installation with a representative from PDC. The checkout shall consist of verifying the ability of the BACS to communicate with the central EMCS system, verifying the calibration of each sensor and/or transmitter, and verifying the operation of each control point. 9. All software processes shall be thoroughly demonstrated to the Owner’s representative. Alarm conditions shall be simulated for conformance. Analog control points shall be exercised through their entire range. All control interlocks and sequences shall be completely verified. The checkout shall be a thorough and exhaustive review of the installation to assure proper operation of the total system. 6.2 TRAINING A. Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, factory representatives of the control manufacturer shall provide instruction to the Owner’s operating personnel who have responsibility for the mechanical systems and controls installed by the contractor. The contractor shall provide 8-40 hours of training depending on the size of the project. B. The contractor shall make available to the Owner regular, scheduled training courses for ongoing training of the Owner’s operating personnel. Programs shall include hardware- and software-oriented courses as well as energy conservation and management courses. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 09 23 - 35 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-230923-Buildi ngAutomationControlSystem.doc 6/7/2021 C. In addition to the normal training listed above, all vendors will be required to provide two weeks of training at the BACS manufacturer’s training facility for four people. This training only needs to be provided once for a particular set of installed BACS products. If a contractor has provided this training previously (on a previous project or directly with the Owner) then the additional training does not need to be provided again. 6.3 WARRANTY A. Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall warrant and guarantee all work against defects in materials, equipment, and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the work as evidenced by a resolution to that effect by the Owner and for that period of time noted in special or extended warranties. B. The Contractor shall provide all recommended preventative maintenance of the materials, equipment, and workmanship as necessary and as described in the operating and maintenance manuals during the warranty period. In addition, the Contractor shall provide two (2) semi-annual service visits (i.e., one visit during the peak cooling season and one visit during the peak heating season) to test and evaluate the performance of the equipment. The Contractor shall provide a written report of the test and evaluation results. The service visits shall include but not be limited to: 1. Checking and, if necessary, correcting the calibration of the sensors, transducers, and transmitters for air flow, liquid flow, pressure, temperature, and humidity; 2. Checking and, if necessary, correcting the operation of the dampers and damper actuators; 3. Checking and, if necessary, correcting the operation (i.e., monitoring and command) of the system points. END OF SECTION 23 09 23 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\ Specs\HVAC\210018-232010-PipingSystems.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 23 20 10 - PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. None required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Pipe and fittings shall be new, marked with manufacturer's name and comply with applicable ASTM and ANSI Standards. B. All adhesives, sealants, primers and paint used for piping in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2. 2.2 STEEL PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, or extra strong (Schedule 80) weight; black or galvanized finish as called for; ends chamfered for welding or roll grooved for grooved mechanical; connections. B. Fittings: Same material and pressure class as adjoining pipe. 1. Welded fittings: Factory forged, seamless construction, butt weld type, chamfered ends. Where branch connections are two or more sizes smaller than main size, use of "Weldolets", "Thredolets", or "Sockolets" are acceptable. Mitered elbows, "shaped" nipples, and job-fabricated reductions are not acceptable unless specifically called for. Socket weld type, 2000 psi wp, where called for. 2. Threaded fittings: Cast or malleable iron, black or galvanized, as called for; drainage type where called for. Street type 45° and 90° elbows are not acceptable. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-232010-PipingSystems.doc 6/7/2021 C. Flanges, Unions and Couplings: 1. Threaded connections: a. Flanges: Cast iron companion type; for sizes 2-1/2 in. and larger. b. Unions: Malleable iron, bronze to iron seat, 300 lb. wwp; for sizes 2 in. and smaller. c. Couplings: Malleable iron, 150 or 300 lb. wwp, based on system pressure. Steel thread protectors are not acceptable as couplings.Welded connections: 2. Welded Connections: a. Flanges: Welding neck type. b. Flanges (Slip-on Type): Not allowed unless noted and shall not be installed in conjunction with butterfly valves. c. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents and working temperatures and pressures. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 in. maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. d. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D. Gauge and Instrument Connections: Nipples and plugs for adapting gauges and instruments to piping system shall be IPS brass. E. Base Elbows: 1. Cast iron or steel type, flange connections; Crane 500 or equivalent. Made from welding elbows, with welded pipe support and steel base. Reducing elbows where necessary. ELBOW SIZE SUPPORT SIZE BASE PLATE 2 in. to 3 in. 1-1/4 in. 6 in. x 6 in. x 1/4 in. 4 in. to 6 in. 2-1/2 in. 8 in. x 8 in. x 1/4 in. 8 in. and larger 6 in. 14 in. x 14 in. x 5/16 in. 2. Anchor bolt holes in each corner of base for securely bolting to floor or concrete base; minimum 3/4 in. bolts. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-232010-PipingSystems.doc 6/7/2021 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS - SOLDER JOINT A. Pipe: ASTM B88; Type L hard temper. Soft temper only as called for. Plans show copper tube sizes. B. Tees, Elbows, Reducers: Wrought copper, ANSI B16.22 or cast bronze; ANSI B16.8 solder end connections. C. Unions And Flanges: 2 in. and smaller use unions, solder type, cast bronze, ground joint, 150 lb. swp: 2-1/2 in. and over use flanges, cast bronze, companion type, ASME drilled, solder connection, 150 lb. swp. D. Solder Materials: No-lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. E. Make: Harris "Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Engelhard "Silverbright 100", Willard Industries "Solder Safe (silver bearing), Canfield "Watersafe" or approved equal. 2.4 COPPER DRAINAGE TUBE AND FITTINGS - SOLDER JOINT A. Pipe: ASTM B306, Type DWV, hard temper. B. Fittings: Wrought copper, ANSI B16.29 or cast bronze, ANSI B16.23; solder end connections. C. Solder Materials: No lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. D. Make: Harris "Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Engelhard "Silverbright 100", Canfield "Watersafe", or approved equal. 2.5 DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS A. Description: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. B. Dielectric unions are not allowed. C. Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig minimum pressure to suit system fluid pressures and temperatures with flange insulation kits and bolt sleeves. D. Make: EPCO, Capitol Manufacturing, Watts or approved equal. 2.6 HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers, Inserts, Clamps: B-Line, Grinnell, Michigan Hanger, PHD Manufacturing. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-232010-PipingSystems.doc 6/7/2021 B. Hangers: 1. Adjustable, wrought malleable iron or steel with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. Copper plated or PVC coated where in contact with copper piping. Hotdipped galvanized finish for exterior locations. 2. Adjustable ring type where piping is installed directly on hanger for piping 3 in. and smaller. 3. Adjustable steel clevis type for 4 in, and larger, and where insulation passes through hanger. 4. Hangers sized to permit passage of insulation through the hanger for all piping. 5. Nuts, washers and rods with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. Hot-dipped galvanized finish for exterior locations. 6. Process Areas - Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends only, not threaded between ends. Use adjusting locknuts at upper attachments and hangers. No wire, chain, or perforated straps are allowed. C. Hanger Shields: 1. Pre-insulated type: a. Insulated pipes shall be protected at point of support by a 360° insert of high density, 100 psi waterproof calcium silicate, encased in a 360° sheet metal shield. Insulation insert to be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation and extend 1 in. beyond sheet metal shield. 2. Field-insulated type: a. #18 USSG, galvanized steel shields, minimum 120° arc. Provide temporary blocking between pipe and hanger to maintain proper spacing for insulation. 3. Shield Sizing: PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE 1/2" to 3-1/2" 12" 18 4" 12" 16 5" and 6" 12" 14 8" to 14" 24" 12 16" to 24" 24" 10 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-232010-Piping Systems.doc 6/7/2021 4. Hanger shield gauges listed are for use with band type hangers only. For point loading (roller support), increase shield thickness by one gauge, and length by 50%. D. Spacing Schedule: PIPE SIZE STEEL COPPER PVC PLASTIC ROD SIZE 3/4 to 1 in. 8 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft. 3/8 in. 1-1/4 to 2 in. 10 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft. 3/8 in. 2-1/2 to 4 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. 1/2 in. 5 and 6 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. 5/8 in. 8 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. 3/4 in. E. Inserts: Carbon steel body and square insert nut, galvanized finish, maximum loading 1,300 lbs., for 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. rod sizes, reinforcing rods on both sides, MSS-SP-69 Type 19 or approved equal. F. Beam Attachments: 1. C-Clamp, locknut, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved, for pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller. 2. Center load style with clamp attachments that engage both edges of beam, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved, for pipe sizes larger than 2 in., refer to "Supports" for additional requirements. G. Supports: 1. For all piping larger than 2 in., provide intermediate structural steel members for hanger attachment. Members shall span across bar joists at panel points of joists. Secure member to structure. Select size of members based on a minimum factor of safety of four. 2. For weights under 1000 lbs.: Insert, "U" shaped channel, beam clamps or other structurally reviewed support. The factor of safety shall be at least four. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. 3. For weights above 1000 lbs.: Drill through floor slabs and provide flush plate welded to top of rod or provide additional inserts and hangers to reduce load per hanger below 1000 lbs. 4. For metal decks: Drill hole through for hanger rods and embed a welded plate in concrete or use devices designed for this application, with a safety factor of four. 5. Make: Hilti, ITW Ramset, Phillips "Red Head", or approved equal. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-232010-PipingSystems.doc 6/7/2021 H. Trapeze Hangers: 1. For use on 1-1/2" and smaller piping only. 2. Hangers shall be supported with rod sized with a safety factor of four. 3. May be manufactured type "U" shaped channel, or suitable angle iron or channel. Round off all sharp edges. 4. Securely fasten piping to trapeze with "U" bolt or straps, dissimilar metals shall not touch, use isolation gaskets. 5. Make: B-Line, Kindorf, Unistrut, or approved equal. 2.7 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Escutcheon Plates: Steel or cast brass polished chrome, split hinge type with setscrew, high plates where required for extended sleeves. Escutcheons plates for process spaces shall be stainless steel. B. Pipe Guides: Cylindrical steel guide sleeve, proper length for travel, integral bottom base anchor, top half removable. Split steel spider to bolt to pipe, copper plated spider for copper pipe. Insulated style where pipe is required to be insulated. Make: Tri-Sate Industries, or equal. C. Anchors: 1. Pipe support; same material as pipe; as manufactured by Pipe Shields Model C1000 or C2000, Keflex, Metraflex, Flexonics or Advanced Thermal Systems. 2. Pipe Anchors: a. Anchors shall be designed and located as to prevent stress to piping or building structural components from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stressing to connected equipment. 3. All field or shop fabricated anchor and equipment and piping supports shall include detail fabrication drawings submittals accompanied by comprehensive structural engineering design and analysis by a qualified, profession engineer licensed to practice in the State of New York, using the performance and design criteria specific to the project and system in question. D. Pipe Roll Stand: Cast iron roll stand. Make: Advanced Thermal Systems, Carpenter and Patterson, ITT Grinnell, Pipe Shields. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 7 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-232010-PipingSystems.doc 6/7/2021 2.8 SLEEVES A. Standard Type: 1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves for structural surfaces, two pipe sizes larger than the pipe, and as recommended by the sealing element manufacturer. Full circle water stop collar for sleeves located in below grade walls, wet wells and waterproofed surfaces. The collar shall be fabricated from steel plate and welded to the sleeve around its entire circumference. 2. Schedule 40, PVC sleeves or sheet metal sleeves for nonstructural surfaces and existing construction. Sheet metal sleeves shall be 18-gauge minimum and braced to prevent collapsing. B. Pre-Insulated Type: 1. Adjustable or fixed length metal cans, 24-gauge minimum sized for 1 in. spacing between insulation and can. Insulation shall consist of a 360° waterproofed calcium silicate insert sized to extend 1 in. beyond wall or floor penetration. Calcium silicate insert shall be the same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation. Spacing between shield and can packed at each end with double neoprene rope positively fastened. 2.9 SEALING ELEMENTS A. Expanding neoprene link type, watertight seal consisting of interlocking links with zinc plated bolts. 1. Make: Thunderline "Link-Seal" Series 200, 300 or 400, Pyropac, Calipco. B. Waterproof Type: 1. Exterior walls, below grade, above floor: Synthetic rubber material with zinc plated bolts. Make: "Link-Seal" Series 200, 300 or 400, Pyropac, Calipco. 2.10 PIPING MATERIALS AND SCHEDULE A. See Exhibit "A", "Schedule of Piping Materials" at end of this Section for (HVAC) piping. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 8 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-232010-PipingSystems.doc 6/7/2021 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Equipment and systems in accordance with laws, codes, and provisions of each applicable section of these specifications. Accurately establish grade and elevation of piping before setting sleeves. Install piping without springing or forcing (except where specifically called for), making proper allowance for expansion and anchoring. Arrange piping at equipment with necessary offsets, union, flanges, and valves, to allow for easy part removal and maintenance. Offset piping and change elevation as required to coordinate with other work. Avoid contact with other mechanical or electrical systems. Provide adequate means of draining and venting units, risers, circuits and systems. B. Conceal piping unless otherwise called for. Copper tubing shall be cut with a wheeled tubing cutter or other approved copper tubing cutter tool. The tubing must be cut square to permit proper joining with the fittings. Ream pipes after cutting and clean before installing. Cap or plug equipment and pipe openings during construction. Install piping parallel with lines of building, properly spaced to provide clearance for insulation. Make changes in direction and branch connections with fittings. Do not install valves, union and flanges in inaccessible locations. Provide trap seal of adequate depth on drain pans. C. Provide reducers at all control valves, where control valve is smaller than pipeline size. Reducers for steam control valves shall be eccentric type. Provide unions at each side of every control valve and reducers directly adjacent to the unions. D. Provide reducers at all balance valves, where balance valve is smaller than pipeline size. 3.2 PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall route piping to avoid installation directly over electric equipment (within 18" horizontally), including, but not limited to panels, transformers, disconnects, starters and fused switches. In the event it cannot be avoided, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing and provide a sheetmetal drip shield under the pipe which extends 3'0" beyond the electrical equipment. 3.3 WATER AND GLYCOL SYSTEMS A. Top connection for up feed, bottom or side connection for down feed. Grade off level; up in direction of flow and down toward drain. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 9 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-23 2010-PipingSystems.doc 6/7/2021 3.4 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Piping shall not be supported by wires, band iron, chains, or from other piping, not by vertical expansion bolts. Support each pipe with individual hangers from concrete inserts, welded supports, or beam clamps of proper configuration and loading design requirements for each location. Trapeze hangers are acceptable for racking of multiple pipes of 1-1/2" or less in size. Follow manufacturer's safe loading recommendations. Suspend with rods of sufficient length for swing and of size as called for, using four nuts per rod. Provide additional rustproofed structural steel members, where required for proper support. Provide oversized hangers where insulation/supports must pass between pipe and hanger. Hangers, when attached to joists, shall only be placed at the top or bottom chord panel point. Only concentric type hangers are permissible on piping larger than 2-1/2", "C" types are permitted for piping 2-1/2" and smaller. Provide riser clamps for each riser at each floor. B. Provide a pipe hanger within 12 in. of pipe unions and piping connections to equipment, in order to facilitate disconnections of piping without pipe sagging. 3.5 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Solder Connections: Nonacid flux and clean off excess flux and solder. B. Threaded Connections: Clean out tapering threads, made up with pipe dope; screwed until tight connection. Pipe dope must be specific for each application. C. Dielectric Pipe Fittings: Provide dielectric couplings or flanges at ALL equipment connections where dissimilar metals meet. In addition, provide dielectric couplings or flanges in all open type piping systems (condensing water, domestic water, etc.) where dissimilar metals are to be joined. Dielectric couplings or flanges are not required in typical closed systems such as heating water, chilled water, heat pump loop, etc. except for the equipment connections. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 10 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-232010-PipingSystems.doc 6/7/2021 3.6 WELDING A. Welding shall be performed in compliance with the welding procedure specifications prepared by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. Welded pipe fabricated by certified welder. Contractor shall submit proof of current certification of each welder if requested by Owner. Use full-length pipe where possible; minimum distance between welds, 18 in. on straight runs. Welds must be at least full thickness of pipe inside smooth and remove cutting beads, slag and excess material at joints; chamfer ends. Minimum gap 1/8 in., maximum 1/4 in., for butt welds. Overlaps on position and bench welds to be not less than 3/4 in. One internal pass and one external pass minimum required on slipon flanges. Do not apply heat to rectify distorted pipe due to concentrated welding; replace distorted pipe. Owner permission shall be obtained prior to welding in an existing building, except in the following areas: mechanical rooms, crawl spaces. When welding galvanized pipe, apply cold galvanizing on joint after welding. 3.7 HANGER SHIELDS A. Provide at hangers for all piping. Pre-insulated type or field-insulated type at Contractor's option. 3.8 SLEEVES A. Provide for pipes passing through floors, walls or ceilings. B. Pre-insulated type: Required for chilled water piping. C. Standard type: Provide for piping, except as called for. D. Extend 1/8 in. above finished areas. In above grade mechanical and other areas with floor drains; use steel pipe sleeves 2 in. above floor. Use pipe sleeves in bearing walls, structural slabs, beams and other structural surfaces, and where called for. Sleeves shall be as small as practical, consistent with insulation, so as to preserve fire rating. Fill abandoned sleeves with concrete. Provide rubber grommet seals for pipes passing through ducts or air chambers or built-up housings. 3.9 ANCHORS A. Provide piping system anchors where shown on the plans, and as recommended by the expansion joint/loop manufacturer. Where an anchor is shown at a change in piping direction, it shall fully control movement in both directions. In lieu of a single anchor fabricated for two directional control, two (2) individual anchors may be provided. Provide detailed fabrication drawings for all field-fabricated anchors. B. Design anchors and equipment and piping supports including comprehensive structural engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, licensed to practice in the State of New York using the performance and design criteria specific to this project. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 11 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-232010-PipingSystems.doc 6/7/2021 3.10 ALIGNMENT GUIDES A. Provide alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress. B. Install two (2) or more guide(s) on each side of flexible expansion loop. Install guides nearest to expansion joint not more than four (4) pipe diameters from expansion joint. C. Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure. 3.11 SLEEVE PACKING A. Seal void space at sleeves as follows 1. Interior locations: Firmly pack with fiberglass and caulk. 2. Exterior walls and below grade cored holes: Use sealing element. 3. Fire rated, partitions and floor slabs: Use fire rated sealing elements, materials and methods. Provide per manufacturer's instructions to maintain firestop. 4. Waterproofed walls and floors: Use waterproof sealing element, device, or compound. 3.12 ESCUTCHEON PLATES A. Provide polished chrome escutcheon plates for exposed piping passing through floors, walls or ceilings, except in Boiler, Fan and Mechanical Rooms. 3.13 CLEANING HOT WATER AND CHILLED WATER AND GLYCOL SYSTEMS A. Cornell University’s continual approach of protecting its community and the environment must be adhered to in the application of chemicals pertinent to process water loops. In addition, University policy dictates that “under no circumstances should chemicals be disposed of by pouring into sinks or other drains leading to sanitary or storm sewers”. B. All chemicals and formulations prescribed for the cleaning and treatment of process water systems at the University must meet the following specified criteria: 1. They must be ecologically compatible so that any discharge will not create an environmental impact. 2. They must be industrial and toxicologically safe so as to minimize personnel and equipment exposure to hazardous conditions. 3. Every effort must be made to maintain a sense of uniformity in chemical formulation to insure a line of continuity. Deviation from existing formulations that are applied across the University are to kept to a minimum. This relieves the University of any burden that arises from trying to maintain adequate protection using numerous treatments. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 12 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-232010-PipingSystems.doc 6/7/2021 4. All material proposed for application must have the prior approval of Environmental Health and Safety, Facilities Engineering and Facilities Management Pipe Shop. In order to thoroughly evaluate the products performance, it is recommended that the following be submitted at the time of proposal. a. Material Safety Data Sheets for all products that are to be applied. All sheets are required to contain complete formulations. Further documentation of qualitative composition must be included if Material Safety Data Sheets do not supply all product(s) components. b. Product Data Sheets specifying overall product description and application guidelines. c. Methods of analysis for determining product residuals. Proposals should specify qualitative and quantitative procedures of evaluating actual product levels. They should also include recommended parameters for all products, expressed in either terms of parts per million or milligrams per liter. d. Expected performance levels of products; this should include expected corrosion rates, expressed in mils per yea. If the product is a biostatic nature, what levels of biological growth should be expected if the product is applied at recommended dosages. e. Provisions should be submitted for the removal for any unused chemicals. In addition, provisions must be provided for the disposal of all empty containers. 5. The above mentioned criteria will serve as a guide for the information required for submittal of approval concerning any chemical treatment applied at Cornell University. No water treatment should be purchased, delivered or applied without consideration to the previously mentioned guidelines. C. Cleaning 1. Cleaning procedures for newly installed systems shall be as follows: a. Step 1: Adjust all control valves and balancing valves to full open position during the cleaning and treatment process. b. Step 2: Fill system and add a general dispersant for iron, mud, silt, and microbiological matter at a concentration recommended by manufacturer. Test for concentration. Circulate solution for a minimum of eight hours. Flush system using bleed and feed until the bleed water pH and iron levels are consistent with the feed domestic water levels. Clean strainers and dead end piping legs. Provide test results to the Facilities Management Water Treatment Lab; CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 13 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-232010-PipingSystems.doc 6/7/2021 c. Step 3: Arrange for inspection by a representative from the Facilities Management Water Treatment Lab before proceeding to chemical treatment. 2. For extensions to existing building systems, the new system cleaning procedures shall be followed if the extension contains ferrous piping materials. Provide temporary piping, valving, and pumping system isolated from the existing building system as needed to perform cleaning procedures prior to final connection to the existing building system. D. Treatment Chemicals 1. Treatment chemicals for non-glycol, non-potable systems shall be as follows: a. After cleaning and inspection, immediately add a molybdate based corrosion inhibitor. Acceptable corrosion inhibitors shall include a combination of sodium molybdate, sodium hydroxide, tolytriazole and organic polymers. Test for residual concentrations as follows: 1) Molybdate: 150 ppm 2) pH: 8.3-9 3) Tolytriazole: 5 ppm b. Arrange for inspection by a representative from the Facilities Management Water Treatment Lab prior to final acceptance. 2. Treatment chemicals for glycol heating systems shall be as follows: a. After cleaning and inspection, drain system then refill with a glycol formulation as follows: 1) Propylene Glycol: 400,000 ppm (40%) 2) Nitrate: 1500 ppm 3) Tolytriazole: 20 ppm 4) Water: Balance (water to be added to glycol solution shall meet manufacturers standard for quality) 5) Color: Olive Green 6) Preferred Manf/Material: PG #36 b. Arrange for inspection by a representative from the Facilities Management Water Treatment Lab before prior to final acceptance. 3. Chilled Water Systems: a. Chemicals shall not be used to treat chilled water systems connected to the campus chilled water loop. Fill system with potable water. Notify the Central Energy Plant for permission to begin circulating water into the campus chilled water loop. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 14 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-000 0\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-232010-PipingSystems.doc 6/7/2021 E. Identification 4. Provide a three ring binder for each hydronic system treated with chemicals that includes the following information: a. SDS b. Product data sheets c. Chemical type d. Test points e. Control limits f. System volume g. Direction to drain system to sanitary. h. System volume shall be stenciled on the system expansion tank in a visible location. 3.14 TESTS A. Test piping and accessories before insulation, connection to existing piping, or concealment. Repeat as many times as necessary to prove tight system. Notify Owner's Representative at least seven days in advance of each test. Isolate valves and equipment not capable of withstanding test pressures. Make leaks tight; no caulking permitted. Remove and replace defective fittings, pipe or connections. Furnish necessary pumps, gauges, equipment, piping, valving, power and labor for testing. Certify that tests have been successfully completed. B. Schedule of Test Requirements: 1. Hot, chilled, glycol water: Hydrostatic, 100 psig at high point of system; two hours duration. 3.15 PIPE LINE SIZING A. Pipe sizes called for are to be maintained. Pipe sizing changes made only as reviewed by Owner's Representative. Where discrepancy in size occurs, the larger size shall be provided. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 20 10 - 15 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation PIPING SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-232010-PipingSystems.doc 6/7/2021 EXHIBIT "A" - PIPING MATERIALS (HVAC) SERVICE PIPE MATERIALS FITTINGS CONNECTIONS Chilled water 3 in. and larger ASTM A53 Schedule 40, black steel ASME B16.9 Wrought steel ASME B16.9 Butt weld Chilled water 2-1/2 in. and smaller ASTM B88 Type L hard copper ASME B16.22 Wrought copper ASTM B32 95 Sn/5 Sb solder or 95.5 Sn/4 cu/.5 Ag solder Hot water 3 in. and larger; ASTM A53 Schedule 40, black steel ASME B16.9 Wrought steel ASME B16.9 Butt weld Hot water 2-1/2 in. and smaller ASTM B88 Type L hard copper ASME B16.22 Wrought copper ASTM B32 95 Sn/5 Sb solder or 95.5 Sn/4 cu/.5 Ag solder Vent, overflow, drain ASTM B88 Type M hard temper copper ASME B16.22 Wrought copper ASTM B32 95 Sn/5 Sb solder or 95.5 Sn/4 cu/.5 Ag solder Drain (optional) ASTM B3026 Type DWV copper ASME B16.3026 Wrought copper DWV fittings ASTM B32 95 Sn/5 Sb solder or 95.5 Sn/4 cu/.5 Ag solder END OF SECTION 23 20 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 21 10 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210 018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-232110-WaterSystemsSpecialties.doc 6/7/20211 SECTION 23 21 10 - WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data on water system specialties. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment and accessories shall be rated for a minimum of 125 psi wwp, and 250°F temperatures. Manufacturer's written installation procedures shall become a part of these specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR ELIMINATING SUPPLY FITTING A. Designed to eliminate air from supply water; located in supply header from heat generating devices; flanged or screwed. B. Design Equipment: Bell & Gossett "Airtrol". C. Manufacturers: Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Spirotherm. 2.2 FLOW BALANCERS A. High Performance, Bronze Body, Y-Pattern with brass readout valves with integral selfsealing EPT readout valves. B. Valve shall be multi-turn globe style with calibrated digital hand wheel capable of at least four turns with graduations at 1/10th turn. Hand wheel shall be equipped with a positive, tamper-resistant memory stop that effectively prevents opening valve past the stop. C. Valve shall be capable of bubble-tight shutoff thus eliminating the need for a second shut off valve to facilitate equipment service. D. Valve shall be provided with an integral, positive, tamper-resistant memory stop feature which is not subject to accidental readjustment when the valves is operated as a shut-off for service purposes. Memory stop shall require a tool for adjustment. E. Valve shall have provisions for a seal to prevent re-setting. F. Valve shall exhibit an accuracy of +/- 5% within its normal operation flow range. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 21 10 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-232110-WaterSystemsSpecialties.doc 6/7/20211 G. Valves shall be rated for a maximum temperature of 230°F and a maximum pressure of 250 psig. H. Valves shall be manufactured from Bronze or Dezincifcation resistant brass in sizes through 2” nominal, and bronze or cast iron in sizes above 2” nominal. I. For chilled water applications, valve shall be provided with preformed insulation to permit access for balance and readout. J. Mechanical Contractor shall supply Testing and Balancing Contractor with flow calculator (circular slide rule, etc.), if requested. K. Balance valve sizes shall be based upon gpm range rather than pipe size. 1. Design Equipment: Tour & Anderson. 2. Manufacturers: MMA, Macon, Tour & Anderson. L. 5 in. and Larger: Nickel-plated flow meter with provisions for connecting a portable differential pressure meter. Shall be individually calibrated. Provide with a butterfly valve with memory stop at each location. 1. Flow meter size shall be based upon manufacturer's recommended gpm range rather than pipe size. 2. Design Equipment: Tour & Anderson. 3. Manufacturers: MMA, Macon, Tour & Anderson. 2.3 STRAINERS A. Cast semi-steel body or cast iron construction for steel piping and bronze body construction for copper piping; equipped with removable, monel or stainless steel water screen; maximum pressure drop 2 psi with free area at least four times area of pipe. Provided with blow-off outlet. B. Sizes 5 in. and Smaller, Y-Pattern Strainer: 125 psig working pressure; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 in. and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 in. and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless steel basket and bottom drain connection. C. Sizes 6 in. and Larger, Basket Strainer: 125 psig working pressure; flanged end connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless steel basket and bottom drain connection. D. Design Equipment: Mueller. E. Manufacturers: Elliott, Keckley, Mueller, Webster, Watts, Spirax-Sarco. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 21 10 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-232110-WaterSystemsSpecialties.doc 6/7/20211 2.4 AIR VENTS A. Manual air vents shall be a 3/4 in. ball valve with bronze body, nickel plated bronze ball, hose end, cap and chain, Watts B6000CC. B. Automatic air vents shall be float type, 35 psig rated, Armstrong No. 502CV OR float type, 150 psig rated, Armstrong No. 75 or Spirotop. Provide unit with an appropriate rating, as necessary for location. C. High Capacity Automatic Air Vent: 1. Cast iron body. 150 psig rated. Stainless steel float. 2.5 FLEXIBLE PIPE AND PUMP CONNECTIONS (BRAIDED STAINLESS STEEL) A. Braided stainless steel pump and pipe connector(s) shall be constructed of annular corrugated stainless steel close-pitch hose with stainless steel overbraid. The corrugated metal hose, braid(s) and a stainless steel ring-ferrule/band (material gauge not less than .048 in.) shall be integrally seal-welded using a 100% circumferential, full-penetration TIG weld. Fittings shall be attached using a 100% circumferential TIG weld. B. Braided stainless steel pump and pipe connector(s) must be suitable for operating temperatures up to 850°F. The rated working pressure of the braided metal hose must have a minimum 4:1 safety factor. C. Each braided stainless steel connector shall be individually leak tested by the manufacturer using air-under-water or hydrostatic pressure. D. Braided stainless steel connectors shall carry a three (3) year warranty when installed in accordance with all specifications and installation instructions as described by the manufacturer. E. End fittings shall be flat-faceplate steel flanges with 150# ANSI drilling, and outside diameter, carbon steel MPT ends, flanged by Schedule 40 grooved ends or increasing ends. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Flexhose Pumpsaver or equivalent Keflex, Metraflex, Mason-Mercer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain detailed instructions from each manufacturer for proper method of installation. 3.2 SYSTEM FILLING A. After cleaning, fill each system from low point. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 21 10 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-232110-WaterSystemsSpecialties.doc 6/7/20211 B. With pumps off, vent mains, risers, run-outs, and units, working consecutively from low to high point of building. Obtain approximately 2 psi at highest point. Obtain proper air cushion in compression/expansion tanks. 3.3 AIR VENTING A. Provide where specifically called for in piping details and at all points in piping systems where air may collect due to changes in piping elevation. 1. Manual air vent assembly consisting of 1-1/4 in. x 4 in. air collection chamber with 3/4 in. hose end ball valve with cap and chain. 2. Automatic air vent with a ball valve for the purpose of isolation and service or replacement. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, automatic air vents shall only be installed in Mechanical Rooms. Pipe high capacity air vent discharge down to floor. B. Equipment Vents: 1. When equipment is above mains: Connect run-outs or risers to upper quadrant or top of mains. Install vent assembly concealed within enclosure, consisting of 1 in. diameter by 4 in. to 6 in. long air collection chamber with 1/4 in. soft copper tube to manual valve. Mount securely near bottom of enclosure, but not fastened to enclosure. For individual units, radiators, fan convectors and units with return grilled: Provide screwdriver operated manual valve, operated from discharge grille or access door. Drill enclosure and position valve for operating without removing enclosure. 2. When equipment is below mains: Connect piping run-outs or risers to bottom or lower quadrant of mains. Vent assembly not required in unit. Provide means of purging and draining each unit if required. Use tees instead of ells at low point of run-outs. 3.4 STRAINERS A. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 in. nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 in. and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2 in. 3.5 FLOW BALANCERS A. Where flow balancers are smaller than pipe line size, provide reducers directly adjacent to flow balancers. B. Provide on each hydronic unit and where called for. Meter connection points shall not point downward. END OF SECTION 23 21 10 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 23 31 00 - SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ductwork shall be fabricated and installed in compliance with latest edition of the following standards. 1. SMACNA Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible Ductwork. 2. SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standard. 3. SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 4. 2020 Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State. 5. NFPA Standards 96. 6. Plans and Specifications which exceed the requirements in any of the referenced standards. 7. 2020 Mechanical Code of New York State. B. All sheet metal shall be fabricated and installed by an experienced Contractor specializing in this type of work. C. All ductwork and fittings shall have a computer generated label affixed to the exterior surface of each section, detailing all applicable information including the duct dimensions, gauge, reinforcement type/class and connection type by systems manufacturer. Galvanizing thickness shall be clearly stenciled on each duct section. D. All ductwork on the project shall meet the SMACNA Duct Cleanliness For New Construction Guidelines, "Advanced Level" of duct cleanliness for production, delivery, storage and installation of ductwork. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Ductwork Shop Drawings. B. Duct Access Doors. C. Flexible Duct. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018 -233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 D. Submit a complete shop standard manual including miscellaneous materials, and construction details for all shop fabricated materials including, but not limited to, volume dampers, turning vanes, duct sealant, equipment flexible connections, access doors, flexible duct, acoustical duct lining, etc. 1.4 GENERAL A. All adhesives, sealants, primers and paint used for ductwork in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2. 1.5 DUCTWORK CLASSIFICATION A. Duct systems are to be classified and constructed per the SMACNA Velocity-Pressure classification system as follows: 1. All ductwork shall be constructed for a minimum pressure class of 2 in. w.g. (unless stated otherwise) for the following systems, as applicable: a. Supply duct downstream of terminal units. b. Typical low pressure supply ductwork. c. Typical return ductwork. d. Typical low pressure exhaust ductwork. 2. Supply duct upstream of terminal units shall be constructed for a minimum pressure class of 3 in. w.g. unless otherwise stated or required as per below. 3. Pressure classes above 3 in. w.g. shall be provided as follows, based upon the external static pressure as scheduled for each specific fan. Scheduled External Static Pressure Pressure Class Over 3 in. up to 4 in. w.g. 4 in. w.g. Over 4 in. up to 6 in. w.g. 6 in. w.g. Over 6 in. up to 10 in. w.g. 10 in. w.g. 1.6 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepare minimum 1/4 in. scale drawings: 1. Detailed ductwork shop drawings shall include size, layouts and pressure classifications. Any ductwork installed without benefit of review by the Engineer of Record may be subject to replacement at the expense of the Contractor. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\ 21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 2. Constructed from actual field inspections and measurements so as to assure a complete job. 3. Incorporate dimensions of actual equipment proposed for use on the project. 4. Showing adequate sections, elevations, and plan views and indicating the bottom of ductwork elevations from the finished floor. 5. Indicating all volume dampers, fire dampers, smoke dampers, damper access doors and other accessories required for a completed project. B. Call to the attention of the Engineers immediately, any major deviations from the Contract Drawings, which must be made. All deviations shall be documented in writing. C. Indicate roof, wall and floor opening dimensions and locations shown on shop drawings. D. Submit prints to each Contractor of the other trades for review for interference's and coordination with their work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise called for, provide materials in accordance with Exhibit I at the end of this section. 2.2 SQUARE AND RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK A. Materials: 1. Galvanized Sheet Metal: Comply with ASTM A653 and A924, with G90/Z275 coating. 2. Stainless-steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in Exhibit "I"; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D or No. 3 as indicated in Exhibit "I". 3. Aluminum sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view. 4. Gauges per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. B. Transverse and longitudinal duct seams reinforcement shall conform to appropriate tables and figures per SMACNA Velocity-Pressure Classification for duct construction. 1. Transverse joints shall be sealed with duct joint sealant. "Ductmate" or "Nexus" 4-bolt connection systems may be used in lieu of standard construction. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 2. Field assembled longitudinal seams shall be sealed with duct sealant. Factory or shop fabricated rolled or machine pressed longitudinal seams does not require sealant. C. Corner closures shall be required as described and illustrated by SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. D. Throat radius on all elbows shall not be less than the dimension of the duct plane of radius. Where this cannot be maintained, use shorter radius with internal guide vanes, or square elbow with turning vanes. E. Bracing and hanging of ductwork shall be per SMACNA Standards for size and system class of ductwork being used. F. Any transformations shall not reduce the ductwork cross-sectional area. Maximum angle in straight duct, 20° for diverging flow and 30° for contraction flow. Transformation from square to round or flat to oval seams welded or brazed. 2.3 ROUND DUCTWORK A. Standard Round Ductwork: 1. Materials: a. Galvanized Sheet Metal: Comply with ASTM A653 and A924, with G90/Z275 coating. b. Stainless-steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in Exhibit "I"; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D or No. 3 as indicated in Exhibit "I". c. Aluminum sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view. d. Gauges per SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. Spiral lock-seam or longitudinal fusion-welded. 2. All spiral ducts shall have locked seams so made as to eliminate leakage under pressure for which this system has been designed. Longitudinal seams duct shall have fusion-welded butt seams. 3. No stovepipe will be allowed. 4. Round Ductwork Fittings: a. All fittings fabricated per SMACNA Standards for round and flat-oval ductwork, material to match straight pieces of ductwork. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\ 21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 b. Fittings shall have continuous, welded seams. c. 90° tees shall be conical type. 90° tees and 45° laterals up to and including 12 in. diameter tap size shall have a radiused entrance into the tap, produced by machine or press forming. The entrance shall be free of any restrictions. d. Round taps off the bottom of rectangular ducts down to diffusers shall be made with a 45° square to round shoe-tap. 5. Elbows: a. Diameters 3 in. through 8 in.: Two-section stamped and continuously welded elbows, material to match straight pieces of ductwork. b. Over 8 in.: Gored construction with standing seam construction and internally sealed or continuously welded. Less than 35° - two gores, 36° to 71° - three gores, over 71° - five gores. c. Fabricated to a centerline radius of 1.5 times the cross-section diameter. d. Adjustable elbows are not allowed. 6. Joints: a. For duct construction pressure 3 in. w.g. or greater: 1) Round Joints: a) Unexposed Duct 3 in. - 30 in. Diameter: Connect round duct with a one piece interior slip coupling, at least two gauges heavier than duct wall, beaded at center and fastener to duct with screws. Seal joint with an approved sealant applied continuously around both end of coupler prior to assembling and after fastening. b) All Exposed Duct and Unexposed Duct 30 in. - 72 in. Diameter: Install using a three piece, gasket flangedjoint consisting of two internal flanges, with integral mastic sealant, and one external closure band, which compress the gasket between the internal flanges. (1) Acceptable Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries "Spiralmate" system or approved equal. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 c) Above 72 in. Diameter: Install using companion angle flanged joints as defined in Figure 3-1 of the 2005 SMACNA Manual, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" Third Edition. Refer to manual for proper sizing and construction details. d) Dust collection systems and exposed duct 3 in. - 14 in. use a one piece, polyethylene lined gasket connector with integrated bolt for the closure system. (1) Acceptable Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries "Quicksleeve" or approved equal. b. Pipe-to-pipe joints in diameters up to 60 in. shall be by the use of sleeve couplings, reinforced by rolled beads. c. Pipe-to-fitting joints in diameters up to 60 in. shall be by slip-fit of projecting collar of the fitting into the pipe. d. Insertion length of sleeve coupling and fitting collar shall be 2 in. up to 36 in. diameter and 4 in. above 36 in. diameter. e. Pipe-to-pipe and pipe-to-fitting connections in ductwork above 60 in. in diameter shall be made by angle ring flanges. The flange on the pipe shall be a 2 in. x 2 in. x 3/16 in. angle attached to the pipe with a continuous weld. The fittings shall have a loose ring "Van Stone" flange. A 5/8 in. flange shall be provided to act as a gasketing surface for sealing with the angle ring being a rolled, welded ring 2 in. x 2 in. x 3/16 in. Bolt hole spacing for angle rings shall be 6 in. centers. f. If longitudinal seam duct greater than 60 in. in diameter is supplied in lengths greater than 4 ft., one angle ring must be welded to the duct on 4 ft. centers for support. 2.4 PVC DUCTWORK A. General Description: 1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) ductwork for conveying air, or a mixture of air and other gases and acids. 2. All duct and duct components shall be manufactured by a certified fabricator and bear the "FM" label. 3. Material shall be Trovidur Series 250, Type II, Grade I, PVC class 14333-D, ASTM D01784. Composition shall include inhibitor for UV radiation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 7 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessori esConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 4. Ductwork shall be fabricated, reinforced, installed, sealed and tested in accordance with requirements and recommendations of the SMACNA Thermoplastic Duct (PVC) Construction Manual. B. Ductwork Fabrication: 1. Welding shall be one by hot gas fusion welding method utilizing PVC filler rod. Solvent welding shall not be utilized. 2. Welding shall be performed by worksmen adequately trained in the art of PVC welding and certified in accordance with ASTM 1789 test methods. 3. Ductwork shall be completely free from cracks, distortions or other imperfections. 4. Provide manufacturer recommended minimum number of welding passes. 5. For thermally formed round duct sections, longitudinal seams shall be butt welded. 6. Alignment of longitudinal seams in adjacent butt welded sections of duct shall be avoided, and seams shall be staggered. 7. Longitudinal seams shall be butt welded and located at a distance of not less than 1/8 of the span width from corner of duct. C. Fittings and Couplings: 1. Unless otherwise specified, centerline radius for standard elbows shall be 1.5 times diameter. 2. Where space limitations will not allow standard centerline radius offset, vane blades shall be installed to decrease turbulence. 3. Segmented elbows shall be joined by butt welding and number of gores or segments shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Elbows constructed by press forming in halves from a sheet are acceptable. The halves shall then be joined by hot gas fusion welding method. 5. Transition pieces in mains and sub-mains shall be tapered. 6. Branch ducts shall enter main duct near large end of transition, at an angle not exceeding 45 degrees wherever possible. 7. Branches shall not be positioned directly opposite one another on a main or a sub-main. 8. Intersection of branches with mains shall be continuously welded. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 8 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 D. Make: Viron International Corporation 2.5 DUCTWORK SEALING A. SMACNA Duct Sealing Classification shall be used for duct systems using the following criteria: 1. Ductwork and all plenums with pressure class ratings shall be constructed to seal Class A. 2. Openings for rotating shafts shall be sealed with bushings or other devices that seal off air leakage. Pressure sensitive tape or sealing compounds shall not be used. Sealing compounds used to seal openings for rotating shafts shall not be used. 3. All connections shall be sealed, including but not limited to spin-ins, taps, other branch connections, access doors, access panels and duct connections to equipment. 4. Sealing that would void product listings is not required. 5. Spiral lock seams need not be sealed. B. Duct sealant for indoor applications shall be non-fibrated, water based, Hardcast IronGrip IG-601, Ductmate PRO Seal, Foster 32-17 or Childers CP146. C. Duct sealant for outdoor applications shall be fibrated, water based, Hardcast Versa-Grip VG-102, Ductmate Fiberseal, Foster 32-17 or Childers CP148. D. Sealants and tapes shall be listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181A or UL181B and marked according to type. 2.6 TURNING VANES A. Provide in mitered elbows as shown on contract drawings. Vanes 36 in. or longer shall be double wall air foil type. All turning vanes shall be installed as per the latest SMACNA Standards. Turning vane size and spacing shall be as per SMACNA. Turning vane spacing greater than SMACNA Standards is not acceptable. B. Turning vanes shall be Harper or equivalent double wall turning vanes fabricated from the same material as the duct. C. Turning vane front and back panels shall be securely locked together with adequate crimping to prevent twisting of vane. Vane shall be capable of withstanding 250 pounds of tensile load when secured according to the manufacturer's instructions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 9 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 D. Rails for mounting turning vanes shall have self locking, friction fit tabs designed to facilitate proper alignment of vanes. Tab spacing shall be as specified in Figure 4-3 of the 2005 SMACNA Manual, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". Rail systems with non-compliant tab spacing shall not be accepted. E. Acoustical Turning Vane: Shall be used in applications that require quiet operating systems. Mounting rails shall have friction insert tabs that align the vanes automatically. F. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries PRO-Rail Turning Vane or approved equal. 2.7 DAMPERS IN DUCTWORK A. Blade Type Volume Dampers: Constructed per SMACNA, one gauge heavier than duct material, securely fastened to 3/8 in. sq., cold rolled steel operator rod. Provide Ventlock 639 elevated dial regulator for 2 in. insulated ductwork or equal. Provide Ventlock 635 dial regulator for non-insulated ductwork or equal. B. Multiple Blade Type Volume Dampers: Provide multiple blade volume dampers in ductwork above 12 in. in height. 1. Heavy duty, manual balancing dampers suitable for application in HVAC systems with velocities to 1,500 ft. per minute, open position and max. pressure of 3 in. w.g. close position. Ruskin MD 35 or equivalent. 2. Fabrication: a. Frame: 5 in. x minimum 16 gauge roll formed, galvanized steel hatshaped channel, reinforced at corners. Structurally equivalent to 13 gauge U-channel. 3. Blades: a. Style: Single skin with 3 longitudinal grooves. b. Action: Opposed. c. Orientation: Horizontal d. Material: Minimum 16 gauge equivalent thickness, galvanized steel. e. Width: Nominal 6 in. 4. Bearings: Molded synthetic sleeve, turning in extruded hole in frame. 5. Linkage: Concealed in frame. 6. Axles: Minimum 1/2 in. diameter, plated steel, hex-shaped, mechanically attached to blade. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 10 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Pro jects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 7. Control Shaft: 3/8 in. square plated steel. 8. Finish: Mill galvanized. a. Actuator: Hand quadrant for 3/8 in. square extended shaft. b. Hand Quadrant Standoff Bracket: 2 in. standoff for insulated ductwork. c. Oillite bearings. d. Factory Sleeve: Minimum 20 gauge thickness, minimum 12 in. length. C. Automatic Air Dampers: Furnished as part of "Building Management System" Section 230923, and installed by this Contractor. 2.8 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCTS AND CONNECTORS A. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall be constructed in compliance with NFPA Bulletin 90A, 90B and UL Standard 181 and shall be listed and labeled as Class I Air Duct. B. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall be tri-laminate: 1. Consisting of corrosion resistant galvanized steel helix encapsulated by a double lamination of polyethylene or spun bond nylon. 2. Factory applied (R 6.0 or R 8.0) fiberglass exterior insulation, sheathed in a seamless, tri-directionally reinforced, metalized polyester, exterior vapor barrier. 3. R-value shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories, and certified by the Air Diffusion Council, in accordance with ADC Flexible Duct Performance and Installation Standard (1991), using ASTM C-518, at installed wall thickness, on flat insulation only. Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 4. Recommended operating pressure for flexible ductwork shall be three times maximum system press but not less than 6 in. w.g. positive pressure for 4 in. - 20 in. dia., 5 in. wg. negative pressure through 16 in. dia., 1 in. negative pressure for 18 in. and 20 in. dia. Maximum velocity of 5500 fpm. 5. Operating temperature range - 20°F to 250°F, intermittent @1/2 in. pos. w.g. max., -20°F to 140°F, continuous at maximum pressure. 6. Flame Spread: 25 max. smoke developed rating: 50 max. 7. Porous inner core flexible duct shall not be used. C. Static pressure and thermal performance shall be tested and certified in accordance with Air Diffusion Council (ADC) Test Code FD-72-R1 under conditions of 140°F for 164 hours and 180°F for 4 hours. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 11 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctw orkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 D. Acoustical performance shall be certified in accordance with ASTM E 477 and/or Air Diffusion Council Test Code FD-72-R1. 1. Minimum Acoustic Performance: a. The insertion loss (dB) of a 6 foot length of duct when tested in accordance with ASTM E477 at a velocity of 1000 feet per minute shall be at least: 125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1000 Hz 2000 Hz 4000 Hz 8 inch dia. 26 27 27 31 32 27 12 inch dia 22 26 24 31 31 20 E. Friction loss and leakage for flexible duct only shall be certified in accordance with Air Diffusion Council Test Code FD-72-R1. Leakage for connections shall be accordance with UL 181 requirements. F. Basis-of-Design: Flexmaster 6B (R-6.0). G. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dundas-Jafine Type SPC R6.0/ Type SPC R8.0. 2. Hart & Cooley Type F216 (R-6.0)/ Type F218 (R-8.0) 3. Flexible Technologies, Inc. Thermaflex Type M-KE (R-6.0)/ Type M-KE (R8.0) 4. Atco Rubber Products, Inc. Type 036 (R-6.0)/Type 031 (R-8.0). 5. Superior Air Ducts Type SF 082 (R-8.0) 2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCT ELBOW SUPPORT A. Provide flexible duct elbow support for flexible duct connected directly to a diffuser collar. B. Elbow support shall be a radius forming brace designed to form flexible duct into a 90° elbow not less than one duct diameter in centerline radius. C. Elbow support shall be manufactured from 100% recycled copolymer polypropylene with a universal fit of 4 in. thru 16 in. and be UL listed. D. Basis-of-Design: Titus Flexright. 2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS TO FANS AND EQUIPMENT A. Basis-of-Design: Ventfabrics, Inc. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 12 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessori esConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ductmate Industries, Inc., Duro Dyne Inc., Elgen Manufacturing, Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. C. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, water and mildew resistant UL Standard 214. D. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. E. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 in. wide attached to two (2) strips of 2-3/4-in. wide, 0.028-in. thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032 in. thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. F. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/in. in the warp and 360 lbf/in. in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200°F. G. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/in. in the warp and 440 lbf/in. in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250°F. H. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemicalresistant coating. 1. Minimum Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 450 lbf/in. in the warp and 340 lbf/in. in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500°F. I. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 13 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-in. movement at start and stop. 2.11 ACCESS DOORS A. General: 1. Provide access doors of adequate size to allow easy access to the equipment that will require maintenance. Provide insulated or acoustically lined doors to prevent condensation where applicable. 2. Manufacturer to provide an installed neoprene gasket around perimeter of access door for airtight seal. 3. Systems 3 in. w.g. or less shall utilize a hinged, cam, or hinged and cam square framed access door. 4. Systems 4 in. w.g. and above shall utilize a sandwich type access door. Construct doors in accordance with Figure 7-3 of the 2005 SMACNA Manual, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal & Flexible" Third Edition. 5. Approved Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries "Sandwich" style door or approved equal. 6. All access doors shall be continuous piano hinged type, unless noted otherwise. 7. Non-hinged only allowed where clearance to ceiling does not allow a full 90° swing. 8. Double panel insulated type when used in insulated duct. 9. Single panel uninsulated type allowed in un-insulated duct. 10. Pressure rated according to system in which being installed. Door-to-frame and frame-to-duct gasketing. 11. Provide specified Seal Class A or B ductwork sealing around frame, and hand adjust the latch tension for proper seal, on all access doors other than sandwich panel (Ductmate) style. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 14 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAcc essoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 12. MINIMUM access door size for ducts 12 in. or less in depth is 12 in. x 8 in. 13. MINIMUM access door size for ducts 12 in. to 18 in. in depth is 18 in. x 14 in. 14. MINIMUM access door size for ducts more than 18 in. in depth is 24 in. x 18 in. 15. In ducts which require multiple section fire dampers due to duct size, provide one access door for each fire damper section. 16. Access doors for fire and smoke dampers shall be permanently labeled with 1/2 in. high lettering reading "SMOKE DAMPER" or "FIRE DAMPER". B. Door Types: 1. Low Pressure Systems (2 in. w.g. pressure class): National Controlled Air ADH1, Ruskin ADH22, Vent Products 9701, Air Balance FSA-100, Safe Air SAH, Nailor. 2. Medium and High Pressure Systems (3 in. w.g. pressure class and higher): a. Rectangular Duct: Ductmate Industries "Ultimate" Style Door, or equal. b. Round Duct: Ductmate Industries Round Sandwich type, or equal. 8 in. x 4 in. for ducts 14 in. and less in diameter. Ductmate Industries Round Sandwich type 16 in. x 12 in. for ducts more than 14 in. in diameter. c. Furnish and install factory supplied protector molding on cut medal edge for all Ductmate access doors. 2.12 EXHAUST HOOD CONNECTIONS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide hoods and/or duct connections to hoods/fans where furnished by others. 2. Duct material, thickness and joints as required for gases and vapors involved and per SMACNA. 2.13 CABLE SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Ductwork not required to be exterior insulated in exposed installations may be installed using Gripple Inc. B. Ductwork shall be installed using load rated, stainless steel cable suspension systems. Cables shall be pre-cut lengths, type 316 stainless steel with fused ends, and pre-made end attachments. C. Cable grips shall be of 316 stainless steel and have an internal tamperproof cable release mechanism. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 15 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 D. Stress distribution saddles shall be prescribed in addition for the support of rectangular duct on corners as necessary. E. Hangers shall have a manufacturer's published safe working load and have a 5 to 1 safety factor. F. Hanger assemblies shall be tested and verified by SMACNA and be installed in accordance with SMACNA Standards. G. Adjustable steel cable hanging system consisting of spring loaded, serrated clamping mechanism shall be tested and certified in compliance with all applicable SMACNA standards for upper and lower attachment methods. 1. All approved systems must be installed using matching components including steel cable, clamping mechanism and hardware approved by the manufacturer for its corresponding load rating. No Substitution of manufacturer's components is permitted. 2. Approved systems must be installed per the manufacturer's specific instructions and must not exceed the stated working load rating at any point throughout the system. H. Supports, bar/angle reinforcements, and other products that are not part of the duct that are manufactured of uncoated mild steel shall either be painted with two (2) coats of primer or shall be manufactured of a galvanized equivalent material. I. Approved Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries "Clutcher" Cable Hanging System or Gripple Inc. 2.14 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness. B. Ventlock 699 or 699-2 based upon insulation thickness. C. Install duct test holes where required for duct traverse testing and balancing purposes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment and systems shall be installed in accordance with local and state codes and regulations having jurisdiction. Bracing and hanging of ductwork shall be per SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 16 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 B. Install all ductwork concealed and tight to the structure above unless noted otherwise on shop drawings. Fabricate only after the approval of shop drawings, and in locations to avoid interferences. Ductwork installed without approved shop drawings, which requires removal/modification and/or reinstallation due to conflicts or improper installation shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner. C. Sizes given on contract drawings are inside dimensions. D. Keep openings continuously closed and sealed with protective plastic wrapping during construction to prevent entrance of dirt and debris. E. Extend access openings, damper rods and levers, to outside of external insulation make systems airtight. F. No piping, conduit or other obstruction to airflow is permitted in ductwork. G. Provide necessary openings, hanger inserts, framing, chases, and recesses, not provided by other trades. H. Exposed exhaust or return registers and grilles shall be flush with face of duct; exposed supply registers and grilles shall be mounted outside airstream with 45° shoe-tap extension collars. I. Provide 14 gauge sleeves for ducts passing through Mechanical Room floors. Set sleeves 4 in. above finished floor in Mechanical Rooms, seal watertight to floor. J. Where a return or exhaust duct is shown to be left open ended, provide hardware mesh screen at opening. K. Do not utilize flexible ductwork or connection in any way to connect variable or constant volume boxes to ductwork. L. For duct penetrations of non-rated walls, provide sheet metal angle framing or sheet metal closure panels around the entire perimeter of each duct wall penetration on both sides of the wall, where the gap exceeds 1/4 inch. Where the gap is less than 1/4 inch, the gap may be caulked on both sides of the wall. Non-rated wall penetrations SHALL NOT be fire caulked under any circumstances. M. For duct penetrations of rated walls, see Specification Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical and Electrical Requirements. 3.2 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Provide flexible connections for the intake and discharge connections of duct connected to fans and air handling equipment. B. Round connections are to be made with adhesive and metal drawbands with ends tightly bolted. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 17 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 C. Rectangular connections shall be made with material securely held in grooved seam between flanges. Attach with adhesive and mechanical fasteners on 6 in. centers. D. Connections shall be made with a minimum of 2 in. space between duct and equipment collars, installed in line, and with 1 in. excess material folded so as not to interfere with airflow through connection. E. Mechanically fastened and sealed, with specified duct sealant, at duct and equipment connections. 3.3 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCTS AND CONNECTORS A. "Air duct" applies to conduit or passageway for conveying air to or from heating, cooling, air conditioning or ventilating equipment but not including the plenum as defined in NFPA 90A. "Air connector" applies to conduit for transferring air between an air duct or plenum and an air terminal device or an air inlet or an air outlet as defined by the NFPA 90A. B. For round to oval connections, provide round-oval flexible adapter. C. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall be provided in fully extended condition, free from kinks. D. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall not be used in systems with entering air temperatures in excess of 250°F. E. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall use only the minimum length required to make the connection and shall be installed in the horizontal or vertical position. Flexible elbows are not acceptable. Do not exceed a maximum length of 48 in., fully extended. F. Flexible air ducts and connectors shall use minimum 1/2 in. wide positive locking, steel worm drive clamp, or nylon plenum rated straps for joints and connections. One clamp or strap for the inside core liner and one clamp or strap for the outer jacketing. When non-metallic (nylon) straps are used, they should be listed and labeled to standard UL 181B. Fastener package should be marked UL 181 B-C. G. Collars to which flexible duct is attached shall be beaded and a minimum of 2 in. in length. Wrap twice with UL 181 tape and secure with clamp or strap. Sleeves used for joining two sections of flexible duct shall be beaded and a minimum of 4 in. in length. The draw band shall be positioned behind the bead on the metal collar. H. Outer vapor barrier and insulation shall be slid over inner core and collar, wrapped twice with UL 151 tape and secured with a clamp or strap. I. Connections shall be per SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible", Air Diffusion Council "Flexible Duct Performance and Installation Standards" and NAIMA Installation Standards. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 18 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAcc essoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 J. Flexible duct shall be supported at manufacturer's recommended intervals, but no greater distance than 2'-6" on center and prior to all 90 degree bends. Maximum permissible sag shall be 1/2 in. per foot of support spacing. Provide a minimum of one hanger on each run of flexible duct. K. A connection to rigid duct or equipment shall be considered a support joint. Long horizontal duct runs with sharp bends shall have additional supports before and after the bend approximately one duct diameter from the centerline of the bend. L. Hanger or saddle material in contact with the flexible duct shall be of sufficient width to prevent any restriction of the internal diameter of the duct when the weight of the supported section rests on the hanger or saddle material. In no case shall the material contacting the flexible duct be less than 1-1/2 in. wide. Factory installed suspension systems integral to the flexible duct are an acceptable alternative hanging method when the manufacturer's recommended procedures are followed. M. The hanger shall be strapped around the flexible duct and secured to the structure above. Hangers shall not be attached to other mechanical or electrical objects. Hangers may be attached to an approved trapeze. Ceiling grid shall not be used to fabricate a trapeze. Support hangers shall be installed horizontal. Screws shall not be used to penetrate the flexible duct to attach to the hanger. N. Provide flexible duct connections and splices in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. O. Seal flexible duct connections with sealing materials listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181B. Mechanically secure connections with approved clamping materials. 3.4 TURNING VANES A. Install only in square elbows of equal dimensions. B. Install as per latest SMACNA Standards. C. Secure vane runners to duct with spot welding, riveting or sheet metal screws. D. When installing in ductwork with internal insulation. 1. Install runners in ductwork inside insulation and bolt through insulation and duct sides, welding bolts to insure rigid installation. Provide build-outs for duct Velocity-Pressure classes above 2 in. w.g. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 19 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Proj ects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 3.5 DUCT CLEANLINESS AND CLEANING AFTER INSTALLATION A. Duct Cleanliness: 1. All ductwork on the project shall meet the SMACNA Duct Cleanliness For New Construction Guidelines, "Advanced Level" of duct cleanliness for production, delivery, storage and installation of ductwork. 2. Prior to shipment to the jobsite, all duct ends and openings must be covered with a heavy duty, dual-ply, clear polyethylene protective film. Open ends are to be kept covered during transport, storage, and installation. As ductwork is installed at the job site, open ends are to be covered to maintain cleanliness. 3. The film must be securely affixed to protect against dirt and debris, and must be translucent to facilitate inspection of interior surfaces without removing the film. The film is have a elongation rating of 600% and a break strength of 13.1 lbs./in. The film shall contain no VOC's, and shall leave no residue on duct after removal. 4. Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries ProGuard (heavy duty grade clear). B. Cleaning After Installation: 1. Interior surfaces shall be free of dust and debris prior to initial start up. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. Any cleaning of duct systems shall comply with recommendations of NAIMA and NADCA. 2. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances that might cause corrosion, deterioration of the metal, or where ductwork is to be painted. 3. Clean debris from system before fans are turned on. 4. Keep openings continuously closed during the construction period. 5. Pay damages resulting from dirt blown on painted or other finished surfaces. 6. Repair or replace damaged fan wheels, dampers, or other system parts damaged as a result of debris. 7. Clean system as many times as required until the entire system is dirt free. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF ROUND DUCTWORK A. Use factory-fabricated couplings for joints. B. After the joint is slipped together, sheet metal screws are placed 1/2 in. from the joint bead for mechanical strength. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 20 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021 \21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 C. Sealer is applied to the outside of the joint and covering the screw heads. D. Flanged joints shall be made with neoprene rubber gaskets. 3.7 TEST OF DUCTWORK A. Systems designed to operate at 3-inches w.c. and below: Due to the limited quantity of new ductwork in the project area, ductwork is not required to be tested at the time of install. If during the balancing phase, the measured outlet airflow is +/- 10% of the air terminal unit airflow set point, ductwork shall be replaced or resealed as necessary to meet the design airflows. B. Systems designed to operate in excess of 3-inches w.c.: The entire system shall be leak tested. C. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the SMACNA Air Duct Leakage Test Manual and per the requirements of the 2020 Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State. D. Leakage testing shall be witnessed by representatives from Cornell University and the Project Engineer of Record. E. Acceptance Criteria: Generally, maximum system leakage shall be specified by the Consultant per the following recommendations: 1. Interior supply, return and general exhaust systems: 5% system leakage, tested at 1.25 times the expected operating static pressure. 2. Interior Laboratory exhaust systems: 2% system leakage, tested at 1.25 times the expected operating static pressure. 3. For systems not covered above, consult Chapter 19 of the 2012 ASHRAE HVAC Systems and Equipment Handbook F. Provide test reports indicating pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure and leakage rate. G. Ductwork not required to be tested for leakage, shall be checked and guaranteed to meet the standards of the specified SMACNA Duct Seal Class A. Air balancing and testing shall be used to determine satisfactory operation of duct systems. Balancing reports indicating excessive leakage amounts shall be required to rebuild, repair or seal ductwork having excessive leakage. 3.8 DAMPERS AND AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Provide volume dampers at all air outlets, diffusers, grilles and as noted on plans. Provide volume dampers at all low pressure supply, return and exhaust, branch ducts and as noted on the plans. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 21 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 B. Provide dampers necessary to permit proper balancing of air quantities. Comply with code requirements for smoke and fire control. Prevent introduction of uncontrolled outside air into building through roof and wall openings. C. When dampers are installed in acoustically lined ductwork, install with insulated "buildouts" per SMACNA. D. Install all dampers furnished as part of "Building Management System" Section. 3.9 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide for access to upstream side of duct mounted reheat coils, dampers, damper motors, fire dampers, smoke dampers, smoke detectors, control devices, fan bearings, and equipment requiring periodic inspection or service. B. For ducts that are too small to install an access door of the minimum specified size, provide a 12" long section of removable ductwork for maintenance and inspection access. Removable ductwork shall be fastened between device requiring access and next duct section with duct flanges or Donaldson Torit clamp with PVC foam seal. For ducts that are required to be insulated, provisions shall be made to allow insulation to be easily removed and re-installed. 3.10 DUCT SUPPORTS A. Provide per SMACNA, same material as duct. Hanger bands to extend down sides and turn under bottom 2 in. Minimum two metal screws per hanger. Angle iron on larger duct spaced per building structural system but not greater that 8 ft. Provide extra support angles as required. B. Provide additional supports as required to support reheat coils, air terminal units, filter enclosures, and any other duct mounted equipment independent from the associated ductwork system. 3.11 AIR AND WATERTIGHT DUCTWORK A. Where water and snow may accumulate on ductwork or where odors or corrosive gasses may collect, ductwork and plenums shall be made watertight by soldering, brazing or welding of joints. Grade ducts down toward waste points and/or toward louvers. Provide valve and drain piping from low point to waste point. 1. Intake and exhaust plenums. 2. Fume hood and corrosive exhaust. B. Test for Watertightness: Before concealment, apply water by hose to check for leaks, witnessed by Owner's Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 22 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018 -233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 3.12 DUCT SEALING A. Preparation: 1. Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease and loose of foreign matter that could impair adhesion, using soap and water or solvent. 2. Allow surfaces to dry completely before proceeding. B. Installation of Sealant System: 1. Apply sealant system to duct joints, fasteners, and seams in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Apply sealant by brush, putty knife or caulk gun, to full coverage. Remove excess adhesive immediately. 3. Completely seal duct joint, fasteners and seams without voids, to a minimum 20 mil thick wet film. 4. Apply and store at ambient temperature of 40°F to 100°F; and protect from freezing until dry. C. Field Quality Control: 1. Allow duct sealant system to cure a minimum of 72 hours before operating the system. 2. Do not apply external duct insulation or coatings until the joints have been inspected by the Owner's Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 31 00 - 23 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORKACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233100-SheetMetalAndDuctworkAccessoriesConstruction.doc 6/7/2021 EXHIBIT I - DUCTWORK MATERIALS SERVICE MATERIAL SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Supply, return, vent, relief, outside, general exhaust and laboratory exhaust Lock forming quality, galvanized steel ASTM A653 and A924 Joints and features as called for Accessories, dampers and air turns Same material and gauge as parent duct --------------- Field constructed apparatus casings Galvanized steel ASTM 525 Sealed airtight END OF SECTION 23 31 00 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 36 00 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233600-VariableVolumeTerminalUnits.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 23 36 00 - VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation as shown on the Contract Drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for terminal units including room number, maximum and minimum CFM, accessories, pressure drops, discharge and sound power data by octave band. Clearly indicate box sizes being proposed. Submit separately the controller and control interface devices being utilized. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TERMINAL UNITS A. General Unit Construction: 1. Unit casing shall be constructed of 22 gauge welded galvanized steel. Each unit shall be internally lined with 1/2 in. minimum 1-1/2 lb./ft.3 fiberglass insulation which meets NFPA 90A and UL 181. Factory label each unit with size, location, minimum and maximum CFM, and calibration chart. Air terminal units shall be capable of operating at 10 in. w.g., pressure maximum without damage. Maximum casing leakage at 3 in. W.G. shall be 11 cfm. 2. Units to be certified under ARI Standard 880-94 Certification Program and carry ARI seal. 3. Units shall be provided with factory access door option. 4. Units shall be provided with integral sound attenuators. B. Control and Volume Regulating Devices: 1. Internal unit damper shall be constructed of galvanized steel with blade-end seals for tight shut-off with a maximum damper leakage of 7 CFM against a maximum of 3 in. w.g. Damper shall be mounted on a galvanized steel shaft extending through the unit on torque free bearings. Terminal shall have normally open dampers. Minimum and maximum air quantities shall be factory set, but may be field adjustable. Neither the radiated or discharge sound power levels shall exceed the ratings of design equipment as scheduled on the Contract Drawings. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 36 00 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Des ign\Specs\HVAC\210018-233600-VariableVolumeTerminalUnits.doc 6/7/2021 C. Terminal Volume Controller (Microprocessor Based): 1. Provide unit with airflow velocity and total pressure sensor suitable for up to 3000 fpm inlet velocity. Sensor shall be averaging type with multiple sampling points on cross grids. Pressure independent microprocessor based electronic controller shall modulate airflow to maintain space temperature. 2. Provide a 24 volt electric damper actuator. The actuator shall be reversible with a switch and have a visual position indicator. The stroke time shall be 75 - 150 seconds at 0.53 in. lbs. Torque. The unit shall have a 3 foot long plenum rated cable. The housing shall be NEMA type 2 with a flammability rating conforming to UL94. The actuator shall be maintenance free and have a minimum life span of 60,000 cycles. Actuator shall be Bellimo NM24-1US, or equal. 3. Provide factory mounted transformers for controller and actuator suitable for 120 volt, 1 phase-input power. Multiple boxes (approximately 6 to 8) shall be powered off of one terminal unit transformer through a low voltage power loop. Coordinate with the Control Contractor which terminal units require transformers. 4. Wall mounted thermistor type electric space sensor provided by Control subcontractor. Controller shall interface with Building Management System to provide analog outputs for space temperature and airflow and accept analog inputs position the actuator for warm-up or pull-down and change space temperature set-point for night set-back, set-up or occupancy sensor status. Controller shall sequence reheat coil to maintain space. 5. The VAV box manufacturer shall provide the box and the airflow sensor, microprocessor based controller and damper actuator. The temperature control subcontractor shall ship the microprocessor based controller and damper motor to the VAV box manufacturer's factory for mounting and calibration. D. Design Equipment: Titus DESV. E. Acceptable Makes: Anemostat, Krueger, Titus. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Suspended terminal units from the building structural system independent of the ceiling system. If this cannot be accomplished, provide additional intermediate angle iron from which the units shall be suspended. Level each unit. Access to the terminal unit controls shall be accomplished by remove of ceiling panels or through an access door. Coordinate locations of access doors. END OF SECTION 23 36 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 37 13 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233713-RegistersAndDiffusers.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 23 37 13 - REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Registers/Grilles/Diffusers: Submit product data including room schedule listing size, CFM, throw, direction of throw, accessories, finish, material type, color chart, pressure drop and noise criteria. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Each manufacturer shall check noise level ratings for registers and diffusers to insure that the sizes selected will not produce noise to exceed N.C. - 24, measured at occupant level; notify Owner's Representative of problems prior to submittal. B. Pressure drop, airflow and noise criteria selection is based on design equipment. Manufacturers not submitting design makes must provide written certification in front of submittal that equipment submitted has been checked against and performs equal to the design make. C. Borders and frames shall be coordinated with materials and ceiling systems to integrate with architectural ceiling details and finishes scheduled. D. Locations of ceiling mounted air terminal devices shall be coordinated with locations shown on architectural reflected ceiling plans. E. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw and pressure drop. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. 1.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR REGISTERS A. General: 1. A register is defined as a grille plus a volume damper. 2. Registers shall be installed "sight-proof" where possible, i.e.: High wall register with horizontal blades inclined up, or along a wall with blades facing the wall. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 37 13 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233713-RegistersAndDiffusers. doc 6/7/2021 3. Borders and frames shall be of the same material as register face unless specified otherwise. B. Mounting Frames: 1. Provide with screw holes in register face punched and countersunk at factory, and mounting frame drilled and tapped to suit. Sponge rubber gasket between frame and wall or ceiling for all surface mounted frames. 2. Frame shall be overlap type and shall be suitable for type of ceiling where register is to be installed. C. Finishes: 1. Baked enamel (of colors as selected from the manufacturer's standard color chart), as scheduled. D. Design Equipment: Titus unless otherwise noted. E. Manufacturers: Anemostat, Carnes, Krueger, Titus, Price, Tuttle and Bailey, Nailor. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS FOR DIFFUSERS A. General: 1. Provide four way blow unless otherwise noted. 2. Where manufacturer's size recommendations require duct sizes or connections differing from design, Contractor shall provide at no change in contract price. 3. Suitable for recessed mounting unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide square to round neck transitions as required. 5. Provide sponge rubber gasket for all surface mounted frames. B. Finishes: 1. Baked enamel (of colors as selected from the manufacturer's standard color chart) as scheduled. C. Frame style shall be suitable for ceiling type in which diffuser is to be installed. D. Design Equipment: Titus unless otherwise noted. E. Manufacturers: Anemostat, Carnes, Krueger, Titus, Price, Tuttle and Bailey, Nailor. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 37 13 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-00 00\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-233713-RegistersAndDiffusers.doc 6/7/2021 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPLY TYPES A. Type 1 - (Spiral Duct Mounted Supply Register): 1. Aluminum construction with double deflection capability and the front blades parallel to the long dimension. 2. Grilles shall be constructed with radius end caps and foam gaskets for a tight seal to the duct diameter. 3. Blades constructed of heavy duty extruded aluminum, spaced ¾ inch apart. Blades shall be individually adjustable. 4. Model: Titus Model S300 FL. 2.2 RETURN/EXHAUST TYPES A. Type A - (Exhaust and Return Grilles): 1. Aluminum construction with radius end caps. 2. Perforated 3/16" holes on 1/4" staggered centers. 3. Foam gasketing. 4. Model: Titus S8F PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Rough in or install per reflected ceiling plan or in location instructed by Owner's Representative. B. Provide approved air extractors behind all duct mounted supply registers in exposed ductwork. C. When the final connection to an exhaust or return grille is made, a 12 in. minimum height plenum box must be supplied to all grilles. Plenum dimensions shall match grille size. Paint inside of plenum box flat black. Provide 1 in. acoustical lining in plenum box. Oversize the plenum to account for the thickness of the lining. D. Seal all supply and return registers, grilles and diffusers during construction operations to limit dust entering HVAC systems and ductwork. Seals may be removed just prior to testing and balancing, but not without the approval of the Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION 23 37 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 82 19 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation FAN COIL UNITS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-238219-FanCoilUnits.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 23 82 19 - FAN COIL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation shown on Contract Drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for room fan coil units and accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Baked enamel finish of color selected from manufacturers standard colors. Each piece of equipment boxed separately and tagged by room number. 2.2 CONSOLE FAN COIL UNITS A. Cabinets: 1. 18 gauge steel removable front enclosure so that internal operating parts are accessible for service or replacement. 2. Bar supply grilles. 3. Isolated valve compartment. 4. Access to motor, fan assembly, and filters. 5. Type as required for job conditions. 6. Return air grilles. 7. Insulated drip pan for coil and valve sections. 8. Insulated cabinet with material in compliance with NFPA 90A requirements. B. Cooling Coils: 1. Copper tubes and headers, nonferrous fins. C. Motors: 1. EC motor CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 82 19 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation FAN COIL UNITS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC \210018-238219-FanCoilUnits.doc 6/7/2021 2. EC motor shall utilize a permanent magnet roter, which is connected to the shaft through resilient rings to absorb high frequency torque ripple. 3. The EC motor shall deliver precise speed and economical performance regardless of system pressure. 4. Quick detachable motor cords. 5. Permanently lubricated bearings. D. Shall not exceed sound data as scheduled. Acoustical data is published manufacturer's data obtained by tests in accordance with ARI Standard 350-086. E. Insulated, stainless steel, double sloped drain pans. F. Options: 1. Keylock panel and access doors. 2. Manual air vent. 3. Disconnect switch. 4. 1 in. pleated throwaway filter. 5. Spare filter 6. Unit-mounted fan speed switch. G. Design Equipment: Trane. H. Make: Carrier, Daikin Applied, Trane. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Left hand or right hand piping connections for supply and return. Obtain complete instructions from unit manufacturer regarding each item and proper installation of same. Adjust motor speed. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 23 82 19 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation FAN COIL UNITS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\HVAC\210018-238219-FanCoilUnits.doc 6/7/2021 3.2 INSTALLATION A. In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Install piping within valve compartment to allow for pipe insulation. Provide drain piping. Vacuum clean inside of unit prior to operating units. Provide flexible duct connections at supply and return connections to ceiling units. For recessed and ceiling units, coordinate location of valves, fittings, filters, with access panels, to allow for convenient service of components. Install remote speed switch for recess and ceiling units. Provide wiring. END OF SECTION 23 82 19 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 00 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260500-BasicElectricalRequirements.docx 6/7/2021 SECTION 26 05 00 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ROUGHING A. The Contract Drawings have been prepared in order to convey design intent and are diagrammatic only. Drawings shall not be interpreted to be fully coordinated for construction. B. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to avoid obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. C. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work. D. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings. Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers, air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans. E. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other Divisions, obtain from Owner and other Divisions, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows: 1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation in new location. 2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time, obtain an acknowledgement in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 00 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260500-BasicElectricalRequirements.docx 6/7/2021 1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Potable water systems and equipment shall be built according to AWWA Standards. 4. Gas-fired equipment and system shall meet AGA Regulations and shall have AGA label. 5. All electrical equipment and systems, as a whole, shall be tested and listed by an OSHA approved Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the intended use in accordance with the applicable standards and have a physical label indicating such. 1.3 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after their review. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 1.4 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of General Construction Trade. Mechanical and Electrical trades shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 00 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260500-BasicElectricalRequirements.docx 6/7/2021 5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves. 6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction trade. B. In Existing Buildings: 1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings. 2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening. 3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors. 4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings. 1.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 00 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Project s\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260500-BasicElectricalRequirements.docx 6/7/2021 5. Plastic pipe/conduit materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars. 6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations. 7. Fire-stopping products shall not be used for sealing of penetrations of non-rated walls or floors. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants. 2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts. 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. 5. 3-M Fire Products. 6. Hilti Corporation. 1.6 ACCESS PANELS A. Provide access panels for required access to respective trade's work. Location and size shall be the responsibility of each trade. Access panels provided for equipment shall provide an opening not smaller than 22 in. by 22 in. Panels shall be capable of opening a minimum of 90 degrees. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper information or failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide General Construction trade with a set of architectural plans with size and locations of access panels. 1.7 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment. Provide 3,000 lb. concrete, chamfer edges, trowel finish, and securely bond to floor by roughening slab and coating with cement grout. Bases 4 in. high (unless otherwise indicated); shape and size to accommodate equipment. Provide anchor bolts in equipment bases for all equipment provided for the project, whether mounted on new concrete bases or existing concrete bases. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 00 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260500-BasicElectricalRequirements.docx 6/7/2021 1.8 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide final connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including domestic water piping, wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains. C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required. D. Refer to manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. 1.9 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide roughing and final connections to all equipment. Provide loose key stops, sanitary "P" traps, tailpiece, adapters, gas or air cocks, and all necessary piping and fittings from roughing point to equipment. Provide installation of sinks, faucets, traps, tailpiece furnished by others. Provide cold water line with gate valve and backflow prevention device at locations called for. Provide continuation of piping and connection to equipment that is furnished by others. Provide relief valve discharge piping from equipment relief valves. C. Provide valved water outlet adjacent to equipment requiring same. Provide equipment type floor drains, or drain hubs, adjacent to equipment. D. Install controls and devices furnished by others. E. Refer to Contract Documents for roughing schedules, and equipment and lists indicating scope of connections required. F. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, as required. G. Refer to Manufacturer drawings and specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 00 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs \ELEC\210018-260500-BasicElectricalRequirements.docx 6/7/2021 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment. Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC. B. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required. C. Refer to Manufacturer's drawings/specifications for requirements of laboratory equipment and special equipment. Verify connection requirements before bidding. END OF SECTION 26 05 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMeth ods.docx 6/7/2021 SECTION 26 05 01 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The drawings are diagrammatic, unless detailed dimensioned drawings are included, and show only approximate locations of equipment, fixtures, panelboards, conduits, and wiring devices. Exact locations are subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. The general run of electrical feeders, branch circuits, and conduits, indicated on the drawings, is not intended to be the exact routing. Exact routings of conduit shall suit the job conditions. B. Circuit designations, in the form of "Home Runs" on branches, indicate the designation of the branch circuit, the size and the quantity of branch circuit conductors, and the panel board or interconnection box from which the branch circuit is served. C. Make measurements at the site and in the building during construction for all systems installed as the work progresses in such a manner that the equipment, piping, vents, ducts, conduit, and boxes will fit in the space available. Maintain headroom and if in unfinished areas, be as neatly installed, as obscure and "out-of-the-way" as physically possible. Where more than one trade is involved in an area, space or chase, all shall cooperate and install their own work to utilize the space equally between them in proportion to their individual requirements. In general, ductwork shall be given preference except where grading of piping becomes a problem, followed by piping then electrical wiring. If, after installation of any equipment, piping, ducts, conduit, and boxes, it is determined that ample maintenance and passage space has not been provided, rearrange work and /or furnish other equipment as required for ample maintenance space. D. Any changes in the size or location of the material or equipment supplied, which may be necessary in order to meet field conditions or in order to avoid conflicts between trades, shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Owner's Representative and approval received before such alterations are made. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. B. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc., correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equal in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects \2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/7/2021 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for the following equipment, materials and products, including all fittings and accessories: 1. Conduit 2. Expansion Fittings 3. Wireway and Wire Trough 4. Conductors 5. Cable Termination and Splice Kits 6. Photoelectric Controls 7. Underground Pullboxes (Handholes) and Covers 8. Water Proofing Seals 9. Flashing, Sealing, Firestopping Materials PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Conduit, Raceway and Tubing: 1. Rigid Metal Conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized or electro-galvanized steel, UL listed "rigid metal conduit." a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Republic Conduit 2) Allied Tube and Conduit 3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) Approved equal 2. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be constructed one continuous length of electrogalvanized, spirally wound steel strip with interlocking convolutions and interior surfaces free from burrs and sharp edges. Shall be UL listed "flexible metal conduit" or "liquidtight flexible metal conduit" as required. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Republic Conduit 2) Allied Tube and Conduit 3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) American Flexible Conduit Company 3. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (Schedule 40 for concrete encasement, Schedule 80 for direct burial or where exposed) shall be UL listed "rigid non-metallic conduit" for application in underground, encased, and exposed applications in accordance with Article 352 of the National Electrical Code. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/7/2021 The conduit shall be made from polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and shall be rated for 90ºC conductors. Conduit and fittings shall be tested in accordance with the testing requirements defined in NEMA TC-2, NEMA TC-3, UL-651 and UL514. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Carlon 2) Heritage Plastics 3) PW Eagle B. Conduit Fittings: 1. Fittings for rigid metal conduit shall be fully threaded and shall be of the same material as the respective raceway system. Fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be single screw indenter fittings for conduits up to 2 in. and double screw indenter fittings for conduits 2 in. and larger. Connectors shall also have insulated throat up to and including 1 in. size. For sizes 1-1/4 in. and larger, provide plastic insulating bushing. Die-cast, pressure cast fittings shall not be used. Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduit shall be solvent cemented in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) O.Z. Gedney 2) Steel City 3) Thomas & Betts 4) Crouse-Hinds 5) Carlon 2. Expansion Fittings shall be watertight, combination expansion and deflection type designed to compensate for movement in any direction. Fittings shall have flexible copper braid bonding jumpers, neoprene sleeve and stainless steel bands, use aluminum body fittings for rigid aluminum conduit. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Crouse-Hinds, Type "DX" 2) O.Z./Gedney, Type "DX" 3) Approved equal C. Wireway and Wire Trough: 1. Wireway and Wire Trough shall be hinged cover type wireway with provisions for full lay-in along the entire length of run. Wireway shall be steel, enclosed with gray enamel finish. Provide NEMA 1 units for interior/dry/clean locations and NEMA 12 for interior dry maintenance/shop/utility locations. Size to meet EC fill requirements or larger as noted on Contract Documents. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/7/2021 Provide knockouts along runs. Recess in wall where required for flush mounted equipment. Hinge shall be on the bottom of front face for horizontal mounting. Provide all elbows, tees, pullboxes, fittings, hangers, reducers, supports, supports, etc., to meet installation requirements. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Square D "Square Duct" 2) General Electric 3) Hoffman 4) Meco D. Channel Support Systems: 1. Channel Support Systems shall be provided for racking of conduit, trapeze suspensions, equipment support, cable racks and panel racks. Channel shall be steel with electroplated zinc finish for interior dry locations. Provide necessary accessories such as bolts, screws, anchors, connection plates, and straps as required to perform the necessary functions. Wet location and exterior channel support systems shall be steel with hot dipped galvanized finish and stainless steel hardware as a minimum. Cut ends shall be touched up with suitable matching finish. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Unistrut 2) Globe 3) Kindorf 4) B-Line E. Conductors and Cables: 1. Conductors shall be insulated for 600 volts, unless otherwise noted, and shall be standard AWG and kcmil sizes. Conductors shall be 98% copper, thermal plastic or cross-linked polymer insulated, heat and moisture resistant. Conductors shall be stranded, except for conductors used for fire alarm system wiring. Conductor sizes No. 18 AWG and smaller shall be a solid single strand; No. 16 AWG and larger shall be multiple stranded. Minimum conductor size shall be #12 AWG except smaller sizes may be used for communications and special systems. Conductor sizes shall be as called for. Conductors shall be labeled with UL seal and be marked with the manufacturer's name, wire size and insulation type. Insulation for all 600 volt conductors shall be Type THHN/THWN-2 for conductor sizes #8 AWG and smaller or Type XHHW-2 for conductor sizes #6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise noted. All exterior and underground conductors shall be XHHW-2. Luminaire fixture wire shall conform to the latest Underwriters Laboratories requirements. Flexible cords and cables for general portable use shall be Type SO or SOOW or as noted. Cables for special use shall be of the type specified for the application. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/7/2021 a. Color Coding: 1) All circuits shall be color coded according to the following schedule. Three Phase 120/208V 240V Three Phase 277/480V Single Phase 120/240V Ground Green Green Green Neutral White Gray White A or L1 Black Brown Black B or L2 Red Orange Red C or L3 Blue Yellow --- b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) General Cable 2) Prysmian 3) South Wire 4) Okonite 5) Senator F. Cable Termination Kits: 1. The shielded power cable termination shall be capable of continuous operation at the rated voltage of the cable it is to be used on, up to 35 kV. It must be rated for continuous operation at 90°C, with an emergency overload temperature rating of 130°C. The termination shall meet the requirements of IEEE Standard 48, for a Class 1 Termination. It shall be a one-piece design, where high-dielectric constant (capacitive) stress control is integrated within a skirted insulator made of silicone rubber, munsell gray in color. The termination shall not require heat or flame for installation. The termination kit must contain all of the necessary materials required to make three terminations (except for the lugs). In addition to normal locations, the termination must be designed for contaminated indoor and outdoor locations. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. 3M Brand b. Elastimold c. Raychem d. Approved equal G. Separable Splices/Apparatus Connections: 1. The shielded power cable separable insulated connector splice or 600 Amp apparatus connection shall be capable of continuous operation at 35 kV, 600 amps and 90°C, with an emergency overload temperature rating of 130°C. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/7/2021 The system and components shall meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE deadbreak interfaces. The elbow (tee-module) and all other rubber components shall be made of peroxide cured EPDM rubber, and the connecting components shall be insulated with molded epoxy. The system shall be available as specific kits for splicing, tapping (adding-on), dead-ending and apparatus connecting. Provide with test point for apparatus connection. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) 3M Brand w/Grounding Kit 2) Elastimold w/Grounding Kit 3) Raychem 4) Approved equal H. Permanent Splices: 1. The shielded power cable splice must meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE and meeting the cable voltage rating. It must be rated for continuous operation at 90ºC, with an emergency overload rating of 130ºC. The splice shall be made of peroxide cured EPDM rubber. The splice kit must contain all of the necessary materials required to make one inline splice (except for the connector), including a solderless mechanical ground jumper. The splice shall be designed for splicing tape shielded, wire shielded, and UniShield cables without the requirement of additional adapters. It shall be rated for indoor, outdoor and direct burial applications. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. 3M Brand b. Elastimold c. Raychem d. Approved equal I. Arc Proofing Tape: 1. Medium voltage cables in all manholes, vaults, building entrances, switchgear and hand holes shall be wrapped with a fire retardant arc proofing tape. This shall be continuous length, half lapped as a minimum. 2. Make: 3M, 77W secured with Scotch 69 Glass Cloth Electrical Tape. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 7 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAnd Methods.docx 6/7/2021 J. Boxes: 1. Outlet boxes shall be galvanized steel, not less than 2-1/8 in. deep, unless restricted by the surroundings, 4 in. square or octagonal, with knockouts. Boxes and associated fittings, plates and devices shall be mechanically fastened (screwed), friction fitting is not acceptable. Outlet boxes exposed to moisture, exterior, wet or damp locations shall be cadmium cast alloy complete with external threaded hubs and gasketed screw fastened covers. Minimum box size shall be as indicated in the NEC for the conductors and devices installed. Boxes shall be approved for the environmental condition where they will be installed. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Steel City 2) Raco 3) Appleton 4) Crouse Hinds 2. Pull and junction boxes shall be constructed of not less than 14 gauge galvanized steel with trim for flush or surface mounting in accordance with the location to be installed. Provide screw-on type covers. Boxes installed in damp or wet locations shall be of raintight construction with gasketed cover and threaded conduit hubs. In no case shall boxes be sized smaller than as indicated NEC for conduit and conductor sizes installed. Boxes shall be approved for the environmental condition of the location where they will be installed. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Hoffman 2) Keystone 3) Approved equal 3. Receptacles: a. Provide receptacles where indicated on the drawings and where called for. Provide type receptacle as indicated and if not indicated then utilize general receptacle. b. General Receptacle: Units shall be NEMA 5-20R, duplex, 20A, 125V, side/back wired, #14 to 10AWG screw with nylon face, indented brass contacts for three point connection, self grounding mounting screw clip plate (not staple), ground terminal Meet requirements of Federal Specification W-C-596, NEMA WD-6 and UL 498. 1) Units shall be: Hubbell 5362, P&S 5362 or Leviton 5362-S. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 8 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/7/2021 4. Photoelectric Controls: a. Heavy Duty, 1/2 in. Conduit Mounting: 1) 120 volt, SPST, 2000 watt: Tork Model 2101. 2) 277 volt, SPST, 2000 watt: Tork Model 2104. b. Combination Photoelectric Control and Contactor: 1) 120 volt, DPST, 3000 watt per pole: Tork Model 5403. 2) 277 volt, DPST, 3000 watt per pole: Tork Model 5404-3. 3) 208 volt, DPST, 3000 watt per pole: Tork Model 5404. K. Underground Pullboxes (Handholes): 1. Sidewalk and Grass Areas: Boxes shall be comprised of composite material with stainless steel hardware and ANSI Tier 8 rating minimum. Provide conduit/duct openings per the plans/schematics with spare capacity for 2 - 2" in each side wall, minimum. Box shall be minimum 2'-0" wide x 2'-0" long x 3'-0" deep inside dimensions, or larger as required to meet NEC requirements. Cover shall be imprinted with either "Electric", "Telephone", etc. to designate type of service. Provide 18 in. of #2 crushed stone under pullbox and 18 in. beyond. Refer to drawings per details and locations. a. Manufacturers: 1) Quazite 2) Old Castle 3) Approved equal 2. All Other Areas: Boxes shall have ANSI Tier 22 rating (22,500lb weight rating) and be comprised of steel reinforced concrete walls and bottom sections using 5,000 psi, minimum concrete. Bottom shall have 12 in. diameter sump opening and 3/4 in. ground rod opening. Knockouts and openings shall be positioned for conduits/ducts. Provide two (2) rows of anchor bolt inserts for cable rack supports to permit installation of two (2) cable rack supports on each side wall and one (1) cable rack support on each end wall. Provide hot dipped galvanized steel pulling irons at 45° angle between floor and wall opposite each opening. Provide 24 in. x 24 in. opening for frame and cover and a suitable masonry "Throat" between top of box and cover frame to allow for variation in final finished grade. Frame and cover shall be case iron. Cover shall be imprinted with either "Electric", "Telephone", "Medium Voltage Electric", etc. to designate type of service. Unit shall be rated to AASHTO HS20-44 loading. Provide 18 in. drywell of #2 crushed stone under pullbox and 18" beyond. Refer to drawings per details and locations. a. Manufacturers: 1) Pullbox: Lakelands precast. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 9 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Pr ojects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/7/2021 2) Cover: Neenah Foundry Company, roadway type. 3) Approved equal. L. Waterproofing Seals: 1. Provide expanding link type seal, for installation between duct/conduit, and sleeve or core-drilled hole in concrete. 2. Make: Link Seal, manufactured by Thunderline Corp. M. Flashing, Sealing, Fire-stopping: 1. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: a. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. b. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide firestop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. c. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. d. The methods used shall incorporate qualities, which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants b. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP c. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts d. Carborundum Fyre Putty e. 3-M Fire Products CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 10 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\De sign\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/7/2021 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Unless otherwise noted, wiring for all systems indicated in the contract documents shall consist of insulated conductors installed in raceways. Raceways shall be continuous from outlet box to outlet box and from outlet box to cabinet, junction or pull box. Secure and bond raceways to all boxes and cabinets so that each system of raceways is electrically continuous throughout. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, install all wiring in the following raceway system: 1. Wiring 600 Volts or Less in Dry Locations: Electrical metallic tubing. 2. Wiring 600 Volts or Less in Outdoors, Above Grade Locations: Rigid metal conduit, Rigid non-metallic conduit (Schedule 80). 3. Wiring 600 Volts or Less Installed Below Grade, in Concrete Floor Slabs or Below Ground Floor Slab: Rigid non-metallic conduit encased in concrete with rigid metal conduit bends and penetrations through building floors and walls. 4. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for final connection to all motors, final connection to rotating or vibrating equipment, final connections to dry type transformers and final connections to recessed lighting fixtures. Liquidtight flexible conduit shall be used in all wet or damp locations. Maximum length of flexible conduit shall be 36 in., except that from outlet boxes to lighting fixture maximum length shall be 6 ft. Provide green insulated equipment grounding conductor in all flexible metal conduit. B. Raceways: 1. Sized as indicated on the drawings. Where sizes are not indicated, raceways shall be sized as required by the National Electrical Code in accordance with the quantity, size, and type of the insulation conductors to be installed. Raceways shall be minimum 3/4 in. trade size for branch circuit wiring and minimum 1 in. trade size for all telephone intercommunications, instrumentation, fire alarm, television and computer systems and for all branch circuit "Home Runs" to panelboards. 2. Installed to provide adequate grounding between all outlets and the established electrical system ground. 3. Cut square, free of burrs due to field cutting or manufacture, and bushed where necessary. 4. Installed with exterior surfaces not less than 6 in. from any surface with normal operating temperature of 200°F or higher. 5. Plugged at the ends of each roughed-in raceway with an approved cap or disc to prevent the entrance of foreign materials during construction. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 11 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMeth ods.docx 6/7/2021 6. Concealed throughout except where exposure is permitted by the Owner's Representative. 7. Installed parallel or perpendicular to floors, walls and ceilings where exposed wiring is permitted. 8. Installed with a minimum of bends and offsets. All bends shall be made without kinking or destroying the cross section contour of the raceway. Factory made bends are acceptable and should be considered for raceways larger than 2 in. 9. Installed with UL approved rain-tight and concrete-tight couplings and connectors. 10. Firmly fastened within 3 ft. of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. Raceways shall not be attached to or supported by wooden plug anchors or supported from mechanical work such as ductwork, piping, etc. 11. Installed with a #14 AWG fish wire in all telephone, intercommunication, "Spare" or "Empty" conduit runs to facilitate future installation of conductors. 12. Installed with expansion fittings at all building expansion joints such that no undue stress is placed on any electrical raceway due to the proper functioning of expansion joints. 13. Arranged in a neat manner for access and allow for access to work installed by other trades. 14. Raceways installed in concrete slabs shall be located so as not to affect structural integrity of slab, and such that conduit shall have a minimum of 1 in. of concrete cover on all sides. Obtain approval from the Owner's Representative prior to installing conduit larger than 1 in. trade size in concrete slabs. Raceways in slabs shall be for floor box use only. 15. If it is necessary to burn holes through webs of beams or girders, call such points to the attention of the Owner's Representative and receive written approval both as to location and size of hole before proceeding with work. All holes shall be burned no larger than absolutely necessary. 16. Become familiar with the general construction of the building and place sleeves, inserts, etc., as required. All penetrations through existing floors shall be core drilled and sleeved. 17. Wherever a cluster of four (4) or more raceways rise out of floor exposed, provide neatly formed 6 in. high concrete envelop, with chamfered edges, around raceways. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 12 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Desi gn\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/7/2021 18. All raceways shall be supported adequately by malleable iron pipe clamps or other approved methods. In exterior or wet locations, supports shall allow not less than 1/4 in. air space between raceway and wall. Firmly fasten raceway within 3 ft. of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. The following table lists maximum spacing between conditions, strength of supporting members, etc. 19. Furnish and install such supports at no additional cost to owner. Conduit Trade Size Type of Run Horizontal Spacing in Feet Vertical Spacing in Feet 3/4 in. Concealed 7 10 1 in., 1-1/4 in. Concealed 8 10 1-1/2 in. and larger Concealed 10 10 1/2 in., 3/4 in. Exposed 5 7 1 in., 1-1/4 in. Exposed 7 8 1-1/2 in. and larger Exposed 10 10 20. Where raceways puncture roof, install pitch pockets as required in order that the roof warranty is maintained. Coordinate with representative of roofing material manufacturer. 21. Provide a bushing at each conduit termination unless fitting at box where conduit terminates has hubs designed in such a manner to afford equal protection to conductors. Provide grounding type insulated bushings on all conduit sizes 1-1/4 in. trade size and larger, and on all feeder raceways regardless of size. Provide standard bushings for conduits 1 in. and smaller unless otherwise stated. 22. Differing Temperatures: For raceways routed between areas with differing temperatures (interior to exterior, walk in coolers/freezers, environmental chambers, etc.) install raceway as follows: a. Provide a thermal break, 4 in. minimum of stainless steel or Schedule 40 PVC conduit within space wall/separation. b. Seal raceway penetration through the wall/separation. c. Provide a box on each side of the space wall/separation. d. Provide raceway interior sealant (duct seal or suitable foam) to provide a complete air barrier after conductors are installed. e. Mounting of raceway and boxes on equipment shall be coordinated and approved by the equipment manufacturer. 23. Raceway installed in wet, damp or exterior walls shall have a spacer provided to maintain a space/void between the mounting surface and the raceway. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 13 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-000 0\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/7/2021 C. Wiring Methods: 1. Conductors shall not be installed until raceway system, including all outlets, cabinets, bushings and fittings, is completed. Verify that all work of other trades which may cause conductor damage is completed. Use only U.L. approved cable lubricants when necessary. Do not use mechanical means to pull conductors No. 8 or smaller. 2. In general, conductors shall be the same size from the last protective device to the load. 3. All wiring systems shall be properly grounded and continuously polarized throughout, following the color-coding specified. Connect branch circuit wiring at panelboards, as required, in order to provide a "balanced" three-phase load on feeders. 4. Provide insulated green ground conductor in each branch circuit. 5. All feeder connections shall be made to bus and other equipment using solderless, pressure type terminal lugs. 6. For splices and taps, No. 10 AWG and smaller, use solderless "twist on" connectors having spiral steel spring and insulated with a vinyl cap and skirt. 7. For splices and taps, No. 8 and larger, use insulated solderless set screw AL/CU or hydraulically compressed sleeve fittings suitable for the intended use. 8. Use cast connections for ground conductors. 9. Provide minimum 6 in. of spare/slack of each conductor in each junction or pull box and termination. 10. Make all splices and connections in accessible boxes and cabinets only. 11. Cover uninsulated splices, joints, and free ends of conductor with rubber and friction tape of PVC electrical tape. Plastic insulating caps may serve as insulation. Heat shrink sleeves shall be acceptable for crimp type splices. 12. On termination at branch circuit outlets, leave a minimum of 8 in. free conductor for installation of devices and fixtures. 13. Feeder conductors shall be continuous from point of origin to load termination without splice. If this is not practical, contact the Owner's Representative and receive written approval for splicing prior to installation of feeder(s). Where feeder conductors pass through junction and pull boxes, bind and lace conductors of each feeder together. For parallel sets of conductors, match lengths of conductors as near equal as possible. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 14 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/7/2021 14. Branch circuit conductors installed in panelboards, and control conductors installed in control cabinets and panels shall be neatly bound together using "TyRaps" or equal. 15. Provide conduit seals and explosion proof devices as indicated on the plans and as dictated by the NEC for all hazardous locations indicated on the drawings. 16. Lighting fixtures, detectors, etc., in mechanical equipment, boiler and pump rooms shall be installed with exposed wiring after equipment, ductwork, piping, etc., are in place. In general, lighting shall be as located on the drawings; where conflicts exist, locate lights for best distribution. 17. Fire proof tape all medium voltage cables in handholes, man holes, building entrance and junction/pull boxes. 18. Provide cable/conductor vertical support in accordance with the NEC. 19. Manholes/Handholes: a. All cables operating at 1,000 volts to ground and above shall be Arc proofed using a fire retardant Arc proofing tape installed per manufacturer's instructions. b. Provide cable racks, and securely fasten all cables. Support stanchions shall be spaced 3 ft. apart maximum. c. Provide separation of conductors of different systems per NEC requirements. d. Pitch all raceways toward the manhole/handhole. e. Mortar and brick the throats of manholes/handholes to grade level. Set cover rim to 1 in. above grass areas and flush with finished areas. Waterproof throat with elastic bituminous plastic cement coating. D. Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Install junction and pull boxes in readily accessible locations. Access to boxes shall not be blocked by equipment, piping, ducts and the like. Provide all necessary junction or pull boxes required due to field conditions and size as require by the National Electrical Code. E. Hangers and Supports: 1. Provide steel angles, channels and other materials necessary for the proper support and erection of motor starters, distribution panelboards, large disconnect switches, large circuit breakers, pendant mounted lighting fixtures, etc. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 15 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\21001 8-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/7/2021 2. Panelboards, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, cabinets, large pull boxes, adjustable speed drives, cable support boxes and starters shall be secured to the building structure and not supported from conduits. Small panelboards, etc., as approved by Owner's Representative, may be supported on walls. Racks for support of conduits and heavy electrical equipment shall be secured to building construction by substantial structural supports. F. Identification: 1. Provide complete type written directory for each panelboard listing room number, function, etc., for each circuit breaker. Provide type written updated panelboard directories for existing panelboards affected by this work. 2. Identify junction and pullboxes for particular service and circuit such as power, lighting, fire alarm, telephone, interphone, public address, nurse call, etc. using stencil lettering on cover. G. Spare Parts: 1. Deliver to Owner and obtain receipt for spare parts including key switches, fuses, etc. 3.2 TESTS A. Branch circuits shall be tested during installation for continuity and identification and shall pass operational tests to determine that all circuits perform the function for which they are designed. For all feeder wiring rated 600 volts or less, provide 1,000 volt "Megger" insulation test prior to energizing feeders. Use a 1,000-volt motor driven megger for all tests. Test voltage shall be applied until readings reach a constant value, and until three (3) equal readings, each one (1) minute apart, are obtained. Minimum megger reading shall be 45 megohms for feeder conductors. Document test results and submit for approval prior to energizing conductors. END OF SECTION 26 05 01 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 SECTION 26 05 01 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The drawings are diagrammatic, unless detailed dimensioned drawings are included, and show only approximate locations of equipment, fixtures, panelboards, conduits, and wiring devices. Exact locations are subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. The general run of electrical feeders, branch circuits, and conduits, indicated on the drawings, is not intended to be the exact routing. Exact routings of conduit shall suit the job conditions. B. Circuit designations, in the form of "Home Runs" on branches, indicate the designation of the branch circuit, the size and the quantity of branch circuit conductors, and the panel board or interconnection box from which the branch circuit is served. C. Make measurements at the site and in the building during construction for all systems installed as the work progresses in such a manner that the equipment, piping, vents, ducts, conduit, and boxes will fit in the space available. Maintain headroom and if in unfinished areas, be as neatly installed, as obscure and "out-of-the-way" as physically possible. Where more than one trade is involved in an area, space or chase, all shall cooperate and install their own work to utilize the space equally between them in proportion to their individual requirements. In general, ductwork shall be given preference except where grading of piping becomes a problem, followed by piping then electrical wiring. If, after installation of any equipment, piping, ducts, conduit, and boxes, it is determined that ample maintenance and passage space has not been provided, rearrange work and /or furnish other equipment as required for ample maintenance space. D. Any changes in the size or location of the material or equipment supplied, which may be necessary in order to meet field conditions or in order to avoid conflicts between trades, shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Owner's Representative and approval received before such alterations are made. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. B. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc., correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equal in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\2 10018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for the following equipment, materials and products, including all fittings and accessories: 1. Conduit 2. Surface Raceway 3. Expansion Fittings 4. Power/Communications Poles 5. Wireway and Wire Trough 6. Cable Tray 7. Underfloor Trench Duct 8. Channel Support Systems 9. Conductors 10. Medium Voltage Cable 11. Cables 12. Cable Termination and Splice Kits 13. Poke-Through Service Fittings 14. Terminal and Equipment Cabinets 15. Floor Boxes 16. Wiring Devices Including Dimmers 17. Telephone/Data Communication Outlets 18. Television Outlets 19. Elapsed Time Switches 20. Extension Cord Reels 21. Boiler Shutdown Switches 22. Clocks 23. Underground Pullboxes (Handholes) and Covers 24. Manholes and Covers 25. Water Proofing Seals 26. Flashing, Sealing, Firestopping Materials 27. Salvageable Materials 28. Testing reports prior to energizing equipment and materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Conduit, Raceway and Tubing: 1. Rigid Metal Conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized or electro-galvanized steel, UL listed "rigid metal conduit." a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Republic Conduit 2) Allied Tube and Conduit 3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) Approved equal CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMa terialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 2. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be constructed one continuous length of electrogalvanized, spirally wound steel strip with interlocking convolutions and interior surfaces free from burrs and sharp edges. Shall be UL listed "flexible metal conduit" or "liquid tight flexible metal conduit" as required. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Republic Conduit 2) Allied Tube and Conduit 3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) American Flexible Conduit Company 3. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (Schedule 40 for concrete encasement, Schedule 80 for direct burial or where exposed) shall be UL listed "rigid non-metallic conduit" for application in underground, encased, and exposed applications in accordance with Article 352 of the National Electrical Code. The conduit shall be made from polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and shall be rated for 90ºC conductors. Conduit and fittings shall be tested in accordance with the testing requirements defined in NEMA TC-2, NEMA TC-3, UL-651 and UL-514. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Carlon 2) Heritage Plastics 3) PW Eagle 4. Surface Non-Metallic Two Compartment Raceway shall be constructed of PVC material meeting UL flammability requirements, rated for 600 volts and UL listed. a. Finish per Architect b. Provide with receptacles, telephone and data outlets as specified and shown on Drawings. c. Provide with NEC required dividers. d. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Wiremold 2) Hubbell 3) Panduit CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\2 10018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 5. Surface Metal Raceway shall be .040 in. steel UL listed "Surface Metal Raceway". Use manufacturer's standard fittings designed to be used with the specific raceway. a. One-Piece Raceway: 1) Buff or ivory finish. 2) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Wiremold "700" Series (Design Make) b) Mono Systems c) Approved equal b. Two-Piece Prewired Raceways: 1) Buff, gray, ivory or stainless steel finish. 2) Wiring Harness: a) Single circuit NEMA 5-15R, 15 ampere, 125 volt, grounded receptacles spaced 2 ft. on centers. 3) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Wiremold b) Mono Systems c) Approved equal c. Two-Piece Raceways: 1) Finish per Architect. 2) Duplex or special receptacles as specified in wiring devices. 3) Corners, turns, tees and elbows shall have suitable turning radius for the intended cable. 4) Provide divider in raceways utilized for power and communications. Utilize wire/cable clips 18 in. on center to hold in the conductors/cables. 5) Utilize rounded head screws/bolts for mounting. 6) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Wiremold 2400, 3000, 4000 or 6000 (Design Make) b) Mono Systems c) Approved equal CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 6. Surface Aluminum Two Compartment Metallic Raceway shall be constructed of heavy #6063-T5 extruded aluminum, .080 in. wall thickness with a satin anodized finish. a. Provide with receptacles, telephone and data outlets as specified and shown on the Drawings. b. Provide with NEC required dividers. c. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Wiremold 2) Mono Systems 3) Acceptable equal 7. Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing (ENT) for installation in accordance with the National Electrical Code, other applicable sections of the Code, and local codes. a. Any ENT used shall meet the requirements of NEMA TC-13 and shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for its intended purpose. b. ENT shall be recognized by a CABO National Evaluation Report for use in one (1) hour and two (2) hour rated construction. c. Penetration of fire rated walls, floors or ceilings shall use classified Through-Penetration Firestop Systems described in the current Underwriters Laboratories Building Materials Directory. d. Fittings and outlet boxes shall be designed for use with ENT and listed by Underwriters Laboratories. All fittings, boxes, and accessories shall be from one manufacturer. e. Only cement recommended specifically for use with the brand of ENT used shall be used. f. Unless indicated differently on drawings, ENT systems shall be color coded BLUE for branch and feeder circuit wiring, YELLOW for communications, and RED for fire alarm and emergency systems. g. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Carlon 2) Heritage Plastics 3) Approved equal CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 B. Conduit Fittings: 1. Fittings for rigid metal conduit shall be fully threaded and shall be of the same material as the respective raceway system. Fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be single screw indenter fittings for conduits up to 2 in. and double screw indenter fittings for conduits 2 in. and larger. Connectors shall also have insulated throat up to and including 1 in. size. For sizes 1-1/4 in. and larger, provide plastic insulating bushing. Die-cast, pressure cast fittings shall not be used. Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduit shall be solvent cemented in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) O.Z. Gedney 2) Steel City 3) Thomas & Betts 4) Crouse-Hinds 5) Carlon 2. Expansion Fittings shall be watertight, combination expansion and deflection type designed to compensate for movement in any direction. Fittings shall have flexible copper braid bonding jumpers, neoprene sleeve and stainless steel bands, use aluminum body fittings for rigid aluminum conduit. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Crouse-Hinds, Type "DX" 2) O.Z./Gedney, Type "DX" 3) Approved equal C. Wireway and Wire Trough: 1. Wireway and Wire Trough shall be hinged cover type wireway with provisions for full lay-in along the entire length of run. Wireway shall be steel, enclosed with gray enamel finish. Provide NEMA 1 units for interior/dry/clean locations and NEMA 12 for interior dry maintenance/shop/utility locations. Size to meet EC fill requirements or larger as noted on Contract Documents. Provide knockouts along runs. Recess in wall where required for flush mounted equipment. Hinge shall be on the bottom of front face for horizontal mounting. Provide all elbows, tees, pullboxes, fittings, hangers, reducers, supports, supports, etc., to meet installation requirements. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Square D "Square Duct" 2) General Electric 3) Hoffman 4) Meco CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 7 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 D. Channel Support Systems: 1. Channel Support Systems shall be provided for racking of conduit, trapeze suspensions, equipment support, cable racks and panel racks. Channel shall be steel with electroplated zinc finish for interior dry locations. Provide necessary accessories such as bolts, screws, anchors, connection plates, and straps as required to perform the necessary functions. Wet location and exterior channel support systems shall be steel with hot dipped galvanized finish and stainless steel hardware as a minimum. Cut ends shall be touched up with suitable matching finish. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Unistrut 2) Globe 3) Kindorf 4) B-Line E. Conductors and Cables: 1. Conductors shall be insulated for 600 volts, unless otherwise noted, and shall be standard AWG and kcmil sizes. Conductors shall be 98% copper, thermal plastic or cross-linked polymer insulated, heat and moisture resistant. Conductors shall be stranded, except for conductors used for fire alarm system wiring. Conductor sizes No. 18 AWG and smaller shall be a solid single strand; No. 16 AWG and larger shall be multiple stranded. Minimum conductor size shall be #12 AWG except smaller sizes may be used for communications and special systems. Conductor sizes shall be as called for. Conductors shall be labeled with UL seal and be marked with the manufacturer's name, wire size and insulation type. Insulation for all 600 volt conductors shall be Type THHN/THWN-2 for conductor sizes #8 AWG and smaller or Type XHHW-2 for conductor sizes #6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise noted. All exterior and underground conductors shall be XHHW-2. Luminaire fixture wire shall conform to the latest Underwriters Laboratories requirements. Flexible cords and cables for general portable use shall be Type SO or SOOW or as noted. Cables for special use shall be of the type specified for the application. a. Color Coding: 1) All circuits shall be color coded according to the following schedule. Three Phase 120/208V 240V Three Phase 277/480V Single Phase 120/240V Ground Green Green Green Neutral White Gray White A or L1 Black Brown Black CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 8 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 Three Phase 120/208V 240V Three Phase 277/480V Single Phase 120/240V B or L2 Red Orange Red C or L3 Blue Yellow --- b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) General Cable 2) Prysmian 3) South Wire 4) Okonite 5) Senator F. Cable Termination Kits: 1. The shielded power cable termination shall be capable of continuous operation at the rated voltage of the cable it is to be used on, up to 35 kV. It must be rated for continuous operation at 90°C, with an emergency overload temperature rating of 130°C. The termination shall meet the requirements of IEEE Standard 48, for a Class 1 Termination. It shall be a one-piece design, where high-dielectric constant (capacitive) stress control is integrated within a skirted insulator made of silicone rubber, munsell gray in color. The termination shall not require heat or flame for installation. The termination kit must contain all of the necessary materials required to make three terminations (except for the lugs). In addition to normal locations, the termination must be designed for contaminated indoor and outdoor locations. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. 3M Brand b. Elastimold c. Raychem d. Approved equal G. Separable Splices/Apparatus Connections: 1. The shielded power cable separable insulated connector splice or 600 Amp apparatus connection shall be capable of continuous operation at 35 kV, 600 amps and 90°C, with an emergency overload temperature rating of 130°C. The system and components shall meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE dead-break interfaces. The elbow (tee-module) and all other rubber components shall be made of peroxide cured EPDM rubber, and the connecting components shall be insulated with molded epoxy. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 9 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\2 10018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 The system shall be available as specific kits for splicing, tapping (adding-on), dead-ending and apparatus connecting. Provide with test point for apparatus connection. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) 3M Brand w/Grounding Kit 2) Elastimold w/Grounding Kit 3) Raychem 4) Approved equal H. Permanent Splices: 1. The shielded power cable splice must meet the requirements of ANSI/IEEE and meeting the cable voltage rating. It must be rated for continuous operation at 90ºC, with an emergency overload rating of 130ºC. The splice shall be made of peroxide cured EPDM rubber. The splice kit must contain all of the necessary materials required to make one inline splice (except for the connector), including a solderless mechanical ground jumper. The splice shall be designed for splicing tape shielded, wire shielded, and UniShield cables without the requirement of additional adapters. It shall be rated for indoor, outdoor and direct burial applications. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. 3M Brand b. Elastimold c. Raychem d. Approved equal I. Arc Proofing Tape: 1. Medium voltage cables in all manholes, vaults, building entrances, switchgear and hand holes shall be wrapped with a fire retardant arc proofing tape. This shall be continuous length, half lapped as a minimum. 2. Make: 3M, 77W secured with Scotch 69 Glass Cloth Electrical Tape. J. Boxes: 1. Outlet boxes shall be galvanized steel, not less than 2-1/8 in. deep, unless restricted by the surroundings, 4 in. square or octagonal, with knockouts. Boxes and associated fittings, plates and devices shall be mechanically fastened (screwed), friction fitting is not acceptable. Outlet boxes exposed to moisture, exterior, wet or damp locations shall be cadmium cast alloy complete with external threaded hubs and gasketed screw fastened covers. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 10 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 Minimum box size shall be as indicated in the NEC for the conductors and devices installed. Boxes shall be approved for the environmental condition where they will be installed. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Steel City 2) Raco 3) Appleton 4) Crouse Hinds 2. Telephone/Data Communications Outlet Boxes: a. 4 in. x 4 in. outlet box with single gang plaster ring with cover plate suitable for indicated communications outlet and conduit routed to accessible ceiling space. Cover plate shall match the receptacle cover type. 3. Pull and junction boxes shall be constructed of not less than 14 gauge galvanized steel with trim for flush or surface mounting in accordance with the location to be installed. Provide screw-on type covers. Boxes installed in damp or wet locations shall be of raintight construction with gasketed cover and threaded conduit hubs. In no case shall boxes be sized smaller than as indicated NEC for conduit and conductor sizes installed. Boxes shall be approved for the environmental condition of the location where they will be installed. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Hoffman 2) Keystone 3) Approved equal 4. Receptacles: a. Provide receptacles where indicated on the drawings and where called for. Provide type receptacle as indicated and if not indicated then utilize general receptacle. b. General Receptacle: Units shall be NEMA 5-20R, duplex, 20A, 125V, side/back wired, #14 to 10AWG screw with nylon face, indented brass contacts for three point connection, self grounding mounting screw clip plate (not staple), ground terminal Meet requirements of Federal Specification W-C-596, NEMA WD-6 and UL 498. 1) Units shall be: Hubbell 5362, P&S 5362 or Leviton 5362-S. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 11 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\ 210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 5. Photoelectric Controls: a. Heavy Duty, 1/2 in. Conduit Mounting: 1) 120 volt, SPST, 2000 watt: Tork Model 2101. 2) 277 volt, SPST, 2000 watt: Tork Model 2104. b. Combination Photoelectric Control and Contactor: 1) 120 volt, DPST, 3000 watt per pole: Tork Model 5403. 2) 277 volt, DPST, 3000 watt per pole: Tork Model 5404-3. 3) 208 volt, DPST, 3000 watt per pole: Tork Model 5404. K. Wiring Devices: 1. Wiring Devices (toggle switches, key switches, receptacles, dimmers, occupancy sensors, etc.) shall be specification grade as a minimum. Switch handle and receptacle face shall be as directed by the Architect. Receptacles connected to the emergency power system shall have a red colored face. Provide device cover plates of rounded nylon colored to match the device in finished areas and rounded raised (Steel City 450/460 series) only for surface mounted locations in unfinished areas. Provide neoprene gasketed cast aluminum/zinc box with hinged (for receptacle) rain tight cast aluminum/zinc lockable while in use cover with stainless steel hardware for devices designated "WP". a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Pass and Seymour 2) Hubbell 3) Leviton 2. Toggle/Snap Switches: a. Units shall be quiet operation, quick make/quick break, rated for 20A/120-277V/1hp at 120/277V, side/back wired, with nylon/polycarbonate toggle, self grounding mounting screw clip plate (not staple), ground terminal and silver alloy contacts. Units shall meet latest Federal Specification WS-896, NEMA WD-1 and UL Test 20. Single pole units shall be Hubbell HBL1221, P&S 20AC1 or Leviton 1221-2. Provide two pole, three way, four way, illuminated handle, keyed, etc. type of the same quality and model. b. Momentary Contact: Units shall be as indicated above (20A, 277V, nylon handle, side/back wired), three position, two circuit/three wire with spring return to center position, provide where indicated and as needed for proper system operation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 12 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\ 210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 Hubbell HBL 1557, P&S 1250, Leviton 1256 or approved equal. Provide keyed operation or pilot light where indicated. When used for lighting controls for vacancy sensor control, provide jumper across the circuit terminals. 3. Receptacles: a. Provide receptacles where indicated on the drawings and where called for. Provide type receptacle as indicated and if not indicated then utilize general receptacle. b. General Receptacle: Units shall be NEMA 5-20R, duplex, 20A, 125V, side/back wired, indented brass contacts for three point connection, self grounding stainless steel mounting screw clip plate and green ground terminal. Shall meet requirements of Federal Specification W-C-596, NEMA WD-6 and UL 498. 1) Units shall have 0.036" brass thick contacts, 0.05" thick brass mounting strap, and be: Hubbell HBL5362, P&S 5362A or Leviton 5362. Industrial grade 2) Units shall have 0.032" thick brass contacts, 0.031" brass mounting strap and be: Hubbell HBL5352, P&S 5362 or Leviton 5362. Standard grade 3) Units shall have 0.03" thick brass contacts, 0.04 inch galvanized steel mounting strap and be: Hubbell BR20, P&S BR20 or Leviton BR20. Commercial grade c. Ground Fault Interrupting Receptacles: Units shall be as specified above for General Receptacle and have 5mA interrupting ground fault level, test/reset front buttons, full through feed capability, power off on reverse wired sensing, 10kA short circuit current rating, be tamper/weather resistant and in compliance with UL 943. Unit shall self-test function to periodically test the components automatically and indicate a failure condition utilizing an LED. Shall be Hubbell GFR5362, P&S 2096TR or Leviton S7599TR. d. Tamper Resistant Receptacles: Units shall be as specified above for General Receptacle and have protective shutters to prevent entry into the line or grounded front openings unless all plug prongs are present. e. Surge Protected Receptacles: Units shall be as specified above for General Receptacle and have 240 joule energy/15,000A capacity, three modes of protection (line to neutral, line to ground and neutral to ground), 500V maximum clamping, LED indicator (operational, failure), blue color and UL 1449 compliant. Shall be Hubbell HBL5360SA, P&S 5352XSP or Leviton 5280. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 13 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 4. Extension Cord Reels: a. Ceiling mounted. Positive stop action at any length, ratchet lock, and automatic rewind spring. Provide heavy duty type with [20] ft. of #12/3 SJEO minimum cord terminating in molded high impact outlet box with wire mesh cord grip and P&S #5362A or HBL 5362 receptacle (brown), and spring close cover plate. Provide rigid mounting support to building structure. b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Hubbell HBL45123R20 (Design Make) 2) Woodhead 3) Appleton RL5000 Series 5. Emergency Shutdown Pushbutton: a. Where called for provide emergency shutdown/emergency power off push button. Unit shall be Square D Class 9001 Type K NEMA 13 oil tight pushbutton with the following: 1) Red mushroom head 1-1/2 in. button, hinged protective flip up cover, push to operate, pull to reset. 2) Maintained contact operation with one normally open and one normally closed 10A 120V contacts. Provide relay for additional contacts. 3) Red pilot light. 4) Engraved legend plate indicating "XX - Emergency Stop" with XX = the system name. L. Underground Pullboxes (Handholes): 1. Sidewalk and Grass Areas: Boxes shall be comprised of composite material with stainless steel hardware and ANSI Tier 8 rating minimum. Provide conduit/duct openings per the plans/schematics with spare capacity for 2 - 2" in each side wall, minimum. Box shall be minimum 2'-0" wide x 2'-0" long x 3'-0" deep inside dimensions, or larger as required to meet NEC requirements. Cover shall be imprinted with either "Electric", "Telephone", etc. to designate type of service. Provide 18 in. of #2 crushed stone under pullbox and 18 in. beyond. Refer to drawings per details and locations. a. Manufacturers: 1) Quazite 2) Old Castle 3) Approved equal CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 14 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 2. All Other Areas: Boxes shall have ANSI Tier 22 rating (22,500lb weight rating) and be comprised of steel reinforced concrete walls and bottom sections using 5,000 psi, minimum concrete. Bottom shall have 12 in. diameter sump opening and 3/4 in. ground rod opening. Knockouts and openings shall be positioned for conduits/ducts. Provide two (2) rows of anchor bolt inserts for cable rack supports to permit installation of two (2) cable rack supports on each side wall and one (1) cable rack support on each end wall. Provide hot dipped galvanized steel pulling irons at 45° angle between floor and wall opposite each opening. Provide 24 in. x 24 in. opening for frame and cover and a suitable masonry "Throat" between top of box and cover frame to allow for variation in final finished grade. Frame and cover shall be case iron. Cover shall be imprinted with either "Electric", "Telephone", "Medium Voltage Electric", etc. to designate type of service. Unit shall be rated to AASHTO HS20-44 loading. Provide 18 in. drywell of #2 crushed stone under pullbox and 18" beyond. Refer to drawings per details and locations. a. Manufacturers: 1) Pullbox: Lakelands precast. 2) Cover: Neenah Foundry Company, roadway type. 3) Approved equal. M. Waterproofing Seals: 1. Provide expanding link type seal, for installation between duct/conduit, and sleeve or core-drilled hole in concrete. 2. Make: Link Seal, manufactured by Thunderline Corp. N. Flashing, Sealing, Fire-stopping: 1. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: a. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. b. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide firestop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. c. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 15 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 d. The methods used shall incorporate qualities, which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants b. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP c. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts d. Carborundum Fyre Putty e. 3-M Fire Products PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Unless otherwise noted, wiring for all systems indicated in the contract documents shall consist of insulated conductors installed in raceways. Raceways shall be continuous from outlet box to outlet box and from outlet box to cabinet, junction or pull box. Secure and bond raceways to all boxes and cabinets so that each system of raceways is electrically continuous throughout. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, install all wiring in the following raceway system: 1. Wiring 600 Volts or Less in Dry Locations: Electrical metallic tubing. 2. Wiring 600 Volts or Less in Outdoors, Above Grade Locations: Rigid metal conduit, Rigid non-metallic conduit (Schedule 80). 3. Wiring 600 Volts or Less Installed Below Grade, in Concrete Floor Slabs or Below Ground Floor Slab: Rigid non-metallic conduit encased in concrete with rigid metal conduit bends and penetrations through building floors and walls. 4. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for final connection to all motors, final connection to rotating or vibrating equipment, final connections to dry type transformers and final connections to recessed lighting fixtures. Liquidtight flexible conduit shall be used in all wet or damp locations. Maximum length of flexible conduit shall be 36 in., except that from outlet boxes to lighting fixture maximum length shall be 6 ft. Provide green insulated equipment grounding conductor in all flexible metal conduit. B. Raceways: 1. Sized as indicated on the drawings. Where sizes are not indicated, raceways shall be sized as required by the National Electrical Code in accordance with the quantity, size, and type of the insulation conductors to be installed. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 16 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 Raceways shall be minimum 3/4 in. trade size for branch circuit wiring and minimum 1 in. trade size for all telephone intercommunications, instrumentation, fire alarm, television and computer systems and for all branch circuit "Home Runs" to panelboards. 2. Installed to provide adequate grounding between all outlets and the established electrical system ground. 3. Cut square, free of burrs due to field cutting or manufacture, and bushed where necessary. 4. Installed with exterior surfaces not less than 6 in. from any surface with normal operating temperature of 200°F or higher. 5. Plugged at the ends of each roughed-in raceway with an approved cap or disc to prevent the entrance of foreign materials during construction. 6. Concealed throughout except where exposure is permitted by the Owner's Representative. 7. Installed parallel or perpendicular to floors, walls and ceilings where exposed wiring is permitted. 8. Installed with a minimum of bends and offsets. All bends shall be made without kinking or destroying the cross section contour of the raceway. Factory made bends are acceptable and should be considered for raceways larger than 2 in. 9. Installed with UL approved rain-tight and concrete-tight couplings and connectors. 10. Firmly fastened within 3 ft. of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. Raceways shall not be attached to or supported by wooden plug anchors or supported from mechanical work such as ductwork, piping, etc. 11. Installed with a #14 AWG fish wire in all telephone, intercommunication, "Spare" or "Empty" conduit runs to facilitate future installation of conductors. 12. Installed with expansion fittings at all building expansion joints such that no undue stress is placed on any electrical raceway due to the proper functioning of expansion joints. 13. Arranged in a neat manner for access and allow for access to work installed by other trades. 14. Raceways installed in concrete slabs shall be located so as not to affect structural integrity of slab, and such that conduit shall have a minimum of 1 in. of concrete cover on all sides. Obtain approval from the Owner's Representative prior to installing conduit larger than 1 in. trade size in concrete slabs. Raceways in slabs shall be for floor box use only. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 17 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 15. If it is necessary to burn holes through webs of beams or girders, call such points to the attention of the Owner's Representative and receive written approval both as to location and size of hole before proceeding with work. All holes shall be burned no larger than absolutely necessary. 16. Become familiar with the general construction of the building and place sleeves, inserts, etc., as required. All penetrations through existing floors shall be core drilled and sleeved. 17. Wherever a cluster of four (4) or more raceways rise out of floor exposed, provide neatly formed 6 in. high concrete envelop, with chamfered edges, around raceways. 18. All raceways shall be supported adequately by malleable iron pipe clamps or other approved methods. In exterior or wet locations, supports shall allow not less than 1/4 in. air space between raceway and wall. Firmly fasten raceway within 3 ft. of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. The following table lists maximum spacing between conditions, strength of supporting members, etc. 19. Furnish and install such supports at no additional cost to owner. Conduit Trade Size Type of Run Horizontal Spacing in Feet Vertical Spacing in Feet 3/4 in. Concealed 7 10 1 in., 1-1/4 in. Concealed 8 10 1-1/2 in. and larger Concealed 10 10 1/2 in., 3/4 in. Exposed 5 7 1 in., 1-1/4 in. Exposed 7 8 1-1/2 in. and larger Exposed 10 10 20. Where raceways puncture roof, install pitch pockets as required in order that the roof warranty is maintained. Coordinate with representative of roofing material manufacturer. 21. Provide a bushing at each conduit termination unless fitting at box where conduit terminates has hubs designed in such a manner to afford equal protection to conductors. Provide grounding type insulated bushings on all conduit sizes 1-1/4 in. trade size and larger, and on all feeder raceways regardless of size. Provide standard bushings for conduits 1 in. and smaller unless otherwise stated. 22. Differing Temperatures: For raceways routed between areas with differing temperatures (interior to exterior, walk in coolers/freezers, environmental chambers, etc.) install raceway as follows: a. Provide a thermal break, 4 in. minimum of stainless steel or Schedule 40 PVC conduit within space wall/separation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 18 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 b. Seal raceway penetration through the wall/separation. c. Provide a box on each side of the space wall/separation. d. Provide raceway interior sealant (duct seal or suitable foam) to provide a complete air barrier after conductors are installed. e. Mounting of raceway and boxes on equipment shall be coordinated and approved by the equipment manufacturer. 23. Raceway installed in wet, damp or exterior walls shall have a spacer provided to maintain a space/void between the mounting surface and the raceway. C. Wiring Methods: 1. Conductors shall not be installed until raceway system, including all outlets, cabinets, bushings and fittings, is completed. Verify that all work of other trades which may cause conductor damage is completed. Use only U.L. approved cable lubricants when necessary. Do not use mechanical means to pull conductors No. 8 or smaller. 2. In general, conductors shall be the same size from the last protective device to the load. 3. All wiring systems shall be properly grounded and continuously polarized throughout, following the color-coding specified. Connect branch circuit wiring at panelboards, as required, in order to provide a "balanced" three-phase load on feeders. 4. Provide insulated green ground conductor in each branch circuit. 5. All feeder connections shall be made to bus and other equipment using solderless, pressure type terminal lugs. 6. For splices and taps, No. 10 AWG and smaller, use solderless "twist on" connectors having spiral steel spring and insulated with a vinyl cap and skirt. 7. For splices and taps, No. 8 and larger, use insulated solderless set screw AL/CU or hydraulically compressed sleeve fittings suitable for the intended use. 8. Use cast connections for ground conductors. 9. Provide minimum 6 in. of spare/slack of each conductor in each junction or pull box and termination. 10. Make all splices and connections in accessible boxes and cabinets only. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 19 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 11. Cover uninsulated splices, joints, and free ends of conductor with rubber and friction tape of PVC electrical tape. Plastic insulating caps may serve as insulation. Heat shrink sleeves shall be acceptable for crimp type splices. 12. On termination at branch circuit outlets, leave a minimum of 8 in. free conductor for installation of devices and fixtures. 13. Feeder conductors shall be continuous from point of origin to load termination without splice. If this is not practical, contact the Owner's Representative and receive written approval for splicing prior to installation of feeder(s). Where feeder conductors pass through junction and pull boxes, bind and lace conductors of each feeder together. For parallel sets of conductors, match lengths of conductors as near equal as possible. 14. Branch circuit conductors installed in panelboards, and control conductors installed in control cabinets and panels shall be neatly bound together using "TyRaps" or equal. 15. Provide conduit seals and explosion proof devices as indicated on the plans and as dictated by the NEC for all hazardous locations indicated on the drawings. 16. Lighting fixtures, detectors, etc., in mechanical equipment, boiler and pump rooms shall be installed with exposed wiring after equipment, ductwork, piping, etc., are in place. In general, lighting shall be as located on the drawings; where conflicts exist, locate lights for best distribution. 17. Fire proof tape all medium voltage cables in handholes, man holes, building entrance and junction/pull boxes. 18. Provide cable/conductor vertical support in accordance with the NEC. 19. Manholes/Handholes: a. All cables operating at 1,000 volts to ground and above shall be Arc proofed using a fire retardant Arc proofing tape installed per manufacturer's instructions. b. Provide cable racks, and securely fasten all cables. Support stanchions shall be spaced 3 ft. apart maximum. c. Provide separation of conductors of different systems per NEC requirements. d. Pitch all raceways toward the manhole/handhole. e. Mortar and brick the throats of manholes/handholes to grade level. Set cover rim to 1 in. above grass areas and flush with finished areas. Waterproof throat with elastic bituminous plastic cement coating. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 20 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 D. Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Install junction and pull boxes in readily accessible locations. Access to boxes shall not be blocked by equipment, piping, ducts and the like. Provide all necessary junction or pull boxes required due to field conditions and size as require by the National Electrical Code. E. Hangers and Supports: 1. Provide steel angles, channels and other materials necessary for the proper support and erection of motor starters, distribution panelboards, large disconnect switches, large circuit breakers, pendant mounted lighting fixtures, etc. 2. Panelboards, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, cabinets, large pull boxes, adjustable speed drives, cable support boxes and starters shall be secured to the building structure and not supported from conduits. Small panelboards, etc., as approved by Owner's Representative, may be supported on walls. Racks for support of conduits and heavy electrical equipment shall be secured to building construction by substantial structural supports. F. Outlet Boxes: 1. Consider location of outlets shown on drawings as approximate only. Study architectural, process piping, mechanical, plumbing, structural, roughing-in, etc., drawings and note surrounding areas in which each outlet is to be located. Locate outlet so that when fixtures, motors, cabinets, equipment, etc., are placed in position, outlet will serve its desired purpose. Where conflicts are noted between drawings, contact Owner's Representative for decision prior to installation. Comply with the NEC relative to position of outlet boxes in finished ceilings and walls. 2. Prior to installation, relocate any outlet location a distance of 5 ft. in any direction from location indicated on drawings if so directed by the Owner's Representative. Prior to completion of wall construction, adjust vertical height of any outlet from height indicated if so directed by Owner's Representative. The above modifications shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Where outlets at different mounting heights are indicated on drawings adjacent to each other (due to lack of physical space to show symbol on drawings), install outlets on a common vertical line. 4. Where switch outlets are shown adjacent to strike side of door, locate edge of outlet box approximately 3 in. from door frame. 5. Outlet boxes in separate rooms shall not be installed "back-to-back" without the approval of the Owner's Representative. 6. Outlet boxes shall be sized to accommodate the wiring, splices and device(s) to be installed in accordance with the NEC. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 21 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 7. Outlet boxes installed in plaster, gypsum board or wood paneled hollow cavity walls shall be installed flush with raised plaster covers or raised tile covers. Boxes shall be mechanically fastened and supported by two (2) adjacent structural members (studs) with cross brackets (Garvin Industries Model BMB or approved equal). 8. Outlet boxes installed in tile, brick or concrete block walls shall be installed flush and have extra-deep type raised tile covers or shall be 3-1/2 in. deep boxes with square corners and dimensions to accommodate conductors installed. 9. Surface ceiling mounted outlet boxes shall be minimum 4 in. square, 1-1/2 in. deep, galvanized sheet metal. 10. Surface wall mounted outlet boxes shall be cast type boxes. 11. Floor outlet boxes shall be installed flush with finished floor, adjust level and tile as required. Where finished floor is terrazzo, provide boxes specifically designed for installation in terrazzo. Where floors are to receive carpet or flooring material, coordinate with appropriate trade and provide insert. Rectangular covers shall be parallel and perpendicular with the building or, if used, floor tile/floor joints/pattern. Coordinate cover type with the flooring and device type. 12. Install a device cover plate over each and every outlet indicated on drawings. Do not install plates until painting, cleaning and finishing of surfaces surrounding the outlet are complete. Install single one-piece multi-gang covers over multi-gang devices. G. Receptacles: 1. Provide hospital grade receptacle for all hospital construction. 2. Ground opening shall be up for vertical installation and on the left for horizontal installation. H. Toggle Switches: 1. Switches shall be installed in accessible locations near room/space entryway(s). 2. Provide lighted handle switches in mechanical rooms, elevator pits, electric rooms, etc. 3. Switches shall have neutral pulled through the box even if not used. I. Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Install junction and pull boxes in readily accessible locations. Access to boxes shall not be blocked by equipment, piping, ducts and the like. Provide all necessary junction or pull boxes required due to field conditions and size as require by the National Electrical Code. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 22 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 J. Equipment Mounting Heights: Coordinate with architectural interior and exterior elevations. 1. Unless otherwise noted, mount devices and equipment at heights measured from finished floor to device/equipment centerline as follows: a. Toggle switches (up position "on") 46 in. b. Wall lighting controls (dimmer, digital switch, etc. 46 in. c. Receptacle outlets (long dimension vertical, ground" pole farthest from floor) 18 in. d. Receptacle outlets above counters 8 in. above counters e. Receptacle outlets, above hot water or steam baseboard heaters. Do not install receptacle outlets above electric baseboard heaters 30 in. f. Receptacle outlets, hazardous areas; also for refrigerators 48 in. g. Receptacle outlets, weatherproof, abovegrade 24 in. h. Clock outlets (104 in. AFF or 10 in. below ceiling, whichever is lower) 104 in. i. Telephone outlets 18 in. j. Telephone outlets, wall mounted 46 in. k. T.V. outlet 18 in. l. Fire alarm manual stations 46 in. m. Fire alarm combination audio/visual and standalone visual device (entire strobe lens at heights indicated) 80 in. to bottom of the notification device n. Standalone fire alarm audio device 90 in. (min) to 96 in. (max) o. Distribution panelboards, to top of backbox 72 in. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 23 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 p. Terminal cabinets, control cabinets, to top of backbox 72 in. q. Disconnect switches, motor starters, enclosed circuit breakers. 48 in. 2. Where structural or other interferences prevent compliance with mounting heights listed above, consult Owner's Representative for approval to change location before installation. K. Identification: 1. Provide complete type written directory for each panelboard listing room number, function, etc., for each circuit breaker. Provide type written updated panelboard directories for existing panelboards affected by this work. 2. Identify junction and pullboxes for particular service and circuit such as power, lighting, fire alarm, telephone, interphone, public address, nurse call, etc. using stencil lettering on cover. 3. Where voltage exceeds 600V provide permanent signage indicating "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT". Utilize adhesive backed, yellow background, block lettering signage at door. 4. Using adhesive backed printed tape label (white background, black lettering) all receptacle and switch coverplates, power poles, etc. listing panel designation and circuit number. Tape shall be attached to outside of receptacle or switch coverplates. 5. Provide engraved lamicoid identification nameplates on switchboards, main service disconnects, transfer switches, motor control centers and on all panelboards using designation shown in panelboard schedule. Include voltage, phase, equipment served, voltage source to panel or equipment. 6. Provide engraved lamicoid identification nameplates for each circuit breaker in the main distribution panel listing the panelboard or equipment connected to each device. 7. Provide engraved lamicoid identification nameplates on all items of equipment including individual circuit breaker enclosures and disconnect switches, listing the equipment connected to the particular device provided under Specification Section 262000, including, but not limited to: starters, disconnect switches, adjustable speed drives, circuit breakers, etc. Include voltage, phase, equipment served, voltage source to panel or equipment. L. Spare Parts: 1. Deliver to Owner and obtain receipt for spare parts including key switches, fuses, etc. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 24 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 3.2 TESTS A. Branch circuits shall be tested during installation for continuity and identification and shall pass operational tests to determine that all circuits perform the function for which they are designed. For all feeder wiring rated 600 volts or less, provide 1,000 volt "Megger" insulation test prior to energizing feeders. Use a 1,000-volt motor driven megger for all tests. Test voltage shall be applied until readings reach a constant value, and until three (3) equal readings, each one (1) minute apart, are obtained. Minimum megger reading shall be 45 megohms for feeder conductors. Document test results and submit for approval prior to energizing conductors. B. For all feeder wiring rated above 600 volts, provide high potential test as follows: 1. Disconnect cable to be tested from switchgear, transformers, etc., at each end so that voltage is applied only to the cable being tested. 2. Test cable with 500-volt megger, to insure cable is clear of any grounds and perform a Polarization Index (PI) time resistance test as follows: a. Connect 5000 volt megger to cable and ground. b. Subject cable to 5000 volts for 10 minutes. c. Take readings at one (1) minute and ten (10) minutes and take the ratio of the 10 minute reading to the 1 minute reading and compare the results to the following table. If the cable insulation compares to the Okay of Good categories, continue to the Hypot test. If the results are less than favorable, investigate and correct before continuing. INSULATION CONDITION PI RESULT POOR <1 QUESTIONABLE 1 - 2 OK 2 - 4 GOOD >4 3. Connect high potential tester to well regulated 110 volt, AC source. If facility source is not suitable or available, provide regulator or portable generator with regulator, as required. a. Set sensitivity at minimum. b. Connect high voltage output lead to conductor, and ground lead to cable shield ground conductor. c. Turn on high potential unit. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 01 - 25 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation Replaced Per Addendum No. 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 P:\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\ Specs\ELEC\210018-260501-BasicMaterialsAndMethods.docx 6/29/2021 d. Slowly raise DC voltage in 3 kV steps for 5 kV cable, 5 kV steps for 15 kV cable, and 5 kV steps for 35 kV cable. After each step, wait until the charging current dissipates and a steady leakage current level is reached. The following table is for the design make cable, Kerite. If the contractor chooses to use a different manufacturer, they will be responsible for contacting the cable manufacturer for the test values. Test value shall be indicated in the submittal. CABLE VOLTAGE (KV) NEW INSTALL FIRST 5 YEARS DC (KV) DC (KV) 5 35 25 15 55 40 25 80 60 35 100 75 e. Record the leakage current for each voltage step and plot current versus voltage; separate curve for each cable. f. Use cable manufacturer's recommended DC proof test voltage for new cables as maximum test voltage. g. Leakage current should plot as a relatively flat curve. If a major change appears in the slope of the curve, reduce voltage by 2kV for 5 kV, 4 kV for 15 kV and 35 kV cable, and then bring the voltage back up in 500volt increments to the previous level. h. If an unacceptable bend is found and/or tester trips, re-clean the terminations and repeat the test. If test result is not improved, a problem in the cable portion of the circuit exists. i. If cable tests to the maximum voltage required, hold cable at this voltage for 15 minutes and plot leakage current versus time. Take readings at 0, 15, 30, 45, 60 seconds and then at one minute intervals for the next 15 minutes. j. Ground conductor prior to disconnecting leads, as recommended in high potential tester's manual. 4. Replace all new cable, terminations, splices found faulty, as part of the contract. 5. Document test results and submit to Engineers for approval prior to energizing cables. END OF SECTION 26 05 01 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation GROUNDING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260526-Grounding.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide grounding system equal to or exceeding the requirements of NEC and as indicated in the contract documents. Raceway system which includes metal conduit, wireways, pullboxes, junction boxes, busway, wire ways, cable trays, enclosures, motor frames, etc., shall be made to form a continuous, conducting permanent ground circuit of the lowest practical impedance to enhance the safe conduction of ground fault currents and to prevent objectionable differences in voltage between metal nonload current carrying parts of the electrical system. B. Provide solid grounding of building structures and electrical and communications systems and equipment. It includes basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits and systems. Types of grounding systems include the following: 1. Equipment Room Ground Terminal Bar 2. Electrical Equipment Grounding 3. Telecommunications Grounding 4. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions. etc., correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. B. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in the NEC by Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and marked for intended use. C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding conductors, bonding conductors, jumpers, grounded conductors, etc. shall be sized in accordance with the NEC. B. Equipment and materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation GROUNDING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\20 21\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260526-Grounding.doc 6/7/2021 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals for the following: 1. Ground connectors. 2. Ground bars. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Conductors: 1. Exposed grounding components such as bars, straps, cables, flexible jumpers, braids, shunts, etc., shall be bare copper unless otherwise indicated. 2. Grounding conductors in raceway with 600V circuiting shall be insulated to match the circuit conductors with green color. 3. Grounding conductor size shall be as indicated or as required by the NEC whichever is larger, stranded, soft drawn or soft annealed copper, unless otherwise indicated. Sizing shall take into account circuit voltage drop. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Same make as for 600 volt conductors. B. Connectors, Clamps and Terminals: 1. Mechanical connectors and clamps shall be made of copper alloy or silicon bronze. Solderless compression terminals shall be copper, long-barrel, NEMA two bolt. Bolts and washers (Belleville) shall be of comparable material or stainless steel. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burndy 2) Hubbell Anderson Corp. 3) Thomas & Betts 4) Approved equal 2. Exothermic Welds: a. Provide exothermic welds designed for size and type of intended cable, rods, structure, etc. Solder prohibited for connections, except for medium and high voltage cable metallic tape shields (utilize mechanical and solder). CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation GROUNDING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260526-Grounding.doc 6/7/2021 b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Erico "Cadweld" 2) Burndy "ThermOweld" 3) Approved equal 3. Pipe Clamp: a. Pipe clamp for bonding to pipe type electrode (water pipe, etc.) shall be a suitably sized copper alloy clamp. b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burndy GAR-BU 2) O-Z Gedney Type CG 3) Burndy "Durium" 4) AFL Global "Everdur" 5) Approved equal 4. Flexible Strap: a. Flexible grounding straps shall be of braided high conductivity copper with two hole connector. Strap shall have equal to or greater than ampacity of the system it is bonding to. Strap shall provide flexibility in all directions when installed properly. b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burndy 2) OZ Gedney 3) Approved equal C. Ground Bars 1. Provide ground bars where indicated. Ground bars shall be: a. 98% conductive copper, minimum. b. 4 in. x 1/4 in. thick minimum with length as indicated with minimum 36 in. for electric room/MDF and all other minimum of 24 in. c. Standard NEMA bolt hole patterns with maximum quantity of lug locations. Spacing of 1-1/8 in. apart. 2. Bar shall be mounted to an accessible wall location with galvanized steel hardware and 2000V rated insulators. Mounting shall be suitable for full complement of cabling. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation GROUNDING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260526-Grounding.doc 6/7/2021 3. Unit shall conform to EIA/TIA standards. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Erico b. Newton Instrument c. Burndy d. Harger PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: 1. Provide grounding conductor(s) with all power circuits. Conductor shall be sized as indicated or as required by the NEC as a minimum and shall be terminated on the equipment, device, enclosure, etc. grounding terminal. Conductor size shall be for the entire length unless approved by the Engineer where oversized for voltage drop. 2. Conductors above grade to ground electrodes (water piping, structural column, etc.) and to equipment (service entrance, ground bars, ground halos, etc.) shall be installed in metallic conduit with ends bonded to the conduit. 3. Grounding conductors shall be installed to have a minimum radius of 3 in. 4. Grounding conductors in a raceway system shall be terminated/bonded to each box, cabinet, enclosure, etc. through which it passes or terminates. 5. Grounding conductors routed with underground circuits shall be bonded to each ground electrode and metallic cable support system within the raceway system including pull and access locations. 6. Stranded conductors penetrating vapor barriers, foundations, slab on grade and water stop membranes shall have the interstitial spaces between strands filled with solder 4 in. beyond the membrane each side. The conductor shall be sealed to the membrane with a manufacturer approved method. B. Raceway Systems: 1. All metal supports, cable trays, messenger cables, frames, sleeves, brackets, braces, etc. for the raceway system, panels, switches, boxes, starters controls, etc., which are not rigidly secured to and in contact with the raceway system, or which are subject to vibration and loosening, shall be bonded to the raceway system. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation GROUNDING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260526-Grounding.doc 6/7/2021 2. Termination of rigid conduit at all boxes, cabinets, and enclosures shall be made up tightly with a double locknut arrangement and a bushing, bushings being of the insulated type. Utilize grounding bushings as specified elsewhere in these specifications. 3. Conduit which runs to or from boxes, cabinets, or enclosures having concentric or eccentric knockouts which partially perforate the metal around the conduit and hence impair the continuity of system ground circuits shall be provided with bonding jumpers connected between a grounding type bushing/locknut on the conduit and a ground bus or stud inside the box, cabinet, or enclosure and attached thereto. 4. Conduit expansion joints and telescoping sections of metal raceways shall be provided with bonding jumpers sized in accordance with the NEC. C. Connectors Clamps and Terminals: 1. Connectors utilized above grade in dry accessible locations shall be mechanical or exothermic type. 2. Connectors in damp locations, below grade or if not indicated shall be exothermic type. 3. Clean the area near the connecting surfaces prior to any connection to ensure effective contact. Cleaning shall be to the bare metal. Wire brush area if needed to remove rust scale paint, dirt, etc. to expose bare metal. 4. Exothermic connections shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and tested with heavy blow of a five pound sledge. D. Flexible Strap: 1. Flexible straps shall be used when bonding vibrating/moveable equipment, with expansion fittings and where recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Sufficient slack shall be provided to compensate for the anticipated vibration, movement and expansion. E. Secondary Electrical Systems: 1. The neutral (grounded) conductor of each low voltage, single and/or polyphase system or distribution system, except special isolated double insulated systems, shall be solidly connected to ground at the transformer neutral bushing, or at the main secondary switchgear to the system ground, and shall be sized for current carrying capacity, not to be less than as required by the NEC. Ground connection shall be to the building grounding system, building steel, building water service, building concrete reinforcement and as indicated. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation GROUNDING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Sp ecs\ELEC\210018-260526-Grounding.doc 6/7/2021 2. Provide equipment grounding conductor, green colored insulation, with phase conductors, to primary side of all transformers rated 600 volts or less circuited to the enclosure and secondary neutral bushing, to all electrical utilization and distribution equipment; insulation shall be same type as phase conductors. Transformer enclosures shall be bonded to the primary and secondary circuit grounding conductor. 3. Equipment grounding conductors shall extend from the point of termination back to the ground bus of the source panelboard, switchboard, transformer, or switchgear. F. Communications Rooms: 1. For each building communications room or closet provide one (1) wall mounted ground bar bonded to the main building ground bar or electrical service ground with insulated #2/0 AWG conductor. 2. Local cable trays, equipment racks, etc. shall be bonded to the ground bar with insulated #6AWG minimum. G. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors in conduit from building's main service equipment or grounding bus to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. 3.2 GROUND TERMINAL BUS INSTALLATION A. Install ground terminal bar in rooms where shown on the drawings. Mount bar 18 in. above finished floor by anchors and bolts using 1-1/2 in. long insulated spacer between bar and wall. Use a minimum of two (2) supports 18 in. on center. Connect all grounding electrode system conductors, system enclosure ground bus, and other indicated electrode systems to the terminal bar. B. Label grounding conductors terminated to bus for equipment, location, electrode, etc served. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 05 26 - 7 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation GROUNDING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-260526-Grounding.doc 6/7/2021 3.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SIGNAL GROUNDING SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install a complete telecommunications grounding electrode system with room grounding buses, grounding electrodes and interconnecting cables per ANSI/EIA/TIA-607A. B. Bond metallic telecommunications pathways (e.g. conduit, sleeves, cable trays, fire-rated assemblies, etc.) to ground. Use structural steel where available. When a bonding conductor is installed in metallic conduit, the bonding conductor must be bonded to the conduit at both ends. C. All exterior/underground terminals shall be made with exothermic welds or compression connectors. D. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data and other communication equipment, provide #4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet and central equipment location. 1. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. 3.4 TESTS A. Test the building ground system before backfilling to ensure continuity and determine system resistance value. B. Testing procedure shall be a fall of potential type with a moving auxiliary electrode in accordance with IEEE Standard 142 and reviewed/approved by the Engineer. Sufficient test points shall be taken for accurate resistance value. C. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, no earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Provide tabulated test results indicating distance between rods and resistance readings on a plotted graph. D. Test each ground electrode system separately prior to connection to the system or main building ground bar. Test each system ground electrode system a second time after backfilling has occurred and all final connections (building steel, water service, etc.) have been made. E. Soil type, date, time, meter manufacturer/model number, person performing the test, test witnesses and most recent rainfall shall be noted in test submittal. END OF SECTION 26 05 26 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 20 00 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\2 10018-262000-ElectricDistribution.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 26 20 00 - ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide a complete distribution system as indicated on the Contract Documents and as specified herein. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc., correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. B. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA-70 (National Electrical Code), National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), state codes, local codes, and requirements of authority having jurisdiction. C. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMA, UL and IEEE Standards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following product data/information: 1. Manufacturer and equipment type. 2. Standard catalog information sheet. 3. Detailed shop drawings indicating plan, elevation, end and isometric views. Top and bottom conduit areas shall be clearly shown and dimensioned on the drawings. 4. Complete Bill of Materials. 5. All relevant ratings including, but not limited to, voltage, current, interrupting and withstand. 6. Overcurrent Device Information. Model number, available settings, setting ranges, capabilities, etc. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 20 00 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-262000-ElectricDistribution.doc 6/7/2021 7. Submit available and final settings, programming and adjustments. B. Submit product data and information for the following equipment, materials, products, etc.: 1. Distribution and branch circuit panelboards. 2. Enclosed circuit breakers. 3. Disconnect switches. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Provide full system warranty (labor, travel, equipment, etc.) in accordance with Division 1 and a minimum of one (1) year from acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Branch Circuit Panelboards (480Y/277 volt, 208Y/120 volt, 240/120 volts): 1. Provide branch circuit panelboard as indicated in the "Panelboard Schedule" and as located on the drawings. Panelboards shall be equipped with quick make/quick break thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers as scheduled. 2. Panelboard bussing and lugs shall be copper. Provide grounding bus in each panelboard, securely bonded to the box. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main circuit breaker shall have current ratings as indicated. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests, conducted in accordance with UL Standard 67. 3. Provisions for additional circuit breakers shall be such that field addition of connectors or mounting hardware will not be required to add circuit breakers to the panelboard. Bus connections shall be bolt-on. 4. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the rating shown on the Panelboard Schedule or on the plans. All panelboards shall be fully rated. "Series Ratings" are NOT acceptable. Reducing breaker ratings on the basis of series rating is not acceptable. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 20 00 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-262000-ElectricDistribution.doc 6/7/2021 5. The panelboard bus assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be specified in UL Standard 50 cabinets. Wiring gutter space shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67 for panelboards. Each front shall include a door and have a flush, stainless steel, cylinder type lock with catch and spring-loaded door pull. All panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. Doors shall be mounted by completely concealed steel hinges. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. Fronts shall be of code gauge, full-finished steel with rust inhibiting iron phosphate sealer and baked enamel finish. Minimum box width shall be 20 in. Provide door-in-door construction. Panelboard to be keyed to match the Owner's existing system. 6. Panelboards with main circuit breaker shall have inherent and listed coordination of the main and branch circuit breakers. 7. Ratings shall be as indicted on the Panelboard Schedule. 8. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. 480Y/277 Volt: 1) Square D "NF" - Design Make. 2) Eaton Corporation "PRL2" 3) General Electric by ABB "AE" b. 208Y/120 Volt and 240/120 Volt: 1) Square D "NQ" - Design Make. 2) Eaton Corporation "PRL1" 3) General Electric by ABB "AQ" B. Circuit Breakers: 1. Circuit breakers below 400 amp frame shall be molded case with inverse time and instantaneous tripping functions, unless indicated otherwise in contract documents. 2. Listed combination of coordinated circuit breakers shall be verified by the equipment manufacturer utilizing published data sheets. Confirm listings shall be submitted. 3. Lugs shall be mechanical, rated for 60/75° AL/Cu. 4. Branch circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic and trip indicating, and multipole breakers shall have common trip. Single pole 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers" at 120V ac or 277 V ac and carry the SWD marking. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 20 00 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021 \21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-262000-ElectricDistribution.doc 6/7/2021 5. Ratings shall be as indicated in the Contract Documents. 6. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with contract documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. Square D Micrologic trip unit - Design Make. b. Eaton Corporation Optim 550 trip units for circuit breakers 400 - 1600 amp frame or RMS 610 trip units for 2000 amp frame to 6000 amp frame c. General Electric Spectra RMS or MicroVersa trip unit 7. Enclosed circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal-magnetic type, ratings as noted, with overcenter, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanism, quick make/quick break action and positive handle indication. Multiple pole breakers shall be common trip type. Each circuit breaker shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pose. Provide provisions for padlocking in the "off" position. Breakers shall be calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of 40°C and shall be suitable for mounting and operating in any position. Breakers shall have removable lugs, UL listed for copper and aluminum conductors. Breakers shall be installed in NEMA 1 general purpose, surface enclosures, unless otherwise noted. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1) Square D 2) Cutler Hammer 3) General Electric by ABB C. Disconnect Switches: 1. Shall be heavy-duty type three-pole, with "Quick Make/Quick Break" operating handle mechanically interlocked with the cover, horsepower and voltage rated to match equipment served. Where indicated switches shall be provided with dualelement, time delay, rejection type fuses. Switches shall be installed in NEMA 1 for indoor use, NEMA 3R for outdoor use. Provide provisions for padlocking in the "off" position. Provide neutral bar in single phase or three phase, four wire circuits, and ground bar in all switches. Provide auxiliary contacts where called for. 2. All disconnects connected downstream of ASD's shall have a normally open and normally closed auxiliary contacts which shall be wired to the ASD to indicate disconnect is open. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. Square-D - Design Make. b. Cutler Hammer c. General Electric CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 20 00 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\2 10018-262000-ElectricDistribution.doc 6/7/2021 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All equipment shall be grounded per the NEC. B. Electrical distribution equipment shall have lugs/terminations suitable for the indicated conductor size. Where conductors have been oversized for voltage drop and where approved by the Engineer it shall be allowed to reduce the conductor size using hydraulically crimpled splice in a box next to the distribution equipment to allow for standard lug termination. C. Install dry-type transformers with adequate clearances for proper ventilation. Bolt floor mounted transformer to pad. D. Distribution switchboards, motor control centers and floor mounted dry-type transformers shall be mounted on 4 in. high concrete pads which shall extend 3 in. on all sides. Securely bolt the unit to the pads for proper horizontal and vertical alignment. E. Coordinate transformer pad dimensions with transformer manufacturer's requirements. Coordinate transformer pad locations, dimensions and details with General Contractor. F. Provide pad lockable branch circuit breaker device to hold circuit breaker in the closed position, but not prevent overcurrent protection, for all branch circuits serving fire alarm controls panels, emergency lighting and life safety branch circuits. G. Identification: 1. Identify all items of equipment as described in Section 260501-3.1, Identification. Identification shall be provided for switchboards, panelboards, transformers, ASD's, motor starters, disconnect switches, enclosed circuit breakers, switchboard main/distribution breakers, MCC's automatic transfer switches, UPS's, generators, surge suppression devices, control panels, switchgear, etc. 2. Switchboards, panelboards, MCC's, switchgear, etc. shall have a label indicating name/tag ID, feeder source, conductor color convention and for service entrance locations the available short circuit current. 3.2 ELECTRICAL LOAD TEST A. Conduct a load test prior to request for final payment and comply with the following: 1. Energize maximum normal light and power load for a period of two hours when scheduled. 2. Record voltage at service and at each panel. 3. Measure current in each phase of all feeders. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 20 00 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\21 0018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-262000-ElectricDistribution.doc 6/7/2021 4. Adjust transformer taps as directed by engineer after review of report. 5. Provide and install all necessary metering equipment. 6. Owner's Representative or Site Representative shall witness the test. 7. Before final acceptance specified test shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative who shall be sole judge of the acceptability of such tests and who may direct the performance of such additional tests as deemed necessary in order to determine the acceptability of the systems, equipment, material and workmanship. Additional tests required by the Owner's Representative shall be provided at no additional cost. Protective equipment shall be actuated in a manner that clearly demonstrated their workability and operation. 3.3 CLEANING A. At the completion of the project, while equipment is de-energized, it shall be thoroughly cleaned to a shipped condition using methods in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Utilize vacuum for cleaning and not compressed gas. 3.4 SPARE PARTS A. Deliver loose equipment to the Owner and obtain receipt for fuses, keys to panelboards, etc. 3.5 DISCONNECT DEVICES A. All disconnect devices downstream of ASD's: Provide wiring, conduit and connections between ASD and disconnect auxiliary switch to ASD. END OF SECTION 26 20 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-262913-MotorControllers.docx 6/7/2021 SECTION 26 29 13 - MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation and full operation of separately enclosed, preassembled, motor controls, rated 600V and less. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ASD: Adjustable speed drive motor controller. B. CPT: Control power transformer. C. DDC: Direct digital control. Building management/control system. D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. E. PWM: Pulse width modulated. F. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data for each type and rating of motor controller indicated. 1. Include dimensions, weights, enclosure types, rating capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, furnished specialties and accessories, mounting and attachment details, method of field assembly, components, and location / size of each field connection. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. B. As part of Operation and Maintenance Data, provide manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming microprocessor control modules, setting fieldadjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points, and setting field-adjustable overload relays. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-262913-MotorControllers.docx 6/7/2021 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc., correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. B. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, NFPA-70 (National Electrical Code), National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), state codes, local codes, and requirements of authority having jurisdiction. C. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMA, UL and IEEE Standards. D. Equipment and systems shall be NRTL tested and labeled. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide full system warranty (labor, travel, equipment, etc.) in accordance with Division 1 with a minimum of one (1) year from acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers include: B. Adjustable Speed Drives (ASDs): 1. ABB (Design Make - ACH580) 2. Yaskawa 3. Square D 4. Allen-Bradley 5. Eaton Corporation 6. Emerson CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-262913-Mo torControllers.docx 6/7/2021 C. Manual and Magnetic Motor Controllers: 1. Square-D 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric 4. Allen-Bradley 5. Siemens 2.2 ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE MOTOR CONTROLLER A. General Requirements for ASDs: 1. ASD Description: adjustable speed drive, consisting of power converter that employs pulse-width-modulated inverter, factory built and tested in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent and overload protection; arranged to provide self-protection, motor protection, and variable-speed control of one or more induction motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency. Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508. Suitable for operation of NEMA MG 1, Design A and Design B motors, as defined by NEMA MG 1. B. Unit Operating Requirements: 1. ASD shall provide full rated output from a line voltage of plus 10% and minus 10% of nominal voltage. ASD shall continue to operate without faulting from a +30% to -35% of nominal line voltage. 2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 5 percent. 3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 5 percent of ASD frequency rating. 4. Minimum Efficiency: 98 percent at 60 Hz, full load. 5. Minimum Primary-Side Power Factor: 98 percent under any load or speed condition. 6. Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 100kA. 7. Ambient Operating Temperature Rating: 5 deg F (-15 deg C) to 104 deg F (40 deg C) minimum. 8. Humidity Rating: To 95 percent (noncondensing) minimum. 9. Altitude Rating: Suitable for intended location with 3300 feet minimum. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-262913-MotorControllers.docx 6/7/2021 10. Vibration Withstand: Comply with NEMA ICS 61800-2. 11. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.3 times the base load current for two seconds. 12. Starting Torque: Minimum 140 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz. 13. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 1 to 12.5 kHz. 14. Stop Modes: Programmable including fast, free-wheel, and dc injection braking. C. Inverter: ASD shall employ a 6 PWM power electronic system, consisting of: 1. Input Section: a. ASD input power stage shall convert three-phase AC line power into a fixed DC voltage via a solid state full wave diode rectifier. 2. Intermediate Section: a. DC bus as a supply to the ASD output Section shall maintain a fixed voltage with filtering and short circuit protection. b. DC bus shall be interfaced with the ASD diagnostic logic circuit, for continuous monitoring and protection of the power components. 3. Output Section: a. Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs) shall convert DC bus voltage to variable frequency and voltage. b. The ASD shall employ pulse width modulated output technology to power the motor. D. Isolated Control Interface: ASDs control input to follow remote-control signal (selectable 0-10VDC, 4-20mA, 0-20mA, and network) over a minimum 40:1 speed range with electrical signal. E. Internal Adjustability Capabilities: 1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. 2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. 3. Acceleration: 0.1 to 6000 seconds. 4. Deceleration: 0.1 to 6000 seconds. 5. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-262913-MotorControllers.docx 6/7/2021 F. Self-Protection and Reliability Features: 1. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of the ASD, complying with UL 1449 SPD, Type 1 or Type 2. 2. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm. 3. Under and overvoltage protection. 4. Inverter overcurrent protection. 5. ASD and Motor-Overload/Over temperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal protection system for monitoring ASDs and motor thermal characteristics, and for providing ASD over temperature and motor-overload alarm and trip. The settings shall be selectable utilizing the keypad. 6. Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable dead bands. 7. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. 8. Loss-of-phase protection. 9. Reverse-phase protection. 10. Short-circuit protection. 11. Motor over-temperature fault. 12. Shut down on indication of motor local disconnect switch open position. G. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction; adjustable delay time between restart attempts. Field adjustable for manual restart. H. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped, unless "Bidirectional Autospeed Search" feature is available and engaged. I. Bidirectional Autospeed Search: Capable of starting ASD into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without causing damage to drive, motor, or load. J. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds. K. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\EL EC\210018-262913-MotorControllers.docx 6/7/2021 L. Integral Input Disconnecting Means: magnetic circuit breaker with pad-lockable, doormounted handle mechanism. M. The ASD shall include a motor flux optimization circuit that will automatically reduce applied motor voltage to the motor to optimize energy consumption and reduce audible motor noise. N. The ASD shall provide a programmable loss-of-load (broken belt / broken coupling) Form-C relay output. The drive shall be programmable to signal the loss-of-load condition via keypad warning, Form-C relay output, or over serial communication bus. O. Unit Mounted Operator Station: front-accessible, sealed keypad and plain-Englishlanguage digital display; allows complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability. 1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND, OFF, and AUTO modes. 2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: View only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service. Coordinate the access codes with the Owner. P. Status indicators displaying the following conditions: 1. Power on. 2. Run. 3. Overvoltage. 4. Line fault. 5. Overcurrent. 6. External fault. Q. Historical Logging Information and Displays 1. Real time clock with current time and date. 2. Running log of total power versus time 3. Total run time. 4. Fault log, maintaining faults with time and date stamp for each. 5. kWh. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 7 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-262913-MotorControllers.docx 6/7/2021 R. Indicating Devices: Digital display mounted flush in ASD door and connected to display ASD parameters including, but not limited to: 1. Output frequency (Hz). 2. Motor speed (rpm). 3. Motor status (running, stop, fault). 4. Motor current (amperes). 5. Motor torque (percent). 6. Fault or alarming status (code). 7. PID feedback signal (percent). 8. DC-link voltage (V dc). 9. Set point frequency (Hz). 10. Motor output voltage (V ac). S. Control Signal Interfaces: 1. Electric Input Signal Interface: a. A minimum of two programmable analog inputs field selectable for 0- to 10-V dc or 4- to 20-mA dc. b. A minimum of six multifunction programmable digital inputs. 2. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from the DDC system for HVAC or other control systems: a. 0- to 10-V dc. b. 4- to 20-mA dc. c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs. d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs. 3. Output Signal Interface: A minimum of one programmable analog output signal (0- to 10-V dc or 4- to 20-mA dc), which can be configured for any of the following: a. Output frequency (Hz). b. Output current (load). CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 8 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\ Specs\ELEC\210018-262913-MotorControllers.docx 6/7/2021 c. DC-link voltage (V dc). d. Motor torque (percent). e. Motor speed (rpm). f. Set point frequency (Hz). g. Any aux contacts. 4. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of three programmable dry-circuit relay outputs (120-VAC, 1 A) for remote indication of the following: a. Motor running. b. Set point speed reached. c. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent). T. Interface with DDC System for HVAC: Factory-installed hardware and software shall interface with DDC system for HVAC to monitor, control, display, and record data for use in processing reports. ASD settings shall be retained within ASD's nonvolatile memory. 1. Provide EIA-485 port as standard. The standard protocols shall be BACnet MS/TP, Modbus RTU and N2. Provide additional ports for any other protocols that are utilized in the project. U. Interface so ASD has indication of downstream disconnect switch(es) status (openclosed) and operates accordingly. V. ASDs shall have an input inductive reactance either via 5% impedance AC line reactor or a pair of balanced DC chokes, one on the positive and one on the negative side of the DC bus, with an effective input impedance equivalent to a 5% AC line reactor. Any ASDs that do not meet this requirement must have a 5% AC line reactor added, with the reactor mounted in the same enclosure as the ASD. W. EMI/RFI Filtering: Onboard filters shall allow ASD assembly to be CE marked; certify compliance with IEC 61800-3 for Category C2. X. MOTOR STARTERS Y. Provide motor starters as listed on the Electric Equipment and Control Schedule on the drawings. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 9 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\EL EC\210018-262913-MotorControllers.docx 6/7/2021 Z. Starters, contactors and controllers shall comply with NEMA standards having general purpose NEMA 1 or 1B enclosure unless otherwise called for. Provide explosion proof, weather resistant or watertight construction as required. Starters shall be minimum NEMA size 0 with solid state overloads in each phase sized per NEC, motor full load amperage, service factor, and motor operating conditions. AA. Pad lock arrangements shall be provided to lock the disconnect device in the "off" position. Magnetic starters shall be provided with a control power transformer with 120V secondary and primary and secondary fusing and be sized to accept the loads imposed there on. Starters shall have LED type pilot lights. Each starter subject to electrical interlock and/or automatic control shall have necessary auxiliary contacts. BB. Auxiliary Devices: Provide pushbutton stations, pilot lights, devices, relays, transformers, selector switches, electric thermostats, auxiliary starter contacts as required for functions called for. Provide separate relay for each speed to operate electric dampers or other devices as required for multispeed motor circuit. CC. Manual Motor Starter: 1. Provide all starters with thermal overload(s); and pilot light(s), and handle lockout provisions. Gang starter with selector switch for multispeed applications. Provide single or 2-pole as required: 2.3 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. Provide Type 1 for dry and clean indoor locations, Type 4R for outdoor locations, Type 4X stainless steel for kitchen and wash-down areas, and Type 12 for areas subject to dust, falling dirt, and dripping non corrosive liquids. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive motor controllers, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine motor controllers before installation. Reject motor controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before motor controller installation. D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 10 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-262913-MotorControllers.docx 6/7/2021 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Wall-Mounted ASDs: Install with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks. B. Wall-Mounted Manual and Magnetic Controllers: Install on walls with tops at uniform height, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks. C. Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install ASDs on 4-inch nominal thickness concrete base. 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. D. Roof-Mounting Controllers: Install ASD on roofs with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished roof surface unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to curbs or mounting on freestanding, lightweight, structural-steel channels bolted to curbs. Seal roof penetrations after raceways are installed. E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. F. Install fuses, heaters in thermal-overload relays (based on actual nameplate full-load amperes) after motors are installed, and install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment. G. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and NFPA 70. H. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. I. Setting of Overload Relays: Select and set overloads on the basis of full-load current rating as shown on motor nameplate. Adjust setting value for special motors as required by NFPA 70 for motors that are high-torque, high-efficiency, and so on. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 11 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-262913-M otorControllers.docx 6/7/2021 J. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring between ASDs and remote devices and facility's central-control system. B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control devices where applicable. D. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position. E. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor-overload protectors. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify motor controllers, components, and control wiring. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. Label each ASD with engraved nameplate. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. Identify all items as described in Section 260501 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Tests and Inspections for ASDs: 1. Inspect ASDs, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. 2. Test insulation resistance for each ASD element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. 3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at ASD locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner's Representative before starting the motor(s). 5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform tests according to the Inspection and Test Procedures for Adjustable Speed Drives stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 12 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-262913-MotorControllers.docx 6/7/2021 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 8. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Tests and Inspections for Manual and Magnetic Motor Controllers: 1. Comply with the provisions of NFPA 70B, "Testing and Test Methods" Chapter. 2. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: a. Compare equipment nameplate data with drawings and specifications. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition, anchorage, alignment, and grounding, and that the controller is clean. c. Inspect contactors: Verify mechanical operation and contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure are according to manufacturer's published data. d. Motor-Running Protection: Verify overload element rating is correct for its application and if protection is provided by fuses, verify correct fuse rating. e. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two following methods: 1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance values with values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method according to manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.12. Bolt-torque levels shall be according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12. f. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces. D. Motor controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the ASD and describes results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 29 13 - 13 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation MOTOR CONTROLLERS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-262913-MotorControllers.docx 6/7/2021 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion. B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overloadrelay pickup and trip ranges. C. Adjust carrier frequency for optimal operation with load and conditions. D. Adjust the trip settings of instantaneous-only circuit breakers and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to 6 times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed 8 times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Construction Manager before increasing settings. 3.8 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain motor controllers. END OF SECTION 26 29 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LIGHTING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs \ELEC\210018-265000-Lighting.docx 6/7/2021 SECTION 26 50 00 - LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Provide interior and exterior lighting systems, including luminaires, hangers, supports, fittings, lamps, wiring, connections and controls, as indicated in the Contract Documents for complete and operational systems. The lighting layouts on the drawings are diagrammatic only. Refer to architectural Plans for exact location of Exterior luminaires. Luminaires, in general, have been specified for the particular type of ceiling in which they are to be installed. Verify the ceiling construction details and provide luminaires suitable for the respective ceiling types and room finish schedule. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The following standards, criteria, codes, etc. shall be followed in the manufacture and installation of the lighting systems. 1. NFPA 2. NEC 3. IESNA 4. NEMA 5. ANSI 6. UL 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaires shall be as specified in the "Luminaire Schedule". Luminaire types, appearance, characteristics, photometrics, finishes, etc., correspond to the specified manufacturer and associated series or catalog number listed in the "Luminaire Schedule". Products of other listed acceptable manufacturers shall be equivalent in every way to that of the luminaire specified. The Engineer reserves the right to disapprove any luminaire type submitted which they feel is not equal in quality, appearance or performance to the luminaire specified. B. Manufacturer's luminaire series or catalog numbers listed in the "Luminaire Schedule" indicate quality, type, and style, but may not cover required special design details. Provide luminaires having such special details as noted in the "Luminaire Schedule", as indicated by the specified luminaire model number and as required for proper installation. C. All luminaires shall be new and bear a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) label for the service intended. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LIGHTING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-265000-Lighting.docx 6/7/2021 D. Luminaires shall be products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of the type of luminaires specified and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with specification requirements. E. Verify the availability of all luminaires proposed to be used in the execution of the work prior to submitting same for approval. The discontinuance of production of any luminaire after such approval has been granted shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing an approved luminaire of comparable quality and design at no additional cost. F. Photometric and operational data shall be provided only by qualified and certified organizations. Certification documentation shall be submitted with the luminaire information. G. Should there be any difference between drawings and schedules, secure from Architect/Engineer such information as necessary prior to providing proposal. When finishes are not definitely specified, they shall be as selected by the Architect and not be limited to standard finishes. H. Locations indicated for luminaires are approximate. Field coordinate exact locations as near as possible to the location indicated. Coordinate with the Engineer for any major location changes. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each luminaire type, include in a single submittal, in order of luminaire designation, the catalog "cut" sheet with complete manufacturer and model number. Product data should include the following: 1. Manufacturer and Catalog Number. 2. Features, accessories, materials and finishes. 3. Physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Life, power input, output (lumens, distribution, CCT, and CRI) and energyefficiency data. 5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests (space to mounting height ratio, coefficient of utilization complete values, IES distribution electronic copy, candlepower distribution by angle and luminaire efficiency). Format shall be in accordance with IES TM-27. 6. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams between luminaires and controllers. 7. Lens/Louver Type. 8. Driver/ballast with each type luminaire as applicable (type, sound rating, overload protection, voltage, input/fixture wattage, ballast factor, power factor, etc.). CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LIGHTING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC \210018-265000-Lighting.docx 6/7/2021 9. Certification of IES LM-79, IES LM-80 and TM-21 testing for LED luminaires. Luminaires shall be tested in accordance with IES LM and TM standards. 10. Warranty. B. Coordination Drawings: Provide coordination drawings in accordance with Section 260500. Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Luminaires. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extend to within 12 inches of the plane of the luminaires. 4. Structure members to which equipment and or luminaires will be attached. 5. Initial access modules for acoustical tile, including size and locations. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including other luminaires, air outlets and inlets, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, ceiling mounted projectors, etc. C. Color Chips: Provide color chips of available finishes for luminaires upon request of Architect/Engineer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Luminaires and equipment shall be delivered with NRTL and manufacturer's labels intact and legible. Broken, cracked and damaged materials and equipment shall be removed from the site immediately and be replaced with new materials and equipment. Luminaires and accessories shall be stored in protected dry locations in their original unbroken package or container. Luminaires shall be protected from dust and dampness both before and after installation. Luminaires shall be protected from paint and cleaning solvents during all phases of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division hazard by a NRTL. C. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598 and UL 8750. D. Recessed Luminaires: Comply with NEMA LE 4. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LIGHTING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-265000-Lighting.docx 6/7/2021 2.2 LIGHT-EMITTING DIODE (LED) LUMINAIRES A. Luminaires shall be identical in construction features, options and appearance to the luminaries specified in the Luminaire Schedule. LED luminaires include white and RGBW systems as indicated on the luminaire schedule. B. Luminaires shall be provided with all cables, controllers, power supplies, drivers, connectors, terminators and accessories required for a complete installation. LED system shall utilize pulse width modulation, non-linear scaling techniques and reverse polarity protection. C. LED luminaires shall be high brightness and binned for forward voltage, luminous flux and wavelength. D. LED luminaires shall be tested in accordance with IESNA LM-79 (luminous output, power input, luminaire efficacy (lumens/watt), color temperature and color rendering index), IESNA LM-80 (L70, output luminous maintenance, 10,000 hour minimum test, calculation method is not acceptable) and IESNA TM-21/28. Luminaire output shall be a minimum of 100 lumens/watt. Rated life shall be a minimum of 50,000 hours at 70% output. Testing shall be performed by a US Department of Energy (DOE) accredited laboratory. E. Drivers shall be solid state Class 1 power supply/driver with universal input (120-277V). The system shall have a minimum 90% power factor, 3.5 maximum crest factor, minimum efficiency of 90%, a maximum of 20% THD and overload protection. Adequate heat sink capability shall be provided to ensure the rated life. Unit shall meet FCC rules and regulations. F. The luminaire (to include LED sources and drivers) shall have a full five (5) year minimum warranty for replacement and labor. 1. Acceptable LED Node Manufacturers: a. Philips b. Osram c. Cree d. Nichea e. Lumiled 2.3 LUMINAIRE CONSTRUCTION A. Metal Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LIGHTING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-265000-Lighting.docx 6/7/2021 B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. C. Lenses: 1. Shall be listed materials tested in accordance with ASTM D-635, "Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position" and burns less than 2/5 inches per minute. 2. The products shall have a smoke density of less than 75 when tested in accordance with ASTM D-2843, standard test method for "Density of Smoke from the Burning or Decomposition of Plastics". 3. The flame spread rating shall not exceed 0-25 and smoke developed rating shall not exceed 450 in accordance with ASTM E-84, standard test method for "Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". 4. Self-ignition shall not occur below 600°F, in accordance with ASTM D-1929, standard test method for "Ignition Properties of Plastics". 5. Materials shall remain in place 15 minutes at 175°F and fall from frame at 200° below ignition temperature in accordance with ASTM D-648, "Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load". 2.4 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE A. Luminaire schedule is found on the contract drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of Work. B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before luminaire installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. All luminaires shall be installed as per manufacturer furnished installation instructions. C. Provide for every luminaire as shown on the plans, or as scheduled on the drawings. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LIGHTING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-265000-Lighting.docx 6/7/2021 D. Location of all ceiling and wall mounted luminaires shall be as indicated on the Architectural and Electrical drawings. The contractor shall verify ceiling type, construction, and material prior to ordering. E. Provide luminaires with an IC rating for luminaires installed in direct contact with insulation. F. Provide plaster frames for plaster ceilings and flanged frames for drywall ceilings. G. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. H. Luminaires shall be suitable and as recommended by the manufacturer for the actual intended mounting method and materials. I. Supports: 1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight. J. Flush-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Secured to outlet box. 2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around circumference of luminaire. 3. Trim ring flush with finished surface. K. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Attached to structural members in walls, to a minimum 20 gauge backing plate attached to wall structural members, or using through bolts and backing plates on either side of wall. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board. L. Cove Lighting: 1. Installed so as to produce a continuous and unbroken band of light with no shadows or light gaps. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 7 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LIGHTING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-265000-Lighting.docx 6/7/2021 M. In-Grade Luminaires: 1. Provide a minimum of 6 in. peat gravel at the bottom of luminaire to allow for drainage. When installed in a concrete walkway, secure luminaire to rebar to prevent luminaire from "floating" when concrete is poured. 2. Seal conduit entry into luminaire to prevent moisture penetration into luminaire from conduit system. 3. Secure faceplate of in-grade luminaires in accordance with manufacturer directions to compress gasket evenly to form a waterproof seal. The use of power tools to secure faceplate is not permitted. N. Provide all necessary accessories for "end-to-end" mounting where continuous rows of luminaires are indicated. All luminaire assemblies shall be grounded. O. Luminaires installed in continuous rows may be fed by a single outlet if luminaires are UL approved and suitable for through wiring in luminaire raceway. P. New luminaires may be provided to replace existing luminaires indicated to remain or be reused, subject to shop drawing approval. 3.3 GROUNDING A. Ground all non-current carrying parts of all lighting luminaires. B. All grounding shall be accomplished with NRTL tested grounding connectors suitable for this purpose. 3.4 FINAL CLEANING A. Immediately prior to acceptance, damp clean diffusers, glassware, luminaire trim, reflectors, lamps, louvers, lens and similar objects of all luminaires. Remove all dirt, corrosion, foreign material, finger marks, and blemishes. Replace all burned out lamps and failed components. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. 2. Test of Emergency Lighting: Under supervision of Engineer, interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal. B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 26 50 00 - 8 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LIGHTING M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-265000-Lighting.docx 6/7/2021 C. Prepare test and inspection reports. D. Replace luminaires damaged during shipment, construction, or installation. 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section 260936 "Lighting Controls." 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Provide adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Adjustment may be required during hours of darkness. B. Final distribution shall be acceptable to the Owner and may take several attempts. END OF SECTION 26 50 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-272100-LocalAreaNetworkSystem.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 27 21 00 - LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, services, etc. for a complete functional Local Area Network (LAN) and related work as required in the Contract Documents. B. The systems to be provided shall be for a switched LAN environment. The system shall hereafter be referred to as the Data Network System. C. Basic Intent: 1. Located throughout the building as shown on the drawings, are places where computers and associated equipment are intended to be placed and connected to the network for the purposes of utilizing common resources. 2. The telecommunications rooms for the data network in the building(s) are located as shown on the drawings. 3. Located in various other places are additional Telecommunication Rooms. It is intended that these be connected with the Main Telecommunication Room by a fiber optic cable backbone. From each of these locations, data cable is to be run to the data jacks where computer equipment is connected. 4. Rack mounted enclosure shall be used as termination points for all fiber optic cabling. Provide backbone cabling between telecommunication rooms as indicated. Duplex SC or LC type connectors shall be utilized for fiber. 5. Patch panels shall be used as termination points for all data cables and rack mounted enclosures for the individual fiber cables in telecommunication rooms. Duplex SC or LC type connectors shall be utilized for fiber. D. Description of System: 1. The system shall include the items listed below, as described herein and as indicated on the Contract Documents: a. Data network shall be compatible with existing network configuration and characteristics. b. Campus service to the building(s). c. Building Main Distribution Frame (MDF) for service entrance and distribution. d. Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) as indicated for cabling distribution. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-272100-LocalAreaNetworkSystem.doc 6/7/2021 e. Backbone wiring from entrance facility to the MDF and from MDF to the IDFs. f. Complete raceway system (cable tray, J hooks, conduit) for cabling distribution as noted on Construction Drawings. g. Grounding of all racks, raceway and equipment. h. Power for the telecommunication rooms. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work shall be as specified herein and it shall be neat and orderly installation. All methods of construction, details of workmanship that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. B. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. C. Installation shall be accordance with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code), TIA/EIA, IEEE, IEC, state codes, local codes, and requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. D. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMAIEC, TIA/EIA and IEEE Standards. E. Each item shall be NRTL tested and listed. F. The system provider must: 1. Provide equipment from manufacturers for which they maintain a contract, distributorship, are an agent, or other formal arrangement for which documentation can be produced showing authority to sell and service the equipment in this territory. 2. Demonstrate that they have successfully installed these systems, utilizing their standard products, for a period of five (5) years. 3. Maintain a service organization to provide both normal and emergency service. Emergency service must be available 24 hours per day; 365 days per year and staff must be adequate to respond within two (2) hours of an emergency call. 4. Maintain adequate spare parts inventory to provide both normal and emergency service. 5. Employ service technicians who are trained in accordance with the systems manufacturer's recommendations. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Proj ects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-272100-LocalAreaNetworkSystem.doc 6/7/2021 6. Own and demonstrate proficiency in the use of the required test equipment, tools, etc. for the proper installation, set-up, testing and maintenance of the system. If requested, must provide a listing of tools and/or equipment and where appropriate, certifications in the proper training and use of the tools and/or equipment. 7. Provide all system programming to deliver a customized system to the Owner ready for use. a. All system programming is to be completed to the satisfaction of the Owner. If after preliminary use of the system, and/or training, the increased understanding of the system's features and capabilities necessitates reprogramming to any extent, it is to be performed at no additional cost. b. System shall be reprogrammed three months after occupancy/system turn over to incorporate all Owner desired modifications. 8. Any system being extended or connected to an existing system shall be tested for full functionality prior to beginning work and at the completion. G. Contractor Qualifications: 1. This Contractor shall be a certified installer for the proposed equipment/system manufacturer(s) and be Panduit and Corning certified ITS Installer 2, Copper and Optical Fiber and shall be certified to terminate indicated fiber connectors. 2. The cable installer shall provide documentation and references from three (3) similar installations installed within the previous two (2) years within a 60 mile radius. H. Installer Qualifications: 1. Cabling installer must have personnel certified by Panduit and Corning on staff. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide the following in a single clear and organized submittal. Package shall be submitted as specified in: 1. Manufacturers catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for all system components. 2. Detailed description of system operation. 3. Itemized list of all features and functions. 4. Dimensioned drawings of all system control cabinets and layouts for all equipment rooms. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-272100-LocalAreaNetworkSystem.doc 6/7/2021 5. Wiring diagrams showing typical connections for equipment. 6. Contractor certification and qualifications. 7. Riser diagrams showing all components, devices and interconnecting cable types. 8. List of three (3) installations of equivalent or larger systems that have been installed within the past two (2) years and have been operating satisfactorily for a minimum of one (1) year. 9. Warranty information. 10. System test reports. 11. Provide scaled elevation and plan drawings indicating walls, data racks, patch panels, wire management, cable trays, power strips, door swing, etc. for each cable closet/room. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide a complete and fully operational state of the art Local Area Network (LAN) system as described herein and indicated on the contract documents. Include any and all interface equipment to supply a complete network with complete equipment connections necessary to form a complete "turnkey" network system as outlined in these specifications. B. The complete system shall include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Equipment cabinets and racks. 2. Patch panels and patch cables. 3. Wire management. 4. Fiber optic backbone cabling. 5. Horizontal cabling. 6. Modular jacks, backboxes and faceplates. 7. Terminations and testing. 8. Raceways, pathways, cable tray, sleeves, pull boxes. 9. Firestopping. 10. Router. 11. Core switch. 12. Edge switches. 13. Fringe switches. 14. UPS units. 15. Wireless Network System. 16. Fiber adapters and downlinks. 17. Training and system programming. C. Owner shall provide the network electronics. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-272100-LocalAreaNetworkSystem.doc 6/7/2021 1.5 WARRANTY A. All cable plant parts shall be warranted to the owner for a period of fifteen (15) years as a complete end-to-end system. B. All network equipment shall be warranted to the owner for a period of one (1) year. Provide technical support at no charge to the customer for a period of one (1) year after system has been commissioned. C. Make available an extended warranty to the customer. D. Warranties shall commence upon final acceptance of the system. E. Contractor to submit cable records to Panduit for warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL CABLE A. Category 6 UTP Cable: 1. Initially, the manufacturer shall perform qualification tests on each cable. These tests shall be performed in accordance with the latest revision of the ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C.2 Permanent Link Transmission Performance standard prior to shipment. 2. Date of Manufacture: Cable shall be a maximum of one (1) year old, from date of manufacture when installed. 3. Cable shall have a ripcord. 4. Cable shall be non-plenum rated, 4 pair, 100 OHM, 23 AWG. 5. Cable shall meet all requirements of FCC 68, the latest revision of the TIA/EIA 568B-C.2 and Addenda. 6. Cable shall have blue colored thermoplastic jacket with overall diameter not to exceed 0.365 in. 7. The cable pulling tension shall be rated for 25 pounds minimum. 8. Cable shall be able to withstand a minimum bend radius of 1.0 in. at -20ºC without insulation cracking. 9. Cable shall be color coded in accordance with the latest revision of the TIA/EIA T568 polarization sequence. 10. Cable shall not exceed maximum length of 90 meters. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-272100-LocalAreaNetworkSystem.doc 6/7/2021 11. Provide a printed report documenting testing based on ANSI/TIA 568 C.2 testing at 250 MHz. The following are the minimum values associated with the cable for a 100 meter length. a. Less than 21.000 ohm per 100 m DC loop resistance. b. Return loss > 20.0 dB. c. Insertion Loss < 31.1 dB/100M. d. Near end cross talk (NEXT)> 35.3 dB (43.4 dB). e. Power Sum - near end cross talk (PS-NEXT)> 41.0 dB. f. Attention to cross talk ratio (ACRF) > 16.2 dB (24.8 dB). g. Power Sum - Attenuation to cross talk ratio (PSACRF) > 13.2 dB (21.8 dB). h. DC resistance unbalance between any two (2) conductors of any pair shall not exceed 3%. i. The capacitance unbalance of any pair to ground shall not exceed 33.0pF. j. Delay < 490 ns. k. Delay skew < 44 ns. l. Cable shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA-568.B.2 Category 6 compliant. The cable shall be tested and characterized by the manufacturer. 12. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Panduit Genspeed 6000 b. Berk-Tek Lanmark 1000 c. Comm Scope - Systimax 1071E B. Augmented Category 6A UTP Cable: 1. Initially, the manufacturer shall perform qualification tests on each cable. These tests shall be performed in accordance with the latest revision of ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C.2 standard prior to shipment. 2. Date of Manufacture: Cable shall be a maximum of one (1) year old, from date of manufacture when installed. 3. Cable shall have a ripcord. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 7 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\ 21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-272100-LocalAreaNetworkSystem.doc 6/7/2021 4. Cable shall be non-plenum rated, 4 pair, 100 OHM, 23 AWG. 5. Cable shall meet all requirements of FCC 68, the latest revision of the TIA/EIA 568B-C.2 and Addenda. 6. Cable shall have blue colored thermoplastic jacket with overall diameter not to exceed .215 in. x .290 in. 7. Pulling tension shall be rated for 25 pounds minimum. 8. Cable shall be able to withstand a minimum bend radius of 1.2 in. at -20ºC without insulation cracking. 9. Cable shall be color coded in accordance with the latest revision of the TIA/EIA T568A polarization sequence. 10. Cable shall not exceed maximum length of 90 meters. 11. Provide a printed report documenting testing based on ANSI/TIA 568-C.2 tested at 500 MHz. Testing parameters as follows: a. Less than 21.0 ohm per 100 m DC resistance. b. Return loss > 10.0 dB/100m at 500 MHz. c. Insertion loss < 43.8 dB/100m at 500 MHz. d. Near end cross talk (NEXT) > 26.7 dB at 500 MHz. e. Power Sum - near end cross talk (PS-NEXT) > 23.8 dB at 500 MHz. f. Attenuation to cross talk ration far end (ACRF) > 10.2 dB at 500 MHz. g. Power sum - attenuation to cross talk ratio (PS-ACRF) > 7.2 dB at 500 MZz. h. DC resistance unbalance between any two (2) conductors of any pair shall not exceed 3%. i. The capacitance unbalance of any pair to ground shall not exceed 65.6 pF per 100 meters. j. Delay < 490 ns at 100MHz. k. Delay skew < 44 ns at 100MHz. l. Cable shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2 augmented Category 6 (Cat 6A) compliant. The cable shall be tested and characterized by the manufacture to 500 MHz. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 8 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-272100-LocalAreaNetwo rkSystem.doc 6/7/2021 12. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Berk-Tek Lanmark -XTP b. Comm Scope-systimax 1091B C. Fiber Optic Singlemode Indoor Cable: 1. Cable: 8.3 micron core of graded index glass. Cladding to have 125 micron diameter. 2. Maximum attenuation /3300 ft. for each strand of fiber in the cable at temperatures ranging from -40°C to 70°. a. 850 nM: 3.5 dB b. 1300 nM: 1.5 dB 3. Minimum Bandwidth/3300 ft. a. 850 nM: 160 MHz b. 1300 nM: 500 Mhz 4. Meet or exceed requirements for FDDI, and TIA/EIA 568B. 5. Six (6) strand fiber cable consisting of: a. The fiber. b. Tight buffer. c. Thermoplastic jacket. d. Aramid strength member. e. Outer jacket. f. Minimum Bend Radius: 1) Installation 15 x O.D. 2) Long term 10 x O.D. g. Maximum Loading: 1) Installation 660 pounds. 2) Long term 330 pounds. 6. The cables shall be tight buffer design with all dielectric construction. 7. All horizontal fiber shall be installed in plenum rated inner duct on J hooks or EMT. a. Raceway shall be labeled on 10 ft. centers as "Fiber Optic Cable". 8. All fibers shall be terminated with compatible connectors in patch panel as specified. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 9 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-272100-LocalAreaNetworkSystem.doc 6/7/2021 9. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corning Cable Systems MIC clearCurve. 2.2 PATCH PANELS A. UTP Cable Patch Panels: 1. All panels should consist of a faceplate, mounting, hardware, isolation bushings, connector assemblies and labels for all ports. 2. Provide patch panels in each enclosure or rack to which the cable is to be terminated. Patch panels shall be of the type, performance and Category to match the cabling. 3. Patch panels shall be mounted in standard 19 in. racks/cabinets. a. Contractor shall provide Panduit CJ 688TG for Cat 6 terminations and Panduit CJ6X88TG for Cat 6A terminations48-port patch panels having wiring configuration specified with insulation displacement connectors on the back and 8P8C universal modular jacks on the front. No substitutions allowed. b. Contractor shall provide quantity of patch panels to terminate all UTP cable. There shall be a minimum of 25% spare capacity for future installation. 4. Jacks shall be Panduit CJ 688TG for Cat 6 terminations and Panduit CJ6X88TG for Cat 6A terminations, T568A only. No substitutions allowed. 5. Panels shall have factory labels for each port. 6. All cables are to be terminated per EIA/TIA 568A standards and dressed in a neat workmanship way. Match the Owner's standard configuration. 7. Modular jacks shall be mounted on PC boards to offer low insertion and NEXT loss. 8. Provide grounding screw assembly with serrated head screw and manufacturer recommended connection to the associated rack. 9. Shall exceed EIA/TIA-568, UL1863 and FCC Part 68 performance specified. 10. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Panduit CJ 688TG for Cat 6 terminations and Panduit CJ6X88TG for Cat 6A terminations. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 10 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-272100-LocalAreaNetworkSystem.doc 6/7/2021 B. Fiber Optic Patch Panels 1. Provide fiber optic rack mounted enclosure in where fiber optic cable is to be terminated. 2. Provide SC or LC connector to match existing style panel base. Provide quantity of ports to terminate all strands of the fiber optic cable with additional 25% spare ports. 3. Shall mount in standard 19 in. rack and be constructed of 16 gauge steel and have gasketed openings and hinged door for easy access. 4. Provide wire management below and in rear of patch panel. 5. Patch panels to have modular ports with 12 minimum ports. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corning b. Panduit 2.3 OUTLETS AND CONNECTORS A. UTP Outlets/Connectors: 1. Physical Specifications: a. Shall be 8 position connector compatible with the cable characteristics. b. Shall be modular and snap-in to user configurable faceplates for future retrofits meeting durability requirements specified in the latest revision of the CEI/IEC standard. c. Shall be IDC type suitable for eight 22-24 AWG wires with a gas-tight connection. d. Each contact surface shall have at a minimum, copper alloy with 50 micro-inches gold over nickel and a minimum contact force of 100g. e. Conductors shall be separated and aligned internally by jack comb. f. Shall have easy to read 568A/B color scheme to prevent termination errors. g. Wired in accordance with TIA/EIA polarization sequence specified in Patch Panel section of this specification. h. Transmission characteristics shall meet the requirements for the UTP cabling specified. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 11 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-272100-LocalAreaNetworkSystem.doc 6/7/2021 i. Minimum durability shall be 1000 connecting cycles. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Panduit B. Fiber Optic Multimode Outlets/Connectors 1. Physical Characteristics: a. Shall be SC type. b. Shall terminate up to 125 micron fiber. c. Shall meet dimensional criteria of the latest revision of ANSI/EIA/TIA. d. Typical outlet box shall be sized to insure minimum bend radius and store 1 meter of two strand fiber cable. 2. Transmission Characteristics: a. Maximum loss of 0.3 dB per pair. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Panduit CS type. 2.4 COLOR CODING A. Cable outer jacket shall follow the color coding scheme as follows. Jacket color shall be continuous. Patch cords shall match the cabling. B. Copper Cable: 1. Data Communication: a. Category 6 - Blue b. Category 6A - Green 2. Voice Communication: a. Category 6 - Blue b. Category 6A - Green 3. Wireless Network - Green 4. Paging - White 5. Security/Access - Indigo CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 12 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-272100-LocalAreaNetwo rkSystem.doc 6/7/2021 C. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Backbone Cabling: a. Single Mode - Yellow 2. Horizontal Cabling: a. Single Mode - X 2.5 CABLE MANAGEMENT A. All racks are to be provided with cable management hardware to insure a neat, functional system when complete. Racks shall as a minimum, include the following: 1. PVC construction; duct fingers to manage cabling; color to match enclosure. B. All racks shall have 8 in. wide vertical full height cable management, including cover, front and rear, on both sides of the rack. C. All racks shall have 2RU space horizontal full width cable management, front and rear, above and below each patch panel and piece of equipment. D. Cabinets shall have 1RU space horizontal panels, front and rear, above and below each patch panel and piece of equipment. E. All data distribution frame plywood backboards shall be provided with vertical and horizontal wire management with capacities to house all possible future cabling and patch cords for a neat and orderly installation. F. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Panduit 2.6 INNERDUCT A. Innerduct shall be corrugated HDPE material, plenum rated, flexible, continuous, UV rated with flame/smoke spread in accordance with code and length markings on the outer surface. B. When in conduit minimum size shall be 3/4", otherwise 1 1/2" minimum. C. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Carlon 2. Maxcell 3. Opti-Com CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 13 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-272100-LocalAreaNetworkSystem.doc 6/7/2021 2.7 LABELING A. General: 1. Labeling system and structure shall match the Owners existing. System shall provide as built final conditions for each cable, port, panel, rack, etc. and utilize MS Excel or approved equal documentation. Provide hard and electronic copy of labeling documentation to the Owner as part of the O and M process. 2. Each label shall contain the Telecommunication Room designated, the room number and the port number in the room. Verify color of label and size of font prior to completion. Provide samples as requested. 3. Labels shall correspond to the room/names/numbers upon completion of the project. Contractor shall not necessarily utilize existing room/names/numbers or those indicated on the blueprints. 4. Label each rack and patch panel with 1" high lettering, black on white, adhered electronically printed plastic type label with labels at top, bottom, front and back. B. Patch Panel 1. Individually label all patch panel ports. Port numbers shall match opposite end outlet/port number. C. Outlets 1. Individually label all patch panel ports. Labels shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and fit completely in the recessed area of the labeled location. 2. Contractor shall utilize adhered labels at poke-thru locations and any other locations that do not have a label location. D. Cable 1. Fiber Optic: a. Individually label fiber optic cables at each termination point indicating building, destination room, rack number, panel number, port number, strand number and strand color. b. Each strand color shall match a specific fiber termination number in each closet, i.e. blue - fiber 1, orange - fiber 2, green - fiber 3, etc. c. Cable label shall be adhered electronically printed plastic type with cable designation fully visible. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 14 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-272100-LocalAreaNetwo rkSystem.doc 6/7/2021 2. Copper a. Specifically label cables at each termination point indicating the building, destination room, rack number, panel number and port number. 2.8 UTP CABLE TESTER A. Provide one (1) Fluke DSX 5000 tester or approved equal. Provide adapters for specified cables. Turn over to owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Cable: 1. Provide a minimum of one horizontal UTP cable to each communication outlet jack from respective equipment/telecommunications room patch panel as called for. Quantity of data jacks equals minimum quantity of UTP cables (typical). 2. Provide a minimum of one (1) pair (6 strands) of single-mode fiber optic cable to each fiber jack from respective equipment/telecommunications room as called for. Quantity of fiber jacks equals minimum quantity of 6 strand cables (typical). 3. All risers, and wiring concealed in walls or soffits, shall be installed in metal conduits. 4. All cable above accessible ceilings shall be installed in cable tray. 5. Provide wire management and Velcro cable wraps every 12 inches throughout closets. Provide Velcro cable wraps every 24 in. elsewhere. 6. Wiring/cabling shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. If the manufacturer recommends larger wire sizes, they shall be provided. However, smaller sizes or lower cable categories are not acceptable. 7. All Contract Documents are schematic. The system supplier shall incorporate their wiring requirements on the system drawings. The Contractor in conjunction with the system manufacturer shall be responsible for complete wiring requirements and conduit sizes. 8. Install UTP cable in accordance with latest revision of TIA/EIA 568 standards. 9. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing all cables that do not pass required bandwidth and throughput tests. 10. All raceways and closets shall be installed in accordance with latest revision of TIA/EIA-569. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 15 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-272100-LocalAreaNetworkSystem.doc 6/7/2021 11. All cables shall be labeled in accordance with latest revision of TIA/EIA 606 and these specifications. 12. All horizontal cables shall be terminated in patch panels at the distribution frames, and at the UTP jack at the telecommunications outlet. 13. Maximum length shall be 90 meters. B. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Terminate backbone fiber cables in rack mounted patch panels at both ends. 2. Terminate horizontal fiber cables in patch panels at the distribution frame and at the telecommunications outlet or other. 3. Adhere to all manufacturer bend radius recommendations. C. Terminations: 1. All terminations shall be made by a manufacturer's trained representative. 2. Use termination kits for fiber and UTP that are approved by the manufacturer of the cable. 3. All backbone cable shall be terminated in a patch panel and all connections between horizontal and backbone cables shall be through cross connect cable. D. Equipment and Devices: 1. Install all devices where shown on drawings. Provide all necessary conduit outlet boxes, junction boxes, supports, etc. Verify all required box sizes with the system supplier and coordinate with bending radius needs. All devices shall be modular for future moves and changes. 2. Install all equipment in specified 19 in. racks/cabinets leaving minimum 30 in. of access space on sides and back of rack and 36 in. in front of rack. 3. Provide all power outlets and plug strips required for system operation but not shown on plans. E. Raceways: 1. Minimum size raceway shall be 1 in. 2. Minimum backbox size for telecommunications outlet locations shall be twogang with raised cover; no single-gang boxes allowed. 3. Provide no greater than 180° in bends without pull box in any raceway. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 16 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-272100-LocalAreaNetworkSystem.doc 6/7/2021 F. Data Network Ground System: 1. Provide grounding system for all equipment rooms and telecommunication rooms as called for in Specification Section 260526. G. Telecommunications Rooms: 1. Provide 3/4 in. x 4 ft. high continuous plywood backboard with two (2) coats of medium gray fireproof paint in telecommunications rooms. 2. Coordinate with other trades to avoid services being installed above telecommunications racks. 3.2 TESTING A. Copper Cable: System supplier shall channel test end-to-end each permanent link connection using latest 200 MHz for Cat 6 and 500 MHz for Cat 6A 1000 Mbps IEEE testing procedure. Tester must conform to the latest standards at the time of testing not time of bid and be Fluke DTX-5000 with latest software version, or approved equal. Testing shall be performed by a technician trained with the specific testing equipment. Testing shall be witnessed by the Owner's Representative. B. Fiber Optic Cable: Provide an OTDR test for all fiber optic cable and connections per latest IEEE and ANSI accepted procedures. Test shall utilize Fluke Opti Fiber Pro OTDR. C. Replace any cables and connectors that do not meet or exceed standards referenced and stated herein and then tested. Testing shall be end-to-end / port-to-port for each cable. D. Test equipment shall be in good condition and working order, calibrated within one year of its use and utilize leads without twisting and kinks. Unit calibration shall be in accordance with Level III Field Tester per ANSI/TIA 1152. E. A representative of the end-user will select a random sample of 5% of the installed links. The representative (or his authorized delegate) shall test these randomly selected links. The results obtained shall be compared to the data provided by the installation contractor. If more than 2% of the sample results differ in terms of the pass/fail determination, the installation contractor under supervision of the end-user representative shall repeat 100% testing at no additional cost. Cables and connectors that do not pass shall be replaced and retested until acceptable results are obtained. F. Test Reporting: 1. The field testing shall be accurately documented for submission, inclusion in O&M Manuals and for Owner future use. 2. Test reports shall include data directory table cross-referencing room numbers and cable numbers with the test report. Post copies of directory at telecommunications room location. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 17 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design \Specs\ELEC\210018-272100-LocalAreaNetworkSystem.doc 6/7/2021 3. Report shall utilize electronic Windows based documenting with a hard and electronic copy provided to the Owner. 4. The report documentation for each cable test shall include the following as a minimum: a. Project name. b. Test equipment manufacturer and model number, and last calibration date. c. Date and time of the test. d. Patch panel identification. e. Cable identification. f. Cable type. g. Pass/Fail: Pass indicating meeting or exceeding the identified criteria or standard (whichever more stringent) for all parameters. Fail indicating test not meeting identified criteria for one or more parameters. h. Test pass criteria. i. Cable length. j. Propagation delay and attainable bandwidth. k. List of tested parameters with test and allowable values. Any failed parameters shall be noted or highlighted. 3.3 TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION A. Provide brief overview of system of instruction to Owner personnel regarding system set up configuration and management. Training shall be sufficient for the Owner to understand the system operation, components, configuration, functions, testing and troubleshooting. All Owner questions shall be answered. B. Training agenda (estimated duration, intent, specifications to be covered) shall be submitted for approval prior to the training. A finalized agenda shall be issued to the Owner and construction representative one (1) week minimum prior to the scheduled training. Owner's comments shall be incorporated and agenda redistributed prior to the training. C. Two (2) hard copies and one (1) electronic (pdf) copy of the training materials shall be provided. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 27 21 00 - 18 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation LOCAL AREA NETWORK SYSTEM M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projec ts\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-272100-LocalAreaNetworkSystem.doc 6/7/2021 D. Provide updated cable schedule and redline/as-built during training and instruction period 2-3 weeks prior to occupancy. 3.4 WARRANTY A. All cable plant parts shall be warranted to the owner for a period of fifteen (15) years as a complete end-to-end system. B. All network equipment shall be warranted to the owner for a period of one (1) year. Provide technical support at no charge to the customer for a period of one (1) year after system has been commissioned. C. Make available an extended warranty to the customer. D. Warranties shall commence upon final acceptance of the system. END OF SECTION 27 21 00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 1 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogA ddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 SECTION 28 31 02 - ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation of a fully operational analog addressable fire alarm system and related Work as described in the Contract Documents. B. Provide system as approved by local Fire Marshal and the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). System materials and installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc. correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. B. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA-70 (National Electrical Code), NFPA-72 (National Fire Alarm Code), AHJ, state codes, local codes, requirements of authority having jurisdiction and the contract documents. Installer shall be certified in the State of New York for fire alarm installation. C. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published UL, NFPA, ANSI, NEMA and IEEE Standards. All system equipment shall be compatible and of the same manufacturer. D. Each item of the fire alarm system shall be listed as a product of a single fire alarm system manufacturer and shall bear the UL Label. E. System installation shall be under the supervision of an accredited factory representative. Final connections to the FACP, annunciator panel and any other panels shall be by the factory representative. F. The system provider must: 1. Provide equipment from a single manufacturer for which they maintain a contract, distributorship, are an agent, or other formal arrangement for which documentation can be produced showing authority to sell and service the equipment in this territory. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 2 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Proje cts\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 2. Demonstrate that they have successfully installed these systems, utilizing their standard products, for a period of five (5) years minimum. 3. Maintain a service organization to provide both normal and emergency service. Emergency service must be available 24 hours per day, 365 days per year and staff must be adequate to respond within 2 hours of an emergency call. 4. Have a service location not more than 50 miles from the project location. 5. Maintain adequate spare parts inventory to provide both normal and emergency service. 6. Employ service technicians who are trained in accordance with the systems manufacturer's recommendations. 7. Own and demonstrate proficiency in the use of the required test equipment, tools, etc. for the proper installation, set-up, testing and maintenance of the system. If requested, provide a listing of tools and/or equipment and where appropriate, certifications in the proper training and use of the tools and/or equipment 8. Provide all system programming to deliver a customized system to the Owner ready for use. 9. All system programming is to be completed to the satisfaction of the Owner. If after preliminary use of the system, and/or training, the increased understanding of the system's features and capabilities necessitates reprogramming to any extent, it is to be performed at no additional cost. 10. Provide a minimum of two system inspections/tests each year during the warranty period as described in NFPA 72. Needed and requested system programming changes shall be provided at these times. 11. Warranty period shall be as described elsewhere with two years being minimum. Provide a service contract for the Owner review for two years beyond the warranty period. Warranty shall include all parts, materials, labor, transportation, etc. 12. Any system being extended or connected to an existing system shall be tested for full functionality prior to beginning work. System shall be signed off by Owner/Engineer as fully functional prior to any new work. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The system shall constantly monitor all initiation devices and notification circuits for any abnormalities or alarm conditions. System shall sample/poll each addressable device no less than every 10 seconds. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 3 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddre ssableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 B. The system operation subsequent to the alarm activation by any initiating device (manual station, automatic detector, sensor, sprinkler flow switch, etc.) shall be as follows: 1. All audible alarm notification appliances within corresponding building or designated area shall provide a common audible fire alarm signal until the System Reset Key or the Signal Silence Key is depressed. 2. All visual alarm notification appliances shall flash continuously and synchronized until the system is reset or silenced. 3. The remote central monitoring station shall be notified automatically until the System Reset Key or the Signal Silence Key is depressed. 4. Shutdown of the corresponding HVAC system equipment shall occur with a supervisory alarm until the system is reset. All fans over 2000 cfm shall be shut down. 5. Activation of all programmed outputs assigned to the initiating device shall occur until the system is reset or the silence key is depressed. 6. The alarm shall be displayed at the local Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) and the fire alarm annunciator panel. A printout shall be produced at the FACP. 7. The system alarm LED shall flash on the control panel and the fire alarm annunciator panel until the alarm has been acknowledged/reset. Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm received shall flash the system alarm LED on the control panel and annunciator. The LCD display shall show the new alarm information. 8. A pulsing audible alarm tone shall occur within the local building control panel and, where applicable, the fire alarm annunciator panel until the event has been acknowledged. 9. Alarms shall be entered into the system event log history. C. Any subsequent alarm shall follow the operation described above. D. The activation by any system smoke detector or sensor shall initiate an alarm verification operation whereby the panel will reset the activated detector and wait for a second alarm activation. If, within a preset time after resetting, a second alarm is reported from the same or any other smoke detector, the system shall process the alarm as described previously. If no second alarm occurs within the prescribed time, the system shall resume normal operation. The alarm verification shall operate only on smoke detector alarms. Other activated initiating devices shall be processed immediately. The alarm verification operation shall be selectable by device. E. A manual evacuation (drill) switch shall be provided to operate the alarm notification appliances without causing other control circuits to be activated. However, should an actual alarm occur, all alarm functions shall occur as described previously. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 4 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-An alogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 F. The system shall have a password(s) to allow the operator to display all alarms, troubles, and supervisory service conditions log history including the time of each occurrence. This shall be able to be viewed from the front of the control panel, annunciator panel or from a computer connected to the FACP. G. The actuation of the " walk test" program at the control panel shall activate the "Walk Test" mode of the system which shall cause the following to occur: 1. The remote central monitoring station connection shall be bypassed. 2. Only audible and visual appliances shall be operated. Other alarm functions (elevator recall, HVAC shutdown, etc.) shall not be affected. 3. Walk test shall be selectable by circuit or circuits. 4. Actual alarms received during a "Walk Test" shall cause the control panel to go into alarm and override the walk test mode. 5. The control panel shall show trouble conditions. 6. The walk test activation of any initiation device shall cause the audible signals to activate for two seconds or a distinguishable audible. 7. The panel shall automatically reset itself after signaling is complete. 8. The control panel shall automatically return to normal condition if there is no activity on a walk test circuit for a period of 30 minutes. H. Any momentary opening of an initiating or notification appliance circuit wiring shall cause an audible signal to sound at the Fire Alarm Control Panel and, where applicable, the annunciator panel for four seconds indicating a trouble condition. I. Elevator Operation: 1. Provide the following equipment as a minimum and as indicated on the drawings: a. Smoke detection in the elevator equipment room. b. Smoke detection at each elevator lobby. c. Smoke detection in the elevator shaft if a smoke hatch. d. Heat detection in the equipment room and shaft (high and low) if a sprinkler system is in the area. Detectors shall be within 2' of the individual sprinkler heads. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 5 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\E LEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 e. Detection devices located in elevator lobbies, elevator hoistways and elevator machine rooms shall be used for elevator recall. Hoistway and equipment room heat detection shall initiate power shut down prior to water flow. Operation shall be in accordance with ASME A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. Signals shall be provided to the elevator controls for main level lobby alarm, any lobby alarm, elevator equipment room alarm and elevator hoistway alarm as a minimum. Provide addressable control modules for the signals to the elevator controls. J. Alarm initiation of a detector associated with a smoke hatch or fire barrier shall initiate a system alarm. Also, provide connections between the auxiliary contacts on the detectors or addressable control module and the associated smoke hatches and fire barriers such that the smoke hatch or fire barriers will be operated upon its respective detector activation. Provide power supplies, wiring and accessories for fire alarm system and all supervisory functions required for proper smoke hatch and fire barriers operation. K. Duct mounted smoke detectors associated with duct dampers shall have an addressable control module to operate the duct damper. In the event of an alarm initiation by the duct mounted smoke detector or the associated air handling unit/fan shut down the duct damper shall be closed. Control wiring shall be provided to shut the damper(s) when the associated air handling unit is not operational. Provide power supplies, wiring and accessories as needed for this operation. L. Provide wiring and equipment such that alarm initiation of a heat detector located in the elevator machine room and/or the elevator shaft shall provide suitable voltage from the fire alarm control panel to be applied to the shunt trip coil of the elevator's supply circuit breaker. No fire alarm devices except the heat detectors in the elevator machine rooms and shaft shall cause this. Also, alarm initiation of these heat detectors shall initiate the system alarm functions described above. Provide an addressable control module with a Form C contact at the elevator controllers, which shall be normally closed and shall open upon alarm initiation of any of these heat detectors; this contact shall be used to disconnect the battery-powered emergency return unit if so equipped with the use of a relay suitable for the emergency power circuit. Also, provide an auxiliary contact on the main line disconnect switch (four pole unit) and two (2) #12 in conduit to the elevator controller from this contact for the same purpose. M. Provide a minimum of two Form C contacts at the building's fire alarm control panel. This contact shall activate upon activation of any fire alarm initiating device. N. Provide connection to the fire pump controller and addressable initiation modules to monitor the following points as separate and distinctive trouble signals: 1. Pump running. 2. Phase reversal. 3. Switch not in automatic. 4. Trouble. 5. Power loss. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 6 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\ 210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 1.4 SUPERVISION A. The system shall utilize independently supervised initiation device circuits. The alarm activation of any initiation device shall not prevent the subsequent alarm operation of any other initiation device. B. Notification appliance circuits shall be supervised to indicate an open or short circuit condition. C. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure must be audible and visually indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. This shall be a trouble alarm. D. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection of the battery shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator. This shall be a trouble alarm. E. The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for maintenance or testing purposes. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Provide a complete system submittal prior to ordering of equipment and installation including but not limited to: 1. Complete equipment list. 2. Catalog descriptive literature for all equipment. This shall include a description of the unit, ratings, functions, capability, materials and compatibility with other components. 3. Riser Wiring Diagram showing all equipment, devices, device addresses, connections, control connections, remote notification connection(s), wire quantities and sizes. 4. Floor plan indicating equipment and device locations, addresses, power circuit information with power panel location, notification circuiting, initiation circuiting, control circuiting and any system applicable building characteristics (ceiling heights, structural members impeding detection, etc). Contact the Engineer for an electronic copy of the project floor plans. Engineer logo shall be included in final drawing. 5. Typical Terminal Wiring Diagram for each type of device. 6. Terminal wiring Diagram for all Fire Alarm equipment. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 7 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 7. Calculations including: a. Battery sizing calculations indicating total number of power devices, load associated with each type device, backup period and recommended battery capacity (AH). b. Voltage drop calculations with actual equipment loads used to derive battery back-up ampere-hour rating and individual circuit voltage drop (indicate the wire size to be used and the associated voltage drop with the allowed voltage drop) for each circuit. 8. Complete console enclosure and equipment configuration. B. If required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) provide a submission of all requested information for review and comment by the AHJ. All AHJ comments shall be incorporated and resubmitted until approved. C. Test reports at the completion of the project. Testing shall be of all system devices, equipment, circuits, features and functions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The project fire alarm system shall comply with and be in accordance with the drawings and specifications. All system equipment and materials shall be of the same manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. System and component acceptable manufacturers include the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. FCI E3 SYSTEM - GAMEWELL-FCI 2.2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. The fire alarm system shall be comprised of the components specified as a minimum and also include components not indicated but required for a complete and operable system as described herein. B. The system and all its components shall be UL listed and in accordance with NFPA 72, local and state codes. C. The system shall have 25 % spare capacity. This shall include all individual notification circuits, initiation circuits, initiating modules, alarm modules, power supplies, batteries, central processing unit memory and printed circuit card space. System initiation device and control device capacity shall be a minimum of the indicated percentage over the shown quantity or 250 whichever is greater. D. Each initiating device shall have an individual address for system communication. The system addresses shall not exceed seven digits. Each address, initiation circuit, notification circuit and control point shall have an individual identification description. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 8 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 2.3 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP) A. The system shall be entirely solid state, microprocessor based, use digital transmission and shall be field programmable. All system programming including field modifications shall be stored in non-volatile memory. Field modifications shall be automatically stored without special actions. The panel shall be designed and manufactured expressly for the intent to detect the presence of fire and to provide indication of such detection. Panel shall contain as a minimum power supply(s), control module, main control printed circuit board, initiation modules, notification modules, terminals and back up battery(s). Control module shall have 80 character backlit LCD display and twelve control buttons (four being field assignable), minimum. Display shall indicate the battery voltage at all times. B. The system shall be modular in design to allow for future expansion with a minimum of hardware additions. C. The FACP shall be located where shown on the drawings. Enclosures shall accept all system items for an aesthetically suitable operator's console. Enclosures shall be of modular size to allow surface mounting of multiple boxes adjacent to each other, shall have hinged solid metal doors and contain a lock with a key common to all system devices. Enclosure shall have a red finish. D. The FACP shall operate its integral LCD Display through an RS-232C port operating up to 9600 baud to indicate all operator transactions, alarms, trouble reports and any other conditions specified by system programming. E. Conditions of the system shall be indicated at the operator interface by LED's. These conditions shall be alarm, supervisory, trouble and alarm silenced. An LCD 2 line, 40 character per line display shall also be included. It shall display "SYSTEM IS NORMAL" with the date and time under normal circumstances. The LCD display shall also indicate type of alarm, point status, number of alarms and location. Through the use of function keys, historical data can also be displayed. F. The FACP shall include a password (three levels of protection with individual passwords, minimum) protected key pad for access to programming, special functions and all system features. G. Any event initiated by the FACP due to an alarm input shall be retained in nonvolatile EPROM memory. The FACP shall also have sufficient memory for 1200 individual alarm/trouble events. H. The FACP shall have the following user connection types: 1. Ethernet connection for a computer, personal data device or printer. Connection shall allow for programming changes, history download, setting review/changes, etc. 2. RS 232 port for connection of a serial printer. I. Provide modules for network interfacing and connection to graphic annunciator. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 9 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\E LEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 J. The FACP shall be equipped with a minimum of 60 hours of battery standby. The FACP shall be equipped with battery charging circuits sufficient to recharge fully depleted batteries to within 70% of the maximum capacity within 12 hours. When the system is operating on the battery supply, a trouble condition shall be generated. When utility power is restored, the system shall revert back to 120 VAC supply without any operator intervention. K. Design Equipment: Siemens. 2.4 REMOTE TRANSPONDER UNIT (RTU) A. The RTU shall function as a subpanel to the FACP, and shall have all the initiation, notification, control, battery, display functions, etc as the FACP. In the event of failure of the FACP the RTU shall continue to function as a standalone system. All remote notification shall be through the FACP. Provide power circuits to the RTU similar to the FACP. The spare capacity indicated for the FACP shall also be provided in the RTU's. All trouble and alarm conditions at the RTU shall be transmitted to the FACP for suitable operation. B. RTU's shall contain their own processors and memory and function independently of the FACP but utilize the same base programming. Programming functions in the RTU shall be accessible through the FACP and RTU. C. The RTU shall be capable of communication with addressable devices that are uniquely identified by an address. Wiring shall be shielded twisted pair cable. The system must allow up to 2,500 feet wire length to the furthest addressable device. T-tapping of the communications channel or multiple loop channels shall be supported. D. Enclosures shall be of modular size to allow [flush] [surface] mounting of multiple boxes adjacent to each other, shall have hinged solid metal doors and contain a lock with a key common to all system devices. E. The FACP shall communicate with RTU's through dual supervised data lines. Data lines shall be standard #18 AWG twisted shielded pair minimum or as recommended by the manufacturer. In normal operation, each line shall be used alternately on intervals to maintain line integrity. Should either data line fail, system shall automatically revert to alternate data line and data line trouble shall be reported to operator. The FACP shall automatically "re-boot" after data line is restored. Minimum allowable distance between the FACP and RTU shall be 2500'. F. Design Make: To match FACP. 2.5 EMERGENCY TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM A. Provide a complete emergency telephone communications system. B. The Emergency Communications Control Panel (ECCP) shall be alerted to incoming calls from any remote emergency telephone station by individual line flashing lamps for each station and a common audible signal. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 10 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 When the attendant picks up the master handset located in the ECCP, the audible signal shall be silenced, but each line lamp shall continue to flash until the call is answered by placing individual switches in the talk position. The line lamp for the answered call shall remain constantly illuminated until the attendant terminates the call. The attendant shall be able to communicate privately with an individual station or simultaneously with several stations as required by placing the individual line switches in the talk position. C. The master telephone shall be a handset with transmitter and receiver. Provide permanent flexible cord attachment long enough for the handset to reach the floor and cradle in the ECCP. D. Remote Emergency Telephone Stations shall be located in elevators, elevator lobbies, areas of refuge, stair towers, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, generator rooms and as shown on the drawings. The remote telephone circuits shall be electrically supervised and individually zoned. Removing a Remote Emergency Telephone Station receiver from its cradle shall cause an audible tone to sound within the telephone indicating that the telephone is in operational condition. The tone shall remain until the call is answered. Remote Emergency Telephone Stations shall be a handset with transmitter and receiver. Provide permanent flexible cord attachment long enough for the handset to reach the floor. Remote Emergency Telephone Stations shall be mounted in a recessed back box. Coverplate shall be stainless steel with "Fire Fighters' Telephone" engraving. Tamperproof lock shall be provided in coverplate. E. All wiring of the Emergency Telephone Communication System shall be supervised. Open or short circuits shall report to the ECCP as trouble condition. F. In the event of normal power failure, the entire telephone communications system shall automatically transfer to standby power source. Provide separate and dedicated power circuit(s) for the ECCP. G. The ECCP shall be installed near the FACP H. Design Equipment: Siemens. 2.6 AUDIO EVACUATION SYSTEM A. Notification speakers shall be located as shown on the drawings and shall be electrically supervised, and zoned as shown on the drawings. Minimum zoning shall be by floor. Provide zone selector switches, individual zone lamps, trouble lamp and test switch at the Emergency Communications Control Panel (ECCP). All-call capability shall be provided by operation of a single switch. Master microphone shall be located in the ECCP and shall have integral "press-talk" announcement. Signals shall automatically sound again upon lifting of "press-to-talk" switch at the end of the announcement. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 11 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 B. Provide an audible amplifier unit and locate within the ECCP. All components shall be solid state. Preamplifier shall contain microphone input and necessary tone and volume controls. Power amplifier shall be rated 500 watts minimum for suitable power rating for the indicated system, locations and ambient sound level while having the system spare capacity factor indicated and have a frequency response of 125-12,000 Hz. System shall provide intelligible voice communication throughout the project. C. Speakers shall be flush mounted, 4 in. size, 8 ohms impedance, 11 watts rating. Provide integral matching transformer for 70 volt line and with 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.0 and 2 watt taps. Speakers shall have a steel housing, water-sealed compression driver, and baked epoxy finish. Color shall be white. Provide bi-directional or weatherproof mounting where shown on drawings. D. In the event of 120 VAC power failure, the entire audio evacuation system shall automatically transfer to the system standby power source. E. Design Equipment: Simplex. 2.7 VENTILATION FAN SHUTDOWN CONTROL A. Provide supervised normally closed relays and contactors for connection into the fan motor control circuits ahead of all automatic devices. B. Sequence fan shutdown for every air distribution system. Provide duct detectors in return of systems over 2,000 cfm and in both supply and return at each floor of systems over 15,000 cfm. C. Provide drill bypass feature, locate switch on Fire Alarm Control Panel and label "DRILL-FAN SHUTDOWN BYPASS". Buzzer shall sound continuously while in bypass mode. D. Provide fan reset feature, locate switch on Fire Alarm Control Panel and label "FAN RESET". 2.8 INITIATION DEVICES A. General: 1. Provide analog addressable smoke and thermal sensors as shown. All detectors, control modules, monitor modules and all other initiation devices shall communicate with twisted pair cable and have an individual address. Peripheral devices shall be of the some manufacturer as the FACP. 2. Spot type detectors shall utilize the same interchangeable bases. 3. If a device is removed or taken out of service a trouble signal shall be initiated. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 12 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 B. Photo-Obscuration Type Smoke Detector: 1. The photo-obscuration detector shall operate on the photo electronic principle and provide an analog signal to the system indicating the amount of smoke. Detector shall be an analog addressable type. 2. The detector shall incorporate a built in type identification so the system can identify the type of detector. The sensor shall be continually monitored to measure any change in their sensitivity because of the environment (dirt, smoke, temperature, humidity, etc.). Unit shall not be affected by exterior light or EMF. 3. The detector shall be designed and arranged to prevent interference from exterior electromagnetic fields and light. 4. The detector shall provide advance indication of the analog value of the products of combustion to the FACP indicating that maintenance is required in order to insure normal operation. The detector sensitivity shall be adjustable per device (within UL limits) and be set at the FACP for continuous or variable based on time of day. There shall be a minimum of six selectable sensitivity levels. The individual detector sensitivity setting shall be adjusted to meet the building/space characteristics and operation. 5. Detectors shall be designed for twistlock mounting to a separate base assembly. Provide manufacturer's recommended back box suitable for surface mounting where required. 6. The detector base shall have terminals for making all connections; no soldering shall be required. It shall be possible to secure the detector to the base with a concealed socket headscrew to prevent unauthorized tampering. 7. Smoke detectors shall be UL 268 listed and FM approved. 8. All smoke detectors shall be field checked and set to meet the prevailing conditions of the premise and any Owner requests. All such work shall be performed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer trained in such procedures. 9. Photo-obscuration type smoke detection shall be used for smoke detection unless indicated otherwise indicated. C. Ionization Type Smoke Detector: 1. The ionization detector shall operate on the "ionization" principle and shall send an analog signal to the FACP and have a distinct system address. 2. The detector shall incorporate a built in type identification so the system can identify the type of sensor. The unit shall be continually monitored to measure any change in their sensitivity because of the environment (dirt, smoke, temperature, humidity, etc.). CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 13 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\21 0018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 3. It shall provide advance indication of the analog value of the products of combustion to the control panel indicating that maintenance is required in order to insure normal operation. The unit sensitivity shall be adjustable per device (within UL limits) from the FACP. 4. Detector shall be designed for twistlock mounting to a separate base assembly. Provide back box suitable for surface mounting where required. 5. The base shall have terminals for making all connections; no soldering shall be required. It shall be possible to secure the detector to the base with a concealed socket headscrew to prevent unauthorized tampering. 6. Shall be UL 268 listed and FM approved. 7. All smoke detectors shall be field checked and set to meet the prevailing conditions of the premise and any Owner requests. All such Work shall be performed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer trained in such procedures. There shall be a minimum of three sensitivity levels selectable by unit at the FACP. 8. Ionization type smoke detectors shall be utilized where indicated and in electric rooms and elevator rooms. D. Projected Beam Photo Electric Smoke Detectors: 1. Microprocessor based beam type smoke detector consisting of a single transmitter and receiver unit with a reflective unit separate transmitter and receiver units. Units shall have individual system addresses and provide an analog signal based on the beam obscuration. Unit shall have a sensing range suitable for the intended location with capability up to 60' x 320' of detection area. Where an analog signal is not available provide an addressable initiation module for system interface. 2. Transmitter shall produce a crystal controlled infrared beam. 3. Shall have an adjustable time delay (up to 30 seconds) for momentary beam blockage. Alarm sensitivity shall be adjustable from 20 to 60%. 4. Shall initiate trouble alarm when dust obscures beam by 50%. Unit shall compensate for a gradual buildup of dust. 5. Installation with convenient beam alignment adjustments. 6. Provide with manufacturer surface mounting backbox for surface mounted locations. 7. Housing color to match the surrounding colors. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 14 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\2 1-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 8. Operating voltage 18-32 VDC. Provide a 24 VDC power circuit from the FACP. Connect unit to the system addressable circuit. 9. Provide with remote indicator and testing station for each unit. Station shall indicate system condition (alarm, normal, trouble), have the ability to remotely test the system and have time delay/sensitivity adjustments. Mount station in local utility space and label for the specific unit. 10. Acceptable Manufacturer a. System manufacturer. b. Another manufacturer listed with the system and meeting these specifications. E. Heat Detector: 1. The heat detector shall be a thermal sensor and shall constantly monitor the space temperature and constantly report this to the system. The unit shall be analog addressable. 2. The sensor shall use dual solid state thermistors and shall monitor the ambient temperature from 32 degrees F, to 155 degrees F and provide a fast response to rapid increase in temperature. The sensor shall send data to the FACP representing the analog value of the ambient temperature. The FACP shall be suitable to monitor for set temperature (selectable by detector for 135 or 155 degrees F) and rate of rise (selectable by detector for 15 or 20 degrees F per minute). Individual detector thermal settings shall be adjusted for the building/space characteristics and operation but shall initially be set to 135 degrees F set temperature and 15 degrees F per minute rate of rise. 3. Detectors shall be designed for twistlock mounting to a separate base assembly. Provide back box suitable for surface mounting where required. 4. The detector base shall have terminals for making all connections; no soldering shall be required. It shall be possible to secure the detector in the base with a concealed socket headscrew to prevent unauthorized tampering. 5. Smoke detectors shall be UL 268 listed and FM approved. 6. All thermal sensors shall be field checked and set to meet the prevailing conditions of the premise. All such work shall be performed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer trained in such procedures. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 15 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 F. Combination Smoke And Heat Detector: 1. Single detector shall have both heat and smoke sensing capability as described in the photoelectric smoke detector and heat detector paragraphs above. Unit shall provide two individual analog sensing levels to the FACP including one for smoke and one for heat. 2. Detector shall utilize the same base unit as the smoke and heat detectors. G. Addressable Initiation Module: 1. The addressable initiation module shall be used to connect supervised conventional initiating device or zone of supervised conventional initiating devices (water flow switches, tamper switches, manual pull stations, (4) wire smoke detectors, conventional (4) wire duct detectors, fire pump alarms, dry chemical fire extinguisher control panels, etc.) to one of the system's addressable circuits. 2. The module shall provide address setting means using rotary decimal switches and also store an internal identifying code which the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. 3. The module shall contain an integral LED that flashes each time the unit is polled. H. Manual Pull Stations: 1. Noncoded pull-down type, double action (push then pull down) manual addressable units with keyed test/reset. Units shall be semi-flush where installed in construction with hollow or block walls. Where construction does not allow semi-flush mounting then unit shall be surface mounted utilizing the manufacturers back box. Each unit shall have a distinct address. Units shall be key reset. 2. Units installed outdoors or in potentially wet locations shall be rated for such conditions. 3. Bright red finish with white lettering "FIRE ALARM". I. Duct-Type Smoke Detector: 1. Detector shall be a photoelectric type that shall be activated by the presence of combustion products. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 16 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 2. The detector head shall be a plug-in unit. The unit shall contain no moving parts. One chamber shall be for fire detection and the second chamber shall function as a reference, to stabilize the detector for changes in environmental temperature, humidity and pressure. It shall be possible to electrically check detectors sensitivity, using a sensitivity test set, or equivalent, and readjust the detectors sensitivity as required. 3. The detector base shall have terminals for making all connections; no soldering shall be required. It shall be possible to secure the detector in the base with a concealed socket-head screw to prevent unauthorized tampering. 4. Smoke detectors shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. and approved by Factory Mutual Insurance Company. 5. Provide complete with sampling tubes. Size sampling tubes for 80% of the width of the duct. Locate in ductwork for the indicated system and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Provide auxiliary contacts and separate 24 VDC power to relay required for smoke damper operation. 7. Provide a remote indicating light/key test switch for each duct detector and mount [directly below each duct detector on the underside of the ceiling where the detector is concealed] [in a local utility room with a sign indicating the system and location of the duct detector (ie. AHU-2, Second Floor East End)]. 8. Provide addressable base. 2.9 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Bells: 1. 24 volts DC. 2. 10 in. diameter, bell shall be rated 90 dB at 10 ft. 3. Vibrating under-dome type. 4. Surface mounted on wall. 5. Install in backbox, approximately 14 in. sq. with 4 in. maximum depth. Provide grilled for backboxes. Paint bell and inside of box with matte black paint. B. Horns: 1. 24 volts DC. 2. Basic grille type with powder coated red finish paint. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 17 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarm System.doc 6/7/2021 3. Horn shall be rated 94 dBA (anechoic chamer) at 10 feet. Output shall be selectable steady tone or coded. Provide dampening devices to reduce unit output by 5dBA for a minimum of 40% of the system horn units and install as needed to meet the Owners needs. 4. Units shall be semi-flush where installed in construction with hollow or block walls. Where construction does not allow semi-flush mounting then unit shall be surface mounted utilizing the manufacturers back box. 5. Units installed outdoors or in potentially wet locations shall be rated for such conditions. 6. Provide directional projector where noted on the Drawings. 7. Provide backbox and grille for fully recessed installations; 4 in. deep box maximum. C. Strobe Unit: 1. 24 volts DC with built-in Xenon Flasher; two watts maximum. Pulse duration shall be 0.2 seconds with maximum duty cycle of 40%. Illumination intensity shall be field selectable for 15, 30, 75 or 110 candela. Output setting shall be 15 candela in corridors, 75 candela in general areas, 110 candela in sleeping areas or as indicated. Flash rate minimum 1 Hz, maximum 2 Hz. Units within building shall flash in synchronization. 2. Protruding pyramid shaped lexan lens with reflector and the word "FIRE" imprinted on the lens. 3. Rated life shall be a minimum of 500 hours of continuous operation. 4. Units installed outdoors or in potentially wet locations shall be rated for such conditions. 5. Units shall be semi-flush where installed in construction with hollow or block walls. Where construction does not allow semi-flush mounting then unit shall be surface mounted utilizing the manufacturers back box. Wall or ceiling mounted as noted on the Drawings. 6. Provide surface backbox for surface installation; 4 in. deep maximum. D. Combination Horn-Strobe Units: 1. Unit shall be a combination of the horn and strobe units specified above in a single manufactured unit. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 18 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.do c 6/7/2021 E. Addressable Notification Appliances: 1. Notification appliances specified herein shall be addressable and individually programmed for use as dictated by the Owner. Notification shall be programmed by floor, office space, common space, specialty use space and others as directed. Appliances shall only annunciate upon the directed conditions and order. 2.10 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE A. The addressable control module shall have an individual system address, be supervised and control an output dry contact from indication from the FACP. This can be used to control or have an input to elevator controls, notification appliances, door holder circuits, fans systems, etc. as indicated. Modules shall be connected to the addressable loop(s). B. The unit shall control an output relay (dry contact form C). The module shall mount in a 4 in. square, 2-1/8 in. deep electrical box. C. The module shall contain an integral LED that shall flash each time the module is polled. D. The module shall provide address setting means using rotary decimal switches and also store an internal identifying code which the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. Each unit shall have a separate address and be connected to the system addressable signaling circuit. 2.11 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR A. Wall mount within a flush box. Maximum depth of 4 in., stainless steel trim. Nominal dimensions of 4" x 12". B. Annunciation shall be by two line by 40 character LCD display to provide system information and alarm/trouble description. C. Unit power and control shall be from the FACP. Unit circuiting shall be supervised. D. Provide trouble signal with audible buzzer, silencing switch and system reset. All pushbuttons shall be inoperable without keyswitch activated. Pushbuttons for alarm acknowledge, silence and alarm reset shall be standard on the front with a description. Shall include a minimum of four auxiliary switches/pushbuttons to be programmed as coordinated with the owner (possible options are door holder release override, manual alarm initiation, elevator capture bypass, etc.). E. Tamper-resistant front panel screws. F. Provide a 12 in. x 18 in. framed directory showing the building outline of each floor and referencing device descriptions. All lettering shall be minimum 1/2 in. high. Mount next to remote annunciator. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 19 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\21001 8-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 2.12 GRAPHIC ANNUNCIATOR PANEL A. Provide a complete electrically supervised flush mounted type directory and graphic annunciator to display the location of each initiation device as described herein and shown on the Drawings. B. The graphic display and directory shall be 12 in. high by 18 in. wide and shall be designed for flush mounting on both the front display section and the back control and access section. C. The graphic display shall consist of backbox, support brackets, terminal strips, and LEDs. Each initiation device shall have a separate indicating LED. D. Provide a 1/4 in. thick plexiglass graphic floor plan on each level, silk screened in a minimum of three colors with 1/8 in. thick plexiglass cover panel. E. Acceptance of products to be used will be considered only when the following requirements have been met: 1. A complete full size construction drawing of the annunciator is submitted to the Owner's Representative. 2. Written acceptance is received from the Owner's Representative prior to actual construction of the graphic panel. 2.13 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS A. Rated 115 volts AC. B. Holders shall be wall or floor mounted adjacent to the doors as dictated by the building conditions. Floor mounted units shall only be used where wall mounted are not possible. C. Door holders shall be aluminum construction, have 25 pound holding force and shall have all necessary mounting hardware. Provide door plate for each and extender chain (chromed and 1" links) where needed. D. At each door holder location (or pair of door holders where two doors occupy the same opening), provide a flush mounted keyswitch to disable or enable the door holders. (Keyswitches not indicated on drawings). The keyswitch shall be maintained contact, with key removable in the vertical position. Keyswitch shall be tamper resistant, factory prewired brushed stainless steel finish. Provide all wiring to connect to local door holders. Make: Dyna Lock 70001 or equivalent. 2.14 AUTOMATIC DIALER A. Provide automatic tie to telephone line upon activation of the fire alarm system and transmission of prerecorded message. Provide two telephone lines from the building service individually routed to the FACP and terminated. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 20 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 B. Ten minute digitally stored message capacity. C. Provide automatic line seizure. D. Provide automatic telephone dialing to a prearranged telephone line. System shall have standard pre-recorded message stored in the memory. Record and store custom message as indicated by the Owner or call station. 2.15 DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR A. The digital fire communicator shall be installed in the FACP or mounted in a separate enclosure. The communicator shall be powered by 24 VDC from the FACP and shall report four (4) conditions - (2) alarm, (1) trouble and (1) supervisory. The unit shall have a built in auxiliary relay output which is programmable for alarm or trouble conditions, and shall be capable of sending a distinctive AC power failure report. B. Install all wiring in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All wiring shall be completely tested as directed by the manufacturer, and a written test report submitted to them for approval. Their approval shall be obtained before connecting any devices. The system manufacturer, by their approval of the test report, shall assume all responsibility for all installed wiring. C. The communicator shall have the following features: visual and audible trouble indications; supervised or unsupervised input channels, dual phone line interface with line seizure; local and remote programming and automatic 24-hour test. D. The communicator shall be UL 864 listed and meet the requirements of NFPA 82 Chapter 4 for supervising station fire alarm systems. 2.16 CENTRAL STATION MONITORING A. Make all arrangements for, and pay all costs for a UL listed central station monitoring service to monitor the fire alarm system via the digital communicator for a period of one year. 2.17 BATTERY AND CHARGER A. Standby power shall be provided through 24 volt DC battery and automatic charger. B. Provide sealed lead-calcium batteries, ampere-hour capacity which will allow system to operate 24 hours under supervisory condition and at the end of this period to operate all alarm signals for five 15 consecutive minutes. C. Provide cell reversal protection. D. Life expectancy shall be ten years minimum. E. Charger shall be self-regulating, solid state, type, automatic with capability to fully charge the discharged battery within five hours. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 21 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 F. Locate charger within the FACP enclosure. Locate batteries in a separate vented enclosure directly adjacent to the FACP. 2.18 SMOKE CONTROL SYSTEM A. Provide a UL 864 listed smoke control system. The system shall provide automatic operation of smoke exhaust fans, makeup air fans, air handling units, and dampers in accordance with the smoke control sequence indicated on the drawings. The smoke control system main controls shall be located in the building fire command center. B. Provide addressable control modules within three feet of each smoke exhaust fan controller, makeup air fan controllers, air handling unit controller, and damper controlled by the smoke control system. Wire these for control of the individual units. C. Provide addressable initiation modules to monitor status/operation of each smoke exhaust fan, makeup air fan, air handling unit, and damper controlled by the smoke control system. D. Enclosure: Finish to match Fire Alarm Control Units. The locking cover/display assembly to be hinged. Key and lock shall be common to all secured fire alarm system enclosures. E. System Graphic Annunciator/Control 1. Annunciator Unit: Provide an LED-indicating light located on the graphic annunciator to indicate the status for all smoke control equipment. For systems with two or more Smoke Control System Graphic Annunciators, each Annunciator shall be programmable to allow multiple Annunciators to have equal operation priority or to allow hierarchal priority control to be assigned to individual Annunciators (locations). 2. Fans, dampers, and other operating equipment in normal status shall be indicated by a green LED. Fans, dampers, and other operating equipment in off or closed status shall be indicated by a red LED. Fans, dampers, and other operating equipment in fault status shall be indicated by a yellow LED. The annunciator shall graphically depict the building arrangement and smoke control system zones. Fans, major ducts, dampers, and airflow direction shall be indicated. 3. Provide HOA switches labeled "ON-AUTO-OFF" on the annunciator to permit fire-fighters manual control of each individual smoke control fan or air handling unit. HOA switches labeled "OPEN-AUTO-CLOSE" shall be provided on the annunciator for each individual smoke control damper. 4. Provide a toggle or push-button switch to test the LEDs mounted on the unit. The test switch does not require key operation. 5. Provide a HOA switch labeled "OPEN-AUTO-LOCK" on the annunciator for each stairway to permit fire-fighters manual control of stairway door locks in accordance with local codes. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 22 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 6. In the normal switch position, the fans, air handling units, or dampers operate automatically as controlled by the building automation/temperature control system. Automatic controls can be overridden with the HOA switches provided on the graphic annunciator. The operation of the HOA switches shall permit manual control and override of any conflicting signal from the building automation/temperature control system or any other system. 7. Enclosure: finish to match Fire Alarm Control Units. The locking cover/display assembly is hinged on the left. Key and lock shall be common to all secured fire alarm system enclosures. 2.19 WIRE GUARDS A. Where specified herein or shown on the drawings provided a suitable wire guard for protection of indicated devices/equipment. Units shall be custom as needed for the application. B. Wire guard shall be a minimum #6 wire gage of zinc plated steel, overall clear coating and welded at joints. For any unit needing access it shall have an integral hinge and locking means. C. As a minimum provide a wire guard for equipment where indicated and in gymnasiums. D. Wires shall have 2 inch maximum spacing. E. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Design Make: American Time and Signal. 2. Simplex 3. Approved equal. 2.20 PULL STATION ALARM COVER A. Provide a protective alarm cover over manual pull stations where indicated. Unit shall allow easy access to the manual pull station and also provide an audible alarm when operated. B. Unit shall provide a 95dB alarm at 1 foot and be powered from a 9VDC battery. C. Unit shall be suitable for use in the intended location and pull station. D. Acceptable manufacturer: 1. System manufacturer. 2. STI Stopper II CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 23 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Proje cts\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, EQUIPMENT A. All installations shall be accomplished in a professional manner by qualified personnel regularly engaged in and experienced in this type of Work. Fire alarm installation shall be directed by a person who possesses a state license for installation of fire alarm systems. All equipment and components shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. System junction boxes and surface mounted device boxes shall be painted red. C. Provide all wiring to sprinkler flow switches, pressure switches, and alarm check valves, installed by others. Maintain supervisory circuitry to the switches. Use liquidtight conduit for the last 2 ft. - 0 in. of raceway at the switch. D. Provide all wiring to post indicator valves, OS&Y valves and dry pipe sprinkler system maintenance air pressure switches, provided by others. Wire into the supervisory alarm portion of the fire alarm system. E. Provide all wiring to the smoke dampers installed by others. Provide an addressable control module for each. Wire to the damper junction box with flexible conduit and wire; provide box or boxes as required. Install according to NEC. Smoke dampers shall close when its associated smoke duct detector is in alarm, upon direction from the FACP or if the associated fan unit is not operating. F. Provide all power supplies and wiring to smoke relief hatches and fire barriers] provided by others. Smoke relief hatch or fire barrier shall operate only when its associated smoke detector is in alarm. G. Provide all wiring to duct smoke detectors. Duct smoke detectors shall be mounted on the ventilating ductwork by others. All mounting arrangements, holes cut into ductwork, sealing of openings along with ceiling and access doors for the duct type detectors shall be provided by others. Provide duct detectors along with sampling tubes with end caps. Sequence smoke damper operation thirty seconds after its associated fan has been shut down. H. Provide all wiring required for fan shutdown. Wire from the addressable control module for each fan to be shut down and provide wiring from the module to the fan control unit (starter, adjustable speed drive, etc). Dry contact shall be wired ahead of all control functions for starters. Provide intermediate relay for control circuits beyond the rating of the control module. I. Install all door holders in accordance with installation detail on the drawings and coordinate with the General Construction trade. A maximum of fifty door holders shall be wired to each power circuit. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 24 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.do c 6/7/2021 J. Provide 120 volt AC supervisory relays in the Fire Alarm Control Panel enclosure for each magnetic door holder power circuit to insure their associated circuit breakers are in the "ON" position. In the event a circuit breaker is in the "OFF" position, its associated supervisory relay shall transmit a trouble signal. K. Provide all elevator capture control wiring. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Pay all costs to modify existing elevator controllers for elevator capture and alternate level capture. L. Elevator machine room and shaft heat detectors shall be mounted within two feet of the sprinkler head where applicable. M. Detection and initiating equipment shall be listed by NRTL and approved by FM. N. All surface mounted devices shall be mounted on a special box furnished by fire alarm equipment manufacturer. Total assembly shall be secure, smooth contour and have no protrusions. O. Where detectors are installed on wood or masonry surfaces, attach brackets directly to the surface with tamperproof fasteners. Where detectors are installed on suspended ceilings, provide additional supports in the ceiling, such as channel support system, angle iron or additional runner bars. Fasten the additional supports rigidly to the ceiling runner bar system. Attach bracket to the supports with tamperproof fasteners. Install metal spacers between the bracket and supports so that the ceiling tiles will not be a part of the support system. P. Install wall mounted audio/visual signal devices at 80 in. AFF to bottom of lens. Where ceiling types are called for, verify ceiling type and mounting height in the field. Provide pendant-mounted devices as required for specified mounting height. Q. An auxiliary fire alarm relay used to control an emergency control device that provides control functions described in this specification shall be located within 3 ft. of the emergency control device and all wiring shall be supervised. R. All smoke detectors shall be field checked and set to meet the prevailing conditions of the premise. All such Work shall be performed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer trained in such procedures. 3.2 SYSTEM CIRCUITING A. All wiring shall conform to the NEC, and to NFPA-72, National Fire Alarm Code. B. Install all wiring in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations taking into account loading, intended location, circuit length, spare capacity and voltage drop. C. All wiring shall be copper and installed in a dedicated/segregated EMT conduit system. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 25 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000 \210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 D. Power circuits: 1. Provide the required quantity of 20 ampere, 120 volt circuits to the system with a minimum of one for the FACP. E. Provide minimum #18 AWG twisted shielded pair for addressable signal line circuits. Notification appliance circuits shall be#14AWG minimum. F. Provide minimum #18 AWG twisted pair for speakers and telephones. Speaker ircuits shall be shielded. G. Addressable signal line circuits shall be NFPA 72 2010 Class A (redundant, single open operation). H. Notification appliance circuits shall be NFPA 72 - 2010 Class A (redundant, single open operation). I. Provide a 24VDC power circuit, #16 twisted pair minimum, with each initiation addressable circuit for the entire length. J. Notification circuits shall be segregated as indicated on the drawings and by individual floors as a minimum. Circuits shall also be dedicated to audible or visual appliances but not both. 3.3 PROGRAMMING A. Include in bid the cost to cover all system programming, including items particular to this project (such as custom zone descriptions, time delay settings, sensitivity settings, etc.) such that entire system is 100% complete and operating to the Owner's satisfaction. Coordinate all system programming with the Owner and Cornell Design Standard 16721, Section 1.06A. Also, provide programming of the system a minimum of once during the warranty period to provide changes requested by the Owner. 3.4 SPARE EQUIPMENT A. Provide the following spare equipment to the Owner. Deliver the equipment to the Owner designated location on the project site in original packaging. B. Equipment to include: 1. Smoke detectors: 5% of each type used with a minimum of five. 2. Heat detectors: 5% of each type used with a minimum of five. 3. Addressable control modules: 2% of each type used with a minimum of two. CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 26 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21-0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 3.5 TESTING AND INSTRUCTION A. The complete fire alarm system shall be fully tested after the installation is complete. Testing shall include all devices, FACP, annunciator panel, other panels, features and functions. Testing shall be witnessed by the owners representative (Cornell EH&S and IFD) and be in accordance with the NFPA and herein. Provide a testing report to the authority having jurisdiction and the Engineer as a submittal. B. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of instruction to the operating personnel designated by the Owner's Representative with regard to use and operation of the system. Provide up to three programming modifications. C. Provide three sets of keys to all panels, manual stations, etc., to the Owner's Representative. D. Provide a copy of the system programming to the Owner on a CD/DVD disk or flash drive. E. Provide to the Owner system Operation Manuals as specified that shall include as a minimum. 1. Bill of Material. 2. Catalog descriptive literature for all equipment. This shall include a description of the unit, ratings, functions, capability, materials and compatibility with other components. 3. Riser Wiring Diagram showing all equipment, devices, device addresses, connections, control connections, remote notification connection(s), wire quantities and sizes. 4. Floor plan indicating equipment and device locations, addresses, power circuit information with power panel location, notification circuiting, initiation circuiting and control circuiting. Contact the Engineer for a copy of the project floor plans. 5. Typical Terminal Wiring Diagram for each type of device. 6. Terminal wiring Diagram for all Fire Alarm equipment. 7. Calculations including: a. Battery sizing calculations indicating total number of power devices, load associated with each type device and recommended battery capacity (AH). CORNELL UNIVERSITY 28 31 02 - 27 Upson Hall 466 Lab Renovation ANALOG ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS M/E ENGINEERING, P.C. Project No. 20625.03 / 210018 \\rocfile2\Roch_Projects\2021\21- 0000\210018\Design\Specs\ELEC\210018-283102-AnalogAddressableFireAlarmSystem.doc 6/7/2021 b. Voltage drop calculations with actual equipment loads used to derive battery back-up ampere-hour rating and individual circuit voltage drop (indicate the wire size to be used and the associated voltage drop with the allowed voltage drop) for each circuit. 8. Instruction report starting when instruction was given and who was in attendance, signed by Owner's Representative. 9. A written test report from an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer that each device and overall system operation has been 100% tested and approved. 10. Certificate of Completion as described in NFPA-72. 11. A five year warranty in accordance with the Basic Requirements of these Specifications shall be provided for this system. END OF SECTION 28 31 02 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK